IP Help Manual V35

Interactive Petrophysics
Users Manual
Version 3.5
2008
Senergy Ltd.
Ternan House
North Deeside Road
Banchory
Kincardineshire AB31 5YR
Scotland
Interactive Petrophysics V3.5

Interactive Petrophysics 2008.... Senergy/PGL
DISCLAIMER REGARDING THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE INTERACTIVE

PETROPHYSICS V3.5
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IS AT

YOUR SOLE RISK. BY DOWNLOADING/INSTALLING AND/OR USING THIS SOFTWARE
YOU ARE CONSIDERED TO HAVE READ THIS DISCLAIMER AND AGREED TO ITS TERMS.
THIS SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING FILES ARE SUPPLIED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT
WARRANTIES AS TO PERFORMANCE OR MERCHANTABILITY OR ANY OTHER
WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE IS WITH THE END USER. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SELLER OR ITS AGENTS
OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
ANY LIABILITY OF THE SELLER OR ITS AGENTS OR RESELLERS WILL BE LIMITED

EXCLUSIVELY TO PRODUCT REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF PURCHASE PRICE.
No part of this product may be reproduced, transmitted or translated by any means - graphical,
electronic, or mechanical - including photocopying, recording, taping or storage in an information
retrieval system, without the expressed written permission of Senergy Ltd. Further copies of this
document are available from Senergy Ltd on request.
Although every care has been taken to ensure that the information in this software and
associated documentation is accurate and up to date, software is, by its very nature, complex
and changeable. Senergy Ltd and its agents or resellers therefore cannot be held responsible
for any error or omission in this software and the associated documentation. The information in
this software and the associated documentation is subject to change without notice.
Senergy Contents I
Table of Contents
Foreword 0
Section 1 Introduction 2
Section 2 Disclaimer of Warranty 5
Section 3 What's New in IP Version 3.5 7
Section 4 Getting Help and Program

Updates 13
Section 5 PC System Requirements 21
Section 6 User Interface and Data Entry 24
Section 7 Database Interface 40

1 New Database
................................................................................................................................... 46
2 Open Database
................................................................................................................................... 47
3 Set Default
...................................................................................................................................
File Location 49
4 Explore Database
...................................................................................................................................
Folder 51
5 File - Save
...................................................................................................................................
Current Well As... 53
6 Save All Wells
...................................................................................................................................
to Database 57
7 Auto Save
................................................................................................................................... 59
8 Printer Setup
................................................................................................................................... 60
Section 8 Database Security 62

1 Well Security
................................................................................................................................... 63
Section 9 Well Management 74

1 Load Wells
...................................................................................................................................
from Database 76
2 Create New
...................................................................................................................................
Well 79
3 Select Well
...................................................................................................................................
to Display 80
4 Well - Save
...................................................................................................................................
Current Well As... 84
5 Close Well
................................................................................................................................... 85
6 Delete Well
................................................................................................................................... 87
7 Reset Current
...................................................................................................................................
Well 88
8 Manage Well
...................................................................................................................................
Header Info. 89
9 History Module
................................................................................................................................... 99
ExamDiff......................................................................................................................................................... 106
10 Delete Parameter
...................................................................................................................................
Sets 108
11 Plot Range
...................................................................................................................................
Editor 109
Index
II Interactive Petrophysics V3.5 Senergy
12 Take Notes
................................................................................................................................... 116
Section 10 Curve Management 119

1 Manage...................................................................................................................................
Curve Sets 121
2 Manage...................................................................................................................................
Curve Headers 128
3 Manage...................................................................................................................................
Zones / Tops 136
4 Link Zones
...................................................................................................................................
/ Top Sets 158
5 Delete Curves
................................................................................................................................... 164
6 Copy Curves
...................................................................................................................................
From Well 165
7 Multi-Well
...................................................................................................................................
Options 167
8 Manage...................................................................................................................................
Multi-Well Well Header Info. 168
9 Manage...................................................................................................................................
Multi-Well Curve Sets 171
10 Manage...................................................................................................................................
Multi-Well Curve Headers 176
11 Manage...................................................................................................................................
Multi-Well Zones / Tops 180
Section 11 Data Loading 182

1 ASCII Load
................................................................................................................................... 184
2 LAS / LBS
...................................................................................................................................
Load 194
3 LAS3 Load
................................................................................................................................... 201
4 LIS Load
................................................................................................................................... 206
5 DLIS Load
................................................................................................................................... 212
6 Schlumberger
...................................................................................................................................
Tool Box 219
7 DBASE4...................................................................................................................................
Load 221
8 LAS Batch
...................................................................................................................................
Load 223
9 Zone Tops
................................................................................................................................... 228
10 Picture ...................................................................................................................................
Curves 229
11 Text Curves
................................................................................................................................... 230
12 Interval ...................................................................................................................................
Loader 231
13 Capillary
...................................................................................................................................
Pressure Data Loader 237
14 Load Well
...................................................................................................................................
Attributes 244
15 Real Time
...................................................................................................................................
Data Link 251
Section 12 Data Saving 262

1 ASCII Write
................................................................................................................................... 263
2 LAS Write
................................................................................................................................... 267
3 LIS Write
................................................................................................................................... 271
4 DLIS Write
................................................................................................................................... 275
5 DBASE4...................................................................................................................................
Write 279
6 Save Zone
...................................................................................................................................
Tops 281
Section 13 Connecting to External Databases 285

1 Common
...................................................................................................................................
Database Connection Tasks 297
Index
Senergy Contents III
2 Read/ Write
...................................................................................................................................
to PETCOM DB 302
3 GEOLOG6
................................................................................................................................... 308
4 OpenWorks
................................................................................................................................... 318
5 ODM ................................................................................................................................... 326
6 Shell LOGIC
...................................................................................................................................
Database Loader 331
7 Read / Write
...................................................................................................................................
via OpenSpirit 335
Section 14 Parameter Sets 343

1 Parameter
...................................................................................................................................
Set Management 344
2 Save Parameter
...................................................................................................................................
Set to File 351
3 Print Parameter
...................................................................................................................................
Set 353
4 Delete Parameter
...................................................................................................................................
Sets 354
Section 15 Data Editing 357

1 Interactive
...................................................................................................................................
Curve Edit 359
2 Interactive
...................................................................................................................................
Baseline Shift 363
3 Interactive
...................................................................................................................................
Trend / Square Curve 367
4 Interactive
...................................................................................................................................
Depth Shift 372
5 Depth Shift
...................................................................................................................................
Other Curves 389
6 Interactive
...................................................................................................................................
Block Depth Shift 390
7 Interactive
...................................................................................................................................
Curve Splice 394
8 Splice Curves
................................................................................................................................... 398
9 Interactive
...................................................................................................................................
Dip Picking 400
10 Create Curve
...................................................................................................................................
/ Array Curve 404
11 Create /...................................................................................................................................
Edit Lithology Curve 408
12 Create /...................................................................................................................................
Edit Point Curve 413
13 Curve Filter
................................................................................................................................... 415
14 Curve Average
................................................................................................................................... 417
15 Curve Rescale
................................................................................................................................... 419
16 Fill Data...................................................................................................................................
Gaps 421
Section 16 Array Image Data 424

1 Curves to
...................................................................................................................................
Array Data 425
2 Array Data
...................................................................................................................................
to Curves 426
3 Create Acoustic
...................................................................................................................................
Image 428
4 Create Electrical
...................................................................................................................................
Image 430
5 Merge Images
................................................................................................................................... 439
Section 17 Picture / Core Photo Data 442

1 Edit Picture
...................................................................................................................................
Curve Headers 443
2 Edit / Load
...................................................................................................................................
Picture Curve Data 444
Section 18 Text Curves 449
Index
IV Interactive Petrophysics V3.5 Senergy
1 Edit Text
...................................................................................................................................
Curve Headers 450
2 Edit / Load
...................................................................................................................................
Text Curve Data 451
Section 19 Data Viewing 458

1 Database
...................................................................................................................................
Browser 459
2 Log Plot...................................................................................................................................
Display 474
Zones ......................................................................................................................................................... 496
Depth /Time
.........................................................................................................................................................
Index 498
Numeric......................................................................................................................................................... 501
Variable .........................................................................................................................................................
Shading 503
VDL Plots......................................................................................................................................................... 505
Tadpoles......................................................................................................................................................... 507
Waveforms......................................................................................................................................................... 509
Pictures......................................................................................................................................................... 511
Images ......................................................................................................................................................... 512
Set Default
.........................................................................................................................................................
Plot Format 520
Dip Image......................................................................................................................................................... 522
Annotations
......................................................................................................................................................... 523
Plot Output
.........................................................................................................................................................
(File - Printer) 532
Horizontal
.........................................................................................................................................................
Log Plot 553
3 Histograms
................................................................................................................................... 558
Curve Normalization
......................................................................................................................................................... 581
4 Crossplots
................................................................................................................................... 591
Areas ......................................................................................................................................................... 616
Regression
......................................................................................................................................................... 619
User-Defined
.........................................................................................................................................................
Line 626
3D Crossplots
......................................................................................................................................................... 628
Frequency
.........................................................................................................................................................
Crossplots 629
Pressure.........................................................................................................................................................
Gradient Plots 631
Standalone
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pickett Plot 642
Creating.........................................................................................................................................................
Crossplot Overlay Files 645
5 Multi-curve
...................................................................................................................................
Crossplot 648
6 3D Parameter
...................................................................................................................................
Viewer 658
Well Selection
......................................................................................................................................................... 659
Parameter
.........................................................................................................................................................
Selection 661
Define 3D
.........................................................................................................................................................
View 662
3D Display
......................................................................................................................................................... 664
7 Multi-Well
...................................................................................................................................
Correlation Viewer 670
Multi-Well
.........................................................................................................................................................
Correlation Viewer 670
8 Well Map
................................................................................................................................... 691
9 Montage...................................................................................................................................
Builder 699
10 Curve Listing
...................................................................................................................................
/ Curve Edit 703
11 Curve Statistics
................................................................................................................................... 709
12 Multi-Well
...................................................................................................................................
Curve Statistics 714
13 Curve and
...................................................................................................................................
Set Names 718
14 Tool Bars
................................................................................................................................... 719
Section 20 Calculation and Correction 721

1 User Formula
................................................................................................................................... 722
Index
Senergy Contents V
2 Multi-Line
...................................................................................................................................
User Formula 728
3 Basic Log
...................................................................................................................................
Analysis Functions 739
4 Temperature
...................................................................................................................................
Gradient 750
5 RW from
...................................................................................................................................
SP 751
6 True Vertical
...................................................................................................................................
Depth Calculations 752
7 True Vertical
...................................................................................................................................
/ Stratigraphic Thickness 762
8 Curves ...................................................................................................................................
from Zones / Parameters 766
9 Curve Integration
................................................................................................................................... 768
10 Environmental
...................................................................................................................................
Corrections 771
Schlumberger
.........................................................................................................................................................
Corrections 778
Baker Atlas
.........................................................................................................................................................
Corrections 781
Halliburton
.........................................................................................................................................................
Corrections 784
Anadrill .........................................................................................................................................................
Corrections 786
Baker Hughes
.........................................................................................................................................................
Inteq Corrections 788
Sperry Sun
.........................................................................................................................................................
Corrections 790
Weatherford
.........................................................................................................................................................
Corrections 792
PathFinder
......................................................................................................................................................... 794
Section 21 Interpretation 798

1 Parameter
...................................................................................................................................
Set Management 799
2 Basic Log
...................................................................................................................................
Analysis 806
3 Clay Volume
................................................................................................................................... 816
Clay Volume
.........................................................................................................................................................
Interactive Plot 818
Clay Volume
.........................................................................................................................................................
Parameters 823
Clay Volume
.........................................................................................................................................................
Equations and Methodology 834
4 Porosity...................................................................................................................................
and Water Saturation 838
Porosity.........................................................................................................................................................
and Sw Interactive Plot 851
Porosity.........................................................................................................................................................
and Sw Parameters 866
Porosity.........................................................................................................................................................
and Sw Equations and Methodology 894
5 Cut-off and
...................................................................................................................................
Summations 918
Cut-off and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Summations Interactive Plot 924
Printing .........................................................................................................................................................
Cut-off and Summation Results 928
Cut-off and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Summations Equations and Methodology 932
Cut-off and
.........................................................................................................................................................
Summations Parameters 936
6 Multi-well
...................................................................................................................................
Cutoff and Summation 950
7 Auto Update
...................................................................................................................................
of Analysis Modules 963
8 NMR Normalization
................................................................................................................................... 964
9 NMR Interpretation
................................................................................................................................... 968
NMR Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Plot 991
NMR Equations
......................................................................................................................................................... 995
10 Cased ...................................................................................................................................
Hole 1004
TDT Stand
.........................................................................................................................................................
Alone 1004
TDT Time
.........................................................................................................................................................
Lapse 1013
Section 22 Advanced Interpretation 1020

1 Interactive
...................................................................................................................................
Mineral Solver 1022
Mineral.........................................................................................................................................................
Solver Overview 1022
User Interface
......................................................................................................................................................... 1024
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Plot 1050
Index
VI Interactive Petrophysics V3.5 Senergy
Interactive
.........................................................................................................................................................
Crossplots 1057
Save Load
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Delete Models 1060
Mineral.........................................................................................................................................................
Solver Calibration 1061
Combined
.........................................................................................................................................................
Model Results 1065
Mineral.........................................................................................................................................................
Solver Equations and Methodology 1069
2 Monte ...................................................................................................................................
Carlo Error Analysis 1097
Monte Carlo
.........................................................................................................................................................
Error Analysis 1097
Batch Monte
.........................................................................................................................................................
Carlo 1120
3 Fuzzy Logic
...................................................................................................................................
Curve Prediction 1126
Equations
.........................................................................................................................................................
and Methodology 1139
4 Multiple
...................................................................................................................................
Linear Regression 1143
5 Neural...................................................................................................................................
Networks 1150
6 Cluster...................................................................................................................................
Analysis 1163
Theory .........................................................................................................................................................
of Cluster Analysis 1184
7 Principal
...................................................................................................................................
Component Analysis 1189
8 Rock Physics
................................................................................................................................... 1197
Shear Sonic
.........................................................................................................................................................
QC / Create 1197
Density.........................................................................................................................................................
Estimation 1202
Fluid Substitution
......................................................................................................................................................... 1203
Equations ..................................................................................................................................................
Laminated
.........................................................................................................................................................
Fluid Subs 1224
Operational
..................................................................................................................................................
Instructions 1225
Equations ..................................................................................................................................................
Elastic .........................................................................................................................................................
Impedance 1260
9 Pore Pressure
...................................................................................................................................
Calculations 1264
Density.........................................................................................................................................................
Estimation 1267
Overburden
.........................................................................................................................................................
Gradient Calculation 1268
Pore & .........................................................................................................................................................
Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations 1272
Running ..................................................................................................................................................
the Model 1291
Viewing ..................................................................................................................................................
Output Results 1297
Fracture ..................................................................................................................................................
Gradient Models 1303
Pore Pressure
..................................................................................................................................................
References 1311
Overburden..................................................................................................................................................
Gradient Curves 1311
10 Saturation
...................................................................................................................................
Height Modelling (Cap. Pressure) 1313
Capillary
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pressure Set-Up 1314
Capillary
.........................................................................................................................................................
Pressure Functions 1337
Saturation
.........................................................................................................................................................
Versus Height Curves 1363
11 Saturation
...................................................................................................................................
Height Modelling (Log Curves) 1374
12 Eastern
...................................................................................................................................
European Resistivity Corrections 1384
EERC Interface
......................................................................................................................................................... 1385
EERC Theory
......................................................................................................................................................... 1393
Section 23 Multi-Well 1413

1 Multi-Well
...................................................................................................................................
Parameter Distribution 1414
2 Multi-Well
...................................................................................................................................
Batch Operation 1427
3 Multi-Well
...................................................................................................................................
Change Parameters 1436
Section 24 Tools 1443

1 System...................................................................................................................................
Defaults 1444
Edit Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
System Defaults 1446
Index
Senergy Contents VII
Edit Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Types Defaults 1447
Edit Curve
.........................................................................................................................................................
Alias Defaults 1448
Edit Mineral
.........................................................................................................................................................
Solver Mineral System Defaults 1449
Edit Mineral
.........................................................................................................................................................
Solver Mineral Equations Defaults 1449
Edit Crossplot
.........................................................................................................................................................
Overlay Set-up File 1450
Edit Monte
.........................................................................................................................................................
Carlo Defaults 1450
Edit Unit
.........................................................................................................................................................
Conversions Defaults 1450
Edit Neutron
.........................................................................................................................................................
Tool Types set-up File 1451
2 Shading
...................................................................................................................................
Types 1452
3 Edit Global
...................................................................................................................................
Sets 1455
4 Edit Zone
...................................................................................................................................
Colors 1458
5 Edit Dip
...................................................................................................................................
Symbols 1460
6 Edit Palettes
................................................................................................................................... 1461
7 Edit Default
...................................................................................................................................
Lithology 1464
8 Edit Curve
...................................................................................................................................
Aliasing 1469
9 Set Default
...................................................................................................................................
Units 1482
10 Message
...................................................................................................................................
Board 1484
11 Program
...................................................................................................................................
Protection 1485
'IP Proprietary'
.........................................................................................................................................................
Protection System 1486
Install and
..................................................................................................................................................
Activate Protection 1488
Update..................................................................................................................................................
Protection Options 1491
Uninstall ..................................................................................................................................................
or Transfer Protection 1492
View Protection
..................................................................................................................................................
Options 1495
Licence..................................................................................................................................................
Server Installations 1498
Additional..................................................................................................................................................
License Activation Instructions 1506
12 Options
................................................................................................................................... 1510
External
.........................................................................................................................................................
Database Options 1511
Well Options
......................................................................................................................................................... 1512
File Loader
......................................................................................................................................................... 1520
Well Folder
.........................................................................................................................................................
Structure 1523
LAS 3 Configuration
......................................................................................................................................................... 1527
Miscellaneous
.........................................................................................................................................................
Options 1527
Custom.........................................................................................................................................................
Toolbars and Menus 1530
Well Security
......................................................................................................................................................... 1534
Curve Aliasing
......................................................................................................................................................... 1535
Corporate
.........................................................................................................................................................
Search Folders 1535
Section 25 User Programs 1544

1 Options
................................................................................................................................... 1546
2 New User
...................................................................................................................................
Program 1549
3 User Program
...................................................................................................................................
Code 1563
4 Example
...................................................................................................................................
User Program 1 1570
5 Example
...................................................................................................................................
User Program 2 1619
6 Example
...................................................................................................................................
User Program 3 1625
7 Example
...................................................................................................................................
User Program 4 1633
8 FORTRAN
...................................................................................................................................
Guide 1636
Section 26 Useful Links 1640
Index
VIII Interactive Petrophysics V3.5 Senergy
Index 1642
Index
Section
1
Introduction
2 Interactive Petrophysics V3.5 Senergy
1 Introduction
Interactive PetrophysicsTM (IP) is developed by Senergy Ltd in Banchory, Scotland. IP's technical
support is provided by Schlumberger Information Solutions (SIS). All support issues, bugs and
technical help should be referred to the users local SIS support desk
http://www.slb.com/content/contact/sis support.asp
Copyright Notice
2008 Senergy Ltd. All rights reserved.
Trademark Information
Software application names used in this publication are trademarks of Senergy Ltd. Certain other
products and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies or organizations.
Section 1. Introduction :
Senergy Introduction 3
Senergy Ltd
Ternan House
North Deeside Road
Banchory
Kincardineshire AB31 5YR
Scotland
website http://www.senergyltd.com
Section 1. Introduction :
Section
2
Disclaimer of Warranty
Senergy Disclaimer of Warranty 5
2 Disclaimer of Warranty
DISCLAIMER REGARDING THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE INTERACTIVE PETROPHYSICS
V3.5
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IS AT

YOUR SOLE RISK. BY DOWNLOADING/INSTALLING AND/OR USING THIS SOFTWARE YOU
ARE CONSIDERED TO HAVE READ THIS DISCLAIMER AND AGREED TO ITS TERMS.
THIS SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING FILES ARE SUPPLIED "AS IS" AND WITHOUT
WARRANTIES AS TO PERFORMANCE OR MERCHANTABILITY OR ANY OTHER
WARRANTIES WHETHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE
SOFTWARE IS WITH THE END USER. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE SELLER OR ITS AGENTS
OR RESELLERS BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES.
ANY LIABILITY OF THE SELLER OR ITS AGENTS OR RESELLERS WILL BE LIMITED

EXCLUSIVELY TO PRODUCT REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF PURCHASE PRICE.
No part of this product may be reproduced, transmitted or translated by any means - graphical,
electronic, or mechanical - including photocopying, recording, taping or storage in an information
retrieval system, without the expressed written permission of Senergy Ltd. Further copies of this
document are available from Senergy Ltd on request.
Although every care has been taken to ensure that the information in this software and associated
documentation is accurate and up to date, software is, by its very nature, complex and
changeable. Senergy Ltd and its agents or resellers therefore cannot be held responsible for any
error or omission in this software and the associated documentation. The information in this
software and the associated documentation is subject to change without notice.
Section 2. Disclaimer of Warranty :

Section
3
What's New in IP Version 3.5
Senergy What's New in IP Version 3.5 7
3 What's New in IP Version 3.5

The following section briefly describes the new modules and the enhancements to existing
modules that have been made to Interactive Petrophysics (IP), for those installing / upgrading to
IP Version 3.5.
New Modules / Functionality

Cluster Analysis
Groups log data into electro-Facies.
Module is multi-well.
Discriminators can be used to select data for the model build and model run.
Multiple Facies grouping can be output for comparison.
Cluster Means are user editable.
Five different hierarchical cluster methods can be employed to group the Cluster Means
into smaller cluster groupings.
Output plots by well and crossplot of all wells can be used to interpret the results.
Principal Component Analysis

Used for correlation and for input into other prediction modules.
Uses the same input window as Cluster Analysis.
Outputs one Principal Component curve per input curve.
Variability associated with each Principal Component is displayed.
Curve Aliasing
Search order for curves can be setup and saved.
Search Set order.
Final curves searched first.
Three modes; Automatic, Manual and Off.
Aliasing works in all modules.
DLIS Writer
Uses same interface as other writers.
Outputs well attributes and curve Set groups.
Multi-curve Crossplot
Uses same setup window as Cluster Analysis.
Z-axis user defined.
Logarithmic scales.
8 input curves plus Z-axis.
2 discriminators.
Corporate Search Paths

Allows users to define the location of selected IP files for easily sharing log plot,
histogram and crossplot format files, user programs and IP configuration files.
NMR Normalization
Create a 'symmetric' T2 distribution from an 'asymmetric' one.
Enhancements
Section 3. What's New in IP Version 3.5 :

The following modifications / enhancements have been implemented in Version 3.5 to pre-existing
modules:
User Interface
Re-arranged menu items and created an Advanced Interpretation menu heading.
Addition of a Multi-Well menu heading.
User selectable work area background colour.
Sub-menu items can be created in user-defined menus.
User Programs
Text parameters can be set up in a similar way to the Sw equation selection in the
Phi/Sw module.
Parameter values can be changed from code.
Read and write all well and curve attributes from code.
An interactive crossplot can be created.
Visual Basic .NET compiler.
C# .NET Compiler.
Log Plots
The zone Set name will now display in the zone track header.
Improved selection of plot header Remarks and unlimited number of remarks allowed.
Select curves from a log plot to display on a crossplot.
Annotation groups.
Editable depth tick marks.
Multiple waveforms can be plotted in one log plot track.
New functionality in the 'Plot Range Editor' module.
Manage Log Curve Header

Clicking on the 'Shift Inc' column header now allows the user to apply a shift value to all
curves listed.
Manage Multi-Well Header Info.

Wells can be selected from a Well List.
Editable Well names.
Data Saving
When saving ASCII data there is a choice of outputting the curve in CSV Format or as a
text file.
If saving ASCII data in CSV Format there is a choice of delimiter; comma or semicolon.
Curve values can be output in ASCII and LAS format with the number of decimal places
determined by the user.
Selecting wells to be output can be done using Well Lists or directly from the 'Load Wells
from Database' option.
Data Loading
Capillary Pressure Data Loader
Reduced memory footprint with DLIS Load.
Detailed curve description in DLIS loader form.
In the LAS Batch Loader there is a counter that shows how many LAS files have been
selected to be loaded.

WindowsTM based GEOLOG is now supported.

Well selections can be filtered before importing data from external databases.
Curve Aliasing can be used to select output curves.
Sets
Underscore characters are now allowed in the Set short names.
Irregular Set creation in Global Sets.
Environmental Corrections
Standoff corrections can now be entered as a curve as well as a value.
Pathfinder LWD tool corrections.
Improved documentation of Environmental Correction modules.
Baker Atlas Focus neutron tool corrections.
Crossplots
Sunburst background to crossplots available.
Variable point size.
Data filter.
Formation tops for Pressure crossplots.
Undo / redo functionality for interactive crossplots.
Histograms
Sunburst background to histograms available.
Increased statistics available to view.
Mode, maximum and minimum lines can be added to histogram display.
Percentile statistics can be added to histogram display.
Undo / redo functionality for interactive histograms.
Monte Carlo
A print button has been added to the Tornado Display Plot window.
Clay Volume
Ability to show zone depths as well as zone names in each interpretation parameter tab.
Parameter zone locking.
Undo / redo functionality in the interactive plot.
Porosity and Water Saturation

Total Porosity log plot - all effective curves removed.
Sw irreducible minimum limit parameter.
Modified Archie Indonesian equation added.
Calculation of Sw in a laminated sand layer can be done on the properties of the sand
lamination.
Cutoff and Summation



Mineral Solver
Sw irreducible minimum limit parameter.
Modified Archie Indonesian water saturation equation added.
Model merge option which aims to smooth the transition from one model to another.
Auto update of the Cutoff and Summation module after running the Mineral Solver
module.
Logic for modelling complicated invasion.
Increased Model Plot options.
Multi-Well Parameter Set Distribution

Curve aliasing can be used to standardize curve names used in parameter Sets
Increased visualization of the input curve names used in each parameter Set.
Multi-Well Batch Operation

The user can define the Set into which the result curves of a module will be output.
Depths over which a module is run can be defined.
Multi-Well Change Parameters

Added the ability to change trend curve parameter.
Text parameters can be changed.
NMR Interpretation
Calculate a Tapered (or Spectral) Bound Fluid
Volumetric analysis using the resistivity log and the Dual Water Equation.
Capillary pressure curves from NMR T2.
Capillary Pressure Saturation Height

More flexibility in defining the Sw = f(J) equation
Refinement to adjust Permeability / Porosity in the J function when searching for the
best fit.
Allow for variable hydrocarbon density as an input for calculating PC
More flexibility when working on creating the combined equation in the Cap. pressure
function module.
Automatic handling of same depth Pc plug data.
Interactive Block Depth Shift

Added a Select All button to the module.
3D Parameter Viewer
Functionality to display many parameter listings simultaneously within separate 3D
Parameter Viewers.

TDT Standalone Sw Analysis

Basic Log Analysis

Multi-Line Formulae
Full cut, copy and paste functionality now exists within the module.
Real-Time Data Loader

Using Osprey Connect as the loader.

Section
4
Getting Help and Program Updates
Senergy Getting Help and Program Updates 13
4 Getting Help and Program Updates

Upon receiving the IP CD the following screen will appear when the the CD has been placed in
the users computer CD drive. Click on 'Install IP' to start the IP installation wizard.
The 'Demo Movie' button will display a brief animated overview of IP with a commentary by IP's
creator, Frank Whitehead.
The Interactive Petrophysics (IP) CD is shipped with comprehensive HELP documentation on the
features, functionality and 'Equations & Methodology' implemented in the software.
Documentation is provided both as a PDF file (IP Help Manual V35.pdf) and an 'online' HELP
document. The PDF file is located in the IP program directory within the Users Manual
subdirectory. The online document is accessed in a number of ways:
'Click' on the 'Help Topics' icon on the main IP 'Help' menu (shown below). Use the '
Contents' tab to browse to the required Help topic or use the 'Index' tab and type in a
keyword. There is also a limited search facility in the 'Search' tab. Plus Help topics which
the user would like to refer back to frequently can be added to the 'Favorites' tab. Or,
alternatively
Place the mouse cursor over the Module item in the IP main menu bar that you wish to
get help on and 'press' the keyboard 'F1' button. This will automatically launch the help
document at the correct chapter.
All IP modules have a 'Help' button on the user-interface. These buttons will launch the
interactive Help document when 'clicked'.
Section 4. Getting Help and Program Updates :

The 'Core' interpretation modules 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity and Water Saturation' and 'Cut-off
and Summation' have their own interactive 'Parameter Help' files which are launched from each
modules 'Parameter' display. The content of the 'Parameter Help' screen updates when the user
moves the mouse cursor between parameter columns in the interface.
The 'Install Toolbox' button will install the Schlumberger Toolbox.
The 'Install GCC Compiler' will install the GNU compilers necessary for compiling Fortran code in
the 'User Programs' module.
There is also a limited help prompt which appears on the Status Bar at the base of the IP main
window. This is illustrated below in the following screenshot:

IP Database Format
The IP database has changed between versions 3.5 and 3.4 and while version 3.5 will read a 3.4
database version 3.4 will not read a 3.5 database. Any 3.4 database will be converted to a 3.5
compatible format the first time the program saves data into a well data file - see 'Save Alls Wells
to Database'.
The 'IP User Forum', provides registration and access to Senergy Ltd.'s 'Interactive
Petrophysics' User Forum. This web forum is managed by Senergy Ltd. to provide users with a
resource for discussion of topics relating to IP and Petrophysics in general, and to enable users to
share ideas, user programs, work flows that may be of use to the ever-expanding IP-user
community.

Entry to the website is restricted to registered IP users and can only be accessed from the
connection button within the IP program. Registration is quick and very easy. Once registered the
user will have to log on with a User name and Password each time the user wants to visit the 'IP
User Forum' site.
To check the version of IP that a user has installed on their computer use the 'About' button.
Support Portal
The Schlumberger Information Solutions (SIS) Support Portal can be accessed at
https://support.slb.com. Once a user is registered on the site they can submit support requests,
join discussion forums and read the latest software news. Registering to the Support Portal is a
one-time event.
The menu item will direct your web browser to the login page.

A username and password can quickly be obtained by 'Registering' (use the link).

Once logged in, the user selects the 'Interactive Petrophysics' product and then can search for
answers to reported problems.
There are three (3) ways to contact SIS Support for any Interactive Petrophysics issues.
You can communicate your issues to SIS Support Helpdesk, either by:
1. Phone your local SIS Helpdesk directly. Their contact information can be found by
logging into the SIS Support Portal and accessing left menu Contact your Local Support
Center or directly http://support.slb.com/Home/SupportContacts/tabid/101/Default.aspx.
2. Log into SIS Support Portal and submit ticket from left tab of main Support Portal
website via link "Customer Care Center".
3. After registering at SIS Support Portal (one-time event), send email request to
customercarecenter@slb.com. Your request will be assigned to your local SIS Helpdesk,
then they will contact you.
Program Update
IP update patch releases can be downloaded via two options; The 'Check for Updates' and the '
IP Download Website'. Program updates for the current IP release can be obtained over an
internet connection.
1. An automated routine which runs an executable, GetIPUpdate.exe, can run to see if an

update patch is available. The Currently loaded IP version number is compared to the
'Update Patch' version number to decide whether the patch should be accessible for
download. The 'Download' button will only be activated when the Update patch is of a
higher version number than the installed IP executable.
The user clicks the 'Download' button to download the update file. When a new patch is available
an 'Update History' PDF document will accompany the patch, on the Senergy website. In this
document all the bug fixes and enhancements that have been implemented since the version
release are listed. The user can 'click' on the 'Update History' label to view / save this document.
When the IP_Update.exe has been downloaded, the user can then install the update on their
PC. NOTE: the IP program must be closed down BEFORE the IP_Update.exe install can be
run. The IP_Update. exe is a self-extracting zip file which the user should 'double-click' on to run.

If the 'Turn Off Automatic updates' check-box is not 'checked' (the default position), each time
the user runs IP, the application will browse to check for program updates over the internet.
When an update is available the following message is displayed, which allows the user to select
one of three options :
'Yes' - Download the latest IP update.

'No' - Continue to work with IP and ignore the download option.
'Cancel' - Change the 'Turn Off Automatic updates' option to the 'on' ('checked')
position.
2. Alternatively, the user can connect to the IP Download webpage using the 'IP
Download Website' link'. This will open an Internet connection to the Senergy website.
The user must provide some registration information to access the site. Once on the site
the user will be able to download the latest IP program update.

Section
5
PC System Requirements
Senergy PC System Requirements 21
5 PC System Requirements
Typical PC Properties
The following PC properties would be suitable for running IP:
2.6 GHz PC with at least 1 GB of RAM. However, if working mainly with image logs or
core photographs then a 3 GHz dual core Pentium processor (or equivalent) and 2 GB
of RAM is recommended.
Any reasonable graphics card is acceptable.
The program will work well with IP databases either stored locally or accessed across a
PC network. 10/100 Mbps network speed is fine.
Two 1280 x 1024 monitors is preferred, but a single monitor is acceptable.
Interactive Petrophysics v3.5 (IP) is designed to run on the WINDOWS NT, 2000, WINDOWS XP
32-bit and 64-bit and VISTA 64-bit operating systems.
To run on a 64 bit computer the following steps should be implemented:

Install SP2 for 64 bit Windows XP
Install Dot Net 64 bit (from Microsoft.com)
Install Directx 9.0c
Install IP v3.5 off CD
Download and install latest IP patch.
IP v3.5 requires Microsoft .NET framework V2.0. If this is not already installed on the users PC
then it will be automatically installed at the same time that IP is installed.
The default installation directory for IP on XP is \Program Files\IntPetro35 on the PC hard drive.
For Vista the default installation directory for IP is C:\Program files(x86)\IntPetro35. The default
directory can be changed at installation.
DirectX
DirectX is a Windows technology that enables higher performance in graphics and sound when
you're playing games or watching video on your PC. At the core of DirectX are its application
programming interfaces, or APIs. The APIs act as a kind of bridge for the hardware and the
software to "talk" to each other. The DirectX APIs give multimedia applications access to the
advanced features of high-performance hardware such as three-dimensional (3-D) graphics
acceleration chips and sound cards. They control low-level functions, including two-dimensional
(2-D) graphics acceleration; support for input devices such as joysticks, keyboards, and mice; and
control of sound mixing and sound output. Because of DirectX, what you experience with your
computer is better 3-D graphics and immersive music and audio effects.
The IP 'Well Map' feature and the '3D image viewer' (Note: this is not the '3D Parameter Viewer
') use DirectX Version 9.0c with the Managed DirectX components for Microsoft .NET.
The DirectX 9.0c install files are included with IP and get installed with the product into the
following Folder:-
C:\Program files\IntPetro\DirectX9
During the IP installation, if DirectX is not detected, you are asked if you want to install it.
The following Setup programs from the DirectX9 folder are then run :
1) DXSetup.exe - The Main DirectX 9 files

2) MDXRedist.msi (Microsoft installable file) - The "Managed" components for .NET
If you choose not to install DirectX from the installation you can run the above files manually at a
Section 5. PC System Requirements :

later date.
IP will give a warning if DirectX is not installed and you try to access the 'Well Map' module or the
'3D Image Viewer' tool.
If user has DirectX10 on their computer (Vista) then IP will work with this.
Section 5. PC System Requirements :

Section
6
User Interface and Data Entry
6 User Interface and Data Entry

Standard WINDOWS editing controls ('Copy', 'Cut', 'Paste' ...) are used to enter data into the IP
program. Much of the 'edit' functionality is common throughout the program and is described here.
IP Workspace Nomenclature
IP is very user friendly, but a brief description of the IP workspace is required just so that users
when talking about IP can relate encountered features to each other.
Multiple Workareas
These enable the user to open multiple modules, log plots from many different wells at the same
time and to order the IP workspace in a more efficient manner. The Workareas are handled as
'tabs' which can be seen at the top left of the grey Workarea. The 'tabs' work in a similar manner
to Microsoft ExcelTM work sheets, in that they can be renamed, deleted and re-ordered. It is
possible to get a thumbnail view of all the Workareas.
Section 6. User Interface and Data Entry :

Senergy User Interface and Data Entry 25
The number of Workareas that can be created is only limited by the users computer memory. To
obtain an overview of all the Workareas 'clicking' on this symbol displays the Workarea
thumbnails, as seen below in this screenshot.

By right mouse button clicking on a Workarea tab a menu appears with the following options.
'Close' - closes the visible Workarea
'Close All But This' -closes all the hidden Workareas apart from the visible Workarea.
NOTE: It is not possible to retrieve closed Workareas once they have been closed.
'Rename' - user can type in a new name for the Workarea tab.
'New Workarea' - creates a new Workarea
'Get Window from' - if there is more than one Workarea created then a list of available
Workareas is shown with the name of the modules and wells open in that Workarea. It is
then possible to move the module or well plot window from the selected Workarea to the
'active' Workarea. This is better illustrated in the following screenshot:


Tabbed workareas can be switched off in 'Tools' 'Options' Miscellaneous Options.

The close icon on the Work area tab can be hidden by 'unchecking' the box 'Hide close
button on Work areas' in 'Tools' 'Options' 'Miscellaneous Options'.
Toolbars
Most modules in IP can be launched from a 'Toolbar'. The visible toolbars can be turned 'on' and
'off' by either right-mouse-button-clicking in one of the toolbar tracks or by selecting the menu
option 'View' 'Toolbars' and 'ticking' a required toolbar, or 'un-ticking' a toolbar that is not
needed.
A list of available toolbars is given below.

Toolbars can be placed on any side of the main IP window or can float on top of the window. The
user can arrange the toolbar positions by left-mouse-button clicking on the left hand side of a
toolbar and then dragging it to a new position. Toolbar positions are saved when the program is
exited.
User-defined toolbars can be created by clicking the 'Your Toolbars & Menus' menu option or by
going to 'Tools' 'Options' 'Custom Toolbars and Menus'.

Select one of the 'User-defined' toolbars and then add the icons to it by dragging an icon from
the 'Source list' to the 'Destination list' or by highlighting an icon in 'Source List' then use the
left / right arrow buttons to move the icons to the 'Destination List'. The 'up' / 'down' buttons allow
the order of the icons on the toolbar to be changed.
Custom Menus
These can be set-up from the 'Menus' tab of the 'Your Toolbars & Menus' window. The 'Name'
of the custom menu is user editable and the various programs can be selected from the 'Source
List' and added to the 'Destination Menu' by using the arrow buttons. Clicking 'OK' will close the
'Your Toolbars' window and the user created menu will be displayed along with the other IP
menu items at the top of the IP screen.

Parameter Constant Boxes

Any text-entry box in IP will accept manual keyboard text or number entry. The user simply 'clicks'
in the text box and adds new / edits the existing value in the box. If the user 'right-mouse-button
clicks' in the text box, a drop-down menu will appear, which allows the user to 'Cut', 'Copy' and '
Paste' to and from other samples of text in the WINDOWS system, using the standard
WINDOWS Clipboard.
Text can be copied to and from external applications.

The standard Windows shortcuts for 'Copy', 'Cut', 'Paste' and 'Undo' functions will work.
'Copy' 'Ctrl+C'

'Cut' 'Ctrl+X'
'Paste' 'Ctrl+V'
'Undo' 'Ctrl+Z'
Curve Name Entry Drop-Down Boxes

When a curve name is required as an input or output to a computation module, the 'Curve Name'
box will expand to a drop-down list of all the curves in the current well. If the required curve name
already exists, the name can be found in the list using the vertical scroll bar on the right hand side
of the window.
When the drop-down list is displayed, the user can type the initial letter of the required curve
name and the curve list will be repositioned to show curves whose names start with that initial
letter. This is a quick way of locating a particular curve name.
Some drop-down text edit boxes allow the user to type the curve name in directly. Others will only
allow the user to pick from curves in the list. The latter type of box allows the user to type the first
few letters of the curve name and the window will navigate straight to that curve name.
Curve names are prefixed by their 'Curve Set' name and a separating colon ':'. Curve R1:ILD, in
the example shown above, will be the ILD curve from the R1 curve Set. Where a number of
curves, for example 'GR' exist in a well, but in different curve Sets, the curve list box will organize
the curves in ascending alphabetic order and will then do a second 'alphabetic' sort on the 'Curve
Set' name so that the user can easily find the curve name and then select the appropriate curve
set too.
Curve Name Entry from Curve List Form

The 'Curve List' form is displayed by selecting the menu item 'Curves and Set names' under the
'View' menu or by 'clicking' the speed button ( ).

The 'Curve List' form displays all curves in a well, plus the curve 'Sets' for the well. By
highlighting a Set in the lower window, all the curves in that Set will be displayed in the upper '
Curves' window. If the user changes the well on display while the 'Curve List' window is active,
the 'Refresh' button can be used to update the curve and Set data to the newly-selected well.
The 'Curve List' form can be used to select curve names to be used on other forms. This can be
done in two ways :
by 'clicking and dragging' the selected curve name from the 'Curve List' form to the
other form
by 'clicking' on the name in the 'Curve List' form. This automatically puts the curve
name into the clipboard. The user can then paste the curve name into the required box
on the selected form by clicking in the box and using 'Ctrl V' or right-mouse-button click
and 'Paste' .
Curves can be dragged directly onto a log track in a log plot display and they will be automatically
added into the track they are dropped into.
Curve Name Selection using 'Curve Type'

Most curve entry boxes that allow the user to type the curve name in, will allow the curve to be

selected using the 'generic' 'Curve Type' property (see Manage Curve Headers). The user
prefixes a '*' or '@' character to the 'Curve Type'. For example '*GammaRay' or '@GammaRay'
will select the gamma ray curve. See the section on Manage Curve Headers. If you want to use
the generic curve reference in a user-defined formula you should use the '@curve name' syntax,
since the '*' character is used as the 'multiplication' symbol.
Depth Entry Boxes

Depth entry boxes are often used to select the depth interval over which to run a calculation or an
interpretation. Depths can either be manually typed into the 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth'
entry boxes, or can be pasted from the clipboard. If 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' entry boxes
are left blank, the 'Well Top' and 'Well Bottom' depths for the current in-memory well, found in the
IP title bar next to the Well name, will be used.
By clicking in a track in a log plot display, the depth the user 'clicks' at is
automatically pasted into the clipboard. This number can then be pasted into the
depth box by right mouse clicking in the box and selecting paste (or 'Ctrl+V').
The 'Select Zone Depths' button - In modules which allow the user to define the depth
range for computations and settings to be picked from a Zone /Tops Set, the 'Select
Zone Depths' button ( ) is displayed next to the depth entry boxes. Clicking this
button will open up the 'Select Zone Depths' dialog as illustrated below.
The depths can now be picked from a particular 'Zone / Tops Set' using a zone top or bottom
picked from a drop-down list. The user selects the 'Top Set' from the drop-down menu and then
selects the 'Top' and 'Bottom' values. The depth values are pasted into the 'Start Depth' and '
Stop Depth' entry boxes when the 'OK' button is 'clicked'.
Set Selection
All modules that allow the selection of curve names as an input will have a 'Set Manager' button (
). This button, if clicked, will display a pop-up window that allows the the user to select a '
Curve Set' name from which to choose the required curve. The 'Curve Name' drop-down list (See
below) is filtered to display only those curves that are found within the selected 'Curve Set'. The '

All' Sets option will display all curves, including those in the 'Default Set' in the drop-down list.
The 'Select Working Curve Set' window is closed by clicking the 'X' in the top right-hand corner
of the dialog window.
Working Set
The 'Working Set' is selected on the Main Menu bar (see below). This is used as a 'filter' to limit
the curve names that can be selected for display in a log plot or in drop-down boxes in calculation
modules. For example, if the 'Working Set' was set to 'R1' as shown below, then any IP modules
that are run will use the 'R1' set of curves in the drop-down windows. The 'Set Name' can be
changed locally using the 'Set Manager' button ( ).

Output Set Name

Most modules that create new, 'result' curves have an 'Output Set' button ( ). By
clicking this button a drop-down box allows the selection of a common Set to be used for all
output curves in the module. The output curve names will be changed to include the selected Set
short name. Different Set names can be used for each output curve by manually typing the Set
and curve names into the output boxes. The 'Create New Set' menu item will open the 'Edit Sets'
window, so that a new Curve Set can be created.
Trend Curves and Parameter Selection

The 'Interactive Trend Curve' feature enables the user to create a curve for any zonable
parameter and use the 'Trend curve' in the interpretation modules in place of a numeric value.
For example - 'GRclean' and 'GRclay' trend curves could be created and the trend lines used as
input to the Vclay calculation module, instead of inputting numerical values for each zone, as
shown below:

Trend curves can be created using the 'Interactive Trend /Square Curve' module or the 'Curve
From Zones / Parameters' module.
Window Menu Items

These are standard WindowsTM menu items.
'Tile' - will rearrange open windows adjacent to each other.

'Cascade' - rearranges open windows so that there is a progression from first opened
window (bottom) to last opened window (top).
'Arrange Icons' - if open windows are minimised and randomly scattered about the IP
Workarea then 'clicking' 'Arrange Icons' causes the minimised windows to drop to the
base of the Workarea and be arranged in a linear fashion.
The list of available open windows is displayed below the 'Arrange Icons' option. 'Clicking' on one

of these opens the window and brings it to the front on the IP Workarea.

Section
7
Database Interface
7 Database Interface
The Interactive Petrophysics (IP) 'Database' is a way of organizing multiple wells as an
interpretation 'project'. The database consists of a number of binary data files (.DAT Files) , one
per well, stored together in a user-selected PC directory / folder. When you open IP, the directory
name of the current active database is displayed in the bottom left hand corner of the main IP
window.
NOTE:
Up to 9,999 wells can be saved into an IP database.
Up to 500 wells can be 'active' in memory at any one time.
Each well can contain up to 50 Curve Sets
Each well can contain up to 1500 curves.
Up to 50 wells can be displayed simultaneously in a multi-well correlation plot.
Each database well consists of the log curve data, general well information and the interpretation
'Parameter Sets' associated with the well.
IP works with well data loaded into memory.

Data can be loaded directly from an external database using the OpenWorks, GEOLOG,
ODM, OpenSpirit or PETCOM Database links.
Alternatively, data can be loaded through one of the 'Input' modules.
When wells are loaded into memory and worked on, the 'external' database disk files are not
immediately updated, unless the 'Autosave' function is turned 'on'. Therefore, one can load a well
from the database, perform computations and edits to curve data in the well and then simply
discard the changes, without affecting the original well in the database.
Multiple wells can be loaded into memory (with the 'multi-well' program option) with a maximum
of 500 wells resident in memory at one time (although the database can store 9,999 wells, only
500 can be loaded into memory and worked on concurrently). This assumes that enough physical
memory is available on the PC. If, when many wells are loaded, the program appears to be slow,
Section 7. Database Interface :

Senergy Database Interface 41
it is probably due to a lack of computer RAM. It is best to keep the number of loaded, in-memory
wells to the ones necessary for the current interpretation session.
The program has a mechanism to 'lock' any well that a user has opened. If another user tries to
open the same well, the following message will appear.
The second user then has the option to open the well as a new well (i.e. copy the well into
memory as a new well). If this is done then a 'Save to the Database' operation will create a new
well entry, in addition to the original well.
If the program crashes for some reason, the wells that were in memory will stay 'locked' if the user
re-starts IP straight away. The user can either:
wait approximately 4-5 minutes and the wells will unlock themselves, or
delete the lock file IPDBLock, which can be found in the database root directory.
NOTE: this file should never be deleted if there is any chance of more than one user
currently using the database.
IP Close Down and Start-up

A 'checking' mechanism has been implemented that ensures that if IP is not closed down correctly
then the user will be prompted the next time they open up IP with the following message.

'Start IP Normally' - this will attempt to start IP with all settings the same as they were
when IP was closed down. If this option does not open IP then select the 'Start IP in
Safe Mode'.
'Start IP in Safe Mode' - if this option is chosen then the IPDBList.ini file is deleted.
This file contains a list of wells in the selected database. The user will then be asked to
re-select the database wells once IP opens. This will create a new IPDBList.ini for the
selected database.
Advanced Options
'Refresh user installation files?' - this option will overwrite the users installation files in

their C:\Documents and Settings\username\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35

folder with default files. NOTE: if the user has made changes to the files within this
folder, notably the CPARMDEF.PAR or Default Plots folder, then rename the IntPetro35
folder before 'checking' the 'Refresh user installation files' and clicking the 'Start IP'
button. This will enable the user to copy back the users files into the 'new' IntPetro35
folder.
'Restore IP configuration to defaults?' - this will restore IP back to its CD image state.
IP Users and Database Files

In each IP database directory, there will be a subdirectory named after each user that accesses
the database. This subdirectory contains two files:
IntPetro.ini - this is the general configuration file. It keeps a record of the last item that
was open in IP, including the last database, last well used, the dimensions of open log
plots and Workarea information. For example, if the user was working on Well4 with a
triple-combo plot open and then closed IP without first closing the plot then the next time
IP was opened a Well4 triple-combo plot would be displayed.
This file can be deleted but the next time IP is opened the user will be prompted to open
a database. NOTE: deleting this file does not delete
the items that were displayed but just the record of how they were displayed.
IPDBProj.dat - stores the parameter Sets when performing multi-well work. This file can
be deleted but the multi-well parameter Sets would be lost. NOTE: do NOT delete this
file if there is a chance that more than one user is currently accessing the database.
NOTE: there is another IPDBProj.dat file which can be found in the project directory.
This is used only if the Test IP database is accessed.
Beginning in IP3.4 there are now two additional file types within the IP project directory which
support the 'History' module. These are:
IPDBWellxxxx_Hist.ald - this contains the actual details for the history event such as
Clay Volume reports, parameters, JPG of environmental correction screens. This file is
accessed when the user chooses to perform a difference comparison between
parameters.
IPDBWellxxxx_Hist.ale - contains a data set of history events that includes an entry for
each event, date, time, user, module and type.
Within the IP project directory the following files are located:

IPDBWellList - this file can be thought of as a table of contents for IP. This file should
be deleted if a well has been removed from or added directly (by copying the
IPDBWellxxxx.dat file from another database in Explorer) into the database. Once the
database is re-opened this file will be recreated with an updated list of available wells.
NOTE: do NOT delete this file if there is a chance that more than one user is currently
accessing the database.

ipfolder.ico - this is the IP icon that appears on the database folder when a user
generates a new IP database.
IPDBLock - if IP closes incorrectly there is a possibility that IP will "lock" the well. The
wells that were in memory will stay locked if the user re-opens IP straight away after it
crashes. If the user waits 4-5 minutes the wells will "un-lock". However, a quicker way of
getting the wells to un-lock is to delete the IPDBLock file. NOTE: do NOT delete this file
if there is a chance that more than one user is currently accessing the database.
Desktop.ini - is the desktop icon settings file.
Array Curve Data

'Conventional' log curves have one curve value per depth increment (the well 'Step') in an IP well.
Array curve data can have multiple sample values per depth increment. The array can be one or
two dimensional. A 'Z' dimension, where the depth sampling for the curve is greater than the
normal depth sample, and a 'X' dimension, where multiple samples are stored for each depth
level. Examples of array data are high resolution image data where the 'X' dimension will
represent the values of the image around the borehole and the 'Z' dimension will be the high
resolution depth sampling (~0.1 inch, 72 samples per 0.5 foot). Arrays can be of any size.
Array data curves can be used as input to all IP modules. However, if the module was not
designed to use array data then the value used in the module for each depth level will be the
arithmetic average value of all the array samples at that depth level.
Array data can use enormous amounts of memory. Therefore if the user intends to work with
large intervals (> 100m) of image data (e.g. FMI) it will be necessary to have a relatively large
amount of CPU RAM (+1 Gb). The program should work with smaller amounts of memory but it
could be quite slow.
Curve Sets
'Curve Sets' are a way of managing the curves associated with an IP well or IP database. Curve
Sets have a 'Short' and 'Full' name. The 'Short Set Name', which has a maximum number of
eight characters, is always prefixed to the front of any curve name, with a colon (:) separating the
Set and curve name (e.g. R1:Gr would be the Gr curve in the R1 set). The 'Full Set Name' is a
descriptor used by the user to document the purpose of the Set. A maximum of 50 Curve Sets
can be created in a single IP well.
All wells have a 'Default Set' which does not have a 'Short Set name'. Therefore a curve which is
listed using its name only, for example - a curve name of Gr, would belong to the 'Default' Set.
Curve names must be unique in each Set, but the same curve name can exist in several different
Sets.
Wells created in older IP versions, prior to version 3.2, will have all their curves saved in the '
Default Set'.
Curves can be moved between Sets using the 'Manage Curve Headers' module or the 'Manage
Curve Sets' module. Within the 'Manage Curve Sets' module curve Sets can be created and
re-named plus a host of other functions.


7.1 New Database

The 'New Database' button allows the user to manually type in, or browse to, a directory / folder
location which will be used by IP as the project directory for a new database.
Section 7.1 Database Interface : New Database

7.2 Open Database

The 'Open Database' menu item allows the user to select the directory under which the database
data files are stored.
The user can EITHER select one of the 'Recent Databases' from the 'Database' list. In this case
the program remembers the previous well and plots that were loaded when that database was last
accessed and automatically reloads them.
The last 10 'Recent Databases' will be stored and displayed in the window.
The user has the option to delete an entry by selecting the line and pressing the Delete key on
the keyboard. This can be useful if the list contains entries which are no longer active, if, for
example a database folder has been moved / renamed.
OR, If the required database is not in the 'Recent Databases' list then the 'Browse for IP
Database' option should be 'checked' and the database location entered. The 'Browse' button
allows the user to search the computer disk or any Networked drives for the appropriate directory.
The default Read / Write file location can optionally be changed to conform to the new database
location.
It is good practice to have the 'Default File Location' set to the 'Database Location', since this
will mean that all files belonging to a project will be grouped together under one directory.
Section 7.2 Database Interface : Open Database

If the user changes the 'Database Location', then the current database will be closed and the
new database will be opened. In this case, the user will be asked whether the wells currently
loaded into memory should be saved to the old database.
If the response is 'Yes' then the current wells will be saved to the old database.
NOTE: Before the new database is opened, all wells loaded in memory will be removed from
memory, therefore it is important to save the well data if it has changed.
The 'Load Wells from Database' window will now be displayed to allow the user to select the
wells to load into memory.
Section 7.2 Database Interface : Open Database

7.3 Set Default File Location

The 'Set Default File Location' option is used by the program to define the 'input' and 'output' file
locations.
The 'output' directory is especially important to set, since the output interpretation
Parameter Sets are automatically written here, without the user being prompted to confirm
the location, at the time they are created. The other directories are useful to set, but the user
has full control over where the input files are loaded from and can override the default directory.
'Input Directory' : This is where the program will look to find input data files and input
Parameter Sets.
'Output Directory' : This is where the program will save output data files and Parameter
Sets. Normally, the input and output directories are the same.
'Use separate Input / Output directory for each well' : If this box is 'checked' then a
Section 7.3 Database Interface : Set Default File Location

new subdirectory called \Well**** will be created for each well under the 'Output
Directory' name, where **** is the database well number. This allows the user to group
together, by well, all the text and format files that IP can output. When changing
databases, the program looks to see if separate output directories are used and then
sets this option automatically. However, it is good practice to 'check' this option when
creating a new database, to make sure that it is set the way you want.
NOTE: The Well subdirectory is created at the same time as a well is created in IP. In the
Well**** folder are files specific to the well such as interpretation parameter Sets (.set) and well
specific log plots (.plt), crossplots (.xpt),formulas (.frm), depthshifts (.sfo and .sft), text files (.txt),
and colour tables (.col).
The rest of the information is saved in the binary IPDBWellxxxx.dat file. The IPDBWellxxxx.dat
files should not be deleted as all IP related information for that well will be lost.
Also within the Well subdirectory are further sub-directories. These are defined in 'Well Folder
Structure'.
'Formula Directory' : This is the directory where the 'User formula' module saves
equations, which can be recalled & re-applied at a later time.
The 'Browse' buttons allow you to search the disk structure to find the directory you
want.
The 'Same Directory for all' 'check' box sets the input, output and formula directories to
the directory path defined in the 'Input Directory' box.
'Apply' applies the changes to the current session.
Section 7.3 Database Interface : Set Default File Location

7.4 Explore Database Folder

The 'Explore Database Folder' option provides the user with a shortcut to browse to the the
current IP project directory/folder, without having to navigate the local hard drive or PC network.
Section 7.4 Database Interface : Explore Database Folder

Section 7.4 Database Interface : Explore Database Folder

7.5 File - Save Current Well As...

The 'Save Current Well As...' module can be accessed from the 'File' and 'Well' menu items.
The user has a number of options for storing the current in-memory well to either the currently
active IP database or to another IP database folder.
3 radio buttons control how IP saves a single well. These are:
'Update selected well in the database'

'Create a new well in current database'
'Create a new well in another database'
Section 7.5 Database Interface : File - Save Current Well As...

The options are described fully below.
'Update selected well in database'. If the displayed well has already been saved to the
current IP database, selecting this option and clicking the 'OK' button, saves any
changes you have made to the well to the IP database binary file. This option will not be
available for a well that has been newly-created in the current IP session.
'Create a new well in current database'. This option can be used;

either to save the currently-displayed well to the current IP database, but under a
different well number. This is a method for creating a duplicate of an existing well
in the database, or
to create a completely new IP well, with a new 'binary' file, IPDBWellxxxx.dat, file
in the current database.
NOTE: the user is able to specify the database number that they wish to store a new, or duplicate,
well to. The options are:
1. Do not fill in a Database Well Number - By leaving the 'Database Well number' text
box empty, the program will automatically assign the next available database number to
the well to be saved. This means that, for example, in a multi-well database where
database well number 3 is vacant, IP will assign the next well to database number 3. If
wells have been saved to consecutive database numbers, then the next well saved to the
database will be assigned the next available number in the numbering sequence.
2. Fill in a Database Well Number - Typing a 'Database Well number' into the text entry
box allows you to dictate where to save your in-memory well to. If you type in a Database
Well number that already exists, you will be warned of the fact and asked to select a
different Database Well number.

'Create a new well in another database'. Selecting this option allows you to save the
currently-displayed well to a different database thus enabling the user to merge IP
databases. This does not change or delete the well in the current database. The '
Database Name' text entry box and 'Select' button allow you to browse to another IP
database folder where you would like to save the new well. NOTE: the Well Folder is not
copied across only the IPDBWellxxxx.dat. The Well Folders containing any plot,
crossplot formats etc. would have to be manually copied across using Windows
Explorer, making sure the Well number on the folder matched the newly created
Database Well number. To get IP to recognise the copied Well Folders delete the
username folder (containing IntPetro.ini and IPBDProj.dat files) in the new project and
restart IP.
Another way of merging two IP databases together is to make a copy of one database. Rename
all the wells in that database so that the names of the wells in the copied database won't overwrite
the wells in the other database.
Once the wells have been renamed then copy these into the other database. Delete the
IPDBWellList file found in the merged database folder. Delete the IntPetro.ini and IPDBProj.dat
files found in the users folder within the merged IP database. When the merged database is
loaded into IP the user will have to reload all the wells, this will then recreate the IPDBWellList for
the merged database.


7.6 Save All Wells to Database

Selecting the 'Save All Wells to Database' option will update the database binary files
(IPDBWellXXXX.dat) for the wells that are currently loaded into your PC RAM. For a
newly-created well, a new 'IPDBWellXXXX.dat' file will be created in the IP database folder.
NOTE: if there is a gap in the IPDBWellXXXX numbering, then a newly-created well will, by
default, be saved into the first vacant position in the database folder.
If multiple new wells are created and data loaded into them; on 'Save All Wells to Database', IP
offers the following 'confirm' dialogue:
Selecting 'Yes to All' will save all new wells to the database as IPDBWellXXXX.dat files, without
having to confirm the 'save' operation for each individual well.
NOTE: If your IP database wells have consecutive binary file names, for example:
IPDBWell0001.dat
IPDBWell0002.dat
IPDBWell0003.dat
IPDBWell0004.dat
IPDBWell0005.dat
Then any new well will be saved to the next highest data file number i.e. IPDBWell0006.dat
If, however, you have deleted a well from your database, removing the IPDBWell000X.dat file in
the process, then a newly-created well will be saved into the first vacant IPBDWell000X.dat
position. For example, if IPDBWell0002.dat has been deleted, as illustrated below, then the next
new well saved to the database will, by default, be saved to this database binary file.
IPDBWell0001.dat IPDBWell0001.dat
IPDBWell0002.dat (new well inserted into first vacant database
position)
In IP Version 3.3 and later versions, the user is given the opportunity to choose the database
number for multiple newly-created wells. On selecting the 'Save all Wells to Database' option a
dialog will launch similar to that shown below:
Section 7.6 Database Interface : Save All Wells to Database

You can choose a database number for each new well, or let IP assign database numbers
automatically.
If the user has opened an older database within IP v3.5 and attempts to save the wells, the
following warning message appears:
This gives the user a chance not to save the wells in version 3.5 and thus not make them
incompatible with the version of IP from which they originated.
Section 7.6 Database Interface : Save All Wells to Database

7.7 Auto Save

The 'Auto Save' window is used to set up the options for the saving of all well data at
user-defined time intervals. This is equivalent to manually clicking the 'Save All Wells to
Database' menu item at the same time intervals. The function is accessed under the 'File' menu
item.
To set up the Automatic Backup facility the user should 'check' the 'Auto Save All Data
every' check box and type in a value into the 'Minutes' text entry box to set the time
interval for auto-saves.
Clicking the 'Apply' button applies the changes to the current session, but does not save
the settings for subsequent sessions.
Clicking the 'Update Defaults' button applies the current auto-save settings and then
writes the changes to the ProgDefs.opt file in the IP program directory so that they will
be used the next time the user accesses the program.
Section 7.7 Database Interface : Auto Save

7.8 Printer Setup

The 'Printer Setup' menu item will bring up the standard WINDOWS printer selection dialog
where the default printer for IP can be selected for this session.
This printer will be used for all printer output, except the Log Plot displays, in the case of Log
Plots a different output device can be selected by the user from the hardcopy dialog screen.
Section 7.8 Database Interface : Printer Setup

Section
8
Database Security
8 Database Security
The purpose of this module is to allow the user to set access limits to wells in a shared IP
database. This could be to stop un-authorised users from viewing and modifying IP wells. Also to
control access to 'tight' (i.e. wells that have very limited authorised access) wells to one or two
specified users. Some wells may need 'Read' access by many users but only 'Write' access by
one user.
To access the database security menu go to 'Tools' 'Options' 'Well Security'
The following topic options are available from the 'Well Security' module:
Well Selection
Password
Users
Project Defaults
Applying Security
Section 8. Database Security :

Senergy Database Security 63
8.1 Well Security

Each well in a database can have its own security settings. These are stored in an encrypted
format within the well's data file.
The security settings stored within each well include:
An optional password. If this is set then it must be re-entered on subsequent attempts to
change the wells' security settings.
A list of usernames and their access rights (none, read-only or full). The special user
called 'All Other Users' is used to define the access rights for all users that are not
specifically listed.
The last time the security was set and the username of who set the security.
In addition, each database can have a 'Project Default' security setting, which is used for newly
created wells, or wells which do not have their own security settings.
'Clicking' on the 'Well Security' option the following screen appears:
Well Selection
Within this area it is possible to select wells and then to view the security which has been applied
to the wells. NOTE: Wells have to be saved to database before they will appear in the database
lists - see 'Save All Wells to Database' for more information on saving wells.
These are the different well selection options available:
'From List' - If this is selected then the 'Select Wells' button becomes 'active'. 'Clicking'
the 'Select Wells' button brings up a screen very similar to the database loading screen
where it is possible to select wells on an individual basis.
Section 8.1 Database Security : Well Security

Once the wells have been selected and 'OK' has been 'clicked' then in the 'Well Selection' area
the number of wells selected updates.
'Current Well' - Whatever is the current 'active' well is selected. If there is no current
well then this option will not be available.
'All Wells in memory' - This will apply security to the loaded wells only. If there are no
loaded wells then this option will not be available.
'All Wells in database' - This is the default option and selects all the wells in database
whether they are loaded or not.
The number of wells that security will be applied to is always shown in the top right of the module.
If no wells are selected then the 'View Security for Selected Wells' and 'Apply Security' buttons
will be 'greyed' out.
After the wells have been selected it is possible to view the security settings for the wells using the
'View Security for Selected Wells' button.

Each well is listed in the 'Wells' pane and shows whether or not it has a password set and when
the security was last updated and by whom. Selecting a well shows the list of usernames and their
access rights in the 'Users' pane.
Password
A password can be set by the user to stop other users from changing the security settings on any
of the wells within an IP database.
'Click' on the 'Set New Password' and type in a 'New Password' in the text box. To activate the
password 'click' on the 'Apply Security' button.

Once this password has been set then it must be entered into the 'Password' text box before any
further changes can be applied to the security settings on the wells within the IP database or if the
user wants to change the current password.
The password can be removed from a well or wells by ticking 'Set New Password' but leaving the
'New Password' box empty.
If the password is forgotten then clicking the 'Forgotten the password?' text brings up a dialogue
box like this:
Users can use the 'Copy to Clipboard' button and paste the 'Password Override Request Key'
into an email and send it to SIS IP support - http://www.support.slb.com
Users
This area is used to determine which IP database users can have access to the IP database
selected wells. A user can be given 'Read' or 'Read' and 'Write' privileges. If no boxes are
'checked' then the user has no access rights.
When adding a user the 'Domain' defaults to the users current domain, but this can be changed if
required. Once added, a user's access rights can be changed by 'ticking' or 'un-ticking' their 'Read
' or 'Write' boxes. The 'All Other Users' user cannot be removed. The same username cannot be
entered more than once.
The list of user names can be saved to a text file using the 'Save' button. This could then be
reloaded later using the 'Load' button instead of having to type them all in again.
To illustrate the security functionality, imagine the scenario where there are 4 users; Tim, Andy,
Martin and Derek. There are 10 wells in the IP database. All users can have 'Read' / 'Write'
access to Well # 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10. Well #3 is a 'tight' well and only Derek can access this.
This is how the security would be set up:
Select wells 1,2,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 in 'Well Selection'
In 'Users' 'Add' Andy, Derek, Martin and Tim 'Usernames'.

Give all the users 'Read' / 'Write' access

Type in the password if one has been set.
'Click' 'Apply Security'
In 'Well Selection' select well #3
In 'Users' just leave Derek with 'Read' / 'Write' access.
'Click' 'Apply Security'.
'Click' on 'View Security for Selected Wells' and 'click' on the wells. In the 'Users' box
there is a list of 'Usernames' and their 'Access' rights. For well #3 it can be seen that
only Derek has full access rights and for the rest of the wells all users have full access
rights.

Project Defaults
If 'Project Defaults' are present then they will be loaded and displayed when this 'Well Security'
screen is first displayed.
The user can save the current setting as the 'Project Defaults' by 'ticking' the 'Save as Project
Defaults for new wells' before applying the security. This will create (or update) the security
settings file. If the current 'Project Defaults' have a password set then they will only be updated if
the supplied password matches.
'Project Defaults' can be reloaded at any time by clicking the 'Reload Project Defaults' button.
Applying Security
'Click' the 'Apply Security' button to apply the specified security to the selected wells. A progress
bar will be displayed while the security is applied, followed by the 'Well Security Application
Results' form. This includes a row for each well and whether or not the application worked, and if
not, it will explain why not (such as password mismatch). Failures are shown in red. There is a tick
box 'Only show failures'.

Implications of Security
When using IP the current user's access rights will manifest themselves in the following ways:
No Access
'Select Database Wells to Load' screen:
Well is shown in red with no details other than the name of the well. Well cannot be loaded
or deleted.
'Database Browser' screen:

By default 'No Access' wells are not shown in the 'Database Browser'. To show them,
right-click and select 'Show/Hide' and tick
'Show Wells I Can't Access'. Once the well is visible it is shown with a no-entry icon and
no further details.

Read-only Access
'Select Database Wells to Load' screen:
Well(s) is shown in grey and loading the well will always create a copy of the well (shown
in the 'Database Browser' with a different
icon and 'Copy of' in front of the well name).

'Database Browser' screen:

Well is shown with a read-only icon and loading it will always create a copy.

Full access
IP operates as normal.

Section
9
Well Management
9 Well Management
The 'Well Management' options, highlighted in blue in the following screen capture, allow the
user to load, create, display and close wells in IP and to edit well name and well location data.
IP will allow the user to have up to 500 wells loaded into memory at any one time, depending on
the amount of RAM your PC has. A PC with 512Mb of RAM will be sufficient to load and work on
wells containing conventional curve data. A minimum of 2Gb of RAM will be required if you are
working with acoustic/electric image data.
The following options are included within the 'Well Management' tools:
'Load Wells from Database'

'Create New Well'
'Select Well'
'Save Current Well As...'
'Close Well(s)...'
'Delete Well(s)...'
'Reset Current Well'
'Manage Well Header Info.'
Section 9. Well Management :

Senergy Well Management 75
Section 9. Well Management :

9.1 Load Wells from Database

The 'Load Wells from Database' option will allow the user to load wells into memory, where they
can be worked on in IP. The selected wells in the IP database will be listed in a window similar to
that shown below. When the window is launched, wells that are currently loaded into memory will
be highlighted with a blue background colour. If well security has been set up using the 'Well
Security' module then the screen may look very different to that shown below.
To Load wells into Memory:

Highlight the wells in the list that you want to load into memory, using one of the following options:
'Click' on the 'Select All' button. 'Click' the 'Load' button, or

Highlight an individual well to load. 'Click' the 'Load' button, or
'Click' on a well and, holding down the 'Shift' key, 'click' on a well further up/down the list
to select all wells between the two end wells.'Click' on 'Load', or
'Click' on a well and, holding down the 'Ctrl' key, 'click' on additional wells in the list to
select them individually.'Click' on 'Load'.
The 'Well #', shown in the left-hand column of the table, corresponds to the IP 'Database well
number'. This is used in naming the binary data files (IPDBWellXXXX.DAT) which store all the
curves, parameter sets and plot formats for each IP well. The 'Database Well Number' is a
common feature in many IP windows and is used to switch between wells on the main menu '
Well counter', illustrated below. Also, any 'Select Well' dialog will list the 'Database Well
Number ' along with the 'Well Name'.
Section 9.1 Well Management : Load Wells from Database

The available wells list in the 'Load Wells from Database' interface can be sorted by any of the
fields displayed in the window using the 'Primary Sort Order' drop-down list. 'The Secondary
Sort Order' can be used to refine the sorting order of the 'Primary Sort Order' list.
The well API and UWI number can now be seen on the well loader screen by 'clicking' 'Display
Well API' and 'Display Well UWI'. The wells can also be sorted by API and UWI. The column
headers are now resizable which facilitates the display of long well names.
The sort order can be reversed by 'clicking' the 'Reverse sort' box. Alternatively, by 'clicking' on a
column header the column list will be sorted in ascending/descending order depending on the
data type. 'Clicking' on the column header again reverses the sort.
Saving Well Lists:

The 'Save Well List' and 'Load Well List' buttons allow the user to create and save a list of wells
and then restore them at a later date. This can be useful if there are many wells in the database
and the user only wants to work on a subset of the wells at any one time. NOTE: the well list will
include all selected wells plus wells already loaded in memory.
To save a well list of unloaded wells - highlight the wells to be included in the list and
then click the 'Save Well List' button.
To save a well list of loaded wells - just click the 'Save Well List' button. This assumes
that the user only has the wells loaded that the user wants to make a list from. If the user
has many loaded wells and only wants to make a list of certain wells then the user will
have to close all wells (go to Database Browser, highlight all wells and right-mouse
button click to display menu and select 'Close Well(s)'). Open the 'Load Wells from
Database' and select the wells for the list and 'click' the 'Save Well List' button. Once
the list has been created, 'Select All' and 'Load' to populate the Database Browser

again.
To load the well list click the 'Load Well List' button, which launches a 'browser' window
in the IP project directory. Browse to the directory / folder where you saved the well list
and select the required list.
The 'Print' button allows the user to output the database well list to a printer, disk file or into the
clipboard for inclusion in another document.

9.2 Create New Well

The 'Create New Well' menu function will automatically create a new, empty well and display the '
Create New Well' window. This allows the user to set the well name and depth/time intervals and
depth Units for the well.
The 'Well Comment' (see 'Manage Well Header Info.') can be set from the 'Well Name' box by
placing a colon, with a space before and after, ( : ) after the well name and appending the well
comment. For example '14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well
comment of 'Preliminary'.
If the 'Top', 'Bottom', 'Step' and 'Units' boxes are left 'blank' then the well Depth/Time interval will
be taken from the first data file (ASCII, LAS, LIS, DLIS) loaded into the well. This gives the user
the ability to allow the program to adapt the intervals in the well to the input file intervals.
If no wells are loaded at start-up or the database location is changed, a blank well is automatically
created. Therefore, the 'Create New Well' menu function does not need to be run to load the first
well into memory.
Creating a new well does not automatically create a new well in the database (database disk
file). This is only done when the well is saved to the database. The new well is initially created
only in memory.
Section 9.2 Well Management : Create New Well

9.3 Select Well to Display

The 'Select Well to Display' option allows the user to select a well to be displayed, for example,
in a log plot or to be worked on using the editing and interpretation modules. The selected well will
subsequently become the 'active well' for any new IP module that is launched. The 'Well Name'
is displayed on the title bar of the main IP window, and in any secondary, interpretation windows
that are processing this well.
The 'Database Well Number' is displayed, in brackets, at the beginning of each line. A 'negative'
database well number means that the well does not currently exist in the database, only in
memory. This 'negative' number will change to a 'positive' database well number after the well
has been saved / added to the database. For example, in the following screen shot, two wells
have negative database numbers (-5) and (-6), meaning that they exist only in memory.
Section 9.3 Well Management : Select Well to Display

The current, in-memory well can also be changed either :

by clicking on the left / right arrows next to the 'Well' number on the main menu bar.
by using the F11 (up) and F12 (down) keys.
by typing the 'Database Well Number' you wish to see, into the 'Well' box.
The currently-displayed well name is also shown at the base of the main IP window along with its
database number.
The example 'captured' above shows that well A5 is the currently-selected well and it is database
well number '76' in the 'MultiWell test' database.
Select - Well List

In each of the modules listed below there is a 'Select - Well List' or 'Advanced Well Select'
option. This opens a 'Select Wells' module which allows the user to select wells from currently
loaded database wells and then to save the selected wells to a well list file.
'Multi-Well Batch Operation'

'Multi-Well Cutoff and Summation'
'Multi-Well Correlation'
'Multi-well Curve Statistics'
'Manage Multi-Well Header Info'
'Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets'
'Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers'
'Multi-Well Histogram'
'Multi-Well Crossplot'

NOTE: well lists can also be created in the 'Well' 'Load Wells from Database' module.
The well list file can then be recalled in the two modules listed below as well as all the modules
listed above.
'Multi-well Parameter Distribution'

'Multi-Well Change Parameters'
Creating well lists is very easy to do. Wells must be loaded in memory so that they will appear in
the 'Available Wells' column of the 'Select Wells' module. The 'Available Wells' can be dragged
across individually using the mouse into the 'Selected Wells' column or a number of wells can be
selected using the left mouse button and the 'Shift' key and then dragged across. They can also
be selected individually using the chevron key '>' or collectively using the double chevron key '>>'.
It is also now possible to select wells by double clicking on the well in the 'Available Wells' list
and it will automatically move to the 'Selected Wells' list.
The 'Sort' check box allows the user to arrange the 'Available wells' list in ascending alphabetic
order, making the selection of individual wells easier when many wells are loaded in memory.The
well selection is confirmed by clicking the 'OK' button.
Once the wells have been chosen use the 'Save Well List' to open the 'Save Well List' module.
Browse to a relevant folder; the default folder is the active database project folder, and enter a
name for the well list and click 'Save'.
x

To retrieve a saved well list 'click' on the 'Select Well List' and the 'Load Well List' Module
appears with any saved wells lists appearing as *.wst files.

9.4 Well - Save Current Well As...

The 'Save Current Well As...' module can be accessed from the 'File' and 'Well' menu items.
Section 9.4 Well Management : Well - Save Current Well As...

9.5 Close Well

'Close well' allows you to remove an 'in-memory' well from RAM and optionally save any updates
you might have made to the well to the IP database.
Select the well or wells you wish to close and remove from memory (use SHIFT or CTRL
keyboard keys and mouse button to highlight multiple wells) and 'click' the 'OK' button. You will be
asked to confirm whether the wells should be saved to the database. If the user selects 'No' then
the wells won't be saved and will not be available the next time the user opens up IP with that
database.
Section 9.5 Well Management : Close Well

Section 9.5 Well Management : Close Well

9.6 Delete Well

This menu option allows you to entirely remove a well and all its sub-folders and associated files
from within an IP database. NOTE: when this option is used not only will the IPDBWellxxxx.dat file
be deleted but also the Wellxxxx folder plus the contents of the folder.
Select the well(s) you want to delete and click the 'Delete' button. This deletes the database well.
If a selected well is currently loaded into memory the 'Delete' operation does not remove this well
from memory, it just flags the well as not loaded from the database. In this case, the user must
first use the 'Close Well' menu option to take the well out of memory. Then choose the 'Delete
Well From Database' menu option, select the well and click 'Delete'.
Section 9.6 Well Management : Delete Well

9.7 Reset Current Well

The 'Reset Current Well' option allows the user to undo all the operations performed on the
current well in memory, back to the last time that the 'Save All Wells to database' or 'Save
current well to database As' option was executed. The 'Reset Current Well' function closes the
current well and re-opens it to its' 'last-saved' condition.
The user is prompted to confirm the intended operation.
Section 9.7 Well Management : Reset Current Well

9.8 Manage Well Header Info.

The 'Manage Well Header Info.' module allows the user to enter and save well 'Cultural'
information and other important 'Position', petrophysical 'Default Parameters' and 'Logging'
data fields for wells loaded to an IP database. There is also a 'History' button which will allow the
user to display changes made to the well curves by different IP users connected to the same
database.
Well Header data can be loaded to IP in a number of ways:

1. by manually typing in text into the text-entry boxes for each database well.
2. by bulk loading header information for multiple wells from an external ASCII text file,
using the 'Load Well Attributes' module. The external file can be space-, tab,
comma-delimited or in a 'Fixed' format.
3. by loading header data from external data files (LAS, LIS, DLIS).
4. by loading header data from external databases using IP's 'External Database
Connection' functionality.
5. by loading header data from an external database via an OpenSpirit Connection.
The 'Manage Well Header Info.' module has been re-engineered in IP V3.3 and later versions to
be 'user-configurable'. This means that the user has control over certain (editable) well data '
attributes' that are available for a well. 'Attributes' are parameters associated with a well and
they can be divided into 'Cultural Attributes' or 'Log Attributes'.
'Cultural Attributes' are parameters to do with well ownership, location, operating dates
etc.. and include such parameters as 'Operating Company', 'Location', 'Spud Date' - all
those options found on the 'General' tab within this module.
'Log Attributes' include those 'logging' parameters found in the header sections of
digital log curve (LAS, LIS, DLIS) files. Parameters such as 'Log Run Number', 'Mud
Resistivity', 'Mud Filtrate Resistivity' are examples of 'Log attributes'. These data types
are stored in the 'Logging' tab within this module. In addition, well location information
(Latitude /Longitude, UTM easting / UTM Northing & UTM Zone) are loaded into the '
Position' tab. Rig reference elevations, water depths and log measurement datum's are
stored as attributes that can be viewed on the 'Default Parameters' tab.
Using the 'Tools' menu - 'Options' menu item, the user has the ability to 'add' attributes, set
'Alias' names or 'delete' attributes as necessary. See the 'Options' chapter, 'Well Options' and '
File Loader' topics for a full discussion of this functionality.
'Well Header' information can be manually entered into 6 'tabbed' screens. These are:
'General'
'Position'
'Default Parameters'
'Logging'
'Plot Remarks'
'Plot Annotations'
Section 9.8 Well Management : Manage Well Header Info.

'General' Tab
The 'General' tab allows the user to set up ''Cultural information about a well, including its Well
Name, Operating Company, Spud Date etc...
The 'Well Comment' field is used to distinguish IP database wells which have the same physical
well names. For example the user might perform a preliminary interpretation on a well and then
carry out a 'final' interpretation. If the interpretations are both kept as separate wells in the IP
database then the well comment field could be used to distinguish between them. For example
one could have a comment field of 'Preliminary' and the other 'Final'.
From the 'Comment with Well' drop-down menu four options are available:
'None'
'Well Comment'
'API'
'UWI'

Depending on which is chosen then, within the program, anywhere the well name is displayed the
'Comment' is appended to the end of the well name (as shown in the screen below). This is useful
if two IP database wells have the same physical well name, since it allows the user to very easily
tell them apart. For the log plot hardcopy output there is an option on the output set-up screen to
override this option.
The 'History' button will take the user to the 'History' module. A screen similar to the one below
will be displayed.

'Position' Tab
The 'Position' tab allows the user to enter well positioning information, which will enable the well
to be viewed in the 'Well Map' and '3D Parameter Viewer' displays. If the 'Well Surface
Position' boxes are empty, loading an LIS, DLIS or LAS file, with Latitude and Longitude
(LATI/LONG) fields in the respective File headers, will automatically fill in the Lat - Long boxes on
the 'Positions' tab.
The Lat - Long (DMS) radio button is for coordinates in degrees, minutes and seconds. Whilst the
Lat - Long (DD) radio button is for degrees in decimal format.
NOTE: if the subject well is in the southern hemisphere, the Latitude value will be loaded as
XXXXXX S (South). If the UTMs radio button is toggled on, the corresponding UTM Northing will
be prefixed by the '-' minus symbol to designate a southern hemisphere position.
NOTE: if rectangular co-ordinates (UTM) have been mistakenly used as the LATI and LONG
fields in the input LIS or LAS file header, IP will not accept/load them. The user must then
manually type in the surface position UTM co-ordinates and specify a 'Zone' number in the
appropriate boxes, after 'checking' the 'UTMs' radio button.

'Well Path' information, in terms of TVD reference curve and 'East Distance Curve' and 'North
Distance Curve' from the surface location can be entered here. If the IP TVD Calculations
module has been run for the well, these boxes will automatically pick up the calculated curves
EDIST and NDIST, as long as the default curve names EDIST, NDIST, TVD and TVDSS are
used. The user must select the TVD / TVDSS curve and 'Curve Type'.
The user can choose the 'default' Well Surface Position display type (latitude/ longitude or UTM
coordinates & Zone) for all wells in a database by selecting the Display type from the 'Well
Options' dialog of the 'Options' module.
'Default Parameters' Tab

The 'Default Parameters' tab allows the user to set values which are then used to populate
modules that use these parameters/values. When loading log curves from LAS, LIS and DLIS
format files, some parameters/values will be read from the file header. The parameters that are
read into IP are listed under the Data Loading: LAS /LBS File input and LIS File Input sections.

NOTE: The 'Logging Contractor' drop-down list serves an important function within IP.
Setting the 'Logging Contractor' to one of the listed companies will set up that
company's Neutron/Density crossplot overlays when a crossplot from within the Porosity/
Sw module is subsequently displayed.
The choice of 'Logging Contractor' sets up the 'Neutron Tool Type' parameter for use
in the 'Neutron Porosity' calculation in the Basic Log Analysis module and in the
Mineral Solver module.
The 'Logging Contractor' also sets up the default Neutron Tool Look-up tables which
are used to correct Limestone matrix porosities to a Sandstone or dolomite matrix and
to correct for formation salinity.
'Logging' Tab
The 'Logging' tab is used to store Logging Run parameter information (log attributes) and mud
data for up to 25 logging runs. The List of Logging Attributes is editable and extendable and,
using the 'Tools' menu 'Options' menu item the user can modify the attributes that can be
stored in IP. If the 'Default Parameters' tab 'mud data' boxes (Rm, Rmf, Rmc, Rw and their
respective temperatures) are blank, on the 'Default Parameters' tab, they can be populated
directly from this form when appropriate log header information is loaded to IP.

The 'Logging' tab is populated automatically from the data loading modules (LAS, LIS, DLIS
Loaders). The user selects the logging run (column) into which to load the data from the data
loader window. An example from the LAS loader screen is shown below.

If a Logging parameter is currently not captured and stored within IP, the user can use the 'Tools'
'Options' functionality to set up a new log attribute and 'map' the external mnemonic to the IP
log attribute name, so that the attribute can be saved within the IP database. See the 'Options'
chapter for a full discussion of IP Well Attributes and Log Attributes.
'Plot Remarks' Tab

On this tab the user has the facility to enter well specific log header remarks. These will then be
used for each 'Log Plot Header' if the 'Header Remarks' is 'checked' on within the 'Plot Header'
tab of the 'Plot output' module and a 'Plot Header' is selected.

If the user now opens up a log plot and the 'Plot output' module, under the 'Plot Header' tab they
will see the entered remarks in the 'Header Remark Text' section at the bottom of the page.
The user could add more comments to the 'Header Remarks' if required and if the user wanted
the additional comments to be available to all their well plots then the user should click on the "+"
button 'Add to Defaults'. This will then add the comment to the 'Plot Remarks' tab of the '
Manage Well Header Info' module.
If the user does not want to use certain comments then 'uncheck' the 'Select' box next to the
comment.
'Plot Annotations' Tab

Log Plot annotations can be stored on a well by well basis. They can then be loaded onto log
plots, as required. The 'Manage Well Header Info' 'Plot Annotations' tab allows the user to edit

the stored well annotations. There is more information on 'Annotations' in the Log Plot Display
help chapter.

9.9 History Module

The 'History Module' has been developed in order that users can keep track of changes made to
curves and wells within IP.
The 'History Module' can be accessed via:

'Manage Well Header Info.' module, 'General' tab.
'Manage Log Curve Headers' module, 'History' tab.
'Manage Well Header Info'

From within the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module and from the 'General' tab, there is a '
History' button. 'Clicking' on this brings up the following screen:
This is a list of relevant selected IP 'history events' that have occurred within the 'Active' well since
the well's creation in the IP database. The 'history events' are listed in rows with a number of
columns detailing the history. It is possible to sort, check for differences and remove 'history
events' from within this module.
Due to Interactive Petrophysics' complexity the 'History' module can easily attain a huge
number of 'history events' very quickly. Therefore, there are numerous ways within the module of
filtering the 'history event' information so that the user can quickly find the information that they
require. The first layer of filtering is by using the 'Show' button. Once the user has decided to filter
by well or curves then the second line of filtering can be deployed by filtering on event 'ID' or '
Event' name or 'Date' or specific 'Well/Curve_Name' or 'User_name' or 'Comments'. Plus, there
is a 'Row Filter Options', which is found at the bottom of the 'History' module window.
Underneath the window header are a number of buttons, 'Show', 'Delete', 'Difference', 'Run
Report' and 'Parameters'. These will be described in more detail below.
Section 9.9 Well Management : History Module

The 'Show' button has a drop-down menu which allows the user to 'Show All', 'Show
Curves' or 'Show Wells'.
Selecting 'Show All' will show all 'history events'.
If 'Show Curves' is selected then all the curves which have had alterations made
to them will be displayed.
Filtering using the 'Show Wells' will just show the events associated with the well
name.
'Delete' button allows the user to permanently remove the selected rows from the
history.
The 'Difference' button only becomes active when just two event 'Type' parameter
generating rows are selected (rows can be selected by 'clicking' on them and using the
usual 'Shift' or 'Ctrl' keyboard buttons to select many rows or individual rows). The event
'Type' has to be the same for both the rows selected. When the 'Difference' button is
clicked a program called 'ExamDiff' opens. This is a freeware visual file comparison tool.
This following screenshot shows the differences between the two selected event type 'PhiSw's.

'Run Report' button
'Parameters' button displays a screen capture of the parameters set for the selected
type event. NOTE: the 'Parameters' button will only be active for type events which
produce parameters, such as 'PhiSw', 'Clay Vol' etc.
Under the buttons are a list of column headers. Common to all the column headers is the ability to
sort the rows, ascending or descending, by left mouse button 'clicking' on the column header.
Further functionality of the column headings is discussed below.

'ID' column - Right mouse button 'clicking' on the 'ID' column header brings up a
dialogue box where it is possible to 'Enter an Event ID number to search on'.
The event 'ID' is a means for the IP program to keep track of software events.
'Event' column - lists all the different 'history event' types that have happened to the well.
These include the running of interpretation modules, editing/depth-shifting modules,
loading and saving data. To see the events by 'type', right mouse button 'clicking' on the
'Event' column header displays a list of the event 'types'. 'Click' on the 'type' to select.

'Date' - This column lists the date on which the 'history event' took place. Right mouse
button 'clicking' on the 'Date' column header enables the user to filter the events by date.
The date filter options are 'Before selected Date', 'After selected Date' and 'Between
selected Dates'. The required dates can be either typed into the box or else the drop-
down button allows the date to be selected from an interactive calendar.
'Well/Curve_Name' - This column can show curves and / or wells depending on the
selection set in 'Show'. As the history module is only applicable to a single well then only
one well can be selected, the 'Active' well. However, if the 'Active' well has been
renamed at all then more than one well name may be displayed.
This column's main use is filtering on selected curves. Set 'Show' to 'Show curves' and then right
mouse button click on the 'Well/Curve_Name' column header. NOTE: the 'Row Filter Options'
has to be set to 'Filter on curves only'. It is then possible to select the curve by either typing the
name of the curve in the box or else using the drop-down list to select the curve from.

'Ticking' the 'Closest match on Well/Curve Name' will allow the user to type in a curve name and
even if it doesn't match any of the available curves exactly, a curve name closely matching the
entered name will be selected.
'User_Name' - Lists the users who have had interaction with the selected IP database.
'Comments' - These 'Comments' attempt to succinctly describe what changes have to

taken place to the Well, Curve, User_Name within IP. Right mouse button clicking on the
'Column' header displays a dialogue box where it is possible to type in a text string to
search for within the 'Comments' column.
'Row Filter Options'

'Show Row Filter' - If 'Show Row Filter' is selected then a 'Row Filter' dialogue box
appears next to the 'Parameters' button. The selected 'Row Filter' is visible and user
editable. Any changes to the row filter can be applied by using the 'Apply' button.

'Filter on curves only' -

'Filter on well only' -
'Manage Log Curve Headers'

The 'History' module can also be accessed from within the 'Manage Curve Headers', 'History'
tab by 'clicking' on the 'Show' button for a selected curve. The 'History' module opens with the
history for the selected curve. However, the module has the same functionality as that opened up
within the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module and any event can subsequently be selected by
using the 'Show All' option from within 'Show'.

9.9.1 ExamDiff
ExamDiff
This is a freeware Visual File Comparison Tool developed by PrestoSoft.
The program has many features and it is beyond the scope of this Help document to list them all.
However, the main icons are listed below with a brief description of their function.
- Enables user to select the two files that are to be compared.
- This re-compares the selected files.
- Use this icon to swap page position of the two selected files
- View/Edit the first file (left hand side of page).
- View/Edit the second file (right hand side of page).
- Saves just the differences between the two files into a user defined file and directory.
- Shows just the first file.
- Shows just the second file.
- Shows both files.

- Re-orientates the compared file pages so that they are either adjacent to each other or else
one on top of each other.
- Re-centres the 'splitter' bar.
- Shows just the differences between the two files.
- Moves to next difference up the page.
- Moves to next difference down the page.
- Current difference.
- Options
- Exit

9.10 Delete Parameter Sets

See 'Delete Parameter Sets' section under the 'Parameter Sets' Chapter.
Section 9.10 Well Management : Delete Parameter Sets

9.11 Plot Range Editor

The 'Plot Range Editor' allows the user to define, save and recall multiple depth ranges and
associated vertical scales settings ('Plot Ranges'), linked to a textual description (max. 20
characters in length). A new 'Plot Range' is added to a list so that, when its' name is selected
from the log plot header, the active log plot will instantly update with the display characteristics of
the 'Plot Range' for the active IP well.
The module will allow the user to set 'Plot Ranges' to view, for example, over different reservoir
intervals, over multiple reservoirs, over cored intervals, or over a perforated interval. The 'Plot
Range' is applied to the current log plot by selecting a 'Range Name' from the drop-down list on
the log plot header.
Two Plot Range names are automatically created by IP. These are :
'[Whole Well]' - this will display the entire well at the 'Full' vertical scale.
'[Default Range]' - this will initially also display the entire well at the 'Full' vertical scale.
The user can edit the top and bottom depth entries and vertical scale to more
appropriate values.
IMPORTANT: Once the user has defined a [Default Range], any 'interactive' log plot, which
is subsequently launched from any of the IP program interpretation modules, will
automatically launch using the [Default Range] depths.
NOTE: If the user extends the depth range of a well, for example, by loading log curves
with a deeper 'Bottom Depth' than the initial depth set up, then the [Default Range] will
have to be manually edited to extend the bottom depth to the new value.
In the 'Mineral Solver' module the [Default Range] is used to initiate the interval for analysis and
to set the depths for the 'Model' interval. The user should therefore define the [Default Range]
before beginning an interpretation.
The square brackets '[ ]' around the 'Whole Well' and 'Default Range' plot range names
indicate that these names are non-editable.
All other user-created 'Plot Ranges' are fully editable.
User-defined 'Plot Ranges' can be set up using the shortcut 'Plot Range' Icon on the
right hand side of the log plot window, illustrated below.
Plot display dimensions can then be quickly changed by selecting another 'Plot Range'
from the list in the Log Plot Header, as illustrated below:
Section 9.11 Well Management : Plot Range Editor

The 'Plot Range Editor' module is accessed in any of three ways:
from the IP program main menu bar 'Well' Menu,

from the 'Log Plot Menu' on the IP program main menu bar or,
from the Header bar on a Log Plot display window.

The top and bottom depths for a log plot display can be changed in the 'Plot Range Editor' in a
number of ways ;
by manually typing in depth values into the entry boxes, or

by pasting in depths from the IP clipboard (left mouse-button 'clicking' in a log track
pastes the depth of the 'click' into the clipboard, right mouse-click in the Top Depth or
Bottom Depth entry boxes, 'Paste', pastes the depth into the box, or
by selecting a 'Zone/Tops' Set and selecting Zone top and bottom depths, plus
'tolerances'.
Using a selected curve's top and bottom depths by using the 'Depth range from curve'
option.
Manual Depth Entries

Type the Top and Bottom depth values that you would like to use to define a log plot interval, and
select the vertical scale for the plot, in the editor window. Type in a 'Range Name' and 'click' the '
Apply' button.
Plot Range Select from Zone/Tops Set

Use the 'Select Zone/Tops Set' button to launch a dialog window which allows you to
choose an available 'Zone/Tops Set' or 'Parameter Set' from a drop-down list. Then
define the shallowest and deepest Tops that you wish to view in the log plot.
The 'Tolerance' boxes allow the user to type in values, which will be added to the

selected Top and Bottom Depths. In the example shown below the 'Tolerances' are set
to start the log plot 100ft above the Top RN36 (-100) and end the plot 50ft below the
Bottom RN12 (50). A negative 'Tolerance' value is subtracted from the associated Zone
Top depth. A positive 'Tolerance' value is added to its associated Zone Top depth.
Click 'OK' to close the 'Select Plot Range' dialog.
The required 'Vertical Scale' can be selected from the drop-down list of appropriate
values on the right hand side of the Plot Range Editor window. If 'None' is selected then
the vertical scale for the plot range will be whatever is currently selected in the '[Whole
Well]', '[Default Well]' or some other defined plot range.


Type in a 'Range Name' into the text entry box
If the 'Select Zones/Tops Set' functionality has been used, the 'Apply to all
in-memory wells containing these explicit tops' check-box will be 'activated'. This
check box, if 'checked' provides the user with a quick way to set up the same 'Plot
Range' in multiple wells, if the in-memory wells contain the 'Zone/Tops Set' or '
Parameter Set' AND the wells also contain the explicit Tops names selected to define
the 'Plot Range'. This would allow the user, for example, to define a 'Plot Range' over
a reservoir section common to all wells in a multi-well IP Project.
When the 'Apply' Button is 'clicked', an information window will be launched, similar to
that shown below, confirming how many wells have been updated with the new Plot
Range.
The 'Depth range from curve' allows users to use a curve, which they know the top and
bottom depths of, to be used to define the plot range. For example, if the user only
wanted to display on a plot data from a particular LWD tool run then they would select a
curve from the LWD tool run and the range would reflect the top and bottom depths of
that particular log run.


9.12 Take Notes

The 'Take Notes' menu item is found at the bottom of the 'Well' menu.
The 'Take Notes' option, when selected, opens a 'Notepad'-type text editor in which the user can
record tips, notes and reminders regarding the well they are currently working on. The 'Notes'
stays on-screen and can be accessed at any point in an interpretation, to record the users
thoughts.
The 'default' text file has a number of titles already entered for various IP modules. These titles
can be edited and new titles added if necessary. When the user selects the 'Save' option, the text
file is saved into the appropriate WELLXXXX subdirectory, in a folder called 'WellNotes'.
If you change the well 'focus' in IP and select the 'Take Notes' option, IP will open the appropriate
'Notes' text editor for that particular well, if it exists, or a new, blank text file, ready for editing.
The 'Notes' can be easily output to a printer.
Section 9.12 Well Management : Take Notes

Section 9.12 Well Management : Take Notes

Section
10
Curve Management
Senergy Curve Management 119
10 Curve Management
The 'Curve Management' tools are included under the 'Well' menu.
IP wells are currently able to store up to 1500 log curves, which can be organized using curve
'Sets'. Up to 50 curve Sets can be created for each IP well. It is now possible to store sets with
different Step sizes and depth interval ranges including irregular sampling (very useful for when
dealing with core data integration). With the addition of the flexible Sets with varying Steps certain
modules will not allow data to be input unless the data is of a certain Step.
Curve data in IP is stored as floating point numbers, not as integers. A curve value can have a
discrete integer value but it will be saved as that value but in floating point format. For example, 1
will be stored as 1.0000000.
The following 'single well' tools are grouped under the title of 'Curve Management':
'Manage Curve Sets'

'Manage Curve Headers'
'Manage Zones / Tops'
'Link Zones / Tops Sets'
'Delete Curves'
'Copy Curves from Well...'
Section 10. Curve Management :

In addition, a number of 'Multi-well Curve Management' functions are found under the '
Multi-Well Options' menu item. These are:
'Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info.'

'Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets'
'Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers'
'Manage Multi-Well Zones/Tops'
Section 10. Curve Management :

10.1 Manage Curve Sets

The 'Manage Curve Sets' module is used to manage the creation and deletion of 'Curve Sets'. A
maximum of 50 Curve Sets can be created per well.
To 'create' a new Set, simply type in a 'Short Name' and 'Full Name' Set name in a
blank line and 'click' the 'OK' button. The 'Short Name' is limited to 8 characters and it
must be unique for the well. Underscore characters can now be used in the 'Short
Name'. The Full name is a label for describing the Set and can be of any length,
although it is advisable to keep it short so that it can be read on the various windows that
display the 'Set Full Name'.
When a new 'Short Name' is entered, the 'Step' column becomes active and the user can select
either to create a 'Regular' curve Set or an 'Irregular' curve Set by using the drop-down menu.
The regular curve Set will use the 'Default' depth curve as its depth curve until this is changed.
The irregular Set will create its own depth curve with no values in it. Once the 'Update Sets'
button is 'clicked' and the Set created then the user can only change the Set step type by using
the 'Edit' button.
To 'rename' a Set, simply edit its text. The Set will be renamed in the well when the 'OK'
button is 'clicked'.
To 'delete' a Set, select the Set Name line you want to delete and click the 'Delete Set'
Section 10.1 Curve Management : Manage Curve Sets

button. This will delete the Set and all the curves contained in the Set. If the user just
wants to delete selected curves then 'click' the 'View' button and a listing of all the
curves contained in the Set appear in a window to the right of the 'View' button. Select
the curve(s) and use the 'Delete Curve' button.
'Add Sets from Dictionary' is an option which enables the user to create a list of Set
names, both Short and Full names, and then recall the list for subsequent use in new IP
databases. There are a number of 'default' names that could be used or else these could
be edited/replaced with the user's own names. It is possible to make the Sets irregular
step Sets by 'checking' the 'Irregular' check-box before 'clicking' the 'Add' button.
The database list is kept in the users Application Data folder - C:\Documents and
Settings\Username\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35 as SetDictionary.xml (users Set
Definitions) and SampleSet Dictionary.xml (default file of definitions).


When the 'Add Selected Sets to Well' button is 'clicked' the highlighted Sets will be added to the
'Manage Curve Sets' screen. A warning message will appear if any of the selected Sets already
exist.


From the 'Manage Curve Sets' window curves can also be copied or moved to other
Sets. Use the 'Copy' or 'Move' radio button to select which option. Select the curve and
holding down the left mouse button drag the curve across into a Set on the left hand
window and release the mouse button.
Clicking the 'Edit' button of any Set brings up the 'Well Set Depths Editor' window.
From here it's possible to change the Set interval and also the step size and the units
(feet or meters) plus select 'Irregular Sampling'.
The 'Well Set Depths Editor' module allows the conversion of the current well depth
interval (top and bottom depths) and data sample (Step) interval. Plus there is an '
Irregular Sampling' option.
The user enters the new values on the right hand 'Change to' panel of the screen and clicks 'Run'
to commit the changes.
To convert a well from imperial units (ft) to metric units (m) or vice versa, change the 'units' and

'step' and leave the top and bottom depths blank. The program will calculate the new top and
bottom depths in the new units.
If the 'step' distance is changed, the program will automatically interpolate all curve data to
produce continuous curves.
NOTE : Be very careful using this module because it is very easy to lose data if the wrong
depths or sample increments are entered. The user is asked to confirm the changes if any data
will be lost.
Once the 'Irregular Sampling' box is ticked all the other options become unavailable. The
irregular sampling option means that core data or capillary pressure data is kept at the same
sample step as the inputted data.
Copying Data to Sets

If a user copies a curve from a regular Set into an irregular Set then the following message will
appear:
Here the user can either copy all the data into the irregular Set and the depths in the Set will be
expanded to accommodate the data being copied or the user can just copy data points that match
the depths in the irregular Set. The first option is useful for making duplicates of irregular Sets, for
example a core data Set. The second option will allow for the movement of regular spaced data
like log porosity into a core data Set.
Loading Data into Sets

When loading data into an irregular Set the program will load the data into the same depth as is in
the input file if this depth exists in the irregular Set or if the input depth is less than the tolerance
setting. Hence, this allows data from different files to be aligned properly in the irregular Set if the
depths in the files are just slightly different. If, for example, the user has a very high sampled
dataset such as permeability probe data, then the user will need to change the tolerance setting to
allow this data to be loaded.
Irregular Set data should be useable just like regular Set data in the crossplot and formula
modules.

10.2 Manage Curve Headers

'Manage Curve Headers' allows the user;
To view and edit the log plot display attributes of the log curves in a well and save
these changes for future use.
To view the statistics of curves in a well.
To see the 'history' of log curves in an IP well (how they were loaded, what
corrections/ math has been performed on them , by whom & on what date/time.)
The module is activated either through the main 'Well' drop-down menu or using the speed
button ( ).
Log curve attributes are viewed on four separate 'tabbed' screens. The curve attributes are
organized in 'grid'- type, tabular listings. The Column headings and contents of each table
are described below, from left to right in each display. The 'In Name' column, which contains
the Curve Name and its' curve Set name, is common to all tabs and is always the left-most
column. The four tabs are:
'General' - displays the log curve drawing attributes, like line colour, default left and right
log track scales, linear or log scaling.
'Descriptions' - user editable curve descriptions and 'aliases'.
'Statistics' - curve statistics listings.
'History' - curve history listings.
'General' Tab
Section 10.2 Curve Management : Manage Curve Headers

The 'General' tab is where the user can view and edit curve display properties that will be applied
any time a particular curve is added to a log plot.
The IP installation directory contains a file called CPARMDEF.PAR. See 'Tools' 'Defaults' '
Edit Curve System Defaults'. This is a text file which contains a list of common log curve
mnemonics and a set of 'default' display characteristics. When a log curve is loaded into the
program, from ASCII, LAS/LIS/DLIS, IP searches the CPARMDEF.PAR file to see if there is an
entry for each curve mnemonic in the input file.
If the mnemonic is found, IP will use the associated 'default characteristics' to fill in the
display properties in the 'General' table.
If a mnemonic is not found in the CPARMDEF.PAR file, the curve scales, curve 'type',
curve colour etc...will be left 'blank'. The user must then manually fill in the empty fields
in the 'General' table.
If the user loads an unrecognized curve, then fills in the appropriate curve display
characteristics on the 'General' tab, the curve display settings can be saved to an
external file to facilitate loading the same curve mnemonic for other wells in the future.
This is accomplished by using the right-mouse-button functionality in the 'In Name'
column, described below.
'In Name' : This column lists the curve name that was originally used when the curve
was loaded to IP. Where a curve has been loaded to a curve Set, other than the
'Default' Set, the curve name is prefixed by the 'Short Set Name', as shown in the
window above. By 'clicking' the mouse cursor on a curve name in the 'In Name' column
the user is given the following options :
'Add Curve Type to file'. This copies the Curve 'type' (see below) to the user
defaults file, UserCurveType.OPT (See 'Tools' 'Defaults').
'Add Curve Properties to file' copies the user-defined curve display attributes to
the User-Defined Curve defaults file, CPARMDEF_USER.PAR (See 'Tools
Defaults). IP uses the IP program file CPARMDEF.PAR and the user-defined
file CPARMDEF_USER.PAR to save curve attributes to. If a
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file contains the same curve mnemonic as the
CPARMDEF.PAR file but, for example, has a different curve colour entry for that
common curve, when that curve is loaded into IP from an external file, the
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR settings take preference.
'Out Name' : To rename a curve, click in the 'Out Name' cell and type in the new curve
name.
To delete a curve from the 'Manage Log Curve Headers' interface, 'blank out'
the text in the 'Out Name' box. The curve will be deleted when you click the '

Update' button.
'Units' : Type in curve units of measurement.
'Curve Type' : The 'Curve Type' attribute is used by various modules to choose default
curves. For example, when the user launches the 'Clay Volume' interpretation module,
some of the input curve boxes will be automatically filled in with the appropriate gamma
ray log or sonic log curve name if these curves exist in the subject well, because the
curves have recognized 'Curve Types'. 'Curve Types' are assigned when a curve is
loaded into the program. 'Curve Types' are stored in the CPARMDEF.PAR file in the
same data line as each curve mnemonic. On the 'General' tab a drop-down box allows
the user to set the 'Type' from the standard list. The standard types are defined in a
user-editable file 'CurveType.opt' which is found in the IP program directory. To add a
default type, edit this file with a text editor (Notepad) and add the new 'Type' to the list.
See 'Tools' 'Defaults'.
'Curve Set' : The 'Curve Set' attribute allows the user to assign the Set that a curve
belongs to. A drop-down box allows the selection of available Sets. To create a new Set
click on the 'Edit Sets' button at the top of the window. This will launch the 'Manage
Curve Sets' dialog.
'Lock' : the lock column allows a curve to be flagged as 'locked', so that its values
cannot be accidentally changed. A 'tick' in this column will indicate the curve is locked.
By clicking the 'Lock All' or 'UnLock All' button one can lock and unlock all curves in
the well at the same time. This can also be achieved by 'clicking' on the 'Lock' column

header. The 'Set Lock' button can be used to set the 'Lock' column flag depending on
the curves currently displayed in the active well.
'Left Scale', 'Right Scale', 'Log/Lin', 'Color' : These are default settings that will be
used to set up the display parameters for each curve when it is selected for a log plot.
'Shift Inc' : This parameter is used to make a total 'block depth shift' to a curve (in
depth step increments). A user can manually enter values or the 'Interactive Block
Depth Shift' module sets it. To apply one shift increment to all the curves listed, enter a
value into the top 'Shift Inc' cell and 'click' on the 'Shift Inc' column header this will then
populate the entered value into all the 'Shift Inc' column cells.
To make a shift of 10 feet to a curve with a data spacing of 2 samples per foot, a value of 20
would be entered. A positive value (e.g. 20) will shift a curve downhole. A negative value (e.g.
-20) will shift a curve uphole. NOTE: it isn't now possible to use the 'Shift Inc' column to depth
shift irregular curve Set data. The column will be grayed out over the irregular curves and a
warning message will appear if the user attempts to depth-shift the curves using the 'Shift Inc'
column.
'Final' : This is a 'flag' that can be set to indicate that this is the final version of a curve.
This can be used to select curves for output (see LAS Write) and is also used to
preferentially select one curve over another, when curves are being selected by 'Curve
Type'. Click in the column to set the Flag. The 'Set Final' button will set all the curves
that are currently being displayed in the active Log Plot display as 'Final' curves. This
can be very useful for quickly selecting the curves to output in digital form.
When logs are loaded, their default attributes are looked up in a file called CPARMDEF.PAR (
CparmDef_metric.par for the metric option), which is stored in the IP program directory. This file
can be edited by the user to change or add new curves or defaults parameters. It contains the
defaults for Crossplot and Histogram scales, as well as the log plotting scales. The file can be
opened and edited by selecting the menu item 'Tools' Edit Curve System defaults'.
'Descriptions' Tab

This tab allows the user to include comments associated with a curve and to set up curve 'Alias'
names for use on 'hardcopy' log headers.
'Comments' Field : User-entered comments about a curve.
'Alias' Field : An 'Alias' name can be optionally used for the Hardcopy log output. Rather
than using the IP curve ('In Name') names in the log headers the Alias name can be
displayed, allowing more generic names to be used.
'Description' : Description of the curve. The curve description can be optionally output in
a Log Plot header when it is plotted. The default text strings are set in the
CPARMDEF.PAR file. Every time a curve is created the file is 'checked' to see if a
default description exists for the curve and, if a description is found, it is loaded into this
field.
'Statistics' Tab
This is a non-editable tab which gives basic information about the curves in a well.

'Array Size' : This column will contain the array size for an array-type curve. For a
non-array curve the cell will be empty. An array size of '12 x 60' would indicate 12 'X'
value samples and 60 'Z' value depth increments. Therefore an array curve of this size
would contain 720 data values per 1 normal curve data value. An example of Array curve
Statistics is illustrated below, showing Borehole Televiewer (FMS) curves:
'Minimum', 'Maximum', 'Mean', 'Std. Dev.' : This gives the minimum value, maximum
value, mean / average value and the standard deviation of the values for the curves.
This average ignores Null (-999) data values.
'Top Depth', 'Bot. Depth' : The top and bottom depths for a curve are the first and last
'non-Null' values.
'Net Interval' : The net interval for a curve will be the number of 'non-Null' data values
multiplied by the database step interval. Hence, if a curve has continuous data from top
to bottom of a well then the net interval will be one database step more than the bottom
minus top depth.

'History' Tab
'Show Parameters' : This displays the history for the curve. More details can be found in
the 'History Module'.
'Create Module' : This displays the module name that created the curve.
'Create date' : This is the date the curve was created. The format of the displayed date
is set by the users default regional settings, set in the Windows control panel.
'Create User' : This is the user name (computer logon name) of the person who created
the curve. For databases created prior to version 3.0 this will be blank.
'Update Module' : This shows the module name that last changed the curve.
'Update date' : Time the module was last updated.
'Update User' : This is the user name (computer logon name) of the person who last
changed the curve.
All fields in the tables are editable, except the original input name ('In Name') and the data within
the 'Curve Statistics' tab.
The listing 'Sort Order' can be changed from the drop-down menu list or by clicking in the curve
column header. If the 'Reverse Sort' box is 'checked' then the sort order will be reversed.

'Manage Log Curve Headers' Buttons

The 'control' buttons along the bottom of the window are described below.
The 'Update' button - When the 'Update' button is 'clicked', any changes made to curve
names, curve types or curve display parameters will be saved.
The 'Cancel' button - If 'Cancel' is 'clicked', no changes are made to the curve listings.
The 'Print' button - When the 'Print' button is 'clicked' the following pop-up menu is
displayed, which allows the 'Curve History' data to be output to the printer, clipboard or
to a file.
Curve Selection by Type

Many of the IP calculation and interpretation modules select curves by 'Curve Type'. If multiple
curves have the same 'type' then the curve selected will be the most recently-modified curve of
the correct 'type' with the 'Final' flag set. If no 'Final' flags are set, the selected curve will be the
most recently modified curve of the correct 'type'.

10.3 Manage Zones / Tops

The 'Manage Zones / Tops' module allows the user to manage Zones and Tops Sets. It has been
enhanced in order to help with the 'Link Zones / Top Sets' module. The functionality includes:
Creating a New Zone / Tops set

Creating a TVDSS Top set
Setting Zone colours
Copying any set type to a Tops set type
Copying Sets
Editing a Zone / Tops Set
Editing a Parameter Set
Deleting Sets
Multi-Well Zone / Tops Sets
A 'Zone/ Tops' Set consists of a group of depth-delimited intervals. Each zone has a 'Name', a '
Top Depth' and a 'Bottom Depth' entry. Zones also have their default zone colours assigned by
the IP program. The zone colours are user-editable. 'Parameter' Sets, which are used in the
interpretation modules, are 'extended' Zone Sets in which each zone has a set of parameters (eg.
Rw, Rmf, RhoClay etc) associated with it, in addition to 'Name', 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth
'.
Zone / Parameter Sets have a 'Type' associated with them. These relate to the interpretation
module used to create the parameters. Possible 'types' are:
Tops : This is the generic user-created 'Tops' Set, referenced to Measured

Depth. No parameters. The program converts all the entered
depths to measured depths in order to display them.
TVDss_Set : This is a 'Tops' Set that references TVDss depth. Depths entered as
TVDss remain as TVDss depths.
Basic_loganal : This is the 'Basic Log Analysis' module parameter Set
Clay : This is the 'Clay Volume' module parameter Set.
PhiSw : This is the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module parameter Set.
Cutoff : This is the 'Cut-off and Summations' module parameter Set.
UP : This is the 'User Program' parameter Set.
MonteCarlo : This is the 'MonteCarlo Analysis' module parameter Set.
MinSolve : This is the 'Mineral Solver' parameter Set.
NMR : This is the 'NMR Interpretation' module parameter Set.
Pore_Pres_Grad : This is the 'Pore Pressure' module parameter Set
TDT _Stand_Alone : This is the 'TDT Standalone' module parameter Set
TDT_Time_Lapse : This is the 'TDT Time Lapse' module parameter Set
The user can create Zone Sets of the type 'Tops' and 'Parameters' in this module. All Set types
can be 'copied' or 'deleted' from within this module.
The module window is launched with a list of all the Zone Sets that have been created for the
current in-memory well. The module will display the link zone symbol next to any linked sets.
Section 10.3 Curve Management : Manage Zones / Tops

Creating a New Zone /Tops Set

To create a new Tops Set click the 'New Tops' button. The following window will be displayed:

The user must type in the 'Zone Set Name' in the text-entry box in the top left hand corner of the
screen
Tops data can be entered in three ways:
1. Manually type the data in.

The user need only type in the 'Zone Top' depth value into the correct column. The 'Zone
Bottom' depth value will be automatically filled in, once the 'OK' button is 'clicked',
corresponding to the 'Zone Top' depth of the next zone in the list, or to the 'Well bottom'
depth if no deeper zone exists. The order the zones are added to the table is not critical
because the program sorts the Zones /Tops in increasing depth order before loading them.
2. Use the 'File' button to import an ASCII text file.
The format of a 'Tops' file is very simple. Data is entered on separate lines as 'Zone
Name', 'Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone'; alternatively as 'Top of Zone', 'Bottom of Zone',
'Zone Name'. Separators between the parameters should be one-or-more blank spaces, a
'comma' or 'tab' character. Example text file formats are illustrated below.
If the file is 'space-delimited' and the 'Zone Name' is listed first, then the name must not
contain any blank spaces ('Top Zone A' ,for example is not allowed, but should be written

as 'Top_Zone_A'. That is, with 'underscores' between the words). This does not apply if a
comma or 'tab' delimiter is used to separate the parameters. If the bottom depths are
omitted then the 'Zone Bottom' column will be blank. Lines that do not conform are
ignored and the program skips to the next line. The following are examples of possible
tops set files :
$example tops set (tab delimited)
7790 7875 Top Gas Zone

8270 8420.0 Bottom Gas
8420 8620 Bottom Water
7875 8225 Water
The file could be written:
$example tops set (comma delimited)
Top Gas Zone, 7790, 7875

Bottom Gas, 8270, 8420.0
Bottom Water, 8420, 8620
Water, 7875, 8225
or:
$example tops set (space delimited)
Top_Gas_Zone 7790 7875

Bottom_Gas 8270 8420.0
Bottom_Water 8420 8620
Water 7875 8225
Or, without the bottom depths:
$example tops set (comma delimited)
Top Gas Zone, 7790

Bottom Gas, 8270.0
Bottom Water, 8420
Water, 7875
3. Paste data directly from a Spreadsheet Source.

Tops can be pasted from an external spreadsheet into the data table. In the external
spreadsheet;
select the column or columns of data you want to copy from the spreadsheet and copy
them to the WINDOWS clipboard. NOTE: IP will only load data that has been selected
as a continuous data 'block' in the spreadsheet. It will not load a number of discrete cells
(captured using keyboard 'CRTL' button) from a worksheet.
'Click' on the grid in IP where you want the 'paste' operation to start and then
click the 'Paste from external Spreadsheet' button at the top right hand corner of the '
Edit Zone tops' window, illustrated below. You can paste all three columns at once or
one column at a time, clicking in the appropriate 'start' cell in the grid.

The 'Reference Depth Curve' list box allows the user to select the depth curve appropriate to the
data that is being loaded into the IP well. For example, Fluid contact zones could be loaded using
'TVDSS' as the Depth Reference Curve if they are defined in an external file in TVDSS. The
'default setting' is the IP wells' DEPTH curve.
If you make a mistake when pasting multiple depth entries into the grid interface, the grid can be
quickly cleared of data by clicking in each column header in turn and selecting the 'Clear Column'
option, as shown below:
Click the 'OK' button to create the new Tops Set. The Tops Set name will be displayed in the '
Zone Sets' window.

Creating a TVDSS Top set

The purpose behind this Set is to define formation Tops and or Fluid Contacts in TVDss depth
rather than measured depth (MD). This Set can then be transferred to other wells without the
zone depths changing to the well's measured depth reference curve.
The module produces an interpretation zone Set which has a calculation method that sets the MD
zone tops and bottoms from entered TVDss depth parameters. Since this is a normal zone Set all
the interactive functions associated with zone Sets can be used. The calculate method, which sets
the MD zone tops from TVDss, is run manually from the parameter window which is launched
from the 'Manage Zone /Tops' module.
Clicking the 'New TVDss' button opens up the 'Edit Zone tops' window, where a Set name has to
be entered. Zones could be entered at this stage but it isn't necessary. Once the 'OK' button has
been 'clicked' then the TVDss zone Set is created and will show up in the list of 'Zone Sets'.
Select the TVDss zone Set, in the example shown above it is called OWC, and click the 'Edit'
button. The parameter listing will then appear.

The first four columns are the standard zone Set entries. The next four are the parameters
associated with the TVDss zone Set.
'TVDss Top' : Enter the TVDss depth that will be used to calculate the MD zone top. If
this parameter is left blank then when the 'Run' button is 'clicked' it is calculated using
the MD 'Zone Top'.
'TVDss Bottom' : Enter the TVDss depth that will be used to calculate the MD zone
bottom. If this parameter is left blank then no calculations will be made to the zone
bottom.
'Use Well TVD Curve' : If 'checked' (default) then the calculation from TVDss to MD will
be made using the TVDss curve entered in the well header 'Manage Well Header Info.'
module. If not 'checked' then the curve in the 'TVDss Curve' column will be used.
'TVDss Curve' : Enter the curve to use to convert TVDss to MD. This is only used if the '
Use Well TVD Curve' isn't 'checked'. By selecting a TVT or TST depth curve then it is
possible to use this module to work in TVT or TST depths.

The 'Run' button will make the calculations from TVDss to MD.
Moving TVDss Tops to multiple wells

In order to create the same TVDss tops Set in a group of wells, all with the same TVDss depth for
each zone, then the following workflow should be followed.
1. Set up each wells' TVDss depth curve in the well header module 'Manage Well Header
Info.'.
2. Create a TVDss tops Set in one well with the correct TVDss tops for each zone.
3. Run the 'Multi-well Parameter Distribution' module from the well with the TVDss Set
created in step 2. Select the TVDss tops Set and the wells to distribute the Set to. Do
not select any 'Common Tops/Zones set' since the tops in each well will be calculated
from the TVDss parameters and not the MD zone tops or bottoms.

When 'OK' is 'clicked' a 'Confirm' message box appears which notes that as no common Set has
been selected then is it OK to make a copy of the selected Sets - 'click' 'Yes' to this.

Changing TVDss tops in multiple wells

If a TVDss top needs to be changed in multiple wells at the same time then the 'Multi-well
Change Parameters' module should be run. Here the 'TVDss Top' parameter can be selected
and the value changed for all the selected wells. 'Click' the 'Re-Run Analysis' button to update all
the TVDss top Sets. If the 'OK' button is 'clicked' then the value will be changed in the Set but the
measured depths of the zones will not be changed.

Setting Zone colours

The IP program has a set of default colours that are assigned when a new Zone Set is created.
These colours can be edited to conform to a user-defined colour scheme that can be applied
throughout all wells in a project by using the 'Set Zone colours' tab of the editor. Zone colours
can be selected from a drop-down list of 90 colours.

Copying any Set type to a Tops Set type

The 'Copy as Tops' button allows any set type to be copied to a 'Tops' Set type. This can be
useful if the user has zone names and depths defined in a 'Parameter' Set such as 'Cutoff' and
the user wants to use these in a regular 'Tops' Set. NOTE: all the parameter information in the set
which is being copied is lost, only the zone names, colours and depths are copied.



If this new Set is opened using 'Edit' then only the zones depths, names and colours are available
for editing even though the original Set was a 'Parameter' Set but the new Set is now a 'Tops'
Set.
Copying Tops Sets

The 'Copy' operation will make a duplicate of a highlighted Set Name (either a 'Tops' or '
Parameter' Set) and then launch the 'Edit Zone tops' window with the Set name loaded into it.
The Set will have the words 'Copy Of ' added to the Set name. The user then can change the Set
name and click 'OK' to update the copied Set.
1. Click on the Zone / Tops Set name to highlight it.
2. Click the 'Copy' button. The highlighted Zone Set will be displayed in the 'Edit Zone
tops' window.
3. Click 'OK' to save the copied Set.
4. An 'Information' dialogue box appears if the Set which the user is copying is a '
Parameter' Set. The message is basically saying that the user can't edit the zone tops or
names of this Set from within this module. However, the zone colours can be changed. If
the user wants to edit the copied Set then the Set would have to be opened with either '
Edit Zones' or 'Edit'.
5. If the Set which the user was copying was a 'Tops' Set then no 'Information' message
appears. The user can edit the zone depths, names and colours whilst in this module.

Editing Zone Sets

To edit a Zone /Tops Set, the user must:
1. Click on the Zone / Tops Set name to highlight it.
2. Click the 'Edit Zones' button. The highlighted Zone Set will be displayed in the 'Edit
Zone tops' window. Zones can be added , deleted and Zone names and top and bottom
depths modified. The 'Zone Set Name' can also be changed.

The 'Output' button allows the user to output the data on the grid into a text file. This is
particularly useful if the user wants to output all the tops from multiple wells into one document or
spreadsheet table. To output the '.csv' file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter
go to 'Tools' 'Options' 'Miscellaneous Options' 'CSV Delimiter'.

If the 'Edit Zones' button is 'clicked' when a linked Set has been selected then the following
message appears.
Since the 'Edit Zone tops' module allows complete redefining of zone numbers and zone tops it
is not possible to use it with a linked Set. The 'Edit' option has to be used instead.
Editing a Parameter Set

The 'Edit' button now opens up a 'Parameter' Set edit window. If the 'ClayVol' Set was selected
then clicking the 'Edit' button would open up the 'Clay Volume' parameter Set module.
'Tops' Sets can also be opened up in these windows. However, as there aren't any parameters
within a 'Tops' Set then only zone names, depths and colours can be edited.

If the 'Print' button is clicked then the user gets the option of outputting the Set to a disk file or to
the printer. If the 'Parameter to File' option is chosen then the output is a text file which can be
cut and pasted into reports etc.

Opening a 'Parameter' Set such as 'PhiSw' using 'Edit', then all the parameter tabs are available
for editing.
Deleting Zone Sets

To delete a Tops Set;

1. Click on a Zone /Tops Set to highlight it.

2. Click the 'Delete' button.
The Zone Set will be deleted from the selected well / wells.
Multi Well Zones / Tops Sets

If the 'Multi Well' check-box, in the top right-hand corner of the Zone Sets window, is 'checked',
the 'Zone Sets' window will display all available Zone Sets for all in-memory wells. All the editing
functions that can be performed on a single well basis can now be performed on the Zone Sets for
all wells currently loaded into memory apart from 'Edit'. For example, if you want to create the
same 'Tops' Set for all wells, click the 'New' button and a multi-well 'Tops' Set will be created for
each well loaded in memory.
The 'Wells' column shows the number of wells, currently loaded in memory, that contain a
particular Zone Set.
The Multi Well 'Edit Zone tops' window has the same functionality as the single well window.
However, when the 'New', 'Copy', 'Copy as Tops, or 'Edit Zones' button is clicked then the 'Edit
Zone tops' window appears and the window now has an additional column , 'Well Name', to
select the well to add a zone to. If the user is manually adding new Tops entries for additional
wells, a well name can be selected by clicking in a blank row in the 'Well Name' Column and then
selecting a well name from the drop-down list box that is launched.

The 'File' and 'Paste from Spreadsheet' buttons work in the same way as for a single well '
File' and 'Paste from Spreadsheet' operation, except that the first column of the data
selected from the spreadsheet must now contain the 'Well Name' entries. It is possible to load all
tops for all wells simultaneously using this window. The window allows up to 2000 rows of tops
data to be loaded.
When the 'OK' button is 'clicked' the tops are loaded into the specified wells. If the well name
cannot be found amongst the currently loaded-in-memory wells then the row in the table is
ignored. NOTE: no error message is given. To check what was actually loaded, return to the '
Edit Zone tops' window by clicking 'Edit Zones' on the 'Zones Sets' window. All loaded tops for
all wells will then be listed.

10.4 Link Zones / Top Sets

This module allows the user to link zones / Tops Sets. Once Sets are linked then they will have
the same number of zones in each Set. Each zone will have the same 'Top Depth', 'Bottom
Depth', 'Name' and zone colour. Changes made to any linked Set will result in changes being
made to the other Sets to which the Set is linked. Hence, changing a zone top or zone name in
one Set will change the top or name in all linked Sets. Creating or deleting a zone in one Set will
create or delete the same zone in all the linked Sets.
This is a very powerful option so it is essential that the user understands the consequences of
linking Sets.
The module is launched from the 'Well' menu.
Section 10.4 Curve Management : Link Zones / Top Sets

The module has 7 available columns in which to make up combinations of linked Sets called
'Groups'. Each group acts independently of each other. Each Set can only be in one group.
The 'Available Sets' column lists all the sets in a well. The number in brackets [ ] next to the Set
name is the number of zones within the set.
To set up a group, 'drag' a Set from the 'Available Sets' column to one of the group columns. It is
also possible to drag a Set from a linked group back to the 'Available Sets' column.
In the case illustrated above, the 'Linked Sets - Group 1' contains 'Clay Volume (Clay)' and '
Porosity / Sw (PhiSw)' Sets. There is an incompatibility between the zones as the 'Porosity / Sw
(PhiSw)' Set has a red background colour. This is due to the 'Clay Volume' Set having 8 zones
whereas the 'Porosity / Sw (PhiSw)' Set has 4 zones. Sets with different number of zones can
not be linked and are therefore incompatible.
The top Set (i.e. the Set at the top of the column) within a linked group column is always
considered to be the 'Base Set' and the other Sets within the group are compared to this 'Base
Set'.
If the background colour is yellow then the Set has a different top or bottom depth to the 'Base
Set'. The user can proceed with the linking but the depths in the Set will have to be changed to
match the 'Base Set' depths. The user can reorder the Sets in a group by clicking and dragging
Sets to different positions within a group.
If the background colour is blue then the Set has different zone names to the 'Base Set'. The
linking can proceed but the zone names will be changed to the names in the 'Base Set'. If the
depths are different and also the names are different then the colour will be yellow.

Only when the 'Ok' button is 'clicked' will the links be created. Warning messages will be given
about different depths and names between the Sets. NOTE: be very aware that the all the Sets in
a group will take the depths, zone names of the 'Base Set'. Re-order the group, if necessary,
before 'clicking' 'Ok'.
Zone colours in all Sets will also be set to those of the 'Base Set'.
The 'Ungroup' button when 'clicked' will automatically move all Sets in the 'Linked Sets' column
back to the 'Available Sets' column. However, this does not ungroup the Sets until the 'Ok'
button is clicked'.

Linking Clay Volume module to Porosity Water Saturation module

One good example of linking parameter Sets would be the linking of the 'Clay Volume' and the '
Porosity Water Saturation' (PhiSw) module parameter Sets. The 'Clay Volume' module is
normally run first and the necessary zones are created. When the 'Porosity and Water
Saturation Analysis' module is first run (by 'clicking' 'Ok'), before any zones are created, the
following dialog will be displayed:-

The options can only be selected in order. The second option can only be selected if the first has
been selected and likewise, the third if the second has been selected.
The first option 'Copy Zones and Clay parameters from Clay Volume module' was available in
older versions of IP. This will create the same zones in the 'Porosity Water Saturation' module
as there are in the 'Clay Volume' module.
The second option 'Link Clay volume and PhiSw module zones' creates the link between the
two modules. Hence, when tops are changed in one module they will be changed in the other.
The final option 'Link Clay parameters between modules' will link the Density, Neutron and
Sonic clay parameters in the modules. Hence, when the user changes 'Rho Wet Clay' in the '
PhiSw' module it will change the 'ND Den Clay' parameter in the 'Clay Volume' module. The '
Clay Volume' module will also automatically re-calculate with the changed parameter before the '
PhiSw' module is re-calculated. The link works both ways so that when the user changes the 'ND
Den Clay' parameter in the 'Clay Volume' module the 'Rho Wet Clay' parameter in the 'PhiSw'
module changes. The 'PhiSw' module will be re-calculated since the 'Auto update Porosity and
Water Saturation' option will have been turned on.
The linking of parameters is setup by new parameters added to both the 'Clay Volume' and '
PhiSw' modules.
The 'Link PhiSw Clay' parameter turns on the clay link to the 'PhiSw' module. This parameter will
only be active if the parameter sets are linked (the 'Linked Set' icon will be shown). NOTE: the '
Link Clay Paras' column in the 'Clay Volume' module relates only to the double clay indicators in
the 'Clay Volume' module.

The 'Link Clay Vol' parameter turns on the clay link to the 'Clay Volume' module. This parameter
will only be active if the parameter sets are linked (the 'Linked Set' icon will be shown).
It is possible to have the clay link going only one way. I.e. from 'PhiSw' to 'Clay Volume' but not
the other way round. This can be set up by turning off the necessary parameters.
To setup the links manually, without using the second and third options in the 'PhiSw Initial
Setup Options' dialogue, the following steps should be taken.
Link the 'PhiSw' and 'Clay Volume' modules using the 'Link Zones / Top sets' module.
The two Sets must have the same number of zones.
In the 'Clay Volume' module turn on the 'Link PhiSw Clay' parameter.
In the 'PhiSw' module turn on the 'Link Clay Vol' parameter.
On the 'Interpretation' menu select the 'Auto update Porosity and Water Saturation'
option.

10.5 Delete Curves

The 'Delete Curves' window will allow the user to delete one or more curves from a well. If the '
Select All' button is chosen, it will select all curves in the current display. By using the 'Default
Set' button the user can select curves by Set.
The user will be asked to confirm any deletions when 'OK' is clicked..
Section 10.5 Curve Management : Delete Curves

10.6 Copy Curves From Well

The 'Copy Curves from Well' module allows the user to copy specified curves from well to well,
or within a single well, from one Curve Set to another. The destination and the source wells
must both be loaded in memory.
The user selects the 'Source Well' and the 'Destination Well'. The module will show the depth
ranges, units and database step for both wells. The 'Copy Depth Top' and 'Copy Depth Bottom'
can be changed from the well defaults so that only a section of a curve will be copied.
The user selects the curves to copy by either dragging the curve from the 'Available Curves' box
to the 'Selected Curves' box, or by using the left and right arrow buttons. The curve name in the
destination well can be changed by either; editing the name under the 'IP Curve Name' column or
by appending a suffix to all curves by typing in the suffix in the 'Add to Name' box and clicking the
'Add' button.
Section 10.6 Curve Management : Copy Curves From Well

The Curve Set for the copied curves can be defined by using the 'Output Set' button.
The 'Fill data gaps' check box will, if 'checked', fill any gaps in the copied curves by extrapolating
the data over the gaps. This can be useful if the two wells have different database step intervals.
The module can be used to make a duplicate of a curve in a single well. In this case the 'Source
Well' and the 'Destination Well' will be the same. The 'IP Curve Name' must either be changed
or the curve copied into another 'Curve Set' in the well. This operation can also now be performed
from within the 'Manage Curve Sets' module.
Section 10.6 Curve Management : Copy Curves From Well

10.7 Multi-Well Options

The 'Multi-well Options' menu item was introduced in Version 3.3. to 'un-clutter' the 'Well'
drop-down menu. All the multi-well 'Well Header' management, 'Curve Header' management, '
Curve Set' management and editing of 'multi-well Zone/Tops Sets' tools can be launched from
the menu items found here.
The Multi-well options are :

Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info.
Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets
Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers
Manage Multi-Well Zones/ Tops
Section 10.7 Curve Management : Multi-Well Options

10.8 Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info.

The 'Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info.' module provides the user with an editing interface
where 'cultural' well data entries can be edited and checked for consistency. For example, one
could have a database containing 20 wells drilled from the same platform / drilling rig and you
might like to make all the 'Rig Name' or 'Operating Company' names consistent. This interface
allows the user to make multi-well edits simultaneously which will be saved to the IP database
when 'Save all Wells to Database' is selected from the 'File' menu.
The module is launched from the 'Multi-Well Options' sub-menu, located under the main 'Well'
menu.
Selecting this module launches a 'Select Wells' dialog. The user can create a well list using the
wells loaded in memory or retrieve a saved well list. Once the wells have been selected the '
Manage Multi-Well Header Info.' window is initialized. The editing operations are all performed
within this single 'grid' type interface, illustrated below:
The module is based around a 'spreadsheet ' style interface which lists, in columns, the 'Well
Attributes' loaded for all selected, in-memory wells. Each well occupies one row in the table.
The user navigates through the 'Well Attributes' by scrolling left-to-right across the screen.
Individual well entries can be edited for any attribute, or 'global' changes can be applied to
multiple wells in the well list.
To change a single well attribute in a single well :

Type a new value or select an option from a drop-down menu (where available) into the
single cell. Click 'Apply' to make the change and save the change into the well.
Section 10.8 Curve Management : Manage Multi-Well Well Header Info.

To change a single well attribute in multiple wells :

Tick the 'Select' column for all the rows (wells) you wish to edit. Then either:
1. Select an existing entry value or text string for an attribute you wish to make
consistent, by clicking in the cell containing that value.
2. Then click the 'Column Same' button. All entries in all selected wells will update
to the chosen value, or
3. In a column that is entirely blank, type in a value in a single cell, then click the '
Column Same' button. All entries in all selected wells will update to the new value.
'Display Well Location as' - gives the user the choice of displaying a Well's surface

coordinates as UTM's or as Latitude / Longitude.
The 'Output' button allows the user to create a text file (WellHeaders.Txt) of the
Multi-Well header Info. listing or to output the listing to the clipboard where it can then be
pasted into an ExcelTM spreadsheet document.

10.9 Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets

The 'Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets' module allows the user to edit Curve Set names within a
multi-well IP project. This functionality could be used in numerous ways. For example:
To standardize Set names within an IP project.

To check and correct for inconsistencies in Set naming conventions across multiple
wells in an IP project.
To tidy up a database, by removing any Sets which do not contain any curves.
To create well lists which the user knows contain certain Sets. These well lists are then
used in other IP modules.
Selecting the module launches a 'Select Wells' dialog. Once the wells have been selected the '
Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets' window is initialized. The editing operations are all performed
within this single 'grid' type interface, illustrated below:
The window comprises a 'Set Filter' control panel in the top left hand corner of the window, the '
Operations' buttons in the top right hand corner and a 'grid' display panel. The grid panel is
initially populated with all the curve Sets in all the selected wells. The data is arranged in the grid
with each row showing a Well Name and a Set Name. The columns are, from left to right, 'Well
Name', 'Short Set Name', 'New Set Name', 'Long Set Name', 'Curve Count' (the number of
curves each Set contains) and 'Selected' and 'Delete' Columns.
'Set Filter' Panel

In the 'Set Filter' panel, the user should type in a text string into either the 'Short Set Name' or '
Long Set Name' text box. The star symbol,'*', wildcard can be used as a quick way to filter for
Sets with similar names. The wildcard can be used in the following ways:
text * - find any Set names starting with the characters 'text'.
* text - find any Set names ending with the characters 'text'.
* text * - find any Set names which contain the characters 'text' within them.
Section 10.9 Curve Management : Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets

NOTE: the following notation is not valid: *text*text*
Using both Short and Long Set names in the filter allows the user a further level of filtering
capability. Clicking the 'Apply Filter' button applies the user-defined filter to the current well
selection. The editing grid is populated with curve Set names meeting the users filter criteria.
Multiple filter operations can be performed by changing the filter text string and clicking 'Apply
Filter'. The user has the ability to either:
'Add to List' - Appends multiple filter results rows to the grid display. Select the 'Add to
List' radio button before clicking 'Apply Filter'.
'Replace List' - Clears the existing filter results and only displays the new results. Select
the 'Replace List' radio button before clicking 'Apply Filter'.
The grid refreshes with wells and Curve Sets that meet the filter criteria. The rows can be sorted
alphabetically, either by selecting a category in the 'Sort Order' drop-down box, or by 'clicking' in
the title cell of a column in the grid. This has the same effect as sorting in ascending / descending
alphabetic order, depending on the column the user clicks on. The 'Reverse Sort' check box
performs the same function.
The 'Operations' Buttons:

'Clear Filter' - clears all entries from the grid display.
'Apply Filter' - after typing in a filter text string in the 'Short Name' or 'Long Name' box
'clicking' the 'Apply Filter' performs the operation.
'Select All Sets' - this button sets a 'flag' in all rows in the grid display in the 'Selected'
column. The button toggles between 'Select all Sets' and 'Un-select all Sets' - allowing
the user to quickly select/un-select multiple rows in the grid.
'Select Empty Sets' - sets a 'delete' flag in the 'Delete' Column in grid rows where '
Curve Count' is '0'. The user can scroll down the grid and 'uncheck' any rows that they
do not want to delete. Click the 'Apply' button to perform the delete operation.
'Change Wells' - launches the 'Select Well' dialog, allowing the user to change the
wells being used in the filter process.
'Column Same' - this button is only 'active' when the mouse cursor is 'clicked' in a cell in
either the 'New Set Name' or 'Long Set Name' columns. The button allows the user to
'paste' a selected Curve Set name into all Well 'rows' in the grid display.
'Make Well List' - this creates a well list of the wells selected using the Set filters. This
list can then be used to load wells which the user knows contain certain Sets into other
IP modules.
Renaming Multiple Curve Sets

Multiple Curve Sets can be renamed to a consistent 'Short Set Name' / 'Long Set Name' by
filtering on a character string, selecting a name to call all rows in the grid and then clicking the '
Column Same' operation button. This works in the following way:
Apply the required filter to the well selection.

'Click' the 'Select All Sets' button. A 'tick' will appear in each 'Selected' row. 'Un-check'
the 'Selected' column for any rows containing Sets you do not wish to change.
'Click' in the grid cell of the 'New Set Name' you wish to use for all selected wells. Either
use an existing Set Name or type in a character string (max. 4 characters and must not
start with a number).
'Click' the 'Column Same' button.

To change the 'Long Set Name' - 'click' in the 'Long Set Name' cell you wish to copy to
other wells, or type in a new 'Long Set Name' in a cell.
'Click' the 'Column Same' button.
The selected rows will update to the user-selected 'New Set Name', as illustrated below.


Clicking the 'Apply' button commits any changes the user has made to the IP in-memory
database wells.
Trying to rename sets within the same well to the same name will cause warning messages to be
displayed as IP will attempt to merge the contents of the sets into the one newly named set. This
is not recommended.
Deleting Empty Curve Sets

Empty Curve Sets (Curve Count = 0) can be deleted from the IP project by :
'Clicking' the 'Select Empty Sets' button to 'flag' all empty curve Sets for deletion. (a
'tick' appears in the 'Delete' column of the selected Sets).
'Click' the 'Apply' button to perform the 'delete' operation.

10.10 Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers

The 'Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers' functionality allows the user to select and edit curve
names and curve display parameters for multiple wells in an IP database. The module is able
to filter and perform edits to curve display parameters for up to 1024 curves at one time, in the
selected database. It also allows the user to delete multiple curves from multiple wells
using curve filtering criteria.
Selecting the module launches a 'Select Wells' dialog. Once the well selection is confirmed by
clicking the 'OK' button the editing window is initialised.
The 'Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers' editing window contains a number of panels. The upper
panel is used to set up and execute search criteria to filter to desired groups and types of curves
and to select the type of edit that will be performed on the curves. The lower panel contains an
interactive grid organised into four tabs 'General', 'Descriptions', 'Statistics' and 'History', as
per the single well Manage Curve Headers option, to show curve display parameters.
The user can apply a number of 'filters' to select the curves to be edited or deleted.
The 'Curve Type' filter allows a 'generic' sorting of curves in the selected wells. For
example, filter for all curves of type 'Density' or type 'Neutron'.
The 'Curve Name' box can be filled in by typing in a known curve name, or by typing in a
text character or text string plus wild character '*'. For example, typing in 'GR' selects all
curves named 'GR' while entering 'G*' will select all curves beginning with the letter 'G'.
The filter is not case sensitive.
The 'Set Name' box allows the user to filter for a particular Set Name across a multi well
data set. The box can be filled in by typing in a known Set name, or by typing in a text
character or text string plus wild character '*' , which will look for all matching Set name
text strings.
The 'Update Module' filter offers a further level of curve discrimination, for example to
view Gamma ray curves that have been modified by the 'Curve Splice' module.
The 'Update Date From' and 'To' filters allow the user to select curves loaded or
updated within a particular time window. This is over-ridden by checking the 'Any Date'
check box (default).
'Final Curves only' selects only those curves that have been been 'checked' as 'Final'
in each respective, single well, 'Manage Curve Headers' module.
Section 10.10 Curve Management : Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers

The 'Curve Sort Order' drop-down list displays the criterion on which the filtered curve
names will be displayed.
The filter criteria are applied by selecting 'Go'.
The grid will be populated with the wells and curves that meet the filter criteria.
The curves selected by the search / filter criteria can be edited collectively, using the operator
buttons in the top right hand corner of the editing window.
The 'Delete All' button will add a 'tick' to all the rows in the 'Delete' Column in the table.
Click on 'Apply' to execute the curve deletions.
The 'Lock All' button will add a 'tick' to all the rows in the 'Lock' column in the table. The
'Lock' function prevents the user from inadvertently changing curve display attributes.
Click on 'Apply' to lock all selected curve entries.
The 'Row all Same' button permits the user to globally assign curve display parameters
from one row in the grid to all other rows in the grid. This would be used, for example, to
standardize curve 'type', curve line colour and right and left scales for all instances of a
particular curve in the database. This option does not change curve names in the grid.

The user 'clicks' in one of the three left hand columns of the row which has the desired
display parameters, 'click' the 'Row All Same' button and all the display parameters in
the rest of the grid change to those of the selected row. 'Click' on 'Apply' to commit the
changes to the database.
The 'Column Same' button allows the user to globally change individual curve names or
curve display parameters for all curves meeting the filter criteria. 'Click' in the cell which
contains the desired curve name or parameter. Select 'Column Same' button and all
selected cells in that column of the grid will change to the selected cell value. Click '
Apply' to save the changes to the database.

Combining and Clearing Filter Results

The user has the option to combine a number of searches and display the results in the same grid
using the 'Add to List' and 'Replace List' radio buttons. After displaying the first set of search
results and then applying a second set of filter criteria with 'Add to List' selected, will concatenate
the results of the two searches in the grid. If you wish to select a new set of curves to edit and
you wish to see only those new curves, select the 'Replace List' radio button to clear the grid
before clicking the 'Go' button.
The 'Count of Wells meeting filter criteria' message at the bottom left hand corner of
the interface lets the user see how many wells meet the search criteria for a particular
curve or curves.
The 'Change Wells' button allows the user to re-select the wells selected for use in the
editing operation.
The 'Clear Filters' button allows the user to completely clear the curve display grid at
any point and start again.
'Make Well List' button creates a well list. This well list file (Well List.wst) can then be
used in another module to load wells that the user knows contain a certain curve.
'Print' button can output a listing to a printer, file or to the clipboard. The printer listing is
limited and does not contain curve statistics. This is due to the limited width of hardcopy
output. This function will allow the user to output all or selected curves in a project.

10.11 Manage Multi-Well Zones / Tops

This is another way of accessing the 'Manage Zones /Tops' module. By accessing this module by
this route the 'Multi Well' tick box will be 'checked' automatically.
Section 10.11 Curve Management : Manage Multi-Well Zones / Tops

Section
11
Data Loading
11 Data Loading
The 'Load Data' options are available under the 'Input / Output' menu.
The following Tools are available under the 'Load Data' menu item:
ASCII Load
LAS / LBS Load
LAS3 Load
LIS Load
DLIS Load
Schlumberger Toolbox
DBASE4 Load
LAS Batch Load
Load Zone Tops
Picture Curves
Text Curves
Interval Loader
Capillary Pressure Data Loader
Load Well Attributes
Real Time Data Link
NOTE: there is a program limit of 500 'conventional' curves per well. Array-type curves are
treated as single curves in IP and therefore can be used to store a much greater volume of curve
data.
Section 11. Data Loading :

Senergy Data Loading 183
NOTE: the number of wells and curves that can be loaded simultaneously is limited by the
amount of system memory available. If the user wishes to load a large number of wells and/or a
large volume of curve data into IP, there is potential for all the system memory to be filled before
the data loading is finished, which could result in application stability issues. In this situation the
user should consider loading the data in stages, saving and closing the loaded wells at each
stage, freeing up system memory for the next loading stage. Once all the data is loaded then the
user can re-open the wells. IP is able to use memory more efficiently if these steps are followed.
Section 11. Data Loading :

11.1 ASCII Load

The 'ASCII Load' module allows the user to import log curves, core analysis plug measurements
and other data presented as text files. Input data files can be space-, tab-, comma- or 'Other'
delimited. NOTE: IP assumes that all import files use the decimal point as the separator for
decimal numbers. All input files into IP should conform to this standard.
The module has been updated for IP Version 3.3 and later, to allow the user to more-easily create
array-type curves and load data into them. This enhancement was primarily to facilitate the
loading of array data files for use in the 'Capillary Pressure Analysis' module. However, the
modifications also help to streamline the workflow for importing Core analysis plug data (e.g. Core
Porosity, Core Permeability and Grain Density) directly into the program as array curves.
Conventional core data is easily imported directly into IP by using a set with an irregular step.
NOTE: if you want to load external data, stored in a spreadsheet, into IP arrays, it is much quicker
to use the 'Interval Loader' module, which has a convenient 'Copy / Paste from spreadsheet'
feature.
The user opens the 'ASCII Load' module from the 'Input / Output' 'Load Data' 'ASCII Load'
menu item. The first window to be launched is a 'File Select' dialog which you can use to browse
to the appropriate folder / file name to be loaded.
After selecting a data file to load, the main 'ASCII Load' interface is launched. The IP program
makes an attempt to analyse the format of the user-selected file and populates the panel in the
lower part of the window with the data in the input file, together with curve names and curve units.
The user should check the 'grid' entries and make sure it is all correctly filled in, before
proceeding to load the file. If the format is not correct, the user must manually set the data format.
Section 11.1 Data Loading : ASCII Load

The user interface is organized into a number of discrete 'panels'. These are:
Well Properties
Input File Defaults
Data Formatting
Load Set Selection
Curve Definition
Data Grid

Well Properties Panel

In the Upper left hand corner of the interface, the 'Well Properties' panel displays the current
depth/time limits for the currently-selected IP well. The panel displays 'Well Name', 'IP Well Step
', depth/time 'Units' and 'Top' and 'Bottom' depths/times.
'Well Name' - enter or edit the name of the well in the 'Well Name' box. A 'Well
Comment' (see 'Edit / Well Header Info.') can be set here by placing a colon symbol,
with a space before and after, ( : ) after the well name and typing in the well comment
after the colon. For example 'Test Well : Preliminary' will create a well name of 'Test
Well' with a well comment of 'Preliminary'.
'IP Well Step' - this is the database 'Step' (curve data depth increment) for a well. If data
has already been loaded into the in-memory well, then this box will be protected. For a
new well it is necessary to enter a value here. Alternatively, the 'IP Well Step' will be
determined from the first log curve file loaded to IP for the subject well.
'Units' - these are the IP well units ('Feet', 'Meters', 'Seconds' or 'Milliseconds'). A metric
data file can be loaded into an imperial-units database and the data will automatically be
converted. For 'time' indexed wells, the units can be set to either seconds or
milliseconds.
'Depth Top' - top depth or top time in the ASCII file from which to load data. The units
will be in the IP well units regardless of the units of the file. The top depth/time does not
have to correspond to the file top depth/time.
'Depth Bottom' - bottom depth or bottom time in the ASCII file from which to load data.
The units will be in the IP well units regardless of the units of the file. The bottom
depth/time does not have to correspond to the file bottom depth/time. For a new well, the
database interval will be set to the Top and Bottom depths/times.
If the ASCII data in the file that is being loaded covers a depth interval greater than the current
wells depth/time limits, the following message will be displayed.
Click 'Yes' to launch the 'Well Depths Editor' module, so that the IP well depth range can be
extended.
Input File Defaults Panel

This panel, in the top right-hand corner of the interface, is used to set up some key input file
attributes.

'Null Value' - the user must enter the null value (absent value) which is used in the
ASCII file being loaded. The default value is -999.00.
The 'Multi-line data' option, if 'checked', allows the user to load data files where each
depth level contains data that is found on more than one line in the input file. The user
enters the number of lines per depth step.
'Fill data gaps' - this allows the user to automatically extrapolate across data gaps in
the input data. This is useful, for example, if one is loading a one sample (1.0 ft step) per
foot ASCII file into a two sample (0.5ft step) per foot well. The 'Maximum gap width'
allows the user to set the maximum gap (in depth increments) to be filled.
Data Formatting Panels

Two panels in the middle of the 'ASCII Load' screen allow the user to describe the formatting and
content (curve names, curve units, curve types) of the input text file. These are shown below.
The left-hand panel lets the user set the first line of 'data', the 'curve name' line and the 'curve
units' line in the input file. The right-hand, 'Data Formatting', panel allows the user to define the
separator character in the input file to be used in the 'Load' operation.
To correctly set up the file to load into IP the following steps should be followed:
1. Firstly, set the 'Data starts at line' number to that of the first line of data in the
'file-to-load'. Reference line numbers are shown in the left-hand margin of the data grid in
the bottom part of the screen, with a red coloured background.
2. Click the 'Apply' button, next to the 'Data starts at line' entry box. The data line will be
split into individual numbers using the attribute ('Spaces', 'Tabs', 'Commas', 'Other', 'Fixed')
specified in the 'Data Formatting' panel of the window. If the user chooses a delimiter,
other than 'Spaces', then 'blank' entries in the data will be ignored. For two attributes
adjoining each other, a Null data value will be assumed to exist between them. For
example, a data line reading: 1000.0,55.2,,100 with a 'comma' as the delimiter will load the
line as 1000.0 55.2 -999.0 100.0. The parsed data is visible in the bottom row of the
Formatting panel.
The 'Fixed' format option allows the user to specify the format of the input data. This

should only be necessary if the data has been generated using a Fortran type expression
where one number can run into another. The user must enter the format of the data. This
is done by entering the width of each input column separated by a comma. The following
are valid format expressions:
8,8,8,8,10,12,12,12 - This can be simplified by using brackets 4(8),10,3(12)

8,10,12,8,10,12 - If an expression repeats you can leave out the repeat 8,10,12
10,10,10,10,10,10,1 - This could be simplified as 7(10) or just 10
3. After the first line of data has been set and is verified to be correct, the user sets the '
Read curve names from line' and 'Read curve units from line' line numbers. Curve
names can either be typed in, or, if they exist in the input file, they can be selected using
the 'Read curve names from line' box. In this case, the user enters the line number of the
curve names and clicks the 'Apply' button. Similarly, for Curve units, either select the line
of the input file which contains the units and click the 'Apply' button, or manually type the
units into the 'Curve Units' row. The curve names and units must be in the same format
as the first line of data for this to work.
4. The program will check the 'Curve Name' entries in the input ASCII file against the IP
Curve Defaults files (CPARMDEF.PAR & CPARMDEF_USER.PAR). Curve names that
are included in these files will have their curve 'Types' automatically set. Curve types are
shown in the Formatting panel, in row 3 from the top, as illustrated below. The user can
manually assign a curve type to blank entries by clicking in the appropriate cell in the grid
and choosing from the drop-down list.
The 'Curve Type' row allows the user to select the curve 'type' that is attached to an input
curve. Curve 'types' are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves and default
curve display characteristics used in some calculation modules. 'Curve Types' can be set
later in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module. The default curve type for each input curve
is looked up when the file is scanned.
Load Set Selection Panel

The 'Default Load Set' drop-down list box allows the user to select which Curve 'Set' to load the
new ASCII data into. This can be set simultaneously for all curves, by selecting the required 'Set

Name' from the 'Default Load Set' list.
The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new Sets using the 'Manage Curve Sets' module.
If a new Set name is created, the user is prompted to use this Curve Set to load all curves into. A
dialog similar to the following screen capture is launched. Click 'Yes' to set the new Curve Set for
all curves to be imported. The 'Load into Set' line is updated.
The 'Reference Depth Curve' drop-down list allows the user to specify the Depth 'type' for the file
to be loaded. This feature allows the user to load data files, for example, that have only a TVD or
TVDSS depth curve as the depth reference. If a 'DEPTH' curve exists in the ASCII file, IP will
display the following error message when you try to load the file.
In this case, the user must choose whether to change the 'Reference Depth Curve' to 'DEPTH'
or to rename the 'DEPTH' curve to something else. For example, the name could be changed to '
DEPTHin', which IP will not interpret as a measured depth curve.
'Formatted Data' Panel

The central 'grid' display in the 'ASCII Load' window displays the parsed input data, separated
into columns, together with all the 'Curve Names', 'Curve Units', 'Curve Types', 'Load-into Set'
and 'Array size' and 'Array Index' settings.

The Depth / Time Index

'Depth' / 'Time' Curve Units - For wells whose data is defined in terms of 'Depth', whether that is
Measured Depth (MD) or True Vertical Depth (TVD or TVDSS) the depth curve must be labelled '
DEPTH' in the input 'Curve Name' box, but it does not have to be in the first column in the input
file. For 'Time' indexed wells, the time curve must be labelled 'TIME'. The units for the 'DEPTH' or
'TIME' column are used to determine whether the depth needs to be converted to match the
current well depths before loading. The units box should be 'M' for file depths in metres, 'FT' for
file depths in feet, 'MS' for times in milliseconds and 'SEC' for times in seconds.
'Array Size' and 'Array Index' Selection

The 'Array Size' row in the Formatting 'grid' allows the user to define the dimensions of
the data in an arraytype input file. A 'normal' curve, for example 'GR', would have an 'X
dimension' of 1 and 'Z dimension' of 1. A Water Saturation (Sw) array file, for
example, like that illustrated below, has an 'X dimension' of 6, (there are 6 columns of
Sw and 6 columns of Pc values). A 'Z dimension' has to be chosen that will allow all
plug depths to be saved into the array curve. Too low a 'Z dimension' and some closely
spaced plugs will not get saved into the array. However, if the set into which the data is
to be loaded has an 'irregular' step then the 'Z dimension' can be left at 1. As the IP 'Z
dimension' will match the input dataset 'Z dimension'.
'Array Index' - the user should also define the array dimensions of the input data using
the 'Array Index' row of the Formatted Data 'grid'. Using the same Water Saturation
(Sw) example input file, you would type in the array index numbers for the Pc and Sw
columns as shown below.
Loading Array Data
Loading Capillary Pressure Data as Arrays:

Capillary pressure data can also be loaded in the manner described here. The workflow is
explained, using the example array data file illustrated below, which contains 2 curves 'Phi' and
'Gd' which are 'normal' one-dimensional curves and 2 two-dimensional arrays 'Sw' and 'Pc', each
with six array elements. The data will be loaded into an 'irregular' step set which will keep the
same depths as the original dataset.
Depth Phi Gd Sw Pc
m dec gm/cc dec psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
2091.2 0.2 2.68 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.1 0 5 10 20 50 60
2093.6 0.18 2.64 1 0.95 0.64 0.42 0.22 0.11 0 5 10 20 50 60
2094.5 0.16 2.66 1 0.92 0.63 0.53 0.23 0.13 0 5 10 20 50 60
2095.7 0.15 2.69 1 0.88 0.62 0.49 0.29 0.19 0 5 10 20 50 60
1. Select the ASCII file containing the array data and, when the 'ASCII Load' module
launches, the data panel at the bottom of the window is populated with the selected file.
2. Select the appropriate formatting separator ('Space', 'tab' etc..) for the input file.
3. Select the 'Data Starts at line' number and click 'Apply'.
4. If the data file contains curve names and curve units lines, set these numbers and click
the associated 'Apply' buttons. The 'Formatted Data' panel will show all the data
columns in the 'grid'.
5. Set the 'Default Load Set' to the required Curve Set by using the 'drop down' menu. If
the required set does not exist then create it by using the 'Edit Sets' button. For this
dataset an 'irregular' spaced step set will be used.
6. Examine the file and determine the dimensions of the required arrays. In the example,

the Sw and Pc data each have 6 array elements (6 columns of data).
7. Set the 'Array Size' in the first column of the 'Sw' data block, by clicking in the 'Array
Size' cell in that column. A dialog pops up which allows you to set the 'Curve Dimensions
'. The 'X Dimension' should equal the number of columns of data in the array. The 'Z
Dimension' setting can be used to load array data at a smaller depth increment than the
current 'well step'. However, as the set into which the data will be loaded has an 'irregular'
step then this 'Z Dimension' can be left at 1. Set the dimensions of any other arrays in the
input ASCII file, 'Pc' in this example. See the examples given below:
8. On clicking the 'Load' button, IP will create the 'Pc' and 'Sw' arrays with dimensions
based on the indices typed into the 'Array Index' row. This can be confirmed by looking at
the 'Manage Log Curve Headers' module, 'Statistics' tab, as illustrated below:

If the data is viewed using 'View - Curve Listing / Curve Edit' and the 'Expand Array Data' box
ticked, it can be seen that the imported data has the same depths as the original dataset.
Operations Buttons
The Operations buttons, located at the bottom of the user-interface are described below:
Click the 'Load' button to load the ASCII data. The data will be loaded to the closest
sample increment in the well. If a line cannot be read, then the program will skip it and
proceed to the next line. Data can be in any depth order in the file.
'New File' - this allows the user to choose another file to load.
'Save Format' - the user can save the format of the file to disk. This is useful if one has
a lot of files to load, with exactly the same format, which cannot be formatted
automatically by the program.
'Load Format' - this will load the saved format.
The 'Create New Well' button allows the user to create a new IP well and then sets this
newly-created well as the well to load the ASCII data into.
The 'Set Well' button sets the ASCII-read well 'focus'. This will be the well name into
which the curve data will be loaded and is the Well name that is displayed at the top of
the 'ASCII Load' window. The button can be used to load several ASCII files into
different wells without having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the
well focus on the primary IP window by using the 'Well Navigation' buttons
on the IP Toolbar and then 'clicks' the 'Set Well' button on the 'ASCII
Load' window.
Overwriting Existing Curves in IP

If the user loads a number of files to IP which contain data with the same curve mnemonics they

will be prompted that 'Curve XXXX already exists. OK to overwrite ?'.
The 'Overwrite' function in IP actually performs a 'replace and concatenate' operation, in effect
an Auto-Splice, NOT a replace the existing curve with new data. This is illustrated below:
Two ASCII files containing core porosity/permeability data with a common depth point at 3610M
depth. CORE1.txt is loaded and the data displayed in IP. The CORE2.txt file is loaded and the
'Warning' message appears. Selecting 'Yes' or 'All' will allow IP to replace the common data
point at 3610 M and add/concatenate the new data points to the existing curve.
If the user wants to completely replace the existing curve with a new curve you must first 'delete'
the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external file.

11.2 LAS / LBS Load

The 'LAS / LBS Load' module launches a 'Windows Explorer' dialog which is used to locate the
'file-to-load'.
Select the 'file-to-load' from the 'browse' window. The selected LAS / LBS Format file will be
loaded into the interface shown below.
The program will load either 'wrapped' or 'unwrapped' LAS data from version 1.2 and 2.0 LAS files
as well as LBS files. LBS are LAS files with the data encoded in binary format. The file name
being loaded is shown in the 'LAS/LBS Load' header bar, as illustrated below.
The 'LAS/LBS Load' window is launched. This interface allows the user to select the curves to
load into IP. It is now possible to load multiple datasets with different step sizes from individual
wells or from multi-wells all from within the same LAS file.
Section 11.2 Data Loading : LAS / LBS Load

The 'Embedded LAS Sequences' window allows the user to see if the LAS file that they have
loaded is a concatenated LAS files. If it is then the LAS files will be listed in this window. By
'clicking' on each file in turn, the contents of the LAS file are displayed. Changes can be made
before loading the data and moving onto the next concatenated file.
By default, on loading a new LAS file into the interface, all curve rows have the 'Load' column
'checked', which flags these curves to be loaded into IP. You can manually 'un-check' curve

names you do not wish to load. Clicking in the 'Load' Column header toggles between 'all
selected' and 'none selected' states. If a few data rows are 'checked' and you click in the column
header, the 'Load' selection is reversed. The first curve in the list, which should be 'Depth', does
not need to be selected, since the data will be aligned to the primary depth curve that is defined
by the 'Interval to Load (MD)' and 'IP Well Step', which are picked from the LAS file header data
section.
Depth data can be in feet in the LAS file and loaded into a metric depth units well. You can load
part of the file by defining the interval under 'Interval to Load (MD)'. The 'Interval to Load (MD)'
Top Depth / Bottom Depth, or Times, values will be in the 'IP Well Units', regardless of what units
the file is recorded in. If the 'Interval to Load (MD)' extends outside the IP wells depth range the
following message will be displayed.
If 'Yes' is selected then the 'Well Depths Editor' module will be launched so that the well can be
extended. For 'time data' wells, the depth units can be set to either seconds or milliseconds. The
primary input curve should be called 'TIME'.
The 'IP Name' column lists all the curve names in the selected LAS File. You may
manually change the curve name by typing in new text. Alternatively, a 'Curve Alias
Defaults' file can be set up to load curves from various data sources / logging service
companies to a common set of IP curve names. See the 'Tools' 'Defaults' 'Edit
Curve Alias Defaults' module. This is useful, for example, if the user has a corporate
log naming convention and wants to load curves from external sources using the
corporate mnemonics.
The 'Units' name for a particular curve is picked up from the LAS file. You may
manually change the curve 'Units' by typing in new text.
If the user wishes to load data files that do not contain a 'Depth' curve, this can be
achieved by setting the 'Reference Depth Curve' to the appropriate curve (TVDSS or
TVD) included on the LAS file. Curves will be loaded in 'TVD' or 'TVDSS' mode.

The 'Type' column allows the user to select the generic 'Curve Type' that is loaded for
the input curve. 'Curve types' are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves
and display criteria used in many interpretation modules. These can be set later in the '
Manage Curve Headers' screen. The default 'Curve Type' for each input curve is
looked up in the CPARMDEF.PAR file in the IP Program directory, when the file is
scanned. If a curve name entry is found in this external file, the curve display properties
will be set up at load time.
'Load LAS Parameters' - if the 'Load LAS Parameters' box (top right-hand corner of
the interface) is 'checked', then the well name and mud resistivity data will be loaded (if
available in the LAS file). Two radio buttons control where, in the IP 'Manage Well
Header Info.' module the LAS well parameters are stored.The options are:
1. 'Use Run # from file' - if selected, the LAS parameters are matched to the exact
'Run Number' column of the 'Logging' tab in the 'Manage Well Header Info.'
module.
2. 'Start at Run' - if selected, allows you to manually type in a log 'Run Number' to
populate with the LAS parameters.
If the selected LAS file was created from an older version of IP (pre.V3.3) where the 'Write well

parameters' option had been chosen, default curve display properties would be picked up from
the file, in preference to the 'defaults' defined in either the CPARMDEF.PAR or
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR files at load time if 'Load LAS Parameters' is 'checked'.
If the selected LAS File was created by IP, and the 'Use Set Names' option was used in the
export operation, IP will recreate the appropriate curve Sets when such a file is loaded back into
IP.
'Add to Curve Name' - the 'Add to Curve Name' options of 'Prefix' or 'Extension' allow
the user to add an extension to the names of all the curves to be loaded (for example,
add a '1' to the curve names to denote they come from log run 1). Type the Prefix /
Extension into the appropriate box and click 'Add'. NOTE: curve names with more
than 10 characters will be truncated to 10 characters.
'Fill Data Gaps' - the 'Fill data gaps' option, when 'checked' allows the module to
automatically extrapolate across gaps in the input data during the 'Load' operation. This
is useful, for example, if one is loading a one sample per foot file into a two sample per
foot well. The 'Max Gap width' text entry box allows the user to set the maximum gap to
be filled. The 'gap width' is defined in database sample increments.
'Default Load Set' - the 'Default Load Set' entry box allows the user to individually
select which Curve 'Set' to load the LAS/LBS data into. This can be set simultaneously
for all curves, by selecting the required 'Set Name' from the 'Default Load Set'
drop-down list.
The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new Curve Sets using the 'Manage
Curve Sets' module. If a new Set Name is created, the user is prompted to use this Set
to load all curves into. A dialog similar to the following screen capture is launched. Click
'Yes' to set the new Curve Set for all curves to be imported.

'Sort Alphabetically' - 'checking' this box will sort the curves in the LAS file in alphabetic
order / 'unchecking' the box will reset the list to the LAS file curve order.
'Sort Using Curve Type' - if Curve 'Types' (generic names) are recognized, IP will sort
the curves in ascending alphabetic order, according to their curve type.
The 'Load' button loads the selected LAS data into IP.
The 'New File' Button - this button can be used to select a new LAS file to load, without
having to close the module and open it again.
The 'Create New Well' Button - this button allows the user to create a new IP well and
then sets this newly-created well as the well to load the LAS data into.
The 'Set Well' button sets the LAS-Load well 'focus'. This will be the well name into
which the curve data will be loaded and is the Well name that is displayed at the top of
the 'LAS Load' window. The button can be used to load several LAS files into different
wells without having to close the 'LAS Load' window and re-open it. The user changes
the well focus on the main IP window by using the 'Select Well to Display' options and
then 'clicks' the 'Set Well' button on the 'LAS Load' window.
NOTE: It is possible to use the 'LAS Load' module to create a primary 'reference depth curve'
without having a LAS file to load. To do this, click 'Cancel' when asked which file to load. On the '
LAS Load' window, shown above, enter the interval, step, and units for the desired primary depth
curve.

an 'Auto-Splice', NOT a 'replace whole of existing curve with new data'.
For example:
An IP well has a GR curve loaded over the depth interval 0-3000 ft

A second LAS file is loaded containing a curve GR over the depth range 2500-6000ft
On loading the second file the following 'Warning' message appears.
Selecting 'Yes' or 'All' (if there are other curves with existing versions) will prompt IP to replace

the existing GR curve from 2500-3000 ft with data from the new curve and to add/concatenate
the new GR data from 3000-6000 ft to the existing curve.
If the user wants to completely replace the existing curve with a new curve you must first
'delete' the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external
file.

11.3 LAS3 Load

The module allows the user to load LAS3 format data files into IP. LAS3 data files are able to
store well data, such as core plug analysis results, DST Test results, Formation Tops in addition
to log curves, in the same file. Data is partitioned .... See the Canadian Well Log Association
website (http://cwls.org/las_info.php) for a full description of the LAS3 standard. It can also be
used to load LAS files. NOTE: this loader can not handle concatenated LAS files. Use the '
LAS/LBS Load' for this.
From 'Input / Output' 'Load Data' 'LAS3 Load', the module can be opened. The first
window to be launched is a 'Select LAS/LAS3 file' dialog from which the user can browse to the
appropriate folder / file name to be loaded. After selecting a data file to load, the main 'LAS3
Load' interface is launched.
To Import Wells - drag/drop the 'Well', using the left-hand mouse button, from the right-hand
'Tree' view panel into the upper, 'Wells to Import' panel. Alternatively right-mouse-click on a well
name and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen. IP will read the LAS/LAS3 entries and
will show a similar status window as that illustrated below while it is reading the file. The user has
the option to terminate the 'import' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The
'import' operation will populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the LAS/LAS3 well names. All the
available LAS/LAS3 curves will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list.
Section 11.3 Data Loading : LAS3 Load

To Load Curves - drag/drop the individual curve names from the 'Tree' view panel into the lower,
'Curves to Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-button-click on a curve name and click the '
Add' button that appears on-screen. The 'Curves to Import' panel will populate with the selected
curves. To load all the curves for a selected well then drag/drop the 'Curve' title into the 'Curves
to Import' panel.
To Edit Imported Well Details - before importing the selected data into IP, the user may want to
edit the well name or well details. This is achieved by right mouse button 'clicking' on the 'IP Well
Name' in the 'Wells to Import' panel. A 'Properties' box appears. Select this and an 'External
DB Well Properties' window opens up.

Any of the 'External Well' details can be changed by the user. When 'Apply' is 'clicked' then
these changes are seen in the 'IP Well' column.
The user can choose to leave all the well details as they are, in which case a new IP database
well with the 'External Well' name will be created in the current IP database, or, if the LAS/LAS3
well already has a corresponding IP well name entry, that well can be selected from the well
drop-down list at the top of the screen. In this case, imported log curves will be written to the IP
well, into the user-selected curve set.

To Edit Imported Curve Details - individual log curve properties can be viewed in the 'Curves to
Import' panel by right-mouse-button clicking on a curve name. The following dialog will be
launched:
If you wish to make changes to the curve properties, make them in this dialog and click 'OK'. The '
Curves to Import' panel entry will update to reflect the changes made.

The 'Operations' buttons
'Load All' - the 'Load All' button will execute the import operation of wells / sets and
curves from the LAS/LAS3 file into IP.
'Remove All' - the 'Remove All' button clears all the wells and log curves from the two
right-hand panels of the 'Import into IP' screen.
External Database Interface 'Check-box' Options

The following import options can be 'checked' / 'un-checked' on the 'Import into IP' tab in order to
manage the way Well and Curves data are brought into IP from the LAS/LAS3 file:
'Overwrite Existing Curves'- if 'checked', when importing a curve or curves from the
LAS/LAS3 file into an existing IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the
LAS/LAS3 file curves will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be
warned that an identical curve name already exists in the IP well.
'Use "Load Into Set" option' - if 'checked' and the curves are being imported to an
existing IP well, the import operation will ignore the LAS/LAS3 file curve Set names and
will write the imported curves into the user-selected IP curve Set (set up from the Well
'Properties' window). If the box is left 'un-checked', the LAS/LAS3 file curve Sets will be
created in the IP database and curves will be loaded into them.
'Fill Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any small (up to 5 depth
increments) data gaps existing in the imported curves during the import operation. If the
user wishes to copy Core analysis data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density,
Permeability) then the 'Fill Gaps' option should be left 'un-checked'. Importing
continuous log curves and discrete core analysis data from LAS/LAS3 file to IP would
therefore require a two step import operation, with 'Fill Gap' switched 'on' for continuous
logs and 'off' for core data.
'Link Zones' - if 'checked', IP will import LAS/LAS3 file Tops information and link the
entries to make a continuous IP Zone Set where the base of one formation is
automatically taken as the next deepest Formation Top depth.

11.4 LIS Load

The 'LIS Load' module launches a 'Windows Explorer' dialog which is used to locate the
'file-to-load'.
Select the 'file-to-load' from the 'browse' window. The selected LIS file will be scanned and the
following window will then be displayed:
The selected LIS File name is displayed in the 'LIS Load' dialog header, in the top left hand
corner of the window, next to the Well name.
The LIS 'File Scan' can be viewed or printed by 'clicking' the 'Print scan report' or 'View Scan'
buttons, respectively. Listings can either be:
'Short' : containing only curve names and intervals, or

'Long' : containing a full listing of the LIS file structure.
The 'show comments' check box, if 'checked', will include any comments found in the LIS file, in
the short listing. A file 'LISscan.log' is automatically created in the project directory, which
contains the results of the last LIS scan. The following is an example of a short listing of the
above file, produced by clicking the 'View Scan' button:
Section 11.4 Data Loading : LIS Load

The internal LIS file sequences will be displayed in the box called 'Select File Sequence' on the
right hand panel of the 'LIS Load' window . 'Click' on the file sequence row in the 'Select File
Sequence' you wish to 'view' or 'load'. The curves in the selected file sequence will be displayed
in the left hand 'grid' panel.
Select the curves to load by clicking the 'Load' 'cell' opposite the curve name. By clicking the '
Load' label at the top of the right hand column the user can toggle between 'select all curves' and
'de-select all curves'. The 'Load' column is useful if the user only wants to load one or two curves
out of a long list.
Input curve names or curve units can be changed, during loading, by manually editing the 'IP
Name' or 'Units' columns. A 'Curve Alias Defaults' file can be set up to load curves from various
data sources / logging service companies to a common set of IP curve names. See the 'Tools'
'Defaults' 'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' module. This is useful, for example, if the user has a
corporate log naming convention and wants to load curves from external sources using the
By 'checking' the 'Append to curve Name - Service ID' box, the curve service ID (see full scan)
will be appended to the 'IP Name'. The service ID is used in several programs, including IP, to
extend the length of the curve name from four characters (LIS format limits curve names to four
characters). All characters, from the 4th character onwards, are put into the service ID.
Curve Sorting - Curve names in the Load 'grid' panel can be sorted either using the '
Sort Curves Alphabetically' check box or the 'Sort Curves using Curve Type' check
box. These options may help in selecting a few required curves from a long list of
available curves in the input LIS file. For example, If the user has set up the curve
defaults file, CPARMDEF.PAR (See 'Tools' 'Defaults' 'Edit Curve System
Defaults') to pick up required curve names and has assigned curve 'Types', then IP will
map the curve types to recognized curve names. Using the 'Sort Curves using Curve
Type' check box will quickly 'filter' these curves from all those stored in the input file.
Curve Type - The 'Type' column allows the user to select the curve type that is loaded
for the input curve. Curve types are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves
used in some modules. These can be set later in the 'Manage Curve Headers'. The
default curve type for each input curve is looked up when the file is scanned.
Curve Load Set - The 'Default Load Set' entry box allows the user to individually select
which Curve 'Set' to load the LIS data into. This can be set simultaneously for all curves,
by selecting the required 'Set Name' from the 'Default Load Set' list.
The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new Curve Sets using the 'Manage

Curve Sets' module. If a new Set Name is created, the user is prompted to use this Set
to load all curves into. A dialog similar to the following screen capture is launched. Click
'Yes' to set the new Curve Set for all curves to be imported.
The 'Curve Step' drop down box allows the step to be selected for when populating the '
Load Set' column using the 'Default Load Set' drop down control.
The 'Prefix' box is used when creating automatic set names. The set name will include
this text (LIS_*)plus a numeric value in order to make it unique.
'Auto. New Sets' button is used to create a new set for each different step interval in the
well. The set name will include whatever is in the 'Prefix' box plus a numeric value.
Some curves in LIS files contain higher sample rate data that the normal frame spacing. The part
listing, below, of a full scan shows this:
Curve Service Units File Size Num Rep

Name ID # Byte Samp Code
BS OBDTAB IN 59 4 1 68
CS OBDTAB F/HR 59 4 1 68
AVCL OBDTAB V 59 20 1 68
SCNL OBDTAB 59 2 1 79
NPOR OBDTAB PU 59 4 1 68
C1 OBDTAB IN 59 16 4 68
C2 OBDTAB IN 59 16 4 68
The 'Rep' column displays the 'repeat count' of a curve in each frame of data. This
packing of multiple values into the same frame is used for array data. If an array curve is
selected to be loaded into IP then a similar, dimensioned array curve will be created.
The 'Num Samp' column contains the number of samples per frame. The user can see
that curves BS and CS have 1 sample per frame while curves C1 and C2 have 4
samples. The AVCL curve in the above example is in fact an array data curve with 5
samples in the array. This can be determined by looking at the Size Byte for the curve
(20) and dividing this by the storage size for each value (4 bytes, Rep code 68).
The 'IP Well Units' and 'IP Well Step' boxes are used to set the IP well database units
and 'Step' if they have not been set up when the well was created.
The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes are used to define the IP well depth range if
it is not already defined.

The user can manually type in the depth Interval to load using the 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom
Depth' boxes, or 'double click' on a file sequence row will launch the following dialog:
This allows the actual file sequence depth range to be used as the 'Interval to Load'.
Depth data can be in feet in the file and loaded into a metric depth units well. The user can load
part of the file by defining the interval under 'Interval to Load'. The interval-to-load depth units will
be in the well depth units, regardless of what units the file is recorded in. If the 'Interval to Load'
extends outside the well interval the following message will be displayed.
extended.
The 'IP Well Name' box allows the setting or editing of the well name. The 'Well Comment' (see '
Manage Well Header Info.') can be set from the well name box by placing a colon, with a space
before and after, ( : ) after the well name and appending the well comment after the colon. For
example '14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well comment of '
Preliminary'.
The 'Load LIS Parameters' check box will allow the loading of any recognised parameters found
in the LIS file. The 'Which Run' box allows the user to select which logging run the parameter
data will be loaded into (see Manage Well Header Info.). The following table shows the LIS
parameters currently recognized and loaded to IP by default. This list is user-editable from the '
Tools' 'Options' 'Well Attributes' and 'Log Attributes' modules.

'Fill Data Gaps' - the 'Fill Data Gaps' check box will extrapolate the curve data over null
data gaps when loading. If not 'checked' this same function can be performed using the '

Fill Data Gaps' module.
If the user wants to add an extension to the name of all the curves (e.g. add a '1' to the curve
names to denote they come from log run 1), then type the extension in the 'Extension' box and
click 'Add'.
The 'OK' button will load the specified curves into the specified well and sets.
'New File' - this allows the user to choose another file to load.
newly-created well as the well to load the LIS data into.
The 'Set Well' button sets the LIS-Load well 'focus'. This will be the well name into which
the curve data will be loaded and is the Well name that is displayed at the top of the 'LIS
Load' window. The button can be used to load several LIS files into different wells
without having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the well focus on
the primary IP window by using the 'Select Well to Display' options and then 'clicks' the
'Set Well' button on the 'LIS Load' window.

If the user loads a number of files to IP, which contain data with the same curve mnemonics they
For example:

A second LAS file is loaded containing a curve GR over the depth range 2500-6000ft
the existing GR curve from 2500-3000 ft and add/concatenate the new GR data from
3000-6000 ft to the existing curve.
delete the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external file.

11.5 DLIS Load

To load a DLIS formatted file:
Select the 'file-to-load' from the 'browse' window that is launched from the 'DLIS Load'
menu option. The DLIS file will be scanned and a window,similar to the following window,
will then be displayed:
NOTE: Scanning the DLIS file can take some time, depending on the size of the file. The curve
names in the DLIS file are displayed in the left-hand panel of the window. The user can view or
print the DLIS scan results by clicking the 'Print scan report' or 'View Scan' buttons. Listings can
either be:
'Short' : containing only curve names and intervals, or

'Long' : containing a full listing of the DLIS file structure.
If curves have been encrypted by the logging company then they will appear with an 'x' in the '
Load' column. They will NOT be loaded into the IP database along with the other selected curves.
Contact the logging company to get the curves unencrypted.
Section 11.5 Data Loading : DLIS Load

The 'show comments' box, if 'checked', will include any comments set in the DLIS file in the short
listing . A file of the same name as the input file with a '.log' extension is automatically created in
the IP project directory which contains the results of the last DLIS scan. The following is an
example of a short listing of the above file produced by clicking the 'View Scan' button:

The internal 'DLIS File Sequences' will be displayed in the panel on the right of the 'DLIS Load'
window. 'Click' on the file you wish to view or load. The curves in the file will be displayed in the
left hand panel.
Selecting Curves to load - the user can either:
1. manually 'check' the cells in the 'Load' column for each required curve, or
2. by clicking the 'Load' label at the top of the right hand column the user can toggle
between selecting / de-selecting all curves, or
3. using a user-defined 'Mask' File. This is selected from the 'Apply Curve Mask' option.
The user uses WINDOWS Notepad / Wordpad to write a space-delimited text file, listing
the curve mnemonics to search for and an optional IP display name. Save the text file with
a file extension of '.mask'. Then, on the 'Apply Mask' drop-down list , select 'Load Mask'.
This launches a browser window which you can use to search for the appropriate mask

file. The mask file will be applied and all curves with names matching the mask entries will
be shown in the curve list window. An example of a mask is shown below. Only the curve
names and optional IP curve name are required:
GR (looks for curve 'GR')

DT (looks for curve 'DT')
RHOZ RHOB (looks for curve name RHOZ and loads it to IP as RHOB)
The 'Apply Curve Mask' drop-down list contains a number of masking options in
addition to 'Load Mask':
'No Mask' - view all curves in the DLIS file.
'Selected' - if a number of masks have been applied and the curve 'Load' boxes have
been 'checked', this will show the combined results of all the masks.
'IP Defaults' - if a curve name is known to IP, therefore having a default curve type (see
'Tools' 'Defaults' 'Edit Curve System Defaults') , that curve will, by default, be
'checked' to be loaded.
Input curve names or curve units can be changed while loading, by editing the 'IP Name' or 'Units'
columns. Alternatively, a 'Curve Alias Defaults' file can be set up to load curves from various
data sources / logging service companies to a common set of IP curve names. See the 'Tools'
'Defaults' 'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' module. This is useful, for example, if the user has a
corporate log naming convention and wants to load curves from external sources using the
To remove any mask filters click the 'Clear Selected' button.
The 'Description' column allows the user to see the curve description that accompanies
the curve from the vendors DLIS file. The column width can be varied so that the whole
description can be seen.
The 'Type' column allows the user to select the curve type that is loaded for the input
curve. Curve types are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of curves used in some
modules. These can be set later in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module. The default
curve type for each input curve is looked up when the file is scanned.
The 'Load Set' column allows the user to individually select which curve set to load the
data into. This can be changed for all curves at the same time by selecting the required
Set from the 'Default Load Set' box. The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to create
new Sets using the 'Manage Curve Sets' module.
The 'Vals' column displays the repeat count of a curve in each frame of data. This
packing of multiple values into the same frame is used for array data (eg FMI image data
curves). If an array curve is flagged to be loaded into IP, then a similarly dimensioned
array curve will be created.
'Step' - DLIS files can contain data at various depth sample rates. The SCAN illustrated
above, shows nine indices these are :
1. 6 inches (60 x 0.1")

2. 1 inch (10 * 0.1").
3. 0.5 inches (5 * 0.1").
4. 3 inches (30 * 0.1").
5. 12 inches (120 * 0.1").
6. 18 inches (180 * 0.1").
7. 0.1 inches (1 * 0.1").
8. 0.2 inches (2 * 0.1").
9. 2 inches (20 * 0.1").

This spacing is also included on the DLIS load screen under the 'Step' column. High-rate
sampling curves can be loaded into IP as Array Data Curves with more than one depth sample
per database depth increment.
If a high sample rate curve is detected then the 'Vals' column value will be >1. If the array curve
is chosen for loading, the following dialog will be displayed.
If 'Yes' or 'Yes to All' is selected, then the data will be loaded into an IP array curve with multiple
samples in the 'Z' (depth) direction.
If 'No' or 'No to All' is selected, then the high sample rate data will be loaded into a normal curve
and the input array data will be averaged, as it is loaded, to match the sample 'Step' of the IP
well.
The 'IP Well Units' and 'IP Well Step' boxes are used to set the IP well database units and step if
they have not been set up when the well was created.
The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes are used to define the IP well interval if not already
defined. Otherwise they will define the interval in the DLIS file over which to attempt the data load.
Depth data can be in imperial units in the file and be loaded into a metric depth units well. The
user can load part of the file by defining the interval under 'Interval to Load'. The interval to load
depth units will be in the 'well depth units' regardless of what units the file is recorded in. If the '
Interval to Load' extends outside the well depth range the following message will be displayed.
extended.
If the user wants to add an extension to the name of all the curves (e.g. add a '1' to the curve
names to denote they come from log run 1), then type the extension in the 'Add Extension to
curve name' box and click 'Add'.
The 'IP Well Name' box allows the setting or editing of the well name. The 'Well Comment' (see '
Manage Well Header Info.') can be set from the well name box by placing a colon, with a space
before and after, ( : ) after the well name and appending the well comment after the colon. For
example '14/19-23 : Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well comment of '

Preliminary'.
'Load DLIS Parameters' - the 'Load DLIS Parameters' check box will allow the loading
of any recognised parameters found in the DLIS file.
The 'Use Run # from file' box allows the user to select which logging Run the
parameter data will be loaded into (see Manage Well Header Info. 'Logging' tab) or the
user can use the 'Start at Run' box to enter a run number that the DLIS data is to be
loaded into.
'Fill Data Gaps' - the 'Fill Data Gaps' check box will extrapolate the curve data over null
data gaps when loading. If not 'checked' this same function can be performed using the
'Fill Data Gaps' module.
The 'Curve Step' drop down box allows the step to be selected for when populating the
'Load Set' column using the 'Default Load Set' drop down control.
The 'Prefix' box is used when creating automatic set names. The set name will include
this text (DLIS_*)plus a numeric value in order to make it unique.
'Auto. New Sets' button is used to create a new set for each different step interval in the
well. The set name will include whatever is in the 'Prefix' box plus a numeric value.
The 'OK' button will load the specified curves into the specified well and sets. If the user
decides not to go ahead with the load once the 'OK' button has been 'clicked' then a '
Cancel' button' is now available.
'New File' - this allows the user to choose another DLIS file to load.
newly-created well as the well to load the LIS data into.
The 'Set Well' button sets the DLIS read well focus. This is the well that is displayed at
the top of the DLIS read window. The button can be used to load several DLIS files into
different wells without having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the
well focus on the primary IP window by using the 'Select Well to Display' options and
then clicks the 'Set Well' button on the DLIS read window.

For example:

A second DLIS file is loaded containing a curve GR over the depth range 2500-6000ft

the existing GR curve from 2500-3000 ft and add/concatenate the new GR data from
3000-6000 ft to the existing curve.
delete the existing curve from the IP database and then load the new curve from an external
file.

11.6 Schlumberger Tool Box
The Schlumberger 'Tool Box' program can be used to convert DLIS files to LIS for loading into IP
through the 'LIS Load'.
The installation of the Schlumberger 'Tool Box' is an option on the Interactive Petrophysics (IP)
CD ('Install Toolbox'). If the 'Tool Box' has not been installed or IP cannot find the installation
then the following screen will be displayed to prompt the user to find the directory in which the '
Tool Box' installation exists:
If a 'Tool Box' installation does not exist then the user can manually install it from the Interactive
Petrophysics CD or from the Schlumberger website at
http://www.slb.com/content/services/evaluation/software/log_data_toolbox.asp?. Once installed
the pathname for the 'Tool Box' can be added.
To load a DLIS file select the 'Load DLIS file' menu option. The user will be presented with a
dialog box to select the DLIS file to load. The file will then be automatically converted using the '
DLIS2LIS' Converter program.
Section 11.6 Data Loading : Schlumberger Tool Box

The user will be given the option to see the log files output by the converter program. If the
conversion worked then the LIS file will be displayed inside the 'LIS Load' module.
The 'DLIS View' menu option will launch the 'Tool Box DLIS InfoView' program with the selected
DLIS file already scanned. This program allows the user to view the DLIS file in its original form.
The 'DLIS2LIS Converter' menu option will launch the 'Tool Box DLIS to LIS Converter'
program in manual screen entry mode.
Section 11.6 Data Loading : Schlumberger Tool Box

11.7 DBASE4 Load
The user enters the DBASE 4 file name under the 'Database name' label and clicks 'Open' to
open the database. The depths and curves in the database will be displayed. The 'Browse' button
can be used to select the database.
The user selects the curves and the depths to load and clicks 'Load' to load the data. If data is to
be loaded into a new well then the depths, step and units set on the screen will define the well
depths, step and units. If the well depths are already defined then the 'Top' and 'Bottom' boxes
will define the data interval to load.
The 'Units' box defines the units of the database. The user can load a metric database file into an
imperial units well. For 'time' data wells, the units can be set to either seconds or milli-seconds.
The primary input curve should be called 'TIME'.
The 'Null Value' box must be set to whatever Null value is defined in the database file. The
default in IP is 999.
The 'Depth Curve Name' box defines the depth curve name in the database file. Normally this will
be 'Depth' but if the database defines the depth column with a different name this must be
entered in this box.
The 'Well Name' box allows the user to change the current well name. For a new well, this box will
be blank and the well name can be entered. The 'Well Comment' (see 'Manage Well Header
Info.') can be set from the well name box by placing a colon, with a space before and after, ( : )
Section 11.7 Data Loading : DBASE4 Load

after the well name and appending the well comment after the colon. For example '14/19-23 :
Preliminary' will create a well name of '14/19-23' with a well comment of 'Preliminary'.
The 'Set Well' button sets the DBASE 4-read well 'focus'. This sets the well name that is
displayed at the top of the DBASE 4 read window. The button can be used to load several DBASE
4 files into different wells without having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the
well focus on the primary window by using the 'Select Well to Display' options and then clicks the
'Set Well' button on the DBASE 4 read window.
Curve Load Set

The selected curve data will be loaded into the curve set selected in the 'IP Load Set' box. The '
Edit Sets' button allows the user to create new sets using the 'Manage Curve Sets' module.
Section 11.7 Data Loading : DBASE4 Load

11.8 LAS Batch Load

The 'LAS Batch Load' module allows the user to load multiple LAS files into newly-created or
existing IP wells.
Select the LAS file names from the 'Select LAS files to load' dialog box. IP reads the LAS file
headers and extracts the well name, API Number, UWI, number of curves, the log depth interval,
depth units and well step. The 'API Num.' and 'UWI' column can be turned off by 'un-checking'
the 'Display API number' and 'Display UWI' check boxes. If the LAS file do not contain API or
UWI numbers then the 'API Num.' or 'UWI' columns will not be displayed.
Select the files to load by 'checking' in the 'Load' column to the left of the 'File Name' column. If
the 'Load' column title is 'clicked', then the whole column will be set to the inverse of whatever has
been set for the first file. This allows the user to quickly select or deselect all files.
The number of files selected to be loaded can be seen in the lower left of the module screen.
The order in which wells are listed and loaded to IP can be modified by the user before
loading the LAS files. The user should 'left mouse' click in the margin to the left of the 'Load'
column. A broad grey-coloured bar will appear above the well where the mouse was clicked.
Drag the bar up or down to change the order in which the wells will be loaded into IP.
Section 11.8 Data Loading : LAS Batch Load

The 'File Name' column gives the name of the file to load. The file names cannot be
edited in the table. If alternative files need to be loaded, click the 'Select Files' button.
The 'Well Name' column shows the name of the well, taken from the LAS file header. If
the file is to be loaded to an existing IP well, the name should be changed to the name
of the IP well by 'clicking' in the 'Well Name' cell and selecting the correct well from the
drop-down box.
The 'Load into Set' column allows the user to individually select which Curve Set to load
the data into using the drop-down button to select the Curve Set. This can be changed
for all wells at the same time by selecting the required Set from the 'Set Default load
set' box. The 'Add Set' button allows the user to create new Curve Set names for
selection. Curve Sets are created in the individual well when the data are loaded.
The 'No. Crvs' column displays the number of curves in the file. This is non-editable.

The 'Top Dep.' and 'Bot Dep.' columns initially give the depth range of the data
specified in the LAS file header. These depths can be changed to limit the range of data
to load to within specified depths. If the 'Create New Well for each file' box is 'checked',
then the depths entered here will define the top and bottom depths of the new IP well.
For an existing well, if the 'Top Dep.' and 'Bot Dep.' extend outside the current well interval the
following message will be displayed.
extended. This well extension is not done automatically and the user must confirm the new depths
and close the 'Well Depths Editor' module before the LAS file is loaded.
The 'Units' and 'Step' columns initially give the depth curve units and data spacing
specified in the LAS file header. If the 'Create New Well for each file' box is 'checked',
then they will be used to specify the units and database step of the IP well. The user can
set the same 'Step' for all LAS files in the 'Batch Load' operation by 'clicking' on the '
Step' column header title. This action will set all wells in the list to the 'Step' value
shown in the top row of the grid.
If the 'Create New Well for each file' box is 'checked' then the well name entered here
will be the IP well name for the new well.
If the 'Load files into wells with same name' box is 'checked' then the 'Use to Select
IP well' panel becomes available. This offers three choices:
'Well Name'
'UWI'
'API Number'
Depending on which option is selected then as long as the well name or UWI or API number of
the selected LAS file matches a well within the IP database then the LAS data will be transferred.
If no match occurs then an error message will appear and no transfer of data will take place.
The 'Load LAS Parameters' check box will allow the loading of any parameters in the
LAS header that are acceptable to IP (See Table in LAS /LBSFile Input). 'Checking' this
option can pick up data such as mud and mud filtrate resistivity data and temperatures, if
it is encoded in a known format.
Using 'Mask' Files or the 'CurveAlias' file

The 'Use Mask to select curves' check-box allows an external text file (e.g.'LAS Mask.txt') to be
created / used to decide which curves should be selected for loading. The external file format is
very simple and consists of names of curves that should be loaded. One name per line. If the user
wants the curve to be re-named during the 'Load' operation, then the new name for the curve
should follow the original name. The following characters are acceptable to separate the 'external'
curve name from the IP 'load' name: comma, space, tab and semicolon. An example mask file is
given below.

CALI
DEPTH
DRHO
DTLN
GDCORE
LLD
LLD2 LLD
LLS
MSFL1 MSFLC
PERMCORE
PHICORE2; PHICORE
RHOB
RHOB1, RHOB
SGR
SP
TNPH
The 'Mask file name' entry box must contain the valid mask file name if the 'Use Mask to select
curves' box has been 'checked'. The 'Edit Mask File' button can be used to create or browse to
the correct file name.
If no 'Mask' file is selected but the user has a 'CurveAlias.txt' file available, (See 'Edit Curve
Alias Defaults'), then the loaded curves will be named according to the curve name 'mapping' in
the 'Curve Alias' file. NOTE: this is automatically applied, the user does not have to
manually select the 'Curve Alias' file.
The 'Fill data gaps' option allows the user to automatically extrapolate gaps in the input
data. This is useful, for example, if one is loading a one sample per foot file into a two
sample per foot well. The 'Max Gap width' allows the user to set the maximum gap for
filling, the gap is defined in database sample increments.
The 'Load' button loads the LAS files and creates any new well as required.
The 'Select Files' button allows the user to select different input LAS files to load.
The 'View Curves' button will display a window that contains the names of the curves for
the file that is currently selected (highlighted box in the data grid). The following is an
example of a listing.

The list can be used to create a Mask file for selecting the curves to load. The user must highlight
the curves required and then 'right mouse' click on the window and select the 'Copy Curve
names to clipboard'. This will then copy the curve names, but not units, to the clipboard which
can then be used to copy into the Mask file.
The 'Edit Mask File' can be used to create or edit a mask file. The user selects the file
to edit or create and then the program will automatically open it up in 'NotePad', where
the user can then modify it.

11.9 Zone Tops

See 'Manage Zones / Tops' within the 'Curve Management' chapter.
Section 11.9 Data Loading : Zone Tops

11.10 Picture Curves

See 'Edit / Load Picture Curve data'.
Section 11.10 Data Loading : Picture Curves

11.11 Text Curves

See 'Edit / Load Text Curves Data'
Section 11.11 Data Loading : Text Curves

11.12 Interval Loader

The 'Interval Loader' module allows the user to load data into the IP program such as a
facies-type interpretation, where a certain geological facies, represented by a numerical value, is
assigned over a particular depth interval. The 'Interval Loader' can also be used to load periodic /
discrete data, such as core plug analysis results (grain densities, porosities and air permeabilities)
or wireline formation tester (RFT, RCI, FMT) pressure data.
This module is very useful if the external data is presented in a spreadsheet form. The 'copy
from spreadsheet' functionality can be utilized to load large amounts of spreadsheet data into the
IP interface. The functionality has been extended in IP Version 3.3 and later versions, to allow the
user to load Array-type data into IP using this module.
Up to 200 curves can be loaded / created at one time, using this interface.
See the section on 'Loading Array Data' later in this chapter.
Data can be loaded into IP in a number of ways using this module.
1. The user can manually type values into the empty data table, or
2. Load values from an ASCII data file.
'Click' the'New File' button to launch a 'file selection' dialog and browse to the
ASCII file.
If the ASCII file has been set up with a top and bottom depth then leave the 'No
Section 11.12 Data Loading : Interval Loader

Bottom Depth' box 'un-checked'. However, if the ASCII file has only one depth
column then 'tick' the 'No Bottom Depth' box.
The format of the ASCII input file should be a series of data lines with a 'Top
Depth' entry, and / or a 'Bottom Depth' entry and then data values separated by
spaces, tabs or commas. The 'Interval Loader' only reads lines with numeric
data entries. Curve header text, curve names and curve units are not recognized
or loaded. A minimum of three data columns must exist in the input ASCII file.
For core analysis data input or when loading RFT pressure data, for example,
type in 'Bottom Depth' values that are equal to the 'Top Depth' entries, followed
by the Core porosities, air permeabilities or pressure values.
The data file should load into the interface.
Fill in the curve 'Name', curve 'Units', curve 'Set' entries for each column in the
input file and 'Click' the 'Load' button.
3. Data can also be copied and pasted into the interface from an external spreadsheet.
Select the data range in the spreadsheet to be copied and copy it ('CTRL C' or
right-hand mouse button 'Copy') into the clipboard. NOTE: the 'Copy/ Paste'
functionality only works with 'continuous' spreadsheet data ranges. 'Click' on the
cell on the 'Interval Loader' grid into which to start the 'paste' operation.
'Click' the 'Paste' icon button at the base of the window. DO NOT use the
'paste' function from the drop-down menu obtained by right mouse clicking on a
cell. This will only paste a single value into the selected cell.

The 'Header' rows of the 'Interval Loader' interface, with titles in cells with a grey background
colour, are described below:
The 'Name' row allows the user to set up curve names for each column of data loaded
into the interface.
The 'Units' row allows the user to set up curve 'Units' for each column of data loaded
into the interface.
The 'Type' row in the grid allows the user to select the internal IP curve 'type' that is
assigned to the input data. Curve types are used in IP to help with the auto-selection of
curves used in some modules. Alternatively, these can be set later in the 'Manage
Curve Headers'.
The 'Set' row in the grid allows the user to individually select which Curve Set to load the
curve data into. This can be changed for all curves at the same time by selecting the
required Set from the 'Default Load Set' box. The 'Edit Sets' button allows the user to
create new Sets using the 'Manage Curve Sets' module.
The 'Array Sze' row allows the user to set up the 'dimensions' of curves to be created
when the 'Load' button is clicked. (see 'Loading Array Data' for a full explanation).
When the array size is set to contain multiple X array values the 'Array No.' row will be
auto-filled with the appropriate number of columns. The 'Name' row is also populated for
the entire array.
The 'Array No.' row allows the user to set up the 'Array Index number' of a data column
in an array-type curve.
If the 'Delete Curves before write' check box is 'checked', IP will totally clear an existing IP curve
of its data before writing newly imported data to it. If this box is not 'checked' (the default setting),
this allows the user to append/concatenate new data to an existing curve in the database.
Clicking the 'Clear All' button removes all data entries from the 'Interval Loader' screen.
The 'Clear Row' button allows the user to remove all data entries from a selected row
from within the 'Interval Loader' screen.
The 'Clear Column' button allows the user to remove all data entries from a selected
column from within the 'Interval Loader' screen.
The 'Load' Button - clicking the 'Load' button executes the 'load' operation for the data

currently visible in the interface.

The 'New File' button - clicking the 'New File' button launches a 'Browse' dialog that the
user can use to navigate to locate the file-to-load.
The 'Paste' button - clicking the 'Paste' button pastes the data previously selected from
an external spreadsheet into the interface. The user should first click in an appropriate
cell in the grid to define the first cell for the 'Paste' operation.
Loading Array Data

Loading Capillary Pressure Data as Arrays:
Capillary pressure data can also be loaded in the manner described here. The workflow is
explained, using the example array data file illustrated below, which contains 2 curves 'Phi' and
'Gd' which are 'normal' one-dimensional curves and 2 two-dimensional arrays 'Sw' and 'Pc', each
with six array elements. The data will be loaded into an 'irregular' step set which will keep the
same depths as the original dataset.
Depth Phi Gd Sw Pc
m dec gm/cc dec psi
1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3 4 5 6
2091.2 0.2 2.68 1 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2 0.1 0 5 10 20 50 60
2093.6 0.18 2.64 1 0.95 0.64 0.42 0.22 0.11 0 5 10 20 50 60
2094.5 0.16 2.66 1 0.92 0.63 0.53 0.23 0.13 0 5 10 20 50 60
2095.7 0.15 2.69 1 0.88 0.62 0.49 0.29 0.19 0 5 10 20 50 60
1. Either, click the 'New File' button and browse to the appropriate ASCII file containing
the array data (check the 'No Bottom Depth' box if the imported data does not have a
bottom depth column). The data panel at the bottom of the window is populated with the
selected file. Or, with an external spreadsheet open, copy / paste data into the appropriate
column(s) in the Interval Loader module.
2. Either, manually type in curve names and curve units for each column of date or copy /
paste them in from the spreadsheet source. If the curve name of one element within an
array curve is subsequently changed then all the curve names within the array are
changed.
3. Select Curve 'Types' from the drop-down list, where appropriate.
4. Examine the input file and determine the dimensions of the required arrays. In the
example file, the Phi and Gd are conventional one-dimensional (1x 1) curves while the Sw
and Pc data are arrays, each having 6 array elements (6 columns of data).
5. Set the 'Default Load Set' to the required Curve Set by using the 'drop down' menu. If
the required set does not exist then create it by using the 'Edit Sets' button. For this
dataset an 'irregular' spaced step set will be used.

6. Set the 'Array Size' in the first column of the 'Sw' data block, by clicking in the 'Array
Size' cell in that column. A dialog pops up which allows you to set the 'Curve Dimensions
'. The 'X Dimension' should equal the number of columns of data in the array. The 'Z
Dimension' setting can be used to load array data at a smaller depth increment than the
current 'well step'. However, as the set into which the data will be loaded has an 'irregular'
step then this 'Z Dimension' can be left at 1. Set the dimensions of any other arrays in the
input ASCII file, Pc in this example.
7. The 'Array No.' and 'Name' for each column of the array auto-populates.
8. On clicking the 'Load' button, IP will create the Pc and Sw arrays with dimensions
based on the indices typed into the 'Array Index' row. This can be confirmed by looking at
the 'Manage Log Curve Headers' module, 'Statistics' tab, as illustrated below:

If the data is viewed using 'View - Curve Listing / Curve Edit' and the 'Expand Array Data' box
ticked, it can be seen that the imported data has the same depths as the original dataset.

11.13 Capillary Pressure Data Loader

The capillary pressure (PC) data loader is designed to assist the entering of PC data into IP. A
maximum of 100 plugs can be entered at any one time. It removes the need for using the 'Interval
Loader' to perform this operation. The new PC loader is designed to load data in columns. Extra
data associated with the PC measurement can also be loaded at the same time. This new loader
is very flexible as it is highly unlikely that all the input spreadsheet data is arranged in such a way
that it will be able to be loaded with just one mouse click. An example of how data could be
arranged in a spreadsheet for one-mouse-click loading into the loader is shown further down this
chapter - click this link.
The loader form, as shown above, consists of a grid where data can either be typed in or be cut
and pasted in from a spreadsheet. There is a 'Paste' button which can be used for multiple data
selection pastes or if the user right mouse clicks on a cell standard Windows cut/paste operations
are available.
'Well' column - the form allows the loading of data into multiple wells at the same time.
The user selects the well from a drop down of loaded wells. If 'Well' is left blank then the
currently focused well is selected. If PC data is being entered for a well and then the
user moves onto the next column the well will be assumed to be the same and the 'Well'
cell will be auto-filled in. 100 sets of PC data can be loaded in any one session.
'Depth' column - this can be typed in or pasted in from a spreadsheet using the 'Paste'
button or else right mouse button 'click' on the cell and select 'paste' from the pop-up
menu.
Section 11.13 Data Loading : Capillary Pressure Data Loader

'Curve 1' row - the number of input curves is user configurable through use of the 'No.
of Curves' selector. In the example above 'No. of Curves' is set at 2 so only two curve
rows are seen. The 'Name' and 'Units' have to be manually entered by the user whereas
the 'Type' can be selected from a drop down list for each of the curves. The value of the
curve in the row can be typed in or pasted in from a spreadsheet using the 'Paste' button
or else right mouse button 'click' on the cell and select 'paste' from the pop-up menu.
'Text Curve 1' row -the number of text curves is user configurable through use of the '
No. of Text Curves' selector. The 'Name' can be typed or pasted into the cell.
'PC' row - enables the user to define the 'Name', 'Units' and 'Type' of the PC curve
which will be loaded via the 'PC' column.
'PC Sat.' row - enables the user to define the 'Name', 'Units' and 'Type' of the PC
Saturation curve which will be loaded via the 'PC Sat' column.

'PC' column and 'PC Sat.' column - can be filled in by copying from a spreadsheet and
then 'clicking' on the first cell and using the 'Paste' button. The number of rows of data
can be upto a maximum of 100.
'Reference Depth Curve' - the depth entered per PC plug in the 'Depth' column can
either reference the depth curve in the well or an entered reference curve. This allows
the user to enter the depths as TVDSS.
'Default Load Set' - this is the curve Set that the PC curves will be created in. Sets can
be selected from the drop down list or else new Sets can be created using the 'Edit Sets
' button and the 'Add Set Names' dialogue.
'Depth Tolerance' - when loading data into an irregular step curve Set the program has
to decide whether the depth of the data being loaded corresponds to depth already in
the Set or whether a new depth in the Set has been created. The 'Depth Tolerance'
parameter is the allowable difference between the two depths in order to count the
depths as the same.
'PC Data Order' - allows the user to switch the column order to reflect how the PC data
is arranged in the spreadsheet.
'No. of Curves' - the default number of curves is five though this can be changed to
whatever the user requires by use of the 'up/down' arrows.
'No. of Text Curves' - the default number of text curves is two.
'Null Output Curves Before Loading' - if this is 'checked' on then previously created
curves will be nulled before being over-written by the 'new' load. NOTE: this applies
specifically to the core porosity and permeability curves. The array PC curves are
automatically nulled before a 'new' load occurs.
'Skip Column When Pasting PC data' - this 'check' box relates to the core porosity and
permeability data. It tends to be written in a single column in a spreadsheet whereas the
Pc and Pc Sat. data takes up two columns. So when pasting the data in the core
porosity and permeability data gets offset. To avoid this, 'check' the box on then the
blank columns in the core porosity and permeability data are skipped over.


'Paste' - using this 'Paste' button allows the user to select multi-rows or columns in a
spreadsheet and to paste these in one go into the loader form. Unless the data is in the
same layout as the loader form, which is highly unlikely, then a number of paste
operations will have to be performed.
'Clear All' - allows the loader form to be cleared of all data entries.
'Clear Row' - will clear all cells in the current row to the right of the currently selected
cell.
'Clear Column' - will clear all cells in the current column below the currently selected
cell.
'Load' - when the 'Load' button is 'clicked' the necessary curves will be created. The PC
curves will be created with an 'X' array size equal to the maximum number of rows used
for the data entry. If this is less than the 'X' array size of the original curve then the size
of the 'X' array will remain the same. Hence, the 'X' array size will always be the
maximum needed to hold all the PC data.
An example spreadsheet is shown below in a format which will allow it to be pasted into the '
Capillary Pressure Data Loader' in three copy and paste operations:


NOTE: the Curve 1....2 ...etc 'Name', 'Units' and 'Type' can all be filled in by hand rather than
copying and pasting them in from a spreadsheet.

11.14 Load Well Attributes

The 'Load Well Attributes' module provides the user with a means to bulk load well 'cultural'
data (attributes) into IP from an external text file or from a spreadsheet selection, either loading :
into pre-existing, in-memory wells in an IP database, or
into newly-created IP wells, populating these wells with well properties (attributes) from
the external file.
Well attributes are saved into the 'Manage Well Header Info.' interface for each IP well
that has a data entry in the external text file.
'Well Attributes' can include such things as 'Well Name', 'Operating Company', 'Unique Well
Identifier (UWI)', 'Spud Date', 'Completion Date', 'Well Completion Status', as well as the '
Permanent Datum', 'Rig Reference elevations', 'Latitude', 'Longitude' of a well. The full range
of cultural data fields that are available to be loaded into IP are listed in the IP Configuration '
Options' tool, in the 'Well Attributes' section. The list of Well Attributes is 'dynamic', meaning
that the user can modify entries and extend the list to store additional, new attributes.
The 'Load Well Attributes' module is activated from the 'Input / Output' 'Load Data' menu '
Load Well Attributes' option.
User Interface
When the 'Load Well Attributes' option is selected, you are presented with a WINDOWS
Explorer dialog which allows you to browse to the external text file containing the 'Well attributes'
data you wish to load into IP. You should browse to / select the appropriate text file. The module
window is then launched. The user interface comprises of :
the 'Default Settings for New IP Wells' panel (top left)

the 'Input Data Formatting' panel (top right) and
the 'Data Visualization / Mapping Grid' in the bottom half of the screen.
Section 11.14 Data Loading : Load Well Attributes

These are illustrated in the following screen capture:
The data in the selected text file will be visible in the 'data viewer' panel, in the lower part of the
screen. Initially the data will appear as continuous text strings in the first column of the grid, as
illustrated below. Click on the appropriate 'Input Data Formatting' radio button for your input file,
in the top-right-hand panel of the screen. This will parse the data into the correct format for the
loading operation.

Input Data Formatting
The 'Input Data Formatting' panel allows the user to set up the 'delimiter' that has been used to
separate the data fields in the input text file. This allows the 'Well Attribute Loader' to resolve
the input file into the appropriate data columns. Data can be loaded into the interface from a
variety of text file formats. The acceptable text file formats are :
'Space-delimited' text,
'Tab-delimited' text,
'Comma-delimited' text and
'Other-delimited' text, for example semi-colon (;).
'Fixed', in which case the user defines the number of columns of text making up each
data category, separated by a comma "," symbol in the Format entry window. The
following are valid format expressions:

8,8,8,8,10,12,12,12 - This can be simplified by using brackets 4(8),10,3(12)

8,10,12,8,10,12 - If an expression repeats you can leave out the repeat 8,10,12
10,10,10,10,10,10,10 - This could be simplified as 7(10) or just 10
Examples of the file formats are shown below:
In addition, IP can load data copied from a spreadsheet into the WINDOWS clipboard. The data is
then pasted into the import 'grid' in the 'Load Well Attributes' screen by clicking on the 'Paste
from Clipboard' button.

The order in which data is organized within the text file is not important because you will need to
interactively set up 'mappings' between the input file data fields and the IP well attributes.
Default Settings for New IP Wells
The 'Default Settings for New IP Wells' panel sets up the default 'Well Depth units' and 'Well
Step increment' in order for IP to be able to create new IP wells in an existing database. The
defaults, when they are set up, combine with the 'mapped' data fields from the external text file to
create new in-memory wells when the 'Create New Well' button is clicked. The user then has to
use the ' File' 'Save all wells to database' option to add the new wells to the active IP
database.
The Data visualization Mapping Grid

Well Header properties listed in the imported file have to be 'mapped', to internal IP 'Well
Attributes' using the column header drop-down list in the tabular display. Clicking in a column
header opens a drop-down list of the available IP well attributes that can be assigned to the input
data. The user simply scrolls through the dataset, assigning appropriate attribute names to the
data in the grid. You must assign a 'Well Name' attribute to one column in the grid.

If the imported file contains many more wells than you are using in your IP database, you can filter
out the unwanted rows in the table by clicking, in the 'Select' column, only for the rows / wells you
wish to import data into.
If a well name already exists in memory in IP, when the 'Well Name' column is mapped, the
in-memory well name will appear in the 'IP Well Name' column on the left-hand side of the grid,
as illustrated above for well 30/1c-5. In this case any data columns that already have well
attributes loaded into IP are highlighted in light green font on a white cell background. You then
have the option to update the existing IP data, overwriting existing well attributes, or updating the
in-memory well(s) only with new well attributes. This functionality is explained below:
Two options buttons are used, in conjunction with the operations buttons at the bottom of the
screen, to determine how well attributes are loaded into new or
existing IP wells. These options are found in the middle of the screen. They are described below:
'Use Unique Well Identifier (UWI) as IP Well Identifer' : when 'checked' this option
prompts IP to load the 'Unique Well Identifier' field in the input file, to the 'Well Name'
data field in the IP 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, rather than the 'Well Name'
data field, if one is also present in the external file. When left 'un-checked' and both 'UWI
' and 'Well Name' fields are present in the input file, the 'Well name' column will be
loaded as the 'Well Name' attribute and the UWI will be loaded as the 'UWI' attribute.

'Overwrite existing IP Well header Information with new data from file' : when
'checked', this option instructs the IP program to replace any existing well attributes, in
'mapped' IP wells, with new data from the input text file. If the option is left 'un-checked'
then IP will not update any existing well attribute entries if a new value / text string is
found in the text file. Only currently-blank IP well attributes will be updated.
The operations buttons are located along the bottom margin of the 'Load Well Attributes' screen.
They are:
'Create New Well' button : If a data row is selected in the grid, but does not map to an
in-memory IP well, a new IP well can be created by mapping some attributes and
clicking the 'Create New Well' button. The new well will be assigned whatever depth unit
and well step has been set up in the 'Default Settings for New IP Wells' panel.
'Add Column' button: If you wish to add a new column to the grid, for example, for a
missing attribute in the input file, click the 'Add Column' button. A new, empty column
will be appended to the right-hand side of the table to allow you manually type in the
extra data. NOTE: you are only able to enter data into rows that are already 'mapped' to
existing IP well names. If you enter text /values into such a row, click the 'Update'
button to commit the new data into the IP well.
'All' button: Clicking the 'All' button will update an in-memory IP well with new attributes
from the imported file.
'New File' button : This button launches a Windows Explorer dialog, allowing you to
select a new file to load into the interface.
'Clear' button : This button clears all the entries in the mapping grid.
'Save Format' button : saves the window configuration to an external 'Well Header
format' (.whf) file, so that the format can be used to load multiple files of the same data
format.
'Load Format' button : loads a format file that has previously been saved to an external
file.
NOTE: If the user has created a new well the 'All' button will need to be clicked in order to
populate the header fields from the mapping grid.

11.15 Real Time Data Link

The 'Real Time Data Link' module uses a Schlumberger proprietary data link technology ('
Osprey Connect') enabling an IP user with appropriate security clearances from SIS or other
third-party (logging service company) data providers to connect to a remote data server and
download log curve and drilling data real-time into IP using WITSML data. IP can then be
prompted, using a link to the 'Multi-Well Batch Operation' module, to run user-formulae or
interpretation modules at a certain time increment. An interpretation workflow using, for example,
the 'Clay Volume' computation, 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module and 'Cutoff and
Summation' calculations can be set up to run unattended. The interpretation is updated
depending upon the user-specified 'repeat' timer.
The 'Real Time Data Link' module is launched from the 'Input / Output' menu 'Load Data' '
Real Time Data Link' option. The module is comprised of 2 windows. These are:
The 'Real Time Data Link' window which is an IP interface and controls the data
download and batch operation execution time intervals and starts/stops the 'Osprey
Connect' window.
The SIS 'Osprey Connect' window which, once activated, can be left to operate 'in the
background'.
A number of 'adaptors' are built into the 'Osprey Connect' interface to allow the user to connect
to different sources of real-time drilling / logging data. These are:
'InterACT' (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1)

'InterACT - Drilling Files' (supports RT, RTT, Risk Xml files and Recorder Output files).
'IDEAL' 12 or 13 adaptor - connects to Schlumberger's 'IDEAL' LWD logging system
'Baker RigLink' (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1)
'Kongsberg SiteCom' (Sense Intellifield) (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1)
(See http://www.intellifield.no/ for more information).
'Sperry INSITE Anywhere' (WITSML API 1.2.0)
'Wellstorm' (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1). (See: http://www.wellstorm.com/
for more information)
'Generic WITSML Source' (WITSML API 1.2.0 & WITSML API 1.3.1)
An online 'Help' document is included with the 'Osprey Connect' package and can be launched
from the 'Help' button on that interface.
The user can configure the 'Osprey Connect interface to pick up log curves from the external
data source, 'mapped' to IP curve names. These curves are then downloaded into IP and can
optionally be used as input to the 'Multi-Well Batch operation' module.
The Connection and operation steps are summarised in the diagram shown below and are
detailed in the following discussion:
Section 11.15 Data Loading : Real Time Data Link

The discussion is organized under the following headings:
1. The 'Create Curves' Screen

2. Configure the Osprey Connect Interface
3. Set Up the Curve Mappings
4. Setting the 'Options' Panel.
5. The 'Connection to Osprey Connect' Panel
6. Visualizing the New Data
1. The 'Create Curves' Screen

When the 'Real Time Data Link' is launched for the first time, you are presented with a blank '
Curves' window, illustrated below. This window requires you to create the 'empty' curves within
IP, which will be used to store the 'external' real-time curve data. The 'external' curve names are
subsequently 'mapped' to these IP curve names in order to transfer them in a logical manner into
IP. This window can also be launched from the 'Create Curves' button located at the bottom of
the 'Real Time Data Link' window.
IP defaults to a curve Set called Real in order to manage the imported data that is being
downloaded from the remote data source. If this Curve Set does not currently exist in your IP well,
it will automatically be created for you.

On clicking the 'OK' button, the following IP interface is launched. This window allows you to open
and configure the 'DataLink2' connection and set up additional options with respect to how often
IP looks for/ imports new data and whether an IP 'Batch Operation' is to be included in the
process.

The upper, 'Real Time Link Information' panel provides the user with updated status information
on the active connection, when the 'Osprey Connect' adapter is working in the background.
2. Configure the Osprey Connect Interface

'Click' the 'Connect' button to launch the 'Osprey Connect' interface. The following screen is
opened:

You must choose a data 'Source' from the 'Select a Source' panel. Click on a 'Source'
option to highlight it. The 'Source Details' will be displayed below the list panel and a '
Login' / Connection dialog will appear on the right hand side of the window.
You must choose the appropriate Source Type for the data you wish to download and
you need the login settings, including 'User Name' and 'Password' to establish the
connection to the remote data server.
You can save 'Connection Settings' (apart from passwords) by clicking the 'Save'
menu option, see below. To restore 'saved' settings, instead of re-typing in connection
details, use the 'Load' button.
When you have completed the Login details, click the 'Select Wellbore' button at the bottom of

the window. The interface updates to show the 'Focus on Source' panel, illustrated below (at
right), which is used to select the external well to download data from.
Use the 'Tree View' window to locate the well you wish to download data from.
Click on the 'well name' to highlight it, as illustrated below.
3. Set Up the Curve 'Mappings'

Click the 'Connect to Wellbore' button, which becomes 'active' when a well is selected /
highlighted. The following screen is launched. This interface is designed to allow you to set up
the curve 'mappings' between the external Data Server / Well and the IP well. The window may be
empty initially. Click the 'Click here...' message at the top of the window.

The window should refresh to display the created IP curves and the available external curves
('data channels'), as shown below.
The upper, 'Data Requested by the Application' panel contains the list of 'empty' IP
curves in the REAL curve Set.
The lower, 'Select from the Available Data Items' panel contains the list of available
'external' log curves.
You should set up the 'mappings' between the IP curves and external log curves. To do
this:
Click in a row in the 'Requested Data' panel to highlight the curve.
Scroll through the 'Select from the Available Data Items' panel to locate the equivalent
'external' curve. place a 'tick' in the 'Map' column for the external curve.
The 'Mapped' column entry for the IP Curve will change from a Cross symbol to a tick
symbol, as shown for the GR curve below, indicating that the curves are 'mapped'.
Repeat the process for all the IP curves you wish to map to external data channels.
When all IP curves are 'mapped', click the 'Start Transfer' button in the bottom
right-hand corner of the window.
Alternatively, clicking the 'Select Source' button will return you to the previous 'Osprey
Connect' screen. You will be warned that you will lose any mappings you have made,
and offered the chance to save them before returning to the previous screen.

This 'Osprey Connect' interface can then be closed, by clicking on the Windows 'Close' icon on
the top-right-hand corner of the window. The 'Osprey Connect' connection continues to operate
'in the background'.
The 'Real Time Data Link' window, 'Information' panel, illustrated below, gives details of the
Adaptor Connection Status and how much data is being downloaded to the buffer. NOTE: data
are stored only into the buffer, until the user clicks the 'Run' button at the bottom right-hand
corner of the window. From the time the 'Run' button is clicked, data are then transferred /
written to the selected IP well, into the mapped IP curves at the selected time increment.

4. Setting the 'Options' Panel

The 'Options' panel on the 'Real Time Data Link' interface is used to set up a number of
functions to initiate the loading and processing of the 'external' data within IP
'Select TVD Curve' - If the data to be imported uses a TVD depth reference, you must
select a 'TVD' curve in the IP Well as the reference curve.
'Automatically Extend Well' - if 'checked', the default position, IP will automatically
increase the well 'bottom depth' value as new data are loaded from the remote source.
In this position the user does not have to keep returning to the well to manually extend
the depth range when new log curve data is available, as drilling progresses.
'Run Batch Operation' - if you wish to run a 'Batch Operation' periodically, using the
curves that have been loaded from the external data Source, a Batch operation file (.fbt)
can be set up from that module and selected using the 'Browse' button in this window.
When the 'timer' is set up and running, the Batch operation will be run at the set time
increment.
'Survey File Name' - if well deviation survey data are available from the external data
source, they can be downloaded into IP.
'Run automatically every 'X' seconds' - The Up and Down arrow buttons allow you to
change the time increment which controls the 'update' period that IP waits between
downloads of real-time data from the buffer. Click the Up arrow to increase the time
between downloads. Click the Down arrow to decrease the time period between
downloads. The minimum time increment is 6 seconds.

'Run / Stop' - The 'Run' button, when clicked, initiates the automatic update timer to
execute a download operation every X seconds, depending upon the user-selected time
interval. When the 'Run' button has been clicked, it toggles to a 'Stop' button. In this
condition, if the button is clicked the data download operation and Batch Operation are
terminated.
5. The 'Connection to Osprey Connect' Panel

The 'Connection to Osprey Connect' panel contains a number of 'control' buttons whose
functions are described below:
'Connect' - Click the 'Connect' button to launch the 'Osprey Connect'' window.
'Disconnect' - Click the 'Disconnect' button to close the 'Osprey Connect' window.
'Show' - Click the 'Show' button to bring the 'Osprey Connect' window to the
foreground.
'Start' - Clicking the 'Start' button is a shortcut to activate the 'Osprey Connect'
interface- 'Start Transfer' option, without having to have the 'Osprey Connect' window
in view.
'Stop' - Clicking the 'Stop' button is a shortcut to activate the 'Osprey Connect' - 'Stop
Transfer' option, without having to have the 'Osprey Connect' window in view.
6. Visualizing the New Data

If you have a log plot display on-screen with the 'mapped' IP curves selected in one or more curve
tracks - as data are downloaded into IP, the log plot display will update, at the specified time
increment, with any new data from the buffer. The Well depth range will also extend if this option
is selected ('Automatically extend well') on the 'Real Time Data Link' interface.
What is WITSML ?
Wellsite Information Transfer Standard Markup Language, "WITSML", was initially developed by
the WITSML project, an oil industry initiative sponsored by BP and Statoil, and later by Shell, as a
new standard for drilling information transfer. Initial participation is from the major service
companies Baker Hughes, GeoQuest, Halliburton, Landmark and Schlumberger. As of the
completion of WITSML V1.2 in March 2003, POSC has custody of WITSML and is managing the
support and future evolution of WITSML through the WITSML Special Interest Group.

Section
12
Data Saving
12 Data Saving
The 'Save Data' menu item includes all the tools for saving curve and 'Tops' data to external files.
The following tools are found under the 'Save Data' menu:
'ASCII Write'
'LAS Write'
'LIS Write'
'DBASE4 Write'
'Save Zone Tops'
Section 12. Data Saving :

Senergy Data Saving 263
12.1 ASCII Write

The 'ASCII Write' module is launched from the 'Input / Output' 'Save Data' menu item. The '
ASCII Write' window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the '
Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' grid box.
The window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the 'Select
Wells and Depth Intervals to output' grid box.
'Select Wells and Depth Intervals to output' Panel

'Use' : 'Check' this box to output an ASCII format file for the well. Clicking on the 'Use'
column header the user can select or deselect which wells to output. first line. This
allows the user to quickly select or de-select all wells.
'Well Name' : The user selects additional wells to output from the drop-down list box. If
the column header is 'clicked' then all the wells currently loaded in memory will be added
to the list.
'Top Dep.' : Enter the top depth of the output interval.
'Bot Dep.' : Enter the bottom depth of the output interval.
'Step' : The default value will be the current well step increment. The user may enter a
new value to change the ASCII output well step.
'Ref Curve' : The default depth reference curve is the DEPTH curve. The user can
change this to write an output file, for example to a TVD or TVDSS reference, if these
curves exist in the well(s) to be exported.
'File Name' : Enter the output file name. File names can be set using the 'Base File
Name' and 'Apply' button or by 'clicking' the 'Use Well name as file name' button.
'Available Curves' Panel

This list box will display the curves in the well whose name is displayed just below the 'Available
Section 12.1 Data Saving : ASCII Write

Curves' label. To change the well, click on the well name displayed in the 'Select Wells and '
box. Curve names will be displayed in green when they occur in the 'Selected Curves' list. This
allows the user to easily see which curves have been selected.
'Selected Curves' Panel

This contains the selected output curves for all selected wells. It can contain curve names that do
not exist for some of the output wells. If the 'Curve Aliasing' module is turned on then if a curve
name cannot be found then a curve of the same 'Curve Type' will be selected instead. If a curve
does exist for the well displayed in the 'Available Curves' box, then the curve name under 'Curve
Name' will be in green, otherwise it will be displayed in black. By changing the well in the '
Available Curves' box the user can easily see which curves are going to be written for individual
wells by looking for the green-coloured selected curves. The 'Output Name' column is editable
and allows the user to change the names of the curves in the output file.
Curves are selected by either highlighting a curve and using the arrow buttons or by clicking on a
curve and dragging it into the 'Selected Curves' box. The order that the curves will be output is
the same as the order in the 'Selected Curves' box. To re-arrange the order, use the up/down
arrows or 'click' on a curve and drag it to a different position in the list.
Setting ASCII Output Properties
Output File Names

'Output Directory' allows the user to select the output directory where the ASCII files
will be written. The 'Browse' button can be used to select this directory. If separate

output directories for each well have been set up (see 'Set Default File Location') then
the user can 'check' the 'Use the separate output directories' box to send the output
files into these directories. This box will not appear in the window if the output directories
have not been set up.
'Use Well name as file name' button replaces the output file name with the Well Name.
The following characters / symbols cannot be used in a file name (\ / : ; , > <) and will be
replaced by the 'underscore, '_', in the file name.
'Base File Name' box is used to create the default output file name. Appended to this
base name will be '_W**' where ** is the database well number. The 'Apply' will update
all file names with current 'Base File Name'.
'Append to file names' box is used to add a common piece of text onto the end of all
file names. The 'Apply' will update all file names with the extension added. This can be
useful for marking all result file names with a common comment such as "Final analysis
".
'File name extension' box allows the user to change the file name extension (default is
'asc'). This is the text string added to the output file name set under 'File Name', to
complete the output file name. If the 'Save in CSV Format' box has been 'checked' then
the 'File name extension' name is set to 'csv'.
File Options
'Null Values' box allows the user to manually change the output curve 'Null'. The default
value is '-999'.
The 'Dec. places' box allows the user to define the number of decimal places that
curves are outputted as. There is no limit to what can be entered but only reasonable
values will be displayed in the outputted ASCII file.
'Checking' the 'All wells in one file' writes all currently-selected wells into a single ASCII
file. A single output file name must be used.
If the 'Output each curve set using set depths' is 'checked' then a separate data
sequence per curve set is created using the set depth interval and step size rather than
the Top Dep., Bot Dep. and Step as specified in the 'Select Wells and Depth intervals
to output'.
'Save in CSV Format' allows the user to save the data in comma separated format
which is then easier to import into EXCEL than text files. For German language Excel
users there is a 'CSV Delimiter' option, within 'Tools' 'Options' 'Miscellaneous
Options', to choose to output the CSV file with semicolons instead of commas as the
separator.
Curve Selection
'Select Final Curves Current Well' button will automatically add all curves that have
had their 'Final' flag (see 'Manage Curve Headers') set in the current well to the '
Selected Curves' box (well displayed under 'Available Curves').
'Select Final Curves All Wells' button will move all final curves from all selected wells
into the 'Selected Curves' box.
'Select All Curves All Wells' button will move all curves for all wells into the 'Selected
Curves' box.
'Select All Curves in Set All Wells' button will move all curves for a selected set (use
the drop-down menu in the box below the button to select the set) for all wells into the '
Selected Curves' box.
'Only output final curves' box, if 'checked', will only write curves in the selected curve
list that have their 'Final' flag set.
'Use Set Names' box, if 'checked', will attach the Curve Set name to the beginning of
the curve name.

The 'OK' button outputs the files.

The 'Save Format' and 'Load Format' buttons allow the user to save the set-up and
restore it at a later date.
'Add Wells' gives the user the option of loading wells from the 'Select Database Wells'
module - 'From Select Well Screen...' or from a created Well List - 'From Well List File
'.
The 'Clear all Wells' button will clear all the wells from the 'Select Wells and Depth'
box. It does not affect the curves in the 'Selected Curves' box. These can be cleared by
clicking the double left chevron button.

12.2 LAS Write

The 'LAS Write' module is launched from the 'Input / Output' 'Save Data' menu item. The '
LAS Write' window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the '

'Use' : 'Check' this box to output a LAS format file for the selected well. If the 'Use'
column header is 'clicked' then the whole column will be set to
the inverse of whatever has been set for the first line. This allows the user to quickly
select or de-select all wells.
to the list.
'Top Dep.' : Enter the top depth of the output interval. Default value is the top well depth.
'Bot Dep.' : Enter the bottom depth of the output interval. Default value is the bottom
well depth.
new value to change the LAS output well step.
'Ref Curve' : The default depth reference curve is the 'DEPTH' curve. The user can

Section 12.2 Data Saving : LAS Write


not exist in some of the output wells. If the 'Curve Aliasing' module is turned on then if a curve
and allows the user to change the names of the curves for the output file.
Setting LAS Output File Properties
Output File Names

'Output Directory' allows the user to select the output directory where the LAS files will
be written. The 'Browse' button can be used to select this directory. If separate output
directories for each well have been set up (see 'Set Default File Location') then the

user can 'check' the 'Use the separate output directories' box to send the output files
into these directories. This box will not appear in the window if the output directories
'Use Well name as file name' button replaces the output file name with the Well Name.
'Append to file names' box allows the user to add any text onto the output file name by
typing the text into the box and then clicking 'Apply'. This can be useful for marking all
result file names with a common comment such as "Final analysis".
'File name extension' box allows the user to change the file name extension (default is
'las'). This is the text string added to the output file name set under 'File Name', to
complete the output file name.
File Options
The 'Null Values' box allows the user to manually change the output curve 'Null'. The
default value is '-999'.
The 'Dec. places' box allows the user to define the number of decimal places that
curves are outputted as. There is no limit to what can be entered but only reasonable
values will be displayed in the outputted LAS file.
'Write LAS wrapped data' box, if 'checked', will output the LAS data in wrapped format
with multiple lines per depth increment. If not 'checked', then the data will be written as
one line per depth increment. The file conforms to the LAS version 2.0 format.
If the 'Write well parameters' box is 'checked', then the scales and other curve and well
information will be written into the LAS file. Writing this extra data will not affect the
integrity of the LAS file and its structure will still conform to the LAS version 2.0 format.
Checking the 'All wells in one file' box will output all the selected wells into a single las
file. A single output file name must be used.
'Use Descriptions' and 'Use Comments' options give the user a choice of either
appending the curve description field (see 'Manage Curve Headers') to the curve name
in the curve information section of the LAS file or appending the curve type and curve
comment fields. This does not affect the validity of the LAS file structure, since these
fields are added into a comment part of the LAS structure.
'LAS Version' allows the user to output the LAS file as Version 2.0 or Version 3.0.
Version 2.0 is the original LAS standard. Version 3.0 LAS files include a wide variety of
data and require LAS 3.0 data importers.
Curve Selection
Curves' box.

'Use Set Names' box, if 'checked', will attach the Curve Set name to the beginning of
the output curve name.

'.
clicking the double left arrow box.

12.3 LIS Write

The 'LIS Write' module is launched from the 'Input / Output' 'Save Data' menu item. The 'LIS
Write' window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the 'Select
Wells and Depth Intervals to output' grid box.

'Use' : 'Check' the cell(s) in this column to output an LIS format file for each selected
well. If the 'Use' column header is 'clicked' then the whole column will be set to the
inverse of whatever has been set for the first line. This allows the user to quickly select
or de-select all wells.
to the list.
well depth.
new value to change the LIS output well step.

Section 12.3 Data Saving : LIS Write


Setting LIS Output File Properties
Output File Names

'Output Directory' allows the user to select the output directory where the LIS files will

''Use Well name as file name' button replaces the output file name with the Well Name.
File name extension' box allows the user to change the file name extension (default is
'lis'). This is the text string added to the output file name set under 'File Name', to
File Options
The LIS format only allows curve names of four characters. Therefore the module has to
truncate IP curve names. However, it is possible to use the LIS format curve 'Service ID'
to store the rest of the curve name. This is done by checking the 'Use service ID for
long curve names' check box. If this option is turned 'on', the output names box
contains a colon (:) which now separates the LIS curve name and the service ID name.
'Keep LIS File Open' option when 'checked' will not automatically close the LIS file after
the 'OK' button is 'clicked'. This allows the user to append another LIS logical file to the
current LIS physical file. This can be useful if the user wants to store different curves, or
different depth intervals, from the same well into different LIS logical files. To do this the
user selects the curves to be written into the first logical file, checks the 'Keep LIS File
Open' and clicks 'OK'. The user then changes the curves to output and clicks 'OK' again.
The file is finally closed when the user exits the module.
By 'checking' the 'All wells in one file' box it is possible to write multiple logical LIS files
into one physical LIS disk file. This allows the user to store multiple wells into one LIS
file.
'Output each curve set using set depths' option when 'checked' outputs curves from
different sets and with different steps into multiple logical LIS files within one physical LIS
disk file.
NOTE: - Set names cannot be output using LIS write.
The 'Null' Value (-999.25) is hard-coded into LIS formatted files.
Curve Selection
Curves' box.


'.

12.4 DLIS Write

The 'DLIS Write' module is launched from the 'Input / Output' 'Save Data' menu item. The '
DLIS Write' window will always appear with the currently-displayed well as the first row of the '

'Use' : 'Check' the cell(s) in this column to output a DLIS format file for each selected
well. If the 'Use' column header is 'clicked' then the whole column will be set to the
inverse of whatever has been set for the first line. This allows the user to quickly select
or de-select all wells.
to the list.
well depth.
new value to change the LIS output well step. Irregular step data can be exported in its
own "Frame", unless all data is exported in a single "Frame" by 'unchecking' the 'Output
each curve set using set depths' checkbox.
Section 12.4 Data Saving : DLIS Write


NOTE: Array data with an X and Y dimension will be exported as 2 dimensions of samples per
depth.
All data samples are exported as the DLIS data type "FSINGL" - IEEE single precision
floating point number.
Setting DLIS Output File Properties

Output File Names

'Output Directory' allows the user to select the output directory where the DLIS files will
''Use Well name as file name' button replaces the output file name with the Well Name.
File name extension' box allows the user to change the file name extension (default is
'lis'). This is the text string added to the output file name set under 'File Name', to
File Options
'Write well parameters' outputs all of the well information into the DLIS file. This
includes everything in the 'General', 'Position' and 'Default Parameters' tabs in the '
Manage Well Header Info' module and the logging run attributes from the 'Logging'
tab.
By 'checking' the 'All wells in one file' box it is possible to write multiple logical DLIS
files into one physical DLIS disk file. This allows the user to store multiple wells into one
DLIS file.
'Output each curve set using set depths' option when 'checked' (it is 'checked' by
default) outputs curves from different Sets and with different steps into multiple logical
DLIS files within one physical DLIS disk file. This operation is performed by outputting
curves in multiple "DLIS Frame objects" - one per curve Set. 'Unchecking' this option
outputs all of the curves into a single "Frame". NOTE: if IP (v3.5+) reads in these
created DLIS files then the curve Set name can be retained by using the 'Auto. New
Sets' button in the 'DLIS Load' module.
NOTE: The 'Null' Value (-999.25) is hard-coded into DLIS formatted files.
Curve Selection

Selected Curves' box (well displayed under 'Available Curves') .

Curves' box.
'Use Set Names' will pre-fix the curve name with the Set name.

'.

12.5 DBASE4 Write

This option allows the user to save data to a 'DBASE 4' database. The user can add to an existing
'DBASE 4' database or create a new database.
The user enters the DBASE 4 file name under the 'Database name' label. The 'Browse' button
can be used to select an existing database. The user then selects the curves and depths to write
as output and 'clicks' the 'Write' button.
'Database Null Value' - this text box selects the DBASE 4 null value number. '999' is
used in IP as the Null value number.
'Database Depth Curve Name' - this text box specifies the name of the depth column in
the DBASE 4 file. This is for appending to an existing database. It must be known and will
usually be called 'Depth'.
'Top Depth to write' and 'Bottom Depth to write' boxes allows the user to select the
interval from the IP well to write into the DBASE 4 file.
'Merge Data with existing database' and 'Overwrite existing database' radio buttons
allow the user to control how to access existing DBASE 4 files. These buttons have no
effect if the database is to be newly created.
'Overwrite existing curves' - this check box, if 'checked', allows the user to change the
data of an existing DBASE 4 curve. NOTE: this does not delete the existing curve but
Section 12.5 Data Saving : DBASE4 Write

simply changes those values that overlap with the defined load interval.
The 'Set Well' button sets the DBASE 4 write well 'focus'. This is the well that is displayed at the
top of the DBASE 4 write window. The button can be used to write several DBASE 4 files from
different wells without having to close the window and re-open it. The user changes the well focus
on the primary window by using the ''Select Well to Display'' option and then 'clicks' the 'Set
Well' button on the DBASE 4 write window.
Curve Set names are ignored when writing to a DBASE 4 file. This is due to the limitation of the
DBASE 4 structure where the curve names are stored as column header names, which are limited
to 10 characters. This means the user must be careful not to select the same curve name from
different Sets.
Section 12.5 Data Saving : DBASE4 Write

12.6 Save Zone Tops

This module allows 'Zone and Tops Sets' to be saved to ASCII disk files.
The user selects the Zone Set or Sets to output and chooses the output format. The user clicks
the 'Save As..' button to write the file to disk.
The 'Save for all Wells' option allows all the selected 'Tops Sets' to be output for all currently
loaded wells. This can be useful if the user wants to output all Tops in an IP Project into the same
file.
The 'PetrelTM format' radio button, if 'checked', will output a file which is compatible with the Petrel
TM tops loader. Two options are available:
The 'Version 1' options includes header information which allows Petrel to automatically
Section 12.6 Data Saving : Save Zone Tops

load the file.

The 'Legacy' option does not include the header information.
The Petrel format includes the X, Y and Z location of the top. The 'X' and 'Y' being the UTM
coordinates and the 'Z' the true vertical subsea depth.
Petrel will not be able to load the file unless the UTM's are included. Hence, to use this format,
UTM curves will have to be created in IP. This can be achieved using the east distance (EDIST)
and north distance (NDIST) curves output by the 'True Vertical Depth' module and then
converted to UTM's in the 'User Formula' module, if necessary. The Petrel format can be output
without the UTM curves, but the file will not be useable by Petrel.
The 'Force negative TVD curve' 'check' box option, when 'checked', forces all depths in the
selected TVD curve to be output as negative numbers below Mean Sea Level. If not 'checked', the
TVD output will be exactly the same depth format as the TVD curve stored in IP.
Example of an IP Tops format file:
$Interactive Petrophysics Well Tops: 04/09/2003

$ TOP BOTTOM ZONE_NAME
$Well: XYZ 4, Top Set: Final Tops

10723.5 10860.5 C Sand
10860.5 10909.5 B Sand
10909.5 10945.5 C1 sand
10945.5 10952.5 Mid Shale
10952.5 10998. A Sand
10998. 11420. Base Sand
Example of a Petrel tops format file.
#Interactive Petrophysics Well Tops in Petrel format: 04/09/2003

VERSION 1
BEGIN HEADER
REAL X
REAL Y
REAL Depth
REAL Time
STRING Type
STRING Horizon Name
STRING Well Name
STRING Symbol
REAL Measured Depth
STRING Pick Name
STRING Interpreter
REAL Dip Angle
REAL Dip Azimuth
END HEADER
#Well: XYZ 4, Top Set: Final Tops

7685.63281 87331.5 -7316.20557 -999 HORIZON "C Sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown 10723.5 ""
"" -999 -999
7644.66895 87373.54688 -7439.94434 -999 HORIZON "B Sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown
10860.5 "" "" -999 -999
7631.57666 87387.21875 -7485.13965 -999 HORIZON "C1 sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown
10909.5 "" "" -999 -999
7621.95898 87397.3125 -7518.32959 -999 HORIZON "Mid Shale" "XYZ 4" Unknown
10945.5 "" "" -999 -999

7620.08496 87399.28125 -7524.77979 -999 HORIZON "A Sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown
10952.5 "" "" -999 -999
7607.85742 87412.1875 -7566.6626 -999 HORIZON "Base Sand" "XYZ 4" Unknown
10998. "" "" -999 -999

Section
13
Connecting to External Databases
Senergy Connecting to External Databases 285
13 Connecting to External Databases

This chapter has been written to give both UNIX and PC system managers / administrators
sufficient information to configure networked UNIX and PC systems to allow IP to communicate
with networked GEOLOG and OpenWorks databases. The chapter is organized under the
following headings:
Introduction
Connection Protocols
Apache HTTP Server
Secure Shell
The PGLWdlink Package
The OpenWorks Link
The GEOLOG Link
PC / IP Configuration Instructions
NOTE: the number of wells and curves that can be loaded simultaneously is limited by the
amount of system memory available. If the user wishes to load a large number of wells and/or a
large volume of curve data into IP, there is potential for all the system memory to be filled before
the data loading is finished, which could result in application stability issues. In this situation the
user should consider loading the data in stages, saving and closing the loaded wells at each
stage, freeing up system memory for the next loading stage. Once all the data is loaded then the
user can re-open the wells. IP is able to use memory more efficiently if these steps are followed.
Introduction
Interactive Petrophysics (IP) provides connectivity to a number of external data repositories.
These are for Paradigm's GEOLOG6, Landmark Graphics Corporation's (LGC) OpenWorks,
PETCOM's Powerlog and Senergy's ODM3 databases.
The connections for the OpenWorks and GEOLOG links require UNIX system administration
expertise in order to install and set up the required software and network paths on the UNIX
system. The connections to these two databases comprise a 'generic' IP interface which queries
the external databases using one of two connection protocols. These are :
A web-type HTTP server (e.g. Apache)
A secure Shell (SSH) daemon (PuTTY freeware)
The following documentation gives instructions on configuring a UNIX server to support the HTTP
link through an APACHE server or through a Secure Shell (SSH) connection using PuTTY
software. It is recommended that a UNIX system administrator performs the necessary
installation and configuration on that end of the link. The PC (IP) configuration is also
explained.
NOTE: - the 'Read From / Write To DB' interfaces will only work if the Interactive
Petrophysics installation is on the WINDOWS 2000, NT or XP operating systems. Note also
that a GEOLOG6 licence is required in order for the link to this database type to work.
CONNECTION PROTOCOLS:
Apache HTTP server

When using the HTTP connection method, an Apache-type HTTP server, version 1.3 or later,
Section 13. Connecting to External Databases :

must be installed with the suExec module enabled. More information about the Apache HTTP
server, including downloads, may be obtained from http://httpd.apache.org.
Several CGI scripts are installed in the public_html directory of each user. The Apache server
must be configured to execute the CGI programs as the 'user to which the request is being
directed'. Appropriate Apache authentication and access control should also be applied to prevent
unauthorised users accessing the CGI program.
Documentation on compiling and enabling the suEXEC module within Apache 1.3 and Apache 2.0
may be found here:
http://httpd.apache.org/docs/suexec.html (suExec with Apache 1.3)
http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/suexec.html (suExec with Apache 2.0).
Pre-compiled Apache binaries are available at the Solaris Freeware website,
http://www.sunfreeware.com.
NOTE: The Secure Shell (SSH) connection method is generally preferable to the HTTP option, as
it requires less administration and configuration and is also more secure.
Secure Shell
Secure shell (SSH) is a protocol that provides a secure, remote connection to any device with
SSH support. SSH provides authentication, encryption and authorization procedures. There are
currently two versions of SSH available, SSH Version 1 and SSH Version 2.
OpenSSH is an open source version of the SSH protocol suite of network connectivity tools. More
information is available at http://www.openssh.com. Installation packages for OpenSSH and
further information are available at the Solaris Freeware site, http://www.sunfreeware.com. A
suitable SSH client must also be installed on the PC where IP is loaded. The standard IP
installation is configured to work with the 'PuTTY' PLINK.EXE application. The executable is
found in the IP program installation directory.
'PuTTY' - the PuTTY application (PUTTY.EXE, located in the IP installation directory) is a free
(MIT-licensed) Win32 SSH client. The executable should be run in order to set up the correct
configuration for the connection to the UNIX system. See 'PC / IP Configuration Instructions'
for more details.
NOTE: The SSH transport method is generally preferable to the HTTP option, as it requires
less administration and configuration and is also more secure. (PuTTY is a free
implementation of telnet and SSH for Win32 platforms, and can be obtained from
http://www.chiark.greenend.org.uk/~sgtatham/putty).
The PGLWdblink Package

The PGLWdblnk package, found in the IP program subdirectory called 'OpenWorks & Geolog'
should be installed on the UNIX system under the /opt directory. The package includes the
following files (grouped according to their use).
OpenWorks Link
/opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk - Binary executable
/opt/PGLWdblnk/etc/owenv - Environment settings
OpenWorks link (SSH option only)
/opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk.sh - Example launch script
OpenWorks link (HTTP option only)
/opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk_import.cgi - CGI script
/opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk_export.cgi - CGI script
/opt/PGLWdblnk/public_html/owlnk.cgi - User's CGI script

GEOLOG Link
NOTE: you do not need to install the PGLWdblnk Package to set up a Secure Shell (SSH)
Connection to GEOLOG
/opt/PGLWdblnk/etc/glenv - Environment settings

Geolog link (HTTP option only)
/opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/gllnk_import.cgi - CGI script
/opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/gllnk_export.cgi - CGI script
/opt/PGLWdblnk/public_html/gllnk.cgi - User's CGI script
Installing PGLWdblink
The 'PGLWdblnk package' should be installed under /opt.
1. Extract the package from its 'tar' file to a temporary directory.
2. Run pkgadd as root,
# pkgadd -d device PGLWdblnk
where device is the full or relative path to the directory holding the extracted PGLWdblnk
directory.
The package will install to /opt. If an alternative location is required, the package sub-directories
may be copied from PGLWdblnk/reloc/PGLWdblnk/ directly to an install directory of choice,
without using the pkgadd utility.
If the install directory is not /opt/PGLWdblink, the full path to the new install directory must be
inserted at the beginning of each of the CGI files found in the /bin directory.
The OpenWorks Link

Unix System requirements:
R2003 Sun Solaris
Certification OS 2.8
Oracle 8.1.6
C/C++ libraries - Forte Developer 6 or later
and, either:
SSH daemon
or
Apache HTTP server 1.3 or later with suEXEC module enabled (the Apache server must
be configured to execute the CGI program as the user to which the request is being
directed).
The OpenWorks link for IP relies on a binary executable, 'owlnk', which is installed as part of
the PGLWdblnk. This binary communicates with the OpenWorks database.
If the connection to the PC application is established via an Apache HTTP server, a CGI
script is installed for each user and the Apache configuration file updated as required.
If an SSH connection is used, the owlnk binary will usually be launched from within a
shell script, which sets the local environment.
Secure Shell (SSH) Installation
1. Install the PGLWdblnk package (see Installing PGLWdblnk).

2. Configure the environment:
Edit the file /opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owenv and insert appropriate values for the
environment values defined there.
If the PGLWdblnk package is not installed in /opt/PGLWdblnk then edit the
files /bin/owlnk.sh and set the variable INSTALLDIR to the correct location.

3. Test the operation of owlnk (see Testing).
HTTP (APACHE) Installation

2. Configure the environment.
Edit the file /opt/PGLWdblnk/etc/owenv and insert appropriate values for the
environment values defined there. If necessary, also set and export the variable
LM_LICENSE_FILE here.
3. If the PGLWdblnk package is not installed in /opt/PGLWdblnk then edit the 2 files
owlnk_import.cgi and owlnk_export.cgi and set the variable INSTALLDIR to the correct
location.
4. Create a ~/public_html directory for each OpenWorks user wanting access to the
OpenWorks link, and place a copy of owlnk.cgi in that directory. Change ownership and
permissions so that the file is owned by the user and only the user has execute permission
(-rwxr--r--).
5. Configure the Apache HTTP server to execute the CGI program as the user to which
the request is being directed.
Documentation on compiling and enabling the suEXEC module may be found at the
Apache HTTP server project web pages for the relevant version of Apache:
http://httpd.apache.org/docs/suexec.html / http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/suexec.html.
6. Test the configuration of the Apache HTTP server (see Testing).
7. Apply Apache authentication / authorization / access control, if required, to prevent
unauthorized users accessing the CGI programs.
8. Test operation of the OpenWorks link (see Testing).
Testing
A. To test operation of owlnk :
1. Log on as registered OpenWorks user.
2. Run the command $ /opt/PGLWdblnk/bin/owlnk -P
If successful, a list of OpenWorks projects should be displayed.

If unsuccessful, check the LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable (see Troubleshooting).
B. To test operation of the owlnk.sh launch script (SSH option)

1. Log on as registered OpenWorks user.
2. Run the command $ /opt/PGLOWlnk/bin/owlnk.sh -P
If successful, a list of OpenWorks projects will be displayed.
C. To test configuration of the Apache HTTP server

1. Open the Apache test page.
2. Enter http://<ServerName> (as defined in httpd.conf) into the address bar of Internet
Explorer or other browser.
If successful, you will see a message saying that the installation of the Apache web server was
successful.
3. Run the Apache test-cgi script.

4. Enter http://<ServerName>/cgi-bin/test-cgi into the address bar of Internet Explorer or
other browser. (It may be necessary to chmod +x /var/apache/cgi-bin/test-cgi)
If successful, the Apache environment variables will be displayed.

5. Check that suEXEC is enabled.
If Apache finds a properly configured suEXEC wrapper on start-up, it will print the following
message in the error log (/var/apache/logs/error-log):
"suEXEC mechanism enabled (wrapper: /usr/apache/bin/suexec)"
or something similar.
6. Test operation of suEXEC.

Copy /opt/PGLdblnk/public_html/whoami.cgi to a user's public_html directory.
Browse to http://<ServerName>/~<username>/whoami.cgi.
If successful, the username will be displayed (not the name of the Apache user).
D. To test operation of the OW link - HTTP connection

1. Point a browser to http:<ServerName>/~<username>/owlnk.cgi.
If successful, a list of OpenWorks projects will be displayed.
Troubleshooting
Some things to check
1. Ensure that the LD_LIBRARY_PATH environment variable includes paths to
/usr/lib:/usr/openwin/lib:$OWHOME/lib:$ORACLE_HOME/lib.
2. The public_html directory in the user's home directory must belong to the user and must
have a group id that is the default group for that user.
3. The files in the public_html directory must have the same user and group settings as the
public_html directory itself.
4. The CGI files in the public_html directory must have permission settings -rwxr--r--. Files
that are group or world writeable will not be run by the suExec module.
5. Look at the bottom of the /var/apache/logs/error_log and
/var/apache/logs/suexec_log for information about why things might not be working.
"Internal Server Error"

When testing the operation of the OpenWorks link via an HTTP connection, you receive an "
Internal Server Error".
The Apache suexec_log contains the line,
crit: calling user mismatch (xxx instead of yyy)
The problem is caused by a mismatch between the suExec caller (defined when the suExec
module is compiled) and the userid with which the Apache server answers requests. The suExec
caller must be the same as userid of the process that calls suExec. To resolve this mismatch,
Either (1) Change the suexec caller to "xxx" within the httpd.conf file.
The userid of each httpd child process is defined by the 'User' directive
within the httpd.conf file. For example, change
User yyy
to
User xxx
(you may also need to change the corresponding Group directive).
Or (2) Re-compile the suexec module, and define the suexec caller to be 'yyy'.
The suexec caller ID can be defined using the 'configure' script. For example,
% ./configure --with-layout=Solaris \
--enable-suexec \
--suexec-caller=yyy \

--suexec-gidmin=10
The GEOLOG Link

Unix System requirements:
GEOLOG6 or later and a valid GEOLOG licence.
and either :
SSH daemon, or
Apache HTTP server 1.3 or later with suEXEC module enabled (the Apache server must
be configured to execute the CGI program as the user to which the request is being
directed).
Secure Shell (SSH) Installation:

No files have to be installed on the UNIX side, in order to set up the SSH connection. The
'PuTTY' application must be run and the UNIX Server, to which the PC will connect, must be
authenticated.
If the connection between GEOLOG and IP is established via an Apache HTTP server, a CGI
script is installed for each user. Example CGI scripts are included as part of the PGLWdblnk
package.
HTTP (Apache) Installation:

2. Configure the environment :
Edit the file /opt/PGLWdblnk/etc/glenv and insert appropriate values for the
environment values defined there. If necessary, also set and export the
variable PRDM_GEO_LICENSE_FILE here.
3. If the PGLWdblnk package is not installed in /opt/PGLWdblnk then edit the 2 files
gllnk_import.cgi and gllnk_export.cgi and set the variable INSTALLDIR to the correct
location.
4. Create a ~/public_html directory for each GEOLOG user wanting access to the
GEOLOG link, and place a copy of gllnk.cgi in that directory. Change ownership and
permissions so that the file is owned by the user and only the user has execute permission
(-rwxr--r--).
5. Configure the Apache HTTP server to execute the CGI program as the user to which
the request is being directed.
Documentation on compiling and enabling the suEXEC module may be found at the
Apache HTTP server project web pages for the relevant version of Apache:
http://httpd.apache.org/docs/suexec.html / http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/suexec.html.
6. Test the configuration of the Apache HTTP server (see Testing).

7. Apply Apache authentication / authorization / access control, if required, to prevent
unauthorized users accessing the CGI programs.
8. Create a ~/public_html directory for each GEOLOG user wanting to use the PC
application's GEOLOG link and place a copy of gllnk.cgi in that directory. Change
ownership and permissions so that the file is owned by the user and only the user has
execute permission.
9. Test operation of the GEOLOG link.
Testing.
A. To test the configuration of the Apache HTTP server:

1. Open the Apache test page.

Enter http://<ServerName> (as defined in httpd.conf) into the address bar of Internet
Explorer or other browser.
If successful, you will see a message saying that the installation of the Apache web server was
successful.
2. Run the Apache test-cgi script.

Enter http://<ServerName>/cgi-bin/test-cgi into the address bar of Internet Explorer or
other browser. (It may be necessary to chmod +x /var/apache/cgi-bin/test-cgi)
If successful, the Apache environment variables will be displayed.
3. Check that suEXEC is enabled.

If Apache finds a properly configured suEXEC wrapper on start-up, it will print the following
message in the error log (/var/apache/logs/error-log):
"suEXEC mechanism enabled (wrapper: /usr/apache/bin/suexec)" or something
similar.
4. Test operation of suEXEC.

Copy /opt/PGLdblnk/public_html/whoami.cgi to a user's public_html directory.
Browse to http://<ServerName>/~<username>/whoami.cgi.
If successful, the username will be displayed (not the name of the Apache user).
PC Configuration Instructions
The Personal Computer (PC) connections between IP and GEOLOG, OpenWorks and ODM3
are described in the following section. The HTTP and SSH versions of the connection dialogs to
GEOLOG and OpenWorks are illustrated for each external database. The database interfaces
are set up by selecting the appropriate 'check' boxes in the 'Tools' 'Options' 'External
Database Connections' window. The interfaces are then launched from the 'Input / Output'
main menu drop-down list. The interfaces for connections to GEOLOG, OpenWorks and ODM3
are 'generic' and identical in appearance. The configuration settings required to make the client
connections to the external databases are described below. The discussion is organized under
the following headings:
PuTTY SSH client

GEOLOG Interface Connection
OpenWorks Interface Connection
ODM Interface Connection
Saving the Configuration Settings
PuTTY SSH Client

PuTTY is a free (MIT-licensed) Win32 SSH client which allows IP users to log in to a multi-user
computer operating system, in this case UNIX, from another computer, over a network.
The PuTTY application, PUTTY.EXE, which can be located in the IP program installation
directory, should be run on the users PC in order to set up the Domain Name Server (DNS)
address. Running the PuTTY application launches the following dialog:

The user should:

Fill in the 'Host Name (or IP Address)' text box with the internet host name or IP
address of the UNIX machine that you want to connect to.
Select the login 'Protocol' to use - in this case choose 'SSH'.
When you use SSH to connect to a UNIX server for the first time, you will probably see the
following 'Alert' message displayed when you click the 'Open' button at the bottom of the 'PuTTY
Configuration' window:
This is a feature of the SSH protocol and is designed to protect you against a network attack
known as 'spoofing' (secretly re-directing your connection to a different computer). PuTTY
records the host key for each server you connect to, in the Windows registry. every time you
connect to a server, it checks that the host key presented by the server is the same host key as it

was the last time you connected. However, when you connect to a server for the first time,
PuTTY has no way of telling whether the host key is the right one or not. So it gives the warning
shown above and asks whether you want to trust this host key or not. If you are working on an
internal company network you would normally select 'Yes' to add the UNIX servers host Key to
PuTTY's cache and carry on with the connection. Once the host key is registered, when you click
the 'Open' button at the bottom of the 'PuTTY Configuration' window, a login screen to the UNIX
server is launched. If this test works and the login screen is launched, you can close the login
window / exit the PuTTY application.
GEOLOG Interface Connection

As described in the Apache HTTP Server and Secure Shell sections, above, the IP client
connection to the UNIX system may be made using either an HTTP or Secure Shell (SSH)
protocol. In IP the 'Client Connection' dialog is launched from the 'Connection' button on the '
Read / Write To GEOLOG' interface. The 'Client Connection' window , shown below, allows the
user to 'toggle' between the HTTP and SSH options using the radio buttons at the top of the
screen.
GEOLOG HTTP Connection

In order to connect to the external database using the HTTP protocol, the user will need to have a
UNIX user account set up. The UNIX system administrator will have to have installed and
configured the PGLWdblink package.
The PC client configuration settings are as follows:

'PNS File Location' - Paradigm Name Service (PNS) File location. The PNS file
contains the directory addresses of all GEOLOG databases on the UNIX system. The
directory path to this file is required to allow IP to locate the appropriate GEOLOG
databases. This directory path should be entered into the 'PNS File Location:' text
entry box.
'Read URL' - this is the 'Universal Resource Locator' for the cgi script installed on the
UNIX 'Apache' Web server. This locator is made up of the following syntax: 'Protocol' -
'Server Domain Name' - 'User Name' - 'Cgi script'. For example: '
http://webpgl16.pgl/~pg58_r03/gllnk.cgi'
'User Name' - This is the UNIX User account to which your UNIX system administrator

has installed the Cgi script.

'Password' - This is the UNIX password for the user account in the previous step.
GEOLOG SSH Connection

In order to connect to a GEOLOG database using the SSH protocol the user will need to have a
UNIX user account and password. The UNIX server will also have to be authenticated using the
PuTTY (plink.exe) application. See the PuTTY SSH Client section, above for details.
The PC client configuration settings are as follows.

'Geolog Directory' - the user will need to know the directory location of the GEOLOG6
binary files installation. For example: /raid5/mincom/geolog6/bin/
'Server Address' - This is the Domain Name of the UNIX file server (DNS name).
'User Name' - This is the UNIX user account name.
'Password' - This is the password for the UNIX user account. Please note, the password
should not contain either single quote (') or double quotation marks (").
'Optional Variables' - this text entry box can be used to call UNIX configuration
variables. For example, in an environment where there are multiple GEOLOG
installations and hence more than one PNS file, you will need to know the settings for
the variable 'MINSITE'. Any commands (for example, "SET MINSITE=") must be
entered into the 'Optional variables' text box, using the syntax of the shell the user will
acquire when the UNIX login is complete. Variables can be strung together using (;)
semicolon separators.
MINSITE - is the variable that controls the GEOLOG environment. GEOLOG6 tries to
source the file MINSITE/bin.geolog6_env.tcl. This is a script file in which one can
place any customizations, for example, licence location, PNS Server etc...
GEOLOG Windows Connection

To connect to GEOLOG which is installed onto a PC using WindowsTM then the directory where
the GEOLOG program resides has to be defined.

OpenWorks Interface Connection

The IP 'Connection' dialog is launched from the 'Connection' button at the top of the 'Read
From OpenWorks' interface. The connection dialog allows the user to 'toggle' between the HTTP
and SSH options.
OpenWorks HTTP
In order to connect to the external database using the HTTP protocol the user will need to have a
user account set up on the UNIX ('Apache'-type) Web server. The UNIX system administrator will
have installed and configured the PGLWdblink package. The PC client configuration settings are
as follows:
'Read URL' - this is the 'Universal Resource Locator' for the cgi script installed on the
Unix 'Apache' Web server. This locator is made up of the following syntax: 'Protocol' - '

Server Domain Name' - 'User Name' - 'Cgi script'. For example: '
http://webpgl16.pgl/~pg58_r03/owlnk.cgi'
'User Name' - this is the UNIXUser account to which your Unix system administrator has
installed the Cgi script.
'Password' - is the UNIX password for the above user account.
OpenWorks SSH
In order to connect to the external database using the SSH protocol the user will need to have a
user account set up on the Unix file server. The Unix system administrator will have installed and
configured the PGLWdblink package. The PC client configuration settings are as follows:
'OpenWorks Link' - the user will need to know the location of the UNIX Shell script that
sets up the environment variables and runs the OWLNK.exe. i.e .
/opt/PGLWowlnk/bin/owlnk.sh
'Server Address' - is the Domain Name of the UNIX file server (DNS name).
'User Name' - is the user account on the UNIX file server.
'Password' - is the password for the above user account.
ODM Interface Connection

The client connection may be made using an OLEDB connection string. This connection string is
constructed automatically when the user selects the ODM3 MS Access database '.mdb' file. The
IP user simply uses the browser dialog to locate the required ODM3 database (.mbd) file and
selects 'Open'. Close the 'Connection' dialog and select a Project from the drop-down 'Project' list.
Saving the Configuration Settings

The configuration details of the connection to the external database are saved to the
IntPetro.config file, located in the IP program directory, when the user 'clicks' the 'Apply' button
on the 'Client Connection' dialog. The settings are saved and restored when the user
subsequently closes and re-opens IP.

13.1 Common Database Connection Tasks

The Database Connection screens uses a generic user-interface (UI) for the GEOLOG,
OpenWorks, PETCOM and ODM3 connections and the 'Read/Write Via OpenSpirit' module.
The interface is organized on 2 tabbed screens. These are :
'Import into IP' tab, and
'Export' (not OpenWorks)
The 'Import into IP' screen comprises a left-hand 'Tree View' panel and 2 panels on the right
hand side ('Wells to Import' and 'Curves to Import'), which allow you to see the curve and tops
data that are to be loaded into IP. Once a connection to an external database has been
established, the UI can be used to perform the following common tasks :
1. Create new IP well from an external database well and load all curves into IP
2. Create a New IP well from an external database well and load selected curves into
IP
3. Deselecting curves from the 'import' operation
4. Loading Well Tops from an external database well
5. Deselecting Tops from the 'import' operation
6. Editing Well Properties
Editing a new wells' 'well attributes' before loading into the current IP
database
Updating well attributes in an existing IP well in the current IP database
1. Create a New IP Well from an External Database Well and Load All Curves into IP :
EITHER drag/drop a well icon from the left-hand panel 'Tree View' into the 'Wells to
Import' panel, OR right-mouse button 'click' on a well icon and use the 'Add' option.
This will move all log curves and Tops for the selected well into the 'Curves to Import'
panel. You will see the following Confirmation message:
Click 'OK' to confirm loading all the curves into the interface. Click 'Cancel' to abort the
operation.
Click the 'Load All' button to create the new IP database wells and load all the log
curves into them.
NOTE: You can import all external database wells and their log curves and formation tops at the
same time, by drag/dropping the 'external database' ( ) icon into the 'Wells to Import' panel.
There may be many more wells and curves than you actually need in the external database so it is
good practice to at least expand the tree view, in the first instance, to see how many wells you
might be dealing with.
2. Create a New IP Well from an External Database Well and Load Selected curves into IP :
'Expand' a well by clicking on the (+) in the left-hand panel to view all the curve Sets and
Section 13.1 Connecting to External Databases : Common Database Connection Tasks

Tops in the external well.

Then, EITHER drag/drop the required Curve Set ( ) icon into the 'Curves to Import'
panel - this loads all the curves held within that curve Set into the transfer cache. OR,
expand the Curve Set 'branch' and drag/drop individual curves into the 'Curves to
Import' panel. Right-mouse-button clicking on a curve name in the left-hand panel and
selecting 'Add' has the same effect. Curves are tagged with an 'Import Type' of 'Log'
as illustrated in the following screen capture.
Click the 'Load All' button to create the new IP database wells and load the selected log
curves into them.
3. To Deselect Curves from the 'Import' Operation:

If you find you have mistakenly included a curve or a Formation Top you do not want to
import to IP, you can deselect it by clicking in the curve 'row' in the 'Curves to Import'
panel. Use a right-mouse-button click and select the 'Remove' option from the
drop-down options list. Selecting the 'Remove All' option, or clicking the 'Remove All'
button, will remove all wells and their associated curves and Tops from the Import
selection panels.

4. To Load Tops from an External Database Well:

EITHER drag/drop a well icon from the left-hand panel into the 'Wells to Import' panel,
OR right-mouse button 'click' on a well icon and use the 'Add' option. This will move all
log curves and Tops for the selected well into the 'Curves to Import' panel.
Alternatively, expand a well by clicking on the (+) in the left-hand panel to view all the
curve Sets and Tops in the external well. Then, EITHER drag/drop the required Tops
Set icon into the 'Curves to Import' panel - this loads all the Tops held within that Tops
Set into the transfer cache. OR, expand the Tops Set 'branch' and drag/drop individual
Formation Tops into the 'Curves to Import' panel. Tops are tagged with an 'Import
Type' of 'Tops' as illustrated below:
Click the 'Load All' button to load all Tops data into a new IP database well.
5. To Deselect Tops Entries from the 'Import' Operation:

Click on the Tops row that you wish to delete, in the 'Curves to Import' panel,
right-mouse-button click and select the 'Remove' option from the drop-down options list.
Selecting the 'Remove All' option, or clicking the 'Remove All' button, will remove all
wells and their associated curves and tops from the Import selection panels.
6. Editing Well Properties:

IP allows you two well editing options. You can either create a new IP database well
from an external database well, or you can update an existing IP well with new data from
an external database well.
Adding a New Well to the Current IP Database :

If you select an external well and drop it into the 'Wells to Import' panel, you can
check/edit its well properties by right-mouse-button clicking on the well entry row and
selecting the 'Properties' option. This will launch a new screen which lists the 'cultural'
data retrieved from the external database for that well. An example screen-shot is
shown below:

You can manually type in entries into empty data fields. You can also change a wells Depth
reference type by toggling between 'Units'. NOTE: You must also then type in new Top, Bottom
and Step values, appropriate to the new depth Units.
If deviation survey curves are available for the new well they will automatically be loaded into the
IP well when 'Load All' is clicked.
Updating Well Attributes / Curves in an Existing IP Well in the Current IP Database :

If you have an external well with a corresponding IP database well and you wish to
update well attributes and add new curves for the existing IP well, you can set up the
process through the well 'Properties' screen.
'Drag/drop', or 'Add', the external well into the 'Wells to Import' panel and open the well
'Properties' by right-mouse-button clicking on the well entry row and selecting the '
Properties' option. This will launch a new screen which lists the 'cultural' data retrieved
from the external database for that well.

In the 'IP Well' column, select the IP well name, from the drop-down list box, that you
wish to update from the external data . The 'Update' check-boxes adjacent to the well
attributes boxes will become 'active'. You can then selectively 'tick' those well attributes
you want to update, or toggle on/off the 'Tick All / None' check-box at the top right hand
corner of the screen to update all / no attributes. Click the 'Apply' button to save any
edited attributes.
NOTE: in this display, the 'Load into Set' drop-down list is accessible. This allows you
to load curves from the external well into a particular curve Set in the selected IP well.
Click 'OK' to exit the 'Properties' dialog window with changes saved or click 'Cancel' to
abort the editing of well attributes.

13.2 Read/ Write to PETCOM DB

The 'Read / Write to PETCOM DB' option allows users to load well curve data from a PETCOM
(Powerlog) database into IP and to export log curves from IP into a PETCOM database.
The user must check that the 'Tools' 'Options' 'External Database Connections' '
PETCOM Link', is 'checked' for this option to be visible under the 'Input / Output' main menu
item.
The 'Read / Write to PETCOM DB' interface will only work if the IP installation is on the
WINDOWS Vista, WINDOWS NT, XP or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems. NOTE: It will not
work under Windows 95 or Windows 98.
The interface is launched from the 'Input/Output' main menu list and comprises of 2 'tabbed'
screens. These are:
'Import into IP'

'Export to PETCOM'
'Import into IP' Interface

The 'Import into IP' Interface is shown below:
Section 13.2 Connecting to External Databases : Read/ Write to PETCOM DB

The user must select the PETCOM database to connect to, by using the 'Connection' button
which launches a 'browse' dialog' allowing you to search for the appropriate database folder.
Once a PETCOM database is selected, IP will list all the wells in the database in an expandable
'Tree' view in the left-hand panel of the interface. IP reads the curve Sets, log curves and
formation tops for all the wells in the external database. The list of wells can be filtered either by
using the drop-down list available from the 'Display Well:' box or by typing in the 'Filter By:' box
and 'clicking' the 'Filter' button.
To Import Wells - Drag/drop the 'Well', using the left-hand mouse button, from the right-hand
'Tree' view panel into the upper, 'Wells to Import' panel. Alternatively right-mouse-click on a well
name and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen.
IP will read the external database entries and will show the status window illustrated
below while it is reading the external database well. The user has the option to
terminate the 'import' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The 'import'
operation will populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the external database well
names. All the available PETCOM curves will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list.
This can take some minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the selected
external well.

To Load Sets / Curves - drag/drop the Curve Set name or an individual curve name from the
'Tree' view panel into the lower, 'Curves to Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-button-click
on a Curve Set and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen.
IP will read the external database entries and will populate the 'Curves to Import'
screen with the available curves.
Click the 'Load All' button to execute the import operation. The selected Wells / Sets /
Curves will be loaded into the current IP database. This can take some minutes,
depending upon how many curves exist in the selected PETCOM Sets.
External PETCOM wells can be imported to IP as new wells or they can be 'mapped' to existing IP
database wells.
In the 'Wells to Import' panel, right-mouse-button click on a well to be imported. This launches a
'Properties' dialog window, as illustrated below:

The user can choose to leave all the well details as they are, in which case a new IP database
well with the 'External Well' name will be created in the current IP database, or, if the PETCOM
well already has a corresponding IP well name entry, that well can be selected from the well
drop-down list at the top of the screen. In this case, imported log curves will be written to the IP
well, into the user-selected curve set.
Individual log curve properties can be viewed in the 'Curves to Import' panel by
right-mouse-button clicking on a curve name. The following dialog will be launched:

If you wish to make changes to the curve properties, make them in this dialog and click 'OK'. The '
Curves to Import' panel entry will update to reflect the changes made.
The 'Operations' buttons:

'Load All' - the 'Load All' button will execute the import operation of wells / sets and
curves from the external source database into IP.
'Remove All' - the 'Remove All' button clears all the wells and log curves from the two
right-hand panels of the 'Import into IP' screen.

manage the way Curve and Tops data are brought into IP from the external database:
PETCOM database into an existing IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the
PETCOM curves will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be
existing IP well,the import operation will ignore the PETCOM curve Set names and will
write the imported curves into the user-selected IP curve Set (set up from the Well
'Properties' window). If the box is left 'un-checked', the PETCOM curve Sets will be
'Fill Data Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any small (up to 5
depth increments) data gaps existing in the imported curves during the import operation.
If the user wishes to copy Core analysis data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density.,
Permeability) then the 'Fill Gaps' option should be left 'un-checked'. Importing

Continuous log curves and discrete core analysis data from PETCOM to IP would
therefore require a two step import operation, with 'Fill Data Gaps' switched 'on' for
continuous logs and 'off' for core data.
'Link Zones' - if 'checked', IP will import PETCOM Tops information and link the entries
to make a continuous IP Zone Set where the base of one formation is automatically
taken as the next deepest Formation Top depth.
'Export to Petcom' Interface

The 'Export to Petcom' interface is shown below:
Select the IP well and the associated curves to write to the linked PETCOM database. Either,
drag/drop a well name from the 'Tree' view panel into the upper 'Wells to Export' panel or
right-mouse-button click on a well name and click the 'Add' button. This transfers all the curves
associated with one well. If you only wish to export selected curves from an IP well, expand the
'Tree' view to see the curve Sets and expand the Set branch to see the curve names. Drag/drop
your required curves into the lower, 'Curves to Export', panel. Click the 'Export All' button to
transfer the IP wells/curves to the attached PETCOM database.
Click the 'Clear All' button to clear all entries from the 'Wells to Import' & 'Curves to Export'
panels without exporting them to the linked PETCOM databsse.
Curve set names are ignored when writing to a PETCOM database. PETCOM file names are
limited to a maximum of 8 characters. This means the user must be careful not to select the same
curve name from different sets or curves that have the first same 8 characters.

13.3 GEOLOG6
The 'Read / Write to GEOLOG DB' interface has been updated to run either as an HTTP web
link, a Secure Shell (SSH) connection or through Windows. Full details of the Unix and PC
system set-up requirements are provided in the 'Connecting to External Databases'
introduction.
Please note: the 'old' GEOLOG6 link (IP Version 3.1 and earlier) is no longer supported.
The user must have a valid GEOLOG6 licence to be able to read from / write to a GEOLOG6
database.
The 'Read / Write to GEOLOG DB' interface includes a 'Tree View' browser, from which the user
can 'drag and drop' an entire well, curves Sets or separate curves to load into IP from a
connected GEOLOG6 database. This allows multiple well data to be selected for loading into IP,
either as new IP wells or replacing / appending curves & Sets in existing IP wells.
The 'Read / Write to GEOLOG DB' interface will only work if the Interactive Petrophysics
installation is on the WINDOWS NT, XP or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems. It will not work
under Windows 95 or Windows 98.
The user should ensure that the IP 'Tools' menu 'Options' 'External Database
Connections' 'Geolog Link' option is 'checked'.
The interface is viewed on 2 'tabbed' screens. These are:
'Import into IP', and

'Export to GEOLOG'
The 'Import into IP' Tab

The 'Import into IP' Tab provides the user with the interface to connect to & load data from a
GEOLOG6 database into IP.
The 'Connection' button on the 'Import into IP' screen launches a dialog window similar to that
shown below. The user must select one of the connection protocols - 'Web client' (HTTP), Secure
Shell (SSH) or Windows and fill in the required fields for each connection type.
Section 13.3 Connecting to External Databases : GEOLOG6

For the HTTP Connection you need to fill in the following:

'PNS File Location' : The Paradigm Name Service File Location. The PNS File
contains the Unix addresses of all the GEOLOG databases on the system. The
directory path to this file is required to allow IP to display the available GEOLOG
databases in the Project list.
'Read Url' : this is the 'Universal Resource Locator' for the cgi script installed on the Unix
'Apache' Web server. This locator is made up of the following syntax: 'Protocol' - '
http://webpgl16.pgl/~pg58_r03/gllnk.cgi'.
'User Name' - This is the Unix User account to which your Unix system administrator
'Password' - This is the Unix password for the above user account.
For the SSH Connection you will need to fill in the following:
'Geolog Directory' - the user will need to know the directory location of the GEOLOG6
binary files installation. For example: /raid5/mincom/geolog6/bin/
'Server Address' - This is the Domain Name of the UNIX file server (DNS name).
'User Name' - This is the user account on the UNIX file server.
'Password' - This is the UNIX password for the above user account.
'Optional Variables' - The environment variable for GEOLOG - 'setenv
PRDM_GEO_LICENSE_FILE\myPath' where myPath points to the users
GEOLOGlicence.
For the Windows Connection you will need to fill in the following:

'Geolog Directory' - enter the location of the GEOLOG program executable on the
users computer.
'Optional Variables' - The WindowsTM environmental variable for GEOLOG - 'set
PRDM_GEO_LICENSE_FILE\myPath'. For multiple variables:
set variablename=value; set variablename2=value2 etc.
The configuration details are saved to the IntPetro.exe.config file, located in the IP program
directory, when the user 'clicks' the 'Apply' button on the 'Connection' dialog. The settings are
restored when the user subsequently closes and re-opens IP, so that the information does not
have to be repeatedly entered each time the user requires the IP to GEOLOG6 link.
Once the configuration has been set up and the connection established, the GEOLOG6 database
wells will be displayed in the left-hand panel of the screen. The 'browser' is like a typical
WINDOWS 'Explorer' interface, allowing the user to expand the Well 'Tree' to view the available
Curve Sets and individual curves loaded for each GEOLOG6 well.
NOTE: The following convention is observed when loading curves into IP from GEOLOG -
GEOLOG6 curve names are displayed with a '_1', '_2', '_3' after their name. This is the
version number of that curve in GEOLOG6. When loading into IP, the '_1' will be removed, while
any '_2', '_3' will be left appended to the curve name to allow curves to be discriminated one
from another.
NOTE: IP will only allow one DEPTH curve to be stored for each well imported from
GEOLOG. IP interrogates the user-selected GEOLOG well to determine the selected Set /
curve with the smallest well step increment and uses this 'Depth' curve as the IP 'DEPTH'
curve for the well. All other curves that are selected for loading into IP are referenced to
this 'Depth' curve. Discrete data, for example core plug data (porosity, grain density,
permeability etc..) would be loaded to the nearest IP well depth 'step', rather than at their
'true' depth, if they were imported to IP in this way. An alternative data flow route, exporting
core plug data to LAS or ASCII files and then loading to IP as Array curves is recommended if
such data are required at their actual recorded plug depths. See 'Create Curve / Array Curve'
for more information.
Viewing GEOLOG6 Wells in the IP Interface

Once a connection to a GEOLOG6 database has been established, by selecting a 'Project', the
user can view the wells, curves and curve Sets in the GEOLOG6 database in the left-hand panel
of the window. IP interrogates the external database to read wells, curve Sets, log curves and
formation tops.
The list of wells can be filtered either by using the drop-down list available from the 'Display Well:
' box or by typing in the 'Filter By:' box and 'clicking' the 'Filter' button.


This 'Browser' view can be used to expand 'Wells' and 'Sets' to show the curves in them. Wells,
Curve Sets and curves are selected for import to IP by simple drag/drop operations:
To Load Wells - drag/drop the 'Well' into the upper, 'Wells to Import' panel. Alternatively
right-mouse-click on a well name and click the 'Add' button that appears on-screen.
terminate the 'Read' operation at any time by clicking the 'Cancel' button. The 'Read'
operation will populate the 'Wells to Import' panel with the Well name. All available
GEOLOG curves will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list. This can take some
minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the selected GEOLOG well.
To Load Sets / Curves - drag/drop the Curve Set name or curve name into the lower, 'Curves to
Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-click on a Curve Set and click the 'Add' button that
appears on-screen.

Click 'OK' to execute the operation. The selected Sets / Curves will be loaded into the
interface. This can take some minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the
selected GEOLOG Sets.
To Load GEOLOG Formation Tops data:

GEOLOG Formation Tops data can be imported into IP. The user can 'click and drag' the Tops
Set into the 'Curves to Import' panel. The Tops data are flagged in the 'Curves to Import' panel,
in the 'Import Type' column as type 'Tops', to distinguish them from conventional 'Log' data.

'Use existing IP Well' - if 'checked', the user-selected curve Sets and curves will be
loaded into an existing IP well with the same name as the GEOLOG well. If a well name
match is not found, the user will be prompted for an action, as illustrated below:

The user should click 'OK' to create a new IP well to load the curve data into, or 'Cancel' to abort
the 'import' operation for that well.
GEOLOG database into an IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the
GEOLOG curves will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be
existing IP well,the import operation will ignore the GEOLOG curve Set names and will
write the imported curves into the user-selected IP curve Set (set up from the Well '
Properties' window). If the box is left 'un-checked', the GEOLOG curve Sets will be
'Fill Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any data gaps existing
in the imported curves during the import operation. If the user wishes to copy Core
analysis data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density., Permeability) then the 'Fill Gaps'
option should be left 'un-checked'. Importing Continuous log curves and discrete core
analysis data from GEOLOG to IP would therefore require a two step import operation,
with 'Fill Gap' switched 'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for core data.
'Link Zones' - if 'checked', IP will import GEOLOG Tops information and link the entries
to make a continuous IP Zone Set where the base of one formation is automatically
taken as the next deepest Formation Top depth.
The 'Operations' Buttons

The 'Operations' buttons are arranged along the bottom of the user interface. They are
described below:
'Load All' - executes the 'import into IP' operation and loads all wells / curves listed in
the 'Import' panels into the current IP database.
'Clear All' - clears all curve and well entries from the 'Wells to Import' and 'Curves to
Import' list windows.
'Close' - closes the external database interface.
Viewing GEOLOG Well Properties in the IP Interface

The user can view available 'cultural' data associated with a GEOLOG well by right-mouse clicking
on the well name in the 'Wells to Import' panel. This launches the following 'Well Properties'
dialog window:

The user can either accept the GEOLOG well name, which will become the 'IP Well
Name', or choose to load the curves into an existing IP well by selecting the appropriate
IP well name from the 'IP Well' drop-down list.
The user can choose the Curve Set to load the GEOLOG curves into, by selecting from
the available choices in the 'Load into Set' drop-down list.
If there are additional filled in data fields, for example 'Water Depth' or 'Kelly Bushing',
stored in GEOLOG, these data can be copied into the appropriate 'Manage Well
Header Info.' module entry boxes for the IP well, when the load operation is executed.
Viewing GEOLOG Curve Properties in the IP Interface

Curve details can be viewed for curves selected for import, by right-mouse button 'clicking' on a
curve in the 'Curves to Import' panel. A menu dialog is launched, as shown below. 'Clicking' the '
Properties' option opens the following 'Curve Properties' dialog:
The user can change the curve name, so that it loads to IP with the new curve name and can
choose the Curve Set to load the curve into. The 'Edit Set' button launches the 'Edit Global Sets
' module, allowing the user to create a new curve Set to use as the Load Set for this curve.
The 'Details' button launches the 'Well Properties' window, shown above.
If the user makes any changes to the curve name, Set or Units, clicking 'Apply' will save the
changes and close the 'Curve Properties' window.
Other Right-Mouse Button 'Click' Options

The following options are also available from the 'right-mouse-button click' action in the 'Curves
to Import' panel:
'Remove' - clears the selected curve from the 'Curves to Import' list.
'Remove All' - clears all curve names from the 'Curves to Import' list.
'Load' - loads the selected curve to IP using either a new IP well (the GEOLOG well
name) or an existing IP well.
'Load All' - loads all the curves in the 'Curves to Import' list either to a new IP well (the
GEOLOG well name) or an existing IP well.

The 'Export to GEOLOG' Tab

The 'Export to GEOLOG' tab allows the IP user to write log curves and Tops back to a connected
GEOLOG database.
The interface is identical to the 'Import into IP' screen in terms of layout. The 'Browser' panel
displays the current IP database and its associated wells. The functionality for selecting wells and
curves is also the same. Wells can be drag/dropped into the 'Wells to Export' panel, Curve Sets
and curves can be drag/dropped into the 'Curves to Export' panel. 'Right-mouse-button' clicking
launches the 'Add' button, which also adds wells /curves into the Export panels.
'Export IP Tops' - if the 'Export IP Tops' check-box is 'checked', IP will automatically

write all Zone / Tops Sets (of type 'TOPS') for the selected IP wells to the attached
GEOLOG database. The user can then edit/delete the Tops sets as required, from within
GEOLOG.
'Load All' - clicking the 'Load All' button, loads all selected curves and tops sets into the
attached GEOLOG database.
'Clear All' : removes all entries from the 'Wells to Export' and 'Curves to Export' lists.
PLEASE NOTE: when the user connects to an external database and IP reads the external wells,
Sets and curves stored there, the information is stored in a data 'cache'. Essentially, IP takes a
snapshot of the external database. If the IP user exports wells back into the external database
and then goes back to the 'Import to IP' screen, the browser will not immediately be updated with
the new well(s)/ curves. The user should close and re-open the external database link to refresh
the data cache and hence the browsers well entries.

13.4 OpenWorks
The 'Read from OpenWorks DB' interface has been updated to run either as an HTTP web link,
or a Secure Shell (SSH) connection. Full details of the Unix and PC system set-ups are provided
in the 'Connecting to External Databases' introduction.
The 'Read from OpenWorks DB' interface includes a 'Tree View' browser, from which the user
can 'drag and drop' an entire well, curves Sets or separate curves to load into IP from a
connected OpenWorks database. This allows multiple well data to be selected for loading into IP,
either as new IP wells or replacing / appending curves & Sets in existing IP wells.
The 'Read from OpenWorks DB' interface will only work if the Interactive Petrophysics
installation is on the WINDOWS NT, XP or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems. It will not work
under Windows 95 or Windows 98.
The user should ensure that the IP 'Tools' menu 'Options' 'External Database
Connections' 'OpenWorks Link' option is 'checked'.
The 'Import into IP' Interface

The 'Import' interface is viewed on the following 'Import into IP' screen. On clicking the 'Read
from OpenWorks DB' option, the following screen is launched, which allows the user to set up
the external database connection and to interrogate the available OpenWorks databases on the
networked Unix system. The Connection protocols and configuration settings are described in
detail in the 'Connecting to External Databases' chapter.
The 'Connection' button on the 'Import into IP' screen launches a dialog window similar to that
shown below. The user must select one of the connection protocols - 'Web client' (HTTP) or
Secure Shell (SSH) and fill in the required fields for each connection type.
For the HTTP Connection you need to fill in the following:

'Read URL' : this is the 'Universal Resource Locator' for the cgi script installed on the
Section 13.4 Connecting to External Databases : OpenWorks

Unix 'Apache' Web server. This locator is made up of the following syntax: 'Protocol' - '
http://webpgl16.pgl/~pg58_r03/owlnk.cgi'
'User Name' - This is the Unix User account to which your Unix system administrator
'Password' - This is the Unix password for the above user account.
For the SSH Connection you will need to fill in the following :
'OpenWorks Link' - the user will need to know the directory location of the OpenWorks
binary files installation. For example: /opt/PGLWowlnk/bin/owlnk.sh
'Server Address' - This is the Domain Name of the Unix file server (DNS name).
'User Name' - This is the user account on the Unix file server.
'Password' - This is the password for the above user account.
The configuration details are saved to the IntPetro.exe.config file, located in the IP program
directory, when the user 'clicks' the 'Apply' button on the 'Connection' dialog. The settings are
restored when the user subsequently closes and re-opens IP, so that the information does not
have to be repeatedly entered each time the user requires the IP to OpenWorks link.
Once the configuration has been set up and the connection established, the OpenWorks
database wells will be displayed in the left-hand panel of the screen. The 'browser' is like a
typical WINDOWS 'Explorer' interface, allowing the user to expand the Well 'Tree' to view the
available Curve Sets and individual curves loaded for each OpenWorks well.
The user must first ensure that the 'Connection' method (SSH / HTTP), links and Unix
user name and password are set up properly. See 'Connecting to External Databases
' chapter, 'PC Configuration Instructions' section.
The user can then select an OpenWorks project from the drop-down 'Project:' list.
The left hand panel of the screen is a 'Project browser'-type interface that allows the user to view
the wells, curve Sets and curves stored in the selected OpenWorks database. The browser view
for the OpenWorks Project and wells can be expanded by clicking on the '+' symbol adjacent to
the well icon, in order to view increasingly more detail on log curves.The 'Wells to Import' and '
Curves to Import' panels will be populated with OpenWorks wells and log curves when the user
selects these data to load into IP.
The list of wells can be filtered either by using the drop-down list available from the 'Display Well:

' box or by typing in the 'Filter By:' box and 'clicking' the 'Filter' button.
Data are selected for loading to IP by dragging / dropping 'wells', 'curve Set' names or individual
'curves' into the appropriate 'Wells to Import' or 'Curves to Import' panel.
curve Sets and curves are selected for import to IP by simple drag/drop operations:
OpenWorks curves will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list. This can take some
minutes, depending upon how many curves exist in the selected OpenWorks well.
To Load Sets / Curves - drag/drop the curve Set name or curve name into the lower, 'Curves to

Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-click on a curve Set and click the 'Add' button that
appears on-screen.
selected GEOLOG Sets.
Click 'OK' to accept all the curve data in that Set.
To load individual curves:

'Click and drag' a 'Curve' icon into the 'Curves to Import' panel, or
right mouse button 'click' on a 'Curve' icon and click the 'Add' button which appears.
IP will read the external database entry and will populate the 'Curves to Import' screen
with the selected curve.
To Load OpenWorks Formation Tops data:

OpenWorks Formation Tops data can be imported into IP. The user can 'click and drag' the
Tops Set into the 'Curves to Import' panel. The Tops data are flagged in the 'Curves to Import'
panel, in the 'Import Type' column as type 'Tops', to distinguish them from conventional 'Log'
data.


The user should click 'OK' to create a new IP well to load the curve data into, or 'Cancel' to abort
the 'import' operation for that well.
OpenWorks database into an IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the
OpenWorks curves will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be
existing IP well, the import operation write the imported curves into the user-selected IP
curve Set (set up in the Well 'Properties' window). If the box is left 'un-checked', the

OpenWorks curve Sets will be created in the IP database and curves will be loaded into
them.
'Fill Data Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any data gaps
existing in the imported curves during the import operation. If the user wishes to copy
Core analysis data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density., Permeability) then the 'Fill
Data Gaps' option should be left 'un-checked'. Importing continuous log curves and
discrete core analysis data from OpenWorks to IP would therefore require a two step
import operation, with 'Fill Data Gaps' switched 'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for core
data.
'Link Zones' - if 'checked', IP will import OpenWorks Tops information and link the
entries to make a continuous IP Zone Set where the base of one formation is
automatically taken as the next deepest Formation Top depth.

described below:
'Load All' Button - clicking this button will execute the import operation and will load all
the selected OpenWorks wells, curve Sets and curves into the current IP database.
'Remove All' Button - clicking this button will remove all curve and well entries from the '
Import into IP' interface.
Viewing OpenWorks Well Properties in the IP Interface

The user can view available 'cultural' data associated with a GEOLOG well by right-mouse clicking
on the well name in the 'Wells to Import' panel. This launches the following 'Well Properties'
dialog window:

The user can either accept the Openworks well name, which will become the 'IP Well
Name', or choose to load the curves into an existing IP well by selecting the appropriate
IP well name from the 'IP Well' drop-down list.
The user can choose the curve Set to load the Openworks curves into, by selecting
from the available choices in the 'Load into Set' drop-down list.
If there are additional filled in data fields, for example 'Water Depth' or 'Kelly Bushing',
stored in OpenWorks, these data can be copied into the appropriate 'Manage Well
Header Info.' module entry boxes for the IP well, when the load operation is executed.
Viewing OpenWorks Curve Properties in the IP Interface

Curve details can be viewed for curves selected for import, by right-mouse button 'clicking' on a
curve in the 'Curves to Import' panel. A menu dialog is launched, as shown below. 'Clicking' the '
Properties' option opens the following 'External DB Curve Properties' dialog:
The user can change the curve name, so that it loads to IP with the new curve name and can
choose the curve Set to load the curve into.
The 'Details' button launches the 'Well Properties' window, shown above.
If the user makes any changes to the curve name, Set or Units, clicking 'OK' will save the
changes and close the 'External DB Curve Properties' window.
Other Right-Mouse Button 'Click' Options

The following options are also available from the 'right-mouse-button click' action in the 'Curves
to Import' panel:
'Remove' : Clears the selected curve from the 'Curves to Import' list.
'Remove All' : Clears all curve names from the 'Curves to Import' list.
'Load' : loads the selected curve to IP using either a new IP well (the OpenWorks well
name) or an existing IP well.
'Load All' : loads all the curves in the 'Curves to Import' list either to a new IP well (the
OpenWorks well name) or an existing IP well.

13.5 ODM
Oilfield Data Manager (ODM) is a PC-based subsurface data management and geoscience
software package developed by Senergy. For more information on this application follow the link
to the ODM3 website http://www.odmweb.com.
The 'Read / Write to ODM DB' interface includes a 'Tree View' browser, from which the user can
'drag and drop' an entire well, curves Sets or separate curves to load into IP from a connected
ODM database. This allows multiple well data to be selected for loading into IP, either as new IP
wells or replacing / appending curves & Sets in existing IP wells.
The 'Read / Write to ODM DB' interface will only work if the IP installation is on the WINDOWS
NT, XP or WINDOWS 2000 operating systems. It will not work under Windows 95 or
Windows 98.
Connecting to an ODM database

The client connection is made using an OLEDB connection string. This connection string is
constructed automatically when the user selects the ODM MS Access database '.mdb' file.
'Click' the 'Connection' button.
Use the browser dialog that is launched to locate the required ODM database (.mbd) file.
Select 'Open'.
To access the ODM database, close the 'Connection' dialog and select a Project from
the drop-down 'Project' list.
The 'Read/Write to ODM DB' interface is organised on 2 'tabbed 'screens . These are :
'Import into IP', and
'Export to ODM'
The 'Import into IP' Tab

The 'Import into IP' Tab provides the user with the interface to connect to & load data from an
ODM database into IP.
Viewing ODM Wells in the IP Interface

Once a connection to an ODM database has been established, by selecting a 'Project', the user
can view the wells, curves and Sets in the ODM database in the left hand panel of the window. IP
interrogates the external database to read wells, curve Sets, log curves and formation tops. The
list of wells can be filtered either by using the drop-down list available from the 'Display Well:' box
or by typing in the 'Filter By:' box and 'clicking' the 'Filter' button.
Section 13.5 Connecting to External Databases : ODM

Curve Sets and curves are selected for import to IP by simple drag/drop operations:
ODM curves will be listed in the 'Curves to Import' list. This can take some minutes,
depending upon how many curves exist in the selected ODM well.
To Load Sets / Curves - drag/drop the Curve Set name or curve name into the lower, 'Curves to
Import' panel. Alternatively, right-mouse-click on a Curve Set and click the 'Add' button that
appears on-screen.
IP will read the external database entries and will populate the 'Curves to Import' screen
with the available curves.

selected ODM Sets.
To Load ODM Formation Tops data:

ODM Formation Tops data can be imported into IP. The user can 'click and drag' the Tops Set
into the 'Curves to Import' panel. The Tops data are flagged in the 'Curves to Import' panel, in
the 'Import Type' column as type 'Tops', to distinguish them from conventional 'Log' data.
PLEASE NOTE : ODM tops often are stored in a way that preserves a stratigraphic hierarchy
(e.g. Group, Formation, Member). The IP user will have to check the imported tops and may have
to perform some editing, in the 'Edit Zones /Tops Sets' module, to get the ODM tops to display
correctly in IP.

'Use existing IP Well' - if 'checked', the user-selected curve Sets and curves will be
loaded into an existing IP well with the same name as the ODM well. If a well name
match is not found, the user will be prompted for an action, as illustrated below:

The user should click 'OK' to create a new IP well to load the curve data into, or 'Cancel'
to abort the 'import' operation for that well.
ODM database into an IP well where the identical curve name(s) exist, the ODM curves
will overwrite the existing data in IP. If 'un-checked' the user will be warned that an
identical curve name already exists in the IP well.
'Use "Load into Set' Option' - ODM does not support curve Sets. If this check-box is
'checked' and the curves are to be imported into an existing IP well curve Set (set from
the Well 'Properties' dialog) the import operation will write the ODM curves into the
selected IP well curve Set. if the box is left 'un-checked', the ODM curves will be loaded
into the IP database using an auto-created curve Set called CRVS.
'Fill Data Gaps' - if 'checked', IP will automatically extrapolate across any data gaps
existing in the imported curves during the import operation. If the user wishes to copy
Core analysis data (e.g.Core porosity, Core grain density., Permeability) then the 'Fill
Data Gaps' option should be left 'un-checked'. Importing Continuous log curves and
discrete core analysis data from ODM to IP would therefore require a two step import
operation, with 'Fill Data Gaps' switched 'on' for continuous logs and 'off' for core data.

described below:
'Load All' - executes the 'import into IP' operation and loads all wells / curves listed in
the 'Import' panels into the current IP database.
'Clear All' - clears all curve and well entries from the 'Wells to Import' and 'Curves to
Import' list windows.
'Close' - Closes the external database interface.
The 'Export to ODM' Tab

The 'Export to ODM' tab allows the IP user to write log curves and Tops back to a connected
ODM database.
The interface is almost identical to the 'Import into IP' screen in terms of layout. The 'Browser'
panel displays the current IP database and its associated wells. The functionality for selecting
wells and curves is also the same. Wells can be drag/dropped into the 'Wells to Export' panel,
Curve Sets and curves can be drag/dropped into the 'Curves to Export' panel.
'Right-mouse-button' clicking launches the 'Add' button, which also adds wells /curves into the
Export panels.
'Load All' - Clicking the 'Load All' button, loads all selected curves and tops sets into
the attached ODM database.
'Clear All' - removes all entries from the 'Wells to Export' and 'Curves to Export' lists.


13.6 Shell LOGIC Database Loader

This is a migration tool to copy Shell LOGIC database projects into an IP project. This module
only works with LOGIC version S2001.2. Other versions are NOT supported.
Well Attributes
To migrate the maximum amount of data from the LOGIC database into IP some preliminary
steps are needed to configure IP.
The following well attributes need to be created in IP.
1. 'Comment1'
2. 'Comment2'
3. 'XLoc'
4. 'YLoc'
These attributes will be used to load these fields from the LOGIC database well header.
'Tools' 'Options' 'Well Attributes'. Click the 'Add' button, fill in the attribute name in the
dialog box 'New Attribute Name' and click 'OK'. Fill in the 'Display Alias' for the attribute. The '
Display Alias' is what is shown on the well header form.
Curve System Defaults

If the user is planning to import a lot of curves which are not part of the standard IP set of curve
Section 13.6 Connecting to External Databases : Shell LOGIC Database Loader

names then it would be worth adding these non standard IP curve names to the
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file. By adding these non standard IP curve names to the
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR these defaults will then be picked up automatically when loading. The
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR can be accessed from the 'Tools' 'Defaults' 'Edit User Curve
System Defaults' menu.
Load Shell LOGIC Database

From 'Input/Output' select the 'Read from Shell LOGIC DB' option. Use the 'Browse' button to
select the LOGIC database to import. The folder to select will be the folder that contains all the
WELL001, WELL002 etc data folders.
Select the wells to load. The normal windows selection controls work. Ctrl click selects
a well, Shift click selects a range.
Select the 'IP Well database sample frequency'. This will be the IP database step.
Curves that are at a higher frequency than this in LOGIC will be loaded as an array
curve. Curves with a lower frequency will be loaded as sparsely loaded data (ie data with
gaps in it).
The IP Load Set can be selected. Capillary pressure curves will be loaded into a set
called CapP. The Edit Sets button can be used to create an IP set that is not available
in the drop down menu.
Click the Load button to load the selected wells. The module loads the data well by well
and saves each well to the IP database as it progresses. There is no limit to the number
of wells that can be loaded at one time except the 9,999 well IP database limit. The IP
database number will be the same as the LOGIC database number if possible (i.e. there
is no IP DB number conflict).

Capillary Pressure
Capillary pressure data is all loaded into the CapP IP set. IP loads 5 curves for each LOGIC
capillary pressure curve. To the LOGIC curve name is appended the follow extensions
1. pc. This will be an array curve that contains the pressure data of the Pc plugs.
2. sw. This will be an array curve that contains the saturation data of the Pc plugs.
3. perm. This is a regular curve that contains the permeabilities of the Pc plugs.
4. phi. This is a regular curve that contains the porosities of the Pc plugs.
5. GD. This is a regular curve that contains the grain densities of the Pc plugs.
Image Data
Image data will be loaded as arrays and can be displayed in the normal way in IP.
Well Header Data

All LOGIC header data will be copied to the IP well.
Curve Header Data

The LOGIC header data will be copied to IP. This includes the module and the date curves
showing when they were created and last updated in LOGIC. Curve comments will also be copied.
Journal File
The LOGIC journal.dat file is copied from the LOGIC database into the IP well folders.


13.7 Read / Write via OpenSpirit

The 'Read / Write via OpenSpirit' functionality allows the user to load and save data between IP
and other OpenSpirit-enabled databases such as OpenWorks and GeoFrame. The
OpenSpirit website can be found at http://www.openspirit.com
The user must check that the 'Tools' 'Options' 'External Database Connections' '
OpenSpirt Link' check-box, is 'checked' for this option to be visible under the IP 'Input / Output'
main menu item.
NOTE: The IP - OpenSpirit link will only work if OpenSpirit has been installed on the users PC,
along with the OpenSpirit .NET components. These components are only found in OpenSpirit
version 2.5 and more recent versions.
PLEASE NOTE: at time of writing (July 2006), the most recent version of OpenSpirit is Ver
2.9.1 and requires Microsoft .Net 1.1 in order to work properly. Also, there are additional
required items in the OpenSpirit .NET install, so simply installing Microsoft's .NET
components will not enable the IP - OpenSpirit connection. When you install OpenSpirit
on your PC you will be prompted to specify the '.NET Installation options'. 'Check' all the
options for the .NET Interface, Excel Adaptor and ArcView Extension, as shown below and
click the 'Next' button.
Section 13.7 Connecting to External Databases : Read / Write via OpenSpirit

NOTE: for a new OpenSpirit install on a PC there is a User registration phase to be completed
before IP will communicate with OpenSpirit. A user 'Alias' must be set up using the 'OpenSpirit
Launcher'. Opening the OpenSpirit Launcher will launch the following dialog:
You will need to Alias a user, so 'click' the lower arrow and enter the appropriate Password for
your Unix account/UserId in the text box at the bottom of the window (as shown below).

The OpenSpirit Launcher (shown below) should now start and you will be able to connect to an
OpenSpirit 'Session'.
When the link is set up, IP will be able to communicate directly with any OpenSpirit-enabled
databases that the user has access to.
NOTE: 'PGL_IP' runtime licenses must be obtained from OpenSpirit in order for IP to
communicate with an installed OpenSpirit system.
Before IP can communicate with the OpenSpirit-linked database, the OpenSpirit 'User Server'
must be running. The User Server is started when you activate the 'OpenSpirit Launcher', if it is
not already running. You will be asked if you wish to shut it down when you exit the launcher, as
shown below. 'Check' the 'Do not shutdown any servers' Option and then 'Continue Exit'.
The OpenSpirit sessions are set up in the 'OpenSpirit Launcher' (installed when OpenSpirit is
installed on the PC). A session allows access to various external database resources. Sessions
must be set up before accessing OpenSpirit through IP. Help on setting up the OpenSpirit
sessions can be found in the OpenSpirit help documentation.

PLEASE NOTE
1. At time of writing (July 2006) OpenSpirit has a limited ability to translate curve
measurement 'units' residing in IP, to external databases. OpenSpirit recognizes POSC
unit acronyms only. This means that many of the 'standard' curve units e.g. g/cc, v/v,
dec., API , inches, will not be copied to the attached external database. The user may
have to manually update/correct the curve units in the external database.
2. Co-ordinate Conversions - IP currently only recognizes external database well locations

(Latitude / Longitude) where the parent project co-ordinates are defined in Universal
Transverse Mercator (UTM) and WGS84 datum.
The 'Read / Write via OpenSpirit' Interface

The 'Read / Write Via OpenSpirit' interface is used to load log curves, well Tops and Well Path
(deviation) data into IP from an 'attached' external database, using an OpenSpirit connection.
Log curves and Tops data can also be exported to a number of external databases from IP. The
interface is organized on 2 'tabbed' screens. These are:
'Import into IP'

'Export to OpenSpirit'
The 'tabs' are described below:
'Import into IP' Tab

To Connect to an OpenSpirit Session:
Click' the 'Connection' button to select an 'OpenSpirit Session' and 'Project' from
which to retrieve well data. Click 'OK'.
Select a 'Well Bore List' from the drop-down list at the top of the screen. The left-hand
panel of the interface will be populated with available wells in a 'Tree' view presentation.

The following common tasks are described more fully in the 'Common Database Connection
Tasks' chapter.
1. Loading all the log curves for a new IP well from the external project
2. Selectively loading log curves for a new IP well from the external project
3. Deselecting curves from the 'import' operation
4. Loading Well Tops
5. Deselecting Tops from the 'import' operation
6. Editing Well Properties
Editing a new wells' 'well attributes' before loading into the current IP
database
Updating well attributes in an existing IP well in the current IP database
Writing Data via OpenSpirit

Data are written to an OpenSpirit-connected external database from the 'Export to OpenSpirit'
Tab.
Please note
1. At time of writing (July 2006) OpenSpirit has a limited ability to translate curve
measurement 'units', defined in IP, to external databases. OpenSpirit recognizes POSC

unit acronyms only. This means that many of the 'standard' curve units e.g. g/cc, v/v, dec.,
API , inches, will not be copied to the attached external database. The user will have to
manually update/correct the curve units in the external database.
2. Co-ordinate Conversions - IP currently only recognizes external database well

locations where the parent project co-ordinates are defined in Universal Transverse
Mercator (UTM) and WGS84 datum.
'Export to OpenSpirit' Tab

The following screen capture is typical of the 'Export to OpenSpirit' view seen when connected
to an external database via the OpenSpirit link.
To export data to an OpenSpirit-connected database the 'Export to OpenSpirit' tab must be set
up.
The 'generic', expandable 'Tree View' panel on the left-hand-side of the user interface will contain
the list of wells in the current IP database that are loaded into memory - and therefore available to
export data from.
To select Wells and curves for export:
Either 'click & drag' a 'Rig' icon into the 'Wells to export' panel. This will load all
curve Sets and log curves associated with the selected well, into the lower, '
Curves to export' panel.
Or, expand the 'Tree View' to see individual curve names, then 'click & drag' either the
curve Set name or individual curve names into the lower, 'Curves to export' panel. The
selected curves will appear in the panel.

Exporting an IP well to an 'External Database'

By default an IP well,and its curves, when it is exported, will create a new external database well
with the same well name as the IP well. Alternatively, to export the log curves to an existing
external database well you should:
right-mouse-button click on the 'Load Name' in the 'Wells to Export' panel. A dialog is
launched, as illustrated below:
select an external database well name from the drop-down list to export the curve data
to.
Click 'OK'.
Click the 'Export All' button on the main 'Export to OpenSpirit' screen.
To confirm that the data have been exported to the correct external well, click on the 'Import into
IP' tab. The 'Import' Tab will refresh and you can click on the well that you exported data to, to
see whether curves are present.
The 'Export IP Tops' check-box, when 'checked', will export all the Zones / Tops Sets from the
selected well to the external database.

Section
14
Parameter Sets
Senergy Parameter Sets 343
14 Parameter Sets
IP stores petrophysical interpretation parameters in 'Parameter Sets'. 'Parameter Set
Management' is an important topic that the user should understand before undertaking an
interpretation using IP. The subject is explained more fully under 'Parameter Set Management
'.
'Parameter Sets' are managed using a number of tools.
The 'Parameter Set' management tools include :
'Save Parameter Set to file'

'Delete Parameter Sets'
'Print Parameter Set'
Section 14. Parameter Sets :

14.1 Parameter Set Management

The important topic of 'Parameter Set Management' is discussed here, since a knowledge of the
appearance and function of 'Parameter Sets' is integral to the operation, and underlies the
flexibility, of many of the interpretation tools within the IP program.
A 'Parameter Set' consists of a set of 'zones'. In the simplest form, called a 'Zone / Tops Set' the
Set is comprised of entries containing a 'Zone name' with an associated 'Top' depth and '
Bottom' depth. For the interpretation module parameter sets, for example the 'Clay Volume'
parameter Set, this basic structure is extended to store a number of petrophysical 'Parameters'
associated with the interpretation module. The names and numbers of parameters in a '
Parameter Set' depend on the interpretation module selected .
The working 'Parameter Sets' for the interpretation modules are automatically saved into the IP
database every time a well is saved. The 'Parameter Sets' are restored when the well is loaded
into memory.
The 'Parameter Set Management' screen is used to manage the 'Parameter Sets' from the
'zonable' interpretation modules. The tool is available in the set-up window of any of the following
modules:
'Clay Volume'
'Porosity and Water Saturation'
'Cutoffs and Summation'
'Mineral Solver'
'Basic Log Analysis'
'NMR Interpretation'
'TDT Standalone'
'TDT TIme Lapse'
'Pore Pressure Gradient'
For information on how to distribute 'Parameter Sets' between wells then look at the chapter on '
Multi-Well Parameter Distribution'.
The 'Parameter Set Management' window is displayed when you click the 'Load / Save
Parameter Sets' button, which is found on the 'set-up' window for each of these interpretation
modules. The 'Clay Volume' module is illustrated below:
Section 14.1 Parameter Sets : Parameter Set Management


Parameter Set 'types' are related to specific interpretation modules. Set 'types' are as follows :
Tops : Generic, user-created 'Tops' Set. No parameters.

Clay : Clay volume module Parameter Set.
PhiSw : Porosity and water saturation module Parameter Set.
Cutoff : Cut-off and summations module Parameter Set.
Splice : Zones from the interactive splice module.
Basic_Loganal : Basic log analysis module Parameter Set.
TDT_Stand_Alone : TDT-Stand-Alone analysis module Parameter Set.
TDT_Time_Lapse : TDT time-lapse analysis module Parameter Set.
NMR : NMR interpretation analysis module Parameter Set.
Minsolve : Mineral Solver module Parameter Set.
Pore_Pres_Grad : Pore pressure gradient module. Parameter Set management screen
not available.
UP****** : Zoned user program modules. '******' will be the name of the user program.
The 'Parameter Set Management' dialog window allows the user to save and restore Parameter
Sets in addition to the working Parameter Sets. This can be useful if you want to try a different
interpretation technique but still have the ability to go back to the original interpretation set-up.
You can save the original 'Parameter Set' under a user-defined name, change the interpretation
parameters / equations and run the new interpretation model. The original parameters can be
recalled / restored from the saved 'Parameter Set' at a later date.
You can save 'Parameter Sets' either ;

To an external disk file, given a user-defined name (this is the same procedure as that
accessed from the main menu 'Input / Output 'Save Parameter Set to File'
operation) or,
The Parameter Set can be saved into the well database under a user-specified
name.
The 'Parameter Set Management' window is divided into two sections, one for saving the '
Parameter Set' and one for loading the 'Parameter Set'. Both sections allow the user to save and
restore 'Parameter Sets' from the database, as well as from separate, external disk files. The '
Save' section, however, allows the user to restore a 'Parameter Set' from a different well or a '
Parameter Set' of a different type (from the database only).
If a Parameter Set of a different 'Type' to the module that is being run is restored, then only
the 'Top', 'Bottom 'and 'Zone name' fields are copied for each zone. Not all of the
interpretation parameters associated with each zone will be copied and values will be set
to the default values for that type of Set.
Copying 'Parameter Sets' of a different 'Type' between interpretation modules can be very useful.
For example, if the user has loaded a Tops Set (Type 'Tops') using the ' Manage Zones / Top
Sets' module, these tops might be the ones required for the 'Cut-off and Summation' module
and can be loaded using the 'Load from Database' option, which is activated from the screen
launched by clicking the 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button.
Save Parameter set

The user can edit the 'Save Parameter set name' in the text entry box, to distinguish one
Parameter Set from any other.

Clicking the 'Save to Database' button will copy the Set into the database and the name will be
added to the list in the 'Parameter set' window. Clicking the 'Save to Disk File' button will
activate a file directory dialog box to select where the file should be saved. The default is the
output directory (see 'Set Default File Location').
Load Parameter set

To load a 'Parameter Set' from the database; in the 'Load Parameter set' window, 'click' on the
required 'Parameter Set' name to highlight it. Then 'click' the 'Load from Database' button.
If the 'All Sets' box is 'checked' then all the Sets, regardless of 'type', will be displayed in
the window. If the user loads a Set of a different 'Set Type' to the module from where
the 'Parameter Set Manager' window is launched, then only the 'Top', 'Bottom' and '
Zone name' are loaded and the parameters are all set to their internal IP 'default'
values.

If the 'All Wells' box is 'checked' then the Sets for other in-memory wells are also
displayed. The well name will be added to the 'Parameter Set' window for all wells
except for the 'active' well. An example window with this option set is displayed below.


The 'Delete Set from Database' button allows the user to delete a highlighted Set from
the Set list.
The 'Load from Disk File' allows the user to load a 'Parameter Set' from a disk file.
Only 'Parameter Sets' of the correct 'type' can be loaded to an IP module in this way.

14.2 Save Parameter Set to File

'The Save Parameter Set to File' functionality has largely been superseded, since the IP '
Parameter Sets' are currently stored together with the curve data in the IP database .DAT files.
However, the function has been retained as an alternative method for saving an interpretation '
Parameter Set'. It is definitely worth saving 'All Sets all wells' at the end of a project for data
security purposes.
'Save Parameter Set to file' is a useful method of moving parameters between wells. The user
saves the 'Parameter Set' for the current well using this function. The new well is then selected
and using the 'Load / Save Parameter Set' button on the 'Interpretation' input screen, the user
can select the previously saved 'Parameter Set' belonging to the other well.
To save a 'Parameter Set' for an interpretation, select the interpretation module name and the
complete Set will be saved to disk. This disk file can be restored from within the interpretation
module's interface at a later date (see Parameter Set Management), and contains all the
information used in the interpretation. The file will be stored under the Set name, used in the
interpretation module, with the extension of '.set' and will be put in the output data directory, which
Section 14.2 Parameter Sets : Save Parameter Set to File

can be set under Set Default File Location.
'All Sets current Well' and 'All Sets all wells' allows the user to save multiple Sets at one time.
This is very useful for making an archive record of all the 'Parameter Sets' used in all the wells in
a project database.
Section 14.2 Parameter Sets : Save Parameter Set to File

14.3 Print Parameter Set

To print 'Parameter Sets' from the interpretation modules, or to save them to a disk file, select
the 'Print Parameter Set' menu item, followed by the interpretation module name, followed by
your choice of printer or file name. If 'Printer' is selected, then the output will be directed to the
default printer or whichever printer has been selected under 'Printer Setup'. If 'File' is chosen,
then the output will be sent to a hard disk file. The file will be stored under the Set Name used in
the interpretation module, with the extension of ".txt" and will be put in the output data directory,
which can be set under Set Default File Location.
Selecting the 'All wells - Printer' and 'All wells - File' allows the user to save multiple
Parameter Sets at one time.
These options are also available for individual modules by using the 'Print' button on the '
Parameter' windows.
Section 14.3 Parameter Sets : Print Parameter Set

14.4 Delete Parameter Sets

Selecting the 'Delete Parameter Sets' option will delete an interpretation 'Parameter Set' from
the current, active well. This is helpful if the current 'Parameter Set' is found to be incorrect and
the user wants to start an interpretation again from the beginning. This will not delete any
Parameter Sets saved on the hard disk.
Only the 'Parameter Sets' associated with the currently-active well can be deleted.
'Other Sets' option - rather than have an exhaustive list of 'Parameter Sets' in the list, the 'Other
Sets' option, if 'clicked' will launch the 'Manage Zones / Tops' module, from which the user can
highlight the 'Parameter Set' to delete, then click the 'Delete' button.
If the 'Multi Well' box is ticked then all 'Parameter Sets' are displayed for all wells. This enables
fast deletion of 'Parameter Sets' across many wells - a warning message will appear before the
Sets are deleted.
Section 14.4 Parameter Sets : Delete Parameter Sets

Section 14.4 Parameter Sets : Delete Parameter Sets

Section
15
Data Editing
Senergy Data Editing 357
15 Data Editing
The 'Edit' menu provides the functionality for editing / splicing / filtering and rescaling input
curves. Additional modules allow the user to 'create Array curves', create 'Lithology' curves and
create 'Point curves'. NOTE: a log plot has to be open in order for all the options to be available
for selection.
The following tools are included in the 'Edit' menu:
'Interactive Curve Edit'

'Interactive Baseline Shift'
'Interactive Trend / Square Curve'
'Interactive Depth Shift'
'Depth Shift Other Curves'
'Interactive Block Depth Shift'
'Interactive Curve Splice'
'Splice Curves'
'Interactive Dip Picking'
'Create Curve / Array Curve'
'Create / Edit Lithology Curve'
'Create / Edit Point Curve'
Section 15. Data Editing :

'Curve Filter'
'Curve Average'
'Curve Rescale'
'Fill Data Gaps'
'Array Image Data'
'Picture Curves'
'Text Curves'
Section 15. Data Editing :

15.1 Interactive Curve Edit

The 'Interactive Curve Edit' tool allows the user to edit any curve currently included in a log plot
display in the IP 'workspace'. NOTE: The tool is only 'active' when a log plot window is
on-screen. The editing of a particular curve is performed in the log plot, using the attributes
selected on the 'Edit Curve' dialog.
The user selects 'Interactive Curve Edit' from the main 'Edit' menu. The following window will be
displayed:
The user must select the 'Curve to edit'. This is done by 'clicking' on the appropriate curve trace
in the active plot display, or by 'clicking' on the 'Curve Name' in the log track header. The 'Edit
Curve' window will display the selected curve name. Any Log Plot format, which shows the 'Curve
to edit', can be used for editing.
NOTE: You cannot manually type a curve name into the 'Curve to edit' box, since the program
has to establish where in the log display the 'Curve to edit' can be found.
The 'Result Curve' name defaults to the input curve name with a number '1' appended to the
name.
By 'clicking' the option 'Create Backup Curve' the window will change as follows:
Section 15.1 Data Editing : Interactive Curve Edit

In this case, the selected input curve will be copied to the 'Backup Curve' name (RHOBbu)
before any edits are performed, and the editing will be performed on the original curve name
(RHOB). This is useful, for example, when editing a spike out of a curve in the middle of an
interpretation, since the curve names in the interpretation input windows do not need to be
changed.
There are two 'modes' of interactive editing:

'Stream Mode' - In 'Stream mode', 'click & hold' the left-mouse-button down to draw a
new piece of curve. Release the mouse button and click the 'Interval Break' button to
move to a different section of the log curve.
'Point Mode' - In 'Point mode' 'click' the left-mouse-button to start an edit. Each mouse
'click' will draw a straight line between the mouse 'click' points. To make an interval
break in 'Point mode' either right mouse 'click' or 'click' the 'Interval Break' button.
Click the 'Start Edit' button to begin the interactive edit. The 'Curve to edit' will change colour
and the user redraws the curve as described above.
You can scroll up and down the log while in edit mode.

The 'Null the Data' box, if 'checked', will set the interval being edited to Null (absent)
data. This gives the option of setting bad log data to absent rather than editing it to a
new value.
The 'Use Fixed Value' box, if 'checked', will set the interval being edited to the entered '
Fixed Value'.
The 'Undo Edit' Button launches another dialog window which shows an interactive
'slider bar' with which the user can undo a part, or all, of the edits that have just been
performed. Even if the 'Interval Break' function has been used, the 'Undo Edit'
operation will reset the curve values to the original data across editing gaps. To 'undo'
and save the part-edited curve, move the slider bar to the appropriate position then click
'OK' to return to the main interactive 'Edit Curve' dialog. To exit from 'Undo Edit' mode,
without making any changes click the 'Cancel' button to return to the 'Edit Curve' dialog.

'Click' the 'Finish Edit' button to complete the edit.

Clicking the 'Cancel Edit' button will abort the edit operation and delete any new or
backup curves, leaving the original curve untouched.

15.2 Interactive Baseline Shift

The 'Interactive Baseline Shift' allows the user to graphically apply a baseline shift to any curve
currently shown on a log plot. The user selects the 'Interactive Baseline Shift' under the main '
Edit' menu. The following window will be displayed:
The user must now select the 'Curve to shift'. This is done by clicking on the appropriate curve in
the log plot display or by clicking on the curve name in the track header. The 'Curve to Shift'
window will display the selected curve. Any plot format, which shows the curve, can be used for
editing. The user cannot edit a curve that is being displayed on backup scale (you will not be
able to select it). Therefore, make sure the curve is on main scale before trying to select it.
NOTE: The user cannot manually type in a curve name, since the program has to establish in
which track in the log display the 'Curve to shift' can be found.
The 'Result curve' name defaults to the input curve with a '1' appended to the 'Curve to shift'
name.
By 'clicking' the option 'Create Backup Curve' the window will change as follows:
Section 15.2 Data Editing : Interactive Baseline Shift

In this case the 'Curve to shift' will be copied to the backup curve, and the shifts will be
performed on the original curve.
The shifts are made by creating a baseline on the plot. The 'Result curve' values will be the
separation between the baseline and the shift value plus any 'Baseline Value' the user enters.
Click 'Start Shift' to begin the interactive Baseline shifts. The dialog window will be displayed
where the user can optionally select the program to create a result track. The result track can be
used to view what the final shifted curve will look like while the editing is being made.
The Baseline will be drawn as a vertical thick line at the value entered in the 'Baseline Value' box.
Click in the track to move the baseline. The baseline will consist of line sections joining up the
user-entered points. The user-entered points are displayed as small blue circles on the baseline.
The user can move a point by placing the cursor on a point (the cursor will change to a cross) and
while holding down the left mouse button the point can be dragged to a new position. To delete a
point, move the cursor over the point and press the keyboard 'Delete' key.

Click the 'Finish Shift' button to complete the shifts. The user will be asked whether the shifts are
to be saved to disk to a BaselineShifts.bls file. This will allow the user at a later date to recall the
shifts and make changes.
To recall an old set of shifts 'click' on the 'Recall Shifts' button and select the BaselineShifts.bls
shift file. NOTE: the user must select a shift curve before starting the interactive shifts, even if a
shift table has been recalled. In the log plot track are the 'Curve to shift' and the 'Result curve'
from the BaselineShifts.bls file. Select the curve on the log plot to which to apply the recalled shift.
After choosing the curve, the result curve is automatically renamed by putting a '1' at the end of
the 'Curve to shift name', even if there is already a curve with that name. The 'Result curve'
name should be manually edited to avoid confusion. There is a 10 character limit. NOTE: if the
user leaves the 'Result curve' as SP1, even though SP1 already exists, a warning message will
appear when 'Start Shift' is 'clicked' saying that SP1 already exists and does the user want to
overwrite it or not.
Select 'Start Shift'. If 'Finish Shift' is clicked then the 'Curve to shift' will be shifted by the
recalled shift values and the 'Result curve' will reflect these recalled shifts.
The 'Cancel Shift' button will abort the shifts and delete any backup curves, leaving the original

curve untouched.

15.3 Interactive Trend / Square Curve

The 'Interactive Trend / Square Curve' allows the user to :
graphically define and save a 'Trend curve' for any log curve or calculation parameter in
IP.
graphically define and save a stepped, 'Square' curve from a chosen input curve.
The 'Trend Curve' is very useful, for example; for defining 'GRclean' and 'GRshale' lines over
large log intervals, or for capturing Rw trends over long well sections as input to Sw
determination. Trend Curves can be created for any log analysis parameter and substituted in
any IP calculation module where a parameter is called for. The trend curve can be used to
compute straight line trends for logarithmically-scaled curves for example, or for defining normal
shale compaction trend curves for sonic/resistivity in pore pressure analysis.
The 'Square Curve' functionality can be used, for example, to create stepped sonic and density
curves for input to acoustic impedance modelling.
The user selects 'Interactive Trend / Square Curve' under the main 'Edit' menu (menu item is
only active if a log plot is currently displayed). The following window will be launched:
First, choose the type of trend curve you want to create ('Trend' or 'Square'), using the
radio buttons. This will determine the resulting curve suffix ('_t' or '_s') for the output
curve.
Now select the curve from which the trend or square curve is to be created. This is done
either:
by 'clicking' on the appropriate curve in the log plot display, or
by 'clicking' on the curve name in the log track header. The user should make
sure that the input curve is visible entirely on the main scale in the plot, not
'wrapped' on a backup scale. You cannot select a curve on a backup scale.
NOTE: The user cannot manually type in the curve name, since the program has to establish the
curve track where the subject curve can be found.
Section 15.3 Data Editing : Interactive Trend / Square Curve

The 'Result curve' name defaults to the 'Curve to trend' name with a postscript '_t' or '_s'
attached, depending on whether 'Trend ' or 'Square' curve is selected. The user can rename the
output to any required name.
Click 'Start Trend' to begin the trend line creation. The trend line will initially be drawn as a
vertical thick line in the curve track. 'Click' in the track to create the trend line definition points.
The trend line will consist of line sections joining up the user-entered points. The user-entered
points are displayed as small blue circles on the trend line as shown in the diagram below.
The user can move a point by placing the mouse cursor over a point (the cursor will
change to a cross) and while holding down the left-mouse-button, the point may be
dragged to a new position.
To delete a point, move the cursor over the point and press the 'Delete' key on the
keyboard. The left-hand well plot illustrates the 'Trend Curve', the right-hand plot
illustrates the appearance of the 'Square curve'.

Click the 'Finish Trend' button to create the Trend Curve. The user will be asked whether to
display the resulting trend curve in the plot track.
The user is then asked whether the trend curve points are to be saved.
Saving the trend curve calibration points to disk allows the user to recall and edit the data at a
later date. The trend curve is scaled to the 'Curve to trend' and details can be found in the '
Manage Curve Headers' display.
Editing Trend Lines

Editing trend lines is performed using the 'Recall Trend' option and can only be performed on '
Trend' or 'Square' curves that have been saved to disk. The user should select the 'Recall
Trend' button and choose the appropriate disk file for editing.

The user is then prompted for an appropriate curve on the plot to use for calibration of the trend
line definition points. A gamma ray trend line, for example, cannot be plotted in a RHOB/Neutron
log track.
Choose the appropriate curve by 'clicking' on the curve name in the log curve header or by
'clicking' on the curve in the plot track. The 'Start Edit' button is activated and the user can '
move', 'add' or 'delete' calibration points as required. 'Click' on 'Finish Trend' and save the
edited trend curve to the database and the edited calibration points to disk as shown above.


15.4 Interactive Depth Shift

The 'Interactive Depth Shift' module allows the user to depth-shift one, or many, curves against
another, 'reference' curve, either;
using 'rubber-band' type shifts to stretch / squeeze the 'curve-to-shift' relative to the
reference curve, or
using 'block' depth shifts to move entire curves up or down relative to the reference
curve.
Depth shifts can either;

be applied manually, using the mouse cursor, or
in IP Version 3.3 and later, depth shifts can be set up using the built in 'Auto-Depth
Shift' functionality, which is activated from within the 'Interactive Depth Shift' log plot
display. NOTE: This functionality does not operate when 'Block Depth Shift' mode is
selected.
The 'Interactive Depth Shift' module works in a log plot display that the user must set up or else
the user can use the 'Depth Shift Wizard' to set the log plot up.
When the 'Interactive Depth Shift' module is launched an information screen appears asking if
the user wants to 'Run Depth Shift Wizard?'. If the user answers 'Yes' then the 'Depth Shift
Wizard' starts. If the user answers 'No' then a blank 'Log Plot Format' set-up window is opened.
The user sets up log tracks and the curves to be displayed and shifted. Each log track can act as
an independent set of depth shifts. This allows the user to perform multiple depth shifts
simultaneously.
Interactive depth shifts are performed in a graphical, log plot display. The typical set-up screen for
the log plot is illustrated below. This screen allows you to :
Select the 'type' of depth-shift method you wish to apply ('interpolate' or 'block shift')
Choose the required 'input' curves,
Pick a 'reference (Ref.) curve', 'curves-to-display' and 'curves-to-shift', and
Assign the log plot track number ('track #') that the curves will be displayed in.
In this example, shown below, 2 tracks have been set up. In Track #1, the GREC and RHOB
curves will be depth-shifted relative to the GR curve, with output curves GRECds and RHOBds.
In Track #2, the depth-shifted RHOBds curve will be displayed together with the NPHI curve
which can be depth-shifted relative to the RHOBds curve.
Section 15.4 Data Editing : Interactive Depth Shift

The set-up 'options' check-boxes, located at the top of the Set-up window are described below.
'Interpolate curve data' check-box :

if 'checked' (default), will allow the program to interpolate between curve data
points if the depth shift operation results in a value falling between two database
depth step increments.
If not 'checked', then the closest input value for the shift depth will be chosen.
NOTE: For point data (core data) this box should not be 'checked', otherwise
it could result in interpolations between Null data point (-999) and good data.
'Shift data using blocks' check-box :

This box controls the way IP shifts curve data.
If the box is not 'checked' (default), then the user works with interactive 'depth
shift points'. The 'shift curves' are stretched or squeezed between the selected
depth shift points.
If the box is 'checked', then, rather than define interactive points for
depth-shifting, the user defines a 'block' of data to shift. This is designed to

simplify shifting core data.
'Result Curve Name Default extension' :

This box contains a text entry that is the default extension that is added to an input
curve name to define the output curve name. For example, using the program
default extension of 'ds', an input curve name of GR would have an output curve
name of GRds.
'Output Set' button :

Allows the user to select the set into which the output depth-shifted curves will be
placed. Clicking the button brings up a small dialogue box where the user can
select previously created sets or else 'Create New Set'. If 'Create New Set' is
selected then the 'Manage Curve Sets' dialogue is opened.
'Apply to track' :
Use the drop-down 'Apply to track' menu to select a track that the 'Output Set'
will be applied to. Different 'Output Sets' can be selected for each track or the
same 'Output Set' can be selected for all the tracks.
The 'Depth Offset' box allows the user to define the name of the depth curve
associated with the depth-shift for each track. The depth curve will default to the '
Default depth curve name prefix' plus the track number. The 'Default depth
curve name prefix' is user editable.
With IP v 3.4 irregular stepped curve sets can be created. The 'Depth Offset' curve can not be in
an irregular step curve set. Shifting curves in an irregular curve set will create extra depth entries
in the set for the shifted curves to accommodate for their shifted positions. If this is not required
then a new shifted irregular set should be created in order to accommodate the shifted curves.
To illustrate how the module works we will look at the following scenario:
Two separate log runs have been recorded, GR/LLDLLS/MSFLC and SGR/RHOB/TNPH/DRHO.
The nuclear log curves are off-depth relative to the reference GR/LLD tool and the neutron log (
TNPH) is also off depth relative to the density log (RHOB) curve, as illustrated below.

In this case, curve GR will be set up in Track #1 as the reference curve to depth shift the SGR
and the RHOB and TNPH curves to. In addition, RHOB and TNPH are set up in Track #2, where
TNPH will be depth-shifted again to match the depth-shifted density curve RHOBds. Note that
any additional curves, named in each track, but not displayed ('Display Curve' entry not
'checked'), will be depth-shifted by the same amount as the displayed 'Shift Curve' in that track.
The Set-up 'grid' defines the appearance of the interactive log plot that will be used to perform the
depth shifts. The grid columns are described below.

'Trk #' : This column defines the depth-shift track number for the interactive log plot that
will be launched from this set-up window. Up to eight depth shift tracks can be defined.
A 'depth' track is automatically assigned as the first log track to be drawn.
'Input Curve' :This is the name of the input curve to 'shift', 'display' or to use as a
'reference'. The curve name must either already exist in the well being edited or it can be
an output from a previously-defined shift track. In the example shown above, curve
DS:RHOBds is used as an input curve to track 2, and is already defined as an output
curve from track 1. This curve is therefore allowed as an input to track 2, even though it
may not yet exist in the well when the interactive log plot is launched.
'Output Curve' : This column sets up the names for the output, depth-shifted curves. A
'default' output name will automatically appear when the mouse cursor is moved out of
an 'input curve' box. IP will default to the 'Input curve' name with the 'default extension' ('
ds') appended to the curve name. The 'output curve' name is not used unless the 'Shift
Curve' box is 'checked' to flag the output as an edited curve.
'Shift Curve' : 'Check' this column for each row of the grid if the selected input curve is
to be depth-shifted. The first log curve with both 'Shift Curve' and 'Display Curve'
'checked' in a log track defines the curve that will be interactively moved on-screen
during the selection of shifts. In the above example, the SGRds curve will be the
interactive curve displayed in track 1 and the TNPHds curve will be the interactive curve
in track 2.
Any additional curves named / listed in a log track will be shifted by the same amount as the 'Shift
Curve', but will not be displayed in the log plot unless the 'Display Curve' column has been
'checked' for these curve entries.
'Display Curve' : 'Check' this box to display the selected input curve on the depth-shift
log plot. If the selected curve is also flagged as a 'Shift Curve', then the displayed curve
will be the 'depth-shifted result curve', otherwise it will be the input curve. Any curve
can be displayed in any track.
'Ref. Curve' : This column is used to define a 'Reference Curve'. Only one curve can be
defined as the 'reference' and it can not be a 'Shift Curve'. The 'Reference Curve' does

not have to be defined. If a 'Reference Curve' is selected, that curve will be displayed in
all log tracks in the modules interactive log plot.
The 'function' buttons at the foot of the Set-up screen are described below:
'Start' : Clicking the 'Start' button checks the input curves, launches the depth-shift
'interactive log plot' and activates the depth-shifting routines.
Load' : The 'Load' button is used to reload previously saved depth-shift files. It will
reload all the old curve names and options along with the associated shifts. This can be
useful if you either wish to modify the previous shifts or add a new curve to shift.
'Clear Grid' : Clicking this button removes all curve names and track numbers from the
grid display
The order that curves are added to the input screen is not that important, apart from those
exceptions stated above. If you forget to set up a curve to shift in the grid display, it can be added
into the interactive log plot track header using the right-mouse-button click functionality.
Continuing with our example depth-shift operation:
Clicking the 'Start' button launches the interactive log plot. A separate dialog, the 'Run Depth
Shift' window is also displayed, which provides a tabular listing of the shift depths and shift
magnitudes that have been defined by the user. Initially this window is empty. This window can be
re-sized to view more or less of the shifts. The 'Run Depth Shift' window cannot be edited to
change the shift values that have been set graphically on the log plot.
The user 'clicks and drags' the 'Shift Curve' to match the 'Reference Curve'. In the background,
the other curves listed in Track 1 are shifted by the same amount as the 'Shift Curve'. Continue
from top to bottom of the logs to check the SGR-to-GR depth match.

Managing Interactive Depth Shifts

To interactively depth-shift a curve in a track, 'Click' in the track and a new horizontal
blue shift line will appear. The red tie line that joins the blue line shows the position of
the start of the shift. The blue horizontal line is shown at the shifted position. The Depth
values in the 'Run Depth Shift' window are the depths for the start of the shift, where
the red tie line meets the right side of the track.
To move a depth shift point, Put the mouse cursor over a horizontal shift line, the
cursor will change shape to an up/down drag-type cursor. 'Click' the left-hand mouse
button and hold down while you drag the interactive curve to the new position.
Alternatively, with the cursor positioned over a Shift line, use the keypad '+' and '-' keys
to nudge the shift-curve up or down relative to the reference curve.
To remove a depth shift point, place the mouse cursor over the horizontal line, it will
turn into the up/down arrow cursor shown above. Click the keyboard Delete button to
remove the point from the plot.
In the interactive log plot the curve and depth scales can be changed at any time using the normal
plot format window (Edit Plot Format). If a curve does not have its default scales set up it would
be best to do this before running the depth shift module, since every time you run the module you
would have to change the scales manually. See Manage Curve Headers.
Depth Shift Wizard

The aim of the 'Depth Shift Wizard' is to guide a new IP user through the process of populating
the 'Log Plot Format' screen so that the user can then perform simple depth-shifts. PLEASE

NOTE: the wizard is not aimed at the 'expert' IP user.
The 'Wizard' guides the user step-by-step through the process of setting up the 'Log Plot Format'
screen, starting with curves that will be displayed in 'Track 1'.
The user defines a 'Reference Curve', then moves onto the curves the user would like to shift '
Curve to shift' and 'Other Curves to Shift'.
The 'Depth output curve' is the depth offset output curve for the specified track and contains the
depth shifts for that track.
The 'Extension' screen allows the user to change the 'Output Curves extension' name. The
default is 'ds'. The output Set can be defined here as well. Either select a pre-existing Set or
create a new Set by clicking on the 'Output Set' button.

The 'Add track' screen asks the user if they want to add another track or not.

If the user answers 'Yes' then the 'Wizard' starts again, this time for 'Track 2'. Answering 'No'
moves the user onto the 'Data blocks' screen.

Here the user has two questions to answer 'Do you want to shift the data using blocks?' and '
Do you want to extrapolate the curve data while shifting?'. After these two questions have
been answered then the 'Wizard' is closed by 'clicking' the 'Finish' button.

The above screenshot is an example of the 'Log Plot Format' screen setup to shift five curves
relative to a 'Reference Curve' after using the 'Depth Shift Wizard'.
Depth Shifting using the Depth 'Auto Correlator'

An 'Auto Depth Match' operation can be set up to automate the depth shifting operation. This
option, when activated, uses a regression analysis to seek out the closest fit between the
'reference' and 'shift' curves and moves the 'shift curve' incrementally relative to the reference
curve to find the best fit, based upon an input R2 correlation coefficient threshold.
The 'Run Auto Depth Match' option is launched by right-mouse button clicking in the interactive
log plot, in the curve track you wish to work with:

The 'Auto Depth Shift' window opens, displaying the 'Reference Curve' and 'Correlation Curve'
(Shift curve) for that log track. The remaining entry boxes allow you to configure the
auto-correlator routine.
'Correlation Window height' This is the length (in depth units) of the 'Shift Curve' to
use for the depth-match exercise. The 'Correlation Window height', together with the
length of the 'Maximum shift', which is added above and below the Correlation Window,
sets the depth interval over which the 'Correlation' (Shift) curve regression is computed.

'Maximum shift' This is the maximum value (in depth units) that you want to move the
correlation curve window up or down the well to find the best depth match to the
reference curve.
'Maximum difference between shifts' This is the maximum 'step' you want the curves
to move relative to one another when trying to find the best fit.
'Remove shifts with correlation R2 less than' This option is used to filter out low R2
correlations and sets a minimum threshold regression R2 value that is acceptable for a
depth match.
'Delete all shifts in track' check-box - if 'checked', all previously-defined depth-shift
values will be deleted when the 'Run' button is pressed. When the 'Delete all shifts in
track' is 'un-checked' the user can now specify the 'Minimum distance from original
shifts' that a new shift can be added. The purpose of this is to preserve the original
shifts and only add new shifts away from the original shift.
'Correlation Type' options allow the user to specify what type of correlation between the
reference and correlation curve is allowed.
A 'Positive' correlation is when both curves move in the same numerical direction i.e.
both curves increase or decrease in numerical value together. If both curves are of the
same type only 'Positive' correlations are valid.
A 'Negative' correlation is when the curves move in opposite numerical directions. A
Neutron and Density log will be negatively correlated in clean sands with variable porosity
- when the porosity goes up the Neutron will read greater whereas the Density will read
less.
If 'Both' is selected then either positive or negative correlations are accepted (this was
the default in IP v3.3). The Neutron and Density logs are quite often positively and
negatively correlated in the same well - negative in sands and positive in shales.
'Top' and 'Bottom' Depths sets the depth range over which to execute the routine.
Leave blank to select the whole well.
'Run' - clicking the 'Run' button executes the auto-correlator routine.
'Close' closes the 'Auto Depth Shift' dialog.
The interactive log plot should be 'checked' carefully to see that the 'Auto Depth Shift' has
worked in the way it was expected to. In our worked example, we need to check that the Neutron
log,TNPHds, now depth matches to the Density log , RHOBds, response, which it does.

The 'Finish' button, on the 'Run Depth Shift' tabulation, is used to stop the
depth-shifting and compute the other curves that are not on the display. The user will be
asked whether to save the shifts to a disk file. It is always recommended to do this, since
this allows the user to re-load the shifts and make changes, if necessary, at a later time.
The saved file is an ASCII file, which can be viewed using Windows NotepadTM or other
similar programs. It gives the curve names and the shifts made.
The 'Cancel' button on the 'Run Depth Shift' tabulation, will stop the depth-shifting but
will not compute the non-displayed curves.
Managing Block Depth-Shifts

This functionality is useful, for example, for depth-shifting concatenated core analysis data files
where correlation with log curves e.g. Log analysis derived porosity, shows that rubble zones have
not been correctly measured or other depth discrepancies have been introduced.

The figure shown above illustrates an example of the 'block depth shift' option. Two blocks
(cores) are defined and have been shifted by different amounts.
To add a new block shift: 'Click' at the depth for the top of the block and a blue
horizontal line will be drawn. Then 'click' at the depth for the bottom of the block and the
block will be created. The thick vertical line on the left of the track defines the block. The
shift for the block is defined by the red tie line on the right of the track in a similar
manner to the normal point shift.
To move a block shift: Put the cursor in a block, and it will change shape to a cross.
'Click' the left-hand mouse button and hold down while you drag the interactive curve to
the new position.
To change a block size: Put the cursor on a block boundary, and it will change shape
to an up/down drag type cursor. 'Click' the left-hand mouse button and hold down while
you drag the block boundary to a new position.
To delete a block shift: Put the cursor in a block, and it will change shape to an
up/down drag type cursor. Press the 'delete' button on the keyboard and the shift will be
removed.
The block shift forces all the data in the block to be shifted by an equal amount. Data between
blocks will be rubber band shifted. For core data, one should set up the blocks so that there is no
core data between blocks.

Consider a scenario where there is one core Porosity curve that contains data from five cores.
Core 3 is off depth and needs to be shifted to match the log data. This would require creating
blocks around the other 'cores' but not shifting the data. A block would be created around core 3
data and this block would be shifted. If only one block was created around core 3 and the data
shifted then all the cores (1 to 5) would be shifted by the same amount.
A further scenario would be to shift two cores independently. This would require 'blocks' on the
cores above and below the cores that are going to be shifted.

15.5 Depth Shift Other Curves

This new module allows shifting of curves using the depth shift offset curve generated by the
original depth shift module - Interactive Depth Shift.
Enter an 'Input Curve', the 'Output Shifted Curve' name will automatically be created with the
input name plus the 'Result Curve Name Default extension' will be appended to it. The 'Depth
Offset Shift Curve' is selected from the drop down list, which will show all 'Depth' type curves in
the well.
The 'Interpolate curve data' if 'checked' will allow interpolation of the curve data to find the exact
value at the new depth. For point data, such as core data, this should be turned off. The data
values will not be altered but shifted to the closest database step.
The 'Run' button is 'clicked' to perform the shifts. Shift files can be saved and reloaded.
Section 15.5 Data Editing : Depth Shift Other Curves

15.6 Interactive Block Depth Shift

The 'Interactive Block Depth shift' module allows the user to depth-shift a single curve or
groups of curves by a fixed amount. This is useful, for example, for depth-matching two log runs
before splicing them together. This module differs from the 'Interactive Depth Shift' module
described in the previous chapter in that only one block depth shift can be made per curve.
The amount of the depth shift is entered as a multiple of the curve step size. If a curve has a step
of 0.1524 then a block shift of 10 will move each data point an equivalent of 1.524m
The module will only be available if there is a log plot display on-screen. The curves in the active
log plot will be the only curves that can be depth-shifted.
On launching the module, a window, similar to that illustrated below, is opened. The window
contains a list of all the curves in the currently-active log plot display.
To set up the Block Depth Shift operation:

'Select a Reference Curve' : The user clicks the 'Select Reference' button on the '
Block Depth Shift' window and then clicks on a curve in the active log plot window. The
selected curve trace changes colour to a heavy black line. This step is used for
highlighting the 'depth reference curve'. This is purely for use as a visual guide.
Section 15.6 Data Editing : Interactive Block Depth Shift

There are a number of modes of operation to perform a block depth shift on single or multiple
curves:
1. For an individual Curve

Click the 'Select Shift Curve' button and 'click' on a single log curve trace in the active
log plot display. A 'tick' will appear in the check-box next to the curve name in the 'Shift
Curves' list.
Click the 'Start Shift' button. The 'Curve-to-Shift' will change to a light green colour in
the log plot.
THEN, EITHER
'Click & drag' the 'Curve-to-Shift' up or down, in the log plot, to the new depth position.

The 'Shift Increment' value will change as the curve is moved.

When you are happy with the depth match, click the 'Finish Shift' button to move the
selected curve by the entered shift value. The Log plot will update with the depth-shifted
curve.
OR,
Type in a 'Shift increment' value (in depth 'steps') into the 'Shift Increment' box, and
click the 'Shift Curves' button. The Log plot will update with the depth-shifted curve.
2. To Shift Multiple Curves by the same shift increment

Click the 'Select Shift Curve' button and 'click' on a single log curve trace in the active
log plot display. A 'tick' will appear in the check-box next to the curve name in the 'Shift
Curves' list.
Click the 'Start Shift' button. The 'Curve-to-Shift' will change to a light green colour in
the log plot.
'Tick' any other curves in the 'Shift Curves' list that you want to move by the same depth
shift value or use the 'Select All' button to select all the listed curves.

'Click & drag' the 'Curve-to-shift' up or down, in the log plot, to the new depth position.
The 'Shift Increment' value will change as the curve is moved.
When you are happy with the depth match, click the 'Finish Shift' button to move the
selected curves by the entered shift value. The Log plot will update with the
depth-shifted curves.
3. To shift other curves in the log plot by a different shift increment:

Click the 'Clear Selected' button. The 'Shift Curves' list will be 'un-checked' and the '
Shift Increment' box will be cleared.
Select the new curves to shift by 'ticking' their check-boxes.
Enter a 'Shift Increment' value.
Click the 'Finish Shift' button to perform the bulk shift operation.
NOTE: The 'Cancel Shift' button will 'undo' unsaved interactive depth shifts. However, once the '
Finish Shift' button has been pressed, the shift is saved and 'Cancel Shift' will have no effect. In
this situation, select ('tick') the curves again, if necessary, type in a 'Shift Increment' value of '0'
and click 'Finish Shift' again to return them to their original depth positions.
NOTE: Depth shifts made using this module can be manually undone by changing the curve '
Shift Inc.' attribute at the right hand side of the the 'General' tab on the 'Manage Curve Headers'
window.

15.7 Interactive Curve Splice

The 'Interactive Curve Splice' allows the user to splice together multiple curves to form a single
continuous curve. The module can also be used to set certain intervals in a curve to Null (absent)
data. This can be useful for removing bad data from a log.
The user enters the 'Result Curve' name and the 'Input Curves' which will be used to create the
Result curve. Click 'OK' to display the 'Interactive Curve Splice' plot.
Old splice results can be loaded from saved disk files by clicking on the 'Load Old Splice' button.
Section 15.7 Data Editing : Interactive Curve Splice

The splice intervals are shown in track two. To select the Result curve for an interval: click on the
curve trace to use from the available curves in the input curve track. The result of the selection will
be shown in the result track.
To create a new interval, click in the interval track (track 2) and select 'Split Zone' from the
pop-up menu. Interval top and bottom depths can be changed by putting the cursor on the interval
boundary (the cursor will change to a split horizontal cursor) and while holding down the left
mouse button drag the boundary to the required depth. The splice result curve will change
automatically to show the new splice depth.

To finish the splicing click the 'Finish Splice' button. You will be asked whether you wish to splice
other curves at the same depths. If you reply 'yes', then the 'Splice Curves' module will be run
and the 'Interactive Curve Splice' results loaded into it. A reply of 'no' will prompt to save the
current splice results to disk.
Setting Null Data

To set an interval to Null (-999) right mouse click in the relevant interval 'Output Curves' track in
the 'Interactive Curve Splice' Plot and select 'Null Curve turn on' from the drop-down menu. To

turn the null data off, repeat the process and select 'Null Curve turn off' from the drop-down
menu.
Data editing of 'stuck hole' logs

If the user wants to systematically remove bad log data where the logging tool has become stuck,
the following workflow is useful :
1. Remove the depth lag on the tool sensors by temporarily block-depth-shifting the
sensors. This can be done by changing the 'Shift Increment' for a curve in the 'Edit /List
Curve Headers'. (The user needs to know the length from the tool zero to the sensor.
Divide this number by the 'well step' increment and this will be the shift increment required.
The log curves need to be shifted down the well so the shift increment will be positive).
2. Run the 'Interactive Curve Splice' module with one of the curves that needs to be
edited. Once the plot is displayed, add the tension curve to the plot. Use the tension curve
to decide where the tool was stuck and zone the stuck areas and set the result curve to '
Null data' over these areas.
3. Once finished with the zoning, click the 'Finish Splice' button and choose to 'splice
other curves'. Add the other curve sensors to the 'Splice Curve' window, using the same
splice depths for the Null data. Run the curve splice on all the curves, setting the bad hole
sections to Null data.
4. In the 'Manage Curve Headers' return the 'Shift Increment' (second from right-hand
column, 'General' tab) to zero and this will put back in the depth lag between the sensors.

15.8 Splice Curves

The 'Splice Curves' module allows the splicing of multiple sets of curves at the same time. It can
be used in conjunction with the 'Interactive Curve Splice' module. In this case the user should
choose the splice intervals using the 'Interactive Curve Splice'. Then, when finished, select the
option to 'Splice Other Curves'.
If the 'Interactive Curve Splice' results have been loaded then the splice depths and the first
column of input curves will be loaded. To add other curves, select their input 'Splice curves' for
each depth interval and add a 'Result Curve' name at the top of the table.
The 'Best Splice' line on the table allows the program to try and adjust the splice depth to give
the most seamless splice. The user puts a check in the box to turn this feature on. If set to 'on',
the program will use the search interval, set at the bottom of the window to find the depth where
the two curves that are to be spliced, have the most similar value.
Click 'Ok' to run the splice. Splice table results can be saved to disk and restored from the hard
disk using the appropriate buttons. Note that the splice results generated in this module can be
loaded into the 'Interactive Curve Splice' module.
If Null data gaps are required in the spliced output curve, then a curve name of 'Null Data' can be
selected from the drop-down curve list box.
Section 15.8 Data Editing : Splice Curves

Section 15.8 Data Editing : Splice Curves

15.9 Interactive Dip Picking

This allows picking of formation dips from image logs.
The module is launched from the 'Edit' 'Interactive Dip Picking' menu. Before launching the
module an appropriate log plot has to be created that shows the image and has a track available
to display the results of the picked dips. For more information on how to set up a log plot to
display image logs go to this chapter - Images.
Depending on how the image was referenced when the data was being collected the user has a
choice of orientating the displayed image to 'True North' or to the 'High Side of the Hole'. Only
after 'clicking' the 'Start Edit' button does the image re-orient.The user selects the 'Output
Curves'. NOTE: In order to align the dip curve exactly to a bed boundary it is best to select an
Irregular Set to store these curves in. If a regular depth step Set is selected the depths of dips can
only be placed at the exact depths stored in the depth curve for the selected Set.
The 'Input Curves' are the hole azimuth and deviation plus the hole size. If two caliper curves are
entered then the hole size is assumed to be the average of the two calipers. The hole size is
required to calculate the apparent dip of the formation.
Select the Image and Dip result track in the 'Plot Tracks' section of the window, according to the
layout of the appropriate log plot . 'Clicking' the 'Start Edit' button will start the editing and the 'Dip
Picking' window will switch to the 'Picked Dips' tab.
Section 15.9 Data Editing : Interactive Dip Picking

This tab displays the results of the interactively picked dips - see the section below 'Interactive
Dip Picking' for more information on how to do this. It is possible to manually change the dip and
azimuth by changing the numbers in the table. There is also an option to add new dips manually
by using the 'Add new Dip Depth' section.
The dip 'Type' has to be manually selected from the drop-down menu. Dip type is reflected on the
log plot by the colour and shape of the displayed tadpoles. Dip types can be changed in the 'Edit
Dip Symbols' accessed from the 'Tools' menu. Here dip types can be modified or new types
created.

Interactive Dip Picking

With an appropriate log plot, such as the one displayed in the screenshot below, and the 'Dip
Picking' module open then the user can pick dips on the log plot itself.

New Dip :To add a new dip, left mouse click on the image log at the depth you want to
the dip to be at and while holding down the mouse button drag the interactive sine shape
curve, left / right and up / down to match the shape seen on the image log.
Edit Dip angle and azimuth : To change a dip angle or azimuth, place the mouse
cursor on top of a dip line on the image. The cursor will change to a cross. Left mouse
'click' and while holding down the mouse button drag the interactive sine shape curve ,
left / right and up / down to match the shape of the image.
Edit Dip depth : To change a dip depth on the log plot, place the cursor on top of the
appropriate dip curve on the image. The cursor will change to a cross. Right mouse click
and while holding the mouse button drag the dip line to a new depth.
Delete Dip : To delete a dip on the display, place the cursor on top of the dip to delete.
The cursor will change to a cross. Press the 'Delete' key and the dip will be removed
from the display.
Change Dip type : To change the dip type for an individual dip, place the cursor on
appropriate dip. The selected dip will then be highlighted in green on the 'Picked Dips'
tab and then the type can be changed from the drop-down box.

15.10 Create Curve / Array Curve

The 'Create Curve / Array Curve' functionality found under the 'Edit' menu, allows the user to
create two types of curve; 'conventional' or 'array' curves.
'Conventional' curves, those sampled at the 'well step interval', can be named and created using
the grid display shown below. The curve(s) can be populated with null values if the 'Null' box is
'checked', or with a single data value - available when the 'Null' box is 'un-checked'. Curves
created by this module are saved using the existing 'well step' interval for the current well. The
blank curve can be used subsequently in another editing mode such as 'Interactive Curve Edit',
to create, for example, a facies or other flag-type curve.
There is an 'Array Curve' option to enable the user to create an 'Array'-type curve. This type of
curve can contain numerous data values at a single depth-entry. The Array curve permits the
display of data such as core analysis data points (porosity, permeability, grain density) at the
actual depth that the core plug was cut, not at the IP database depth, which is the load-depth
rounded to the nearest 'well step' interval (6 inches / 0.1524 m), as happens when loading
conventionally from an ASCII file. NOTE: that much of what is written here is no longer valid in
v3.5 as the user can now specify Irregular step Sets. However, it has been left in for historical
purposes for the time being.
Loading Core Analysis Data as Array Curves

To load core analysis data as array curves the user must :
1. Create the empty array curves - type in the curve name corresponding to the curve
name in the ASCII file, into the'Crv Name' column,
2. 'Check' the 'Null' box as the default value,
3. 'Check' the 'Use Array' check-box. The 'X' and 'Z' dimension boxes will become 'active'.
These entry boxes allow the user to type in values to set up the dimensions for the new
array curves.
Section 15.10 Data Editing : Create Curve / Array Curve

4. Set the 'X dimension' to a value of '1' and the 'Z dimension' to an appropriate value (see
below) and click the 'Create' button.
The Array 'Z' Dimension'

The user should consider the accuracy with which the data to be loaded needs to be visualized. If
the 'well step interval' is 6 inches and there are core plugs more closely spaced than this, then the
user could specify a 'Z' value of 6. This will resample the core data curve to the nearest one inch
of the core plug depth. A value of 12 would place the core plug to the nearest 0.5 inch of the plug
depth. The user-specified array 'Z value' will allow a smaller depth increment to be created than
the existing well step. The diagram below illustrates how the 'Z value' affects the data sampling.
5. Once the Array curves are created, the user should proceed to load the core analysis
data using the 'ASCII Load' module, choosing the same curve names as those created for
the Array curves. IP will warn that the curve name(s) already exists:

6. Confirm 'Yes' that it is OK to overwrite the existing curve(s).
The user can check the array curve properties by selecting 'Edit / List Log Curve Headers' and
looking at the 'Statistics' tab.
The following diagram shows an example of how the 'Array' data appears versus 'conventional'
data points. Conventional ASCII data depths are rounded to the nearest well step increment and
data are lost if they are below the well step resolution. Array curve data are displayed at actual
'Load' depths and all points are shown (depending on array 'Z value' that is selected).

Core analysis information, loaded as Array curves can be visualized in the IP crossplot tool by
checking the 'Expand Array Curve' box in the Edit Format window.

15.11 Create / Edit Lithology Curve

The 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module, located within the main IP 'Edit' menu, allows the
user to interactively 'digitize' a graphic lithology curve with associated 'fill shadings' into a log plot
display. The graphic shadings can then be used to generate a display such as that illustrated
below:
The 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module generates a curve called 'LITH', which is a 'flag' type
curve, whose values are 'mapped' to the lithology bitmaps stored in the IP program '\Shading
Bitmaps' subdirectory. The order in which these bitmaps are listed in the editor tool is stored either
in the Lithology.opt file in the IP program directory or, if the user has defined their own Default
lithology file, in the active IP Project directory as a 'local' Lithology.opt file. See the 'Edit Default
Section 15.11 Data Editing : Create / Edit Lithology Curve

Lithology' tool description for more details.
Creating a New LITH Curve
The user must have an active single well log plot in the IP window.
Select the 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' option from the 'Edit' menu. The 'Create /
Edit Lithology Curve' dialog window is launched as shown below:
1. Select a log plot track, from the drop-down list, into which to digitize the 'LITH' curve.
2. Click the 'Plot Curve' button to place the curve in the selected track.
3. 'Click' the 'Start Edit' button (the button then toggles to 'Stop Edit').
4. Select a lithology description, from the drop-down list, to 'digitize'.
5. On the log plot, in the selected track, left -mouse 'click and drag' over the vertical
interval you wish to 'fill' with the first lithology. The track will fill with the selected bitmap
shading as shown above. Continue until the desired 'LITH' fill is complete.
6. The user can zoom in to a finer depth resolution (e.g.1:500 / 1:200 Scale) to refine the
lithology interpretation. Thin beds (down to the well step increment (0.5ft, 0.1524m) can
be digitized over the top of a thick interval of a single dominant lithology and the thin bed
lithology is inserted into the Flag curve. The '<Clear>' fill can be used to enter an interval
of 'unknown' lithology.

7. To end the digitizing, either :

'click' the 'Stop Edit' button and the 'OK' button to save the edited curve into
memory - the curve will be saved to the active well when the user selects 'Save
All Wells to Database' or clicks the 'Save Current Well to Database As'
options, or
'click' 'Cancel' to abort the editing operation without saving the 'LITH' curve.
Plotting Lithology Curve Shading

In a well where the user has created a Lithology curve, the initial log track display, after the curve
has been digitized, will show all the shading bitmaps and their lithology descriptions in the Log
Track header. This is usually impractical for plotting hardcopy, since each log plot could contain
up to 30 bitmap shadings in the Log Plot header and plot footer. To remove this long list of
shadings from the log plot header, the user can simply type in the word 'None' in the 'Shading
Description' column for the track containing the 'LITH' curve, as illustrated below. Click the 'Run'
or 'Apply' button to see the effect on the log plot.
Adding a Lithology Legend to a Hardcopy Log Plot

An enhanced metafile (.emf) file called Lithology Legend.emf, can be found in the '\Shading
Bitmaps' sub-directory where IP is installed on the users PC. This subdirectory also contains the
IP 'default' lithology bitmap files.
To include a 'Lithology Legend' in a log plot, graphics file or output to clipboard displaying
lithology shadings, the user can use the following steps:
1. In the log plot 'Hardcopy' dialog, On the 'Main Plot' tab, click the 'Plot Size' Button to
see the dimensions of your log plot. Note the 'Width' measurement.
2. Then go to the 'Plot Header' tab and select either the 'Standard' or 'Full' Plot Header
style.
3. 'Click' in a blank row of the 'Graphics' panel and use the 'Browse' button to locate the '
Lithology Legend.emf' file. Select this file. Set the 'Width' measurement to the 'width'
from step 1.
4. Type in a 'height' value around half the 'width' value to preserve the graphics files
aspect ratio.
5. 'Check' the 'Use' cell at the end of the row you are working in.
When the log plot is output to File, printer or clipboard, the legend will be embedded in the log plot
header, as illustrated below.

A Microsoft Powerpoint file, called 'Lithology Legend.ppt', also found in the IP program '\Shading
Bitmaps' subdirectory, contains the text and graphic elements that were used to create the IP '
Lithology Legend.emf' metafile. The user can use / edit this .ppt file to create their own custom
'Legend' and save it as a metafile for use in the hardcopy plotting routine.
NOTE: this module accesses the following IP modules, located within the IP 'Tools' menu, in
order to 'map' bitmap shadings to lithology shadings.
Firstly, 'Shading Types' where all bitmaps and single-colour shadings are set up for IP.
Secondly, the 'Edit Default Lithology' tool which allows the user to set up bitmap

shadings in the IP default list.

15.12 Create / Edit Point Curve

The 'Create/ Edit Point Curve' module allows the user to interactively digitize points into a log
plot track. The resulting points can be output to the WINDOWS clipboard as a list of depths that
can be used, for example, to confirm with wellsite staff where to take formation pressure tests /
fluid samples /sidewall cores.
The points can also be displayed in a log plot, which can be copied to the clipboard as a further
visual aid to test / core point selection.
The module is launched from the 'Edit' menu. NOTE: a log plot must be active in the main IP
window.
The following dialog window is launched with the default curve name 'Points' filled in the text box
at the top of the window. The user can change this name and the 'Output Set' that the curve will
be written to.
If the curve is new, the user should select a track within the active log plot to work in, by selecting
from the 'Select track' drop-down list.
Click on the 'Plot Curve' button to put the points curve into the selected log track. Click the 'Start
Edit' button (this then toggles the button to 'Stop Edit') and proceed to digitize points.
Section 15.12 Data Editing : Create / Edit Point Curve

Points are created by left mouse button clicking in the selected track. A point symbol
will appear in the log track and a depth value will be added to the 'Picked Points' listing.
The user can use the log scale control to zoom in / zoom out of the log plot display when
selecting / creating / deleting points.
Points can be moved by 'clicking and dragging', with the mouse cursor pointing to a
point in the log track. NOTE: dragging a point over another point in the display will delete
that point.
Points can be deleted by positioning the mouse cursor over the required point (the
cursor changes to a cross shape) and clicking the keyboard 'Delete' key.
To finish creating / editing the point curve, click the 'Stop Edit' button.
Click the 'OK' button to save the newly created / edited curve into memory. The curve
will be written to the well when either the 'Save All Wells to Database' or 'Save
Selected Well to Database As' option is selected.
Click 'Cancel' to abort the 'Create / Edit Point curve' operation.
The list of 'Point Depths' shown in the 'Picked Points' panel is pasted into the
WINDOWS clipboard by clicking the 'Clipboard' button. The user can then use the
right-mouse-button-click 'Paste' or 'Crtl V' paste functionality to add the points into an
e-mail or other external document.
Section 15.12 Data Editing : Create / Edit Point Curve

15.13 Curve Filter

The 'Curve Filter' module allows the user to filter, or smooth, a curve. Three pre-defined filter
types are available. These are:
'Square' (box) filter

'Bell' Filter
'Median' Filter
A user-defined filter is also included. The maximum filter length is 121 database sample
increments if the user-filter table is used, otherwise 2001 sample increments can be used.
Select the 'Input Curve' you wish to filter. The Output curve name is pre-defined
depending on whether the 'Create Backup Curve' or 'Create New/Overwrite Curve'
check boxes are set.
With the 'Create New/Overwrite Curve' 'checked', the output curve will have the same
name as the input curve with a '1' appended to it. If the user wishes to overwrite the
input curve, they should edit the output curve name to make it the same as the input
curve name.
With the 'Create Backup Curve' 'checked', a backup curve will be copied from the input
curve. The backup curve name will be the input curve name with 'bu' appended to it.
If the 'Create Backup Curve' is 'checked', the 'View' button at the base of the window
will be 'active' and visible. This allows the user to view the filtered curve before
committing to the final filter operation. This is only possible if the original curve is
displayed on the log plot. Once the filter is correct / acceptable, 'click' the 'Run' button to
save the filtered curve.
The 'Number of levels' box allows the user to define the 'filter length', in units of 'depth
Section 15.13 Data Editing : Curve Filter

steps'. A number must be entered, which must be a whole, odd number between 3 and
121 (2001 for square, bell or median filters). The 'Filter height' is the well 'step'
multiplied by the 'Number of levels'. The units are picked up from the well units.
The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes allow the user to specify the interval over
which the filter will be run. There is also a 'Select Zone Depths' icon which will open the
'Select Zone Depths' module and the interval can be defined using available Top Sets
and zones.
The 'Square (or box) Filter' will apply an equal weight to all samples in the filter.
The 'Bell Filter' applies a sine wave shaped filter to the data. The following formula is
used to calculate the filter weights.
Where:
Wtj = Filter weight at j'th level
FiltLen = Filter length
The 'Median Filter' returns the statistical 'median' value for all values sampled in each
filter length.
For the 'User Filter', the user must enter the weights in the table. The weights will be
normalized before they are used, therefore it is not necessary to ensure that they add up
to 1.0.
Section 15.13 Data Editing : Curve Filter

15.14 Curve Average

The 'Curve Average' module allows the user to compute the average value of several input
curves and write the results to an Output curve. This can be useful if several logging passes have
been made over a zone and the user wants the average results.
'Output Curve and Units' : The user selects the output curve and units.
'Input Curves' : The user selects the input curves from which to create the average. Up
to ten curves may be used.
'Curve search Mask' : This allows the program to select the input curves using a mask.
This is useful if the input curves have nearly the same name except for one or two
letters. For example, if the user wanted to select the following curves RHOB1, RHOB2,
RHOB3, RHOB4, RHOB5, then the user would enter RHOB* in the 'Curve search mask
' box and click 'Apply'. The '*' is used as a 'wild' character for the searching process.
'Lateral Average or Arithmetic Average' : The user selects the type of averaging that
will be applied to the chosen curves. The 'arithmetic' average takes a straight average of
the input curves at each well step depth. The 'Lateral' average can give better results
since it gives a median-type average that will not be badly skewed by any outliers in the
data.
'Top and Bottom Depth' : The user enters the depth interval over which to perform the
averaging. Or by clicking the symbol then the 'Select Zone Depths' dialogue box
appears. Within this it is possible to select zone tops by using the drop-down menus.
Lateral Averaging
Lateral averaging is performed by creating pair products of the input data and then taking the
median of the results.
Section 15.14 Data Editing : Curve Average

For example, if we had a set of five curves, at a depth XXXX ft the curves values are:
5, 8, 10, 3, 6
The data would be combined in pairs.
5+8, 5+10, 5+3, 5+6, 8+10, 8+3, 8+6, 10+3, 10+6, 3+6
The pairs would then be sorted.
8, 9, 11, 11, 13, 13, 14, 15, 16, 18
The result would be half the middle value, or if the number of pairs is even, the mean of the two
middle values (2 pairs therefore 4 values).
(13 + 13) / 4 = 6.5
This is almost identical to the Hodges-Lehmann method (J.L Hodges and E. L Lehmann, Basic
Concepts of Probability and Statistics, Holden-Day 1970).
Section 15.14 Data Editing : Curve Average

15.15 Curve Rescale

The 'Curve Rescale' module allows log curves that have been digitized, but using the wrong
scales, to be rescaled. This module can also be used to convert count-rate neutron logs to
neutron porosity logs.
The example shown below will convert a density log (Rhob) that had been incorrectly digitized at a
scale of 1.95 2.95 gm/cc to be rescaled to left and right values of 2.00 - 3.00 gm/cc.
To use this module to calculate a porosity curve from a count-rate neutron curve the user must
first identify a log interval of very low or zero porosity reading (high count rate). Then, using core
data or some other porosity method, find the count-rate-equivalent value of a high porosity. The
low and high porosities, along with their equivalent count rates are entered into the module, the
output 'Logarithmic' box is 'checked' and the 'Run' button 'clicked' to calculate a neutron porosity
curve.
NOTE: the 'Logarithmic' options use the 'Natural Logarithm' of input / output values.
Section 15.15 Data Editing : Curve Rescale

The example shown above illustrates that the count-rate-neutron log reads about 14500 counts at
low (0.01) porosity and 9720 at high (0.4) porosity.
Section 15.15 Data Editing : Curve Rescale

15.16 Fill Data Gaps

The 'Fill Data Gaps' module allows the extrapolation of data over any gaps (Null values: -999)
found in a curve. It can be very useful for filling in data gaps when a new curve dataset, with a
lower sample rate, is loaded into a well sampled at a high rate, or for producing continuous curve
data from discrete 'point' datasets such as in routine core analysis plug data.
The fill gap interval is set by entering a value in the 'Fill gap maximum width' box and by
choosing whether this will be 'In Samples' (i.e. the well step interval) or in depth units.
Individual curve names are entered in the 'Input Curves' grid. The output or result curve names
can be entered manually or one of the curve option boxes ' Create backup', 'New Curve' or '
Overwrite Curve' can be 'checked'.
'Create backup' curve option will append a 'bu' to the curve names. When 'Run' is
selected, the program will copy the input curves using the backup names, and the
results of 'Fill data gaps' will be overwritten as the input name curves. After a run, the
input and output curve names in the window will be swapped, and the curve option will
be set to 'Overwrite Curve'.
Section 15.16 Data Editing : Fill Data Gaps

'New curve' curve option will add a '1' to the input curve names.
'Overwrite Curve' curve option will make the input and output curve names the same,
and the program will overwrite the input data.
'Clear all names' button will clean out the input and output curve names and set them to
blanks.
'All curves' button will put the first 100 curve names into the grid. A maximum of 100
curves can be worked on at one time.
When 'Run' is selected, the program looks for gaps (-999 data) in the data that are less than the
maximum data gap. When found, a linear extrapolation is done using the first sample either side
of the gap. There is no limit to the size of the gap that can be filled.
Clicking 'Save' allows the user to save the current set-up to the current well directory as a .fdg
file. This file can then be used to to set up the 'Fill data gaps' display on another well(s) by using
the 'Load' button and selecting the *.fdg file.
Section 15.16 Data Editing : Fill Data Gaps

Section
16
Array Image Data
16 Array Image Data

Array image data processing modules are found under the 'Edit' menu. Two modules allow the
conversion of array data to normal curves and the creation of array curves from groups of normal
curves. There are two additional modules for the creation of image curves from acoustic and
electrical array data.
The 'Array Image Data' tools include:
'Curves to Array Data'

'Array data to Curves'
'Create Acoustic Image'
'Create Electrical Image'
'Merge Images'
The 'Merge Images' option allows the user to combine, for example, two electrical images from 2
tools run together in the same logging run. An example is shown in the 'Merge Images' Help
item.
Section 16. Array Image Data :

Senergy Array Image Data 425
16.1 Curves to Array Data
The 'Curves to Array Data' module allows the combining of old (IP pre version 2.7) array curves
(one curve per array sample) into proper array curves.
The user selects one of the curves in the set of curves that make up the array, or gives the 'Input
base curve name', the program will find the other curves that make up the array. The module will
then combine all the input curves into the one output array curve.
The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allows the user to select part of the set of
curves to put into the final array set. If the boxes are left blank the program will select all curves in
the well with the same common 'base name'.
Section 16.1 Array Image Data : Curves to Array Data

16.2 Array Data to Curves
The 'Array Data to Curves' module is used to extract data from an array curve into 'conventional'
curves.
The user selects the 'input array curve name' and types in the 'output base curve name'. The
module will then create one output curve per sample in the input array curve. In the above
example the input array curve, 'FCA1', which has 12 samples per depth will be converted into 12
curves named Pad1_1, Pad1_2, Pad1_3 .... Pad1_12.
The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allows the user to select only part of the
input array. If the boxes are left blank the program will output all samples in the input array. It is
allowable to have the same 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number', this will then
extract just one sample and produce one output curve.
The 'Output high sample rate data' box, if 'checked', will make the output curves have the same
high depth sample rate as the input array curve. This will mean that the output curves are array
curves but they only have one 'X' sample but potentially multiple 'Z' depth samples per well depth
sample. If the box is not 'checked' then the output curves will be at the standard 'well step'
sample frequency. The output value will be the average of the data points in the 'Z' direction. For
example if the array data was stored at 0.1" in a 6" sample well then the output would be the
average of the 60 values in that 6" depth increment.
Section 16.2 Array Image Data : Array Data to Curves

The above example will output one curve called Res_Pad11 at the database sample frequency.
The curve name has '11' at the end since the base name is Res_Pad1 and the sample chosen
was '1' which has been appended to the base name. This example could be used to extract a
resistivity curve from a FMI raw data curve.
Section 16.2 Array Image Data : Array Data to Curves

16.3 Create Acoustic Image

The 'Create Acoustic Image' module is used to create corrected image data from acoustic image
logs (CBIL, UBI, CAST, AST). The raw data input array curves can be plotted directly. However,
this module will align the image to true north using the 'azimuth' curve and optionally dynamically
normalize the image to enhance geological features in the image.
The user enters the 'Amplitude' and 'Transit Time' uncorrected curves along with the 'Azimuth'
curve.
Section 16.3 Array Image Data : Create Acoustic Image

The 'Input' and 'Output' boxes allow the user to change the way the input curve values are
mapped to the output curve values. The defaults will generally give acceptable results. The output
defaults of '0' and '255' are the default number of colours used for creating the image. All images
are created using 256-colour palettes. The defaults therefore allow direct mapping of the image
values to the palette colours. The 'Get Max / Min' buttons will look up the maximum and minimum
input values and display them in the 'Input' boxes. If the 'Input' boxes are left 'blank' then the
maximum and minimum values will automatically be used.
The 'Clip Output to low high value' will clip any input values that fall outside the 'Input' low to
high value range. This can be useful if there are some spurious data values in the image which
have no meaning and need to be removed from the image.
The option to 'Dynamically normalize image' will enhance the image to emphasize geological
features. The user enters the 'window length' over which the enhancement is performed. The
normalization is executed in a number of steps :
The maximum and minimum values of the data at each depth sample are computed, for
the specified window length.
These maximum and minimum values are then filtered, using the same window length,
in order to remove any sudden change in scaling.
The final filtered maximum and minimum values are then used to rescale the input curve
so that the full dynamic range of colours can be seen in the image for each window
length.
The user can also optionally correct the input Pad 1 Azimuth (P1AZ) curve for magnetic deviation
from true north. This correction is sometimes performed by the logging company at the time of
acquisition. The user can also change the mapping position of the input arrays to the azimuth
input curve. The default setting maps the first 'X' sample in the input arrays to the azimuth curve.
It is possible to run the module only over certain depth intervals by entering a 'Top' and 'Bottom'
depth.
The 'Save' and 'Restore' buttons will allow the input data values to be saved to an external file
and restored at a later date. NOTE: IF YOU DO NOT SAVE THE SETTINGS - you will lose any
changes you have made from the default settings, when you exit the module.
Section 16.3 Array Image Data : Create Acoustic Image

16.4 Create Electrical Image

The 'Create Electrical Image' module is used to create corrected image data from raw electrical
image curves. The output image data from pad-type imaging tools (example FMI, FMS, OBMI,
EMI) consists of a number of array curves that correspond to the button arrays on the imaging
tools. This module takes the input curves and maps them to an output array image. The format of
the mapping can be controlled by the user or a pre-defined format can be selected from the 'Load
Defaults' drop-down list. The screen, shown below, illustrates the default mapping for a standard
FMI tool input. IP is set up with default settings for FMI, FMS, OBMI and EMI tools.
Input Array Curves

The user should select one of the default formats for the logging tool being used. If a default is not
available then the format will have to be built. To do this the mapping of the input array curves to
the physical button positions on the tool must be known.
Section 16.4 Array Image Data : Create Electrical Image

'Input Curve' : The input name of the array curve to map. The 'Change input set' box
will change all the inputs curve names so that the selected set is added to the start of
the name. This allows the user to select a default template and then the input set name
for the raw data image curves.
'Number Buttons' : The number of buttons or array samples in the input curve.
'Button Spacing' : The spacing between the buttons in inches.
'Orient to Azimuth' : The orientation of the 1st array sample to the azimuth curve in
degrees. (example 90 degrees will indicate that this curve is 90 degrees clockwise,
looking down hole, to the azimuth curve).
'Depth Shift' : This is the depth shift in inches that needs to be applied to this curve
before mapping it to the image.
'Rotation Shift' : This is the rotational shift, clockwise looking down hole, in inches that
is applied to the curve after it has been orientated using the azimuth curve.
'Button order file name' : This is an optional input file that allows for mapping of each
button individually. The file consists of ASCII text, with one line of data per button. Each
line contains two numbers:
1. The first number is the rotation shift for the button in inches, clockwise around
the hole, looking down hole,
2. The second number is the depth shift in inches, positive for a shift downwards.
Lines that start with a '$' character are ignored. These individual button shifts are added to the
overall curve shift before mapping the button to the image.
An example input file could look like this, the first button will be moved 2.2 inches clockwise and
no added depth shift will be applied. :
$ Button order for Schlumberger FMI tool

$ 12 buttons order is counter clockwise around hole
2.2 0
2.0 0
1.8 0
1.6 0
1.4 0
1.2 0
1.0 0
.8 0
.6 0
.4 0
.2 0
0 0
The normal button mapping is counter clockwise looking down the hole. This is left to right
button order looking at the face of the tool pad. The button order file can therefore override this.
Image Output
The 'Input' and 'Output' 'Low Value' and 'High Value' boxes allow the user to change the way
the input curve values are mapped to the output image values. The defaults will generally give
acceptable results. The output defaults of 0 and 255 are the number of colours used for creating
the image. All images are created using 256-colour palettes. The defaults therefore allow direct
mapping of the image values to the palette colours.
NOTE: for resistivity image devices such as the FMI, mapping low resistivity values to Low Output
values and high resistivity to High Output Values results in an image-shading scale which grades
from light to dark colours. However, the Schlumberger Oil-Based-Mud Imager (OBMI) is a
conductivity device. So, to give an equivalent look for this tool, compared to the other electrical

images - reverse the output values to Low Value = '256' and High Value to '0'.
The 'Get Max / Min' buttons will look up the maximum and minimum array input values and
display them in the 'Input' boxes. If the 'Input' boxes are left blank then the maximum and
minimum values will automatically be used.
It is a useful step to check the curve data Max / Min values. This is done by loading an array
curve into a plot track, right 'click' in the track and select / display the histogram for that curve.
The max/min values selected by IP may reflect extreme outlying data points which means that
more realistic max/min values can be manually set by the user. An example is illustrated below:

The 'Clip Output to low high value' will clip any input values that fall outside the 'Input' low high

range. This can be useful if there are some spurious data values in the image which have no
meaning and need to be removed from the image.
The option to 'Dynamically normalize image' will enhance the image to bring out geological
features. The user enters the window length over which the enhancement is done. The
normalization is done by taking first the maximum and minimum of the data at each depth sample
for the specified window length. This maximum and minimum is then filtered using the same
window length in order to remove any sudden change in scaling. The final filtered maximum and
minimum is then used to rescale the input curve so that the full dynamic range of colours can be
seen in the image for each window length.
The 'Hole Size' and 'Image Resolution' boxes are used to create the size of the output curve
image arrays. The image 'X' dimension size will be Hole Size / Image Resolution. The Image
resolution needs to be set to the button resolution of the tool (for FMI tool this is 0.1 inch). The
depth 'Y' sample increment for the output curve array is set the same as the input array curves.
Azimuth
The user can also optionally correct the input Pad 1 Azimuth curve (P1AZ) for magnetic deviation
from true north. This correction is sometimes made by the logging company at the time of
acquisition.
Depths
It is possible to run the module only over certain depth intervals by entering a 'Top' and 'Bottom'
depth.
The 'Save' and 'Restore' buttons will allow the input data values to be saved to a file and restored
at a later date. Otherwise you will lose all changes from the defaults when you exit the module.
Images from Dipmeter Curves

It is possible to create an image type display from a set of dipmeter curves. The following example
shows a set to create an image.

The four high-resolution dipmeter button curves (Pad11, Pad21, Pad31, Pad41) are selected.
These are single 'X' value array curves. However the number of buttons is set to 20. This will set
the width of each curve in the image. In this example the width of the image will be 20 x 0.1 = 2
inches. This will then create an image which makes four 2" images around the 8.5" borehole. The
image resolution value should be set to the same value as the button spacing (0.1" in the example
shown above).
An example of an image plot made this way is displayed below.

Processing Images from 2 OBMI Tools run in tandem

Load data from file, selecting the Pad-1 Azimuth curves, the 4 pad-array curves for each tool, the
gamma ray curve and the caliper curves for the two tools.

Process the Array curves to create the Image logs for tools 1 and 2:
Repeat the process for the second tool, selecting all the '*****_2' curve names, outputting data to
a new image curve name.
Open up a new plot or one of the IP default formats with empty tracks. Set the curve names and
display parameters as illustrated below:

In order to merge the images from the two tools, follow the instructions under the 'Merge Images'
Help item.

16.5 Merge Images

The 'Merge Images' option allows the user to combine the processed images from a number of
tools into one 'Image'. This could be used, for example, to view the data recorded by 2 borehole
imaging tools run in tandem.
Select the two processed image curves to be merged and type in a name for the 'Result Image'.
Select 'Run'.
The example shown below is of 2 Oil-based-mud Imaging tools (OBMI) run connected together.
The sensor pads on the second tool are oriented rotated at 45 degrees to the pads on the first
tool. Image logs for each tool are processed separately (Tracks 1 and 4) and the merged image
('Image 3') is shown in Track 3.
Section 16.5 Array Image Data : Merge Images

NOTE: that the image traces are not a constant distance apart - this indicates that the second tool
must have rotated out of phase with tool 1 in some parts of the wellbore.
Section 16.5 Array Image Data : Merge Images

Section
17
Picture / Core Photo Data
17 Picture / Core Photo Data

The 'Picture Curves' tool allows the user to manipulate and display graphics files in IP log plot
displays.
Two tools are included within the 'Picture Curves' menu item:
'Edit Picture Curve Headers'

'Edit / Load Picture Curve Data'
Section 17. Picture / Core Photo Data :

Senergy Picture / Core Photo Data 443
17.1 Edit Picture Curve Headers

The 'Edit Picture Curve Headers' module displays information about 'Picture' type curves inside
the IP database. This module is analogous to the 'Manage Curve Headers' module which works
with the standard log curve data.
'Out Name' : To rename a picture curve, highlight the 'Out Name' and type in the new
name. If you 'blank out' the 'Out Name' box the curve will be deleted from the well when
you click 'Update'.
'Created Module': This displays the module name that created the curve.
'Create date': This is the date the curve was created. The format of the displayed date is
set by the users default regional settings, set in the Windows control panel.
'Updated Module': This shows the module name that last changed the curve.
'Update date': Time the module was last updated.
'Comments': User-entered comments about this Picture curve.
Section 17.1 Picture / Core Photo Data : Edit Picture Curve Headers
17.2 Edit / Load Picture Curve Data

The 'Edit / Load Picture Curve Data' module is the main module for manipulating graphics
(picture) data. A 'Picture curve' consists of a set of graphics files, for example a set of white light
or UV core photographs. Each graphics file has a defined top and bottom depth which allows the
picture to be scaled to the log data. The images are not stored directly, but the graphics file and
path name to the pictures are stored in the IP database. When a graphics file is selected, it is
loaded into memory and converted into a bitmap for display.
IP recognizes the following graphics file formats: Bitmap, JPEG, GIF, TIFF, metafile (.wmf) and
enhanced metafile (.emf).
Section 17.2 Picture / Core Photo Data : Edit / Load Picture Curve Data
Before any graphics file can be loaded, a 'Picture Curve' must be selected -'Select Picture
Curve' - or a new one created 'Create New Curve'. The IP database can create and store up to
10 picture curves per well.
To 'load' a new graphics file into a picture curve, 'click' the 'Load Graphics File' button or 'click' in
a blank cell under the 'Graphics File Name' column header. A file browser dialog will allow you to
select the graphics file to load. Once selected, you will be asked whether you want to make a
copy of the picture, which will be stored in the wells 'Pictures' sub-directory. If a copy is made,
then the picture file will be copied and renamed to a unique file name. It is good practice to
copy the picture, as prompted, because all related images for the well will then be grouped
together under one directory within the wells' own data directory in the IP database. This
facilitates project saving and back-ups.
Once a graphics file is loaded into the interface, it is necessary to enter the 'Top Depth' and '
Bottom Depth' depths for the picture. These depths can be pasted in from an Excel spreadsheet
using the 'Paste Rows' button. A 'Comments' field is available for the user to add a description
for the file for future reference.
To 'delete' a picture (an individual graphics file), 'click' in the row you wish to delete (do not 'click'
on the 'Graphics file Name' cell because this will launch the file browser) and then 'click' the '
Delete Row' button.
The 'Update Plots' button will refresh any active Log Plots with any new information that has
been added to the picture curve. This is useful if you are trying to depth match the picture curve
and conventional curve data.
Depth shifting the pictures to log data can be done either :

by typing in the 'Top Shift' and 'Bottom Shift' values, or
by using the results of an interactive depth shift performed on the regular log data.
To use the results of an Interactive Depth Shift operation:

enter the appropriate depth shift curve generated by the 'Interactive Depth Shift'
module. These are depth curves with a name of type 'DepOff$_' (default name will be
'DepOff1_ds') where the '$' will be a number which depends on which track the depth
shift was run in (for a one track depth shift this will be 1). The '' will refer to the default
extension the user set on the depth shift setup window (default is 'ds'). The depth offset
curve is overwritten each time the interactive depth shift module is run, therefore, it will
be necessary to run the image depth shifts straight after the interactive depth shift
before the curve gets overwritten by another interactive depth shift. Another option would
be to rename the depth offset curve using the Manage Curve Headers module straight
after the interactive depth shift so that it does not get overwritten.
Click the 'Apply Depth Shift' button to update the 'Top Shift' and 'Bottom Shift' depths
columns.
Individual pictures can be viewed by clicking the 'View' button which is found to the right-hand
side of the 'Graphics File Name' column. This will bring up the 'Picture Viewer'.
The 'Picture Viewer' allows the user to see the image at various resolutions. Options are
available to send the picture directly to the printer or to copy it to the clipboard for inclusion in
another document.
Placing the cursor on the picture will display the log depth of the image at that cursor position at
the base of the window.
A picture can be split into two separate files by placing the cursor at the required split depth and
then right mouse clicking. The following dialog will appear.
If the user confirms the split, the picture's current graphics file will be split at the requested depth
and two new separate files will be created. The old picture file will not be altered but will no longer
be used in the Picture curve.
Splitting pictures can be very useful for core photographs in rubble zones where the core photo
can not be made to match log depths. The split photos can then be separately depth matched to
the log data.
Section
18
Text Curves
Senergy Text Curves 449
18 Text Curves
The 'Text Curves' function allows the user to create a 'curve' containing text strings and then to
view the text within a curve track on a log plot. It is useful, for example, for labelling RFT pressure
points with actual pressure values or test comments, for labelling core or perforation top and
bottom depths and for including core descriptions or test results from spreadsheet files. The 'Text
Curves' function is located under the 'Edit' menu.
Two tools are included within the 'Text Curves' menu item:
'Edit Text Curve Headers'

'Edit / Load Text Curve Data'
Section 18. Text Curves :

18.1 Edit Text Curve Headers

The 'Edit Text Curve Headers' dialog is similar to the 'Manage Curve Headers' dialog for
conventional curve data. The editor allows the user to rename or delete text curves from the
database.
To 'delete' a Text Curve, highlight the curve in the 'Out Name' column and hit the
Delete key on the keyboard. Confirm the deletion when the prompt appears.
To 'rename' a Text curve, highlight the curve in the 'Out Name' column, type in a new
name and click on the 'Update' button.
Section 18.1 Text Curves : Edit Text Curve Headers

18.2 Edit / Load Text Curve Data

The 'Edit / Load Text Curve data' option allows the user to create, load and edit text strings for
display as 'Text Curves' from the dialog screen shown below. NOTE: Only one text curve is
permitted per log track, in a log plot.
If a 'Text Curve' already exists, select it from the 'Select Text Curve' drop-down list.
To create a new 'Text Curve', the user must first click the 'Create New Curve' button. This
launches a 'Curve Name' dialog, where a new curve name can be typed in. The Text Curve
name should not contain any <space> characters.The user should click 'OK' and then choose the
newly-created curve from the 'Select Text Curve' drop-down menu at the top of the screen.
The user then has a number of options for adding text strings to the Text Curve:
1. Manually type in depth values and text strings into the window on the screen.
2. Paste data from an external spreadsheet, using the 'Paste from clipboard' facility at
the top of screen.
3. Load data from an external ASCII format (tab delimited) file with column 1 being
Measured Depth, Column 2 being 'shift' and column 3 being the 'text string' as illustrated
below. Click on the 'Load' button to select the text file to be used to populate the table.
4. Load Formation / ZoneTops 'labels' from an existing Zones / Tops Set in the
currently-active well. Click on the 'New from Zone/Tops' button and select the Set name
from the drop-down list. The depth can be included with the label by 'checking' the '
Include Depth in Label' box.
The data are loaded and displayed in the window and can be edited on-screen if necessary.
Section 18.2 Text Curves : Edit / Load Text Curve Data

The 'Shift' column can be used to nudge individual text strings up or down on a plot. There is
also an option to use a 'Depth Shift Curve', created in 'Interactive Depth Shift', to adjust the
position of the text strings en masse.
The Text Curve entries can be loaded and viewed in a log plot by:
1. 'clicking' in a log track header, or adding a new, blank track.
2. Select the first empty row in the 'Log Plot Format' table and choose the 'Text Curve'
option in the 'Style' column at the right hand side of the window.
NOTE: you must select the 'Style' before selecting the 'Text Curve' name or you will only
be able to see 'conventional' log curve names in the 'Curve Name' drop-down list.

The 'Text Curve' can then be selected under the 'Curve Name' drop down list. A 'Font' button
appears at the right hand side of the screen. This can be used to alter the appearance of the text
you wish to display. Text colour is controlled by the 'Line Colour' drop-down menu.

The text can be 'left', 'right' or 'centre' justified in its' track, using the 'Left Scale' menu and can be
'wrapped' to fit to the track width using the 'Back Up' drop-down menu.

The text strings are linked to their depth 'anchors' by a tick and expandable bar. Where text
strings are closely spaced, they may be offset relative to the anchor depth. The degree of offset
can be changed, either by expanding the vertical display scale of the plot or by making the text
curve track wider. The 'Right Scale' column allows the user to set the depth 'anchor' position.
The anchor can be set to the left or right side of the text curve track, or turned 'off' by selecting the
'Anchor None' option.
Text curves can be displayed in tracks along with 'conventional' curve data as shown below. The
display order can be modified, for example to show a log curve on top of the text curve, by clicking
in the track header, selecting the 'All Tracks' button and changing the 'Plot Order' at the right
hand side of the 'Grid' tab.

The 'Clear' button will delete all entries in the text grid.
The 'Delete Row' button will remove a single row from the text grid, where the mouse
cursor is currently placed.

Section
19
Data Viewing
19 Data Viewing
The 'View' menu allows the user to visualize log analysis data.
The following visualization tools are included :
'Database Browser'
'Log Plot'
'Horizontal Log Plot'
'Set Default Plot Format'
'Histogram'
'Crossplot'
'Multi-curve Crossplot'
'3D Parameter Viewer'
'Multi-Well Correlation Viewer'
'Montage Builder'
'Curve Listing / Curve Edit'
'Curve Statistics'
'Multi-Well Curve Statistics'
'Curve and Set Names'
'Toolbars'
Section 19. Data Viewing :

Senergy Data Viewing 459
19.1 Database Browser

The 'Database Browser' functionality allows the user to interrogate an IP project in a graphical '
Tree' view interface. The view is hierarchical, similar to a typical WINDOWS browser, allowing
the user to look at all the wells in an IP database, to see the Curve sets, Parameter Sets and
Zone / Tops Sets loaded into each well and then to view the details of the individual Sets by
'expanding' the tree view.
The module is launched from the 'View' menu 'Database Browser' button.
The 'Database Browser' can either 'sit' within the IP 'window' in the upper left-hand corner or else
it can be 'undocked' and then moved to wherever the user would like. This could include moving
the 'Database Browser' to outside the IP 'window' thus freeing up space within the 'window'. The '
Database Browser' window can also be easily resized by the user. There are four icons at the top
of the browser window which allow the user to quickly change the number of Wells displayed in
the browser and also to refresh the browser. The icons are described below:
Section 19.1 Data Viewing : Database Browser

The 'Database Browser' functions include the following:

Viewing all the wells (in-memory and 'not loaded') in the IP database.
Viewing the security access status of wells within the IP database.
Loading well(s) into memory.
Closing / Saving well(s) to the database.
Copying curves between curve sets.
Renaming curves.
Deleting curves.
Interrogating a well to view the Sets (Curves/ Parameters/ Tops) loaded into the well.
Changing the font of the 'Database Browser' display.
Viewing curve statistics on individual curves.
Displaying a listing of curve data and a graphical preview of the curve data.
Viewing the saved plot formats (Log plot, Crossplot, histogram) available for a well and
launching a selected format from the Tree view.
Printing / writing to file / send to clipboard a listing of curves and parameter sets
available in a well(s).

Launching the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module.

Launching the 'Manage Zones / Tops' module.
Displaying the 'Well Folder' that was defined in 'Options' 'Well Folder Structure'.
The 'Database Browser' display is launched with the in-memory wells, with well names shown in
a blue coloured font with a positive number in brackets before the well name ,
shown at the top of the window, listed in ascending alphabetic order. Wells belonging to the IP
Project, but currently not loaded into memory, are then listed with a slightly different well symbol
and a negative number in brackets before the well name . In-memory wells can
be interrogated by clicking on the '+' icon next to the well name to expand the tree view.
Well information can be browsed and there is full functionality whether or not a particular well is
loaded into memory.

If the well is already loaded in memory, right mouse-clicking on the blue-coloured Well Name and
well icon, launches the menu dialog shown above, at right, allowing the user to:
'Close Well' - closes the selected in-memory well ,with an option to save any changes
made to the well, to the database.
'Save Current Well to Database As...' - launches the 'Save well' dialog to commit newly
applied calculations to the database.
'Manage Well Header Info' - launches the 'Manage Well Header Info' module to allow
the user to examine /edit well details.
'Manage Curve Sets' - launches the 'Manage Curve Sets' dialog window for the
selected well.
The 'Print Options' option, when selected, launches a dialog window allowing the user to send
details of the current database browser and the loaded wells to various output media. The

window is illustrated below:
If the 'Output to Text File' option is selected, a file, called 'Project Listing.txt' is output to the
current IP Project directory. The user can use the 'Browse' button to put the file in another
location.
Additional right-mouse-click options, common to both loaded and closed wells are:
'Expand this Well' - expands all levels of the selected well, to view, for example,
statistics on each curve in the well.
'Collapse this Well' - collapses a well to its Well Name and icon.
'Collapse All' - collapses all expanded wells to show only the IP database name and
icon.
'Edit Curve Headers' - launches the 'Manage Curve Headers' module.
'Set as Default Set' - if a curve Set is highlighted then 'clicking' on this option will then
make the highlighted curve Set the default Set for that well.
The 'Show/Hide' option expands to show a number of options. These include:

'Show Database Number' - shows the IP database number in addition to the Well
Name.
'Show Active Well Only' - this will just show the 'active' well in the database browser
window if selected.
'Show Unloaded Wells' - toggles between displaying only in-memory wells or both
in-memory and unloaded wells in the browser.
'Show Wells I Can't Access' - this relates to wells that have had security settings

applied - see 'Well Security' for more details.

'Well Comment' - if this is 'checked' then the well comment, which is entered in the '
Comment With Well' box 'General' tab 'Manage Well Header Info.', will appear
alongside the well name.
'API Number' - if this is 'checked' then the API number, which is entered in the 'API
number' box 'General' tab 'Manage Well Header Info.', will appear alongside the
well name.
'UWI Number' - if this is 'checked' then the UWI number, which is entered in the 'UWI'
box 'General' tab 'Manage Well Header Info.', will appear alongside the well
name.
NOTE: only one option out of the 'Well Comment', 'API Number' and 'UWI Number' options can
be chosen at any one time.
'Show Side Panel' - This option hides / shows a side panel that allows the user to
perform many of the same functions as the 'right-mouse click' pop-up menu does. The
only feature within the 'Side Panel' not available elsewhere is the 'Font' option. Here it is
possible to change the font of the 'Database Browser' panel. Due to the nature of the
browser Bold and Italic fonts will not appear. If the user requires a bolder font then use
Arial Black. The font selection is a program setting and is saved automatically. The
default font is MS Sans Serif, 8pt. The side panel is closed by clicking 'Hide this panel',
under the 'Tree Options' section of the menu.

'Sort by Name' - If wells are not alphabetically sorted, this option will sort well names in
alphabetic and numeric order, loaded-in-memory wells first , followed by non-loaded
wells.
'Sort by Database Number' - if the user wishes to sort wells in Database number order,
this option will perform the necessary re-ordering of the display.
'Show Data Listing (Spreadsheet)' - this enables the user to show a data listing of the
selected curve(s) and also a log plot preview of the first curve selected. It is possible to
select curves from different Sets in the same well using the Ctrl key or multiple adjacent
curves by holding down the Shift key. The data listing module has all the same
functionality as the 'Curve Listing / Curve Edit' module. The scales and colour of the
curves are taken from the 'Manage Curve Headers' 'General' tab.
PLEASE NOTE: the preview plot is just that, it is not meant to have the full log plot functionality
found elsewhere within IP.


If the user wants to select other curves to preview along with the first selected curve in the
selected listing then hold the Ctrl button at the same time as selecting the next curve to preview
graphically. This will add the other curves to the log preview window.
The listed curve data can be 'Output' to a

'Print Listing' - sends the listing directly to the users default printer.
'Copy Clipboard' - allows the user to paste the listing into another document.
'Output to File' - saves the listing to a user named file which will be saved to the 'Well
Folder'.
'Refresh' - closes down all the expanded well tree views and refreshes all well data so
that any newly created curves or plot will show up under the well.
Viewing Curve Statistics

As well as viewing a listing of curve data by the 'Show Data Listing' option it is also possible to
see an overview of the curve data, including units, type, description, date it was created, the
module from which it was created in IP, the last time it was updated, the module used to perform
the update, the depth range of the data, the maximum, minimum and mean value of the curve.
Copying Sets Within Wells

Within in each well it is possible to drag curves from one set to another set. If a curve is being
copied from a regular Set to an irregular Set then the following message will appear:
The user can either copy all the data into the irregular Set (Yes) and the depths in the Set will be

expanded to accommodate the data being copied or the user can just copy data points that match
the depths in the irregular Set (No).
Deleting Curves Within Well Sets

Deleting curves from within a selected well can be achieved by highlighting a curve using the
mouse cursor and then hitting the 'Delete' keyboard button. A 'Confirm' dialogue appears.
Clicking on 'OK' will delete the curve. Multiple curves can be deleted by using the left mouse
button and the 'Ctrl' or the 'shift' keyboard buttons to select the curves and then hitting the '
Delete' button. Again, the 'Confirm' dialogue appears. This time showing the number of curves
that have been selected for deletion.

Renaming Curves Within Well Sets

Renaming curves can be achieved by left mouse clicking on a curve. This highlights the curve
with a blue box. Click again with the left mouse button (similar to the way Windows Explorer
renaming curves works). The text remains highlighted thus allowing the user to change the text.
Renaming curves can also be achieved by highlighting the curve and using the 'F2' keyboard key.
Plus highlighting the curve and then right mouse clicking brings up a number of options which
include 'Delete' and 'Rename' curves.

Viewing Display Formats

Additional folders in the expanded Tree view allow the user to:
Browse for Log Plot formats,

Browse for Crossplot formats, and
Browse for Histogram formats.

The user can launch a Log Plot (.plt), Crossplot (.xpt) or Histogram (.hst) format either :
by 'double-clicking' on a format icon in the tree view for a particular well. The selected
log plot, histogram or crossplot display is launched.
OR
by 'dragging and dropping' a format icon from the 'Database Browser' window into the
IP workarea.

All three plot format categories; 'Log Plots', 'Crossplots' and 'Histograms', are available from
folders labelled as 'IP Default' and 'Project'.
The 'IP Default' list points to the format files stored in the IP program directory 'Default
Plots' folder. The 'Defaults Plots' directory is stored in the users C:\Documents and
Settings\*usersname*\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35\Default Plots folder.
The 'Project' list points to format files that have been saved to a particular IP
Project/Database folder.
Additionally, format files are stored in individual 'Wellxxxx' folders. These format files can
be found listed under the Log Plot, Histogram or Crossplot folder names, as illustrated
above.
Well Folder
The user can expand the 'Well Folder' to display the contained files. The 'Well Folder' is the
'Wellxxxx' folder and may contain any type of file that the user decides to store in the folder.
Depending on the type of file then files can be opened by double mouse 'clicking' on the file or by
dragging and dropping the file into the IP workarea.
The structure of the 'Well Folder' can be edited by the user in 'Options' 'Well Folder
Structure'.


19.2 Log Plot Display

Interactive Petrophysics (IP) is built around a graphical user-interface which allows the user to
perform the majority of interpretation workflow steps using unique 'Interactive Log Plot' displays.
In addition, there is considerable flexibility built into the program to allow the setting up, saving
and recall of user-defined 'Plot Formats' (.PLT files). Some basic log template 'formats' are
provided with the software. These formats can be launched from drop-down menus and then
customized by adding, moving or deleting log tracks and log curves to the users preferred display
characteristics. The modified plot format can be saved and applied to other wells within an IP
database.
The 'Log Plot' interface is launched in a number of ways in IP:

by selecting the 'Log Plot' or 'Horizontal Log Plot' options from the 'View' menu,
by using the speed buttons ( or ) on the 'Data View' toolbar,
By 'clicking and dragging' a Log Plot icon from the 'Database Browser' into the
programs' workspace,
by 'double-clicking' on a log plot icon in the 'Database Browser' tree view.
Up to 250 log plots can be displayed simultaneously. Multiple log plots can be launched for one
well or many different wells, as long as the wells are loaded in memory.
'Clicking' on a log plot makes the well associated with the plot the 'active well'. The active 'Well
Name' is displayed at the top of the main IP window. Any module, which is selected from the main
menu bar, will then be primed to work on data from the active well.
The Plot Window

The Log Plot window is highly interactive, allowing the user to:
add new tracks,
set up the curves to be displayed in log tracks,
re-arrange the log track order,
change curve display properties (colour, line style, line thickness) and
set shadings using menus launched from the log plot window.
selecting curves for cross-plotting.
The following figure illustrates some of the interactive functionality available.
Section 19.2 Data Viewing : Log Plot Display

Plot Formats
Log Plot 'Formats' are used by IP to save and restore log plot display settings such as;
Log curve track order,
Curve line colour,
Line style and thickness,
Curve fill colours / patterns.
IP provides the user with a number of 'default' log plot formats which are launched from the 'File'
menu in the Log Plot interface. An example log plot format is shown at the end of this chapter.
See the 'Format Files' section.

Log Plot Formats are available from a number of sources:
1. The 'Program Default Plots' are normally stored in the IP program directory under a
subdirectory called '..\Default Plots'. However, this location can be changed by editing the
'ProgDefs.opt' file and changing the file location. Using the IP '..\Default Plots' directory
allows networked users to share common log plot formats. Each user sets their default
plot location to the common directory. Any plot format file saved into the directory will
automatically appear in each users menu system.
2. The 'Project / Well Plots' list will display all plot formats that have been saved either to
the main IP project directory or in the selected wells' sub-directory (WELL000X). Under the
'File' menu the 'project-specific' plot formats will appear at the top of the list ('Complog',

'cpi' and 'triple combo' in the example shown above) followed by the 'well-specific' plots
('LITHtest' and 'TempPlotFile' in the example shown above). Other log plot formats can be
loaded by clicking the 'Load Plot Format' menu option. This allows the user to 'browse' to
a plot file from another well or IP project.
3. 'Load Plot Format' - To recall a previously-saved plot, that is not displayed in the
menu, click the 'Load Plot Format' menu item and select the plot to recall. Log plot
formats can be created either using actual curve names or generic curve 'Types'. Curve '
Types' are defined when curves are created or they can be changed using the 'Manage
Curve Headers' module. When curves are loaded, their default 'Types' are looked up in
the CparmDef.par file (see 'Edit Curve System Defaults').
4. 'Save Plot Format' - The 'Save Plot Format' menu item allows the user to save a plot
format for later use. All the interactive features in the plot are saved. The default directory
to save a plot will be the 'Output directory' set under 'Default file Location' or the well
directory, if this option is being used.
5. 'Save Plot Format Generic' - The 'Save Plot Format Generic' option saves the
complete log plot exactly the same as the 'Save Plot Format' operation, except that curve
'Types' are substituted for curve 'names' in the format file . This allows the creation of a
plot format which can be used in different wells where curve names are different but curve
'types' are the same.
NOTE: in IP Version 3.3 and later, log plot formats are saved in such a way that, if a particular
plot format is selected for a well, and that well does not contain some of the log curve names in
the .PLT file, the program will still keep the missing curve name in the log track headers in the
second well. For example, if a plot format is saved in 'Well A' with a porosity log curve PHIE in it,
and the plot format is then applied to 'Well B', that does not have a PHIE curve, the curve name
will still appear in the plot format. You will be prompted, as illustrated in the following screen
capture, each time you edit that log track ,containing the missing PHIE curve name, in 'Well B' :
This 'Confirm' window recognizes that curve name PHIE does not exist in the current IP well and
allows you either:
To Click 'Yes' - to acknowledge that the curve is absent, but still to continue plotting the
log plot.
To click 'No' - to go back into the 'track manager' and select another log curve in place
of PHIE.
To click 'Yes to All' - to acknowledge that curve name PHIE and some other curves do
not exist in the current IP well, but still allow further curves to be added / deleted /
changed into the log plot, without launching this 'Confirm' dialog repeatedly.
Screen Navigation and Sizing

The log plot shown below consists of 10 log tracks, including the depth and TVD depth tracks,

plus an 'Overview' track on the right hand side of the display (track number 10 is 'hidden'). The '
Overview' track shows the entire depth range for the well, with the current display section (in the
main plot window) as two horizontal red lines (top and bottom). By 'clicking' in the overview track,
the user can quickly navigate to any part of the log display in the main log plot window. The user
can change the depth interval being displayed by right mouse clicking on one of the red marker
lines and dragging it to a new position. The main log plot will be re-scaled to fit into the window.
The curve 'Header' box can be resized by 'clicking' on the bottom border of the header
box and dragging it up or down to a new size.
The vertical scroll bar, to the left of the Overview track, allows the user to scroll the
main log screen display up or down. Clicking above or below the scroll button in the
scroll track will move the display up or down by one screen interval. Clicking on the
arrows at the top or bottom of the scroll track, will scroll the display up or down 10% of
the display interval.
The horizontal scroll bar, located in the bottom right-hand corner of the log plot
window, moves the display horizontally in increments of one track. Normally, it is better
to simply expand the whole window if some of the tracks are not displayed, rather than
scrolling horizontally. If the 'Fit' box is 'checked' the horizontal scroll bar has no effect.
The 'Scale 1: ' and its associated drop-down list of plot scales allows the user to quickly
change the vertical scale of the log plot display. The user selects a scale, for example 1:
500, 1:200 etc.. and the window redisplays at the appropriate vertical scale. The user
can also use the keypad '+' and '-' buttons to change the vertical display scale of the plot
in the display. The '+' button zooms in, expanding the vertical scale. The '-' button
zooms out, compressing the vertical scale. The user can also type in a vertical scale

value into the text box.
The 'Fit' check box, (illustrated above) in the log plot window header, when 'checked',
will adjust the width of all the log plot tracks so that the whole log plot fits exactly into the
plot window. Setting the box to 'checked' does not change the width of the tracks when a
log plot is sent to the printer. Un-checking this box displays the log plot at its correct
'physical', hardcopy width.
The 'Lock' check box, (illustrated above) in the log plot window header, when 'checked',
sets the currently-displayed plot as the 'Default Plot' for this well. The 'Default Plot'
format is saved into the database and is the log plot displayed automatically when a new
plot window is launched or when the well focus for a log plot is changed. If the user
launches a second plot for the same well, the 'Default Plot' will be launched. The
'checked' lock box will be set in the newly-activated 'Default Plot' window and the 'tick'
will be cleared on the original plot. This feature allows the user to set up and customize
individual log plots for IP wells in a database so that, when a well is loaded into memory
and a log plot is launched, the log plot defaults to the 'locked' plot format.
Log Track Management

Right-mouse-button 'clicking' in a log plot track launches a pop-up menu, which allows the user to
select a histogram display for any curve found in that track, as shown in the following figure. Other
editing functions are also available. These are described below.
NOTE: a 'Zone' track in a log plot has different functionality from 'conventional' log curve tracks. '
Zones' can be interactively edited and deleted in the log plot display. The user should right
mouse button 'click' in order to launch the normal pop-up menu for a 'Zone' track. Selecting the '
Edit Zone' opens the 'Edit Zone tops' module where the zone names, depths and colours can all
be changed.

The editing options available on the curve track pop-up menu are described below:
The 'Add Annotation' option launches a text editor which allows the user to write
annotations / add lines / arrows to the log plot. This is the same functionality as clicking
the 'Annotations' button on the log plot window header.
The 'Expand Track' function expands the chosen track to fill the whole plot, apart from a
depth track. To return the plot to a normal view, right-mouse click in the track and
choose 'Normal Track' from the pop-up menu.
The 'New Track' function will create a new track. If the user 'clicks' in the right half of a
log track, then the new track will appear to the right hand side of the track that has been
clicked in. If the user 'clicks' in the left half of the track, then the new track will appear to
the left hand side of the track that has been clicked in. The vertical grid lines in the new
track will be set up the same as for the track the user clicked in.
The 'Duplicate Track' function will copy the current track settings, with all curves and
shadings, into a new track. If the user clicks in the right half of the track-to-duplicate,
then the new track will appear to the right of the track that has been selected. If the user
clicks in the left half of the track-to-duplicate, then the new track will appear to the left of
the track that has been selected.
A log track, together with its curves and shadings settings, can be copied from one log
plot display to another as long as the same well is displayed in each log plot. This is
achieved using the 'Copy Track' and 'Paste Track' options. The user right-mouse
clicks in the 'track-to-copy' and selects the 'Copy Track' option. Then right-mouse click
in the plot you wish to add the new track into and select the 'Paste Track' option.
The 'Delete Track' function removes the selected track from the log plot.
The 'Hide Track' function will temporarily hide a track. The track can be re-displayed by
clicking the 'Edit Format' button in the log plot header, selecting the 'Grid' tab and

re-'checking' the 'show track' cell for the hidden track.

'Show / Hide Curves' - this option allows the user to choose to hide any curve that is
displayed in a log track. The user should 'un-check' the curve-to-hide in the drop-down
curve list. The curve can be turned 'on' again by 'checking' the hidden curve name in the
same drop-down menu.
Moving Curves and Tracks Within a Plot

Log curve tracks can be moved to different positions in a Log Plot by right-mouse-button 'clicking'
in a track header and dragging the track to a new position.
Curves can be copied, moved and deleted from the tracks in which they occur:
To 'move' a curve - hold down the 'Shift' button, right 'click' on the curve name in the
track header and drag the curve to a new track.
To 'copy' a curve - hold down the 'Ctrl' button, right 'click' on the curve name in the track
header and drag the curve to a new track.
To 'delete' a curve - hold down the 'Shift' button, right 'click' on the curve name in the
track header and drag the curve out of the header.

Copy Depth Value to Clipboard

By left-mouse clicking in one of the plot tracks the user can automatically copy the depth, where
they 'click', into the clipboard. This depth value can be pasted into any input box that requires a
depth entry. This can be very useful for quickly setting depth intervals for example, in the 'Plot
Range Editor'. A depth is registered automatically every time the user left-mouse-button
clicks in a plot. NOTE: There is no visible indication that it has happened. To paste the
depth value into an edit-box, right-mouse-button 'click' in the edit-box and select 'Paste'.
Selecting Log Plot Curves for Output to Crossplot

Curves can be selected by holding down the 'X' key and using the left mouse button to click on
the curve name in the log track header and, whilst continuing to hold down the 'X' key, opening
the Crossplot window. This will automatically populate the crossplot with those curves selected.
The first curve selected occupies the X-axis, the second curve is the Y-axis and the third curve is
the Z-axis.

Zone Sets can also be selected, if they are available on the log plot, by holding the 'X' key down
and clicking on the actual Zone name in the track header at the same time as selecting the

curves. The default zone shown is the first available one.
This functionality applies to both vertical and horizontal log plots.
Log Plot Format

The 'Edit Format' window allows the user to set up and change the Log plot format.

The module is accessed under the main menu 'Log Plot Menu' 'Edit Format' or using the '
Edit Format' button on the log plot window. The window is arranged on three 'tabbed' screens.
These are :
'Grid' - where the log track background grid lines are defined
'Curves'- where the curves to display are defined
'Shading' - where shadings between two curves or between a curve and a constant
value can be defined.
'Grid' Tab
The 'Grid' tab contains the track numbers ('Trk #'), user-defined track name ('Trk Name' -
optional), track width dimensions and settings for depth grid (horizontal) lines and curve scale
(vertical) grid lines.
The following table summarizes the function of the columns in the 'Grid' tab.
Trk # Track Number - this is the order in which the tracks are displayed across the
page. 'Clicking' on a track number, in the grey, left-hand column and dragging
it up or down to another position in the list can change the track order. Whole
tracks can be re-arranged very easily in this manner.
Track Name The user has the option to add track titles to a log plot. By typing in names in
this column and 'checking' the 'Show Track Headers' box, user-defined
labels will be displayed in the track header in each track. If the Track Name
fields are blank and the 'Show Track Headers' box is 'checked', the Track
Number is automatically displayed on the Log Plot.
Width inch/cm The approximate width of the track in inches (or cm).

Show Trk If 'checked', the track will be displayed. If not 'checked', the track will be
hidden.
Plot Grid 'Check' to plot grid lines in the track.
Depth Lines This column allows you to set up different display options for horizontal 'depth'
lines. The options are 'Full' where depth grid lines are drawn across the full
width of a log track, 'Left' or 'Right' where depth 'ticks' are plotted on the left
hand or right hand margin of the log track. 'Center' where the depth 'tick' is in
the centre of the track; 'Lft &Rht' where depth 'ticks' are placed at both left
and right hand margins; and 'None' where no horizontal lines or 'ticks' are
plotted in the log track.
Scale Lines A number is typed in here which represents the number of vertical 'scale' lines
that will be drawn in a log track.
Log Grid 'Check' this column to display logarithmic grid lines.
# Dec Number of log decades to be drawn for logarithmic track.
Left Scale Starting left-scale value for a logarithmic track. 0.2 or 2 will give the same
result.
Minor Lines If 'checked', all the logarithmic vertical lines will be plotted; if not, only the
'major', decade lines will be plotted.
Overview Check the track that will be the overview track on the right of the plot. Only
one track can be the overview track, and it must be the last track number.
Plot Set To plot a horizontal line across a track, at the top of each zone in a Zone
/Tops or Parameter Set , 'check' the 'Plot Set' box. Then click the 'Define'
button next to the 'checked' cell to select the appropriate Tops Set. See below
for an illustration.
Define Set The 'Define' button allows the user to select the Parameter / Zone tops to
display in the Plot. On clicking the 'Define' button a set-up window appears.
The user selects the 'Tops' or 'Parameter' Set from the drop-down list and
then has the options of choosing Line 'colour' & whether or not to show Zone
Name 'labels' as well as lines. If 'Plot Names' is selected, 'Font Size' and
'Font Style' can be selected. Select 'OK' to display the lines/labels in a single
track. The 'All Subsequent' button provides a useful shortcut to set up all
subsequent tracks with the same Top Set line and Name settings for display
on the log plot. If you do not want to see lines/labels in a particular track
simply 'un-check' the 'Plot Set' for the appropriate Track number. To
display lines but not labels, 'un-check' the 'Plot Names' box.
Plot Order The 'Order' button launches a window which allows the order that objects are
layered in a track, on the plot, to be changed. Click in the 'Order' column and
drag objects up / down in the order to effect changes. See below for an
illustration.
The user can add horizontal lines, coincident with a user-defined Zone /Tops Set, across one or
all log curve tracks. The Zone Tops are set up as illustrated in the screen capture shown below.

'Tick' the 'Plot Set' column in the track you wish to view 'Tops' labels in.
Click the 'Define' button to launch the 'Tops Set selection' dialog.
Choose a Set name from the drop-down list and select the label colour, font and font
size you want to see on the log plot.
Click 'OK' to set this Tops set to display only in this one log track, or
Click the 'All Subsequent' button to set up these labels and display features in all other
(subsequent) log tracks in the log plot.


The 'Plot Order' in which curves, shadings and gridlines are overlain in a track is controlled by the
'Plot Order' column, 'Order' button, as illustrated above. The 'Order' button launches a window
which allows you to set up the drawing order in which log curves, depth grids, curve shadings, text
curves etc... are displayed in a particular log track. The user can click in the left-hand margin of
the dialog and drag a feature up or down the list to change the display order of the features. The '
Plot Order' can be different for each log track or by using the 'All Tracks' button all the tracks
can have the same 'Plot Order'.
Depth Grid Datum and Depth Labelling

The depth grid horizontal lines displayed on a log plot are controlled from the check-boxes and
drop-down options located at the bottom of the 'Grid' tab.
The 'Depth Grid Datum Curve' selection box allows the user to change the log plot grid
datum. This allows the user to plot 'TVD' or 'TIME' datumed log plots. The user selects a
depth-type curve from the drop-down box. Only 'DEPTH' or 'TIME' type curves can be
selected. If the curve required is not displayed, then find the curve name and change its
type to Depth or Time in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module.
NOTE: Unpredictable results will occur if the selected TVD curve reverses in direction.
Therefore, you cannot use a highly-deviated wells' TVD curve, if the well path goes up and
down.
The 'Depth Grid Line and number Spacing' options allows the user to override the
'default' depth grid plotting settings. If the 'Default' box is not 'checked' then the grid line
and number spacing will be fixed to whatever is set in the text-entry boxes, regardless of
the log vertical scale.
Log Plot Headers and Log Track Borders

These log plot elements are controlled using the options illustrated in the screen captures shown
below:
The 'Show Track Headers' 'tick-box controls whether or not log 'Track Headers' are
displayed on the top of a log plot display. 'Tick' the box to display track headers, 'Un-tick'
the box to omit log track headers.

The drop-down colour list can be used to set the 'Log Track Header Background
colour' for each individual log plot. Different background colours can be set up for
different wells.
The 'Track Border Width' (thickness) number affects the thickness of the lines
separating log tracks in a log plot, as illustrated below:

'Curves' Tab
The 'Curves' tab is a 'grid' type display that allows the user to see all the curve names / Zone Sets
that are being used in the log plot, together with the curve left and right scales; whether the curve
is shown in a linear (Lin) or Logarithmic (Log) scale, the line width (Wth) and Line Style (described
below).
Trk Enter the track to plot the curve in. Curves can be entered in any order
Curve Name Enter the curve name to plot, or choose it from the drop-down box. If the
Style is set to 'Zone', then choose the 'Parameter Set' from the drop-down
menu. If Style is 'VDL' or 'Waveform' then the user enters one of the curves
that makes up the VDL or Waveform input set. (See VDL or Waveform).
Curve 'Type' can be substituted for curve name by appending a '*' in front of
the Type. For example '*GammaRay' will pick up a gamma ray curve.
If style is 'Image' then choose from an image curve. (see Image / picture
plots)
If the user wishes to display a 'Text Curve' firstly select 'Text Curve' from the
Line 'Styles' column, this will filter to any Text-type curves and the required
curve can then be selected from the 'Curve Name' drop-down list.
Left Scale Left scale value. If left blank, its value will be taken from the preceding curve.
For 'Text Curves' Left Scale offers the options for text justification in the track
(left, right and centre)
Right Scale Right scale value. If left blank, its value will be taken from the preceding
curve.
For 'Text Curves' Right Scale offers the options for text 'anchoring' in the
track . An 'anchor' links the Text strings in the curve to their depth entries.
Visible This allows the temporary removal of an individual curve from the log plot.

The curve stays in the format and can be re-displayed by re-applying the tick.
Back Up Curve back-up option. Choose options from the drop down box. None, LBU
(left backup) or RBU (right backup). x10 (multiplies the original scale by 10)
and Wrap (allows the curve to wrap using a continuation of the original scale).
For 'Text Curves' the back-up options switch text 'wrap' on or off.
Log Sc Choose whether to plot the log with a linear or logarithmic scale.
Line colour Choose line colour from drop-down box.
If the 'Style' has been set to Zone then the drop-down box will allow the
choice of
Plot num : This will plot the zone number in the middle of the zone colour
boxes.
Names : This will plot the Zone name in the middle of the zone colour boxes.
No Text : This will plot just the zone colour boxes.
Clear : This will plot the zone name but will remove the colour from the zone
box.
Width Choose line width 1-3. This will also control the size of the points for point
plotting.
Style Choose the style of the display from the drop-down box.
Lines can be Solid, Dot, Dash, Dot-Dash.
Blocked lines will be drawn as blocked curves rather than smooth curves.
For Point plotting choose from the cross, square, circle, triangle or star.
Tadpoles can have circular, triangular, square or diamond shape heads. If a
tadpole is chosen then a define button will allow the setting up of the other
tadpole parameters (See Tadpoles).
The Numeric style allows plotting data as numeric values at defined intervals.
The column next to the style will change to a define button, which allows the
user to set up the Numeric display (See Numeric).
The Pip style is designed to plot horizontal lines from the data point to the
value zero.
Cumulative is used, for example, to plot lithology-type shading. The value
plotted for a 'cumulative' style curve is equal to the curve value plus the
values of all other 'cumulative' style curves in the log track whose names
appear higher in the curve list than the curve being plotted.
Mirror will plot the selected curve with its mirror image (same curve with
reversed scale). The gap between the two curves is shaded with the selected
curve colour.
Zone will turn this track into Zone track (See Zones).
For VDL the Line colour column entry will change to a button, which allows
the user to set up the displays (See VDL).
For Waveform the column next to the style will change to a define button,
which allows the user to set up the waveform display (See Waveforms).
For Pictures select this option and then select the picture curve under the
curve name column (See Pictures).
For Images the Line colour column entry will change to a button, which
allows the user to set up the displays (See Images).
The Dip Image allows the displaying of dips as sine wave curves on an
image log (See Dip Image).
The Text Curve is used for curves containing text strings (See Text Curves)

'Shading' Tab
The 'Shading' tab allows the user to define colour and pattern shading for use between 2 curves
or between curves and 'Fixed values' to enhance the appearance of log plots.
Trk Enter the track for the shading. This must be done first.
Left Side of Shading
Curve Name Choose a curve from the drop down curve box or leave blank to shade to a
fixed value.
Fixed Value Enter a value to shade to. Leave blank to shade to a curve.
Right Side of Shading

Curve Name Choose a curve from the drop-down curve box or leave blank to shade to a
fixed value.
Fixed Value Enter a value to shade to. Leave blank to shade to a curve.
Visible This allows the removal of shading from the log plot. The shading stays in the
format and can be re-displayed by re-checking the box.
Shading Type Choose from the drop-down box the type of shading to use.
Variable If the 'Variable' Shading type is selected then a 'Define' button will appear in
Shading this column, adjacent to the Variable 'type'. Click the button to set up the
variable shading. See 'Variable Shading' for more details on setting up this
type of display.
Shading This is the text string which is displayed in the shading box in the curve

Description header.
Examples from the above figure:
Line 1 : Shade a Variable shading between the value 0 and the GR curve.
Line 2 : Shade 'Yellow' between the two curves when the RHOB curve is to the left of the
NPHI curve.
Line 3 : Shade 'Green' between the two curves when the NPHI curve is to the left of the
RHOB curve.
Adding Shading Patterns

User-defined bitmaps can be loaded to IP and used as alternative shading to the default shadings
provided with the program. Bitmaps can be designed in PC applications such as Microsoft 'Paint'.
Bitmaps should have dimensions of 16x16 pixels.
See the 'Tools' menu item 'Shading Types' for further details
BUTTONS
OK : The 'OK' button will create a new plot using the current format.
Apply : This button will update the current plot but not close the log plot format window.
This is useful for previewing changes to the log plot format.
Save Format : The 'Save Format' button saves the current plot format to disk. The
program will first apply the format to check it before saving. The user will be asked for a
name under which to save the format.
Load Format : The 'Load Format' button allows the user to load a previously saved
format from the hard disk. The program will load and apply the format, plotting all curves
that are available. In the 'Log Plot Format' window all the curves from the saved format
will be displayed. This allows the saving of generic formats that can be applied to other
wells with different curve names. The user loads the format and modifies the curve
names to match the current well.
Edit Track Header

If the user clicks in the header of a track then the 'Log Plot Format' window will appear with the
curves for the selected track. The user can add or delete curves or change shading for the track.
By clicking on the 'All Tracks' button the 'Log Plot Format' window will revert to the standard
display with all curves shown and will include the 'Grid' tab.

Plot Range Editor
This feature allows the user to quickly change the plot depth interval for the current plot. See the
Plot Range Editor Section for a full description.
Format Files
Plot format files must end with the file extension of '.plt'.
The pre-defined plots are very flexible. They can, for example, plot a Gamma Ray that is called by
different names (GR, SGR, GRC etc.). The pre-defined plot formats use curve name 'Types' to
define the curves. Plot format files can be created outside the program using an editor such as
Notepad. It is good practice to copy an existing example and make changes to it. The following is
an example of a plot format containing some shading:

$ Density Neutron plot file with shading

$
$ Track Format
$ --------Logarithmic Tracks-------- OverView
$TRACK Width Grid Grid Decades Left_Scale Minor_Grid Track Grid Lines
$
$ Curve Format
$CURVE Name Left_Scale Right_Scale Backup Thickness colour Log/Lin Point_Plotting
$ Names that start with a '*' are curve Types
$
$ Grid and depth Format
$ Depth ---Grid Spacing--- User Defined ----------------Hard Copy--------------
$GRID Curve Heavy Medium Light Spacing Top Depth Bottom Depth Scale Grid colour
$
$Recognised colours are:
$ Aqua, Black, Blue, DkGray, Fuchsia, Gray, Green, Lime, LtGray,
$ Maroon, Navy, Olive, Purple, Red, Teal, White, Yellow
$
$
$ gr caliper track
TRACK 2.00 Yes No 2 0.200 No No 5
$CURVE Name Left_Scale Right_Scale Backup Thickness colour Log/Lin Point_Plotting
CURVE *GammaRay 0.0000 150.0000 RBU 1 Green LIN Solid
CURVE *Caliper 6.0000 16.0000 RBU 1 Blue LIN Solid
$ make depth track
TRACK 0.50 No No 2 0.200 No No 5
CURVE DEPTH 0.0000 1.0000 NONE 1 Black LIN Solid
$ density neutron track
TRACK 4.00 Yes No 4 0.200 Yes No 10
CURVE *Density 1.9500 2.9500 LBU 1 Red LIN Solid
CURVE *Neutron 0.4500 -0.1500 LBU 1 Green LIN Solid
CURVE *Drho -0.7500 0.2500 NONE 1 Black LIN Solid
$ shade when Density curve is to the left of Neutron curve using YELLOW
SHADE *Density Curve *Neutron Curve Yellow
$ shade when Neutron curve is to the left of Density curve using GREEN
SHADE *Neutron Curve *Density Curve Green
$ OverView Track
TRACK 0.50 No No 2 0.200 No Yes 5
CURVE DEPTH 0.0000 1.0000 NONE 1 Black LIN Solid
CURVE *GammaRay 0.0000 150.0000 RBU 1 Green LIN Solid
$ Grid and depths
GRID DEPTH 100.00 10.00 2.00 FALSE -999.000 -999.000 -1.00 Black
$ end of plo
NOTE: Lines starting with a '$' are comments.
When the file is read by IP, only those lines that have valid curve names or curve name 'Types'
are included in the plot. This allows the user to make 'Generic' plot formats that can be used with
curve mnemonics from different logging service companies.
19.2.1 Zones
Zone Sets, whether they contain geological formation tops data or petrophysical interpretation
zones, for example 'fluid' zones, are displayed in 'Zone' tracks. Zone labels and colours can be
displayed on their own or they can be viewed in 'conventional' log curve tracks, overlaying log
curves. Only one 'Zone / Tops' Set can be displayed per single log track.
If no Zone Set exists then it will first need to be created - see 'Manage Zones / Tops' for details
on how to do this. Once the Zone Set has been created then it can be viewed in the log plot.
To load and view an existing 'Zone /Tops' Set in a log plot, the user must:
1. Either 'click' in an existing log track header, or right mouse button click in an existing log
track and select 'NewTrack' to create a new log track.
2. In the first blank row in the 'Log plot Format' screen' you must select line 'Style'
(right-hand column) of 'Zone'.

3. This sets up the 'Curve Name' drop-down list to display available 'Zone / Tops' Sets,
from which you can choose the Set required for visualization.
The Zone Set name will be displayed in the log plot track header.
'Zone' tracks can be plotted in several different 'styles'. The style is selected on the Plot Format
Window on the 'Curves' tab under the 'Line colour' column.
The styles are:
'Plot Num.' - Displays a coloured background with Zone Numbers overlaid.

'Names' - Displays a coloured background with Zone Names overlaid.
'No Text' - Displays a coloured background with no text overlaid.
'Clear' - Displays a clear background with Zone Name overlaid.
The following plot illustrates the styles. For the 'Names' and 'Clear' options the zone name text is
plotted horizontally if the 'Zone' track width allows, otherwise it is plotted vertically.

In a 'Zone' track, editing functions launched by a right-mouse-button click in the track are different
to those in 'conventional' curve tracks.
A right-mouse-button click launches the 'Zone editing menu' illustrated above (left).
This allows the user to 'Split' and 'Delete' zones. The 'Edit Zone' option launches the '
Edit Zones /Tops' module, with the appropriate Tops Set loaded in the window. This
lets the user, for example, add 'zone names' and 'zone colours' to an existing Tops Set.
NOTE: Zone Sets, associated with particular interpretation modules (for example,
'Cutoff' or 'Porosity /Water Saturation') can only be edited from within their respective
modules. You are limited to being able to change zone colours for such Sets in this
module.
The log track editing menu (shown above, right), usually launched by a
right-mouse-button 'click' in the required track, is opened in a 'Zone' track, by holding
down the keyboard CTRL or SHIFT button while right-mouse-button 'clicking' in the '
Zone' track.
19.2.2 Depth /Time Index

The way that the user sets up and visualizes 'depth Index' values has been updated for Version
3.3 and later. The user now has more interactivity with the way depth values are plotted in a log
plot display.
Depth value labels can be rotated through 0, 90 or 270 degrees within the Depth track.
Depth value label Font Size can be adjusted.

Additional attributes called depth 'ticks' can be added to further enhance a log plot
output.
Depth 'ticks' are illustrated in the following screen capture.

Depth 'ticks' can be added to a 'Depth' track on a log plot using the 'Edit Format' 'Grid' screen.
'Ticks' are synchronized to the 'Depth Grid Datum Curve' and 'tick spacing' is controlled by the '
Depth Grid Line and number Spacing' properties. When 'Default' is 'checked', and the user
changes the log plot vertical scale, the depth ticks adjust to the new depth grid lines.
By default, where a 'Depth' curve is displayed in a log plot, 'ticks' are turned 'off'. To turn them '
on', on the 'Grid' tab, place a 'tick' in the 'Plot Grid' column, in the row containing the track with
the 'Depth' curve, as shown in the following illustration:

19.2.3 Numeric
The 'Numeric' style of log curve plotting results in log curve 'values' being plotted in the
user-selected track, rather than as a line or symbols. If 'Numeric' style has been selected then,
when the user 'clicks' the 'Define' button, the following window will appear.
The window allows the the user to set up the vertical spacing of the numeric data in the plot.

If the 'Synchronise with Grid Lines' box is 'checked' then the curve values will be
plotted at the same depth as the heavy grid lines in the log plot display.
The 'Depth Plot' check-box, if 'checked', will plot curve values every 'Depth Plot
Interval', not synchronized with the heavy depth grid lines.
The 'Decimal Places' box allows the user to set the decimal precision of the displayed
numeric value.
The 'Plot Ticks' box, if 'checked', will display a :-
'Tick Alignment' box - this gives the user a selection of options of how to display
the tick marks on the log plot.
'Plot major tick every' box.
'Plot minor tick every' box.
The following log plot example shows the TVDSS curve being plotted as numeric data with all the
different 'Tick Alignment' options.

The position of numeric text in the track depends on its left and right scale value. The text will be
plotted so that the middle of the text will be at a value of 0.5 in relationship to the left and right
scale value. This means that a scale of 0 - 1 will plot the text in the middle of the track. The text
cannot be plotted outside the track boundaries.
19.2.4 Variable Shading

If 'Variable Shading' type has been selected then the user must 'click' the 'Define' button to set
up the shadings. The following window will appear.
The 'Shading controlled by curve' entry box allows the user to select the curve that will
determine the shading colours. The curve name is selected from the available curves, in the
drop-down list. This can be any curve in the well. The value of the curve at a depth in a well will be
used to decide the type of shading to apply at that depth. Two types of variable shading are
available:
a continuous spectrum or palette of colours, or
a fixed colour / pattern for a range of values.
'Use Spectrum' Option

When this radio button is selected, the user sets the low and high log curve values that will
correspond to the high and low colour values. The colour 'values' can be any positive integer. A
colour value greater than 256 will cause the spectrum to repeat. The 'colour spectrum' window to
the left of the user input boxes will change as the user adjusts the high and low colour numbers. It
is possible to switch the high and low colour value order. This will 'reverse' the spectrum.
To clip the value of the control input curve to stay within the high / low entered values, 'check' the '
Clip values outside range to high / low colour' check box. If the box is not 'checked' then the

spectrum is repeated when the value of the control input curve is greater than the entered high
value.
'Use Palette' Option

This option, if selected, will allow the user to select a different colour range from the normal
'spectrum' palette. Palettes can be edited and new ones created using the 'Tools' menu 'Edit
Palettes' module.
'Use Values' Option

If the 'Use Values' option is 'checked', then the user enters the range (Low Value High Value)
for each selected type of shading. If the 'High Value' box is left blank then it is assumed to be the
same as the 'Low Value'. The 'Description' box can be used to describe the shading. This
description will be included along with shading coding in the Log Track header. If the 'Description
' column is left completely blank, then the shading descriptions will not appear in the Log Track
Header.
Lithology Curve Shading

In a well where the user has created a 'lithology' curve, the initial display, after the curve has been
digitized, will include all the shading bitmaps in the Log Track header. This is usually impractical
for plotting hardcopy, since each log plot would contain 27 bitmap shadings and their descriptions
in the Log Plot. To remove this long list of shadings from the log plot header, the user can simply
type in the word 'None' in the 'Shading Description' column for the track containing the
'Lithology' curve, as illustrated below. Click the 'Run' or 'Apply' button to see the effect on the log
plot.
The 'Save' button allows the user to save a shading set-up to an external 'colour Info.' (
.col) file for use in other wells, or other projects. NOTE: clicking the 'Save' button only
saves the 'Variable Shading' set-up, not the log plot. The 'shading control curve'
name is not saved with the set-up.
The 'Restore' button allows the user to restore a particular setup for use in another plot
containing the correct 'shading control curve' name.
19.2.5 VDL Plots

In order to plot a 'Variable Density Log' ('VDL') the IP well must contain either :
An array curve to use to define the VDL, or
A group of curves in the well which make up the VDL.
Where a group of curves make up the VDL, all the curve names must have the same 'Base
Name' with a numeric extension attached to them. For example, curve names 'Prob1', 'Prob2',
'Prob3', 'Prob4' would be acceptable.
The program will automatically sort all the curves with the same 'Base Name' and plot them from

left to right across the log track, in the order of increasing curve extension number. Using the
above example, the 'Prob' VDL track would be divided into 4 and curve 'Prob1' would be plotted in
the left-most quarter of the track as solid shading, the shading type being defined by the VDL
colour set-up and the value of the curve.
It is possible to define a VDL made up of one curve. In this case the curve would be plotted
across the whole track.
The 'Array' curve name or 'Base Curve' name must be entered on the Log track 'Curves' tab, in
the 'Curve Name' column.
Set the curve 'Style' to 'VDL'. The left and right scale values for the VDL can be filled in, however
the scales are not used for creating the VDL.
Click the 'Define' button, which appears in the 'Line colour' box, to display the 'Define VDL
colours' window shown below.
The 'Define VDL colours' window is set up in the same way as the 'Define Variable Shading'
window except that the 'Shading controlled by curve' curve selection list box is fixed to the '
Curve Name' and cannot be changed.
An example plot showing a VDL and variable type shading is illustrated below. The lithology in
track 2 is plotted using the 'Cumulative' option for the VWCL, VLime and VSand curves. The
ProbB array is displayed as a VDL with the BinN-ml curve overlaying the VDL shading.

19.2.6 Tadpoles
If a curve style of 'Tadpole' is chosen, then a 'Define' button will appear next to the 'Style'
column. Clicking the button will allow the set-up of the tadpole curve type.
The tadpole 'Dip Azimuth curve' must be entered (allowed values 0-360 degrees).
The 'Dip Grade curve' is optional. If entered, it must contain a value of 1,2 or 3. Values less than
1 will be assumed to be 1 and values greater that 3 will be assumed to be 3. The value is used to

decide how the head of the tadpole is plotted. A 1 value will plot a solid head, a 2 value will plot a
hollow head with a heavy line and a 3 value will plot a hollow head with a thin line.
The 'Dip Symbol curve' is also optional. If entered the value will be used to decide how each
tadpole is plotted as far as its colour and head shape. This will override the selection in the '
Curves' tab for colour and dip head type. The symbol curve must contain a set of integer values
that correspond to the types of tadpoles. To change or add to the tadpole symbol definitions use
the module 'Edit Dip Symbols' found under the 'Tools' menu item.
The 'Plot all Tadpoles' and 'Plot average Tadpoles' options allows the user to either plot every
good tadpole or to plot an average tadpole over an interval. The average tadpole is useful for
plotting things like hole deviation and azimuth. Here there would normally be a hole dip value
every database sample and therefore if all tadpoles were plotted the tadpoles would be
unreadable, especially at large plot scales. However if one plotted an average value every ten feet
the plot will be much easier to interpret.
The following plot shows some tadpoles plotted on a logarithmic scale with the tadpole colour and
head being defined by a Dip Symbol type curve. Hole dip and azimuth are plotted in track 4 using
a 10 foot average value.

19.2.7 Waveforms
In order to plot a 'Waveform' the user must have an array curve or a group of curves in the well
which make up the 'waveform'.
If the user is trying to visualize a set of related conventional curves, all the curve names must
have the same 'base name' with a number extension attached to it. For example C1, C2, C3, C4,
.C29, C30 would be acceptable. Where a group of related curves are used to create a
waveform, the program will automatically select all the curves with the same 'base name' and use
them to plot the waveform with the lowest extension number plotted on the left hand margin of the
waveform track and the highest extension number on the right hand side. If the user selects an
array-type curve, for example CMR 'T2_DIST', then IP will automatically load the array data.
NOTE: the maximum number of 'conventional' curves that can be used to create a waveform is
currently set at 400. This is so because there is a maximum curve limit per well of 500 curves,
enabling the user to load, compute and store another 100 curves, in addition to the waveform
curve data. This waveform curve limit does not apply when Array-type curves are used to
generate a waveform.
If a curve style of 'Waveform' is chosen in a Log Plot track header then a 'Define' button will
appear next to the 'Style' column in the track header. 'Clicking' the 'Define' button will launch the
following window, which allows the user to set up the waveform curve attributes. There is now no
limit on the number of waveforms that can be displayed in each track.
The user can check the selected array curve statistics in the Edit/ List Curve headers tabulation,
or make a histogram display to view the data range of the array curve. This should point out any
spurious outlier points that are not representative of the majority of the data. This will help when
setting the 'Log Low' and 'Log High' values.
The 'Waveform height' setting defines the maximum physical height of the waveform on the log
plot. This will represent the waveform height as determined from the user-entered 'Log high
value' and 'Log low value'. The 'zero crossing' value for the waveform (the value where the

waveform line will be at the depth of the waveform being plotted) will be the log value half way
between the 'Log high value' and the 'Log low value' (see the following diagram).
NMR-type waveforms are only 'half waveforms' because they are clipped to a minimum value of
'zero'. Therefore, to display this type of data, with the zero amplitude value at the actual depth of
the reading, the 'Log low value' should be set to the negative value of the 'Log high value'.
This will produce, for example - a T2 distribution waveform displayed at the depth of the zero
amplitude value, as illustrated below.
To add colour shading to the waveform above a certain value, set the 'value' in the 'Log value
shading cut-off' box. Choose the shading colour from the drop-down colour box. To exclude
shading, leave the 'Log value shading cut-off' box blank.
The depth frequency with which the waveforms are drawn on the log plot is set in the 'Plot
waveform every' box.
If the user 'checks' the 'Average Data over interval' box, then waveforms will be stacked
(averaged) over the depth interval specified, before being plotted.
For example, if a CMR array curve 'T2_DIST' with 6 inch sample interval is plotted every 1 ft,
then, if the 'Average Data over interval' box is 'checked' the waveform is calculated as the
average of the data in 2 depth steps. If the 'Average Data over interval' box is left 'un-checked'
then waveform data, between the user-specified output intervals, is ignored.

The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allow part of a waveform to be plotted.
This can be useful for certain types of array data where only part of the array contains useful
information.
The waveforms in the plot shown here (track 5) were set up as illustrated in the 'Set Up
Waveforms' window, shown above.
19.2.8 Pictures
'Picture' curves can be displayed in any log track by selecting the 'Pictures' style for a curve on
the 'Curves' tab. The picture curve is then selected under the 'Curve name' column. Pictures with
a scale from 0-1 will be displayed across the whole track. Scales can be adjusted if the picture is
to fill only part of a track. Other normal curves can be plotted on top of a picture curve. Only one
picture curve can be plotted in each track.
Picture curves will be plotted at the same scale as the rest of the plot. To view a picture at higher
resolution, either zoom in on the Log Plot by changing the plot scale or 'right mouse click' on the
picture and select 'Expand Image' from the drop-down menu. The picture will then be loaded into
the picture viewer at its native resolution.

19.2.9 Images
To plot an 'Image', the array curve is entered on the 'Curves Tab' under curve name. The curve '
Style' is set to 'Images'. The left and right scale values for the Image can be filled in and, if this is
done, the scales will be displayed in the curve header. However, the scales are not used for
creating the Image.
Click the 'Define' button in the 'Line Colour' box to display the 'Define Image Shading' window.

The user selects the 'colour Palette' from the drop-down box. Palettes can be edited and new
ones created using the 'Edit Palettes' module under the 'Tools' menu.
The 'Low' and 'High' entry boxes allow the user to select the limits between which the image will
be plotted. If array values fall outside these limits then these areas in the image are set to
transparent. This can be used to remove bad data from the image plot. If the 'Clip values
outside range to high / low colour' is 'checked' then, rather than becoming transparent, the
plotted colour will be set to either the high or low colour value as defined in the palette. The 'Get
Min and Max' button allows the user to find the total dynamic range of the data in the image. If
the image was created by the 'Create Acoustic Image' or the 'Create Electrical Image' modules
the dynamic ranges will normally be 0 to 255, which is the dynamic range of colours in a palette.
Images can be dynamically normalized while being displayed. If the 'Dynamic' button is selected
then the user can either normalize the image over the currently displayed window interval (check '
Selected Range') or over a defined depth interval (enter 'Depth Range'). This type of dynamic

normalization will depend on the scale and exact interval being displayed. If the screen is scrolled
a little then the image could change its colours. To obtain a stable, dynamically-normalized image
log - use the dynamic normalization options in the 'Create Acoustic Image' or the 'Create
Electrical Image' modules.
The 'Transparent Colour' sets the colour in the image that will plot as transparent. Normally this
does not make any difference since the transparent part of the images are set to null or absent
data and as such automatically plot as transparent. However for CGM output, it is necessary to
set the 'Transparent Colour' to the colour of the track background, normally white.
The following is a small section of an FMI image.
'Right mouse clicking' on an image will display a pop-up menu. If the 'Expand Image' option is
selected then the image will be displayed in a 3D picture viewer. Any transparent sections in the
picture will be displayed using the 'Transparent Colour'.

The 'Picture Viewer' has many options to allow the user to view the picture at different angles.
Use the pop-up 'hint' help boxes for help on the many options.
Palette Modify
If the 'Change Palette' option is selected the 'Palette Modify' window is displayed.

The overall palette can be changed by selecting a different palette from the drop-down box.
There are three palette editing modes that allow manipulation of the palette to enhance the image.
Any changes to the palette will be instantly reflected on the log plot image.
1. Line

The line mode allows the user to change how the log values are mapped to the colour palette. By
changing the shape of the line one can emphasise certain features in the plot. The line end points
can be moved as well as adding pivot points in the line. The line can be set horizontally in which
case the image will have just two colours that are the palette end points. The following plot has
been made by setting the line horizontally.

2. Scroll
The scroll mode allows the user to rotate the colour palette. The user right mouse clicks on the
palette colours and drags the colours either left or right.

3. Stretch
The stretch mode allows the user to stretch part of the colour palette. The user right mouse clicks
on the palette colours and drags either the image left or right. Several stretches can be made on
the same palette.

The 'Reset' button will reset the palette back to its default settings. The 'Reverse colours' check
box will reverse the current colours so what appears on the left will now be on the right.
19.2.10 Set Default Plot Format

The 'Set Default Plot Format' is a new option that gives the user the ability to set the place
where the default plot for a well comes from.
When selected the following window appears;

There are two basic options:

'Use Well Default Format for new plots' - currently the method employed with IP v3.3.
'Use the following plot Format as default for new plots in all wells' - this option
allows the user to pick a plot template to be applied on all the wells within a database
when a new plot is created.
The 'Browse' button allows the selection of the plot format template;
If the 'Look in Project Plots' box is 'checked' then the file select dialogue opens up within the
current project. If it is not 'checked' then the global 'Default Plots' dialogue opens, as seen
above. The 'Default Plots' are stored in C:\Documents and Settings\<username>\Local
Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35 folder.

19.2.11 Dip Image

The 'Dip image' plot object allows the plotting of tadpoles as sine wave curves on an image log.
To plot a dip image, the tadpole dip curve is entered on the 'Curves Tab' under curve name. The
curve 'Style' is set to 'Dip Images'. The left and right scale values for the Image can be filled in
and if done will be displayed in the curve header. However the scales are not used for creating the
Image.
Click the 'Define' button to the right of the 'Style' box to display the 'Dip Image setup' window.
The tadpole 'Dip Azimuth curve' must be entered.
The 'Dip Grade curve' is optional. If set, then a value of 1or less will produce a solid curve, a
value of 2 a dashed curve and 3 or more a dotted curve.
The 'Dip Symbol curve' is optional. If set, then it defines the colour of the dip image curves. The
colour coding is set up in the 'Edit Dip Symbols' module. This allows the colour of the dip image
to correspond to the colour of a corresponding tadpole.
The 'Bore Hole Azimuth' and 'Bore Hole Deviation' are optional inputs, but must be entered if
the dip image is to be corrected for hole deviation from the vertical and thus allow the dip image to
align properly with an image log.
The 'Caliper 1 / hole size' box must either contain a caliper curve or a fixed hole size value. This
is used to calculate the magnitude of the dip image curve.
The 'Caliper 2' input is optional and is used if both X and Y axes caliper curves are available. The
program then will average the two caliper values and use the average value to calculate the
magnitude of the dip image curve.

The 'Plot All Dips' and 'Plot average Dips' options allows the user to either plot every good dip
curve or to plot an average dip curve over an interval.
The following plot shows a dip image curve overlaying an image log. The same dip is plotted as a
tadpole in the next track.
19.2.12 Annotations
The 'Edit Annotations' module can be launched in a number of ways :
by clicking the 'Edit Annotations' button in the 'Log Plot Menu' on the main IP menu
bar, or
by right-mouse-button 'clicking' on the active log plot and selecting 'Add Annotation'
from the pop-up menu. The depth and position of the cursor will be pasted as a new
annotation line in the 'Annotations' window.
by 'clicking' the 'Annotations' button on the active Log Plot header bar.
on a log plot place the cursor on the top left hand corner of an annotation and when the
cursor changes to the drag cursor ( ) double click on the plot. This will bring up the '
Edit Annotations' window and allow the user to perform the editing.
annotations once they have been created can be saved to a well and can be edited from
within the 'Plot Annotations' tab in the 'Manage Well Header Info' module. NOTE: the
annotations cannot be associated with a plot from within this tab.
Three types of 'Annotations' are allowed:

'Text' annotations can be single or multi-line and the user has total control on the
formatting of the text.

'Line' annotations can be a single line or an arrow. The user can control the direction,
length, colour, type and size of the line.
'Graphical Image' annotations allows the user to place any graphical image onto the log
plot. The image is loaded from a disk file and can be re-sized to fit any area on the plot.
Groups of annotations can now be created. This gives the user greater flexibility in the use of
annotations across different log plot formats and from well to well.
To create an annotation in the 'Edit Annotations' module right mouse button 'click' in the grey
area below the first row. An 'Edit Annotations' sub-menu will appear.
'Add New Annotation' : this will create a new row with the 'Plot', 'Group', 'Depth', '
Position' and 'Type' all filled in with values from the preceding row. The user can edit
these as required as well as the 'Annotation' column.
'Plot' : check this box to plot the annotation line. By clicking at the top of this
column on the word 'Plot' all the plot lines will either be turned on or off. This is a
quick way of turning off the annotations without deleting them all.
'Group' : this is a user editable column. There is a limit of 20 characters for the
name of the 'Group'. The user can group annotations together and then use
these annotation groups in different log plots. The user can double click on the '
Group' name cell to enable/disable the plotting of all other annotations within that
'Group'.
'Depth' : this specifies the depth for the annotation.
'Position' : this is the distance in inches (or centimetres) from the left hand edge
of the plot.
'Type' : this is selected from the drop-down menu and can be either 'Text', 'Line'
or 'Image'.
'Annotation' : what is displayed here depends on the annotation type.
'Delete Annotation' : 'click' on the row that is to be deleted and select 'Delete
Annotation'. A message box will appear asking the user to confirm that they wish to
delete the annotation in row X.
'Delete Group' : 'click' on a row that contains a group that is to be deleted and select '
Delete Group'. A message box will appear asking the user that they wish to delete the '
Group'.

'Copy To Well' : this copies an individually selected annotation to the active well. They
are then stored in the 'Manage Well Header Info' 'Plot Annotations' tab.
'Copy Group To Well' : this copies a number of annotations that all have the same '
Group' name to the active well. Again they are stored in the 'Manage Well Header Info'
'Plot Annotations' tab.
'Copy All To Well' : this copies all of the annotations irrespective of groups to the active
well.
In the screenshot below a number of different annotation groups can be seen.
The annotations can be applied on a plot by plot basis by 'checking' the 'Plot' column and they
can be saved to individual wells. To quickly select all the annotations associated with a 'Group' for
adding to a plot double click on the required 'Group' cell. This will 'check' all of the 'Plot' cells for
that particular 'Group'.
In order to make the task of recalling the annotations easier there is a 'Filtering' section with the
options;
'Well/Plot Annotations' : the user can choose between displaying all the 'Plot
Annotations' or the 'Well Annotations'. If the 'Plot Annotations' option is chosen then
if the user right mouse button 'clicks' on the gray area then all the Copy options in the
sub-menu relate to copying annotations / Groups to the well. However, if the 'Well
Annotations' option is chosen then the Copy options relate to copying annotations /
Groups to the plot.
'Annotation Group' : here the user can '-- View All --' the annotations or select the
annotations according to 'Group'.
The screenshots below illustrate these features:



The 'File Load/Save' box contains:

'Load and Save' Buttons : these buttons allow the user to save and restore groups of
annotations. This allows the transfer of annotations between wells. The annotations are
saved to the Well folder as a '.ano' file . Annotations are also saved as part of the
normal Save Plot Format procedure.
'History' Button : opens up the 'History' module.
'OK' Button : this applies the annotation to the plot and closes the annotation window.
'Apply' Button : this applies the annotation to the plot but leaves the window open for
further editing.
The top panel of the window will change depending on the type of annotation you are editing.
Clicking on an annotation line will change the top panel to allow you to edit the selected
annotation type.
Text Annotation
The user enters the text into the multi-line drop-down box.
The following formatting can be made to each line:

Font type; Font size; Bold; Italic; Underline; Rotation (any rotation number 0-360 deg. can be
entered). The text orientation convention is illustrated in the diagram shown below. The angle of
rotation is counterclockwise from 'Zero' degrees. Note the different orientation angles for the
'normal' and 'Landscape' log plot displays.

Vertical text position in relation to input depth (Centre will align the middle of the text at the
requested depth), Text colour; Background colour ('Transparent' background colour will allow
information under the annotation to be seen).
Line Annotation
The 'Length' of the line can be set in inches (or centimetres). The 'Width' in pixels (1-3). The '
Rotation' will change the angle of the line. The 'Type' can either be 'Line', 'Left Arrow', 'Right
Arrow' or 'Unconformity'. The 'Style' can be 'Solid', 'Dash', 'Dot' or 'Dot Dash'. The 'Colour' of
the line can be chosen from one of the colours in the drop-down box. The 'Full Width' box will
make the line a horizontal line going across the full width of the log plot. If this box is selected the '
Length' and 'Rotation' options will not do anything. The 'Unconformity' option will draw a
horizontal sinusoidal line.
Image Annotation

When the 'Image' type is selected the location of the image picture on disk must be entered. The '
Browse' button can be used to select the file. Images must be one of the following formats:
Bitmap, JPEG, GIF, TIFF, Icon, metafile or enhanced metafile. When the picture is loaded its
width and height will be displayed in the 'Picture width' and 'Picture height' boxes. The height
and width can be changed. The 'Use Log heights' box, if 'checked', will change the meaning of
the 'Picture height' box from a direct measurement (inches or centimetres) to a relative height
based on the log plot scale. For example if 10 were entered in the 'Picture height' box and the
plot depth scale was in feet, then the image would be displayed over the equivalent of 10 feet of
well depth. The 'Justification' allows the setting of how the image will be displayed in relation to
its 'Depth' and 'Position'.
The following plot shows the annotations that were set up in the above 'Edit Annotations'
window.

Annotations can be moved and resized interactively.
To move a 'Text' annotation: place the cursor on the top left line of the text. The cursor will
change shape to an arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the
left-hand mouse button and drags the cursor to the new position. When the mouse button is
released, the annotation will be displayed in its new position.
To move a 'Line' annotation: place the cursor at the beginning of the line. The cursor will change
shape to an arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the left-hand
mouse button and drags the line to the new position. To change the 'Length' or 'Direction' of a
line: place the cursor at the end of the line. The cursor will again change shape to an arrow
attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the left-hand mouse button and
drags the line to a new length or direction.
To move an 'Image' annotation: place the cursor at the top left corner of the image. The cursor
will change shape to an arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down

the left-hand mouse button and drags the image to the new position. To change the 'Size' of an
image: place the cursor at the bottom right hand corner. The cursor will again change shape to an
arrow attached to a small white square. The user clicks and holds down the left-hand mouse
button and drags the image to a new size.
19.2.13 Plot Output (File - Printer)

Log Plots can be output in a number of ways:
As Graphics files,
Sent directly to a connected printer, or
Copied into the WINDOWS clipboard for incorporation in other documents.
Clicking the 'Output to Plotter' menu item or the 'Print' button on a log plot window, will launch
the 'Plot Output' window.
The 'Plot Output' window is arranged on five 'tabbed' screens.
1. 'Main Plot' controls the depth intervals, vertical scales, depth gridline spacing, border
line colour and background shading options for the 'hardcopy'. The output 'device' - to
'Graphics File', to 'Printer' or to 'Clipboard' format for the Log Plot are also selected here.
2. 'Advanced' allows settings to be adjusted for resolving some printer problems
associated with different MS WINDOWS printer drivers.
3. 'Plot Header' controls the addition of an optional 'Header' to the Log Plot and allows the
user to customise the plot header.
4. 'Curve Titles' allows the user to control how each curve is titled in the Log track header.
5. 'Plot Footer' controls an optional Log plot 'Footer' for the Log Plot.
'Main Plot' Tab

The Log Plot output can be sent to any of the following:
1. to a WINDOWS printer. 'Check' the 'Printer' radio button and click the 'Setup Printer'
button to set up the printer you wish to send the log plot to.

2. to a Graphics File. 'Check' the 'Graphics File' option and set the 'File name'. The
output format is set by the file extension used on the output file.

The following graphics file formats are supported:
Enhanced Metafile (*.emf), a vector file and as such, .emf outputs can be re-sized easily
without losing their resolution.
Bitmap (*.bmp).
CGM (*.CGM), a vector file and as such, .CGM outputs can be re-sized easily without
losing their resolution.
GIF (*.gif) .GIF format output will generally produce the most compact picture-type file.
JPEG (*.jpg).
Portable Network Graphics File (*.png).
TIFF Image Files (*.tif).
When output is to a graphics file a 'Confirm' dialog will be launched when the user clicks the 'OK'
button. This window, shown below, allows the user to preview graphics file in a WINDOWS
viewer.

Click 'Yes' to preview the new graphics file in a WINDOWS viewer.

Click 'No' to not launch a preview of the new graphics file in a WINDOWS viewer.
Click 'Yes to All' to automatically launch a preview of all graphics files created in the
current IP session.
Click 'No to All' to switch off the preview functionality for the current IP session. (The
option will be available again if the user closes IP and opens it again).
3. Output to the WINDOWS 'Clipboard'.
Selecting the 'Clipboard' option will output the Log Plot to the WINDOWS clipboard as an
Enhanced Metafile (.emf). This can then be pasted directly into other documents that accept this
format, for example MS WORD, MS EXCEL.
The 'Fit Plot to printer page' option only operates on output sent to a 'physical' printer.
If the box is 'checked', the plot routine will shrink or expand the Log Plot to fit one page
on the selected Printer.
If left 'un-checked', the Log Plot will be output on multiple pages, as required by the
dimensions of the log plot.
If the Log Plot is too wide for the selected printer/plotter, the log plot width will always be
shrunk to fit the selected page width, regardless of whether 'Fit Plot to printer page' is
'checked'.

The 'Eject page at start of plot' option will force the selected printer to start a new page
at the start of a Log Plot. This can be very useful for continuous feed, fan-fold type
plotters (e.g. EPSON 1500, 3000) where the user wants each Log Plot to start at the top
of a new page. With this option turned 'on' you can batch print multiple plot copies, with
each copy starting at the top of a new fan fold page.
The 'Rotate Plot 90 Deg' option is only available when output is directed to the '
Clipboard', or to a 'Graphics File' (excluding .emf or .CGM graphics file formats). If
'checked', the output to the graphics file or clipboard will be rotated through 90 degrees.
A Horizontal log plot will be re-oriented vertically (portrait mode). A vertical log plot will
be re-oriented horizontally (landscape mode).
Plotting multiple depth ranges - Multiple depth intervals and log vertical scales can be
set up to be output in one continuous Log Plot. The user fills in the 'grid' with the depth
intervals and vertical scales required.
The 'Major', 'Minor' and 'Lite' depth grid lines displayed on each Log Plot can be set up as
required.
If the 'Use Default Gridline Spacing' check box is 'checked' then, when the user clicks
on the 'Plot Scale' drop-down list box and selects a log vertical scale, the grid line
spacing boxes will be updated to the default settings for that vertical scale. For example
a Scale of 1:500 has 'Major', 'Minor' and 'Lite' grid lines plotted at 50m / 100ft, 25m / 50ft,
5 m / 10 ft respectively.
'Set Depths to Plot Range' - The 'Set Depths to Plot Range' button, if 'clicked', will set
the 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' fields to the values of the current 'Plot Range' for
the well to be plotted. The user should click in a row of the grid and click 'Set Depths to

Plot Range' to paste the top and bottom depths into the grid.
The 'Use 'Depth Grid Datum' depths' option allows the user to specify a log plot depth
range in terms of another datum curve, for example a TVDSS 'depth', or or TWT 'Time'
curve, The check-box, if 'checked', will allow the user to specify the depth range for their
log plot in whatever 'Depth Type' (MD, TVD, TVDSS, TWT etc...) that has been set as
the 'Depth Grid Datum curve' for the users log plot. See 'Log Plot Display' - 'Depth
Grid Datum and Depth labelling' for more details.
Click in one of the 'Depth Rows',
'check' the 'Use Grid Datum Depths' check-box,
then click the 'Set Depths to Plot Range' button. The depth entries in the Top
Depth / Bottom Depth cells will update to the appropriate depth 'Type' (e.g. TVD,
TVDSS, TWT). You can manually change the depths in the grid and the output
log plot will be between these depth limits.
'Plot Track Header Titles' - when 'checked' Track Header Titles will be included on the
output log plot.
The 'Plot Scales at bottom of log' box, if 'checked', will append the curve scales
labelling to the base of the Log Plot as well as the top.
The 'Plot Shading description in header' box, if 'checked', will output the shading
coding boxes with their shading description inserted into the boxes in the curve track
headers. This is what the user sees in the on-screen Log Plot.
'Hide Track Scales' - 'If this option is 'checked', then the output Log Plot will not display
any curve name / colour / scales details in the Log track headers.

The 'Plot Well Name Comment with Well Name' box, if 'checked', will attach the 'Well
Name Comment' to the well name for output in the Log Plot header (see Manage Well
Header Info.).
The 'Grid and Border line Colour' drop-down list box allows the selection of the colour
to be used for the plot boundaries and gridlines. The 'default' is black.
The 'Plot Background Colour' drop-down list box allows the selection of the colour to
be used for the background of the Log Plot. The 'default' is white.
The 'Plot Border Colour' drop-down list box allows the selection of the colour to be
used for a border line to be placed around the Log Plot.
The 'Border Width' box sets the width of the border in inches (centimetres). If a value of
'zero' is entered then no border is printed.
The 'Left hand Margin' box is the offset to the left hand side of the page before the Log

Plot will start. If the Log Plot width is changed to fit a page, then this left hand margin will
be re-scaled to match.
NOTE: Continuous, long Log Plots can be generated if the selected plotter can handle continuous
paper feed. For example; to plot to the Epson 1550 or 3000, with continuous tractor feed paper,
the user sets the paper type to 'banner' and paper size to the correct 'width' of the paper (the
length is not important). The Log Plot will be output to the plotter one page at a time, but the
pages will join up, making a continuous plot.
Absolute Plot Calibration

The absolute scaling of a Log Plot can be adjusted for an individual printer (i.e. if a printer always
makes a Log Plot 3% too long, this can be adjusted for). To do this, the user edits the file 'Plotter
Calibration.opt' file found in the IP program directory and adds the 'calibration factors' for the
printer, to the file. Instructions for doing this are in the file.
CGM
If 'Graphics File' output is selected and set to 'CGM' then a temporary enhanced metafile is
produced which is converted automatically to CGM format using Larson CGM Software. The
Larson EMF to CGM converter is included with IP.
Plotting of CGM files to printers can be problematical and it will probably be necessary to
make several trial and error plots in order to obtain the required results. Most of the problems will
be associated with the size of the lithology code shadings which use bitmaps, like 'Sandstone' or '
Clay'. These shadings can sometimes be very large or very small, depending on the plotting
software. The IP program allows the user to change the 'CGM bitmap shading expansion factor
' ('Advanced' Tab). If the shading is too small, then increase this factor. If the shading is too
large, then reduce the factor (a value of '1' is the minimum setting). The 'Output resolution'
option will also affect the size of the shading. The larger the DPI number, the larger the shading
patterns (this will only have an effect if the 'Plot Metafile and Clipboard output at screen
resolution for shading patterns' is turned 'off' by 'un-checking' the box next to the label.
In order to plot images to CGM files with transparent parts in the image, the user must set the
'transparent' colour for the image to the track background colour. See Image plotting.
For more information on CGM viewing, montaging and printing and see www.cgmlarson.com.
'Advanced' Tab

The following options are designed to give more flexibility in the way the Log Plot is output to a
printer. Printer drivers vary greatly under WINDOWS and some have problems plotting IP
enhanced metafiles, especially the 'lithology' bitmap shading. Some older Postscript drivers will
totally seize up when plotting. If this happens, the user can try turning 'on' the 'Use large Bitmaps
for bitmap shading' option. If this does not work, then removing the bitmap shading (e.g.
'Limestone' or 'Sandstone') or changing them to solid colour shading will generally overcome the
problem.
The 'Output resolution (dpi)' list box sets the resolution that the Log Plot will be
generated at. This generally affects the width of the border and curve lines and can
affect the size of the 'lithology' patterns. The higher the resolution, the thinner the lines
become. The resolution setting will not affect the shape of the log curves. A resolution of
200 DPI will normally give an optimum result. However, if the lithology patterns are too
big or small then the resolution can be changed.

The 'Set Graphics File and Clipboard output to screen resolution' option, if
'checked', will force the shading patterns in a log plot to be the same size in the
clipboard image as that seen on the IP screen plot.
The 'Use large Bitmaps for bitmap shading' box, if 'checked', changes the method
used for plotting lithology bitmap shading. 'Checking' this option will increase the plotting
speed considerably, but will not work for some printer drivers. If the printing is very
slow try switching 'on' this option to see if things improve.
The 'CGM bitmap shading expansion factor' allows the user to increase this number if
the printed bitmap shading is too small.
The 'Do not print interactive lines' check box, if 'checked' will remove the vertical
interactive lines from any output Log Plot. This can be useful if one of the automatic
interactive plots, from one of the IP Interpretation modules, is required as final hardcopy
output.
'Plot Header' Tab

This tab allows the user to set up the Header format for a well Log Plot. The Log Plot headers are
fully customisable. However, there are a number of header templates which can be adapted to
suit the users requirements.
The Header template options can be accessed from the drop-down list in the 'Plot Header' box:
'None'
'Full'
'Full Rotated'
'Minimum'
'Minimum Rotated'
'Standard Footer'
'Standard Footer Rotated'
'Standard Multiwell No Logo'
'Standard Multiwell'
'Standard'
'Standard Rotated'
The Header styles are more fully described in the following section.
'None' - Adds only the Well Name and Depth / vertical scale information as a header to
the Log Plot, as illustrated below:

'Standard' - Adds an IP 'Standard' Log header as illustrated below. Data fields in the
Header are filled in when equivalent information is entered into the 'Manage Well
Header Info.' module. The user can fill in boxes to add logo's, graphics files, text files to
the header.
'Full' - The 'Full' Well header is similar to an API style Log header and contains details of
logging measurements and borehole fluid properties, if such data has been entered into
the 'Logging' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module.
'Minimum' - the 'Minimum' header Style in IP displays the following basic well
Information and any user-supplied Logo.

'Standard Multiwell' - displays just the logo and the plot title.
The Plot Header set-up window is shown below:

Customising a Log Plot header

Log Plot Headers can be edited or created from new.
Edit Log Plot header

Select a 'Plot Header' from the drop down list, preferably 'Full' and then 'click' on the 'Edit'
button.
A message similar to the screenshot below will appear. 'Clicking' 'Yes' will open up the 'Montage
Builder' window with the 'Full' header copy ready for editing. If 'No' is selected then the user is
returned to the 'Plot output' window.
Each of the fields on the Log Plot Header can be edited by moving the mouse cursor over the
field, waiting for the cursor to change to a cross symbol and then left mouse button clicking on the
field.

Once the field has been highlighted double left mouse button 'click' on the field to open up a 'Text
Box Settings' window. Alternatively, right mouse button click and select 'Properties'.

Within this window it is possible to change the font, style, size, colour and alignment of the text
within the field. It is also possible to change the item to one held within the 'Well Attributes', 'Log
Attributes' 'Well Attributes Display Alias' or 'Log Attributes Display Alias' lists. This gives the
user total flexibility over the content and style of their Log Plot Headers.
All the fields can be moved, resized and reshaped according to the users requirements. New
fields can be added.
Create New Log Plot Header

Selecting 'New' opens up a blank Montage Builder window which allows the user to produce their
own Log Plot Header using the design capabilities of Montage Builder.
All the Plot headers are saved to the IntPetro35\Default Plots directory as *.svg files.
Headers can contain company logos, ASCII text files and graphics files. The user selects the
options for the Header and gives the file names where the data can be found. Multiple graphics
and text files can be included in the same Header. The 'logo' and 'graphics files' can be one of
several graphics file types (bitmap, GIF, TIFF, JPEG. enhanced Metafile). The graphics file will
be scaled using the dimensions input in the 'Height' and 'Width' columns. Company 'Logos' will
be scaled to be one inch high, keeping the same height/width ratio as their original graphics file
(.jpeg, .bmp).

Header Remarks are now completely user editable and unlimited in number. Each line
can be 'checked' on or off or all the header remarks can be turned off using the 'Header
Remarks' check-box. The well specific remarks can be edited in the 'Plot Remarks' tab
of the 'Manage Well Header Info' module or they can be edited in the 'Header
Remarks Text' window and then saved to the 'Plot Remarks' tab of the 'Manage Well
Header Info' module by 'clicking' on the "+" 'Add to Defaults' button. If the 'Add to
Defaults' button isn't used then changes to the 'Header remark Text' are specific to the
log plot. If they are saved to the 'Plot Remarks' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info'
module then the remarks become well specific.
Curve descriptions for the Log Plot output curves can be optionally listed in the Plot
Header by 'checking' the 'Curve Descriptions' box. The curve descriptions can be
edited using the 'Manage Curve Headers' module, or by 'clicking' the 'Edit' button on
the 'Plot Header' tab. Clicking the 'Edit' button launches the following window, where

the log curve names in the Log Plot display will be listed and their 'Curve Descriptions'
can be edited.
The 'Clipboard' button on the 'Edit' dialog will copy the curve names and their
descriptions to the WINDOWS clipboard. The Clipboard contents can then be pasted
into an external report.
The 'Zonal Summation Report' box, if 'checked', will list the current 'Summation' results
report in the Log Plot header. This is the report that is displayed when the 'Print
parameter Set' 'Cut-off and Summation' menu item is selected.
The 'Clay Volume Parameters' and 'Porosity and Sw parameters' boxes, if 'checked',
will output a reduced set of parameters used in the current interpretation. The values
listed will be the values of the most recent analysis.
The 'Mineral Solver Parameters' and 'Simple Log Interpretation Parameters' boxes if
'checked' will output a reduced set of parameters used in the current interpretation. The
values listed will be the values of the most recent analysis.
The following diagram is an example of the 'Standard' Log plot header with a crossplot (graphics
file) and a small section of log plot.

'Curve Titles' Tab

The 'Curve Titles' tab allows the user to change how the log curve names are displayed in the
Log Plot header. Four options are available:
1. 'Display Name (With Set Name)' - Curve names are displayed as in the on-screen log
plot.
2. 'Name Only (No Set Name)' - Curve names are displayed without their Set names
prefixed to the curve name.
3. 'Use Curve Type as Name' - Curve names are replaced with the 'Curve Type' name.

When no 'Curve Type' is set then the screen plot display name will be used.
4. 'Curve Alias Name' - Curve Alias names will be used. If no Alias name has been set,
then the screen plot display name will be used.
Curve Alias names can either be set on this screen or in the 'Manage Curve Headers' form, on
the 'Descriptions' tab.
'Plot Footer' Tab

The 'Plot Footer' tab allows the user to set up a title block to be displayed at the base of a log
plot. This can be selected from the drop-down list in the 'Plot Footer' window. In a similar way to
the Log Plot Header the Plot Footer can be edited or created from scratch using the 'Edit' and '
New' buttons respectively.

'Footer Title' - Text String. Defaults to the 'Plot Header Title' if one has been entered
on the 'Plot Header' tab.
The user has the ability to browse to a logo graphics file.
An example of a Plot Footer is shown below:

19.2.14 Horizontal Log Plot

The 'Horizontal Log Plot' display has been introduced to give the user more options for log curve
visualization. Selecting the 'Horizontal Log Plot' option from the 'View' menu, or from the 'Data
View' toolbar, will launch the currently-active, in-memory wells' 'Default plot format', rotated
through 90 degrees, from a 'Portrait' to a 'Landscape' orientation.

This allows users with multiple computer monitors to see more of their logs for any particular log
vertical scale, since the log plot can be expanded across more than one screen. Single-monitor
users can also utilize this display to visualize their log curves in the new orientation.
Much of the 'normal' functionality associated with the 'Portrait' plot, for example; launching
histograms, moving / creating / deleting / editing log tracks and moving / creating / deleting log
curves is retained. 'Clicking' in the log track header activates the Log Plot Format editor, where
curve graphic characteristics and shadings can be set up and changed. The user can use the '
Well' scroll arrows or the 'Select Well to Display' dialog to change the well in the display.

The 'Horizontal Log Plot' window is designed to display a 'hardcopy' length of 8 feet / 2.44
metres of log data. The Overview track and slider bars on the main horizontal log plot window
provide the navigation tools for the interface and the log 'vertical scale' drop-down list functions
exactly as in the 'normal' log plot display. Changing the log display scale will be reflected in the
positions of the red marker bars in the Overview track. Depending upon the vertical scale
selected, the horizontal slider bar will either fill the window or will appear somewhat smaller than
the window. The user simply scrolls the horizontal scroll bar to move through a section of log data.
NOTE: log curve editing functions are not enabled in the Horizontal log plot view so curve
editing operations such as curve depth-shifting and curve splicing must all be performed in the
conventional 'portrait' log plot orientation.

Interactive Log plots, launched from the Interpretation modules in IP, can be re-oriented to the
'Landscape' display and retain their interactivity in terms of interactive lines and the ability to
launch histograms and crossplots from a drop-down menu selection. NOTE: it is very important
that you should 'un-check' the 'Lock' setting for the active well 'Default' plot format and
close other log plots for the subject well before launching the Horizontal Log Plot.
It is also possible to change the log scale by using the '+' and '-' keys on the numeric part of the
keyboard.
Log Track Management

Log track management is identical to that in the conventional 'Portrait' log plot window.
'Right-mouse-button' clicking in a log track header allows the user to drag the selected
track to a new location within the log plot.
The Right-hand mouse button, when used with the keyboard SHIFT or CTRL buttons
allows the user to move , or copy, curves from one log track to another. If you hold
down the SHIFT button and right-mouse-button 'select' a curve, then dragging the curve
from the log plot header removes that curve from the log plot display.
Left-mouse-button clicking in a log track header launches the Log Plot Format editor for
that track, where curve display characteristics can be modified.

Left-mouse-button clicking in a log track opens the track editing and curve histogram
dialog for that particular track. The dialog, illustrated above, allows the user to :
1. View the histogram for any curve in the selected track.
2. Add Annotation at the last place the mouse button was clicked.
3. Use any of the Track editing options in the pop-up menu ('Expand Track', 'New
Track', 'Duplicate Track' etc...).

19.3 Histograms
The 'Histogram' graphic plot can be activated in a number of ways.
by selecting the 'Histogram' menu item under the 'View' menu.
by using the speed button ( ).
by 'right-mouse-button clicking' in the track of a Log Plot and choosing the appropriate
histogram from the pop-up menu. In this case the histogram plot will activate with default
parameters.
by 'right-mouse-button clicking' in the log track of an interpretation module interactive log
plot brings up a particular interactive histogram plot with user-editable lines used, for
example, to define 'GRclean' and 'GRshale' values in the Vclay module.
by 'clicking & dragging' a histogram format name from the 'Database Browser' into the
IP workspace.
by 'double-clicking' on a histogram format name in the 'Database Browser' view.
Multiple histograms can be displayed simultaneously.

Histograms can be created for a single well or can be set up to display multiple wells.
When a histogram is launched and a log plot for the active well is on-screen - if you
move the mouse cursor over the log plot window, a small light blue bar, visible on the
histogram display, tracks the mouse cursor movement. The histogram curve value
updates as the mouse is moved. The bar disappears when the cursor is moved back
over the histogram window. The bar is visible, simultaneously, on as many histograms
as you have open for the active well.
The Histogram has a 'new look' in that a sunburst background colour has been added and there is
also an improved statistics table. The sunburst background can be disabled / enabled in 'Tools'
'Options' 'Miscellaneous Options' 'Enable Background'. The statistics table can be
switched off in 'Tools' 'Options' 'Miscellaneous Options' 'Show Histogram Statistics
Table'. Enabling or disabling these options within the 'Miscellaneous Options' will affect how the
histogram appears on the screen. Within the Histogram module there are controls that determine
how the histogram appears as hard copy. These will be discussed below.
The Histogram set-up is arranged on 3 'tabbed' screens. These are :
Scales
Discriminators
Options
Section 19.3 Data Viewing : Histograms

The 'Scales' Tab

This is used to set up the wells, curves and zones to be visualized in the Histogram plot.
The 'Curve Name' is selected from the drop-down list which displays all curves for the
currently selected well.
The 'Number of divisions' box allows the user to define the number of 'classes' into
which to divide the curve data. For example, the GR curve in the screen shown above
will be displayed as 50 divisions from GR value '0' to Gr value '150' i.e. in classes 0-3,
4-6, 7-9, 10-12 ...145-147, 148-150. The smaller the 'Number of divisions' is, the
larger the class size. This also has implications for the appearance of the histogram
data. For example, under the 'Type' menu, in the Histogram plot window, - if the data is
displayed and 'Plot Curves' is selected, the smaller the number of divisions, the coarser
the curves will look.
The 'Left Scale' and 'Right Scale' entries are user-editable numbers, but should default
to the values entered into the curve system defaults file - CPARMDEF.PAR, if the curve
is listed there.
The 'Logarithmic' check box is used if the user wishes to define a log scale.
Appropriate 'Left Scale' and 'Right Scale' values will have to be set.
The 'Y Axis' scale can be displayed either as a 'Frequency Count' (actual number of
points in each division) or as a 'Percentile' percent of the total number of points.
The 'Y Axis Max' value can be set to override the IP default value, which is designed to
maximise the histogram size in the window.

The 'Normalize each curve to 100%' box is used to re-scale each histogram curve in
the plot so that equal areas are seen under each curve. This option would be used, for
example, if the number of points in one histogram is very different from other wells in the
display and the curves with the low number of points are hardly visible.
The depth interval for the plot can be defined by either a 'Top' and 'Bottom' depth, or by
using 'Zonal Depths'. For 'Zonal Depths', select a 'Parameter Set' and choose the '
Active zone'.
The 'Load Format' button will load a previously saved histogram format. The format is
saved by using the menu on the histogram plot, click 'File' 'Save Format'.
The 'Multi-well / Curve Histograms' check box should be 'checked' if the user wishes
to compare similar log curves from a number of wells. 'Check' this box and 'Click' the '
Select Wells and Curves' button to launch the following window, allowing you to select
additional wells and curves for the histogram plot:
Well Name : Click in a 'blank' Well Name' row and select the required 'Well Name' from
the drop-down list, to be added to the histogram. If the selected curve on the 'Scales'
tab is named consistently across the database, IP will select the appropriate curve, in
this case GR, for any newly selected well. By clicking on the 'Well Name' column
header, all the wells currently loaded in memory will be loaded into the data grid.
Plot Curve : Place a 'tick' in the box to add the selected curve to a plot. 'Clicking' in the
column header will toggle between 'on' or 'off' for all the curves.
Curve Name : Select the 'Curve Name', from the drop-down box, to plot in the
histogram.
Top Depth Bottom Depth : The Top and Bottom depths can be changed to view part
of a well when the 'Interval Depths' option is selected on the Histogram Scales window.
Discriminator Set : A 'Discriminator Set' is used to select which parts of the chosen
curve to plot in the histogram. Details of how to set up discriminators are given in The
'Discriminators' tab description, below.
Up to 10 different Discriminator 'Sets' can be set up. This allows the user the flexibility to apply
different sets of display criteria for different curves. For example, the user could have '
Discriminator Sets' of rules to differentiate between gas sands, water sands and for shales.
The user could then produce a histogram with the same 'Curve Name' plotted three times with

each 'curve' filtered by different discriminators. An example of such a process is given below :


Cumulative Curve Set name : This feature allows several input curves to be
'accumulated' into one curve on the histogram. The user must type in a distinguishing
name for the 'Cumulative Curve Set'. When the next curve is entered to add to the set,
select the same 'Set Name' from the drop-down menu. For normal histograms leave this
box 'blank'.
Curve colour : This will be the colour of the curve on the histogram. Leave at 'Default'
to let the program choose the colour. If a colour is chosen and 'Zonal Depths' is
selected on the histogram scales window, then all histogram curves associated with this
input curve will have this same fixed colour (the default is a different colour for each
zone).
The following is an example of 'Cumulative Curve Sets' working with the 'Discriminator Sets' to
produce single histogram curves for the gamma ray from two wells for 'Gas Sands', 'Water
Sands' and 'Shales'.

'Advanced Well Select' : uses the 'Select Wells' module for creating, saving and
retrieving well lists.
The 'Zone/Well List' list at the side of the histogram can be detached from the histogram window
and resized as required.

The detached 'Zone/Well List' can be easily reattached to the crossplot either by dragging the
window onto the crossplot window or else 'clicking' on the icon in the top right-hand corner of
the 'Zone/Well List' window.
The 'Discriminators' Tab

The 'Discriminators' tab allows the user to refine which data are displayed in the histogram. The
user can up to 10 discriminator 'Sets'. Up to 6 discriminator criteria can be set up and used, per
'Set'. The discriminators can be combined using 'and' or 'or' type logic. Discrimination can either
be between a curve and a value or between two curves.

If the 'Multi Well / Curve Histogram' box is 'checked', under the 'Scales' tab, then up to ten
different Discriminator Sets can be defined. The user can scroll through the different Sets by
clicking the left and right arrow buttons next to the Set number at the head of the tab.
The 'Options' tab
The 'Options' tab allows the user to override the defaults for histogram plot titles. Leave the title
boxes 'blank' to in order to use the default titles. If no title is required then put a blank space
(space bar key) in the text-entry box. The 'Hard Copy' options allow the width and height of the
plot to be specified. If this is left blank the plot is automatically fitted to the plot page.
'Un-checking' the 'Plot Zone, depth and parameter information' removes this
information (which appears as a 'Legend' for the plot) from the hard copy plot.
'Un-checking' the 'Show Curve Statistics' will remove the statistics table from the
output hardcopy.
'Un-checking' the 'Plot Active Zone title' removes this information from the output hard
copy plot.
'Un-checking' the 'Display Colored Background' removes the 'sunburst' background
from the output hard copy plot. NOTE: even if the 'Enable Background' is 'un-checked'
within 'Miscellaneous Options', a 'sunburst' background colour will appear in the
hardcopy histogram plot if the 'Display Colored Background' is 'checked' on within the '
Options' tab. The 'Display Colored Background' is by default 'un-checked'.

Percentile Statistics
Each of the percentile statistic boxes are user definable. The default values are 10th percentile,
50th percentile and 90th percentile. Users can enter whatever value they like in the percentile
statistic boxes i.e. P0.5, P90.5 etc. 'Un-checking' the 'Show Percentile 1' box(es) will remove the
percentile from the statistics table, if the table is being shown.
Interactive Histogram Plots

'Interactive' Histograms are launched from within the 'Log Plot' windows of the Interpretation
modules. The user should 'right -click' in a log curve track to activate a drop-down list of available
histograms and crossplots.
The 'ZONES' section of the histogram will only be visible if zone depths are selected in
the 'Histogram Scales' window. The colour of the histogram bar chart for a zone is the
same as the colour of the zone bar on the log plot.
Viewing zones : to change the zones visible in the histogram, click on 'ZONES' on the
right side of the histogram window to activate or de-activate any zone.
Changing parameter values : to change parameters associated with the histogram
(example : Gamma Ray Clean, Gamma Ray Clay), drag the parameter lines, which will

be displayed on the histogram, to their new value. The values displayed are shown at
the bottom of the window along with their cumulative percentile. When the mouse button
is released, the zone will be recalculated automatically with the new parameter values,
and all displays will automatically be updated with the new results of the calculations.
There are now undo/redo buttons in the top left-hand corner of the 'interactive' histograms. These
enable the user to change the parameter lines and then go back to how the parameter lines were
originally set. As the user 'clicks' on the arrows the parameter lines change on the histogram and
also on the interactive plot. The undo/redo buttons only become visible once a parameter line has
been moved. The undo/redo only works if the well/zones are the same as when the first
parameter line move was made.


By 'clicking' on the drop-down icon (between the two arrows) a list of user operations can be seen.
This gives the user the opportunity to select the action that they would like to un-do or re-do. Any
'greyed-out actions relate to a previous set-up of the module. To reset any of these 'greyed-out'
actions the user must reset the histogram back to how it was when the actions were made.
Changing Active Zone : the 'Active zone' is the zone name displayed at the top of the
window, below the histogram title. Any parameter changes that the user applies are
made to this zone. To change the active zone, the user can either :
click on the 'Edit Format' button and change the Active Zone in the Histogram
Scales window, or
click on the 'Active Zone' button on the Histogram main menu bar. In this case,
after clicking the 'Active Zone' menu button, select the new active zone(s) from
the list of zones on the right hand side of the window. Then, to end the selection
process, click again on the 'Active Zone' button.
Selecting multiple active zones : It is possible to have multiple zones active at the
same time. This allows the user to change the same parameter for multiple zones. To do
this, follow the same instructions for 'Changing Active Zone', except this time, select all
the zones wanted as active zones before ending the selection with a second click of the
'Active Zone' button. The 'All Zones' box will allow the selection of all zones. The first
zone selected will have its parameters displayed on the plot. Then, when any
parameters are changed, the same changes will be made to all the active zones. If the

chosen active zones do not have the same starting parameters, a warning message will
be displayed to see if you wish to continue.
Histogram Main Menu items

The Histogram main menu bar comprises of 4 buttons:
'File'
'Edit Format'
'Active Zone'
'Type'
'File' Button:
The 'File' menu allows the user to save and load histogram formats, output the histogram to a
plotter, file or clipboard and to close the histogram window. The Normalize Curves module is also
started from here.
'Program Default Histograms' : Provides a drop-down list which can be populated with
histogram formats. These formats are located in the IP program directory, under the '
\Default Plots' subdirectory. 'Default' histogram formats can be saved to this folder and
will then be available from any IP project the user opens.
'Project / Well Histograms' : At the top of the list will be any histogram format files
saved into the IP Project's 'Root' directory, followed by histogram format files saved into
a wells IP subdirectory.
'Save Format' allows you to save a particular histogram set-up to a disk (.hst) file. The
histogram can be restored by clicking the 'Load Format' button and browsing to the
required format file.
'Print' - will print the current histogram plot directly to a connected printer.
'File' - The histogram graphic display can output to a number of graphics file formats.

The graphic format is selected in the file selection dialog and it depends on the file name
extension. Graphics formats available are : EMF, CGM, GIF, TIFF, PNG, JPEG and
BMP.
'Clipboard' - selecting this option copies the graphic display as an .emf file, to the
WINDOWS clipboard. You can paste the graphic directly into other applications such as
Excel or Powerpoint.
'Clone' - 'clicking' this will create an exact copy of the active histogram.
'Save and View Histogram Report' - this saves the details of the histogram as a text
file, HistoStats.txt, with the statistics table and cumulative curve values. An example of
the text file is shown below:
The 'Edit Format' button is described above, under the headings 'Scales' tab, 'Discriminators'
tab and 'Options' tab
The Active Zone button is described above under the 'Changing Active Zone' header.
Histogram 'Type' Button:

The Histogram 'Type' menu allows the user to choose how a histogram is to look on-screen. The
user 'clicks' on an option in the menu bar to select it. A marker, or 'tick' appears next to the
selected option. The user toggles between display options by 'clicking' on the option in the
drop-down menu.
The default histogram 'Type' is a 'Bar' chart with different wells / zones cumulatively
added to the display. 'Clicking' the 'Type' button on the Histogram main menu bar, and
selecting 'Plot Curves' changes the plot into a series of curves, one curve for each well /
zone,as illustrated below:

The 'Cumulative Curve ?' option allows the user to display a cumulative frequency
curve for the data displayed in the histogram.
The Y axis scale for the histogram can be plotted in a number of ways:
'Plot as Frequency': this will display the actual number of points in each
division.
'Plot as Percent': points are plotted as a percentile of the total number of
points.
If the 'Equal areas under curves ?' option is 'checked' then each histogram curve is
normalized so that the areas under each curve are the same. This option is only valid
when 'Plot Curves' is selected.
The following plot illustrates a 'curve' histogram without the cumulative frequency curve. The
heavy line curve indicates the active zone (1).
'Colour by Zone' : sets the histogram shading and line colour to the active zone colour.
'Colour by Well' : sets the histogram shading and line colour to distinguish between
wells in a multi-well histogram plot.
'Show Statistics Table' : enables the user to hide or show the statistics table. For
multi-wells the statistics table can become very large.
'Show Gaussian Fit' : draws the Gaussian fit curve for the frequency distribution shown
in the histogram. The Gaussian fit curve is drawn as a thin dashed line when drawn with
bars or curves. When 'Plot Bars' or 'Plot Curves' are de-selected the Gaussian lines
appear as bold, solid lines in the plot area.
NOTE: separate Gaussian fit lines for multi-well displays are only available when the 'Plot Curves

' option, not 'Plot Bars', is selected.
'Show Standard Deviation' : switches on the +/- 1 Standard Deviation lines for the
Gaussian Fit line. The standard deviation lines appear as green dashed lines.
'Show Minimum Line' : switches on the minimum line. This appears as a solid blue line
when histogram bars are displayed.
'Show Maximum Line' : switches on the maximum line. This appears as a solid blue
line when histogram bars are displayed
'Show Mean Line' : switches on the mean line for the Gaussian Fit line. This appears as
a solid blue line when histogram bars are displayed .
'Show Mode Line' : switches on the mode line. This appears as a solid blue line when
histogram bars are displayed. NOTE: if there is no single mode value for the data then
the 'Mode' statistics cell will be blank.
'Show Percentile 1 Line' : switches on the first percentile line if it has been 'checked' in
the 'Options' tab.
'Show Percentile 2 Line' : switches on the second percentile line if it has been
'checked' in the 'Options' tab.
'Show Percentile 3 Line' : switches on the third percentile line if it has been 'checked' in
the 'Options' tab.
'Show All Gaussian Lines' : switches on all the Gaussian Lines (Gaussian Fit, Mean
and Standard Deviation) for the histogram on display.
'Show No Gaussian Lines' : switches off any Gaussian lines that are currently
displayed.
'Plot Only Gaussian Lines' : shows only the Gaussian Line fits to the histogram data.
Displays as separate curves when 'Plot Curves' is selected and displays as a single
curve when 'Plot Bars' is selected.

If the 'Plot Curves' option is chosen then all the statistical lines appear as the same colour as that
chosen for the zone colour, as shown in the screenshot below:

This feature is useful for when the user is comparing multi-well curve values.

If the user wants to copy specific values from the statistics table for a histogram then right-mouse
'clicking' on the cell enables the user to see the following two options:
'Copy Selected Cell(s) to Clipboard' - the user can select one cell or a number of cells
(by selecting the first cell and then holding down the left-mouse button and dragging
across to the other cells to be selected, which are highlighted in blue as they are
selected.
'Copy All to Clipboard' - this copies all of the statistics table to the clipboard.

'Print', 'Copy to the Clipboard' and 'Output to File' : These options, described above, under the
'File' button ,are also available by right-mouse-button clicking in the Histogram graphic display.
They allow the histogram to be sent either:
to the currently-selected printer, or
copied to the windows clipboard, or
output to a disk file
The clipboard option is very useful for pasting copies of the histograms into other documents. The
data is copied to the clipboard as a windows enhanced metafile (.emf). This allows the histogram
to be easily re-scaled inside the host document with no loss of picture resolution.
To output histogram statistics for each zone 'check' the 'Show Curve Statistics' box within the '
Options' tab of the 'Edit Format' window.

Multi-well zonal histograms allow the selection of multiple zones from different wells. The following
plot is displaying three zones from 'A2 and one zone for well 'A3'.

The text statistics file from this histogram will look like the following. The cumulative values have
been cut out after the 10th bin to shorten the listing.
HISTOGRAM STATISTICS
Date : 10/31/2008 13:17:54
GR (API)
Minimum Maximum
Mode Mean Std Dev
Well(16): A2 : 24353762 - Zone : (1) RN36 31.125 147.25
34.5 58.003 31.44
Well(16): A2 : 24353762 - Zone : (2) N28 21.156 46.812
28.5 32.084 6.93
Well(16): A2 : 24353762 - Zone : (3) N26 24.796 67.125
31.5 33.742 7.683
Well(24): A3 - Zone : (3) N26 21.531 125.68
25.5 36.376 19.69
All Zones 21.156 147.25
34.5 42.949 24.59
Value Total
GR Cum %
1.5 0.
4.5 0.
7.5 0.
10.5 0.
13.5 0.
16.5 0.
19.5 0.
22.5 3.142
25.5 15.14
28.5 27.14
19.3.1 Curve Normalization

'Normalization' is a mathematical process that adjusts for differences among data from varying
sources, in order to create a common basis for comparison. 'Well Log Normalization : Methods
and Guidelines' - Daniel E. Shier Petrophysics, Vol45, No.3 (2004) is a good reference paper on
the subject of log normalization.
The Histogram module can be used to normalize curves, for example; between log runs within a
single well or between multiple wells in an IP project. To do this:
set up the histogram so that it contains the curve or curves you want to normalize and
include a 'Reference Well' and 'Reference Curve', if appropriate. NOTE: a 'Reference
Curve' is only necessary if the user is going to use the 'Normalize to fixed percentiles'
option. For other normalization types the 'Reference Curve' entry box can be left blank.
The Normalization window is accessed either :
by using the Histogram menu item 'File' 'Normalize Curves' option, or
by right-mouse-button clicking on the histogram graphic display and selecting '
Normalize Curves' from the menu that is launched.

The following window is launched plus the histogram changes from displaying data as bars to
displaying data as curves:

The user selects the 'Curve to normalize' from the drop-down box. This curve will now
be plotted on the histogram with a thick line style, but not as thick as the 'Reference
Curve' line, if one is specified. The 'Result Curve' box will be filled in with the
user-selected curve name, with the characters in the 'Default curve extension' box
appended to it. The user can change the 'Result Curve' name or curve extension as
required.
Where curves are to be normalized to a 'Reference Curve', the 'Reference Curve'
should be selected from the drop-down list box. This curve will now be plotted on the
histogram with a very thick line style to distinguish it from the curve to be normalized.
Normalization Type
Three types of curve normalization operation are enabled in IP :
'1 Point Linear Shift' : This will add / subtract a fixed value to / from the user-selected
curve, as illustrated in the screen capture shown below.

'1 Point Scale Factor' : This will multiply the user-selected curve by a fixed value, as
illustrated below:
'2 Point' : This combines the first two types, allowing a scaling plus a linear shift
operation, as illustrated below:

The 'Normalization Values' text-entry boxes display the available normalization factors. A box
will be 'greyed out' (inactive) depending on the type of normalization the user selects (for
example: if the '1 Point Linear Shift' is selected, then the multiplication box (X) becomes
non-editable and fixed to the value 1.0.
Interval to Normalize
The user can choose to normalize the input curve over the 'Whole Well' or just over the intervals
of the currently 'Selected Zones' on the main histogram window.
if the 'Use Discriminators' 'check-box' is 'checked', then any discriminators that were set up for
the normalization curve on the Histogram 'Discriminators' tab, will be applied to decide if a
particular depth step should be normalized. In this way discriminators can be applied to both the '
Whole Well' and 'Selected Zones' options.

The output 'Result Curve' is created when the 'Keep' or 'Next' buttons is 'clicked'. The output
curve is created using the factors in the 'Normalization Values' box.
Normalizing One / Multiple Curves to a Reference Curve

There are three possible methods for setting the normalization factors for one/many 'Curves to
Normalize' with respect to a 'Reference Curve'.
1. Use one or two fixed percentile value(s) to normalize the selected curve to the reference

curve - 'Normalize to Fixed Percentiles' option.

2. The user interactively selects the amount to shift a curve, on the histogram. This
method does not use any reference curve.
3. The user can manually type in the scale factors in the 'Normalization Values' boxes.
The histogram is updated so the user can see the effect.
1. Normalize to Fixed Percentile Values

To normalize to Fixed Percentiles:
Select the 'Reference Curve' and 'Curve to Normalize'.
Select 'Normalization Type' - '1 Point Linear Shift', '1 Point Scale Factor' or '2 Point
'.
Type in the 'Lower %' and 'Upper %' (percentile values) to normalize the 'Curve to
Normalize' to, into the 'Normalize to fixed Percentiles' text-entry boxes . The 'Upper
%' box is only used for '2 Point' normalization. The histogram plot will be updated to
show the percentile lines for the 'Reference Curve' and the curve being normalized. The
vertical percentile lines are coloured the same as the input curves. The numbers that
are displayed are the actual curve values corresponding to the chosen percentiles.
Click the 'Calculate' button to calculate the normalization factors, which are displayed in
the 'Normalization Values' box, and the normalized curve is added to the histogram as
a dashed line. NOTE: that no output curve has been created at this stage.
The following screen capture shows a '1 Point Linear Shift', 10% (Percentile) normalization. Note
that the actual percentile values are displayed on the histogram.
The following screen capture illustrates a '2 Point' normalization using fixed percentiles (10% and
90%)

The output curve, in this case 'GRn', is created when either of the 'Keep' or 'Next'
buttons are 'clicked'. Clicking the 'Close' button will cancel the normalization operation
without saving a normalized curve.
2. Interactive Normalization
The 'Interactive Normalization' procedure is set up as follows (a 2 Point Normalization is
described) :
Select the 'Normalization Type'.

Click the 'Interactive' button.
On the Histogram Plot - Click at a point on the 'Curve to Normalize'. A vertical line
labelled 'Norm 1' is displayed.
Click at the point on the 'Reference Curve' that you wish to shift line 'Norm 1' to. A
second vertical line labelled 'Ref 1' is displayed.

Click at a second point on the 'Curve to Normalize'. A third vertical line labelled 'Norm 2
' is displayed.
Click at the point on the 'Reference Curve' that you wish to shift line 'Norm 2' to. A
second vertical line labelled 'Ref 2' is displayed.
The following is an example of a '2 Point Shift'.
The vertical reference lines are interactive and can be dragged to a new position. When the
mouse button is released the 'Shifted Curve' and the 'Normalization Values' will automatically
update.
'Keep' / 'Next' / 'All' Buttons
Clicking one of the 'Keep', 'Next' or 'All' buttons, located at the bottom of the Curve Normalization
screen, executes the normalization routine on the selected curves.
'Keep' Button - By clicking the 'Keep' button the 'Result Curve' is created or updated
with the normalized data. If the 'Result Curve' is a new curve then all the data from the
original curve is copied into it before the normalization is performed on the selected
parts.
'Next' Button - The 'Next' button performs the same operation as the 'Keep' button,
except that afterwards it automatically selects the next curve in the list of 'Curves to
Normalize' and will automatically recalculate the percentiles and 'Normalization Values
' for the new curve . This can allow the user to process multiple curves quickly, with
minimal user-input, except for checking that the normalization looks optimal, before
selecting the next curve.
'All' Button - The 'All' button does the same as clicking the 'Next' button until all the
wells in the histogram have been normalized.
Listing
When the user closes the normalization window an optional output listing of all the curves
normalized and their normalization values and intervals can be made. The following is an example
listing.

Curve Normalization
04/09/01 15:25:58
Well : Test Well 1

Input curve : GrC
Result curve : GrCn
Reference curve : SGR (XYZ # 1)
10 Percentile , Reference : 25.0249 Value : 21.0873
GrCn = 0.84827 x GrC + 7.13713
Interval 7614. - 8738.
Well : Test Well 3

Input curve : SGR
Result curve : SGRn
Reference curve : SGR (XYZ # 1)
SGRn = 1.0035 x SGR + 4.56156
Interval 7614. - 8738.

19.4 Crossplots
'Crossplots' can be launched in a number of ways within IP:
by selecting the 'Crossplot' item under the IP 'View' menu.

by clicking the 'speed button' on the main menu bar.
in an interpretation module 'Interactive Log Plot' - by 'right-mouse clicking' in a track
and choosing the appropriate crossplot option from the pop-up menu. In this case the
crossplot will launch with curve default parameter values set and will show interactive
lines and end-points.
by 'clicking & dragging' a crossplot format name from the 'Database Browser' into the
IP workspace.
by 'double-clicking' on a crossplot format name in the 'Database Browser' view.
from a log plot hold the 'X' key down and use the left mouse button to select curves and
zones and then click on the crossplot icon on the main menu bar. See 'Selecting Log
Plot Curves for Output to Crossplot' for more details.
The Crossplot has a 'new look' in that a sunburst background colour has been added. The
sunburst background can be disabled / enabled in 'Tools' 'Options' 'Miscellaneous
Options' 'Enable Background'.
The Crossplot Set-up Screens

The Crossplot display set-up is arranged on 4 tabbed windows. These are:
'Scales' - sets up curves, symbols, depth ranges, crossplot 'Type' ('Normal', 'Frequency
', 'Pressure Gradients', 'Standalone Pickett') and optional overlay lines.
'Discriminators' - sets up the data filtering criteria for user-defined displays.
'Z Axis colours' - sets up the colours when a Z axis curve is selected.
'Options' - allows the user to add crossplot and XY axis titles, switch 'on/off' regression
line equations, plot zone depth and parameter information, set the dimensions
(inches/cm) of the output graphics file.
Section 19.4 Data Viewing : Crossplots

The 'Scales' tab

The 'Scales' tab is where the input curves and their display scales and display symbols are set
up. Crossplot overlay lines for many standard chartbook plots can be added to the display from
this screen. The 'X axis' and 'Y axis curves', and 'Z1' and 'Z2' curves where required, are
selected from the drop-down curve lists. Where curve display parameters have been set up in the
'Manage Curve Headers' module, these default minimum and maximum values will be
automatically set.
NOTE: the user can type in curve 'types', prefixed by either a '@' or '*' character, into the 'Curve
Name' entry boxes in order to pick up curves 'generically'. For example, typing in '@density' will
pick up the 'final' (if flagged), or most recently loaded / updated density curve, '*sonic' will pick up
the default sonic curve, as illustrated below.

The user must 'check' the 'Log' check-box in order to display any selected curve on a logarithmic
scale. The 'Vert. Lines' / 'Hori. Lines' 'Number' text entry box should be set to '10' to display the
correct Logarithmic decade grid lines.
The depth interval for the crossplot can be defined either by selecting:
'Interval Depths' - a top and bottom depth are typed in, or by using
'Zonal Depths' - the user must select from a list of available IP 'Parameter set' and
choose the 'Active Zone'.
The 'Z axes' settings are optional, and if entered, can be turned 'off' from the crossplot window to
allow the zonal display only.
The 'Z1 axis' changes the colour of a point in the crossplot, depending on the value
of the Z1 axis curve.
The 'Z2 axis' changes the symbol of a point in the crossplot, depending on the value
in the Z2 axis curve.
The 'Number' of 'Colours' and 'Symbols', entered into the text boxes in the right hand column of
the screen, sets the number of sub-divisions to use for the 'Z1' and 'Z2' axes. The maximum
number of colours is 13. The maximum number of symbols is 35. An example of a crossplot
incorporating 'Z1' and 'Z2' curves is shown in the figure shown below:

The 'Point Symbol' drop-down box, found below the curve selection panel, will allow the user to
change the style of the symbol displayed on the crossplot. The following styles are available.

If the user elects to create a multi-well crossplot, the additional wells, when selected, will be
displayed, initially, with the same 'Point Symbol' as that for the primary, in-focus well.
The 'Point Size' drop-down box allows the user to change the size of the symbol selected in the '
Point Symbol' drop-down box. The size range is from one to five. If the small points (1 pixel
square) are selected then the 'Point Size' is grayed out.
The 'OverLay Lines' box allows the user to select Service Company chart book 'Neutron /
Density' and 'Neutron / Sonic' porosity lines to display with crossplot data. The user can choose
what kind of overlay, if any, to display on a crossplot. If a required overlay is not available from the
IP program list, it is possible for the user to create / add a new overlay to the program. See '
Creating New Crossplot Overlays' for a full description.
The 'Crossplot Options' Panel

Four check boxes can be used to launch additional Crossplot functionality. These are:
'Expand Array Curves' - If the user selects an array-type curve to display in the
crossplot as an X or Y curve, this check box will be 'activated'. If the box is 'checked', the
array curve will be 'expanded' so that every point in the array curve has a separate point
in the crossplot. If the box is left 'un-checked', then the array curve data will be
averaged to the well depth step increment, and the average array curve value will be
plotted against the other user-selected curve.
'Frequency Crossplot' - The 'Frequency Crossplot' check-box launches an additional
menu that allows the user to display crossplot data as 'Frequency' - type displays; either
as alpha-numeric characters or as colour-coded cells. See 'Frequency Crossplots' for
a full description. The menu is launched when the user clicks the 'OK' button.
'Pressure Gradients' - The 'Pressure Gradients' check-box launches an additional
menu that allows the user to analyse formation test pressures versus depth. See
Pressure Gradient Plots for a full description. The menu is launched when the user
clicks the 'OK' button.
'Standalone Pickett Crossplot' - The 'Standalone Pickett Crossplot' check box
launches the Pickett crossplot which is independent of the 'Porosity and Water
Saturation' module. NOTE: The relevant porosity and resistivity curves, with logarithmic
scales, have to be selected before the crossplot will launch. See 'Standalone Pickett
Plot' for a full description.
Multi-Well Crossplots
To set up a multi-well crossplot 'click' the 'Select Wells and Curves' button and the following
window will be launched, which allows the user to select the additional wells and curves for the
crossplot. The same well and / or curves can be added many times if necessary. NOTE: In the top
row of the grid, the selected well is the current 'active' IP well'. The 'Plot Well' 'tick' is locked in
this row, so the well cannot be 'un-checked'.

The user can add wells to the list, selecting the appropriate curves and symbols, and click 'OK' to
return to the 'Edit Format' screen. On clicking 'OK' to launch the crossplot graphical display, the
crossplot window is opened. To remove the 'active well' from the crossplot, simply deselect it
from the well list, found to the right hand side of the graphical display.
'Well Name' : Enter the well(s) from which to add data to the crossplot. By clicking on
the 'Well Name' column header, all the wells currently loaded in memory will be added to
the column. The user can 'check' and 'uncheck' rows to change the well selection
available for cross plotting. Alternatively, 'click 'in a blank 'Well Name' cell and choose
an in-memory well from the drop-down list.
'Plot Well' : Place a 'tick' in the box to add a well and its data to the crossplot. Clicking in
the column header will toggle between turning 'on' / 'off' all data rows in the grid.
'Data Identification' : This is a user editable text box. Whatever is placed in this is
displayed on the crossplot under the 'Well' list.
'X & Y Axis Curve Names' : Select the curve names for each axis of the crossplot. Z
axis curve names are only necessary if a Z axis is to be displayed. By clicking in the 'X ,
Y, Z axis' column headers the user can refresh the default curve name for each data
line. The default curve name will be the curve name shown in the top data row of the
grid.
'Top Depth Bottom Depth' : The top and bottom depth can be changed to view part
of a well when the 'Interval Depths' option is selected on the Crossplot 'Scales' tab
window.
'Discriminator Set' : By 'clicking ' in this column a drop-down list of all the available
discriminator sets appears. The discriminator sets are set up within the 'Discriminators'
tab. NOTE: to quickly change all the wells 'Discriminator Set', change the top well '
Discriminator Set' and then click on the 'Discriminator Set' header.
'Point Style' : The default symbol will be that of the 'Point Symbol' chosen on the '
Scales' tab. The user can choose the style in which to plot the points for individual wells
by selecting a symbol from the drop-down list box at the end of each row. NOTE: to
quickly change all the wells 'Point Style', change the top well 'Point Style' and then
click on the 'Point Style' header.
'Point Size' : The default size will be that of the 'Point Size' chosen on the 'Scales'
tab.The user can choose the size in which to plot the points for individual wells by
selecting a size from the drop-down list box at the end of each row.
'Point colour' : Choose the colour in which to plot the points from the drop-down box .
This will not be used if the 'Z axis colour' is set to be the zone colour or if the 'Z axis
colour' is set to another curve.
'Advanced Well Select' : launches the 'Select Wells' module in which the user can
create, save and retrieve well lists.

The 'Clear' button will clear all data from the input grid.
The user can toggle between a single well and multi-well crossplot format by 'checking' /
'unchecking' the 'Multi well crossplot' check box on the 'Scales' Tab
The 'Load Format' drop-down button can be used to pick up IP default crossplot formats to help
to speed up the process of setting up crossplots. IP program default crossplot formats are stored
in the IP Program directory, normally C:\Program Files\IntPetro3x, within the 'Default Plots'
subdirectory. They are further subdivided into functional groups. These are 'core', 'fluid', '
lithology', 'parameter' , 'porosity' and 'saturation'.
The user can create their own 'default' crossplot formats and save them into the IP Project
directory or the Well directory. They will then appear as submenu items from the 'Load Format'
drop-down menu. The order of the sub-menu items can be changed, more folders can be created
and the paths to the folders can be defined within the 'Corporate Search Paths' menu item within
'Tools' 'Options'.
The 'Discriminators' tab

The 'Discriminator' tab allows the user to refine what data are displayed in the crossplot. Up to 6
discriminators can be used at once and combined using 'and' or 'or' type logic. Discrimination can
either be between a curve and a value or between two curves. There are a maximum of 10
discriminator sets that can be used. To access the other discriminator sets use the
arrow buttons to move between the sets. These discriminator sets are especially useful for
multi-well crossplots, where different sets can be used on different wells depending on the data.

The 'Z AXES CLIPPING' check boxes at the base of the 'Discriminators' tab allows the user to
decide whether Z axis curve data values that fall outside the defined scales are to be included on
the crossplot. When the boxes are not 'checked' the data that are outside the defined scale range
will be plotted with the colour or symbol of the maximum or minimum value of the scale range.
The 'Display every th point' box allows the user to filter the amount of data being displayed on
the crossplot. Displaying every 1th point displays all the data. Displaying every 5th point will
display the 1st, 6th, 11th, 16th... etc data points. To change the start point of the data to be
filtered alter the top depth to be displayed.
For example, if the user has GR data over a 100 ft interval with a 0.5 ft step and the first data
point is at 100ft and the user wants to display only the 2nd data point i.e the foot values then in
the 'Interval Depths' 'Top' box on the 'Scales' tab the user would enter 100 and in the 'Bottom'
box 200. On the 'Discriminators' tab the user would enter 2 in the 'Display every th point' box.
The 'Z Axis Colours' tab

The 'Z Axis Colours' tab allows user-defined colours to be specified for ranges of values. The Z1
axis curve must be selected on the 'Scales' tab. The user 'checks' the 'Use these Z Axis colours
' box to override the scales defined in the 'Scales' tab. The table is filled out to define the colour
associated with a range of Z axis values. The 'Label' column is optional and is shown alongside
the colour scale, to the right of the crossplot.

'Save Colours to File' : if you 'click' this button the current colour / label set-up scheme
will be saved to an external ascii (.zcl) file.
'Load Colours from File' : 'clicking' this button allows you to restore a colour/ label
scheme that has been saved to an external .zcl file.
'Fill From Z1 Settings' : 'clicking' this button will take the Z1 curve 'Min' and 'Max'
values and divide the colour bar, using the 'Number' of Z1 divisions' from the 'Scales'
tab, to create a colour bar and associated labels, as illustrated below:

The following crossplot is an example of a plot with a user-defined Z1 axis colour scheme which
has been manually entered into the 'Z Axis colours' tab.

The 'Options' tab

The 'Options' tab allows the user to override the program defaults for Plot titles. If the user leaves
the boxes 'blank', the program default titles and axis labelling are applied. If no title is required,
then put a 'space' character (space bar key) in the 'Main Title (Hard Copy)' box.
The 'Hard Copy' options allow the width and height of the plot to be specified. If 'Width' and '
Height' boxes are left 'blank' the plot is automatically scaled to fit to the plot page. Un-checking
the 'Plot Zone, depth and parameter information' check box removes this information from the
plot. Un-checking the 'Plot Active Zone title' check box, removes this label from the plot.

The 'Put regression Line equation on plot' check box at the bottom of the 'Options'
tab, if 'checked' will display a regression line equation on the plot when the 'Regression'
option is run. There is no limit on the number of different equations that can be
displayed. The placement of the equation on the plot can be changed by placing the
mouse cursor on the first letter of the equation line (the cursor changes to a drag cursor)
and then by dragging the line to a different position. The equation will appear on the
hard copy output in approximately the same position as it is displayed on the screen.
The 'Turn off 'Areas' for output to clipboard' check box option, when 'checked' will
remove any user-digitized polygons from the crossplot before the graphic is sent to the
clipboard. This is a useful option for 'cleaning' up a crossplot display before using the
graphic in other applications.
The Crossplot Display Window

The crossplot display window is illustrated in the figure below.

The Crossplot display has a number of menu buttons in the window header. These are:
'File'
'Edit Format'
'Z Axes'
'Active Zone'
'Function'
'Display Navigation buttons'
'Dockable Zone Window'
The 'File' menu

The 'File' menu contains the following options:

'Program Default Crossplots' : Provides a drop-down list of IP default crossplot

formats. These formats are located in the IP program directory, under the '\Default
Plots' subdirectory. The default formats are further classified in terms of their
application. The following screen shot illustrates the 'functional' groupings:
The plot formats are listed in the following order:

At the top of the list are crossplot format files saved into the 'Default Plots' subdirectory, followed
by crossplot formats saved into the 'functional' subdirectories ('core', 'fluid', 'lithology', parameter',
'porosity', 'saturation').
The user can create their own hierarchy of crossplot formats for an IP project by manually
creating a subdirectory in the IP Project directory with the 'NAME'.xpt extension and saving
crossplot format files into it. The default formats are saved as 'generic' formats and work where a
user has set up curve 'Types' correctly.
'Project / Well Crossplots': Provides a drop-down list of user-defined crossplot formats

saved either into the IP Project directory or into individual 'WellXXXX' subdirectories
within the IP project.
'Save Format' and 'Load Format': These options allow the user to save a crossplot
format to a disk file and restore it at a later time. The default location for these files will
be the IP project directory. The 'Load Format' option can also be activated from the '
Edit Format' window, from the 'Load Format' button on the bottom of the crossplot
window.
'Save Format Generic': the user can type in curve 'types', prefixed by either a '@' or '*'
character, into the 'Curve Name' entry boxes in order to pick up curves 'generically'. For
example, typing in '@density' will pick up the 'final' (if flagged), or most recently loaded /
updated density curve, '*sonic' will pick up the default sonic curve.
The 'Print', 'File' and 'Clipboard' options on the menu allow the crossplot to be sent to
the current printer, copied to the WINDOWS clipboard or output to a file. Output to a '
File' can be in a number of graphics formats. The graphic format is selected in the file
selection dialog and it depends on the file name extension. The supported graphic file
formats are : EMF, PNG, CGM, GIF, TIFF, JPEG and BMP. NOTE: to remove the
sunburst background before outputting the crossplot to a graphics file or printer go to '
Tools' 'Options' 'Miscellaneous Options' 'Enable Background' and
'uncheck' the 'Enable Background' option.
The 'Clipboard' option is very useful for pasting a copy of a crossplot into other
documents / spreadsheets / slide presentations. The data is copied to the clipboard as a
WINDOWS enhanced metafile (.EMF). This allows the crossplot to be easily re-scaled
inside the host document with no loss of resolution.
The 'Clone Crossplot' option allows the user to launch a new crossplot window with
exactly the same set up as the current, active crossplot. It is useful for example, for
setting up a number of crossplots using different discriminator parameters, for a
common set of wells. If areas have been selected on the active crossplot then these will
also come through on the cloned crossplot
The 'Edit Format' Menu

The 'Edit Format' button returns the user to the Crossplot set-up windows where curve values,
symbols, overlay files etc.. can be modified.
The 'Z Axes' Menu

The 'Z Axes' Menu allows the user to change the 'sense' of the Z axis colour or symbol on the
crossplot display.

The Z axis on the crossplot is a colour or symbol display that allows the user to apply visual
'discriminators' to the display:
'Zone' : The symbol colour will correspond to the colour of the zone that the point comes
from. This is for plots utilising zone / tops Sets or parameter Sets.
'Curve' : The symbol colour will correspond to a Z axis curve value. In this case the
colour scale and or symbol scale for the Z axis will be displayed to the right hand side of
the crossplot.
'Well' : For multi-well crossplots the symbol colour will be set to the colour in the
multi-well crossplot set-up. In this case, each well name will be highlighted in a separate
colour in the list to the right hand side of the crossplot.
To change the sense of the Z axis, 'click' the 'Z Axes' button and choose the type of Z axis.
The 'Active Zone' Button

The 'Active Zone' functionality is only available when the user selects:
The 'Zonal Depths' option,

a 'Parameter set' from the list of available Sets,
and an 'Active Zone' from the selected Parameter Set.
These are all selected in the 'Scales' tab window. 'Active Zone' allows the user to select one or
more zones, in one or multiple wells to be 'active' at any one time. In the crossplots launched
from an interpretation module interactive log plot, this enables the user to change an interpretation
parameter in multiple zones, potentially in multiple wells in an IP project.
The 'Active Zone' is shown as the zone number ('Z:1, 2, 3...') displayed at the top of the crossplot
display window. This is the zone /zones that any parameter changes are made to, should the user
change any associated interactive lines or end-points. To change the 'Active Zone', the user can
either :
'click' on the 'Edit Format' button and change the active zone in the 'Zonal Depths'

set-up panel, OR
'click' on the 'Active Zone' button. Select the new active zone / zones by clicking in the
required 'cells' in the list of zones on the right hand side of the window. Then, to end the
selection process, click on the 'Active Zone' button again.
'Double clicking' in a zone box will automatically select that particular zone in all the
selected wells. 'Double clicking' the zone box again will deselect the active zone
selection.
Data point symbols will either display in the colour of the appropriate zone as shown in the right
hand part of the display window, or will be dependent on the Z axis scales selected by the user.
The 'All Zones' box , found below the Well Name, to the right hand side of the crossplot, is a
shortcut to select all the zones in a well to be plotted on the crossplot. The first zone selected will
have its parameters displayed on the plot. Then, when any parameters are changed, the same
changes will be made to all the active zones. If the chosen active zones do not have the same
starting parameters, a warning message will be displayed to ask if you wish to continue.
The 'Function' Menu

The 'Function' menu allows the user :

to set up and manage 'Areas' for use in regression analysis, or for creating 'Flag' type
curves. See the 'Areas' topic for a full description.
to set up, manage and display 'Regression lines' for selected areas of the crossplot.
See the 'Regression' section for a full description.
to activate the 'Pressure Gradient' menu,
to activate the 'Frequency Plot' menu,
to create and display 'User-defined lines' on a crossplot window. See 'User-Defined
Lines' for a full description.
to ensure that any overlay lines are plotted on top of the data rather than being plotted
behind, and hence hidden by, the data points.
To reset the crossplot axes ('Reset Axes') to their original set-up if the user has zoomed
in / out of the crossplot window.
The Display Navigation Buttons

Three buttons and their associated menus provide the user with the ability to 'zoom in', 'zoom out'
and to 'rubber-band'-select a part of a crossplot to view. These are located in the Display window
above the crossplot graphic.

Drop-down menus, activated by clicking the arrows to the right hand side of the navigation buttons
sets the 'Mode' of the button. The user can 'Zoom In' or 'Zoom Out' on:
'Both axes' - expands / shrinks the display in both x and y directions simultaneously.
'X axis only' - expands / shrinks the display in the x axis direction only.
'Y axis only' - expands / shrinks the display in the y axis direction only.
'Reset Axes' - restores a display to the scales set on the 'Edit Format' screen.
The 'Area Zoom' allows the user to quickly focus on a particular area of a crossplot by clicking on
the icon in order to activate the 'mode' and then by clicking the left hand mouse button and
dragging the mouse cursor in the graphic window over the area of interest.
The user can also use the zoom functionality in the graphic window by using the following keys
and the mouse wheel:
'Zoom X Axis only' - hold down 'x' character key and scroll the mouse wheel in / out.
'Zoom Y Axis only' - hold down 'y' character key and scroll the mouse wheel in / out.
'Zoom Both Axes' - hold down 'Ctrl' key and scroll the mouse wheel in / out.
By holding down the mouse wheel in the graphic window and dragging the mouse, the
user can move / 'pan through' the data in any direction.
Interactive Crossplots
These are associated with a number of IP interpretation modules. They allow the user to
graphically change interpretation parameters for one or more wells, in one or multiple zones, by
manipulating interactive lines and mineral end-points in crossplot displays.
'Changing parameter values' : to change a parameter associated with the crossplot. For
example : Density/Neutron Crossplot launched from the 'Clay Volume' module Interactive Log
Plot, where Density and Neutron clay indicators have been 'checked',
'Click and drag' the parameter point, which is marked by a heavy red 'Square' symbol, to
its new value. The associated 'Neutron Clay' / 'Density Clay' parameters will change as
the line or end-point is moved.
Once the parameter lines have been moved undo/redo arrows appear in the top left-hand side of

the crossplot. These allow the user to 'scroll' through changes made to the parameter lines during
an interpretation session. They only allow the user to see historical changes if the wells and zones
are kept the same during the session.
If the drop-down icon (between the two arrows) is 'clicked' then a list of all the possible undo's /
redo's is displayed. This facilitates the selection of which undo / redo the user wants to perform. If
the user changes zones or wells then the drop-down list will contain 'greyed-out' lines as these
actions weren't performed on the changed set-up.


On some crossplots it is possible to move the whole line. If the mouse cursor changes to a '+'
when it is over an interactive line, then the line can be moved. The parameter values of the
end-points are shown at the bottom of the window. When the mouse button is released after
moving a line/point, the active zone(s) will be re-calculated automatically with the new parameter
values, and all displays will automatically be updated with the new results of the calculations.
Multi-well zonal crossplots allow the selection of multiple zones from different wells. The following
plot is displaying three zones from 'Test Well 1' and two zones from 'Test Well 2'. The active zone
are zones 1, 2 and 3 from 'Test Well 1' (W:1 Z:1, 2, 3) and zones 1 and 2 from 'Test Well 2' (W:2
Z:1, 2). If the parameters are interactively changed, then all active wells will be re-calculated.

Multi-well interval crossplots allow the user to select individual wells by 'clicking' on the 'Well
Name' to the right of the crossplot. The following crossplot is displaying data from intervals
defined on the crossplot 'Select Well' window for two wells. The Z axis colour and plot symbol
corresponds to the well that the data comes from, set up in the multi-well crossplot set up. This is
the same data as in the crossplot shown above, but this time the 'Z Axes' is set with the 'Well /
Curve Set' selected. So the data points are coloured according to the well colour not the zone
colour as previously.

Dockable Zone Window

The 'Zone/Well List' of the crossplot window can be moved off the crossplot in order to create
more space within the crossplot window. 'Click' and 'drag' on the 'perforations' at the top of the '
Zone/Well List' to move to a more convenient place. Once moved off the crossplot window the
'Zone/Well List' can be resized to suit.

To restore the 'un-docked' 'Zone/Well List' back onto the crossplot window, 'click' on the in
the top left corner of the 'Zone/Well List'.

19.4.1 Areas
'Areas' are created interactively, as graphical discriminators, in the crossplot window to generate
data 'sub-sets' in the display. 'Areas' are used in conjunction with the 'Regression' functionality
for crossplot data analysis.
Selecting Areas
Areas can be selected on the crossplot by clicking the 'Function' button and then 'Create Area'.
They can also be created by 'right clicking' the mouse on the crossplot graphic and choosing '
Create Area' from the pop-up menu. The cursor will turn to a cross and the area can be 'digitized'
by clicking on the crossplot to define the corners of the Area. To end and close the polygon, click
with the right mouse button or press any keyboard key. The user must select at least three points
to create an area. Up to 10 areas can be defined per crossplot. Once areas have been defined,
the user can edit them in the following ways:
The corners of an area can be moved by clicking on a corner and dragging the point to a
new location.
To delete an area - put the mouse on a corner of the area, the cursor will change to a
cross, press the Delete key on the keyboard and the area will be removed.
To delete all areas use the menu function 'Delete all Areas'.
In the following crossplot 4 areas have been defined.

Creating Curves from Areas

To create a 'Flag' curve from user-defined 'Areas', select the 'Create curve from Areas' item on
the 'Function' menu or from the pop-up menu. The following window will be displayed:

The user can select the flag value assigned to each area. The defaults are '1' for area
'1', '2' for area '2' etc. If a crossplot data point falls within an area the Flag value for that
area will be written at the appropriate depth in the output curve. If areas overlap, then
points that fall in several areas will be assigned the value of the highest area number.
For example if a point falls in areas 2 and 4 then the value assigned for that point will be
the value for area 4.
The user can type in the name of the output curve (default - 'XpFlag') into which the
results are written.
If the 'Add Results' button is 'checked' then only those depth levels that fall within the
areas will have their values changed.
The 'Delete before Write' button allows the output curve to be set to 'Null' values before
the program starts adding the data from the areas.
The 'Add To Plot' check-box, when 'checked, will automatically put the Flag curve in the
depth track of the active log plot of the in-memory well. The colours in the flag curve will
correspond to the colours of the areas.
If the crossplot is a multi-well crossplot then the 'Create curve for:' panel will be 'active'. This
allows the user to decide whether to create a Flag curve for all wells in the plot or just the current
well (the current well is the well name that is shown at the top of the crossplot window).
When the 'Run' button is 'clicked' the Flag curve will be written and the log plots updated. If the '
Create Flag Curve' window is left open and the 'Auto Update' check box is 'checked', any
changes made to the areas on the crossplot will automatically run the 'Create Flag Curve'
module, updating the current flag curve and then refreshing the active log plot. This means that
any changes to the areas are instantly reflected in the log plot display.

19.4.2 Regression
The 'Regression' function can be used to calculate a regression line using the data in the
crosslot.. If 'Areas' are defined, then all the points falling within each coloured polygon are used in
the regression analysis. If the 'Use All Points on Xplot' box is 'checked' then the areas are
ignored and all the data on the crossplot are used in the regression analysis.
When the 'Regression' function is 'clicked', the 'Regression Analysis' window will be launched.
This is illustrated below:
From within the 'Regression Analysis' window it is possible to apply regression functions etc for
one regression line. However, if the user wants to apply regression analysis on a number of areas
within a crossplot then there is an 'Advanced' button that brings up another window where
multiple regression functions can be manipulated.
The user can choose the type of regression function to be applied to the crossplot data ('Linear', '
Polynomial', 'Exponential', 'Power'). Multiple regression types can be selected and displayed
simultaneously.
For the Linear regression options of 'Y=f(x)' and 'X=f(y)', the user can optionally enter a point, in
the 'Force fit' text-boxes, through which the regression line will be forced. The regression lines
are displayed on the crossplot.
Ordinary least-squares (OLS) regression minimises the sum of the squares of the 'error' distances
from the line to the data points.

For Y=f(x), the squared Y-error distances are minimised.

For X=f(y), the squared X-errors are minimised. For example, if porosity is being predicted from
bulk density, porosity is positioned as the Y variable and the Y=f(x) prediction equation is used. In
this way, 'central' values of porosity are predicted at each bulk density value.
Outlying data points should be edited from the dataset before carrying-out OLS regression. The
crossplot must be inspected to determine whether a linear or a 'curved' relationship is appropriate
for the data being analysed. Curved relationships are analysed either by using the non-linear
regression tools ('Polynomial', 'Power', 'Exponential' options) or by transforming X and/or Y
data before regressing using power, logarithm, exponential or other functions.
The 'RMA' (reduced major axis) line-fit gives an equation that is midway between the two OLS
methods. Normally, 'RMA' is not used to predict Y from the usual 'error-included' measured X
data. Normally, 'RMA' estimates the underlying theoretical relationship between the 'error-free'
counterparts of X and Y, and presumes that X and Y each have the same error fraction. When
plot scatter is caused by difficult core depth shifting (i.e. poor X-Y pairing), RMA provides a
plausible line-fit when standard regression methods may not. RMA always reproduces the
standard deviation of Y, from any X variable. Predicted porosity highs and lows will be located at
different depths to the calibration data but the predicted standard deviation will be the same.
Y=f(x) OLS predictions underestimate the standard deviation of porosity when depth shifting is the
primary cause of the scatter.
The 'Robust fit' minimises the sum of the errors in the Y direction. Instead of minimising the
squared distances, the 'Robust fit' minimises the Y error distances (not squared). The variable
being predicted must be selected as Y. Compared to OLS, the method reduces the effect of
outliers. The robust method used in IP is free to calculate the optimum gradient and intercept, and
the line is not forced to pass through the mean, or the median, of the calibration data.
All regressions produce a R2 (multiple R2) which is calculated as :
Where
Yi : Y value at the i'th sample
Ymean : Mean value of all Y samples
: Y result at the i'th sample calculated from the regression equation.
By clicking 'View Report' the user will be asked to type a file name into which to save the
regression results. The regression results report (example below) will be displayed in the
WINDOWS NotePad. The user can cut and paste the equation directly from NotePad straight into
the 'User Formula' module.
Regression analysis example report
REGRESSION PARAMETERS
Date : 02/12/02 14:20:11
Well Name X Curve Y Curve Top Bottom

Test well number 1 RHOB PHICORE 7800.00 8300.00

Test well number 1 RHOB PHICORE 8300.00 8730.00
Discriminators
Data Points used :339
Y function of X linear regression

PHICORE = 1.015328643 - 0.343891436 * RHOB
R2 = 0.483892
X function of Y linear regression
PHICORE = 1.876137408 - 0.710678635 * RHOB
R2 = 0.483892
Advanced Options
The 'Advanced' features window of the crossplot has similar features as to the 'Pressure Plot'
set-up window.

Multiple regression lines can be selected with different areas to be included or excluded
from the regression. The regression line and equation can be selected to be displayed
by using the check boxes 'Display Line' and 'Display Eqn'.
Clicking in the 'Line Style' box opens up the following options:
The 'Width' of the line can be altered by either using the up/down arrows or typing a
number (between 1 and 10) into the box.
'Regression Type' is a drop down menu allowing the user to select between 'Linear', '
RMA', 'Robust', 'Poly 2nd', 'Poly 3rd', 'Poly 4th', 'Poly 5th', 'Exponential' and 'Power'
functions.
If the 'Inverse' box is ticked then the regression equation is inverted.
The 'Include / Exclude' box allows the user to specify which areas are to be included
within the regression analysis. This is used in conjunction with the 'Areas to select data
from' boxes.
'Areas to select data from' boxes are coloured according to the colour of the created
area on the crossplot. The areas can be selected by 'clicking' on the box. If no boxes are
ticked then the regression will be applied to all the data points.
'Force Fit' applies to the 'Linear' regression options of 'Y=f(x)' and 'X=f(y)', the user can
optionally enter a point, in the 'Force fit' text-boxes, through which the regression line
will be forced.
The 'Show Key' brings up a 'Crossplot Key' window in which each regression line is listed with
the line type and colour plus the regression equation. This could then be cut and pasted into a
report.

The 'Use mean point of area' if ticked will calculate the mean value of a selected area and then
uses this mean point in the regression calculation. The user can select between 'Arithmetic
Mean', 'Geometric Mean' and 'Harmonic Mean' for both the 'X' and 'Y' coordinates.
The 'Arithmetic Mean' is the sum of all the points divided by the number of points.
Using the arithmetic mean can lead to data skewing.
The 'Geometric Mean' is the nth root of the product of all members of the data set.
The 'Harmonic Mean' is the number of data set points divided by the sum of the
reciprocals of the points. The harmonic mean in certain situations, provides the correct
notion of 'average'.

It is possible to redefine the selected area by 'dragging' one of the area corner points to a new
position. 'Click' on 'Apply' and this then recalculates the area mean point and the new regression

line.
The 'View Report' button allows the user to save the regression details to a text file (default name
is Regression.txt) in the well sub directory folder. This can then be pasted into a report.
To go back to the main 'Regression Analysis' window from the 'Advanced' window 'click' on the
button again.
Viewing Regression Line Equations

The display of regression line equations on the crossplot can be turned 'off' and 'on' from either:
the 'Options' tab on the crossplot format window - 'Put regression line equation on plot
', or
the 'Display Equation Labels' 'check' box on the 'Regression Analysis' set-up window.
The placement of the equation line on the plot can be changed by placing the cursor on the first
letter of the equation line text (the cursor changes to a drag cursor) and dragging the text to a
different position. The equation line will appear on the hard copy output in approximately the same
position as it is displayed on the screen. The colour of the regression lines on the crossplot can be
changed by clicking on the colour button to the right of each regression type. The user can then
select the colour of the line from the colour menu box.
More information about use of regression analysis in Petrophysics can be found in "Statistical
Regression Line-Fitting in the Oil and Gas Industry" by Richard (Dick) Woodhouse, 2002,
published as both e-book and hardcopy by PennWell Publishers.

19.4.3 User-Defined Line
To create a user-defined line on the crossplot, select the 'Create User Line' menu option from the
'Function' menu. Within the 'User Line' module the following functions are available by clicking
on the icons:
- Loads a user line formula from disc, if one has been saved.
- Saves a user line formula to disc. Default file extension is '.XUL' and the default file
location is the project directory.
- Deletes the currently selected user line formula.
- Edit the currently selected user line. NOTE: If the line was created using the mouse
then a message will appear telling the user to edit the line by dragging the ends of the line.
- Sets the style, colour and thickness of the user defined line from the 'Choose Line
Style' module.

- Copies the selected user line formula to the clipboard. From the clipboard the user
can paste the equation into a document or directly into an IP User Formula.
- Removes the user line label from the crossplot window.
- Creates a user defined line by the user entering a formula into the text box. NOTE: in
order for the equation to be calculated, it must be written with the following syntax:
The equation should be typed in, excluding the 'Result' term - 'Y', for 'Y as a
function of X', or 'X' for 'X as a function of Y'. For example 'Y=2.5*X - 3.5' would
be written '2.5*X - 3.5'. NOTE: use 'X' and 'Y', not the curve names used to set up
the crossplot.
- Creates a user line by using the mouse. With a left mouse 'click' on the crossplot,
drag the mouse cursor to define a straight line in the graphical display. The line can be
interactively moved once displayed. The User line equation will update as the end-points
are moved.
The equation for the line will be automatically displayed on the plot. To quickly clear all the user
defined lines off a crossplot then select 'Function' 'Delete All User Lines'.
The position of the equation text on the crossplot can be moved by 'hovering' the mouse cursor
over the character at the beginning of the text. The cursor should change to this . The text can
now be dragged to a new position.
There is no limit to the number of user lines that can be created in any one session. Each time a
line is created it is added to the system memory. It is possible to recall these lines using the
'drop-down' button.

It is possible to close down the 'User Line' module and then re-open it without losing the
un-saved-to-disc user-defined lines. However, if the crossplot module is closed down then the
un-saved user-defined lines will be cleared out of system memory and won't be available for
subsequent recall.
19.4.4 3D Crossplots
Crossplots with a 'Z axis' defined in the set up can be displayed in three dimensions by checking
the '3D' box on the crossplot header.
The following screenshot is an example of a 3D Crossplot.
3D crossplots can be rotated left / right / up / down using the scroll bars on the bottom left hand
corner of the crossplot display. Rotating the plot can also be performed by left mouse clicking on
the plot and holding and then moving the mouse up and down or left and right. The crossplot will
rotate with the mouse movements.

The X and Y axes scales can be moved by right mouse clicking and holding and then moving the
mouse up and down or left and right. The data will move across the axes with the mouse
movements. However this does not add data to the crossplot that might have got clipped due to
the original scale values. It is best to go back into 'Edit Format' and change the original 'Scale'
values.
The crossplot can be zoomed by using the Zoom scroll bar.

The Z-axis 'depth' of any overlay lines can be changed by using the 'Overlay Lines' scroll bar in
the bottom left-hand corner of the display.
No interactive functions are available for the 3D crossplot. The user should return to 2D mode, by
'un-checking' the '3D' check box to return to 'interactive' mode.
19.4.5 Frequency Crossplots

The 'Frequency Crossplot' functionality enables the user to display curve data as Frequency
distributions, either as alphanumeric characters or as colour coded cells, as illustrated below.
The user selects the Frequency Crossplot options either:

by 'checking' the 'Frequency Crossplot' box on the 'Scales' window, or
by selecting the 'Frequency Crossplot' option from the pop-up menu, which is activated
by 'right-mouse button clicking' in the crossplot graphical window.

The 'Frequency Crossplot' menu 'panel' is described below:
The 'Number of Columns and Rows' sets up the dimensions of the Frequency 'bins', in
terms of the input curve values, into which the crossplot data will be divided.
The 'Drop Value' is the 'Minimum Frequency' value that will be displayed on the
Frequency plot. For example, set to '1' means that every 'bin' containing 1 or more
values will be displayed. Applying a higher 'Drop value' removes from the display those
data bins that contain only a few points. A drop value of 4, for example, will display only
those bins containing 4 or more data points.
The 'Display as Symbols' radio button, when selected, will place an alphanumeric
character in each 'bin' where numbers 1 to 9 are assigned to bins which contain between
1 and 9 data points. Alphabetic characters ('a' to 'z') are assigned to bins which contain

data frequencies of between 10 and 35 points. Bins with data frequencies of greater
than 35 are displayed as a '#' symbol.
The 'Frequency' selector allows the user to further modify the data display. The entered
number is used to divide the bin frequency values by, to allow the visualization and
discrimination of bins containing high frequencies. A frequency of 2 will divide all bin
frequencies by '2' so that bins containing up to 70 values will have an alphanumeric
character assigned (70 divided by 2 = 35,symbol 'z'), rather than the '#' symbol. For
multi-well crossplots, where there may be many hundreds of points in each bin, setting '
Frequency' to a value of 50, for example, would allow visual discrimination of frequency
bins containing up to 1750 points.
The 'Display as Colour Cells' radio button, when selected, sets up a colour scale for
the frequency bins in the crossplot. The user can assign a spectrum ('Use Spectrum')
or colour palette ('Use Palette') and use the 'slider bar' to optimise the number of
colours used to visualize the frequency data. An example is shown in the screen
capture at the top of this section.
NOTE: if a crossplot data point lies on the border line of a data 'bin' then the point is included in
the 'Frequency' count for the next highest data bin, because the data point value is counted as ">
or equal to" the bin 'low value'.
To switch back to normal crossplot viewing mode, close down the 'Frequency Crossplot' menu
and right click on the crossplot and 'un-tick' the 'Frequency Crossplot' from the pop-up menu.
19.4.6 Pressure Gradient Plots

The 'Pressure Gradient Plot' is set up so that the user can tailor a standard crossplot window to
display Wireline Formation Tester pressure data and apply 'reference lines' to compare pressures
versus depth , and hence fluid gradients and fluid contacts.
The user should select the pressure data (units should be 'psi' or 'bar') as the 'X Axis' and
DEPTH, TVD or TVDSS curves as the 'depth' curve (depending on well deviation and TVD
preference - KB or MSL) as the 'Y Axis'.

To activate additional functionality associated with the pressure versus depth plot, 'check' the '
Pressure Gradients' check box in the 'Crossplot Options' panel of the 'Scales' tab window. Set
up 'Zonal Depths' and check the 'Multi well crossplot' option, if required. Click 'OK' to display
the crossplot.
The conventional crossplot display will be initiated PLUS a second 'Pressure Plot' menu window,
as shown in the diagram below. There are now three tabs;
'Regression Lines' tab
'Reference Lines' tab
'Line Intersections' tab

'Regression Lines' tab

Pressure points can be analysed by using the crossplot 'Areas' functionality. Additional control
over which points are displayed can be implemented by applying a 'Z Axis' curve or by the use of
'Discriminators' which could, for example, be set to exclude low permeability points associated
with the pressure dataset / using, for example, 'mobility' as a discriminator. Use the 'Pressure
Plot' module to set up regression calculations and associate 'Areas' with 'Regression Line'
colours.

The user 'checks' the 'Display Line' check box to choose the regression lines to plot in the
crossplot window.
The user 'checks' the 'Display Eqn' check box to display the regression / gradient line equation in
the crossplot window. The display equation can be moved around the crossplot window by
'hovering' the mouse cursor over the display equation until the mouse cursor changes from an
arrow to an arrow plus white rectangle. Hold down the left mouse button and drag the display
equation to a new position and release the left mouse button.

The 'Line Style' for the regression (gradient) line is selected by 'clicking' the icon in the 'Line
Style' column. This launches the 'Choose Line Style' dialog box as illustrated above.
'Click' in the coloured cells in the 'Areas to select Data from' columns to link the 'Areas' and '
Regression lines'. The user can then either :
'check' the 'Fixed Grad' button and type in a pressure 'Gradient' value, or
Click the 'Calculate' icon to allow IP to calculate the regression line for the points in the
chosen area.
The user has the option to select from a number of 'Regression Types' from the drop-down list.
These are:
x = f (y)
x = RMA (y)
x = Robust fit (y) (the default type)
y = f (x)
Up to 6 regression lines can be calculated from digitized 'Areas'.
'Reference Lines' tab

The 'Reference Lines' tab provides the user with the facility to add further gradient lines to the
display. These could, for example, be used to display offset well pressure gradients and fluid
contact depths for comparison with the well data being analysed.


'Reference Lines' are defined by a gradient, in appropriate units, and an (x,y)

co-ordinate through which the line passes. Line style can be selected from the 'Choose
Line Style' window.
'View Report' allows the user to save the Pressure gradient interpretation data. A
pop-up window prompts the user for a file name for the .txt file which will be saved to the
external wellXXX directory. The report for the crossplot illustrated above is listed below:
PRESSURE PLOT PARAMETERS

Date : 10/03/2007 15:53:01
Well Name X Curve Y Curve Top Bottom

Well Y Pressure TVDSS 749.20 2601.01
Discriminators
REGRESSION LINES
REGRESSION LINE EQUATIONS

Line 1: Pressure = Depth * 1.73321700 + 67.95177000
R = 0.98559190, Number of points used = 82
Line 2: Pressure = Depth * 6.00012000 - 5685.17000000



REFERENCE LINES
REFERENCE LINE EQUATIONS

Depth = Pressure * 0.45660930 - 1101.18200000
Line 2: Pressure = Depth * -1.90615800 + 8335.90300000

Depth = Pressure * -0.52461530 + 4373.14300000

Depth = Pressure * 5.00000000 - 23800.89000000
The pressure versus depth crossplot format can be saved for future use by selecting the 'Save
Format' option from the 'File' menu.
'Line Intersections' tab

The 'Line Intersections' tab enables the user to add line intersection points to regression lines
and reference lines. The intersection points can be defined by selecting a line and then using the
drop-down boxes in the 'Clip Left To' and 'Clip Right To' to select available boundary lines. Or by
using these icons to select the clip point with the mouse cursor
- 'click' on this icon and then use mouse cursor to select left intersection point. This
will automatically fill in the 'Clip Left To' box with a
value.
- 'click' on this icon and then use mouse cursor to select right intersection point.
This will automatically fill in the 'Clip Right To' box with a
value.
'Show Label' - 'checking' the appropriate row turns 'on' /'off' the regression line
intersection point label which appears on the crossplot as a Pressure / depth pair of
coordinates in parentheses.


Below is an example of how a Pressure plot can be 'tidied' up using the 'Line Intersections' tab.


Printing
Crossplots can be sent to the clipboard for pasting into other applications for annotation. If the
user wishes not to have 'areas' displayed on the output image there is an option, found by clicking
the 'Edit Format' button, on the 'Options' tab, to 'Turn off 'Areas' for output to clipboard'.
This should be 'checked'.
In common with other crossplot print options, the user can save the plot as an image (.emf) or
print directly to the IP default printer.
19.4.7 Standalone Pickett Plot

The 'Standalone Pickett Plot' can be accessed from the main crossplot window. The necessary
Pickett Plot curves are required to be entered into the 'X' and 'Y' axes, both on log scales. NOTE:
whatever porosity curve is used it MUST have its 'Curve Type' set to Porosity. Or use 'Load
Format' 'Project Defaults Crossplot' 'saturation' 'Pickett' to chose the default Pickett
plot.

'Clicking' 'Apply' causes the following screen to be displayed. Here it is possible to set up the
lines of equal Water Saturation and enter values of Rw, m, n, and a.
The Rw values calculated and displayed in the 'Sw Pickett plot lines' screen or in the task bar of

the crossplot window are at the formation temperature. NOTE: this temperature is the average
formation temperature in the zone being worked on and is from the inputted temperature curve.
The values of Rw, m, n and a are not fed through to any other IP module from the 'Standalone
Pickett Plot'.
The 'Sw Pickett plot lines' screen can be accessed by left mouse button clicking on the crossplot
to bring up the crossplot menu and then selecting 'Sw lines for Pickett plot'.

Values of Rw, m, n and a can be manually entered into the 'Sw Pickett plot lines' screen and
the lines on the crossplot will adjust accordingly. The undo/redo functionality becomes available
once the Sw parameter lines are adjusted. This allows the user to easily restore the pickett plot to
its original state.
19.4.8 Creating Crossplot Overlay Files
Creating New Crossplot Overlays

1. Create a new Density / Neutron overlay file using the following format as a template. Save the
file to the IP program directory with the file extension '.ovl '.
The following is an example of a neutron density overlay file with a single Limestone ('LS') Line.
Lines that begin with a '$' are 'comment lines'. The X and Y values are the coordinates of the
overlay line values for 0, 5, 10, 15 pu etc... on the Neutron vs. Density crossplot.
$ Schlumberger NPHI RHOB overlay Rhofluid = 1.0 (Cp-1c 1989)

$ Tool Types
Neutron Density
$ Lithology Name
LS
$Colour of Line
DkGrey
$Data : format X, Y, Type where type is '-', Value or 'Tick'
0.0 2.71 0
0.05 2.625 Tick
0.10 2.539 10
0.15 2.454 Tick
0.20 2.368 20
0.25 2.283 Tick
0.30 2.197 30
0.35 2.112 Tick

0.40 2.026 40
0.45 1.941 Tick
$Data Labels
$ Format X, Y, Rotation, Colour, Label Text
0 0 0 Green (SWS) Schlumberger Density Neutron (NPHI) Overlay RhoFluid =1.0
The first data line gives the 'Tool Types'. In this case 'Neutron' and 'Density'. This information is
used for automatically picking up the correct overlay files.
The second data line is the 'Label' of the line. This will be displayed as a label on the plot, at the
bottom end of the line. If there are more than one overlay line, the line names must be separated
by spaces. The number of names indicates the number of lines in the overlay. In the above case,
there is one name 'LS', therefore only one line in the overlay.
The third data line is the 'Colour of Line'. For a list of acceptable colour names, see the file
CparmDef.par'in the program directory. The file can be opened and edited by selecting the menu
item 'Tools -> Edit Curve System defaults'.
A maximum of thirty (30) lines can be defined in an overlay file.
The data (calibration points) follow the 'Colour of line' entry, and each data point is described by
the format ;'X value', 'Y value', 'Type' for the first overlay line, followed by the same format for
any other lines. The 'X Value' and 'Y Value' inputs are self explanatory. The 'Type' tells the
program whether to put a tick (enter 'Tick') by this point on the line, a 'Value' (enter the value, for
example '10') or nothing (enter '-').
NOTE: If there are multiple overlay lines in the file it is not necessary to have the same number of
points to define each line. In the example shown below, the SS and DOL line have 11 points while
the LS line is defined by 10 points. However, It is necessary to fill out lines with no data with
hyphens '-' for X and Y values so that there is always the same number of parameters per line.
The maximum number of points per overlay line is 20.
Data labels can be added to the overlay. For example, one could add the crossplot definition, as
shown in the example below and lithology points to a cross plot. Up to 30 data labels can be
added. The format of the data label lines is 'X position', 'Y position', 'Text rotation' (0 degrees is
a normal horizontal line), 'text colour' and the 'label text'. If the X and Y values in the first data
label line are set to 0, the line will be plotted as a title label at the bottom left hand corner of the
plot. Data labels start after the text line '$ Data Labels'.
NOTE: the line '$ Data Labels' is required in the file in order to make the overlay file work
correctly.

2. Add the new overlay file name to the overlay list by editing the Overlay_Files.ovl file in the IP
program directory. The file has comment lines that describe its format.
The overlay lines are normally displayed underneath the data but can optionally be displayed on
top. 'Check' the option under the 'Function' menu to show 'Overlays on top of data' or
right-mouse click on the Crossplot graphic window to launch the same menu.

19.5 Multi-curve Crossplot

The 'Multi-curve Crossplot' can be used for making up crossplots using a selected number of
curves and quality checking the data . It can be performed on one well or many wells (upto 500).
There is limited functionality within the module but it is hoped to expand upon this in later IP
releases.
The 'Multi-curve Crossplot' can be accessed from 'View' 'Multi-curve Crossplot'. Almost the
same crossplot functionality can be found within the 'Cluster Analysis' module.
The 'Multi-curve Crossplot' module is arranged on three tabs.

'Input'
'Discriminators'
'Crossplots'
'Input' tab
The user can select upto 500 wells and 8 curves plus a Z-axis curve to crossplot in this tab. The
cells can be populated in a number of ways. One of the quickest is shown below:
Section 19.5 Data Viewing : Multi-curve Crossplot

The user can set up their 'Curve Alias' table so that the correct curve is selected for each well.
Alternatively, they can use the drop-down curve list and select curves manually.
'Use Curve' - 'check' this column to select a curve. 'Clicking' on the arrow will
select/deselect all the curves.
'Default Name' column - Each 'Default Name' is automatically filled in the first time a
curve is selected for that row, and can be changed manually thereafter. The values in

the 'Default Name' cells are used as the default curve names when a new well is added
to the grid. When a new well is added, if the well contains curves that match the default
names then those curves are pre-selected for the user. This can be over-ridden if the
user has 'Curve Aliasing Mode' set to 'Manual' or 'Automatic'.
'Log' column - if 'checked' will take the base 10 logarithm of the curve before cross
plotting.
'Well' column - in the top ('Well Name') row of the grid, the user selects the wells for
cross plotting.
'Input Curve' rows - contain the names of the curves that the user wishes to use for
cross plotting. The 'Input Curve' types should be the consistent for all wells. For
example, all gamma ray logs should be in the same row of the grid, all density log curves
should be in the same row of the grid. NOTE: Curve names can vary from well to well.
You can use up to eight input curves per well. 'Clicking' on the arrow next to the 'Input
Curve' after first entering a 'Default Name' and 'checking' the 'Use
Curve' column will auto-populate all the selected wells in that row with the curve name
associated with the 'Default Name' curve type.
'Use Well for Xplot Build' - if this is 'checked' then the data from that well will be used
in the cross plot.
'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' these rows are used to specify the depth interval
over which to cross plot in the subject well. The default depths are the log minimum and
maximum depths in the well. These depths can be changed with the 'Get Depths from
Zones' button, or by manually entering new values.
'Show Plot' - this button opens a log plot window for the appropriate well which shows
all of the input curves, each in a separate track.
'Discriminator Crv1' and 'Discriminator Crv2' rows are used to input 'discriminator
curves', which can be used to further constrain the data displayed and also to restrict
which depth intervals to run the model over.
The 'Get Depths from Zones' button, in the bottom left-hand corner of the 'Input' tab,
launches a 'Select Depths' dialog. The 'Select Depths' dialog provides the user with an
alternative way of specifying the depth ranges. If the 'Full Well Range' box is 'checked'
then the 'Zone/Top Set', 'Top' and 'Bottom' boxes are grayed out as the full well range
will be used. To select zones then 'uncheck' the 'Full Well Range' box the user then has
the option to select a Zone/Tops Set from the drop-down list and use these depths in
one well or in multiple wells (click the 'All Wells' button).
'Use Custom Plot Format' - if this is 'checked' then it allows the user to type in or
browse for a saved plot format that they wish to use.
'Multi-well Plot' - creates a multi-well plot, in the 'Well Correlation Viewer' module, of

the currently selected 'Use Well for Xplot Build' wells.

The 'Reset form' button clears all the user defined entries in the 'Input' tab of the
module, returning this tab to its default state.
The 'Load model' and 'Save model' buttons allows the loading and saving of models. A
model can also be saved using the 'Save Parameter Set' menu item.
'Discriminators' tab
The 'DISCRIMINATORS' can be used for limiting the data for input into the model and also
limiting the interval over which to run the model.
'Crossplots' tab
Within this tab the user can refine the scales of the curves that are going to be displayed in the
crossplots. If the curve has a mnemonic that exists within theCPARMDEF.PAR file then the curve
will be displayed with its 'default' display characteristics. See 'Tools' 'Defaults' 'Edit Curve
System Defaults' for more information on the CPARMDEF.PAR file.

If the user wishes to change their curve selection then they will have to go back to the 'Input' tab
to do this. The number of 'Z axis Colors' can be defined here.
To view the 'Multi-curve Crossplot' 'click' the 'Crossplot' button. Depending upon the number of
wells and curves selected then it can take a few seconds for the 'Multi-Curve Crossplot' window
to populate.

This displays all the curves cross-plotted against each other with the Z axis showing either the Z
axis curve or the well(s). There are also histograms of each of the curves with data included from
all the wells selected.
It is possible to increase or decrease the size of the crossplots by using the buttons in the top-left
of the module. If data falls outside the scales then a quick way of seeing the data is to hold the
cursor over a crossplot and then drag, whilst holding down the right mouse button, the cursor
vertically - this changes the Y axis scale. If the right mouse button is held down and the cursor
dragged horizontally then the X axis is changed. Alternatively the scales for each curve can be set
in the 'Crossplot' tab.
To zoom in on a certain area of the crossplot hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor over
the data that needs to be enlarged. A small white box will be drawn. Once the left mouse button is
released the crossplot resizes focussed in on the area of interest.

If the 'Wells Z Axis' box is 'checked', the 'Display Z Axis Colors' and colour bar become hidden
from view. By using the 'Show' check box it is possible to quickly select/deselect wells. If the '
Auto Update' box is 'checked' then every change made occurs immediately. However, if there are
many curves and wells selected then the crossplots could take time to refresh with the changes.
In this case in would be best to 'un-check' the 'Auto Update' box. If wells are now de-selected, the
'Show' column for the de-selected well turns a peach colour. Only when the 'Update' button is
'clicked' do the changes take effect and the 'Show' column changes back to white.



The 'Show Lower diagonal plots only' box is available to speed up the refresh of the screen
after any changes have been made. This is particularly needed if many wells and curves have
been chosen.
'Clicking' on the 'Output' button gives the option of outputting the 'Multi-Curve Crossplot' screen
to
'Printer' - output goes directly to the users 'default' printer.
'Clipboard' - allows the user to paste the 'Multi-Curve Crossplot' screen to a Word,
PowerPoint or Excel document.
'File' - save the screen as an .emf, .bmp, .cgm, .gif, .jpg, .png, or .tif file in the project
folder.

19.6 3D Parameter Viewer

The '3D Parameter Viewer' module provides the user with a versatile, interactive graphic
interface in which to display and quality check parameters and output results from any
interpretation module in IP, in a multi-well environment. It allows the visualization of calculated
reservoir parameters such as porosity and water saturation, net reservoir and net pay thicknesses
for all, or user-selected wells in an IP database. The user can also investigate deeper into an
interpretation workflow and examine data such as the Rw, wet clay density, 'm', 'n' etc.. used in
the Porosity / Water saturation module on a field-wide basis.
It is also possible to open multiple '3D Parameter Viewers' so that parameter values can be
compared across different modules or even the same module after different interpretations have
been run.
The tool is arranged on 3 separate 'tabs' allowing step-wise 'Well Selection', 'Parameter
Selection' and 'Define 3D View'.
Section 19.6 Data Viewing : 3D Parameter Viewer

Data can be viewed on a single-zone (row) basis or can be combined to provide composited
(Multiple row) averaged or summed results. These options can be used, for example, to view
average porosity across a number of reservoir zones or to view total net pay thicknesses over a
number of zones.
NOTE:
The tool is not a 'mapping' application and does not produce output such as 'grids' that
can be used in other applications.
Wells should have location data (Lat. / Long. or UTM E / N), and in the case of deviated
wells - deviation surveys, loaded to IP (See Manage Well Header Info.) in order to
display data points in correct spatial position relative to adjacent wells.
19.6.1 Well Selection

The 'Well Selection' tab provides the user with a list of available wells from which to choose the
wells for display.
NOTE: It is important for the correct spatial distribution of the wells and parameters in the
3D view, that wells have valid Locations (Lat /Long or UTM) and, if deviated, have deviation
surveys loaded to IP.
The surface location data can be entered manually into the individual 'Manage Well Header Info.
', 'Position' Tab.
Well Deviation survey data can be loaded via the 'Calculation' 'True Vertical Depth' module.


Once wells are selected and all TVD curves are specified for the wells, click on the 'Next' button.
19.6.2 Parameter Selection

The 'Parameter Selection' tab allows the user to define the parameter to be viewed in the 3D
viewer. Wells appear in a tabular 'grid' display with 'Zone Name' in the Left-hand column. Wells
are then arranged to the right of the 'Zone Name' with 'zone depths' and parameter 'value'
listed.
'Select Parameter set' : provides a drop-down list of available Parameter sets for the
selected wells.
'Select Parameter to View' : provides a drop-down list of available parameters for the
3D viewer. The Parameter list changes with Parameter Set choice.
The Well / Parameter grid is very flexible and allows the user to select and de-select parameters
in a number of ways :
by individual cell (single well/zone)
by Well (all zones)
by Zone (all wells)
'Averaged Values / Summed Values' : Viewing / comparison of parameters can be

done on a single zone or, by selecting multiple rows, parameter values can be 'summed'

or 'averaged' for display by checking the appropriate radio button 'Averaged values' or '
Summed values'. This would allow the user, for example, to display total (summed) Net
Pay for all wells, or averaged porosities / water saturations over a range of zones from
the 'cut-offs' Parameter Set.
'Auto Refresh' : The 'Auto refresh' button, if 'checked' , will pass any modifications
made to the well/parameter grid directly to the 3D Viewer. This only functions after the
first 3D Viewer set-up has been executed.
19.6.3 Define 3D View

The 'Define 3D View' tab allows the user to set up the 3D display window.
'Z Axis and Contours' : allows the user to choose between 'Depth' or 'Parameter' as
the Z axis scale.
If 'Depth' is 'checked', the 'Min Value', 'Max Value' depth boxes are populated with the
minimum and maximum depths of the selected data range. The default 'Contour
Spacing' is a nominal value which can be changed by the user. The user can alter any
of these settings and can save the data by checking the 'Keep my Scale' box.
If 'Parameter' is 'checked', the 'Min Value', 'Max Value' default to the minimum and
maximum values of the selected parameter range. The default 'Contour Spacing' is set
to a nominal value that the user can change. The user can alter any of these settings
and can save the data by checking the 'Keep my Scale' box. If this box is 'checked' a
label appears to say that the set-up is 'Fixed'.

'Colour Scale' : allows the user to choose the set-up for the 3D view colour bar. The
colour scale can be set to 'Depth' or 'Parameter' and 'Min' and 'Max' values set as for
the 'Z Axis & Contours'. The user can accept the IP defaults or modify values to their
own preferences. The 'Keep my Scale' check box, when 'checked', saves the user
set-up criteria.
Once the user has selected the 3D set-up criteria the 3D viewer is launched by clicking on the '
Run Visualization' Button.
The 'Save / Load settings' buttons allow the user to save the set-up parameters for each 3D plot
to an external file (xxx.P3D). These settings files can be re-called to regenerate a plot format.

19.6.4 3D Display
The '3D Parameter Viewer' display window has a 3D Cube display which is rotated by left-mouse
clicking in the cube and dragging the mouse. The window has additional set-up options as
described in the diagram below:
The 'Colour Scale Spectra' are accessed from a drop-down list in the top left hand corner of the
window.
Contours
'Show Contours' : Allows the user to display / remove contours from the 3D display.
'Thickness' : determines the line thickness if contours are displayed.

Display
'Show Well Labels' gives the user the choice whether to have Well labels on or off the
3D view.
'Names', 'Values' and 'Names and Values' toggles between posting the well name or
the 3D parameter value or both the well name and parameter value at the well location.
The 'Show Well Labels' needs to be ''checked'' for these options to be active.
'Show Gridlines' : toggles on /off the rectangular grid lines which define the depth or
parameter 'surface'. The 3D Grid dimensions are set on the 'Define 3D View' tab below
the 'Z Axis and Contours' set-up panel. The grid dimensions can be edited and
changes seen in the 3D View.
'Show whole Well Path' : this option only works when the Z Axis mode is set to 'Depth'.

By default, well paths are truncated at the intersection of the well and the Depth or
Parameter surface. If 'checked', this option will show the entire well path and its
orientation within the chosen depth window.
'3D View mode' : the default view is the 3D View. If 'un-checked' the display collapses
to a 2D 'map'-type view.
Output
'Setup' : this button launches a screen where the user can add Titles and descriptions to
the 3D View. The 'Plot Size' dimensions will hardwire the size of any clipboard image to
the 'Height' and 'Width' settings. The 'Font' dialogue button allows the user to set the
Title / annotation font style and size.
'Clipboard': copies the current 3D image to the clipboard for pasting into external
documents.
'Print' : sends the 3D image to the IP default Printer (set under the 'File' menu 'Printer
Setup')
Some examples of 3D displays are shown below:
Z axis Depth / colour Scale Depth

Z Axis Depth / colour Scale Parameter (Net Pay)
Z Axis Parameter / colour Scale Parameter (Net Pay)

Z Axis Parameter / colour Scale Parameter (net Pay)


19.7 Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

The 'Multi-Well Correlation Viewer' module provides the user with an interface to view multiple
wells and to plot correlation lines between wells held in an IP database.
Zone tops can be displayed and edited and wells can be 'datumed' (Flattened) on a zone
top or to a reference depth by simple 'mouse click' operations.
Wells can be added or removed from the display window and moved around within the
multi-well viewer.
Multi-well plot formats can be saved into the database directory for easy recall and
re-display. Plots can be output to the clipboard for pasting into external documents or
can be sent directly to available printers.
19.7.1 Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

The 'Multi-Well Correlation Viewer' is launched by selecting the 'Multi-Well Correlation
Viewer' menu item under the 'View' menu, or by using the speed button ( ).
Up to 10 multi-well plots can be displayed simultaneously. Each multi-well view can display up to
50 wells. However, there is an overall display limit of 250 individual well plots.
The multi-well viewer uses 'Zone / Tops Sets' (tops) to draw correlation lines and shading
between the wells in the view window. The same 'Zones / Tops' Set should be available in all wells
Section 19.7 Data Viewing : Multi-Well Correlation Viewer

in order to draw the correlation lines between the wells. The module uses the 'Zone Name' to
decide which zones correlate between wells. It is therefore essential that a consistent naming
convention is used. The module does not distinguish between upper and lower case characters,
therefore 'C zone' and 'c Zone' would be considered to be the same.
In the Multi-Well Correlation viewer the user can create a new Zone / Tops Set, then interactively
create, move or delete zone tops in that Set. Alternatively, the user can select an existing
multi-well Zone / Tops Set, make a copy of it and perform the same operations on that Set.
When the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer window launches, the user uses the header bar buttons to
set up and modify the correlation viewer display.
The Buttons are:

'Wells'
'File'
'Settings'
'Options'
The functionality associated with each button is described below.

Creating, editing and re-naming tops in this module is covered in the 'Editing Tops in the
Multi-well Correlation Viewer' Section.
A 'New Correlation workflow' is presented at the end of this chapter.
'Wells' Button
The user must first select the wells to be displayed.
Click on the 'Wells' button and, in the 'Select Wells' dialog, move the wells to be displayed from
the 'Available Wells' column to the 'Selected Wells' column. The 'arrow' buttons allow the user to
move wells between the 'Available Wells' and 'Selected Wells' panels. It is also possible to 'left
mouse click' on a well name and drag it to the opposite panel while holding down the mouse
button. The order, from top to bottom, in which the selected wells appear in the 'Selected Wells'
list will be the order, left to right, in which they are displayed in the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer
display.

Click 'OK' to display the wells in the plot. At this stage only the well names and tops and bottom
depths will be displayed.
To display a Zone Set 'click' on the 'Zone Set' drop-down list box and select a Zone / Tops Set to

use. The zone tops and bottoms will be displayed in the window, together with any zone colours
scheme that has been set up in the 'Edit Zone / Tops Set' module. A number of interactive
'handles/markers' and menus are available in the Correlation window to allow the user to modify /
create / delete zones in the correlation viewer.
The user can 'datum' the multi-well view on a zone top, at an arbitrary depth ('Align Reference
Depth') or at a user-selected depth ('Set Align Depth'). These are illustrated in the following
screen capture.
'Checking' the 'Fit' check box in the correlation viewer header bar will force all wells to be
displayed in the plot window. If 'Fit' is not 'checked', the wells will be displayed at their proper
width and the user will have to scroll left and right to display all wells.

In the display shown above the 'Tops' set is being used for the correlation. The plot is
depth-aligned on the top 'Ness' Zone. The vertical scale has been expanded to make the zone
names legible.
The 'Tops Only' check box allows the user to toggle between a 'Tops Only' display (illustrated
above) and a 'Log Plot' view. To view the Log Plot display 'uncheck' the 'Tops Only' check box.
In this case the 'default' log plot format for each well will be displayed.
To display all wells in the correlation panel with a common plot format, use the 'File' 'Load
Single Well Format to all Wells' option, which copies a user-selected log plot format to all wells
in the window.
'Overview' tracks can be displayed for each well. However, these can often detract from the
overall plot appearance and it is suggested that a plot format, without an overview track, is used.
Overview tracks can be turned 'off' from the 'Options' menu 'Hide all overview tracks'.

To edit an individual well plot format, click in the track header of the well you wish to change. The
normal 'Log Plot Format' window will appear. To get access to the grid properties click the 'All
tracks' button on this window. This will also allow you to load a saved log plot format for that
specific well. This will only affect the well being worked on.
Editing Tops in the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer
Interactive Changing of Tops

There are two methods for changing zone tops interactively.
1. If a zone track is displayed in a well then its zone tops and bottoms can be interactively
changed in the same way as the normal single well plot (click on, and drag).
2. With the Ctrl key held down place the cursor on one of the correlation lines in between
plots next to the well for which you want to change the zone top. The cursor will change to
an up-down pointer. 'Click and drag' the zone top to the new position.
Re-Naming Tops
Place the mouse cursor on one of the correlation lines between two wells, next to the well that you
want to rename a zone top. The cursor will change to a 'pointing hand'. A right mouse 'click' will
bring up the following dialog box. Using this dialog you can choose whether to rename the well
top in the left- or right -hand well, or bring up the 'Create/Edit Zone Link' window by selecting '
Properties'.

If the 'Rename Left Side' or 'Rename Right Side' option is 'clicked' then the 'New Zone Name'
window appears.
If you rename a Top, the correlation will no longer be valid, since you have broken the 'connection'
between adjacent wells. The correlation line will be deleted.
Linking Tops
Un-named tops or tops with different names can be linked so that a common 'Top' name is used.
This is done by 'clicking' on the 'Zone Top' marker (small green square) and dragging the top line
to the next well to the 'Top' that is to be linked. When the mouse button is released the '
Create/Edit Zone Link' window (see above) will appear, allowing the user to set the name for the
top and therefore link the tops.

Adding New Tops

To add a new zone to a well where no zone previously existed, hold the 'Ctrl' key down and right
mouse 'click' in the grey area between wells next to the well where the zone is to be created.
Select the 'New Zone' pop-up menu item and the new zone will be created. The new zone has a
top and bottom depth. The bottom depth can be changed by holding the 'Ctrl' key down and then
placing the cursor on the zone bottom marker and dragging the line to a new depth.
Deleting Tops / Splitting Zones

To delete or split a zone, hold the 'Ctrl' key down and right mouse click in the grey area between

wells next to the well where the zone is to be deleted or split. Select the required function from the
pop-up menu .
Changing Zone associated with analyses modules

If the selected Zone Set is not of type 'Tops', for example from the 'PhiSw' interpretation module
(the zone Set type is displayed in brackets next to the zone name) then every time a zone top or
bottom is moved, the analysis routine associated with the Set will automatically be run. This can
be very useful if the user uses the multi-well Correlation module to align analysis tops so that
similar parameters are used in the same zones in each well in a field.
'File' Button
The 'File' button allows the user to save and restore (Load) multi-well formats (Wells / well order /
plot formats) as well as providing the facility to load a single well format to all wells in the
multi-well plot. This last function is very useful for applying an identical plot format to all wells in
the display. A format can be created in a single well and then saved to disk using the 'Save Plot
Format Generic' menu option, this can then be recalled from the multi-well plot 'File' menu and
used for all wells.
When the user saves a particular cross section format and then recalls/loads the format file (
.wmp), the name of the format/cross section panel is displayed in the multi-well panel header bar,
in parentheses after the Multi-Well Correlation label, in the top left-hand corner, as illustrated
below:

'Settings' Button
Click the 'Settings' button to open up the 'Multi-Well Settings Format' window. This window
allows the user to change the overall format of the wells in the correlation panel. The user can
change a number of display parameters and zone colour shading. The Settings are arranged on
two 'tabbed' screens. These are :
'Wells' and
'Zones'.
The 'Wells' Tab

'Trk # ': This column shows the order in which the selected wells will be displayed in the
Correlation window. 'Clicking and dragging' on a track number in the 'Trk #' column, will
allow the order of the wells in the plot to be re-arranged.
'Well Name' : This column allows the user to change or remove wells from the plot.
Wells can be changed by clicking on a 'Well Name' entry in the grid and selecting a
different well name from the drop-down well list. A well can be removed by clicking on a
Well Name in the grid and selecting the 'blank' entry in the well name list. A well can be
added more than once to the correlation plot.
'Width' : This column shows the width of each well log plot in the correlation panel, in IP
project 'default units' (inches or cm).
'Gap' : This column shows the width of the gap that is set between wells in the
correlation panel (inches or cm).
'Top Depth' : Enter the top depth for the well. This is the well measured depth,
regardless of what curve is used as the 'Ref Depth'. The 'Default' value is well 'Top
Depth'.
'Bot Depth' : Enter the bottom depth for the well. The 'Default' value is the well 'Bottom
Depth'.
'Ref Depth' : Enter the Depth reference curve name from the drop-down list. The
Depth Reference curve will be used to align the wells in the correlation panel. This can
be set to DEPTH (Measured Depth) or to TVD / TVDSS (True Vertical Depth) for all
wells in the display. NOTE: IP will warn you if you select, for example, wells which have
TVDSS curves in a mix of 'positive' and 'negative' depth notation. TVDSS curves must
ALL be in a common positive' or 'negative' notation.

'Define' : Click the 'Define' button to set the well display depths from the selected '
Zone/Top Set' tops and bottoms. This will display the 'Select Plot Range' window,
similar to that illustrated below:
The 'Select Plot Range' window allows wells to be displayed using depths picked from
the current Tops Set.
Select the 'Top' and 'Bottom' from the drop-down boxes.
The 'Tolerance' column is used to modify the log display relative to the selected top
depths. In the above example, for 'Well A1', the data will be displayed 100 ft/meters
shallower ('minus' notation) than the 'RN36 (Top)' and 100 ft/meters deeper than the '
Bottom' of the 'RN12 (Bottom)'.
The 'Full Well Range' box, if 'checked', will set the depths to the full well range for the
selected well.
The 'All Wells' button, if clicked, will apply the 'Select Plot Range' criteria to all wells
currently loaded in the multi-well panel display. This allows the user to quickly make a
plot over a selected zonal range for all wells.
The 'Ok' button will set the depths for all the displayed well.
'Default Widths' : The 'Default widths' box on the 'Multi-Well Settings Format'
window, allows the user to set the same 'Well Gap' and 'Well Width' for all wells.
'Set Ref. Depth Curve for all Wells' : this option gives the user a shortcut to set the
depth reference curve for all wells in a multi-well correlation. The user can select TVD or
Measured Depth (MD) options. The program will find the relevant curve in every well in
the correlation, if the curve exists.
The 'Zones' Tab

The 'Zones' tab sets up the display criteria for the area between wells. The window shows a list
of the Zone names in the user-selected Zone Set, the number of wells ('No Wells') in which each
zone is present in the display and a Zone colour selection column. A number of check boxes that
affect the correlation view are described below:
'Hide Shading' check box : If the 'Hide Shading' box is not 'checked' (the default
setting) then the inter-well gaps will be shaded with the colours shown in the colour
table. The user can change the colours as needed.
'Hide Zone Markers' check box : The 'Hide Zone Markers' option, if 'checked', will
remove the small square zone markers which are shown to the sides of each well in a
correlation panel. This option allows the user to 'clean up' a correlation display before
printing or copying to the clipboard for pasting into other applications.
'Show Zone Names above Zone Tops' : if 'un-checked' will remove the zone names
from above the zone correlations.
'Set Zone colours in Wells' check box : if 'checked', this option allows the user to save
any changes they make to the zone colours in the multi-well display, back into the Zone
Set that was selected when setting up the correlation viewer.
'Options' Button
The 'Options' button launches a number of display controls that affect all wells in a correlation
view, simultaneously.

'Hide All Overview Tracks' : This will remove from the well plots any overview track
which has been included in the plot format. The overview track is generally not useful in
the correlation plot.
'Add a Zone Track to all Wells - Names only' : This will add a zone track, containing
the currently-selected Zone Set, to the left hand side of all well plots. This can be useful
for changing zone tops.
'Add a Zone Track to all Wells - Colour Zones' : This will add a zone track, containing
the currently-selected Zone Set and colour coded (as set up in the 'Edit Zones /Tops
Sets' module), to the left hand side of all well plots in the correlation view.
'Remove Zone track from all Wells' : This removes the zone track from all wells in a
correlation view, if the Zone tracks are present as the left-hand track in each log plot.
'Add Zones / Tops lines to all Tracks': This will add horizontal lines across each log
track in each log plot, using the currently-selected Zone Set. The following dialog box will
allow the user to select the colour of the lines.
'Remove Zone / Tops lines from all Tracks' : This reverses the 'Add Zones / Tops
lines to all Tracks' operation.
'Create a New Zone / Tops Set for selected wells' : This allows the user to create a
new multi-well Tops Set in the wells in the correlation panel in order to start a new
correlation. The following dialog allows the user to choose the name of the Tops Set.

'Add this Zone Set to all selected wells' : This is useful if one wants to add a new well
into a correlation and then to correlate between it and surrounding wells. This option,
when selected, will add the current Zone Set into the new well.
'Create a copy of the selected Zone / Tops Set' : This will make a copy of the
currently-selected Zone Set and make this copy the 'active' Zone Set. This is useful if the
user wants to edit the current correlation but does not want to overwrite the existing
correlation zones.
'Change Track Border Width All Wells' : This option, if selected, allows you to change
the line thickness used to define log track boundaries on each log plot. The line
thickness change is applied to all wells in the correlation panel. The default line
thickness is set to '2'. Thicker border lines can be achieved by typing in a higher value
and clicking 'OK'.
Output to Printer or File

By clicking on the print button the plot can be output to a printer, the Clipboard or to a
graphics file. The same options are available as for the single well plot output, except that plot
depths are now set up in the multi-well plot 'Settings' window and horizontal, log track depth grid
lines can be set up for each well.

The 'Advanced' tab allows you to set up further 'hardcopy' options. These are described below:

In the 'MultiWell' Panel on the 'Advanced' tab, highlighted above, the user is able to select one,
or more, of the following options:
'Hide Shading' - 'Ticking' this option will remove any Zone shading, that may be visible
inside IP, from between the wells in the multi-well panel on the hardcopy output.
'Hide Zone Markers' - 'Ticking' this option will remove the Zone Tie symbols, the small,
dark green markers on the sides of each well log, from the hardcopy output.
'Plot Well Name Header just above well plot' - 'Ticking' this option will 'anchor' the '
Well Name' title box to the top of each individual well log plot, rather than to the top of
the Correlation panel.
'Plot Well Header at bottom of log' - 'Ticking' this option will put a 'Well Name' title box
at the bottom of the correlation Panel. If 'Plot Well Name Header just above well plot'
is also 'checked', the title boxes on the bottom of the panel are 'anchored' to the base of
each individual log plot.

New Correlation Workflow

The following workflow is one way in which a new correlation could be made.
1. Create a Multi-well correlation and load all wells in the correlation into it ('Wells' button).
2. Load a simple correlation log plot for each well. 'File' 'Load a Single Well Format to
all Wells' and display the log plots ('Tops Only' 'un-checked').
3. Create a new Tops Set for all wells. ('Options' 'Create a New Zone / Tops Set for
selected wells').
4. Add the Tops to each well plot as lines. ('Options' 'Add Zone / Tops lines to all
Tracks'). A confirm message appears which also allows the user to select the colour of the

Tops lines.
5. In the first well, create a new zone and drag its top and bottom depth to cover the total
correlation interval. The top should be aligned to the top zone in the correlation. NOTE: the
green solid rectangle is the zone marker; the yellow solid rectangle is for guidance
purposes only. Therefore tops can only be drawn between green solid rectangles. If the
green rectangles don't exist then 'Ctrl' right click and 'Split Zone' to create new zones
between the green solid rectangle and the yellow solid rectangle.
6. In the second well, create another new zone and align as in the first well.
7. Link and name the top correlation. Click on the left-well top marker and drag it to the
right-well top marker.

8. Create the next zone down by splitting the upper zone. Do this for both left and right
wells.
9. Name and link the next zone by dragging the left-well top marker to the right-well top
marker as done in step 7.

10. The correlation can be continued in the same way by splitting zones and linking
markers. When the first two wells are correlated then the user can move on to the next
well using exactly the same methodology until the whole correlation has been built up.

19.8 Well Map

The 'Well Map' is a graphical interface where wells can be viewed together with geographical and
cultural information loaded into IP from external SHAPE, .OVL or .DAT files. The interface allows
users to identify and discriminate between wells that are in the database but not loaded into
memory ("Available Wells") and in-memory ("Loaded Wells") based on symbol colours.
NOTE: IP only recognizes Latitude and Longitude values that use the WGS84 datum. A 'datum'
is the combination of an ellipsoid, which specifies the size and shape of the earth, and a base
point from which the latitude and longitude of all other points are referenced. Well location
coordinates based on one datum will not necessarily overlay data based on another datum.
For example, entering Latitude and Longitude coordinates using any other datum, e.g. ED50, will
not compute a correct UTM Easting / Northing for a well, since the IP Geographical to rectangular
coordinates conversion assumes values are input as WGS84.
Geographical coordinates are entered for a well, using the appropriate text entry boxes on the '
Position' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module.
The 'Well Map' interface is launched from the 'View' menu or from the 'Project' toolbar.
The 'Well Map' enables the user to view an often extensive IP well list to either:
load wells individually into memory, or
load multiple wells into memory at one time by dragging a box around the wells in the
graphical display and selecting 'Load'.
Section 19.8 Data Viewing : Well Map

'Available Wells' (those wells included in the current IP project, but not loaded into memory) and '
Loaded Wells' (in-memory) are distinguished by their symbol colours and the text colour in the '
Well List' panels;
Fuschia coloured symbols on the map and Maroon coloured names in the 'Available
Wells' panel for 'non-loaded IP Project' wells,
Blue coloured symbols on map and Blue coloured names in 'Loaded Wells' panel for
'in-memory', and therefore 'active' wells.
The size of the well symbol indicates whether a well has a deviation survey loaded for it, or not. A
well which does not have a deviation survey loaded to IP will display with a smaller colour-filled
circle than a well which has a deviation survey loaded to the program. The symbol colour denotes
'in-memory' or 'available', as described above.
NOTE: wells must have a 'Well Position' entered in the 'Position' tab of their respective 'Well
Header Info.' editors (diagram below), before they will appear on the 'Well Map'. The 'default'
position for a well with no position loaded is Latitude 0 degrees / Longitude 0 degrees. Also, in
order to be able to see deviated well paths, a deviation survey must have been processed through
the 'True Vertical Depth' module for each well, or alternatively 'Departure' curves ('EDIST' and '
NDIST') must be loaded into the well and then be selected in the 'Well Path' panel as illustrated
below.
In the 'Manage Well Header Info..' window the 'Well Surface Positions' can be entered as either

Latitude/Longitude (WGS84 datum) as Degree, Minutes and Seconds (DMS),or

Latitude / Longitude as Decimal Degrees (DD), or
UTM Eastings and Northings (UTM Zone must be known).
The user can convert Lat/Long (DMS or DD) to UTM co-ordinates and vice versa by clicking on
the UTMs/Lat-Long radio buttons.
When changing from Lat/Long to UTM co-ordinates, IP will calculate the UTM Zone value from
the current Longitude value.
The user must 'check' one of the 'Well Path Data Format' radio buttons to tell IP how to interpret
the 'East Distance Curve' and 'North Distance Curve' when they have been loaded to the
program or computed within IP.
Screen Navigation Controls

'Pan or drag screen' : Click the red arrows to scroll the screen display in the direction of
the arrow, or 'click & drag' the mouse cursor on the actual map display to position the
display where you want it.
'Zoom' : 'Click and drag' the slider button to change the magnification level. The zoom
scale range is: 'Minimum' - 6000miles, to 'Maximum' - 8 metres.
A range scale bar is shown on the bottom of the screen to aid distance measurements.
The same 'zoom' operation is performed by rotating the mouse-wheel when the cursor is
in the map display area.
'Font Size' : Use the 'Font Size' buttons to change the size of the text displayed on
screen.
Well Position Display

'Well Names' : 'check' to display the well name at the wells' surface location.
'Show at end of Path' : for platform wells, well names plotted at the surface location will
overwrite and be illegible. 'Checking' the 'Show at end of Path' button will display the
well name at the bottom hole location.
'Well Paths' : Well path information are stored as 'East' and 'North' curves in IP wells.
These curves are calculated in the 'True Vertical Depth' module or they are imported
from external data. The user must choose these 'departure' curves in the 'East
Distance' and 'North Distance' curve drop-down boxes in the 'Manage Well Header
Info.' module - 'Position' tab.
For depth correction, a TVD curve may also be selected. The 'TVD Type' selection
allows you to set the type of TVD curve. Well paths will be shown on the 'Well Map' if
the user zooms in to a suitable scale, and has 'checked' the 'Display' 'Well Path'
option box.
Cultural Data Overlays

Adding overlays to a well location map improves the visual quality of the map. Overlay files can
be standard GIS Shape (*.SHP) files, or ASCII (.DAT) and (.OVL) formatted data. The Field
outlines shown in the map above are part of a GIS Shape file drawn in light yellow as a 'Polygon',

see the section on 'Display Options' below for setting this up.
Click the 'Load' button to load an overlay file.
Find Text
The 'Find Text' text-entry box allows the user to type in a text string, for example a 'Well name',
and IP will locate the well and centre the map on that well. If a text field is associated with a
SHAPE file, for example 'Block Number', then you can enter a Block Number into the 'Find Text'
box, click 'Find' and the Map will centre on the 'Block Number', if it is found.
Web Resources
Many useful web sites containing free Shape files exist. A few useful sites for extracting
coastline and other geographical data from are found at :
http://oas.ngdc.noaa.gov/mgg/plsql/extractor.search_screen
http://www.esri.com
For UKCS cultural Information, Shape files can be downloaded from the DEAL website at:
http://www.ukdeal.co.uk/
Files downloaded from this site can simply be re-named with a '.OVL' file extension and used
directly as a map overlay.
'Right-click' on a map overlay label to activate the pop-up parameter menu.
Draw Sequence and Overlay Priority

Overlays are drawn on the map in the order listed on screen, from bottom to top. In the screen
capture shown below the 'licgeo.shp' file will be drawn first and the 'IP WELLS' will be drawn last,
on top of everything else. The user can move an overlay up / down the display order to achieve
the best visual result.
'Show overlay text' : GIS Shape files (*.SHP) usually have associated database files
containing relevant textual information. When loading a SHP file the user is asked to
choose one or more of these text fields. Selecting 'Show Overlay Text' will show the

text on screen at the position defined in the database. NOTE: .DAT & .OVL files do not
contain any textual information.
'Set colour': Use this setting to choose the colour of the lines for your overlay.
'Change UTM Zone' : .DAT files are written using UTM coordinates, as such, a UTM
zone is required before they can be correctly imported. If you used the wrong zone
during the import process, this option allows you to change the zone and therefore the
position of the overlay.
'Draw as filled Polygon' : Sequential points making up a closed shape lend themselves
for display as polygons. A polygon is another way to describe a closed-outline shape
with many points. Polygons can be colour-filled (as in the screen shot above) and look
nicer on screen. The inside of a polygon shape is your chosen colour and the outline will
always be drawn in black. The disadvantage with polygons is they must be closed
shapes and drawn in a sequential manner, strange results will be seen if your overlays
are not proper polygons. Select this option to see if your file will display properly as a
polygon, if not, de-select this option.SHP files are sometimes best shown as polygons.
'Change text fields' : Allows the user to change the text associated with each point as
described in 'Show overlay text', above. Use this option to add or remove any available
text fields. Text Fields are only available for .SHP files where a DBF file is present.
The following descriptions show the format for allowed polygon files:
.DAT file format
The valid ASCII DAT file format is as follows:-
x, y, segid
409349.77, 6836961.80, 1
409258.76, 6837295.51, 1
409319.43, 6837811.23, 1
409440.78, 6838266.29, 1
etc...
The first line is ignored.

The positions are in UTM co-ordinates. IP will ask you for a UTM Zone number when you load
files of this type.
Column 3 is the Segment ID ('segid'). Segments (or polygons) are listed sequentially and a new
segment ID number signifies the start of a new segment.
For closed shapes the start and end positions must be defined as the same number.
.OVL file format
The format for ASCII OVL files are as follows:-
# -b [LF]
-61.102493 -52.006747[LF]
-61.102493 -52.005866[LF]
-61.101613 -52.005280[LF]
-61.100146 -52.005573[LF]
etc...
The file is read sequentially and new segments are defined by the presence of "# -b" flag.
Co-ordinates are in Lat / Long format (decimal degrees) and separated by a Line Feed [LF]
character, decimal 10, or 0Ah.

Mouse Position
These information panels on the bottom of the Map View display the position of the mouse as you
move it about in the map view.
UTM Eastings and Northings and UTM Zone values are calculated automatically and displayed
with the corresponding Latitude/Longitude position.
The Lat / long co-ordinates are in the WGS84 Datum.
'Available Wells' / 'Loaded Wells'

The upper, 'Available Wells' panel displays the wells available in the current IP database, but
which are not loaded into memory. These wells are shown in the map display by a 'Fuschia'
coloured symbol.
The lower, 'Loaded Wells' panel lists all those wells currently loaded into IP memory. Wells listed
in the lower window are shown as blue coloured symbols in the map view. These are the wells
that the user can scroll through using the main menu 'Well' toolbar.
The Map View can be used to load wells from the 'Available Wells' list, into memory in a number
of ways:
Drag & drop a well from the top window to the bottom window, or
Select the well on the Map display by clicking it, then click the 'Load' button below the '
Available Wells' panel, or
Use the 'Load Wells by Area' method which is described below.
NOTE: wells must have a valid 'position' before they will be displayed on-screen in the
correct geographical location. Wells with no 'Position' (see 'Manage Well Header Info.') have
IP default co-ordinates Lat / Long (0 degrees North, 0 degrees East) and are displayed on the
Equator.
'Go to' button :The 'Go to' button will move to, and centre the screen on, the highlighted
well. This makes finding a particular well in a large database very easy. There are 'Go
to' buttons for 'Available Wells' and 'Loaded wells'.
'Load' button: In the 'Available Wells' list, click on a single well or use the 'SHIFT' and
mouse click to select multiple wells to load into memory. Click the 'Load' button to load
the selected well or wells. The well names will transfer from the 'Available Wells' list to
the 'Loaded Wells' list.
'Refresh' button: The 'Refresh' button re-loads the current database file. You may
have to use the 'File' ->Save All Wells to Database option, before some changes are
visible.
'Load Wells by Area' button: Click the 'Start draw' (left hand button) and then 'click &
drag' out a rectangle on screen. Wells falling within this box are highlighted in the map
view and in the 'Available Wells' panel to be loaded into memory. The usual Windows '
SHIFT' key can be used to select / de-select more wells. Click the 'Load' button to load
the selection into memory. Click on the right hand button to erase the selection
rectangle if you do not want to load the selected wells.
'Properties' button: Select a well in the 'Loaded Wells' list and click the 'Properties'
button to take you to the Manage Well Header Info. dialog for that well. Click the '
Position' tab and enter XY location information if needed.

19.9 Montage Builder

The IP 'Montage Builder' is a standalone application, shipped with IP, that provides a
graphical-object editing and display 'workspace' in which the user can combine log plots,
crossplots, histograms, correlation panels, core photographs and text on one montage. A
comprehensive set of paper-sizing and orientation attributes allows you to work in a scaled
workspace, to change display scales (Zoom in / out) and modify object orientation (rotate / flip), to
add shape 'primitives' with user-specified colours and colour fill to enhance your presentation.
The 'Montage Builder' application is launched from the 'View' menu.
Section 19.9 Data Viewing : Montage Builder

The application allows the user to 'capture' graphic objects using the IP 'Clipboard'
feature - which saves the IP graphic as an enhanced metafile (.emf). These emf files
can be pasted directly into the 'Montage Builder' 'canvas' using traditional WINDOWS
controls.
Graphic files, saved outside of the IP program as .EMF, .GIF, .TIFF, .BMP , .CGM,
.JPEG or .PNG files can be inserted into a montage as standalone images or as 'linked'
images.
A 'linked' image allows you to update a Montage, without repeatedly cutting / pasting
graphics elements (log plots, crossplots, histograms etc...) into the montage when an
interpretation changes or new log curves become available. You should save the
modified IP log plot, crossplot etc.. to the same graphics file name that was used in the
original Montage (overwriting / replacing the existing file). Then on the 'Montage
Builder' tool, with your montage open, click 'View' 'Refresh' and all edited / modified,
linked graphics files will be updated with your changes applied.
Shape 'primitives' - Lines, squares, rectangle, triangles, circles, ovals, can be added as
border polygons and colour-filled to highlight some feature on a log plot, for example or
to add a border line. colourfill can be added and modified using the 'Transparency' tool
to modify the effect, from completely opaque (0%) to completely transparent (100%).
A Text editing tool allows you to manually type in text or numeric strings and to select
the Font, font size, colour, and orientation of the text.
The 'MontageBuilder' User Interface

The 'Montage Builder' interface is illustrated below. Many familiar WINDOWS editing functions

are available from the toolbars on the main menu bar.
Toolbars can be switched on / off from the 'View' menu 'Toolbars' option. 'Hints', opened by
placing the mouse cursor over a toolbar icon, explain the functionality of the toolbar icon. To
remove a toolbar, 'un-tick' the toolbar name from the list.
Setting Up a New Montage

When you wish to set up a new montage you must select a paper size on which to build the
montage. The paper size is selected from the 'File' menu 'Page Set Up' option, which
launches a 'Document Properties' dialog which incorporates a Paper Size drop-down list from
which you can choose the required dimensions and orientation ('Portrait' or 'Landscape'). Click '
OK' when you have made your selections.

Building a Montage
The 'Montage Builder' workspace will open with a 'blank' document in which to work. The
montage can then be compiled, using a combination of IP 'Clipboard' functionality, the 'shape'
elements, inserted graphics files and the 'Text' tool in the application workspace.
All the components in the montage can be moved and resized as required. NOTE: all log plot
output from IP, either to the clipboard or to a graphics file will be at the vertical scale set in the
hardcopy output routine. Rescaling these graphics in the 'Montage Builder' will change the
'hardcopy' vertical scale of the graphics file or clipboard contents.
Saving a Montage File

Click the 'File' menu 'Save' option to save a montage that you have built. By default this
creates a montage (.ipm) file. A montage itself can also be saved to the following graphics file
formats:

19.10 Curve Listing / Curve Edit

The 'Curve Listing / Curve Edit' module can be used to :
View and output curve data as ASCII listings, optionally sampled at a user-defined depth
increment.
View and output array curve data as ASCII listings with the ability to filter/ discriminate
for positive values in 'sparse' arrays (for example, from conventional core analysis,
SCAL ,Capillary Pressure data arrays). See 'Output of Core Analysis Data from Array
Curves'.
View and edit curve and array data values in a tabular listing window.
View a log curve preview of the selected log curve data. The log shows all the selected
curve data at a fixed vertical scale, with the curve colour and scale determined by the
settings found within 'Manage Curve Headers'. PLEASE NOTE: the log preview is just
a preview. For full log plot functionality then use the 'Log Plot' module.
Curve listings can be activated by selecting the 'Curve listings / Curve Edit' menu item under the
'View' menu. It can also be accessed from within the 'Database Browser' window when a curve
or curves are selected and the 'Show Data Listing (spreadsheet)' option is selected from the
right mouse button activated menu.
The 'Curve listings / Curve Edit' functionality allows the user to view curve and array data in a
tabular format and to edit individual point values ('Allow Data Edits') or to perform 'range-type'
edits which substitute values over a number of consecutive depth steps ('Fill Range' / 'Null
Range'). It also allows users to check exactly what data is being used in defined Sets called by
the various IP interpretation modules.
The module is arranged on two tabbed screens. These are:

'Select Data'
'Discriminators / Depths'
The 'Select Data' Tab

The window shown below allows the user to choose the curves to display.
Section 19.10 Data Viewing : Curve Listing / Curve Edit

Curves are selected either :

by highlighting a curve and using the arrow buttons, or
by clicking on a curve and dragging it into the 'Selected Curves' box.
The order that the curves are displayed in the tabular listing is the same as the order (top to
bottom) in the 'Selected Curves' box. To re-arrange the order, use the 'up' and 'down' arrows or
click on a curve and drag it to a different position.
The 'Display Format' box allows the user to set the precision of the displayed values.
If the 'Expand Array Data' box is 'checked', array data will be displayed with all data
values for both the 'X' and 'Z' array dimensions. Only array curves which have the same
'Z' dimensions can be displayed together. NOTE: IP cannot display 'normal' curve
data and expanded array data in the same window. If the 'Expand Array' box is not
'checked', array data will be displayed at the normal sample increment (Step) for the
well. In this case, the values displayed will be the average value for the array over the
sample interval.
The 'Discriminators / Depths' tab

The 'Discriminators / Depths' tab allows the user to select the data to be displayed. Up to 6
discriminators can be used and combined using 'and' / 'or' type logic. Discrimination can either be

between a curve and a value or between two curves.
The 'Output Depth Range' allows the user to specify the range over which the selected curves
will be displayed. A top or bottom depth can be entered or else the depth range can be selected
by clicking on the zones icon and selecting a required zone from within the 'Select Zone Depths'
window.
The 'Display Depths Set' is a new feature that allows the user to see the data exactly
as the interpretation modules see the data. This important to know, as all interpretation
modules output data to the 'Output Set' data step. So the user could select input curves
from different Sets which have different steps but the 'Output Set' may be a completely
different step.


The 'Data Listing frequency' allows the user to reduce the frequency of the displayed data. For
example a value of 10 would display the data on 10 ft ( or 10 meter, depending on Well Depth
unit) increments. 'All Levels' will display data at the 'well step' interval.
Data can be scrolled left / right and up / down by using the scroll bars. The 'Page Up' / 'Page
Down' keys on the computer keyboard will also scroll through the data. Columns can be
re-arranged in the display by clicking in the column header and dragging the column to a new
position.
There are 4 buttons which allow the user to make changes to the data in the 'List Data' window:
NOTE: not all the buttons will be active if the 'Display Depths Set' selected is a Set which has a
different step to the curves selected to view. In the screenshot above, the curves are from the
'Default' Set which has a step of 0.1524, whereas the 'Display Depths Set' selected was the
'Core' Set which has an irregular step.
'Allow Data Edit' : to edit data values in single cell mode; click the 'Allow Data Edit'
button on the menu bar. The button will appear highlighted. This editing mode allows
editing only one cell at a time. When editing is complete, click the 'Allow Data Edit'
button again and it will return to its normal state.
'Fill Range' : Allows the user to select a range of cells and to linearly interpolate
across a range between two 'real' end values. The button can also be used to
extrapolate data beyond a data range. In this case the user should highlight the data
range-to-fill and include 2 rows of 'real' data above or below the 'range-to-fill'. The real
values will be used to compute the missing data.
'Null Range' : Allows the user to select a range of cells and replace all values with the
'Null' value (-999).
'Undo' : Once a value is changed, the 'Undo' button becomes 'active'. This allows the
user to reset data edits to their previous values by stepping cell-by-cell through the
edited data range.
Array data curves can only be edited in the 'Expand Array Data' mode.

'Edit Format' : the 'Edit Format' button allows the user to change the curves that are
displayed in the window, 'click' and you will return to the set-up window where the curve
selection can be changed.
'Output' : Output can be sent to the printer, clipboard or to an external ASCII text file.
The 'clipboard' copy can be used to move data directly into other applications that accept
clipboard text.
Output of Core Analysis data from Array Curves

Core analysis data listings can be made from Array type curves using this module and by applying
array curves as discriminators in the module set up.
For example, where a very large 'sparse-sampled' array curve exists, containing only relatively
few (none-null) data points, the 'Curve Listing/ Curve Edit' module can be tailored to output only
the non-null values by adding a discriminator criterion, for example, set the output array curve as
a discriminator curve and set 'Function' and 'Value' to '>' & '0' respectively. This will create a
much smaller listing, which can be output to an ASCII text file for use in other applications, for
example in a spreadsheet. NOTE: this facility has largely been made redundant as the user can
now create irregular curve Sets and use the 'Display Depths Set' to list the curves at the Set step
interval.

19.11 Curve Statistics

The 'Curve Statistics' module displays and outputs information about the curves in the current
well. The module can also be used to find average values for curves over user-defined depth
intervals. Discriminators can be used to define exactly which parts of a curve should be averaged.
The program produces an ASCII file report which can be viewed with various standard PC
viewers.
The module is arranged on 3 tabbed screens. These are :
'Curves'
'Report'
'Discriminators'
Section 19.11 Data Viewing : Curve Statistics

The 'Curves' tab

Curves are selected either :
by highlighting a curve in the 'Available Curves' panel and using the arrow buttons to
move it to the 'Selected Curves' panel,
by clicking on a curve and dragging it into the 'Selected Curves' box,
by holding down the 'SHIFT' key and clicking on curve names to select a block of curves,
then use the '>' button to paste the names into the 'Selected Curves' panel.
by holding down the 'CTRL' key and clicking on individual curves to select them, then

use the '>' button to paste the names into the 'Selected Curves' panel.
by clicking the '>>' button to select all the curves in the current well.
The order that the curves are listed is the same as the order in the 'Selected Curves' box. To
re-arrange the order, use the up and down 'Order' arrows or click on a curve and drag it to a
different position.
The 'Report' tab
The user can select the statistics that are to be saved in the output report, including an interactive
selection of percentile values to return.
The 'All Standard Statistics' checkbox, if 'checked' will tick all the statistics categories in the
Report screen. To select / de-select individual statistics for the report, 'un-check' the 'All
Standard Statistics' box.
The report can either be output as a 'Space Delimited' or 'Tab Delimited' text file for viewing in

Notepad or as a 'Comma Delimited' (csv) file for viewing in a spreadsheet program. To output
the '.csv' file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter go to 'Tools' 'Options' '
Miscellaneous Options' 'CSV Delimiter'.
The depth range for the report defaults to the active well Top and Bottom Depths. The user can
modify the report depth range by either:
Manually typing in new depth values, or
click' the 'Zone select' button, to the right of the Bottom Depth text box, to launch the '
Select Zone Depths' dialog, which can then be used to set up reports for particular
formations, reservoir intervals or reservoir zones.
The 'Discriminators' tab
Discriminators can be used to further refine the selection of data. They are particularly useful if
the user wants to find out the average value or net interval of a curve over an interval. For
example: if the user wants to do a quick net sand count for an interval and use a gamma ray of

less than 30 API to discriminate the sand interval (the above figure shows how this could be set
up).
When the 'Run' button is clicked the user will be prompted for a file name in which to save the
report. Once the report is created the file will be automatically opened and displayed. An example
of a report is shown below.
Well : A1
Date Run : 27/07/2005 11:01:09
Curve Units Nulls Fail Disc Top Bottom Net Min Max Mean
Median Mode Std Dev
Imp:GR GAPI 0 2 2951.293 2972.571 21.127 31.078 141.875 59.028

47.313 37.100 28.185
Imp:DT US/F 0 2 2951.293 2972.571 21.127 58.875 75.500 64.691
63.250 61.947 4.356
Imp:NPHI v/v_decima 0 2 2951.293 2972.571 21.127 0.029 0.189 0.091
0.076 N/A 0.037
Imp:RHOB G/CC 0 2 2951.293 2972.571 21.127 2.405 2.762 2.614
2.626 2.681 0.092
The 'Fail Disc' column reports the number of depth steps, within the selected depth range, that
fail to pass any discriminator logic that has been set up by the user.
The 'Net' interval is the number of good samples (non-NULL values) multiplied by the 'Well Step'
interval. For a curve with all non-NULL data, the Net interval will not be equal to the Bottom
minus Top depth, but will be equal to the Bottom minus Top depth plus one database sample
increment.
The 'Mode' is calculated by sorting the data into a 50 cell histogram and taking the highest cell
height (need on average at least 3 values per cell).
The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons at the bottom of the screen allow the user to save and re-load
set-up formats for the module.

19.12 Multi-Well Curve Statistics

'Multi-Well Curve Statistics' allows the user to display and report curve statistics on multiple
curves in multiple wells in an IP database. The module is organized on 3 tabs. These are :
'MultiWell Curves'
'Report'
'Discriminators'
'MultiWell Curves' Tab

Select the wells to report curve statistics for, by 'clicking' in a blank row and highlighting
a well from the drop-down list. Alternatively, 'click' on the 'Well Name' column title to
quickly select all in-memory wells. The selected well list can then be further modified by
'ticking' or 'un-ticking' the 'Use' column on the left-hand side of the grid. 'Click' on the '
Use' column title to toggle between selecting all wells / selecting no wells to include in
the report.
'Clicking' the 'Advanced Well Select' allows the user to utilize the 'Well List'
functionality to select and load sub-sets of database wells.
Curves are selected by highlighting a curve name in the 'Available Curves' panel and
then either;
Section 19.12 Data Viewing : Multi-Well Curve Statistics

Click on the '>' chevron to copy the curve name into the 'Selected Curves All
Wells' panel, or
Drag/drop a curve name from the 'Available Curves' panel to the 'Selected
Curves All Wells' panel.
If the selected curve is present in the other selected wells in the list, the curve name will
be highlighted in red text colour in those wells. If the equivalent curve is not named
consistently between wells, the user must identify and select all appropriate curve names
in all the wells, before running the statistics. To do this, 'click' in a well row. The curves
associated with that well will be listed in the 'Available Curves' list. Select the curves
you wish to include by drag/drop or using the '>' or '>>' buttons. Alternatively, the user
could use the Multi-Well - Manage Curve Headers module to name curves
consistently across the entire well dataset.
The user can choose to display curve statistics over a particular zone or group of zones in multiple
wells by using the 'Define' button at the right-hand end of each selected 'Well' row. The following
window is launched:
If a selected well does not contain the Zone / Tops Set or the 'Top' or 'Bottom' are not defined in a
well, the well will be de-selected from the main 'Multi-Well Curve Statistics' window.
The corresponding 'check box' in the 'Use' Column will be cleared. At this point the user can
choose either :
to continue with the operation, excluding wells that have been de-selected, or
to edit the appropriate Zone /Tops set (See Edit Zone Tops) to add the missing Tops
and Bottoms in the de-selected wells, save the edits and re-apply the 'Define' filter.

The 'Report' Tab

The 'Report' Tab allows the user to select the statistics that are to be saved in the report,
including an interactive selection of percentile values to return. The report can either be output as
a 'Space Delimited' (.txt) text file for viewing in Notepad or as a 'Comma Delimited' (.csv) file for
viewing in a spreadsheet program.
The 'Discriminators' Tab

The 'Discriminators' tab can be used to further refine the selection of data for which to report the
statisitics. Discriminators are particularly useful if the user wants to find out the average value or
net interval of a curve over an interval. For example: the user wants to do a quick net sand count
for an interval and use a gamma ray of less than 30 API to discriminate the sand interval.
When the 'Run' button is clicked the user will be prompted for a file name under which to save the
report. Once the report is created the file will be automatically opened and displayed. The
following is an example of a Multi-Well curve statistics report:

Date Run : 27/07/2005 11:32:49
Well Curve Units Nulls FailDisc Top Bottom Net Min Max Mean Median Mode Std Dev
A1 Imp:GR GAPI 19 0 2781.976 3142.040 359.299 7.484 160.000 79.095 81.813 21.211 43.395
A2 GR GAPI 0 0 3500.000 3684.972 185.126 19.953 160.375 68.367 57.219 32.591 34.533
A3 GR GAPI 0 0 2860.000 3220.064 360.211 10.711 183.375 86.616 97.375 98.770 44.186
A4 GR GAPI 0 0 3010.000 3327.963 318.113 10.328 167.375 70.096 80.000 96.704 31.126

19.13 Curve and Set Names

The 'Curve and Set Names' option launches the 'Curve Select' window, which gives the user a
handy window from which to 'drag and drop' curve names into IP modules.
All curve Sets for the active well are shown in the lower panel of the window. 'Clicking' between
Set names changes the curve list in the upper panel to help to filter for the appropriate curve.
If the user changes the active well, clicking the 'Refresh' button on the 'Curve Select' window will
update the window for the new well and its Sets/curves.
Section 19.13 Data Viewing : Curve and Set Names

19.14 Tool Bars

See the section on Toolbars in the 'User Interface and Data Entry' chapter.
Section 19.14 Data Viewing : Tool Bars

Section
20
Calculation and Correction
Senergy Calculation and Correction 721
20 Calculation and Correction

The 'Calculation and Correction' Modules provide the user with the functionality to perform log
environmental corrections and to compute and convert various basic petrophysical parameters
such as 'Temperature gradients', 'Rw from SP' and 'Curves from Zones / Parameters'. In
addition, there are a number of modules that deal with interpretation 'parameters' and their
distribution in a multi-well project setting. See 'Parameter Set Management' for a discussion of
this important topic.
The following modules are included:
'User Formula'
'Multi-Line Formula'
'Basic Log Analysis Functions'
'Temperature Gradient'
'Rw from SP'
'True Vertical Depth'
'True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness'
'Curve From Zone / Parameters'
'Curve Integration'
'Environmental Corrections'
Section 20. Calculation and Correction :

20.1 User Formula

The 'User-Defined formula' module can be used to manipulate 'conventional' single dimensional
curve and multi-dimensional 'array' curve data, either:
using a simple one-line-formula format, or
incorporating various discriminator and 'if' / 'then' / 'else' logic statements as part of the
computation.
The module can be used to very-easily create a curve with a fixed value, or to calculate a complex
formula. Discriminators can be used to limit the depth range over which the calculation can take
place. It is worth avoiding the use of single letter curve names in the formula, such as the letter 'e'
or combining letters and numbers in the same curve name, for example e42 etc. This can cause
syntax errors.
Performing math functions on array-type curves is discussed in the section on 'Working with
array (multi-dimensional) curves'.
The module is accessed from the main 'Calculation' menu 'User Formula' option.
The module works using the FORTRAN type expression; 'If or / and then else '. The
example shown above uses values of the RDEEP and VCL curves to decide which porosity
formula to use to create the result curve PHIden.
The use of 'Discriminator logic', found in the top row of the window, is optional, and if the
discriminator text boxes are left 'blank' then only the top Formula line ('then') is computed. The
discriminator boxes can either contain curve names or numeric values.
The following functions are available (The syntax for each function is shown in bold font at the end
of each line) :
* : Multiply
Section 20.1 Calculation and Correction : User Formula

+ : Add
- : Subtract
/ : Divide
** : Raise to power - x**y
^ : Raise to power (same as '**') - x^y
Log : Returns the Logarithm to the base 10 - LOG(number or curve name)
Alog : Returns the Antilogarithm to the base 10 of a number - ALOG(number or
curve name)
Ln : Returns the Natural logarithm of a number - LN(number or curve name)
EXP : Returns 'e' raised to the power of a given number - EXP(number or curve
name)
Tan : Returns the tangent of an angle. Input in degrees - TAN(number or curve
name)
Sin : Returns the Sine of an angle. Input in degrees - SIN(number or curve
name)
Cos : Returns the Cosine of an angle. Input in degrees - COS(number or curve
name)
ATan : Returns the Arctangent of an angle. Output in degrees - ATAN(number or
curve name)
ASin : Returns the Arcsine of an angle. Output in degrees - ASIN(number or
curve name)
ACos : Returns the Arccosine of a number. Output in degrees - ACOS(number or
curve name)
Sqrt : Returns the Square Root of a number - SQRT(number or curve name)
Abs : Returns the Absolute value of a number, a number without its sign - ABS(
number or curve name)
Min : Returns the smallest of two parameters separated by a comma - MIN(
number1 or curve1, number2 or curve2,...)
Max : Returns the maximum of the two parameters separated by a comma - MAX(
Trunc : Truncates a number by removing all digits after the decimal place - TRUNC(
number or curve name,num_digits)
Random : Generates a random number between 0 - 1 at each depth level. Useful for
adding noise to a curve.
The 'Min' and 'Max' functions can be 'nested', for example - to provide limits to function equations.
The following example would calculate a VCL curve from the GR curve and limit its result to
between 0 and 1.

The order in which expressions are evaluated is traditional. Braces/brackets can be used to 'nest'
expressions.
An example of using the 'Random' expression is given below:
NOTE: Since the result is completely random each time the formula is run then a different result
curve will be generated.
Text-entry boxes that allow the user to manually type the curve name in, will also allow the curve
to be selected using the generic 'Curve Type' reference (see Manage Curve Headers). The user

prefixes an '@' character to the 'Curve Type'. For example '@GammaRay' will select the gamma
ray curve, '@density' will select the density curve, etc...
Output 'Control' Options

In the lower part of the 'User-Defined Formula' window, the check- and text entry-boxes enable
the user to set the output curve properties:
'Clip Resultant Curves' - The 'Clip Resultant curves' check box, when 'checked' can
be used to clip the output 'Result Curve' maximum and minimum values to within
user-defined limits. The 'Minimum value:' and 'Maximum Value:' text entry boxes are
only active when this check box is 'checked'.
'Result Curve' - The 'Result Curve' list box allows the user to select an output curve to
write the computation results to, from the existing curve list. Alternatively, the user can
type in a curve name for the 'Result Curve'.
'Units' - The 'Units' text box enables the user to type in a measurement unit for the '
Result Curve'.
'Check for null data' - The 'Check for null data' box, if 'checked', will check all input
curves for null data (-999) and, if nulls are found, will set the output curve to null values
at the same depth step. If not 'checked', then the user is responsible for handling null
data problems within the equations.
'Auto Save' - The 'Auto Save' box, if 'checked', will automatically save a
user-defined formula to an external ".frm" file when the 'Run' button is clicked. The
".frm" file will be named using the 'Result Curve' name. In the screen shown above, the
auto-saved formula file will be called PHIden.frm.
The 'Top' and 'Bottom' depths over which to run the computation, if left 'blank' will
default to the entire well depth range. The user can manually type in depth values.
Computation depth ranges can also be set using 'Zone Names'. 'Clicking' on the
button launches the following 'Select Zone Depths' window:
The user selects the 'Top Set' or 'Zone Set' from the drop-down list at the top of the window. You
can then select the 'Top' and 'Bottom' depths from the zone list drop-down boxes. In the 'Return'
panel, the user has the option of returning numerical values or zone names.
If the 'Depth' option is selected, numbers are returned in the main User-Formula
window.
If the 'Zones' option is selected, then the actual zone names are returned, as illustrated
below.
When the 'OK' button is 'clicked' on the window, the selected zone top and bottom depths are
returned to the formula window.

If 'Zone Names' are returned and the formula is 'Run' and 'Auto Saved' or 'Save Formula' is
'clicked', then these zone names will be used to look up the depth range over which to run the
user-formula. The advantage of this option is that the same formula can be then be used in
multiple wells and run over the same formation interval, even though the formation top and bottom
depths will vary from well to well. This can be especially useful if the formulae are being run in the
'Multi-Well Batch' module.
Once the formula has run successfully a message box will now appear informing the
user of this.
The 'Save Formula' and 'Load Formula' buttons are used to save and reload the
user-formula so that they can be re-called and re-used. The default directory in which to
save the expressions is defined under 'File' 'Set Default File Location' on the main
IP menu.
'Clear' button - The 'Clear' button clears all entries in the window so that a new formula
can be created.
Working with Array (multi-dimensional) Curves

All the Math functions that can be performed on conventional curves execute on array type
curves. For example, applying the 'SQRT' function to an array curve will calculate and return the
square root of each value in the input array curve to an output array curve with the same
dimensions as the input array.

In addition, functions can be executed involving multiple array curves. The following section
describes how multi-dimensional array operations will be handled within the IP 'User Formula'
and 'Multi-line Formula' modules. The examples show how IP handles math operations on
arrays of different dimensions: The examples use the multiply (*) function for the illustrations.
If the following array curve dimensions are defined ;
'Cap' : X = 100, Z = 2
'Por' : X = 1, Z = 2
'Phi' : X= 1, Z = 1 non array curve
'Cp' : X = 2, Z = 2
'Result' : X = 100, Z = 2
Example 1. Result = Cap x Cp should yield :

Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Cp (1, 1)
Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Cp (1, 2)
Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Cp (2, 1)
Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Cp (2, 2)
Result(3, 1) = NullValue Cp(3,1) does not exist
Etc etc
NOTE: Calculations only work where array dimensions are compatible.
Example 2. Result = Cap x Por should yield :

Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Por(1, 1)
Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Por(1, 2)
Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Por(1, 1)
Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Por(1, 2)
Result(3, 1) = Cap(3, 1) * Por(1, 1)
Result(3, 2) = Cap(3, 2) * Por(1, 2)
Etc etc
NOTE: This is a special case where the Por array has only one X dimension.
Example 3. Result = Cap x Phi should yield :

Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(3, 1) = Cap(3, 1) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(3, 2) = Cap(3, 2) * Phi(1, 1)
Etc etc
NOTE: This is a special case where the Phi curve has only one X and one Z dimension i.e. Non
array curve

20.2 Multi-Line User Formula

The 'Multi-Line User Formula' module allows the user to create and execute multiple formula
lines in a single interface. Intermediate steps in a calculation 'stream' can be set up to create
output curves in order to QC the formula workflow. Formula lines can be 'flagged' as 'continuation
lines' to enable very long character strings to be implemented in a user-friendly way.
The module incorporates 'Excel' Spreadsheet style logic key words 'IF', 'AND', 'OR', compiles and
executes 'nested' logic equations, allows formula lines to be 'commented' out and allows formulae
to be saved and reloaded to be applied in multiple wells.
NOTE: It is worth avoiding the use of single letter curve names in the formula, such as the letter
'e' or combining letters and numbers in the same curve name, for example e42 etc. This can
cause syntax errors.
The module is able to perform mathematical operations on array-type curves. This is explained in
more detail in the 'Working with array (multi-dimensional curves' section.
The module is launched from the main IP 'Calculation' menu list or from the 'User Formula'
Toolbar, which is launched from the 'View' menu 'Toolbars' option.
The user interface comprises a 'grid' type display which is organized in the following column order,
from left to right:
'Line' : The Line number of the formula, saved to the external multi-line formula text file (
.mlf) when the 'Save' Button is selected.
'Use' : A 'check' box flag, which toggles between 'on' / 'off', instructing IP to treat a line
as a formula or not. If the box is not 'checked' then the line is treated as a text /
comment line. The text is saved in the .mlf file, when the 'Save' button is clicked. This
allows the user to include some explanatory documentation with the multi-line formula,
as illustrated in Line 2, Line 4 and Line 7, above.
'Cont.' : A 'check' box flag, which toggles between 'on' / 'off', instructing IP to treat a line
Section 20.2 Calculation and Correction : Multi-Line User Formula

as the 'continuation' of the preceding equation line. This is useful for breaking up a
long, complex formula into more manageable components.
'Out' : A 'check' box flag, which toggles between 'on' / 'off', instructing IP to treat the
result of an equation line as an 'output'.
'Name' : When 'Out' is 'checked', the 'Name' text box is used to either type in a 'result
curve name' or select the name of an existing curve from the drop-down curve list.
'Unit': When 'Out' and 'Name' are selected, the user can type in the 'curve units' for the
output curve.
'Formula' : This text box is where the user either types in the formula that you wish to
execute ('Use' column 'checked') or the user can type in comments that explain the
multi-line workflow ('Use' column 'un-checked') , as illustrated above.
The following functions are available (The syntax for each function is shown in bold font at the end
of each line) :
* : Multiply
+ : Add
- : Subtract
/ : Divide
** : Raise to power - x**y
^ : Raise to power (same as '**') - x^y
Log : Returns the Logarithm to the base 10 - LOG(number or curve name)
Alog : Returns the Antilogarithm to the base 10 of a number - ALOG(number or
curve name)
Ln : Returns the Natural logarithm of a number - LN(number or curve name)
EXP : Returns 'e' raised to the power of a given number - EXP(number or curve
name)
Tan : Returns the tangent of an angle. Input in degrees - TAN(number or curve
name)
Sin : Returns the Sine of an angle. Input in degrees - SIN(number or curve
name)
Cos : Returns the Cosine of an angle. Input in degrees - COS(number or curve
name)
ATan : Returns the Arctangent of an angle. Output in degrees - ATAN(number or
curve name)
ASin : Returns the Arcsine of an angle. Output in degrees - ASIN(number or
curve name)
ACos : Returns the Arccosine of a number. Output in degrees - ACOS(number or
curve name)
Sqrt : Returns the Square Root of a number - SQRT(number or curve name)
Abs : Returns the Absolute value of a number, a number without its sign - ABS(
number or curve name)
Min : Returns the smallest of two parameters separated by a comma - MIN(
Max : Returns the maximum of the two parameters separated by a comma - MAX(
Trunc : Truncates a number by removing all digits after the decimal place - TRUNC(
number or curve name,num_digits)
Random : Generates a random number between 0 - 1 at each depth level. Useful for
adding noise to a curve.
Logical 'IF' / 'THEN' / 'ELSE' / 'AND' / 'OR' statements can also be implemented in the user

scripts. They need to be formatted in 'Excel spreadsheet' style i.e. in brackets with comma
separators between each statement. The 'AND', 'OR' statement only applies to one logical
condition. If more than one logical condition is required then the 'AND' statement has to be
nested.
IF : IF(logical_test, value_if_true, value_if_false)

AND : AND (logical1)
OR : OR (logical1)
The following example shows the syntax for an IF / THEN / ELSE type equation.
NOTE: the first processing step, when the 'Run All' button is clicked, is to re-combine all
'Continuation' lines into a single line statement to check the syntax, like that shown in row 6 of the
example shown above.
NOTE: The 'Output Curve' (the 'Results' curve) should be named in the first row of the grid, in
the 'Name' cell. Curve 'Dpor' is the output curve for the formula shown above.
NOTE: Rows in the multi line formula can be re-ordered by clicking in the 'Line' number box on
the left-hand margin of the screen and dragging the row to another position in the interface.
Some examples of IF / AND and IF / OR statement syntax are illustrated in the following screen
captures:-
IF(AND(x <y, z > y),value_if_true, value_if_false)
This is one way this statement could be entered:-

Alternatively, it could be written all on the same line:-
A statement which includes a number of 'AND' conditions could be entered like this:-

IF(OR(x <y, x > z), value_if_true, value_if_false)
For more than one 'OR' condition then the equation can be entered like this:-

An example of using the 'Random' expression is given below:
NOTE: Since the result is completely random each time the formula is run then a different result
curve will be generated.
Error Messages
When the user 'clicks' the 'Run All' button, IP checks the multi-line formula syntax. If there are
syntax errors, a message is launched which advises the user of the location of the error in the
entered formulae. An example is illustrated below where a missing brace, ')', has been detected.
This allows the user to 'de-bug' their formula.

The position of the missing brace, ')' is given as position 19. The text file below, is a manually
created representation of how the Multi-Line Formula positional logic works.
The buttons which allow the user to add and delete rows in the grid and to set the depth range
over which to execute the formulae are arranged below the formula text 'grid'. These are shown
below:

'Output Set' button - Allows the user to select the output Curve Set for the results curve
from the formula execution.
'Add Line' button - The user can append additional lines to the multi-line interface by
clicking this button.
'Delete Line' button - The user can delete a line from the multi-line interface by clicking
in any 'cell' in the 'row-to-delete', then clicking the 'Delete Line' button. Alternatively, if
you just want to temporarily switch 'off' an equation line, un-check the 'Use' cell in that
line of the formula.
'Check for null data' 'check' box - when 'checked' the program will interrogate all input
curves for null values. If null data are found then the multi-line formula will return a null
value at the equivalent depth, in the result curve(s). if the option is left 'un-checked', null
values will be counted in the computations and it is likely that there will be some
unpredictable values in the output curves.
'Top' and 'Bottom' depth entry boxes - the user can either:
manually type in a depth range over which to run a multi-line formula. The
default depth range, if the boxes are left 'blank, is the well top to well bottom
depths, or
use the 'Select Zone Depths' shortcut button to launch the dialog from
which to choose a Tops Set and the Top Zone depth and Bottom Zone depth for
the calculations, as shown above. The user selects the 'Top Set' or 'Zone Set'
from the drop-down list. You can then select the 'Top' and 'Bottom' depths from
the zone list drop-down boxes. When the 'OK' button is 'clicked', the selected
zone top and bottom depths are returned to the formula window.
In the 'Return' panel, there are two options to choose from. If the 'Depth' option
is selected, numeric values are returned in the main Multi-Line Formula window.
However, if the 'Zones' option is selected, then the actual zone names are
returned, as illustrated below.

If 'Zones' are returned and the formula is executed and 'Save' is 'clicked', then
these zone names will be used to look up the depth range over which to run the
user-formula. The advantage of this option is that the same formula can be then be
used in multiple wells in an IP database and run over the same formation interval,
even though the formation top and bottom depths will vary from well to well. This
can be especially useful if the formulae are being run in the 'Multi-Well Batch'
module.
The 'function' buttons are arranged at the bottom of the interface:
'Run All' button - Clicking this button will execute all the 'active' formula lines (those
lines with the 'Use' column 'checked'). The user will be informed if the formula(e) ran
successfully or an error dialog window will be launched if the formula syntax is incorrect ,
for example having mismatched parentheses '()' in a long equation. The error message
will indicate which part of the equation is incorrect. A 'Status' message is also displayed
in the information bar at the bottom left-hand corner of the window.
'Load' button - Use this button to re-load a previously saved multi-line formula (.mlf)
from file.
'Save' button - Use this button to save a newly-created multi-line formula to the IP
database.
'Clear All' button - Use this button to clear all entries/ comments in the multi-line formula
'grid'.
Changing the order of Formula Lines

The user has the functionality to change the order in which formula lines are executed by 'clicking'
in the left-hand column and dragging a row up or down, to another position in the grid.
Inserting 'Comments' lines

The user can insert text strings into a formula line in the interface which will be saved with the
multi-line formula file. The 'Use' check box must be 'un-checked' so that IP does not try to use
the line in the formula workflow.

Text-entry boxes that allow the user to manually type the curve name in, will also allow the curve
to be selected using the generic 'Curve Type' reference (see Manage Curve Headers). The user
prefixes an '@' character to the 'Curve Type'. For example '@GammaRay' will select the gamma
ray curve, '@density' will select the density curve, etc...
Using the 'List Curves / Sets' Functionality

Curve names can be dragged / dropped into a formula line from the 'List Curves /Sets' list box as

illustrated below. Note: a formula line will only allow curves to be dragged / dropped into it when
the 'Formula' text box is bordered in a dark grey colour. Click once in a 'Formula' box to set the
box to accept drag / drop entries. When the Formula text is 'highlighted' (white text on blue
background) the drag / drop functionality does not work.
Working with Array (multi-dimensional) Curves

The 'Multi-Line Formula' module has been built to accommodate the use of array-type curves in
calculations. All the Math functions that can be performed on conventional curves will now
execute on array type curves. For example, applying the 'SQRT' function to an array curve will
calculate and return the square root of each value in the input array curve to an output array curve
with the same dimensions as the input array.
In addition, functions can be executed involving multiple array curves. The following section
describes how multi-dimensional array operations will be handled within the IP 'User Formula'
and 'Multi-line Formula' modules. The examples show how IP handles math operations on
arrays of different dimensions: The examples use the multipy (*) function for the illustrations.
If the following array curves have dimensions defined as;
'Cap' : X = 100, Z = 2
'Por' : X = 1, Z = 2
'Phi' : X= 1, Z = 1 (non array curve)
'Cp' : X = 2, Z = 2
'Result' : X = 100, Z = 2 (the 'result' array curve dimensions)
Example 1. Result = Cap multiplied by Cp should yield :

Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Cp (1, 1)
Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Cp (1, 2)
Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Cp (2, 1)
Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Cp (2, 2)

Etc etc
NOTE: Calculations only work where array dimensions are compatible.
Example 2. Result = Cap multiplied by Por should yield :

Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Por(1, 1)
Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Por(1, 2)
Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Por(1, 1)
Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Por(1, 2)
Result(3, 1) = Cap(3, 1) * Por(1, 1)
Result(3, 2) = Cap(3, 2) * Por(1, 2)
Etc etc
NOTE: This is a special case where the 'Por' array has only one X dimension.
Example 3. Result = Cap multiplied by Phi should yield :

Result(1, 1) = Cap(1, 1) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(1, 2) = Cap(1, 2) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(2, 1) = Cap(2, 1) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(2, 2) = Cap(2, 2) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(3, 1) = Cap(3, 1) * Phi(1, 1)
Result(3, 2) = Cap(3, 2) * Phi(1, 1)
Etc etc
NOTE: This is a special case where the 'Phi' curve has only one X and one Z dimension i.e. Non
array curve

20.3 Basic Log Analysis Functions

The 'Basic Log Analysis Functions' module performs a number of simple log analysis
calculations and unit conversions. The module is arranged on five 'tabs'. These are:
'Porosity'
'Matrix'
'Rw Apparent / Sw'
'Permeability'
'Derivatives'
'Conversions'
'Conversions 2'
Each 'tab' works as a stand-alone operation and the 'Run Tab' button must be 'clicked' for each
page to make the calculations. However, if the module is used in the 'Multi-Well Batch' module,
then each tab will be run automatically, if an output curve name is specified and the module tick
box is 'checked'.
'Porosity' Tab
Section 20.3 Calculation and Correction : Basic Log Analysis Functions

Density porosity is calculated using :
'Convert density porosity to Bulk Density' check box enables the user to calculate a bulk
density curve from an input porosity curve using :
When the 'Convert density porosity to Bulk Density' check box is 'checked' the 'Input Density'
name changes to 'Input Porosity' and the 'Output Porosity' name changes to 'Output Density'.
The selected curves within the boxes DO NOT change. It is up to the user to select the required
input and output curves from the drop-down curve lists or to manually type in curve names before
'clicking' the 'Run Tab'.
Sonic porosity is calculated using :

Wyllie
Hunt - Raymer
Where:
Vma = 1/Dtma
Vf = 1/Dtfl
Vlog = 1/Dt
The Neutron input is already in porosity units and the routine simply performs lithology
transformations. The user sets the input and output lithology along with the type of neutron tool.
The program then looks up the lithology transform for the tool and outputs the corrected neutron
porosity.
The neutron tool lithology conversions are made using Look-up Tables. These are also used by
the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module. The 'Output Porosity' curve PhiNeu is a Neutron '
Curve Type' rather than a Porosity (Phi) 'Curve Type'.
The 'Limits' option allows the user to limit the resultant porosity curve values to lie within a certain
range. This can be useful for making sure no negative porosities are calculated.
'Matrix' Tab

The 'Matrix' tab outputs various lithology indicator curves. The user enters the input curves and
then selects the outputs required.
For the 'Density' curve a 'Fluid Density' value is required in the adjacent box. This will be the
fluid density in the flushed zone.
The 'Neutron' curve input must be in decimal limestone lithology units and its tool type must be
set. If the input neutron is in sandstone units it must first be converted to limestone using the
neutron equations in the 'Porosity' tab.
The 'Sonic' curve input requires the fluid sonic input and the equation type, Wyllie or
Hunt-Raymer.
'Rho matrix apparent' is calculated by first calculating the neutron / density crossplot porosity
and then the matrix density using the density equation in the 'Porosity' tab. The neutron/density
crossplot porosity uses the neutron tool type to generate the standard chartbook neutron/density
crossplots for sandstone, limestone and dolomite and then calculates the crossplot porosity from
where the data falls on the chart.

'DT matrix apparent' is calculated using the neutron / sonic crossplot porosity and the requested
sonic equation to solve for DT matrix. The neutron / sonic crossplot porosity is calculated in a
similar fashion to the neutron / density crossplot porosity.
'U matrix apparent' is calculated from the PEF equation using the neutron / density crossplot
porosity.
'U' and 'Uwater' are calculated from the PEF curve and the water density. Equations used for this
can be found in the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module.
The 'M' and 'N' lithology identifiers are calculated as follows :
Crossplots can be output automatically by checking the required crossplot and clicking the 'Make
Crossplots' button.
'Rw Apparent / Sw' Tab

The 'Rw Apparent / Sw' Tab outputs quick-look type apparent water resistivities plus water
saturations calculated from Archie's equation. The Archie formation factor (FF) is also output. The
following equations are used:

Rw and Rmf will be converted to formation temperature using their entered temperature values
and the formation temperature curve. If the Rw temperature and / or the Rmf temperature box are
left blank then no temperature conversion will be made.
Rather than using input curves one can set fixed values. This could be useful for things like
formation temperature where a fixed value may be required.
'Permeability' Tab
The 'Permeability' tab allows for the calculation of permeability using an industry standard
formula. The constants in the formula can be entered by 'clicking' on the 'Use' button in the '
Defaults' box or else selected as curves in the 'Input Curves / Values'.
The 'Timur', 'Morris Biggs oil' and 'Morris Biggs gas' defaults come from the Western Atlas
chartbook, whilst the 'Schlumberger Chart K3' is from the Schlumberger chartbook.
These equations are applicable only over zones which are at irreducible water saturation i.e.
hydrocarbon zones above the transition zone.
'Derivatives' Tab

The 'Derivatives' Tab allows the calculation of the first and second derivative of a curve. The first
derivative operation calculates the slope of the input curve, the second derivative operation, the
rate of change of the slope. These derivative curves can be useful for automatic bed boundary
picking.
The 'Number of samples to use in average' field is used to determine the averaging of the data
that goes into the calculations. A value of 2 will use the two data samples above and the two
below the level of calculation for determining the slope.
'Conversions' Tab

The 'Conversions' tab performs some standard conversions of log analysis type data. The
conversions provide the functionality of various charts found in the standard chart books. These
routines do not output any curves.
'Resistivity Temperature Conversion' will either convert resistivities at one temperature to

another temperature with its equivalent salinity or, if the salinity and temperature is entered, the
resistivity will be calculated.
The 'Pressure' routine calculates pressure at a given depth in a well from a fluid weight.
The 'Water Density' routine calculates water density at a given temperature pressure and salinity.
The 'Mud Resistivity' routines use empirical relationships to calculate Rmf and Rmc from Rm, or
Rm and Rmc from Rmf. The equations are valid for salinities below 70 Kppm. The 'Lowe and
Dunlap' option does not calculate Rmc.
The Lowe and Dunlap equations come from "Estimation of Mud Filtrate Resistivity in Fresh Water
Drilling Mud's" The Log Analyst (March-April 1986).

The Overton and Lipson equations come from "A Correlation of the Electrical Properties of Drilling
Fluids with Solids Content" Transactions AIME (1958)
'Conversions 2' Tab
This new tab calculates downhole oil and gas densities from surface density measurements. The
correlations used are the same as those used in the 'Rock Physics' module and come from the
paper by Batzle and Wang "Seismic Properties of Pore Fluids", Geophysics (1992).
Downhole oil density is calculated from the entered 'Oil' API and 'Gas Density'. Either the 'GOR'
can be entered or the 'Gas Saturated' option 'checked'. In which case the 'GOR' will be
automatically calculated assuming a gas saturated oil.
Downhole gas density is calculated from the entered 'Gas Density'.
'Sigma Water' is calculated using the charts in the Schlumberger chart book (Tcor-2a and
Tcor-3b).
'Sigma Oil' is calculated from 'GOR' using charts in the Western Atlas chart book (8-6 Rev1

12-95 chart book).
'Sigma Gas' is calculated using the Schlumberger chart for 'Methane' (Tcor-1). If 'Wet Gas' is
selected then the methane sigma is corrected as per chart 8-4 in the Western Atlas chart book. If '
Condensate' is selected then the methane sigma is corrected as per chart 8-5 in the Western
Atlas chartbook.
Downhole temperature and pressure must be entered before any of the other calculations can be
made.

20.4 Temperature Gradient

The 'Temperature Gradient' module is used to create a continuous temperature curve, used in
the interpretation modules for converting water resistivities to formation temperatures. The module
is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation' 'Calculate Temperature Gradient'.
The temperature curve can either be calculated by entering a temperature gradient, or by

entering temperatures at fixed points and the program will extrapolate between them. The
temperature gradient is entered in degrees per 100 feet or meters, depending on the units of the
well. A reference depth and temperature also need to be entered to give a starting point for the
temperature curve.
The output curve units are important and are used in the interpretation modules to make the
correct temperature conversions. They are set by toggling the box to the right of the 'Output
Curve' name box. 'F' for Fahrenheit, 'C' for Centigrade.
The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons are used to save and reload the parameters in the module. This is
particularly important if you want to use this module in the Multi-Well batch module.
Section 20.4 Calculation and Correction : Temperature Gradient

20.5 RW from SP
The 'Rw from SP' module is used to create a continuous Rw curve. This is useful for estimating
Rw values over a number of zones. The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation'
'Rw from SP'.
The user enters the baseline-shifted SP curve. The shale baseline must have been set to 0.0 mv.
The baseline shifts can be made in the 'Interactive Baseline Shift' module.
A Formation Temperature curve must be entered. If not available, one can be created using the '
Temperature Gradient' module.
The result RwSP curve will be calculated and corrected to the output temperature entered. The
output temperature can either be a curve or a fixed value.
The optional Salinity curve (leave box blank if not wanted) converts the RwSP results to a salinity
in units of Kppm NaCl equivalent.
The 'Start Depth' and 'Stop Depth' boxes allow the user to specify the calculation interval. If left
blank the whole well will be used.
Section 20.5 Calculation and Correction : RW from SP

20.6 True Vertical Depth Calculations

The 'True Vertical Depth' calculations module is used to create a continuous TVD curve from an
input deviation survey file. It is essential that the TVD curve is calculated over the whole well
interval. If the survey does not cover the whole well interval then a couple of assumptions are
made by the IP program in order to calculate the TVD curve over the whole well interval.
If the survey does not extend to the top of the well then a survey point at zero depth with
zero deviation is added so that the survey can be calculated. This will mean that if at the
first measured survey point the deviation is greater than zero then the deviation values
from surface to the first measured survey point will be incremented to the value of the
deviation at the first measured survey point.
If the survey does not extend to the bottom of the well then a survey point at the bottom
of the well is added with the same azimuth and deviation as the last measured survey
point.
If these assumptions do not fit the users' particular circumstances then they should take action to
remedy their particular situation.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation' 'True Vertical Depth' option. The
module is organized on two 'tabbed' screens. These are :
'TVD Model' Tab

'File or Keyboard Input' Tab
Well deviation survey data can be loaded into the module in four different ways:
1. As curve data: The user should select 'Deviation' and 'Azimuth' curves that already
exist in the IP well and 'check' the 'Input data from well curves' check-box. NOTE: the
input curves must be continuous curves with data at every well depth step. No null
values are permitted in the input Deviation and Azimuth curves.
2. File entry: The user supplies the deviation survey file name and format and loads the
file using the 'File or Keyboard Input' tab.
3. By Keyboard entry: The user manually enters the deviation data on the 'File or
Keyboard Input' tab.
4. Pasting data in from an external file using the 'File or Keyboard Input' tab.
'TVD Model' Tab
Section 20.6 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical Depth Calculations

The 'TVD Model' tab allows the user to set up some of the parameters used in computing TVD /
TVDSS and XY coordinate curves, including the well datum depth, output curve names and
deviation computation algorithm to be used.
'Correct for magnetic deviation' - The 'Correct for magnetic deviation' box allows
the user to make adjustments to the input azimuth data, to correct it for magnetic
declination changes between true north and magnetic north. If used, then the
result-listing Azimuth will be the corrected Azimuth.
Calculation Method Panel

The 'Calculation Method' is set by selecting the required 'Method' radio button. Only one method
can be run at a time but, by saving the result listings to different curve names, comparisons
between the methods can be made.

The following are brief descriptions of the calculation methods.

'Average angle' : The direction between two stations is assumed to be the average of
the direction at each station.
'Triangular Tangential' : The hole is assumed to have a direction the same as the
upper station for half the interval between the stations and a direction the same as the
lower station for the lower half.
'Radius of Curvature' : A spherical arc is generated that passes through the two
stations at the measured station angles.
'Minimum Curvature' : A circular arc is generated between the stations with a minimum
curvature but still being tangential to the borehole at the two stations.
Calculation Reference Panel

The 'Calculation Reference' panel allows the user to specify the positional references for the
deviation survey calculations. These are the depth and X, Y position that the input survey uses
as a starting position. The user can specify a reference depth which is above, below or in the
middle of a deviation survey. For example, if the user wanted to match a known TVD MD pair in
a well they would enter these depths and the rest of the survey would be extrapolated up and
down from this depth.
If the user wanted the program to calculate 'departure' curves 'EDIST' and 'NDIST' containing the
rectangular coordinates of the well bore from surface to well TD, type in the Surface UTM
co-ordinates for the well location into the 'East distance at reference' and 'North distance at
reference' boxes before running the module.
Output Curves Panel

The 'Output Curves' panel allows the user to select the names of the output curves to be
computed by IP. IP will compute both TVD and TVDSS curves, as well as XY positional curves, '
EDIST' and 'NDIST'.
NOTE: It is essential that the TVD ,TVDSS, EDIST and NDIST curves are created for all wells
in an IP database, if the user wishes to use either of the programs visualization tools; 'Well
Map' and/or '3D Parameter Viewer' effectively.
The 'Azimuth' (HAZI) and 'Deviation' (HDEVI) curves are optional outputs. If a name is
inserted into the output boxes, then the Azimuth and Deviation curves are generated at
the Well Step increment, from the input deviation survey data, using the user-selected
calculation method.

MD Elevation - The 'MD Elevation' box will automatically pick up the value in the '
Above Permanent Datum' field in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, on the '
Default Parameters' tab, if it has been filled in. Alternatively, the user can type in the
well reference depth value (usually height above Mean Sea Level) into the 'MD
Elevation' box to allow the program to compute TVD and TVDSS curves. Note: if the
TVD calculation module is run and the 'MD Elevation' value is subsequently changed in
the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, then the user will have to manually type in the
new 'MD Elevation' value and the TVD calculation will have to be re-run for the well,
before hitting the 'Run' button.
Make TVDSS depths negative - The 'Make TVDSS depths negative' 'check' box is
used to flag that the TVDSS depth curve, calculated by IP, should be written as negative
values e.g -100, -200, -300 etc... below Mean Sea Level. The default setting, with the
box 'un-checked', is that TVDSS depths are written as positive values below Mean Sea
Level.
'File or Keyboard Input' Tab

The 'File or Keyboard Input' screen allows the user to view and confirm the input format of
deviation survey data which can either be loaded from an external ASCII file, pasted in from an
Excel or ASCII file or by manually typing data entries into the empty 'grid' at the top of the window.
When an ASCII file is loaded and the appropriate data column format is applied, the ASCII data is
copied into the Upper 'grid' window. Data points can be edited and added into this 'grid', if
necessary, before running the computation.

Loading From an External File

To load data from an external ASCII text file the user should first determine the format of the
ASCII deviation data file:
Is the Deviation / inclination data presented in 'Degrees' or 'Degrees and minutes' ?
Is the Azimuth data presented in 'Degrees' or formatted as a 'Bearing' ?
Then:
Ensure the 'Load from file' check box is 'checked'.
If either 'Deviation in deg /minutes' or 'Azimuth as a Bearing' applies to the input file,
'tick' the appropriate check-box.
Enter the name of the ASCII survey file or select it using the 'Browse' button.
'Click' the 'Load' button to display the contents of the file in the lower panel of the
window. The program will try and determine the format of the input file and will display
the survey data in the grid at the top of the window if it can resolve the format. The user
must make sure the formatting is correct before proceeding to calculate the survey. If
the format is not correct, the user must manually set it. This is achieved in the 'Data
Format' panel by:
1. If the Deviation (inclination) input is in 'degrees and minutes' then 'tick' the check-box '
Deviation in deg / minutes' in the upper right corner of the window. The 'Deviation is in

column' number should point to the 'degrees' column of the Deviation / inclination entry in
the input file.
2. If the Azimuth input is in a 'Bearing' format (for example 'N 30 W' or 'S 20.4 E',
illustrated below) then 'tick' the 'Azimuth as a Bearing' check-box at the upper right hand
corner of the window. The 'Azimuth is in column' number should point to the azimuth
field on the Ascii file. The data should display in the upper, editing grid.
3. Set the line number for the first line of data in the 'Data starts at line' box.
4. Select the column numbers for the 'Depth', 'Deviation' and 'Azimuth' inputs.
5. Set the 'File Format Delimiter'. The options are 'Spaces', 'Tabs', 'Commas', 'Other'
and 'Fixed'
The 'Fixed' format option allows the user to specify the format of the input data. This
should only be necessary if the data has been generated using a 'fortran' type expression
where one number can run into another. The user must enter the format of the data. This
is done by entering the width of each input column separated by a comma. The following
are valid format expressions:
8,8,10,12,12 This can be simplified by using brackets 2(8),10,2(12)

8,10,12,8,10,12 If an expression repeats you can leave out the repeat 8,10,12
10,10,10,10 This could be simplified as 4(10) or just 10
6. Click the 'Apply' button in the 'Data Format' panel of the window to apply the selected
format.
Once the data has been loaded into the 'grid' window at the top of the screen it can then be edited
or added to by manually changing the numbers. The order of depths in the list is not important as
the program sorts the data before making the calculations.
The following examples illustrate the acceptable data formats for files to load deviation data into
IP. NOTE: these deviation and Azimuth data could be included in much larger ASCII files, the
user would then need to specify the column numbers to load into the TVD module interface.
1. Deviation in Degrees and Azimuth in Degrees:
Depth Deviation Azimuth

M Deg Deg
100 0.4000 125.03
500 0.9600 98.30
1000 4.8000 75.32
1500 7.7800 65.23
2000 12.5600 57.92
2500 16.5700 56.72
3000 21.4000 53.20
3500 30.2100 53.39
2. Deviation in Degrees / Minutes, Azimuth in Degrees:

M Deg Min Deg
100 0 56 125.03
500 0 27 98.30
1000 4 25 75.32
1500 7 36 65.23
2000 12 13 57.92
2500 16 29 56.72
3000 21 38 53.20
3500 30 06 53.39
3. Deviation in Degrees, Azimuth as a Bearing:

Meters Degrees Bearing
100 0.4000 N 12.01 W
500 0.9600 N 16.44 E
1000 4.8000 N 18.96 E
1500 7.7800 N 34.08 E
2000 12.5600 N 39.68 W
2500 16.5700 N 45.40 W
3000 21.4000 N 56.72 W
3500 30.2100 N 58.21 W
4. Deviation in Degrees / Minutes, Azimuth as a Bearing:

M Deg Min Bearing
100 0 56 N 12.01 W
500 0 27 N 16.44 E
1000 4 25 N 18.96 E
1500 7 36 N 34.08 E
2000 12 13 N 39.68 W
2500 16 29 N 45.40 W
3000 21 38 N 56.72 W
3500 30 06 N 58.21 W
Keyboard Entry of Deviation Data:

Deviation Survey data can be typed manually into the input 'grid' at the top of the window. 'Check'
the boxes to the right hand side of the grid window to select the format ('Deviation in deg /
minutes' and / or 'Azimuth as a Bearing') if these are appropriate for your input data. The order
of depths in the list is not important since the program sorts the data, using the Depth column
entries, before making the calculations. Click the 'Add Line' button, located to the right hand side

of the input grid to add new lines to the grid table.
When manually entering data where 'Azimuth as a Bearing' is applicable, click in a cell in the '
Azi N/S' or 'Azi E/W' column to toggle between North/South or East/ West settings.
Pasting in from an External File

TVD data can be pasted in from an Excel spreadsheet or from an ASCII text file. It is easiest if the
TVD data in the external file is in the same format as that in the module i.e. Depth, Deviation and
Azimuth columns. Then it is simply a matter of copying the data in the external file, clicking in the
first 'Depth' cell and then clicking the 'Paste' button.
However, even if the data isn't in the correct format it is possible to copy and paste data on a
cell-by-cell basis either using the 'Paste' button or by utilising the 'Cut', 'Copy', 'Paste' and 'Delete'
menu items which become available by highlighting the text within a cell and then right mouse
button clicking.

'Run' : Click the 'Run' button to calculate the survey and output the results to the well as
continuous curves.
Viewing the Calculation Results

The 'View Listing' button at the bottom of the window allows the user to list the calculated survey
that has been saved to disk. When 'clicked', the user will be asked for the name of a file to save
the survey to, and then the program will launch 'NotePad' with the survey file loaded.
The resulting survey file can be reloaded at a later date, using the 'Input from file' option, and the
calculation re-run.
Example of part of a survey listing:

TVD SURVEY CALCULATIONS
Well : Test Well 1

Date : 07/02/2000 17:05:45
Calculation Method : Minimum Curvature

Well reference depth : 0.
TVD at Well reference depth : 0.
East distance at Well reference depth : 0.
North distance at Well reference depth : 0.
Correction made for magnetic deviation : 10.
TVD output curve name : TVD

East distance output curve name : EDIST
North Distance output curve name : NDIST
Measured TVD East North Input Input Leg Leg Leg Leg Curvature
Depth Depth Distance Distance Devi Azimuth Distance TVD East North deg/100ft
0.00 0.00 0.0 0.0 Reference depth
0.00 0.00 0.0 0.0 0.000 10.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
1000.00 999.95 8.1 3.2 1.000 68.200 1000.000 999.949 8.102 3.241 0.100
1286.00 1285.78 17.3 5.8 2.820 76.200 286.000 285.829 9.150 2.605 0.642
1572.00 1571.16 35.6 8.7 4.640 84.200 286.000 285.384 18.343 2.847 0.660
1858.00 1855.81 63.2 9.2 6.460 92.200 286.000 284.652 27.588 0.551 0.690
2144.00 2139.45 99.5 5.0 8.280 100.200 286.000 283.633 36.349 -4.265 0.729
2430.00 2421.78 143.6 -6.5 10.100 108.200 286.000 282.329 44.096 -11.481 0.776
2716.00 2702.52 194.0 -27.4 11.920 116.200 286.000 280.741 50.332 -20.876 0.829

20.7 True Vertical / Stratigraphic Thickness

The 'TVT / TST' module is used to compute 'True Vertical Thickness' (TVT) and 'True
Stratigraphic Thickness' (TST) depth curves which can then be used to make TVT / TST depth
log plots and then these can be used as inputs to 'Cutoff & Summation' reports.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation 'True Vertical / True
Stratigraphic Thickness'.
Section 20.7 Calculation and Correction : True Vertical / Stratigraphic Thickness

Before running this module, the True Vertical Depth module must be run or the results of the
well deviation survey must have been loaded into IP. The borehole 'X', 'Y' and 'Z' ('NDist', 'EDist'
and 'TVD') direction curves must be entered.
The user must enter the 'Depth', 'Dip' and Dip 'Azimuth' of the formations to be
calculated. The program calculates continuous TVT and TST curve over the whole well.
Formations shallower than the 'top entered depth' will be assumed to have the same
dip value as the entered top depth formation dip. Similarly, formations deeper than the '
bottom entered depth' will be assumed to have the same dip as that of the bottom
entered depth.
The 'Add Line' button is used for adding more lines to the grid for data entry. The depth
order that the data is entered does not matter since it will be sorted into ascending depth
order before running the calculations.
Dip 'Azimuth' values can be entered as a bearing e.g. "N 12.01 W", by 'checking' the '
Azimuth in Bearing' box.
The 'Pole Depth' is the starting position for the TVT / TST calculations and it is entered
as the measured depth value from which the calculations are started. If a value is not
entered, it is assumed to be the top depth of the IP well. The resulting 'TVT' and 'TST'
curves will be aligned to the TVD depth at the Pole depth. Calculations for TVT and TST
will be different, depending on whether the formation thickness being calculated is above

or below the Pole depth (See diagram below).
'Click' the 'OK' button to first calculate the zonal TVT and TST thicknesses, which the
program outputs as a report (click 'View Results' after first 'clicking' 'Save results'
otherwise a message will appear informing the user that they have to re-run the
calculations first). The program will then calculate the continuous TVT and TST curves
which can be used for making TVT and TST log plots, or, in the 'Cut-off and
Summation' module, for calculating TVT and TST zonal Net Reservoir / Net Pay results.
The 'Save Results' button allows you to save the current result to disk (this has to be
done before 'clicking' the 'View Results' button, the first time the module is run).
The 'Load Results' button allows you to restore previously calculated results.
The TVT and TST thicknesses between two formation tops / markers are calculated as follows:
TST = H ( Cos(Hdev) Sin(HDev) * Tan(Fdev) * Cos(Hazi - Fazi) ) * Cos(Fdev)

TVT = H ( Cos(Hdev) Sin(HDev) * Tan(Fdev) * Cos(Hazi - Fazi) )
Where:
H : Formation 'Measured Depth' thickness along the well bore
Hdev : Well bore deviation angle from the vertical
Hazi : Well bore azimuth
Fdev : Formation dip angle from the horizontal
Fazi : Formation dip - azimuth
An example output listing follows:
TRUE VERTICAL AND STRATIGRAPHICAL CALCULATIONS
Well : Test Well 1

Date : 08/04/2006 09:28:04

TVD input curve name : TVD

North input curve name : NDIST
East input curve name : EDIST
Well Pole depth : 7614.
TVT output curve name : TVT

TST output curve name : TST
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
| Measured Depth | TVD Depth | Formation | Hole | Thickness |
| Top Bottom Dist | Top Bottom Dist | Devi Azi | Devi Azi | Strat Vert |
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
7614.00 7700.00 86.00 7376.92 7454.32 77.40 12.00 60.00 25.79 127.82 72.81 74.43
7700.00 7779.00 79.00 7454.32 7522.41 68.09 15.00 90.00 30.44 135.41 58.52 60.58
7779.00 8000.00 221.00 7522.41 7702.20 179.79 5.00 270.00 35.42 139.82 186.61 187.33
8000.00 8634.00 634.00 7702.20 8149.28 447.08 2.00 256.00 45.12 145.99 452.46 452.73
8634.00 8726.00 92.00 8149.28 8216.57 67.29 10.00 330.00 43.00 144.81 77.11 78.30
8726.00 8738.00 12.00 8216.57 8225.34 8.78 10.00 330.00 43.00 143.32 10.05 10.21
NOTE: unrealistic TVT / TST thicknesses can be computed in situations where the borehole
deviation is high and formation deviation is high (>45 degrees), such that the well penetrates the
bottom of the formation first , before penetrating the Top of the formation / interval of interest.

20.8 Curves from Zones / Parameters

The 'Curve from Zones / Parameters' module is used to create a continuous curve from a Zone /
Tops set or from an interpretation module (Clay Volume, Porosity / Water Saturation, Mineral
Solver etc...) Parameter set, where each zones depth interval is represented by a numerical 'Flag'
value in the curve. The value applied in each zone can be set either to:
the value of a particular interpretation parameter; for example Rw, m, ND DenClay, or
the 'Zone Number', or
A 'default', or user-defined value, based on 'Zone Names'.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Calculation' ' Curve from Zones /
Parameters'.
The user selects the 'Parameter Set' and the 'Result Curve' name. The zones for the selected '
Parameter Set' will be displayed in the right-hand panel. The user can edit the values to be set in
the result curve for each zone. The 'default' value is to use the zone number as the 'flag' value.
For example in the above example, if zone 'LS3' is from 7800'-8000' then the value '5' will be put
into the result curve over this depth interval.
If you have a multi-well Tops Set and you wish to assign flag curve values based on the Tops Set
zone names this can be set up very easily - either take the default values based on the Zone
Numbers (the numbers in brackets in the 'Zone Name' column) or change the 'value' entries to
your own requirements. Click the 'Save' button to save the settings to an external, .ztc, disk file.
You can then go to another well containing the same Tops Set, open this module and load the .ztc
file you created earlier. This allows you to create a consistent 'flag' curve, based on your Tops Set
zone names, for a multi-well dataset.
If you select an interpretation module parameter Set, the 'Output parameter values' check-box
will become 'active'. If the box is 'checked' then a parameter associated with the user-selected
Section 20.8 Calculation and Correction : Curves from Zones / Parameters

Parameter Set can be chosen from the drop-down list box to populate the values in the output
curve. The example, below, shows the 'Gamma Ray Clay' parameter (GR Clay) from the 'ClayVol'
Parameter Set has been chosen. The number of Clay Volume interpretation zones in this well is
displayed, along with the associated parameter values, in the right hand panel of the window.
The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons are used to save and re-load the parameters in the module. This is
particularly important if you want to use this module in Multi-Well batch mode. When run in batch
mode the actual parameter values that are saved into the saved parameter file are not used. The
module loads only the 'Parameter Set', the 'Result Curve' name, the 'Output parameter values'
option and the 'Output Parameter'. The number of zones and the zone values will be the default
ones for the well. This means that the same parameter file can be used on multiple wells.
Section 20.8 Calculation and Correction : Curves from Zones / Parameters

20.9 Curve Integration

The 'Curve Integration' module is used to integrate log curves. The module allows the integration
of borehole volume, sonic transit time or any other curve in the database. The module is accessed
under the main menu 'Calculation' ' Curve Integration'.
Borehole Integration
For borehole integration the user enters an X caliper and optionally a Y caliper curve. The input
and output units for the curves must be selected. The program will calculate a hole volume
assuming a circular hole, X caliper only entered, or elliptical hole, X and Y calipers entered.
The output curve will contain the integrated hole volume from the start depth to the stop depth. If
the start depth is greater than the stop depth then the integration will be done in an
upwards direction.
The 'Delete Curve before write' check box, if 'checked', will delete the Output curve, if it already
exists, before running the calculation. If the box is not 'checked', the output curve will be
overwritten only between the start and stop depths.
Section 20.9 Calculation and Correction : Curve Integration

A 'Pip Curve' can be optionally output. This curve will contain a series of values of either 1 or 2,
depending on the 'Small Pip' or 'Large Pip' values. The curve starts with a large pip (value 2) at
the start depth. Each time the integrated curve reaches a multiple of the small pip value, a value 1
is stored in the curve. Each time it reaches an even multiple of the large pip value, a value 2 is
stored in the curve. In between the values, null (-999) data is stored. Pip curves can be plotted
using the 'Pip' line style (example below).
Sonic Integration
The sonic integration allows input in msec/m or msec/ft. Output can either be in seconds or
milliseconds. The example below shows a pip curve displayed alongside the sonic log, giving the
transit time in 1 millisecond per small pip.
Normal Integration
The 'normal' curve integration operation will accumulate a curve from the 'Top Depth' to the '
Bottom Depth'. Each curve sample value will be divided by the well depth step between samples
before it is accumulated. The result curve is therefore the 'Cumulative Value Thickness'. This is
useful, for example, for calculating permeability footage (Md ft) across a reservoir interval.
The 'direction' of the integration can be reversed, so that the accumulation is made from the
bottom of the hole, upwards. This is done by putting the deepest well depth as the 'Top Depth'
and the shallowest depth as the 'Bottom Depth'.


20.10 Environmental Corrections

The 'Environmental Corrections' calculations incorporate the functionality of the logging service
company 'standard' chart book graphs and nomogram's. Environmental correction calculations
are presented here for:
'Schlumberger'
'Anadrill'
'Baker Atlas'
'Halliburton'
'Baker Hughes INTEQ'
'Sperry Sun'
'Weatherford/Reeves'
'PathFinder'
An example of the environmental correction tabs are shown here for:

'Gamma Ray Logs'
'Density Logs'
'Neutron Logs'
'Resistivity Logs'
The Baker Hughes INTEQ, Anadrill, Sperry Sun, Weatherford and PathFinder corrections are
presented for their respective Logging-While-Drilling (LWD) tools.
The Reference Chart Books are:
Schlumberger - Log Interpretation Charts (2000)

Halliburton - Log Interpretation Charts (1994)
Baker Atlas - Log Interpretation Charts (1984)
Baker Hughes Inteq 2002 Log Interpretation Charts (2002)
Sperry Sun - Log Interpretation Charts (1996)
Weatherford Log interpretation Charts Compact Tool Series (2007)
Weatherford Log interpretation Charts Standard Tool Series (2007)
Weatherford Log Interpretation Charts LWD Tool Series (2005)
PathFinder LWD Log Interpretation Charts (2007)
Log Interpretation Charts Links:
Schlumberger : http://www.slb.com/content/services/resources/books/log_charts/index.asp?
Baker Atlas : http://www.bakerhughesdirect.com (user login required)
Baker Hughes Inteq : http://www.bakerhughesdirect.com (user login required)
Halliburton : http://www.halliburton.com (user login required)
Pathfinder : http://www.pathfinderlwd.com/pdf/dnsc_Environmental.pdf
Sperry Sun : http://www.halliburton.com
NOTE: We cannot guarantee that these links now work due to mergers, acquisitions, and just
being downright awkward.
The Corrections calculations are arranged on 'tabs', each 'tab' representing a different 'tool type'.
The number of 'tabs' is determined by the tool-type corrections available from the Logging Service
company.
The following sections describe some of the controls and corrections available for each type of
Section 20.10 Calculation and Correction : Environmental Corrections

service: (Note: this list is not exhaustive but meant to clarify the operation of the tabs to someone
already experienced with applying environmental corrections)
Gamma Ray
The available environmental correction options are specific to the tool being corrected. The
screen shot shown below is for the Gamma Ray log,
Here is a brief explanation of the options:
Input
'Gr input curve' - select the uncorrected gamma curve from the well data.
'Caliper input curve or Hole size (inch)' - allows the user to select a caliper curve or
type in a fixed hole size for the borehole correction.
'Top Depth and Bottom Depth' - allows an interval for which the corrections are to be
applied.
Outputs
'Gr output curve' - select or input the name of the output GR curve that will be

environmentally corrected.
'Filter curve' - The user is able to use the 'Filter curve' option, which applies a
'smoothing function' to the input curve, without running the borehole corrections, by
'un-checking' the 'Borehole Correct' 'check' box. The number of 'levels' of filtering can
be set in the box next to the 'Filter curve' 'check' box - the levels must be a whole, odd
number.
The results can be viewed by selecting the 'Plot Results' button. A simple log plot will
be launched showing the input curves and the GR output curve. The output curve name
is editable.
Environmental Correction Options

'Borehole Correct' - This 'check box' is selected before pressing the 'Run Tab' button
to ensure the following corrections are applied. The various 'Tool Position', 'Mud Type
', 'Hole Type', 'Mud Weight', 'Tool Diameter', 'Standoff' and 'Cased Hole' corrections
are only applied if 'Borehole Correct' is 'checked'.
'Tool Position [Eccentered/Centered]' - Selects the hardware configuration of the
logging tool that recorded the data.
'Mud Type [Non barite/Barite]' - Selects whether barite mud was used.
'Hole Type [Open Hole/cased Hole]' - Selects whether the GR tool was run in open
hole or through casing.
'Mud weight' - Allows the user to input the weight of mud that was used.
'Tool Diameter' - Allows the user to input the diameter of tool that was used to record
the GR curve.
'Standoff' - Allows for a value of standoff to be input (should be completed if '
Eccentered' tool position was used.
'Cased Hole' - The user should complete these details if the GR should be corrected for
casing effects.
Density
The screen shot below is for the Density Log.

Here is a brief explanation of the options:
Input
'Density input curve' - select the uncorrected bulk density curve from the well data.
'PEF input curve' - select the Photoelectric factor curve from the well data.
applied. The number of 'levels' of filtering can be set in the box next to the 'Filter curve'
'check' box - the levels must be a whole, odd number.
Outputs
'Density output curve' - select or input the name of the output Density curve that will be
'un-checking' the 'Borehole Correct' 'check' box.
be launched showing the input curves and the 'Density' output curve. The output curve

name is editable.

to ensure the following corrections are applied. The various 'Mud weight' and 'Density
Tool' corrections are only applied if 'Borehole Correct' is 'checked'.
'Mud weight' - Allows the user to input the weight of mud that was used.
'Density Tool [FDC/LDT]' - Allows the environmental corrections for the correct tool that
recorded the data to be applied.
Compensated Neutron
The following screens show the appearance of the 'CNL' neutron log.
Input
'Neutron input curve' - select the neutron input curve curve from the well data. (Note:
by checking the 'Input Neutron hole size corrected' check box the user can indicate
whether the Neutron input curve has a caliper correction already applied. By checking
the box the caliper correction is 'backed out' and applied through the 'Holesize' check
box.).
'Temperature curve or value' - select the temperature curve from the well data or input

a temperature value that will be used in the temperature correction. (Select the 'DegF' or
'DegC' radio button).
applied.
Outputs
'Neutron Corrected' - select or input the name of the output Neutron curve that will be
'un-checking' the 'Borehole Correct' 'check' box. The number of 'levels' of filtering can
be set in the box next to the 'Filter curve' 'check' box - the levels must be a whole, odd
number.
be launched showing the input curves and the 'Neutron corrected' output curve. The
output curve name is editable.

Borehole Correct - This 'check box' is selected before pressing the 'Run Tab' button to
ensure the following corrections are applied. The various 'Hole size', 'Mud weight', '
Borehole salinity', 'Standoff', 'Matrix' and 'Pressure' corrections are only applied if '
Borehole Correct' is 'checked'.
'Neutron tool [CNT-A/CNT-C/D]' - Allows the environmental corrections for the correct
tool that recorded the data to be applied.
'Input Matrix/Output Matrix [Limestone/Sandstone/Dolomite]' - Allows the Input
Neutron Curve to be corrected for matrix. (If the user wishes simply to convert a
Limestone matrix Neutron curve to Sandstone or Dolomite matrix, 'un-check' the 'Hole
size', 'Mudcake', 'Temperature' etc.. 'check' boxes, select the 'Output Matrix' radio
button for the appropriate matrix and press the 'Run Tab' button).
'Input Neutron hole size corrected' - (See Input).
'Holesize' - Allows for a correction to compensate for the hole size. The neutron tools
response is calibrated for a hole of a particular diameter. The caliper curve or a fixed
value can be selected in 'Caliper input curve or Hole size (inch)' as input to this
correction.
'Mudcake' - This uses the 'Bit size' and then uses the 'Caliper or Hole Size' input to
vary the amount of mudcake and correct for it (i.e. if the mudcake is 0.5" and the bit size
is 8.5", enter the caliper as 8").
'Borehole Salinity' - Corrects for Kppm (NaCl eq) in the borehole.
'Mud Weight' - Corrects for the density of the mud input in the associated box. The '
Barite Mud' check box selects whether the correction used is for Natural Mud or Barite
Mud.
'Borehole Temperature' - Applies the Borehole temperature correction from the '
Temperature curve or value' in the Input.
'Pressure' - Corrects the neutron tool's response for Wellbore Pressure. A single
pressure value can be input into the associated box (the user should pick a value that
best represents the wellbore pressure at the zone of interest). In addition, the correction
is different for Oil Based Mud and this can be selected using the 'Oil Mud' check box
and picking a value for the 'Compressibility Multiplier'. The pressure value can also be
obtained from a depth curve selected from the 'Curve' drop-down box. To use this
method the 'Calculate pressure from depth' box should be 'checked' and the '

Pressure' box 'unchecked' or the value left blank. This depth curve and the 'Mud
Weight' are used to calculate the hydrostatic pressure which is then used in the
correction. (NOTE: For deviated wells the TVD curve should be used for this
correction).
'Formation Salinity' - Allows for a correction for Limestone formation salinity Kppm
(NaCl eq).
Resistivity
The following screens show the appearance of the 'DLL/MSFL/ MLL' resistivity corrections.
Input
'Deep Laterolog (ohmm)' - select the uncorrected Deep Laterolog curve from the well
data.
'Shallow Laterolog (ohmm)' - select the uncorrected Shallow Laterolog curve from the
well data.
'Micro Resistivity (ohmm)' - select the uncorrected Micro Resistivity curve from the well
data.
'Temperature curve or value' - select the Temperature curve from the well data or input

a temperature value that will be used in the temperature correction. (Select the 'DegF' or
'DegC' radio button).
'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' - allows an interval for which the corrections are to be
applied.
Outputs
'Deep Laterolog (ohmm)' - select or create the environmentally corrected Deep
Laterolog curve.
'Shallow Laterolog (ohmm)' - select or create the environmentally corrected Shallow
Laterolog curve.
'Micro Resistivity (ohmm)' - select or create the environmentally corrected Micro
Resistivity curve.
'un-checking' the 'Borehole Correct' 'check' box.
be launched showing the input curves and the 'Resisitivity' output curves. The output
curve name is editable.

to ensure the following corrections are applied. The various 'Mud Resistivity', '
Mudcake Resistivity', 'Tool Type', 'Tool Position' corrections are only applied if '
Borehole Correct' is 'checked'.
'Mud Resistivity' - Correct for Resistivity of mud at reference temperature 'Mud Res
Temp'.
'Mudcake Resistivity' - Correct for mudcake resistivity at reference temperature '
Mudcake Res Temp'. The mud cake thickness is calculated using the 'Bit size' and
then the 'Caliper or Hole Size' input to vary the amount of mudcake and correct for it.
'Dual Laterolog Tool Type [DLT-B/DLT-D/E]' - Allows the user to chose the laterolog
tool used to record the data.
'Tool Position [Eccentered/Centered]' - Selects the hardware configuration of the
logging tool that recorded the data.
'Microresistivity Tool Type [MSFL(regular)/MSFL(Slim hole)/MLL]' -Selects the type
of tool that was used to record the micro-resistivity measurement.
20.10.1 Schlumberger Corrections

The 'Schlumberger Corrections' environmental correction module uses the algorithms
distributed by Schlumberger in their 'Green Book' library. Tool types are organized on a series of
'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type.
See Environmental Corrections help main page for information on the operation of the tabs.
The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Gamma Ray tool.

The list below gives an indication of which chart(s) (Schlumberger Log Interpretation Charts
2000 Edition) each of the tabs relate to.
'Gamma Ray' Gamma Ray correction charts GR1, GR2 and GR3
tab
'Density' tab Environmental Corrections to Formation Density Log (FDC) and
Litho-Density Log (LDT) chart Por-15a.
'CNL' tab Compensated Neutron Log (CNL) Borehole correction charts

Por-14a, Por-14c and Por-14d.
'Neutron Compensated Neutron Log (CNL) NPHI-TNPH conversion chart

Conversion' tab Por-14e.
'SNP' tab Sidewall Neutron Porosity Log (SNP) mudcake and matrix
correction charts Por-15a and Por-13a.
'DLL/MSFL/MLLDual Laterolog (DLT-D/E) Borehole correction charts Rcor-2b

' tab and Rcor-2c.

Microlaterolog mudcake correction chart Rxo-2.
MicroSFL mudcake correction chart Rxo-3.
'Induction' tab Induction Log Borehole correction chart Rcor-4a.

Spherically Focused Log (SFL) Borehole correction chart
Rcor-3.
Phasor Induction Borehole correction chart Rcor-4b and
Rcor-4c.
'HALS No information at present.

Laterolog' tab
'EPT' tab EPT-G mudcake correction charts EPTcor-3a through to
EPTcor-4b.
'DIL Invasion' Dual Induction (DIL) - Spherically Focused Log (SFL) Invasion
tab correction charts Rint-2b and Rint-2c.
Deep Induction- Spherically Focused Log (SFL)-Rxo device
Invasion correction chart Rint-5.
Dual Induction (DIL)-Rxo device Invasion correction chart
Rint-10.
'DLL Invasion' Dual Laterolog (DLT-D/E)-Rxo device Invasion correction chart

tab Rint-9b.
The 'Filter Curve' option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows the user
to resolution-match log curves. The Caliper and temperature input boxes always allow the user to
enter a curve or a fixed value.
The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save and restore the parameters associated with
the environmental corrections to a disk file. The parameters are automatically stored in the well
database. However, the 'Save' and 'Load' options give the user more flexibility.
The button has a similar function to those found in other modules. See Depth Entry Boxes
Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the zone navigation
buttons and the 'Delete Zone' button found at the bottom of the window. For example, if the
number of zones is 1 and you click the 'right arrow' zone navigation button, you will be asked if
you want to create a new zone. Click 'yes' and you will then be asked if you want to clear/reset the
current parameters. Choose the appropriate button and a new environmental zone will be created.
By 'clicking' the 'left arrow' navigation button you can go back to a previous environmental zone.
NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run Tab'.
The 'Run Tab' button only runs the corrections for the currently displayed tab page. The 'Plot
Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction page has
its own plot format. An example of the Gamma Ray plot is shown below.

20.10.2 Baker Atlas Corrections

The 'Baker Atlas Corrections' environmental correction module uses the algorithms distributed
by Baker Atlas in their environmental library. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with
appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type.

Due to Senergy Ltd. receiving the Baker Atlas chartbook as a series of algorithms it has proved
difficult to assign charts numbers from the actual chartbook to the tabs within the 'Baker Atlas
Environmental Corrections' module. The list below is an indication of the different tools
corrected on each of the tabs.
'Gamma Ray Gamma Ray Borehole Size correction charts 4-1, 4-3, and 4-13.
' tab
'Density' tab Pe Borehole Size correction for Compensated Z-Densilog Series
2222 charts 6-7 and 6-8.
Bulk Density Borehole Size correction for Compensated Z-Densilog
Series 2222 chart 6-9.
Bulk Density Borehole Size correction for Compensated Z-Densilog
Series 2227 chart 6-10.
'Neutron' tab Compensated Neutron correction charts for Series 2418 CN Log
charts 6-11, 6-29 plus charts 6-32 through to 6-35.
Compensated Neutron correction charts for Series 2420 CN Log
charts 6-12 through to 6-17, 6-26 and 6-30 plus charts 6-32 through

to 6-35 .
charts 6-18 through to 6-23, 6-27, 6-28, 6-31 plus charts 6-32
through to 6-35 and 6-39.
charts.
Neutron 2446 - no information available.
'SWNeu' tab Sidewall Neutron Mudcake and Matrix correction charts 6-24 and
6-36.
' Dual Laterolog Borehole correction.

Laterolog/Mi
cro' tab
'Induction' Borehole size correction for Induction 809, 815, 818 charts 7-6, 7-7.
tab Borehole size correction for Induction 811 charts 7-2, 7-3.
Borehole size correction for Induction 814 charts 7-4, 7-5.
Borehole size correction for Dual Induction 1503, 1506 charts 7-8,
7-9.
'Spectral Gr' Spectral Gamma Ray Borehole correction charts 4-5, 4-7, 4-9, 4-11,
tab 4-15 and 4-17.
'DIL Induction Invasion correction.

invasion' tab
'DLL Dual Laterolog Invasion correction.
invasion' tab
The button has a similar function to those found in other modules. See Depth Entry Boxes
its own plot format.

20.10.3 Halliburton Corrections

The 'Halliburton Corrections' environmental correction module uses the charts from the 1994
Halliburton Log Interpretation Charts book. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with
The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Neutron tool.
List of 'Halliburton Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the 1994
Halliburton Log Interpretation Charts book.
'Gamma Ray' Gamma Ray Borehole corrections chart GR1

tab
'Density' tab Spectral Density Log (SDL) chart POR-1
Spectral Litho Density (SLD) chart POR-2
Hostile Spectral Density (HSDL) Log chart POR-3.

'Neutron' tab Dual Spaced Neutron (DSN-II) charts POR-4a, POR-4b and
POR-5a.
Dual Spaced Neutron (CNT-K) charts POR-6a, POR-6b and
POR-7a.
Hostile Dual Spaced Neutron (HDSN) charts POR-8a, POR-8b
and POR-9a.
'SNL' tab Sidewall Neutron (SNL) POR-16.
'DLL/MSFL' tab Dual Laterolog (DLT-A) Deep Laterolog Borehole correction

charts DLTA-1a, DLTA-1b.
Dual Laterolog (DLT-F) Deep Laterolog Borehole correction
charts DLTF-1a, DLTF-1b.
Microspherically Focused Log (MSFL) Mudcake corrections
chart Rxo-1.
Microguard (MG) Mudcake corrections chart Rxo-2.
'Induction' tab Dual Induction Laterolog 3 (DIL) Borehole correction charts

DIL-1, DIL-2.
Dual Induction Short Guard (DILTA) Borehole correction charts
DILTA-1, DILTA-2.
High Resolution Induction (HRI) Borehole correction charts
HRI-1, HRI-2.
Hostile Dual Induction (HDIL) Borehole correction charts
HDIL-1, HDIL-2.
'DIL Invasion' Dual Induction Laterolog 3 (DIL) Invasion correction charts

tab DIL-4a, DIL-4b.
Dual Induction-Rxo Invasion correction charts DIL-5a, DIL-5b.
Dual Induction-Short Guard Invasion correction charts
DILTA-4a, DILTA-4b.
High Resolution Induction Invasion correction charts HRI-4a,
HRI-4b.
Hostile Dual Induction (HDIL) Invasion correction charts
HDIL-4a through to HDIL-6b
'DLL Invasion' Dual Laterolog (DLT-A) Deep Laterolog Invasion correction

tab charts DLTA-3a, DLTA-3b
Dual Laterolog (DLT-F) Deep Laterolog Invasion correction
charts DLTF-3a, DLTF-3b
'Spectral Gr' tabSpectral Gamma Ray (SGR) Borehole corrections chart GR2.
The button is similar to buttons found in other modules. See Depth Entry Boxes

20.10.4 Anadrill Corrections

The 'AnaDrill Corrections' environmental correction module uses the charts from the 2000
Schlumberger Log Interpretation Charts book and the 2005 Schlumberger Log
Interpretation Charts book. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with appropriate
parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type.
The screen shown below illustrates the parameters for the Compensated Dual Resistivity (CDR)
tool.

List of 'Schlumberger Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the
2000 Schlumberger Log Interpretation Charts book and the 2005 Schlumberger Log
Interpretation Charts book.

'CDN' tab 6 1/2" Compensated Density Neutron (CDN) correction

charts Por-19, Por-20a, Por-20b, Por-20c and Por-20d
8" Compensated Density Neutron (CDN) correction
charts Por-24c, Por-24d, Por-24e
'ADN' tab 4 3/4" Azimuthal Density Neutron (adnVISION475)

environmental correction charts Neu-31, Neu-33
6 3/4" Azimuthal Density Neutron (adnVISION675)
4 3/4" Azimuthal Density Neutron (adnVISION475 BIP)
6 3/4" Azimuthal Density Neutron (adnVISION475 BIP)
'CDR' tab 6 1/2" Compensated Dual Resistivity (CDR) Borehole

correction chart Rcor-11a.
8" Compensated Dual Resistivity (CDR) Borehole
correction chart Rcor-11b.
9 1/2" Compensated Dual Resistivity (CDR) Borehole
correction chart Rcor-11c.
The button is similar to buttons found in other modules. See Depth Entry Boxes.
Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the zone
navigation buttons and the 'Delete Zone' button found at the bottom of the window. For example,
if the number of zones is 1 and you click the 'right arrow' zone navigation button, you will be asked
if you want to create a new zone. Click 'yes' and you will then be asked if you want to clear/reset
the current parameters. Choose the appropriate button and a new environmental zone will be
created. By 'clicking' the 'left arrow' navigation button you can go back to a previous
environmental zone. NOTE: To update the current parameters you have to click 'Run Tab'.
20.10.5 Baker Hughes Inteq Corrections

The 'Baker Hughes INTEQ Corrections' environmental corrections module uses the charts from
the 2002 publication 2002 Log Interpretation Charts book. Tool types are organized on a
number of 'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool
type.

The screen, shown below, illustrates the parameters for the MNP Neutron tool corrections.
List of 'Baker Hughes INTEQ Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from
the 2002 Log Interpretation Charts book.
'Resistivity' tab 3 1/8" MPR Resistivity Correction charts 1-2 through to

1-17
4 3/4" MPR Resistivity Correction charts 2-2 through to
2-21
3-29
4-22
6 3/4" NaviGator Resistivity Correction charts 5-2
through to 5-13
8 1/4" NaviGator Resistivity Correction charts 6-2
through to 6-15

'Neutron' tab 6 3/4" Caliper-Corrected Neutron Correction charts 10-2

through to 10-5
8 1/4" Caliper-Corrected Neutron Correction charts 11-2
through to 11-4
to resolution-match log curves. The Caliper and temperature input boxes
always allow the user to enter a curve or a fixed value.
The button has a similar function to those found in other modules. See Depth Entry Boxes.
Different 'environmental zones' can be created, selected and deleted, using the 'zone navigation'
20.10.6 Sperry Sun Corrections

The 'Sperry-Sun Corrections' environmental corrections module uses the charts from the 1998 '
Sperry-Sun Log Interpretation Charts' book. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs' with
The screen shown below illustrates the correction parameters for the DGR and SOLAR 175
Gamma Ray tools.

List of 'Sperry-Sun Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the 1998 '
Sperry-Sun Log Interpretation Charts' book.
'Gamma Ray' tab 4 3/4" Gamma Ray (DGR) Borehole correction charts
2-1, 2-8, 2-9 and 2-10.
6 3/4" Gamma Ray (DGR) Borehole correction charts
2-2, 2-11, 2-12 and 2-13.
8" Gamma Ray (DGR) Borehole correction charts 2-3,
2-14, 2-15 and 2-16.
9 1/2" Gamma Ray (DGR) Borehole correction charts
2-4, 2-17, 2-18 and 2-19.
8" Gamma Ray (High Flow DGR) Borehole correction
charts 2-5, 2-20, 2-21 and 2-22.
4 3/4" Gamma Ray (SOLAR 175) Borehole correction
charts 2-6, 2-23, 2-24 and 2-25.
6 1/2" Gamma Ray (SOLAR 175) Borehole correction
charts 2-7, 2-26, 2-27 and 2-28.
'Resistivity' tab 4 3/4" EWR-Phase 4 Resistivity correction charts 3-1

through to 3-4 and 3-14 through to 3-16.

6 3/4" EWR-Phase 4 Resistivity correction charts 3-5
8" EWR-Phase 4 Resistivity correction charts 3-9
'Neutron' tab 4 3/4" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CTN)

environmental correction charts 4-1, 4-2, and 4-7.
6 3/4" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CNF)
environmental correction charts 4-3, 4-4, and 4-8.
8" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CNF) environmental
correction charts 4-5, 4-6 and 4-8.
'Lithology' tab 4 3/4" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CTN) Lithology

Effect correction charts 4-9.
6 3/4" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CNF) Lithology
8" Compensated Neutron Porosity (CNF) Lithology
The 'Run Tab' button only runs the corrections for the currently-displayed tab page. The 'Plot
20.10.7 Weatherford Corrections

The 'Weatherford Corrections' environmental correction module uses the algorithms distributed
by Weatherford including the old Reeves/Precision tools plus the Compact tool series. Tool types
are organized on a series of 'tabs' with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab,
depending on the tool type.

List of 'Weatherford Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the
Weatherford Log interpretation Charts Compact Tool Series (2007) and Precision Wireline
Services Log Interpretation Chart Book.
'Gamma Ray' tab Compact Gamma Ray Borehole correction chart

Gam-1, Gam-2 and Gam-3.
Reeves/Precision Gamma Ray Borehole correction
chart 4-1.
'Neutron' tab Compact Neutron Porosity (MDN) Environmental

correction charts Npor-5Npor-6a, Npor-8
Reeves/Precision Compensated Neutron correction
charts 6-4 to 6-6, 6-11, 6-16, 6-18 to 6-22

'Laterolog/Micro' tab Compact Laterolog (MDL) Borehole correction

charts Lat-4, Lat-5, Lat-10, Lat-11 and Micro-3.
Reeves/Precision Dual Laterolog (DLL) Borehole
correction chart 5-2, 5-12 and 5-13.
'Induction' tab No details available.
'FE Borehole' tab Compact Focused Electric Borehole correction chart

SFE-2
'DLL Invasion' tab Compact Laterolog (MDL) Invasion correction charts

Lat-6 and Lat-12.
'Spectral Gr' tab Reeves/Precision Spectral Gamma Ray correction

charts 4-3 and 4-5
The 'Filter Curve' check-box option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows
the user to resolution-match log curves.
Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction 'tab' has
20.10.8 PathFinder
The 'PathFinder Corrections' environmental correction module uses the uses the charts from the
2007 PathFinder LWD Log Interpretation Charts. Tool types are organized on a series of 'tabs'
with appropriate parameter selection options on each tab, depending on the tool type.

List of 'PathFinder Environmental Correction' tabs with associated charts taken from the 2007
PathFinder LWD Log Interpretation Charts book.
'HDS1 Gamma Gamma Ray Borehole correction charts POR-1a through to

Ray' tab POR-1j.
'DNSC' tab DNSC Neutron Environmental correction charts POR-2a

through to POR-2f.
'SDNSC' tab SDNSC Neutron Environmental corrections charts POR-2g

through to POR-2j.
The 'Filter Curve' check-box option allows the user to apply a filter to the result curve. This allows
the user to resolution-match log curves.

Results' button displays a log plot showing the effect of the correction. Each correction 'tab' has

Section
21
Interpretation
21 Interpretation
The following 'standard' Modules are available under the 'Interpretation' Menu:

'Clay Volume'
'Clay Volume Parameters'
'Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters'
'Cut-off and Summation'
'Cut-off and Summation Parameters'
'Multi Well Cut-off and Summation'
'NMR Normalization'
'Cased Hole'
'TDT Stand-alone Sw analysis'
'TDT Time Lapse'
Section 21. Interpretation :

Senergy Interpretation 799
21.1 Parameter Set Management

The important topic of 'Parameter Set Management' is discussed here, since a knowledge of the
appearance and function of 'Parameter Sets' is integral to the operation, and underlies the
flexibility, of many of the interpretation tools within the IP program.
A 'Parameter Set' consists of a set of 'zones'. In the simplest form, called a 'Zone / Tops Set' the
Set is comprised of entries containing a 'Zone name' with an associated 'Top' depth and '
Bottom' depth. For the interpretation module parameter sets, for example the 'Clay Volume'
parameter Set, this basic structure is extended to store a number of petrophysical 'Parameters'
associated with the interpretation module. The names and numbers of parameters in a '
Parameter Set' depend on the interpretation module selected .
The working 'Parameter Sets' for the interpretation modules are automatically saved into the IP
database every time a well is saved. The 'Parameter Sets' are restored when the well is loaded
into memory.
The 'Parameter Set Management' screen is used to manage the 'Parameter Sets' from the
'zonable' interpretation modules. The tool is available in the set-up window of any of the following
modules:
'Clay Volume'
'Cutoffs and Summation'
'Mineral Solver'
'TDT Standalone'
'TDT TIme Lapse'
'Pore Pressure Gradient'
For information on how to distribute 'Parameter Sets' between wells then look at the chapter on '
Multi-Well Parameter Distribution'.
The 'Parameter Set Management' window is displayed when you click the 'Load / Save
Parameter Sets' button, which is found on the 'set-up' window for each of these interpretation
modules. The 'Clay Volume' module is illustrated below:
Section 21.1 Interpretation : Parameter Set Management


Parameter Set 'types' are related to specific interpretation modules. Set 'types' are as follows :
Tops : Generic, user-created 'Tops' Set. No parameters.

Clay : Clay volume module Parameter Set.
PhiSw : Porosity and water saturation module Parameter Set.
Cutoff : Cut-off and summations module Parameter Set.
Splice : Zones from the interactive splice module.
Basic_Loganal : Basic log analysis module Parameter Set.
TDT_Stand_Alone : TDT-Stand-Alone analysis module Parameter Set.
TDT_Time_Lapse : TDT time-lapse analysis module Parameter Set.
NMR : NMR interpretation analysis module Parameter Set.
Minsolve : Mineral Solver module Parameter Set.
Pore_Pres_Grad : Pore pressure gradient module. Parameter Set management screen
not available.
UP****** : Zoned user program modules. '******' will be the name of the user program.
The 'Parameter Set Management' dialog window allows the user to save and restore Parameter
Sets in addition to the working Parameter Sets. This can be useful if you want to try a different
interpretation technique but still have the ability to go back to the original interpretation set-up.
You can save the original 'Parameter Set' under a user-defined name, change the interpretation
parameters / equations and run the new interpretation model. The original parameters can be
recalled / restored from the saved 'Parameter Set' at a later date.
You can save 'Parameter Sets' either ;

To an external disk file, given a user-defined name (this is the same procedure as that
accessed from the main menu 'Input / Output 'Save Parameter Set to File'
operation) or,
The Parameter Set can be saved into the well database under a user-specified
name.
The 'Parameter Set Management' window is divided into two sections, one for saving the '
Parameter Set' and one for loading the 'Parameter Set'. Both sections allow the user to save and
restore 'Parameter Sets' from the database, as well as from separate, external disk files. The '
Save' section, however, allows the user to restore a 'Parameter Set' from a different well or a '
Parameter Set' of a different type (from the database only).
If a Parameter Set of a different 'Type' to the module that is being run is restored, then only
the 'Top', 'Bottom 'and 'Zone name' fields are copied for each zone. Not all of the
interpretation parameters associated with each zone will be copied and values will be set
to the default values for that type of Set.
Copying 'Parameter Sets' of a different 'Type' between interpretation modules can be very useful.
For example, if the user has loaded a Tops Set (Type 'Tops') using the ' Manage Zones / Top
Sets' module, these tops might be the ones required for the 'Cut-off and Summation' module
and can be loaded using the 'Load from Database' option, which is activated from the screen
launched by clicking the 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button.
Save Parameter set

The user can edit the 'Save Parameter set name' in the text entry box, to distinguish one
Parameter Set from any other.

Clicking the 'Save to Database' button will copy the Set into the database and the name will be
added to the list in the 'Parameter set' window. Clicking the 'Save to Disk File' button will
activate a file directory dialog box to select where the file should be saved. The default is the
output directory (see 'Set Default File Location').
Load Parameter set

To load a 'Parameter Set' from the database; in the 'Load Parameter set' window, 'click' on the
required 'Parameter Set' name to highlight it. Then 'click' the 'Load from Database' button.
If the 'All Sets' box is 'checked' then all the Sets, regardless of 'type', will be displayed in
the window. If the user loads a Set of a different 'Set Type' to the module from where
the 'Parameter Set Manager' window is launched, then only the 'Top', 'Bottom' and '
Zone name' are loaded and the parameters are all set to their internal IP 'default'
values.

If the 'All Wells' box is 'checked' then the Sets for other in-memory wells are also
displayed. The well name will be added to the 'Parameter Set' window for all wells
except for the 'active' well. An example window with this option set is displayed below.


The 'Delete Set from Database' button allows the user to delete a highlighted Set from
the Set list.
The 'Load from Disk File' allows the user to load a 'Parameter Set' from a disk file.
Only 'Parameter Sets' of the correct 'type' can be loaded to an IP module in this way.

21.2 Basic Log Analysis

The 'Basic log Analysis' module is used to make a quick and 'basic' log analysis. The
functionality has been deliberately simplified to perform a type of analysis that could be easily
duplicated using a calculator.
'Clay volume' is calculated from a Gamma Ray.

'Porosity' is either from the Density or Sonic tool.
'Water saturations' are calculated using the basic Archie equations. No hydrocarbon or
bad-hole corrections are made. No flushed zone Sxo calculations are made.
The analysis is zonable and an Interactive Plot can be used to apply/modify interpretation
parameters.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Interpretation' option 'Basic Log Analysis'.
'Curves' Tab
Input Curves : The user must enter either a 'Density' or 'Sonic' curve or both. If both are
selected, then the density will be used by default. However, the user can manually select the sonic
for designated zones (see parameters below).
A 'Gamma Ray' curve can be entered. This will be used to calculate a clay volume. If the
box is left blank, the clay volume will be assumed to be zero and no clay corrections will
be made to the porosity. This can work sometimes for density porosities but sonic
porosities will always be too large in shaly zones or shales.
The 'Resistivity' curve is used to calculate water saturation. If a curve name is not
entered, only porosity and clay volume will be calculated.
Output Curves : The 'Porosity' (PHI) curve will be the porosity calculated from the Density or
Section 21.2 Interpretation : Basic Log Analysis

Sonic log.
The 'Sw Unlimited' (SwU) curve will be the result of the Sw calculation from Archie's
equation. No 'limits' have been applied. This means that the 'SwU' curve could have
values greater than 1.0 (100 %). This curve is useful for assessing how much greater
than the 100% wet line the computed curve values reach, in the wet zones. This allows
the user to set interpretation parameters like 'm' or 'Rw' to give an average 100% Sw in
a wet zone.
The 'Sw' (SW)curve is the same as the unlimited curve except that it has been 'clipped'
to have values between '0' and '1.0'. The 'Sw' curve is used in the summation and cut-off
module for calculating average zonal water saturations.
The 'Bulk Volume Water' (BVW)curve is computed from porosity multiplied by water
saturation and shows the amount of water in the rock. It is used mainly for plot displays.
The 'Clay Volume' (VCL) curve gives the result of the clay volume calculations. The
curve is clipped so that the results lie between 0 and 1.0 (100%).
The 'Rw apparent' (RWapp) curve is the result of a calculation to estimate the apparent
water resistivity in a zone assuming the zone to be 100% wet. This curve is used on the
interactive plot to allow the user to set 'Rw' in a wet interval.
'Parameters' Tab
The 'Parameters' tab is subdivided into 4 'sub-tabs':
'Zones - Clay'
'Density'
'Sonic'
'Archie'
These are described separately, below:
'Zones - Clay' Sub-Tab

'Zone Name' : The zone name is an optional parameter and is used by the user to
identify a zone by giving it a name. Zone names can be displayed in the log plot. See
Zone plotting.
'Zone Top' : The top depth of the zone.
'Zone Bottom' : The bottom depth of the zone.
'Zone Color' : This is the user editable Zone colour associated with the interpretation
zone.
'Lock Zone' : If this is 'checked' then the zone becomes grayed out in all tabs and the
parameters cannot be altered within that zone, including interactively.
'Gr Clean' : Gamma Ray clean value. Used for calculating Clay Volume. Should be set
to the minimum Gamma Ray value seen in clean (non shaly) intervals. This defaults to
the minimum Gamma Ray value seen in the Gamma Ray input curve.
'Gr Clay' : Gamma Ray clay value. Used for calculating Clay Volume. Should be set to
the maximum Gamma Ray value seen in shale intervals. This defaults to the maximum
Gamma Ray value seen in the Gamma Ray input curve.
'Density' Sub-Tab
'Porosity Model' : To use the density log as porosity over a zone, select 'Density' from
the drop-down menu. Once 'Density' has been selected then the 'Sonic' tab parameters
'grey' out indicating that only the density porosity model will be used in the calculation of
porosity.
'Rho Matrix' : Matrix density of the clean rock. Used for calculating porosity from the
density tool. Defaults to 2.65 gm/cc for sandstone. Set to 2.71 gm/cc for limestone.
'Rho Fluid' : Density of the fluid in the rock. Used for calculating porosity from the
density tool. Defaults to 1.0 gm/cc for fresh water. Set to 1.1 gm/cc for salt water. To
make hydrocarbon corrections to the porosity adjust the fluid density to account for the
hydrocarbons.
'Rho Clay' : Density of the clay in the rock. Used to correct the density porosity for clay.
Chosen from log plots as the density reading in shale. The default value is chosen as the
maximum density reading over the interval where the sonic is high.

'Sonic' Sub-Tab
'Porosity Model' : To use the sonic log as porosity over a zone, select 'Sonic' from the
drop-down menu. This is the same parameter that is on the 'Density' sub-tab. The
setting can be changed in either tab. Once 'Sonic' is selected then the 'Density' tab
parameters 'grey' out indicating that only the sonic porosity model will be used in the
calculations.
'Sonic Equ' : Two models are available to calculate porosity from the sonic: the original '
Wyllie' time average and the empirical field observation 'Hunt-Raymer' formula. Select
the required model from the drop-down menu. It is recommended that the 'Hunt-Raymer
' equation is used by default since this equation automatically takes care of the problem
of unconsolidated sands, whilst the 'Wyllie' equation has an extra compaction factor
parameter which has to be estimated.
'DT Matrix' : Sonic matrix transit time of the clean rock. Used for calculating porosity
from the sonic tool. Defaults to 55 uSec/ft for sandstone. Set to 49 uSec/ft for limestone.
'DT Fluid' : Sonic fluid transit time in the rock. Used for calculating porosity from the
sonic tool. Default value is189 uSec/ft. For salt-saturated formation water use about 174
usec/ft. To make hydrocarbon corrections to the porosity adjust (increase) the fluid
transit time to account for the hydrocarbons.
'DT Clay' : Sonic of the clay in the rock. Used to correct the sonic porosity for clay.
Chosen from log plots as the sonic reading in shale. The default value is chosen as the
maximum sonic reading over the interval.
'Sonic Cp' : Wyllie equation compaction factor. Used for calculating porosity from the
sonic tool when the Wyllie time average equation is chosen. Defaults to 1.0. For
unconsolidated sands this needs to be increased. A rule of thumb for estimating this
parameter is to divide the sonic clay parameter by 100. The result should be greater
than 1.0 for a valid Cp value.
'Archie' Sub-Tab

'Rw' : Formation water resistivity at formation temperature. Defaults to 0.1 ohmm but
must be adjusted by the user to the correct value.
'a factor' : Archie equation 'a' factor. Defaults to 1.0.
'm Exponent' : Archie equation 'm' (cementation) factor. Defaults to 2.0.
'n Exponent' : Archie equation 'n' (saturation exponent) factor. Defaults to 2.0.
Changing a parameter will not immediately mean that a zone is re-calculated. The user
must click the 'Run' button in order to re-calculate all zones and update all displays.
Clicking the 'New Zone' button will display the following window.
To add a new zone, the user selects one of the existing zones from the window. The user must

'click' one of the three buttons 'Add Before', 'Add After', or 'Split Zone'. For the 'Split Zone' the
user must give the depth to split the highlighted zone. The 'Copy Zone #' box is used to select
the zone from which parameters will be copied to the new zone. It is possible to add a new zone,
for example, after zone 4 but copy the parameters from zone 1 into this new zone.
Once a new zone has been created, the user must select its top and bottom depths in the
parameter window in the 'Zone Depths' tab. Zones cannot overlap, but one can have a gap
between zones.
The 'Delete zone' button on the parameter window allows the deletion of one or more zones.
Select the zones to delete, and click 'OK'.
Column Edits
If the user wants to set all the parameters in one column of the 'Parameter' screen to be the
same value, then the header of the column should be 'clicked'. This will turn the column header
box green. Now, any one parameter that is changed in that column will change all the parameters
in the column to the same value. To turn the column edit off, click the column header again and its
colour will return to grey. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory. They
have to be reset, if required, next time the well is loaded.
The 'Parameter set name' box is used to name the file where the parameters will be if the
parameters are saved to a disk file using the 'Save Parameter Sets' function in the IP main
menu. The same name is also used to save the parameter Set listing to hard disk with an
extension of '.TXT'.
The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the basic log analysis
parameter sets. See Parameter Set Management and Link Zones / Top Sets.
The 'Run' button runs the analysis for all zones and creates any output curves needed.
NOTE: the module will overwrite any current output curves with the same name, without warning
, so the user should be careful not to use duplicate names. The 'Porosity and Water Saturation'
module uses many of the same names, so if this and the 'Porosity and Water Saturation'
module are run then it would be best to rename the output curves so as not to get confused.
The 'Make Plot' button will set up the interactive plot.
The 'Print' button allows the user to output a parameter listing to the printer or to a file or both.
Interactive Plot

The interactive plot allows the changing of several parameters interactively by placing the cursor
on the vertical parameter line and dragging the line to a new position. When the mouse button is
released the program will automatically recalculate the zone and update the result on the plot.
This gives the user immediate feedback on changes to parameters.
Undo/Redo
Once the Parameter lines have been altered undo/redo arrows appear in the top left-hand corner
of the log plot. These allow the user to go back to the original position of the parameter lines. As
the arrows are 'clicked' the parameter lines move and the output curves are recalculated. The
undo/redo arrows only work if the well and zones remain unchanged during the current
interpretation session.

New interpretation zones can be created by right mouse clicking in the Zone track (track next to
the depth track) and selecting 'Split Zone'. The current zone will be split in two and the
parameters copied into the new zone. Zone top and bottom depths can be interactively changed
by placing the cursor on the zone boundary in the Zone track. The cursor will change to a
horizontal split bar and the boundary can then be dragged to a new depth. When the mouse
button is released the zones will be recalculated with their new top and bottom depths.
Histograms of any of the curves can also be used to change parameters interactively. Right click
in a track with an interactive parameter and select the appropriate curve from the pop-up menu
(example GR curve).

The above histogram can be used to change the Gr clean and clay lines. Once the lines have
been changed then the undo/redo arrows will appear in the top left-hand corner of the crossplot
enabling the user to quickly revert the lines back to their original positions if required.
Equations and Methodology

1. Clay Volume (Vcl) is calculated :
2. Porosity (Phi) is calculated :
If Density is selected as the porosity method :
If Sonic porosity is selected :
Wyllie

Raymer
Where
Vma = 1/Dtmatrix
Vf = 1/Dtfluid
Vlog = 1/Dt
Porosity is limited to being greater than 0.0.
3. Apparent water resistivity (RWapp) is calculated :
4. Archie water saturation (SwU and Sw) is calculated :
Unlimited water saturation
Sw is limited to be less than or equal to 1.0.

21.3 Clay Volume

The 'Clay Volume' interpretation module is used to interactively calculate clay volume curves
from multiple clay indicators. The module is accessed under the main menu 'Interpretation' '
Clay Volume' option.
The 'Clay Volume' module can now be linked to the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module -
see 'Linking Clay Volume module to Porosity Water Saturation' module in the 'Link Zones /
Top Sets' chapter for more details.
The 'Clay Volume Analysis' window, shown above, sets up the clay indicators and their input and
associated output curves. The input curve boxes will automatically be filled in with appropriate
curve names if the input curve 'types' have been set up in the study well. The user can select an
alternative input curve name if the selected IP default is not correct. The IP program default
names for the output curves are displayed in the right hand column of the screen. The user can
edit these names to any preferred nomenclature.
The program assumes that any neutron curve entered is in 'Limestone matrix' units. If this
is not the case, then the curve should be converted to Limestone porosity units using the
appropriate service company environmental correction module or the Basic Log Analysis
Functions module.
The 'Minimum Clay Volume' (VCL) curve is calculated as the minimum clay volume response of
Section 21.3 Interpretation : Clay Volume

all user-selected single and double clay indicators, and, by default is picked as the 'Wet Clay
Volume' (VWCL) curve used in the set up of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' Module.
The clay indicators are divided into 2 sections, 'Single Clay Indicators', where a single curve is
selected for use in the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot'. One extra, user-defined 'Single Clay
Indicator' can be set up.
The 'Double Clay Indicators' are defined in the middle part of the window. These are standard
curve crossplot combinations (Density/Neutron, Density/Sonic ,Sonic/Neutron). One extra 'Double
Clay Indicator' can be specified in addition to the standard indicators. The user can enter the
name of the indicator in the box provided under the 'Name' column.
The 'Bad Hole Indicators for Double Clay Indicators' section allows the user to select curves
that can be used in the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot' to discriminate where the 'Double Clay
Indicators' will be used. For example, a caliper curve could be used as the 'Bad Hole Indicator'
to determine where a Density/Neutron 'Double Clay Indicator' is not going to be reliable. When
using the caliper log as a 'Bad Hole Indicator', setting the minimum threshold parameter '
BadH1Min', the 'Bad Hole Indicator' will switch off the Density/Neutron 'Double Clay Indicator'
where the caliper is greater than the user- entered threshold value.
The user selects the 'Bad Hole Indicators' by 'checking' the boxes on the left hand side of the
window. The indicators can be 'zoned', so 'checking' a box does not necessarily force the user to
use the indicator in every interpretation zone.
NOTE: It is good practice to 'check' any indicator that might possibly be used, BEFORE running a
'Clay Volume Analysis' interpretation, since this will allow the program to initialise the 'default
clay parameters' and create the 'Bad Hole' tab parameters .
The 'Parameter Set name' box is used to name the file where the parameters will be stored, if the
parameters are saved to a disk file using the 'Save Parameter set' in the main 'Parameter Sets'
menu. The same name is also used to save the parameter Set listing to hard disk with an
extension of '.TXT'. The 'Print Parameter set' menu item can be used to do this or the print
button in the parameter window can be used.
The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the 'Clay Volume'
Parameter Sets. See Parameter Set Management.
The user 'clicks' the 'Run' button to start the Clay Volume analysis.
If an old Parameter Set has been loaded, or the user has already run the clay volume module,
then the user will be asked whether the log plot should be re-initialized. The user should normally
confirm 'Yes' to this, since this activates the special interactive plot features. Answering 'No' will
leave the current plot active.
If this is a new 'Run', then 'default' parameters will be calculated for each clay indicator and these
values will populate the 'Clay Volume Parameters' Set. These defaults are not meant to be the
optimum interpretation parameters, but are chosen simply to set the parameters within the correct
range of values for a particular single curve or pair of curves.
For the 'Single Clay Indicators' the defaults are generally the maximum and minimum readings
for the indicator.
For the 'Double Clay Indicators' the defaults will be the 'sandstone' line for the 'clean line', and
the 'shale point' will be chosen towards the bottom right hand edge of the 'shale points', as seen

on a standard crossplot.
21.3.1 Clay Volume Interactive Plot

The 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot' consists of (from left to right): A Depth track, 'Zone' track,
'Single Clay indicators' (one per track), 'Double Clay indicators' (one per track), a 'Bad Hole' track
and a 'Result' track containing a curve for each of the clay indicator interpretations.
Zone Track
The Zone track is used for displaying the current Clay Volume zonation used in the interpretation.
Zones can be 'created', 'deleted' and zone 'tops' can be moved.

To create a new zone by splitting a current zone: 'click' in the 'zone track' at the depth for
the split and choose 'Split Zone' from the pop-up menu.
To delete a zone, choose 'Delete Zone' from the pop-up menu.
Zone tops and bottoms can be moved by placing the cursor on the top of a zone in the
zone track and, with the left mouse button held, drag the top to a new position. It is
possible to have gaps between zones. To remove a gap, drag the bottom of the zone
above a gap to below the top of the zone below the gap.
'Clicking' 'Edit Zone' opens the 'Edit Zone tops' module. This has limited operability. It
is only possible to import tops data from a spreadsheet, or output the created Clay
Volume zones to a text file. For greater 'editability' of Clay Volume zones open the 'Clay
Volume Parameters' module.
Single Indicator Track

The track will consist of a single curve, which is the indicator, plus two vertical parameter lines,
which are the indicators 'Clean' and 'Clay' parameter values. To interactively change a parameter,
place the cursor on a parameter line. The name of the parameter and its value will be displayed at
the bottom left corner of the main window. With the left mouse button, drag the line to its new
value. When the mouse button is released, that zone will be re-calculated and all displays
updated.
By 'clicking' in a track , a pop-up menu will appear. Firstly, this allows the user to turn 'On' / 'Off'
the indicator in this zone. Secondly, the user can select a histogram plot for the indicator. This will
allow the user to change the parameter values using the interactive lines on the histogram plot.
(See Histogram section).
Double Indicator Track

This type of track will contain two curves which make up the 'double indicator', plus two vertical
lines that will be the 'clay' parameter values for each of the two curves. The clay parameter lines
can be moved interactively, as described for the single indicators. The pop-up menu has an
additional feature, which allows a crossplot of the double indicator to be displayed. The crossplot
will allow the user to interactively set the 'clay point' and the 'clean line' (See Crossplot section).
The crossplot method is the most useful for setting the double indicator parameters.
When the 'Link Clay Paras' parameter, on the 'Zone Depths' tab of the 'Clay Volume
Parameters' interface is turned on ('checked') then, where multiple double clay indicators are
active, any common double clay parameter- for example 'ND Den Clay' and 'DS Den Clay' will be
simultaneously updated when a crossplot Clay point or interactive line on the 'Clay Volume
Interactive Plot' is moved.
Bad Hole Indicator

The bad hole indicator track will only be displayed when a curve is selected as a 'bad hole'
indicator in the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module . Initially, the bad hole indicator logic is not active
nor are its cut-off parameters set. The cut-off values need to be initialized in the 'Clay Volume
Parameters' interface and then they will be displayed as vertical lines in a log track on the 'Clay
Volume Interactive Plot'. Once displayed, the cut-off values can be changed interactively as
described in the single indicator section above.
Where a single Bad Hole Indicator curve, such as the Caliper log, is used to switch off double-clay
indicators where the borehole is washed out, the user needs to input a 'BadH1 Min' parameter
value into the 'Clay Volume Parameters' 'Bad Hole' tab. When the caliper log values are greater
than the 'BadH1 Min' parameter, the double clay indicators are switched off.
The screen shot shown below illustrates a Bad Hole logic Flag set up to turn off double clay

indicators in 2 zones where the Bad Hole Indicator (caliper) curve values exceed 10.5 inches.
The user must set the 'BadH1 Min' parameter to the maximum allowable caliper value (in caliper
curve units).
If the user wishes to discriminate 'bad hole' conditions using a caliper log for example, to switch
off the double clay indicators where hole diameter is greater than a maximum threshold (over
gauge) and also where the caliper tool is closed (caliper curve values over some intervals are less
than a minimum threshold) the Caliper curve should be selected in both 'Bad Hole Indicators for
Double Clay Indicators' 'Name' boxes in the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module.
After clicking the 'Run' button and launching the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot', open the 'Clay
Volume Parameters' interface.

On the 'Bad Hole' tab set the parameters as illustrated below; 'BadH1 Max' and 'BadH2 Min'.
The double clay indicators will be switched off where these two thresholds are exceeded.
Result Track
The result track will contain the resulting 'Clay Volume' curve for each clay indicator selected.
The minimum and average of all the clay indicators will not be displayed but can easily be added,
if required, by 'clicking' on the track header and adding the curve. A clay indicator which is not

used in a zone will not be displayed in the result track for that zone (its values having been set to
'Null' over that zone).
Undo/Redo
redo's is displayed. This facilitates the selection of which undo / redo the user wants to perform.

21.3.2 Clay Volume Parameters

The 'Clay Volume Parameters' window allows the user to manually change any Clay Volume
interpretation parameter and to create, modify and delete interpretation Zones. The window is
selected from the main menu 'Interpretation' 'Clay Volume Parameters' or using the speed
button next to the 'Clay Volume' speed button .

The 'Clay Volume Parameters' window displays the 'Clay Volume' interpretation parameters
arranged on 'tabbed' screens across the page, with the interpretation 'zones' arranged vertically
down the page. There are a number of tabs in addition to the 'Zone Depths' tab. Each tab sets up
the 'clean' and 'clay' end-points for the 'Single' and 'Double' Clay indicators:
'Single Clay Indicators' use a single log curve to define 'clean and 'clay' cut-offs.
These indicators are organized onto one or more 'tabs', depending upon how many
single clay indicators have been selected. A maximum of two Single indicators will be
stored on each tab. So, if 4 single clay indicators (Gamma Ray, Neutron, SP and
Resistivity) are chosen, they will be arranged on two 'tabs'. The example shown above
has only 'Gamma Ray' (Gr) and 'Resistivity' (Res) indicators selected.
'Double Clay Indicators' are crossplot combinations of log curves, Neutron/Density,
Sonic/ Density. Each 'Double Clay indicator' that the user selects has its' own 'tab'. In
the screen capture shown above two Double Clay indicators 'Neutron/Density' (Neu/Den
) and 'Sonic / Density' (Son/Den) have been selected.
Changing Parameters on-screen

If a parameter is an 'On' / 'Off'- type flag, for example - any parameter with 'Use' in the
title, then 'ticking' it will switch it between 'On' and 'Off'. In the following screen, the 'GR
Use' and 'Res Use' parameters are 'On' / 'Off' flag parameters.

If a parameter is a 'List'- type parameter - any parameter with the word 'Method', 'Model
', 'Source' or 'Equation' in the parameter title, then 'clicking' on it will launch a pop-up
menu where the parameter can be changed. In the screen shot shown below the
parameter 'GR Method' is a 'list' parameter and launches the associated options list:

Zone Depths Tab

The 'Zone Depths' tab allows the user to change interpretation zone top and bottom depths and
to set optional 'Zone Names' and 'Zone colours'. The 'Zone Name' in this module is only used
as a label when printing out the parameter listings.
The user has the option to display zone names or zone depths, if they have been set up, on all
Parameter tabs. This is accomplished by 'ticking' the 'Show Additional Zone info' tick-box. The
user then has the option of showing the zone name or the zone depths on each tab. Depending
on which option is chosen, when you select another Parameter tab, the zone names or zone
depths will be shown in the left-hand column of the 'grid'. The 'Show Default Info' option is just
displaying the 'Zone #' column populated with the zone number.
Alternatively, left-mouse-button 'click' in the 'Zone (#)' column header box of any parameter
screen and you will see the same three options as those seen from 'clicking' the 'Show
Additional Zone Info' button.

To add a new zone, the user selects one of the existing zones from the window. The user must
'click' on one of the three buttons 'Add Before', 'Add After', or 'Split Zone'. For the 'Split Zone'
the user must give the depth to split this zone. The 'Copy Zone #' box is used to select which
zone to copy the parameters from for the new zone. It is possible to add a new zone, for example,
after zone 4 but copy the parameters from zone 1 into this new zone.
Once a new zone has been created, the user must select its depths in the parameter window in
the 'Zone Depths' tab. Zones cannot overlap, but one can have a gap between zones.

The 'Delete zone' button on the 'Clay Volume Parameters' window allows the user to delete one
or more interpretation zones. The user must select the zones to delete, and click 'OK'.
The 'Print' button on the parameter window will pop up the following menu. This allows output of
the summation report to the printer or to a file. The file will be written to the 'default output
directory' using the file Set name, with the extension of ".txt".
The 'Close' button on the 'Clay Volume Parameters' window closes the window, but does not
cancel any changes made to the parameters. If the user closes the window without clicking 'Run'
then the changes made will not come into effect until some other interactive parameter is changed
for that zone, and therefore forces a re-calculation of the zone.
The 'Help' buttons on the parameter screens are unique to the IP program in the sense that they
do not link to the Help document. The button will display a small window (example below) which
will give some help on individual parameters in the display. Once the window is displayed, the
user places the cursor on a parameter in the parameter window, and the help for that parameter is
displayed.
Lock Zone
The 'Lock Zone' column allows a user to lock any zone which will prevent any of the parameters
of that zone in any of the tabs from being changed. It will also prevent any interactive lines on the
interactive plots from changing the parameter for that zone. The 'Multi-Well Change Parameters'
module will also be affected. If a zone has been locked by 'checking' the 'Lock Zone' column then
the zone will be 'grayed' out throughout all the tabs of the module.
Linking Clay Parameters

The 'Link Clay Paras' parameter (an 'On' / 'Off' tick box) has the following function:
When 'checked' for example, where double clay indicators Density/Neutron and Density/Sonic are
set up, any changes made to the 'common' curve (in this case Density) by moving a crossplot
end-point (say 'ND Den Clay'), will simultaneously update the Density Clay parameter in the other
double clay indicator ('DS Den Clay'). The interactive 'ND Den Clay' and 'DS Den Clay' lines in
the 'Clay Volume Interactive Plot' will also update to reflect any changes.

NOTE: Setting this parameter to 'on' DOES NOT update Single Clay Indicators, so, for example a
neutron log used as a single clay indicator (parameter 'Neu Clay') would not be affected if the
double clay indicator parameter 'ND Neu Clay' were changed in a crossplot or in the parameter
grid.
Linking PhiSw Clay Parameters

The 'Link PhiSw Clay' parameter turns on the clay link to the 'PhiSw' module. This parameter will
only be active if the parameter sets are linked (the 'Linked Set' icon will be shown). In the case
shown above there is no link icon and the 'Link PhiSw Clay' column is 'greyed' out.
If the 'Clay Volume' and 'PhiSw' parameters sets were linked then 'ticking' the 'Link PhiSw Clay'
column 'On' will mean that any changes made in either module to the Density, Neutron and Sonic
clay parameters will be made to the other module as well. It will also cause the module to be re-
run automatically with the new parameter value.
NOTE: Changing a parameter in a grid display does not mean that a zone is re-calculated
immediately. The user must click the 'Run' button in order to re-calculate all zones and
update all displays unless the modules are linked.
Column Edits
If the user wants to set all the parameters in one column of a parameter screen to the same
value, then 'click' in the header cells of the column. This will turn the column header box to green.
Now, changing a single value in the column will populate the entire column with the same new
value. To turn the 'column edit' off, 'click' the column header again and its colour will return to
grey. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory. They have to be reset, if
required, next time the well is loaded. The following shows a column edit turned on for the 'Gr
Clean' parameter.

Clay Volume Parameter Names

The following input parameters are used in the 'Clay Volume' module. Only those parameters
that are selected on the 'Clay Volume Analysis' screen will be available in the interactive plot.
The clay indicators will be displayed on separate 'tabs' in the 'Clay Volume Parameter' module
window.
Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter name, relate to the Monte Carlo Error
Analysis module and correspond to Clay Volume inputs found in the file

MonteCarloDefaults.par.
(1) 'Gr Use' Flag

Set to 'On' if you wish to use the gamma ray as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'Off' for 'Vclay from gamma ray' to be set to Null values over this zone.
(2) 'Gr Clean'
Value of the gamma ray in a clean, zero Vclay zone.
(3) 'Gr Clay'
Value of the gamma ray in a 100% clay zone.
(4) 'Gr Method'
The following methods can be selected:
'Linear' : Linear relationship between Gr and VclGr
'Curved' : A composite curved relationship.
'Clavier' : As per Clavier et al.
'Stieber' : As per Stieber et al (South Louisiana Miocene and Pliocene).
'Old Rock' : As per Larionov et al for older rocks (Mesozoic).
'Young Rock' : As per Larionov for younger rocks (Tertiary clastics).
(5) 'Neu Use' Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use the neutron as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'Off' for 'Vclay from neutron' to be set to Null values over this zone.
(6) 'Neu Clean'
Value of the Neutron log in a clean, zero Vclay zone. The Neutron log should have been
recorded in Limestone porosity units.
The user should be careful in setting the 'Neu Clean' parameter at any value other than
zero, since the indicator can easily under-estimate the clay volume if the parameter is set
too high.
(7) 'Neu Clay'
Value of the neutron log in a 100% clay zone.
(8) 'SP Use' Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use the SP as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'No' for 'Vclay from SP' to be set to Null values over this zone.
(9) 'SP Clean'
Value of the SP in a clean, zero Vclay zone.
(10) 'SP Clay'
Value of the SP in a 100% clay zone.
(11) 'Res Use' Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use a resistivity log as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'Off' for 'Vclay from resistivity' to be set to Null values over this zone.
The resistivity indicator will generally only work in hydrocarbon-bearing zones where the
surrounding shales have low resistivities.
(12) 'Res Clean'
Value of the resistivity in a clean, zero Vclay zone. Generally chosen as the highest
resistivity in a hydrocarbon-bearing, clay-free zone.
(13) 'Res Clay'
Value of the resistivity in a 100% clay zone.
(14) 'Oth Use' ('Other single indicator')Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use an extra user-defined single indicator as a clay indicator in
this zone.
Set to 'No' for 'Vclay from other single indicator' to be set to Null values over this zone.
The 'other single indicator' is a linear indicator similar to the gamma ray linear indicator.
(15) 'Oth Clean'
Value of the other single indicator in a clean, zero Vclay zone.

(16) 'Oth Clay'

Value of the other single indicator, in a 100% clay zone.
The screen shot, above, shows the layout of the parameter 'Neu/Den' tab for the Neutron/Density
double clay indicators. NOTE: the input Neutron Porosity curve should have been recorded in
limestone porosity units.
(17) 'ND Use' Flag

Set to 'On' if you wish to use the Neutron/Density as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'Off' for Vclay Neutron/Density to be set to Null values over this zone.
(18) 'ND Neu Clay'
Neutron clay value for the Neutron / Density clay indicator.
(19) 'ND Den Clay'
Density clay value for the Neutron / Density clay indicator.
(20) 'ND Den Clean1'
Density value for point 1 on the clean line.
The clean line is defined by two points on the crossplot.
(21) 'ND Den Clean2'
(22) 'ND Neu Clean1'
Neutron value for point 1 on the clean line.
(23) 'ND Neu Clean2'
(24) 'SD Use' Flag

Set to 'On' if you wish to use the Sonic/Density as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'Off' for Vclay Sonic/Density to be set to Null values over this zone.
(25) 'SD Son Clay'
Sonic clay value for the Sonic / Density clay indicator.
(26) 'SD Den Clay'
Density clay value for the Sonic / Density clay indicator.
(27) 'SD Den Clean1'

(28) 'SD Den Clean2'

(29) 'SD Son Clean1'
Sonic value for point 1 on the clean line.
(30) 'SD Son Clean2'
(31) 'NS Use' Flag

Set to 'On' if you wish to use the Neutron/Sonic as a clay indicator in this zone.
Set to 'Off' for Vclay Neutron/Sonic to be set to Null values over this zone.
(32) 'NS Neu Clay'
Neutron clay value for the Neutron / Sonic clay indicator.
(33) 'NS Son Clay'
Sonic clay value for the Neutron / Sonic clay indicator.
(34) 'NS Son Clean1'
(35) 'NS Son Clean2'
(36) 'NS Neu Clean1'
(37) 'NS Neu Clean2'
(38) 'OD Use' ('Other Double') Flag

Set to 'On' if you wish to use another, user-defined, double indicator as a clay indicator in
this zone.
Set to 'Off' for Vclay other double to be set to Null values over this zone.
The other double clay indicator is calculated just like the Neutron /Density clay indicators
with a clay point and a clean line.
(39) 'OD Curv1 Clay'
Clay value for curve 1 for the other double clay indicator.
(40) 'OD Curv2 Clay'
Clay value for curve 2 for the other double clay indicator.
(41) 'OD Curv1 Clean1'
Other double curve 2 value for point 1 on the clean line.
(42) 'OD Ot2 Clean2'
(45) 'BadH1 Use' Flag

Set to 'On' ('checked') if you wish to use the 'Bad Hole Indicator 1' curve in a zone.
Set to 'Off' ('blank') to turn 'Bad Hole Indicator 1' curve off in a zone.
(46) 'BadH1 Min'
Bad Hole Indicator 1 Minimum value.
When the 'Bad Hole Indicator 1' curve values are greater than this minimum value, any
double clay indicators will be switched off.
When the parameter is left 'blank', the discriminator curve is ignored.
(47) 'BadH1 Max'

Bad Hole Indicator 1 Maximum value.

When the 'Bad Hole Indicator 1' curve values are less than this maximum value, any
(48) 'BadH2 Use' Flag
Set to 'On' if you wish to use the 'Bad Hole Indicator 2' curve in a zone.
Set to 'Off' to turn 'Bad Hole Indicator 2' curve off in a zone.
(49) 'BadH2 Min'
Bad Hole Indicator 2 Minimum value.
When the 'Bad Hole Indicator 2' curve values are greater than this Minimum value, any
(50) 'BadH2 Max'
Bad hole indicator 2 Maximum value.
When the 'Bad Hole Indicator 2' curve values are less than this Maximum value, any
When the parameter is left 'blank', the discriminator is ignored.
21.3.3 Clay Volume Equations and Methodology

Gamma Ray
The Gamma Ray clay indicator (VclGr) can be calculated using the following methods:
Linear :
Curved :
Z = VclGr as above
for Z less than 0.55
for Z greater than 0.55 and less than 0.73
for Z greater than 0.73 and less than 1.0 VclGr = Z
Clavier :
Stieber (South Louisiana Miocene and Pliocene) :
Larionov older rocks (Mesozoic) :
Larionov younger rocks (Tertiary clastics) :

The following plot shows the different gamma ray Vclay relationships.
SP
Neutron
Resistivity
for Rt greater than 2 x Rclay then
otherwise VclRes = Z

Other Linear
Neutron / Density
The 'Double Clay Indicators' work on the principle of defining a 'clean line' and a 'clay point'.
The clay volume is calculated as the distance the input data falls between the 'clay point' and the
'clean line'. The following plot illustrates the principle:
Where DenCl1 & NeuCl1 and DenCl2 & NeuCl2 are the density and neutron values for the two
ends of the clean line.
Sonic Density
Where DenCl1 & SonCl1 and DenCl2 & SonCl2 are the density and sonic values for the two ends
of the clean line.
Neutron Sonic

Where NeuCl1 & SonCl1 and NeuCl2 & SonCl2 are the neutron and sonic values for the two ends
of the clean line.
Other Double Indicator
Where OD1Cl1 & OD2Cl1 and OD1Cl2 & OD2Cl2 are the other double clay volume input curves (
OD1 and OD2) values for the two ends of the clean line.
Bad Hole Indicator

If the 'Bad Hole indicator' logic is used, then over any interval which is flagged as Bad Hole all
the 'Double Clay Indicators' will be set to Null (-999).
Output Curves
An Output curve will be produced for each clay indicator selected. The curve results for these
indicators will not be limited to between 0 and 1.0. These curves are meant for quality control
purposes, and should not be used in another module for Vclay, unless they are clipped first to
between 0 and 1.0. This clipping could be done using the formula module.
Vclay minimum (VCL)and Vclay average (VCLAV)curves will also be calculated. These curves
are clipped to between 0 and 1.0. For the VCLAV curve, the separate Vclay indicator curves will
first be clipped before the average curve is created.

21.4 Porosity and Water Saturation

The 'Porosity and Water Saturation' interpretation module is used to interactively calculate
porosity (PHI), water saturation (Sw), flushed zone water saturation (Sxo), matrix density (
RHOMA) , hydrocarbon density (RHOHY) and wet and dry clay volumes (VWCL & VDCL). The
number and type of output curves depends on the porosity model chosen and the logic selected.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Interpretation' 'Porosity and Water
Saturation' or from the speed button.
The set-up screens allow the user to select 'default' porosity and water saturation models which
will initiate the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters' display. Once the 'OK' button is
clicked, any changes to calculation methods or interpretation parameters should be made using
the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters' screen. The porosity and saturation
equation defaults are also used to set up the 'Interactive Plot' for this interpretation
module. It is therefore important that the correct models are selected, in order for the
appropriate Interactive Log Plot to be launched.
The 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module can now be linked to the 'Clay Volume' module -
see 'Linking Clay Volume module to Porosity Water Saturation module' within the 'Link
Zones / Top Sets' chapter for more details.
The 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' module is arranged on three tabbed screens.
These are:
'Input Curves'
'Output Curves'
'Plot Options'
The screens are described in more detail, below.
The 'Input Curves' Tab
Section 21.4 Interpretation : Porosity and Water Saturation

Input Curves
The 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' 'Set Up' window shown above, sets up the 'input'
and 'output' curves for these calculations, plus some 'default' logic. The input curve entry boxes
will be automatically filled in with appropriate curve names if IP finds them in the
currently-selected well. The user can change any input curve name if the defaulted curve name is
not correct.
It is not necessary to fill in all 'Input Curve' boxes. Only those needed as input to the
user-selected 'Porosity' and Saturation' models are required. The 'Clay Volume' will be assumed
to be 'zero' if the 'Clay Volume' input curve entry box is left blank.
Default Models
The 'Initial Porosity Model' and 'Default Saturation Equation' are selected from on-screen
drop-down lists.The 'Default Mud Type is OBM' check-box allows the user to set up the 'mud
type' for this interpretation module.

Pass Through Porosity

The 'Pass through Porosity' entry box, illustrated below, allows the user to select a pre-existing
porosity curve (one calculated outside of this module) to be used in the 'Water Saturation'
computation.This input curve is used to override the 'default' porosity calculations. When a curve
name is entered into this box, the module will only calculate water saturation. On 'running' the
module, the user should check the 'Porosity Water Saturation Parameters' table, On the 'Phi
Logic' tab, select the 'Input Crv' option in the 'Porosity Method' column and choose the 'Input
Porosity' type ('Total' or 'Effective') as shown in the diagram below. Then 'Run' the calculation
again.
Other Input Curves

The program assumes that any neutron curve entered is in 'Limestone matrix' units. If this
is not the case, then the curve should be converted to Limestone porosity units using the
appropriate service company environmental correction module or the 'Basic Log Analysis
Functions' module.
The 'Bad Hole Discriminator' curve entry box can be used to set up a curve as a flag to indicate
depth intervals where hole conditions are such that the default porosity method is not valid, for
example, in sufficiently badly-washed-out, rugose hole where the Density and Neutron tools are
no longer in pad contact with the borehole wall. In such a case the Porosity model will default to
calculating a Sonic Porosity over the bad hole interval.

The 'Non Calculation Flag' curve can be used to turn off the calculations over an interval. If
this type of input flag contains any value other than '0' or 'Null', then such a depth level is not
calculated (Porosities, clay volume, mineral volumes are set to '0' and Sw set to '1.0'). This can be
used to flag special minerals like 'Coal' or 'Salt' using techniques outside this module (for
example these could be picked by hand using the Interactive Curve Splice module using the
'Null Curve' option).
The 'Temperature' is an essential curve and must be calculated and selected as an input for
this module to operate. A 'Temperature' curve can either be imported from an external source, or
the curve can be calculated using the 'Temperature Gradient' Module.The 'Temperature Units'
drop-down list box is used to define the units for any temperature entered as a parameter. For
instance, the Rw parameter will have a temperature associated with it.
Multi-Mineral Interpretation Settings

The 'Multi-Mineral Analysis Defaults' are used to set up multi-mineral naming and Interactive
log Plot defaults. 'Checking' the box in the top left hand corner of this panel activates this analysis
option.
The '3 Minerals' and '4 Minerals' radio button options allows the user to set the default number of
mineral volumes to calculate. If the '4 Minerals' option is selected for the initial model 'Run', the
user can subsequently change and use the '3 Minerals' option, over specified zones, by changing
the 'Model Type' parameter for that zone. This is achieved through editing the 'Porosity and
Water Saturation Parameters'.
The mineral names are user-editable text entries and must be entered under the 'Name' box.
These names are used on the parameter screens to identify the different minerals that are being
calculated. Changing the mineral name will change the 'Output Mineral Volume' curve name on
the 'Output Curves' tab. The 'check' boxes next to the mineral names are used to set up the
default interactive log plot so that the correct lithology is displayed. The user can only select
('check') one mineral type per line. If this is the first time the module is 'Run' then the 'mineral
type' will be used to set default mineral parameters.
'Output Curves' Tab

The 'Output Curves' tab allows the user to select the output curves that are to be produced by
the module. IP provides 'default' output curve names for some outputs, but the user can edit any
name to customize the outputs. Not all output curves are produced automatically. Those text
entry boxes with no curve names in them are optional curves. You must type in a curve name to
create them as output curves. The output curve list depends on the 'Default Saturation Equation
' used and the input curves selected.

Optional output curves include:

'Rw at Form. Temp' - Formation Water Resistivity at formation temperature
'Density reconstruct' - 'Reconstructed density' curve
'Den Fluid Rxo Zone' - 'Density of Fluid in the Flushed Zone' computed from the

following equation:
Den Fluid Rxo Zone = RhoFiltrate * Sxo + (1-Sxo) * RhoHyd
where:
RhoHyd is the apparent hydrocarbon density, as seen by the density tool i.e. electron
density.
In addition to the curves defined on the 'Output Curves' tab, the following curves are also created
automatically by the program:
RWAPP : Apparent water resistivity.
RMFAPP : Apparent flushed zone water resistivity.
QVN : Normalized Qv. Only if Juhasz water saturation model is chosen.
CWAPP : Apparent water conductivity. Only if Juhasz water saturation model is
chosen.
QVapp : Apparent Qv. Only if Waxman Smits water saturation model is chosen.
PhiT_recp : Reciprocal of PhiT. Only if Waxman Smits water saturation model is
chosen.
QVN, CWAPP, QVapp and PHIT_recp are output curves based on the 'Water Saturation' model
selected.
New output curves for v3.5

BVWT : Bulk volume total. PhiT * SwT
BVWSXOT : Bulk volume flushed zone total. PhiT * SxoT
PhiTLam : Total porosity in laminated sand layer.
SwTLam : SwT in the laminated sand layer.
BVWTLam : Bulk volume water total in laminated sand layer. PhiTLam * SwTLam
RtLam : Rt in the sand lamination used in the SwLam calculations.
RxoLam : Rxo in the sand lamination used in the SxoLam calculations.
VFINES (Volume of Fines) is the sum of VSILT plus VWCL. The user can now use the
Cumulative Curve Style option within log plots to create these intermediate type curves.
The 'Interactive Log Plot' will look slightly different, depending on the saturation equation chosen
and the input curves selection. The most important difference is seen between a 'Dual Water'
saturation equation, where 'Rw bound' can be interactively changed, and the other 'Archie' type
equations, where Rt clay can be interactively changed. If the 'Juhasz' and the 'Waxman Smits'
equations are selected, additional output curves are created (listed above), which allow special '
Interactive Crossplots', designed for these equations, to be made available. The 'Multi-Mineral'
option, if selected, will also change how the Interactive Log Plot is formatted. It is therefore
important that the input saturation equation and multi-mineral defaults are selected with due care.
There is now the option in v3.5 to display just Total porosity curves on the Interactive Log Plot.
The 'Parameter set name' box is used to name the file where the 'Porosity and Water
Saturation' parameters will be stored after an interpretation is finished. Parameter Sets are saved
by selecting the 'Save Parameter set' in the main menu. The same name is also used to save the
Parameter Set listings to the hard disk with an extension of '.TXT'. The 'Print Parameter set'
menu item is used to do this. Parameter sets are also stored automatically in the database.
The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the 'Porosity and Water
Saturation' Parameter Set. See Parameter Set Management.

The user clicks the 'OK' button to start the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' interpretation.
If this is the first 'OK' using this module on a particular well, a new Parameter Set (default name '
PhiSw') is created, and 'default' parameters will be calculated or initialized for each interpretation
parameter. The user will be asked whether the clay parameters from the 'Clay Volume' module
should be copied to initialize the 'PhiSw' parameters. If the user chooses to copy the clay
parameters, then all the zone top and bottom depths from the 'Clay Volume' module will be
copied to the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module along with the clay parameters for each
zone.
If an existing Parameter Set has been loaded, or the user has already run the 'Porosity and
Water Saturation' module, then the user will be asked whether the Interactive Log Plot should be
created. The user should normally answer 'Yes' to this, since this initializes all the special
Interactive log Plot features.
Method Comparison Output Curves

If the following porosity output curves are 'checked' on then these porosities are calculated at the
end of the analysis under Section 21 'Final Calculations' in the 'Porosity and Sw Equations
and Methodology' section. The porosities are calculated using the same equations as defined in
the porosity methods section 5 through 10 in the 'Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology
' section except that the Sw used in the equations is the Sw calculated from the main logic.
Hence it is possible that these porosities will be marginally different than the same method
selected as the 'Porosity Method' parameter. Since Sw will be calculated using the 'Porosity
Method' parameter which may be different from the comparison porosity.
These comparison methods are designed to compare porosity calculation methods. However, the
final porosity used for summations should be the Phie curve derived using the method set with
the 'Porosity Method' parameter. This will ensure that the calculated Sw uses the correct
porosity curve in the calculation.
A similar set of output comparison Sw curves can be created if the following boxes are 'checked'.
The saturations are calculated at the end of the analysis - Section 21 'Final Calculations'. The
user can output effective and total water saturations for each method. The calculations are made
using the Phie and PhiT curves. The Phie and PhiT curves are hydrocarbon corrected using the
Sxo curve which is calculated using the 'Sat Equation' parameter in the Sw Logic' tab of the '
Porosity Water Saturation Parameters' module. Hence it is possible that these Sw's will be
marginally different than the Sw calculated from the same method selected as the 'Sat Equation'
parameter.
These comparison methods are designed to compare water saturation methods they should not
be used for anything other than this. The final Sw used for summations should be the Sw and
SwT curves using the method set with the 'Sat Equation' parameter.
To illustrate the water saturation comparison method and the mnemonics used further we will use
the Archie equation as an example.
There are two Archie equations; the Archie and the Archie Total. Archie outputs an effective water
saturation (SwArch). While Archie Total outputs a total water saturation (SwTArchT). One cannot

compare Sw and SwT directly as they are different things. Hence, the program calculates a SwT
from the Archie equation (SwTArch) and a Sw from the Archie Total (SwArchT) equation. It does
the same for the all of the water saturation equations. These curves are meant for rough
comparison purposes only as they haven't been hydrocarbon corrected in the same way as water
saturations calculated via the 'Sat Equation' parameter in the 'Sw Logic' tab of the 'Porosity
Water Saturation Parameters' module.
The default log plot will include these comparisons as separate tracks. These tracks will only
appear if one or more comparison curves are output. The standard result (Phie and Sw curves)
are included in the comparison tracks.

Clay Type Distribution

Using the Thomas-Stieber method for shale (clay) distribution, IP can now output the volumes of
Laminated, Dispersed and Structural clay in the rock.
The method comes from the Juhasz SPWLA paper 'Assessment of the distribution of shale,
porosity and hydrocarbon saturation in shaly sands'. The techniques described within IP are the
same as in the Thomas -Stieber paper but developed further so that Phie and Vcl can be used
directly rather than the raw Neutron / Density crossplot. This allows for hydrocarbon corrected
results.
In IP we generally talk in terms of clay volumes, however, it is perfectly possible to adjust

parameters so that calculated volumes are shale volumes. This is really up to the preference of
the user. The results from the calculations are perfectly legitimate regardless of whether the user
is calculating clay or shale volumes.

The basic Thomas-Stieber crossplot model for shale distribution is shown above. Depending on
whether a point falls above or below the Laminated line either a Dispersed / Laminated or a
Laminated / Structural model is used. There is no option to have a Dispersed / Structural model.
The Clay Type Distribution calculations are automatically made and the results are output only if
the user selects in the 'Plot Options' tab the following three options:
'Display Clay / Shale Type'
'Display Sand Lamination properties track'
'Display SwT Laminated in Sw track'
The twelve output curves related to the Clay Type Distribution are:
Vclay Laminated (Vlam) - is the volume of laminated clay in the whole rock (i.e. sand
and shale laminations combined).
Vclay Dispersed (Vdisp) - is the volume of the dispersed clay in the whole rock.
Vclay Structural (Vstruc) - is the volume of the structural clay in the whole rock.
Phi Laminated (PhieLam) - is the effective porosity in the laminated sand layer.
PhiT Laminated (PhiTLam) - is the total porosity in the laminated sand layer.
Sw Laminated (SwLam) - is the effective water saturation in the laminated sand layer.
SwT Laminated (SwTLam) - is the total water saturation in the laminated sand layer.
BVW Laminated (BVWLam) - is the bulk volume water in the laminated sand layer.
BVWT Laminated (BVWTLam) - is the total bulk volume water in the laminated sand
layer.
Vcl Laminated (VclLam) - is the dispersed clay volume in the actual sand laminations.
Rt Sand Lamination (RtLam) - is the deep resistivity (Rt) in the sand lamination used in
the SwLam calculations.
Rxo Sand Lamination (RxoLam) - is the invaded zone resistivity (Rxo) in the sand
lamination used in the SxoLam calculations.
For the equations showing the derivation of these curves go to Section 23. 'Clay Type
Distribution Equations' in the 'Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology' section.

The 'Laminated' result curves are the properties of the sand laminations in a Shale/Sand
laminated sequence.
'Plot Options' Tab

The 'Plot Options' tab allows some customization of the default 'Phi/Sw' plot.

The Porosity, Resistivity and Salinity track scales can be set here.
The 'Auto scale input Density and Neutron logs' check box allows the user to select
auto scaling of the Density and Neutron curves. If the box isn't 'checked'then the default
curve scales will be displayed.
If the 'Display Silt' box is 'checked' then Silt will be displayed in the lithology track.
'Tick' the 'Display Coal / Salt / No analyses flags' box if the user wants to output a flag
showing that no analysis was performed over a coal or salt interval.
A Gamma Ray track can be switched on or off using the 'Display a Gamma Ray track'
tick box.
The 'Display Module Logic Track' creates a logic track which displays the 'PhiFlag'
curve results.
The shading for the clean matrix can be selected from the drop-down selection box of all
available lithology types 'Main Lithology shading'.
The 'Hydrocarbon Fluid shading' options are used to set up the hydrocarbon display
colour in the 'Interactive Log Plot'.

If the 'Oil' option is chosen, then the plot will show the hydrocarbon as green shading.
If the 'Gas' option is chosen, hydrocarbon will be displayed as red shading.
The 'Both' option will set up a variable shading for hydrocarbon, which will make the
shading green when the output hydrocarbon density is greater than 0.4 gm/cc and red
when the density is less than 0.4 gm/cc. This cut-off value can be changed by the user
in the 'Plot Format'.
The 'Make Total Porosity Display' when 'checked' will display the default PhiSw log
plot with Total porosity curves. The 'Porosity' track will show PhiT, BVWSXOT and
BVWT curves. The 'Lithology' track will contain VDCL (dry clay), VSILT (silt) and PHIT
(total porosity).
If the Laminated sand options are turned on then the 'Lithology' track will still contain
effective porosity curves. This is due to Thomas Steiber shale type analysis curves being
wet clay curves.
The last three 'Plot Options' relate to Clay Type Distribution.

The 'Display Clay / Shale Type' check box enables the user to display in the 'Lithology
' track of the default Phi/Sw plot the three types of shale. The normal VWCL curve is no
longer shown since this is the sum of the three shale types.
If the 'Display Sand Lamination properties track' is 'checked', the default Phi/Sw plot
has two tracks added to it; 'Sand Lam' and 'Sand Lam Res'.
If the 'Display SwT Laminated in Sw track' is 'checked' then the SwTLam curve is
added to the 'Saturation' track. NOTE: SWLam is not added in the effective porosity
display since it is the same as Sw.
For the equations showing the derivation of these curves go to Section 12. 'Laminated Sw Model
' in the 'Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology' section.

21.4.1 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot
The 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module 'Interactive Plot' format, from left to right, consists
of:
Depth track
Zone track
Gamma Ray track : Gamma Ray
Porosity Input track : Neutron, Density and Sonic
Resistivity track : Rt and Rxo
Salinity track : Rw and Rmf apparent track
Matrix track : Rho matrix, Dt matrix and Hydrocarbon density
Logic Flag: PHIFLAG Logic
Water Saturations track : Sw and Sxo
Calculated Porosity track :Phi Effective and Phi Total and
Lithology track : Vclay, Vsilt, Vsand.
If the method comparison output curves for porosity and water saturation have been 'checked' on
in the 'Output Curves' tab of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' then a further three
tracks will be displayed:
Sw Comparison track : Sw curves from the different water saturation equations
calculated using Phie.
SwT Comparison track : SwT curves from the different water saturation equations
calculated using PhiT.
Phie Comparison track : Phie curves calculated using the different porosity equations.
If the 'Display Sand Lamination properties track' has been 'checked' on in the 'Plot Options'
tab of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' then a 'Sand Lam' and 'Sand Lam Res'
track will be added to the Phi/Sw interactive plot.
Below is the 'standard' Phi/Sw 'Interactive Plot'.

Zone Track :
The 'Zone' track is used to display the current zonation scheme for the study well. 'Interpretation
zones' can be created, deleted and zone top depths moved for use in an interpretation. To create
a new zone, 'split' an existing zone:
'click' in the Zone track at the depth for the split,
choose the 'Split Zone' option from the pop-up menu.
To delete a zone, choose the 'Delete zone' option from the pop-up menu. Zone tops
and bottom depths can be moved by placing the cursor on the top of a zone in the Zone
track and, with the left mouse button held, drag the top to a new position. It is possible to
have gaps between zones. To remove a gap, drag the bottom of the zone above the gap
to some point below the top of the zone below the gap.
'Clicking' 'Edit Zone' opens the 'Edit Zone tops' module. This has limited operability. It
is only possible to import tops data from a spreadsheet, or output the created PhiSw
zones to a text file. For greater 'editability' of PhiSw zones open the 'PhiSw Parameters
' module.

Undo/Redo
the set-up of the module has been changed i.e. a new zone created, then there might be
'greyed-out' actions. These 'greyed-out' actions relate to the previous set-up of the module. In
order to redo or undo any of these actions then the module will have to be changed back to its
previous state.

Gamma Ray Track :

This contains Gamma Ray curves. This track is for reference purposes only. It can be switched off
by using the 'Display a Gamma Ray track' check box in the 'Plot Options Tab' of the 'Porosity
and Water Saturation Analysis' module.
Porosity Input Track :

The 'Porosity Input' track will contain the Neutron, Density, Sonic and, if available, EPT TPL
curves. There will be one 'Interactive Parameter Line' per curve, which will be the 'Wet Clay'
parameter value for that curve. To interactively change a parameter, place the cursor on a
parameter line. The name of the parameter and its value will be displayed at the bottom left corner
of the main window. With the left mouse button, drag the line to its new value. When the mouse
button is released, that zone will be re-calculated and all displays updated.
By 'clicking' in the track, away from the parameter line, a pop-up menu will appear. Firstly, this
menu allows the user to select a histogram plot for individual curves. The user can change the
Wet Clay parameter values for each curve in the track, using the interactive line on the histogram
plot. (See Histogram section). Secondly, the user can choose from several crossplots
(Neutron/Density, Neutron/Sonic and Sonic/Density), depending on the track contents. The
crossplots allow the user to interactively change the Wet Clay and dry clay parameters. (See
Crossplot section).
The input Density and Neutron curves can be set on auto-scale by using the check box found in
the 'Plot Options Tab' of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' module.
Resistivity Track :
The 'Resistivity' track will contain the input Rxo and Rt curves, displayed along with their clay
parameter interactive lines. The pop-up menu in this track contains 'Wet Clay Volume versus
Resistivity' crossplots, where the value of 'resistivity clay' can be chosen interactively.
'Porosity versus Resistivity crossplots' (Pickett plots) are also available. These allow the
user to modify Rw and 'm' (cementation factor) interactively . The information windows at the

bottom left hand corner of the Pickett plot display the values of Rw at formation temperature ('Rw
Form Temp') as well as the Rw value that has been entered into the 'Waters' tab of the 'Phi/Sw
Parameters' table, which could be at a different temperature (e.g. 60 degF).
Pickett Plot
Salinity Track :
'Rw Apparent' (RWAPP)and 'Rmf Apparent' (RMFAPP) curves are automatically calculated from
the 'Phi Total' (PHIT) and resistivity curves, using the 'a' and 'm' parameters that are entered on
the 'Sw Logic' tab of the 'Phi/Sw Parameters' table. The output RWAPP and RMFAPP curves
have been converted, within IP, to the temperature entered for the Rw or Rmf parameter ('Rw
temp' or Rmf temp. parameter) on the 'Sw Logic' parameters tab. Interactive lines for Rw and
Rmf are available. If the 'Dual Water' saturation model was selected as the default (see 'Input
window' above), then RwB (Rw bound) and RmfB (Rmf bound) interactive parameter lines will
also be displayed in the track.

If the 'Juhasz' saturation model is chosen as the default water saturation equation then a CwApp
versus QvN crossplot will be added to the track pop-up menu.
If 'Waxman Smits' has been chosen as the default water saturation equation then a PhiT_recp
(1/PhiT) versus QVApp crossplot will be added to the track pop-up menu.

Matrix Track :
Three curves are generally displayed in this track. 'Rho matrix' (RHOMA), 'DT matrix' (DTMA
)and 'Rho Hydrocarbon' (RHOHY). These are computed curves from the interpretation run.
These curves are often seen as vertical lines, since they represent fixed values in the
interpretation.
Three interactive parameters are associated with the 'Rho matrix' curve. These are:
'Rho GD', which is the input grain density. This value is not important if a variable output
grain density is being calculated, but if the user elects to calculate the hydrocarbon
density, or fixes the input grain density, then this interactive parameter can be used to
change the input grain density. In the case where the grain density is varying, two other
interactive lines come into play. These are
'Rho GD min' - allows the output grain density to be 'clipped' to this lower limit.
'Rho GD max' - allows the output grain density to be 'clipped' to this upper limit.
For 'Hydrocarbon Density'; the user has the options of either:

calculating a variable hydrocarbon density, or
fixing the Hydrocarbon Density value over a zone.
For the 'Variable Hydrocarbon Density' case, the 'HC Den min' parameter will set a lower limit
to the output hydrocarbon density and the 'HC Den' parameter will set an upper limit. For the '
Fixed Hydrocarbon Density' case, the 'HC Den' interactive parameter sets the fixed value.

The track pop-up menu has three logic options which can be turned 'on' and 'off' interactively.
The 'Variable Hc Den' option switches on / turns off the calculation of hydrocarbon density.
The 'Variable GD' option switches on / turns off the calculation of a matrix density.
The 'Variable Vcl' option switches on / turns off the option to re-calculate the clay volume, if
needed, to resolve the input curves, parameters and logic (see section Equations and
Methodology).
Logic (PHIFLAG) Track :

The 'Logic' track displays the 'PHIFLAG' curve. This curve should contain no values after a
'normal' execution of the PHI/Sw computation module. However, if the 'PHIFLAG' value is
greater than 'zero' the curve will be colour shaded, reflecting that some 'bad-hole logic' is
generally being invoked. The user must closely evaluate the results over these 'flagged' sections.
The 'PHIFLAG' numeric codes are described under the 'Porosity and Saturation Equations
and Methodology', PHIFLAG section.
The 'Logic' track can be turned on or off in the 'Display Module Logic track' check box found in
the 'Plot Options Tab' of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' module.
Saturation Track :
The 'Saturation' track contains the computed SwU and SxoU curves, which are the 'unlimited'
curves. The curves can have values greater than 1.0. The output Sw and Sxo curves will be
clipped to 1.0 (100%). The 'xxU' curves are good for visualizing how much greater than the 100%
water saturation is being calculated in the water zones. Thus, it is possible to arrive at statistically
100% Sw in a water zone, by adjusting the Rw.
If the 'Dual Water' model is chosen as the default porosity model (see input window above) then
the output curves SwTU, SxoTU and Sw will be displayed. SwTU is the unlimited total water
saturation, and SxoTU is the flushed zone total unlimited water saturation.
Porosity Track :
The 'Porosity' track will contain the Total and Effective porosity computed curves plus a '
Moveable Oil' Plot. The shading for oil and gas can be turned on or off using the 'Hydrocarbon
Fluid shading' buttons in the 'Plot Options Tab' of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation
Analysis' module.
Lithology Track :
The 'Lithology' track will contain a display showing the proportion of the total rock for Wet Clay,
Silt, Sand and Porosity. The Silt display can be turned off using the 'Display Silt' check box in
the 'Plot Options' tab of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' module. If the 'Display
Clay / Shale Type' is 'checked' on in the 'Plot Options' tab then three types of shale will be
displayed. The normal VWCL curve will not be shown since this curve is the sum of the three
shale types.

As well as getting the option of displaying histograms of all the curves listed in the 'Lithology'
track it is also possible to crossplot VWCL / PHIE and VWCL / PHIT. If the Laminated Sands
option is turned on in the 'Plot Options' tab of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis'
module then an interactive line allowing the adjustment of 'PhiMax', the critical parameter in the
Thomas-Steiber shale type calculations, can be made.

Multi-Mineral Analysis :
The multi-mineral analysis 'Interactive Plot' has an extra track for display of the Umatrix
apparent (UMAPP), Dtmatrix apparent (DTMAPP) and Rho Matrix apparent (RHOMAPP)
curves. This is shown in the log plot below.

Apparent Matrix Track :

Umatrix, Dtmatrix and Rhomatrix are calculated from the input curves for sonic, density and
Pef. Corrections are made for hydrocarbons and for clay if the Vclay is an input curve and the '
Clay Correct input' logic parameter is set to 'Yes'. The Umatrix versus Rhomatrix and
Rhomatrix versus Dtmatrix crossplots are used to select the 'mineral end-points'. Right mouse
'clicking' in the 'Apparent Matrix' track produces a pop-up menu where these crossplots can be
selected.

If the method comparison porosity and water saturation output curves are 'checked' in the Output
Curves' tab of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' then the 'Interactive Plot' will look
similar to this:

Sw Comparison Track :
If the following curves are 'checked' in the 'Output Curves' tab 'Method Comparisons' of the '
Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' module then the different water saturation equations
are computed and the Sw curves are output.

SwT Comparison Track :

This track contains the total water saturation output curves calculated from the different water
saturation equations. 'Check' the required boxes in the 'Output Curves' tab to compare the
different methodologies.
Phie Comparison Track :

'Check' the required boxes in the 'Output Curves' tab to compare the different porosity
methodologies.
Sand Lam. Track :

This track is added to the Phi/Sw interactive plot if the 'Display Sand Lamination properties
track' is 'checked' on in the 'Plot Options' tab of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis'.
The track contains the properties of the sand laminations. The volume of clay shown is therefore
only the dispersed or structural clay in the actual sand lamination. The porosity is the porosity in
the sand lamination and will always be greater than or equal to the effective porosity of the total
rock, which includes the shale laminations. The screenshot below was created with the 'Make
Total Porosity Display' 'checked' off.

Sand Lam Res Track :

This track is added to the Phi/Sw interactive plot if the 'Display Sand Lamination properties
track' is 'checked' on in the 'Plot Options' tab of the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis'.
The track contains the calculated Rt and Rxo curves for the sand laminations. There are also
interactive lines for the parameters 'Res Lam Shale', Rt Lam Sand' and 'Rxo Lam Sand' in this
track. The screenshot below was created with the 'Make Total Porosity Display' 'checked' on.

21.4.2 Porosity and Sw Parameters

The 'Porosity Water Saturation Parameters' window allows the user to manually change any
Porosity / Water Saturation computation parameter, and to create, edit and delete interpretation
zones. The window is launched from the main menu 'Interpretation' 'Porosity Water
Saturation Parameters' option, or by using the speed button next to the 'Porosity and
Water Saturation' speed button .

The 'Porosity Water Saturation Parameters' window displays the Porosity / Water Saturation
interpretation parameters organized onto 'tabbed' screens arranged across the window, with the
interpretation 'zones' listed in rows vertically in the window.
If a parameter is an 'On' / 'Off'-type flag, then 'ticking' it will switch it between 'On' and '
Off'. In the following screen, the 'Variable Hc Den', 'Variable GD', 'Variable Vcl' and '
OBM ?' parameters are 'On/Off' flag parameters.
If a parameter is a 'List-type' parameter - including many parameters with the word '
Method', 'Model', 'Source' or 'Equation' in the Parameter title, then 'clicking' on it will
launch a pop-up menu where the parameter can be changed. In the screenshot shown
below the parameters 'Porosity Method' and 'Mineral Model' are list parameters and
launch the associated options list:
If the 'Multi-Mineral Analysis Defaults' option is 'checked' on the main 'Porosity and Water
Saturation' set-up window, then additional parameter tabs; 'MultiMin 1', 'MultiMin 2' and '
MultiMin 3' tabs will be visible in the Parameters window.

Parameter 'cells' in the tabular display that have a grey background are not used in the analysis
for that zone. In the example shown below, the 'greyed out' parameters are only associated with
the 'Waxman Smits' water saturation equation and, since the water saturation equation
parameter is set to 'Dual Water' in two zones, the 'Waxman Smits' parameters are 'greyed out'.
NOTE : Changing a parameter value on a 'tab' does not mean that a zone is automatically
re-calculated. The user must click the 'Run' button in order to re-calculate all zones and
update all interactive displays.
The 'Null all result curves before running calculations' check box (illustrated below), if
'checked' will set all output curve values from this module to null (-999) before re-running the
computations. This is useful if the user runs an interpretation and then subsequently wishes to
modify the depth interval over which the computations are run or to remove / merge interpretation
zones.
The Porosity and Water Saturation Parameters are listed on the following tabs:
'Zone Depths' Tab
'Clay' Tab
'Waters' Tab
'Hydrocarbon' Tab
'Matrix' Tab
'Phi Logic' Tab
'Sw Logic' Tab

'Laminated Sand' Tab

'Limits / Badhole' Tab
'Den/Neu' Tab
'Sonic' Tab
'ETP' Tab
'Coal / Salt / Kill' Tab
'MultiMin1' Tab
'MultiMin2' Tab
'MultiMin3' Tab
The 'Zone Depths' Tab

The 'Zone Depths' tab allows the user to change interpretation zone top and bottom depths and
to set optional 'Zone Names' and 'Zone Colour'. The 'Zone Name' parameter can be used to
facilitate the distribution of interpretation parameters to other wells in an IP dataset if the
additional wells contain the same zone names as those in the interpreted well.
Parameter tabs except the 'Zone Depths' tab. This is accomplished by 'ticking' the 'Show
Additional Zone info' tick-box. The user then has the option of showing the zone name or the
zone depths on each tab. Depending on which option is chosen, when you select another
Parameter tab, the zone names or zone depths will be shown in the left-hand column of the 'grid'.
The 'Show Default Info' option is just displaying the 'Zone #' column populated with the zone
number.


NOTE: this functionality is available on any of the tabs.
The 'Zone Depths' tab displays the current zonation scheme set up by the user. The zones can
either be copied from the 'Clay Volume' module if this has already been run, or the user can set
up separate zones in the Porosity / Water Saturation interactive log plot.
Clicking the 'New zone' button will display the following window:

To add a new Zone, the user should:
select one of the existing zones from the window by 'clicking' on it, so that it is
highlighted.
Then 'click' on one of the three buttons 'Add Before', 'Add After', to place the new zone
in the listing, or 'Split Zone'. For the 'Split Zone' the user must give the depth to split the
selected zone.
The 'Copy Zone #' box allows the user to select the porosity and water saturation
parameters from an existing zone to populate the new zone with. The user types in the
number of the zone whose parameters will be used. For example, it is possible to add a
new zone after zone 4, but copy the parameters from zone 1 into this new zone.
Once a new zone has been created, the user must type in or cut/paste its top and
bottom depths into the 'Zone Depths' tab. NOTE: zones cannot overlap, but one can
have a gap between zones.
The 'Lock Zone' column allows a user to lock any zone which will prevent any of the parameters
of that zone in any of the tabs from being changed. It will also prevent any interactive lines on the
interactive plots from changing the parameter for that zone. The 'Multi-Well Change Parameters'
module will also be affected. If a zone has been locked by 'checking' the 'Lock Zone' column then
the zone will be 'grayed' out throughout all the tabs of the module.
Also within this tab is the option to link or un-link zones to the 'Clay Volume' module using the '
Link Clay Vol' option. If the modules are linked then whatever changes are made in the 'Clay
Volume' module will be passed through to the 'Porosity Water Saturation' module. In the
screenshot above the 'Link Clay Vol' column is grayed out, showing that the two modules are not
linked. For more information on linking modules go to 'Link Zones / Top Sets'. Below is a
screenshot of how this tab would look if the two modules where linked.

The 'Print' button on the parameter window will produce the following menu. This allows output of
the summation report to the printer or to a file. The file will be written to the default output
directory using the file set name, with the extension of ".txt".
The 'Close' button on the Parameters window closes the window, but does not cancel any
changes made to the parameters. If the user closes the window without clicking 'Run', then the
changes made to the parameters will not come into effect until some other interactive parameter
is changed for that zone and therefore forces a re-calculation of the zone.
The 'Help' buttons on the parameter screens are unique to the IP program in the sense that they
are not linked to this 'Help' document. The button will display a small window (example below)
which will give a definition / clarification for individual parameters in the display. Once the window
is activated the user places the mouse cursor over a parameter in the Parameters window and the
'Help' for that parameter is displayed.
Column Edits
To set all the parameter entries in one column of the Parameters screen to the same value, the
user should:
'click' in the header (title cells) of the column. This action turns the column header boxes

to a green highlight.
Now, changing any one parameter value in the highlighted column will change all cells in
that column to the same number.
To turn the 'column edit' function to 'off', click the column header again and its colour will return to
a grey background. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory. They have
to be reset, if required, next time the well is loaded. The following shows a column edit turned on
for the 'Rw' parameter.
NOTE: if a zone has been locked by 'checking' the 'Lock Zone' cell within the 'Zone Depths' tab
then the value in the cell won't change.
Porosity and Water Saturation Parameter Names

The following input parameters are used in the 'Porosity Water Saturation Parameters' module.
Only those that are relevant for the selected input curves will be displayed in the parameter
window. Therefore, sections on the 'EPT' will only be shown if the EPT TPL curve is entered.
Numbers in parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter name, relate to the 'Monte Carlo Error
Analysis' module and correspond to Porosity and Water Saturation inputs found in the file
MonteCarloDefaults.par.
'Clay' Tab

(11) Rho Wet Clay

'Density of Wet Clay' in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used for calculating porosity from the density log
and for calculating Wet Clay Total Porosity if a value is not entered in the 'PhiT Clay'
column.
A value must be entered if a density tool is selected on the set-up window.
(12) Rho Dry Clay
'Density of Dry Clay' in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used for calculating clay total porosity, 'PhiT Clay
'. ( IP defaults to 2.78 gm/cc.)
(13) Neu Wet Clay
'Neutron Wet Clay' reading in decimal notation. Used for calculating Neutron Porosity.
A value must be entered if a neutron tool is selected on the set-up window.
(14) Sonic Wet Clay
'Sonic Wet Clay' value in mSec/ft (mSec/m). Used for calculating Sonic Porosity.
A value must be entered if a sonic tool is selected on the set-up window.
Pef Clay
'Pef value of Clay'. Used in the multi-mineral analysis to clay-correct Umatrix when the '
Clay Corr Input' flag is set to 'On'.
(15) Res Clay
'Resistivity of the Clay'. Used for the 'Simandoux', 'Modified Simandoux' and '
Indonesian' water saturation equations.
A value can be set using the interactive 'Resistivity versus Vclay' crossplot.
(16) Rxo Clay
'Resistivity of the Clay seen by the micro resistivity tool'. Used for the 'Simandoux', '
Modified Simandoux' and 'Indonesian' water saturation equations for calculating Sxo.
The 'Rxo Clay' value is normally the same as the 'Res Clay' parameter, but can be
different due to the different responses of the micro-resistivity and deep resistivity tools in
Shaly zones.
A value can be set using the interactive 'Rxo versus Vclay' crossplot.
(82) PhiT Clay
'Total Porosity of Clay'. If a cell is left 'blank', 'PhiT Clay' will be calculated from the 'Rho
Dry Clay' and 'Rho Wet Clay' parameter entries.
'Waters' Tab

(1) Rw
'Formation Water Resistivity'.
Rw Temp
'Temperature associated with Rw'; units set on curve input/output window. The program
will convert the Rw to formation temperature using the user-selected Temperature curve.
If Rw Temp is left 'blank' then the Rw value will be assumed to be at formation
temperature, and no further conversion will be made. The user should understand that,
because Rw is temperature sensitive, it must have an associated temperature to enable
the interactive line in the Phi/Sw interactive plot to work. In the screen illustrated above,
the Rw Temp is set to 60 degF. This means that the Rwapp curve computed by the
module will be Rwapp at 60 DegF.
(3) Rmf
'Mud filtrate resistivity'.
Rmf Temp
'Temperature associated with Rmf'; units set on curve input/output window. The
program will convert the Rmf to formation temperature using the user-selected
Temperature curve.
If Rmf Temp is left 'blank' then the Rmf will be assumed to be at formation temperature,
and no further conversion will be made.
(5) Rw bound
'Clay bound water resistivity'. Used in the 'Dual Water' saturation equation option.
The value can be estimated from the Rw apparent curve in the Shaly wet sections. Rw
bound can be adjusted to give 100% Sw in these zones.
Rwb Temp
'Temperature associated with Rw bound'; units set on curve input/output window. The
program will convert Rw bound to formation temperature using the user-selected
Temperature curve.
If Rwb Temp is left 'blank' then Rw bound will be assumed to be at formation
temperature, and no further conversion will be made.
(7) Rmf bound
'Clay bound water resistivity' in the flushed zone. Used in the 'Dual Water' saturation
equation option. Normally the same as Rw bound but can vary, due to the different
responses of the micro resistivity and the deep resistivity curve in Shaly zones.
The value can be estimated from the Rmf apparent curve in the Shaly wet sections. Rmf
bound can be adjusted to give 100% Sxo in these zones.
Rmfb Temp

'Temperature associated with Rmf bound'; units set on curve input/output window. The
program will convert Rmf bound to formation temperature using the user-selected
Temperature curve.
If Rmfb Temp is blanked out, then Rmf bound will be assumed to be at formation
temperature, and no further conversion will be made.
Rho Sxo zone
'Flushed zone water density' in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used in the density equation for the
density of the water seen by the tool.
If 'Rho Sxo zone' is 'blank' the value is calculated from the 'Rmf' parameter.
In oil-based mud 'Rho Sxo' is calculated from Rw if the cell/column is left 'blank'.
Salin Sxo zone
'Flushed zone water salinity' in decimals (e.g. 25 KPPM entered as .025). Used for
making formation salinity corrections to the neutron log and calculating TP water.
If 'Salin Sxo zone' is left 'blank', the value is calculated from the 'Rmf' parameter.
In oil based mud 'Salin Sxo zone' is calculated from Rw if the cell/column is left 'blank'.
'Hydrocarbon' Tab
(17) Hc Den
'Hydrocarbon density' in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used to calculate the apparent hydrocarbon
density seen by the density tool and the apparent hydrocarbon hydrogen Index seen by
the neutron tool.
If using the 'Density / Neutron' model and the 'variable hydrocarbon density' flag is set,
then Hc Den will be the maximum allowable hydrocarbon density.
If Hc Den is left blank, the value defaults to 1.0 gm/cc (1000 kg/m3).
Hc Den Min
'Minimum allowable hydrocarbon density' in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used only in the 'Density /
Neutron' model and with the 'variable hydrocarbon density' flag set. This value will set
the minimum possible hydrocarbon density.
PhiShr limit
'Volume of hydrocarbon limit seen in the flushed zone' in decimals (Phi*(1-Sxo)
default 0.02 . Used only in the 'Density / Neutron' model and with the 'variable
hydrocarbon density' flag set.
When Phi*(1-Sxo) is less than PhiShr limit, then the level is considered to have too little
hydrocarbon to accurately calculate a hydrocarbon density and the default value (Hc Den)
is used.

Neu Hc HI
'Neutron hydrocarbon Hydrogen Index' in decimals. If the user wants to override the
default calculation then enter the value here; otherwise it will be calculated from the Hc
Den parameter.
Default calculation is Neu Hc HI = RhoH * 9 (4 - 2.5 RhoH) / (16 - 2.5 RhoH) where
RhoH is the input hydrocarbon density (Hc Den) in gm/cc.
Den Hc app
'Density tool apparent hydrocarbon density' in gm/cc (kg/m3). If you want to override
the default calculation, then enter the value here, otherwise it will be calculated from the
Hc Den parameter.
Default calculation is Den Hc app = RhoH * 2 (10 - 2.5 RhoH) / (16 - 2.5 RhoH)
where RhoH is the input hydrocarbon density (Hc Den) in gm/cc.
(21) Sonic Hc
'Sonic Hydrocarbon response' in mSec/ft (mSec/m). Must be entered if Sonic porosity
model is chosen.
'Matrix' Tab
GD source
'Matrix grain density source'. Options are:
Fixed value entered as a parameter
Variable value entered as a curve
Multi-mineral. Grain density is calculated from mineral volumes using the TRUE
mineral densities. (Multi-mineral option only)
(24) Rho GD
'Matrix grain density' in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used if the 'GD source' parameter is set to '
param'.
For the density porosity model, this is the matrix density used to calculate porosity.
For the neutron/density porosity model, this is the starting input matrix density. If the '
variable matrix grain density' flag ('Variable GD' on the 'PHI logic' tab) is set, then this
value can be different to the output matrix density.
For the neutron porosity model, this value will override any neutron matrix value (Neu
Matrix) entered. For example: if you wanted to calculate a neutron sandstone, enter 2.65
(2650) , and the non-linear neutron sandstone transform will be used.
Rho GD max
'Matrix grain density maximum value' in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used only in the 'Density /

Neutron' model and with the 'variable matrix grain density' flag set (on the 'PHI logic'
tab). This value will set the maximum possible matrix density.
Rho GD min
'Matrix grain density minimum value' in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used only in the 'Density /
Neutron' model and with the 'variable matrix grain density' flag set (on the 'PHI logic'
tab). This value will set the minimum possible matrix density.
Neu matrix
'Neutron matrix value' in decimal porosity units. Used only in the Neutron porosity model.
This is the neutron difference between 0% porosity limestone (assumed entered neutron
porosity matrix) and 0% porosity of the formation matrix.
A linear response is used. Therefore, if you want to convert to either sandstone or
dolomite, it is better to enter a value of Rho GD, and the non linear transform will be used.
Any value for the Rho GD parameter will totally override Neu Matrix, therefore if you want
to use Neu Matrix, blank out the Rho GD parameter.
(28) Sonic matrix
'Sonic matrix travel time' in mSec/ft. Used for sonic porosity model and bad hole sonic
porosity.
'Phi Logic' Tab

The 'Phi Logic' Tab allows the user to set up the 'Porosity Method' to be applied to each
interpretation zone, together with the 'Mineral Model' if the multi-mineral option was chosen,
whether Oil-Based mud was used in the hole and, if 'Pass through Porosity' was selected,
whether the input curve is an 'effective or 'total' porosity curve.
Porosity Method
Porosity calculation method. Options are :
Neutron/Density
Neutron/Sonic
Neutron
Density
Sonic
Input Crv.
If a porosity curve is entered in the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' module '
Pass through Porosity', the input curve name is used directly for porosity. In this case,
the user needs to set the 'Input Porosity' parameter to 'Total' or 'Effective' porosity.

Variable Hc Den
'Variable Hydrocarbon Density' flag. Used in the 'Neutron/Density' porosity model.
Set to 'On' to calculate hydrocarbon density in the hydrocarbon zones, defined by PhiShr
limit parameter (on the 'Hydrocarbon' tab). Parameters Hc Den Min and Hc Den define
the limits of the result.
Variable GD
'Variable matrix grain density' flag. Used in the 'Neutron/Density' porosity model.
Set to 'On' to calculate matrix density. Parameters 'Rho GD max' and 'Rho GD min'
define the limits of the result.
If the 'Variable Hc Den' flag is also set, then the hydrocarbon density will be calculated
firstly using the input matrix density. Only if the Hc Den is outside its limits will the matrix
density be varied.
Variable Vcl
'Variable Clay Volume' flag. Used in the 'Neutron/Density' porosity model.
Set to 'On' to calculate clay volume. Result must be between 0 and 1.
If the 'Variable Hc Den' or 'Variable GD' flag is also set, then these will be varied first.
Only if both are at their limits will the input clay volume be varied.
If Hc Den, Matrix Den and Clay Vol are all at their limits and no solution is possible, then
the neutron and/or density input curve will be reduced in order to resolve the solution,
given the input variables. When this happens the PHIFLAG curve will be set to '6' to
indicate a reduction in density, and '7' to indicate a reduction in neutron.
Mineral Model
'Mineral model option'. Used in the 'Neutron/Density', 'Neutron/Sonic' and 'Neutron'
porosity models and for the EPT to calculate TP matrix.
Options are :
Sandstone/Limestone/Dolomite (ss/ls/dol). If matrix density is greater than 2.71g/cc
(2710 kg/m3), then the model will be Limestone/Dolomite; less than 2.71g/.cc (2710
Kg/ m3), Sandstone/Limestone.
Sandstone/Dolomite (ss/dol).
Sandstone/Special mineral (ss/sp min). The special mineral matrix values must be
entered.
Limestone/Special mineral (ls/sp min). The special mineral matrix values must be
entered.
Dolomite/special mineral (dol/sp min). The special mineral matrix values must be
entered.
OBM ?
'Oil based mud' flag. If set to 'On' (ticked) then the following logic is applied:
Sxo must be less than or equal to Sw.
Invasion factor logic with OBM assumes that Sxo <= Invasion factor. Therefore, if the
Invasion factor is set at 0.5 then Sxo will be the minimum of 0.5 or Sw.
Input Porosity
Used when a curve name is entered as an input in the 'Pass through Porosity' box of the
'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' module.
Set to 'Total' if input curve is Total Porosity
Set to 'Effective' if input curve is Effective Porosity
IP will calculate 'Total Porosity' if 'Effective Porosity' is entered and 'Effective Porosity'
if 'Total Porosity' is entered.

'Sw Logic' Tab
Sxo Method
'Method for Sxo calculation'. Options are :
Rxo Sxo calculated from Rxo resistivity.
TPL Sxo calculated from EPT TPL curve.
Invasion Factor (Inv Fac) Sxo calculated from invasion factor.
m source
'Source for Archie 'm' factor'. Options are :
Parameter Input from fixed parameter.
Curve Input from a curve.
Shell Calculate from the Shell formula m = 1.87 + 0.019 / PHIE
Rxo EPT A variable 'm' is calculated from Rxo, using the Sxo calculated from the
EPT. The resultant 'm' value is limited by the parameters 'min m value' and 'max m
value'.
m* Used only for the Waxman&Smits and Dual Water saturation equations. A
variable m* is calculated.
m* = m + Cm(1.128 Y + 0.22 (1-e**(-17.3Y))) W&S
m* = m + Cm(0.258 Y + 0.20 (1-e**(-16.4Y))) Dual Water
Y = Qv PhiT / (1 - PhiT)
Cm* is an input parameter
Qv = a/PhiT + b where 'a' and 'b' are user-entered parameters. Qv can

also be entered as an input curve.

n source
'Source for Archie 'n' factor'. Options are :
Parameter Input from fixed parameter.
Curve Input from a curve.
Rxo EPT A variable 'm' is calculated from Rxo, using the Sxo calculated from the
EPT. 'n' is set equal to the resultant 'm' plus the parameter 'm plus value' (n = m +
mPlus)
Sat Equation
'Saturation equation'. Used both for calculation of Sxo and Sw. The following equations
are available:
Archie
1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw)
Archie PhiT
1/Rt = PhiT**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw)
Same as Archie except PhiT used instead of Phie.
Simandoux
1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw) + Vcl.Sw / Rcl
Modified Simandoux
1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw.(1-Vcl)) + Vcl.Sw / Rcl
Indonesian (Poupon-Leveaux)
1/Rt**.5 = ((Phi**m/(a.Rw))**.5 + Vcl**(1-(Vcl/2))/Rcl**.5 ).Sw**(n/2)
Modified Indonesian
1/Rt**.5 = ((Phi**m/(a.Rw))**.5 + Vcl**((1-Vcl)/2)/Rcl**.5 ).Sw**(n/2)
Dual Water
1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n/a.(1/Rw + Swb/SwT(1/Rwb-1/Rw))
Juhasz
1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n.(1+Bn.Qvn/SwT)/(a.Rw)
Qvn = Vcl*PhiClay / PhiT
Bn = B normalized, entered parameter
Waxman-Smits
1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n.(1+B.Qv/SwT)/(a.Rw)
B = entered parameter or calculated from T and Rw
Qv = a / PhiT + b
where 'a' and 'b' are entered parameters.
Qv can also be entered as an input curve.
(64) a factor
'Archie equation 'a' factor' or tortuosity factor.
(65) m exponent
'Archie 'm' factor' or cementation factor. Use when 'm' source parameter is set to 'Param
'.
(66) n exponent
'Archie 'n' factor' or saturation exponent. Use when 'n' source parameter is set to 'Param
'.
Invasion factor
Used to calculate Sxo when no Sxo device is available.
For water based mud Sxo = (Sw +InvasionFactor) / (1+ InvasionFactor).
For Oil based mud Sxo = InvasionFactor.
min m value
'Minimum 'm' value' when 'm' is calculated from Rxo and Ept.
max m value
'Maximum 'm' value' when 'm' is calculated from Rxo and Ept.

m plus value
'Addition to variable 'm' to calculate 'n''. Used when 'n source' is set to Rxo and Ept. n =
m + mPlus.
(94) B fact Juhasz
'B factor'(equivalent conductance of clay cations) in the Juhasz Waxman-Smits equation.
Default 1.0 meq/ml
Can be set interactively using the Cwa versus Qvn crossplot.
(132) B fact W-S
'B factor'(equivalent conductance of clay cations) in the Waxman-Smits equation.
If left 'blank' then this is calculated from formation temperature and Rw.
Qv W-S Source
'Qv source' in the Waxman-Smits equation and Dual Water (variable m*) equation.
Set to 'Param' for calculation of Qv from the equation :
Qv = a / PhiT + b
Where 'a' and 'b' are the entered Qv 'a' and 'b' constant parameters.
'a' and 'b' can be selected interactively from the 1/PhiT versus QvApp crossplot.
If set to 'Curve' then Qv is taken from the input curve.
(134) Qv 'a' Const
The 'a' Constant in the Qv equation :
Qv = a / PhiT + b
Used in the Waxman-Smits Sw equation.
(135) Qv 'b' Const
The 'b' Constant in the Qv equation :
Qv = a / PhiT + b
(140) Cm*
Cm constant in the W&S and Dual Water, variable m* equation. Default value is 1.0. If set
to 0.0, 'm*' will be equal to equation input 'm'.
The variable m* option is turned 'on' by setting the 'm source' parameter to 'm*'.
'Laminated Sand' Tab
This tab is only visible if the 'Display Clay / Shale Type' is 'checked' in the 'Plot Options' tab of
the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' module.
Sat Model
This is the saturation model for a zone. Options are:
Normal - the standard approach to Sw calculations is taken.

Laminated - saturations are calculated in the sand lamination using the porosity, clay
volume and resistivity of the sand lamination. Once the sand laminated Sw's are
calculated the normal Sw and SwT will be calculated, assuming that there is no
hydrocarbon in the shale laminations.
Res Lam Shale
This is the resistivity of the shale lamination. It is used to calculate Rt and Rxo in the sand
lamination from the normal entered Rt and Rxo and the volume of laminated shale from
the Thomas Steiber calculations. This parameter is not used if the resistivity of the sand is
entered.
Rt Lam Sand
This is the deep resistivity (Rt) of the sand lamination. If the cell is left blank then it is
calculated from the 'Res Lam Shale' parameter and the entered Rt curve.
Rxo Lam Sand
This is the invaded zone resistivity (Rxo) of the sand lamination. If the cell is left blank then
it is calculated from the 'Res Lam Shale' parameter and the entered Rxo curve.
'Limits / BadHole' Tab

The 'Limits / BadHole' Tab permits the user to set up and apply 'Limits' parameters which allow
the IP program:
to limit the maximum porosity calculated in reservoir intervals

to reduce the porosity calculated in shales
to set Water Saturation to 1.0 (100%) in very low (effective) porosity intervals
to set effective porosity to a very small number (0.0001) and Sw to 1.0 (100%)
where (effective) porosity is below a 'Limit' value
to set effective porosity to 0.0001 and Water saturation to 1.0 when Volume wet
clay (VWCL) is greater than a limit value
These limits are applied according to the logic described below. The logic statements also allow
the computation of the 'Silt Index' as shown in the diagram and described, below. The 'Vcl
cut-off' parameter can be used to remove porosity in shale zones and, in conjunction with the 'm
vari wth Vcl' logic, will also remove any spurious hydrocarbons from zones of high clay volume.
Phi max
The 'Phi Max' parameter should be set to the 'Maximum likely porosity value in silt-free

sand', in decimal porosity units. It is used to calculate the Silt Index (VSILT), Clay Type
Distribution and also to limit porosity when used with the 'Vcl cut-off' logic described
below. It is important to note that the Silt Index is simply that, an index. That Silt volumes
are not designed to be accurate and that the VSILT curve is used only for the 'Lithology'
display in the Porosity and Water Saturation modules' interactive log plot. The premise is
that a shaly sand can be thought of as being made up of clean sand of a certain porosity
(PhiMax), 'Silt' of zero porosity and 'Clay'. If the calculated effective porosity is greater
than 'Phi Max', then there is no silt in the rock. However, where PHIE is less than 'Phi
Max' and 'VClay' is less than 1.0, then some proportion of the rock will be made up of
non-porous 'Silt'. The Silt Index is computed from the following formula :
VSILT = 1 - VolwetClay - (Phie / PhiMax)
The derivation of the VSILT index is illustrated in the following graph:
Delta Phi max

This parameter, 'Addition to Phi Max' can be adjusted by the user to remove unrealistic
porosities. It is applied as follows:
If Vcl > 'Vcl cut-off' then:
Phie <= (PhiMax+DeltaPhiMax)*(1.0-Vcl)*10**(-10.0*(Vcl-Vclcut-off)**1.6))

m vari wth Vcl

This parameter 'Variable cementation factor 'm' with Vcl flag' is used in conjunction
with the 'Vcl cut-off' as follows:
If set to 'On' (box is 'checked') and If Vcl > 'Vcl cut-off' then :
m = m*10**(Vcl - Vcl cut-off).
This has the effect of removing any hydrocarbons in zones of high clay content.
Vcl cut-off
The 'Vclay cut-off' parameter (decimal) is used with the logic described below to remove
porosity in Shale zones, as illustrated in the 'Silt Index and Phi Limits' diagram shown
above:
If Vcl > Vcl cut-off then
Phie <= (PhiMax+DeltaPhiMax)*(1.0-Vcl)*10**(-10.0*(Vcl-Vclcut-off)**1.6))
The 'Vcl cut-off' parameter can also be used to boost the Archie parameter 'm' in shales.
This has the effect of removing unlikely hydrocarbon saturations in shales as described
above. In addition, the 'Vcl cut-off' logic is used to limit the output wet clay volume as
follows:
If Vcl > Vcl cut-off and 'variable Vcl' logic (on the 'Phi Logic' tab) is chosen then:
VolWetClay (Vcl out) >= Vcl input.
Sxo Limit ?
'Limit Sxo flag'. If set to 'On' then the calculation of Sxo is limited by the following
equation - Sxo < Sw**SxoLimit.
Sxo Limit
'Sxo limit exponent'. If the 'Sxo Limit ?' flag is set to 'On', then the 'Sxo Limit' exponent
value is used in the following equation Sxo < Sw**SxoLimit.
Bad Hole Disc ?

'Bad hole discriminator' flag. If a curve is selected in the 'Porosity and Water
Saturation Analysis' module set-up window ('Bad Hole Discriminator' entry) and is
subsequently set to 'On' (ticked') in the 'Porosity Water Saturation Parameters'
interface, the bad hole discriminator logic is turned on and a 'Porosity from Sonic' log is
calculated.
If the values in the input Bad Hole Discriminator curve are greater than the 'Disc Min'
parameter, OR are less than the 'Disc Max' parameter, then the minimum of the Sonic
porosity or the user-selected porosity model is output. Where Sonic Porosity is the
output, then the Phi Logic Flag will be set to a value of 1.
The principle is illustrated in the following figure, which uses the caliper log curve (CALI)
as the Bad Hole Discriminator. The user should only set up the discriminator with either
the 'Disc Min' or 'Disc Max' parameter for a single zone. NOTE: the logic DOES NOT
WORK if BOTH discriminators are set in a zone.

Disc Min
'Discriminator minimum value', in units of the input discriminator curve. If the parameter
is 'blank', then this discriminator is not used.
If the input discriminator curve value is greater than the 'Disc Min' parameter then Phi
'Model' <= Phi 'Sonic'.
If both the 'Disc Min' and 'Disc Max' parameters are left 'blank' and the 'Bad Hole Disc'
flag is turned 'on', then Phi 'Model' is always limited to be less than Phi 'Sonic'.
Disc Max
'Discriminator maximum value', in units of the input discriminator curve. If the parameter
is 'blank', then this discriminator is not used. If the input discriminator curve value is less
than the 'Disc Max' parameter, then Phi 'Model' <= Phi 'Sonic'.
If both the 'Disc Min' and 'Disc Max' parameters are left 'blank' and the 'Bad Hole Disc'
flag is turned 'on', then Phi 'Model' is always limited to be less than Phi 'Sonic'.
The following logic can be applied to 'clean up' an interpretation by limiting Effective Porosity and
Water saturation in poor quality, non-reservoir rock.
Phie Sw Limit
The 'Phie Sw Limit': when effective porosity (PHIE) < 'Phie Sw Limit' value, Sw and SwT

etc.. will be set to 1.0 (100%).

Phie Limit
The 'Phie Limit': when effective porosity (PHIE) < 'Phie Limit' value, effective porosity
(PHIE) will be set to 0.001, Sw, SwT etc.. will be set to 1.0 (100%).
Vcl Limit
The 'Vcl Limit': when Volume Wet clay (VWCL) > 'Vcl Limit' value, effective porosity
(PHIE) will be set to 0.0001, Sw, SwT etc... will be set to 1.0 (100%).
Swi Limit
The 'Swi Limit': when
'Den / Neu' Tab
Rho Sp mineral
'Density special mineral' in gm/cc (kg/m3). Used for neutron/density porosity model when
the mineral model chosen includes a defined special mineral.
Neu Form Sal
'Neutron formation salinity correction' flag. 'Check' the box(es) if you want IP to
perform formation salinity corrections. The formation salinity correction depends on true
porosity and water saturation.
If the neutron log curve has already had formation salinity corrections applied, then
'un-check' this option.
It is better to have the program perform the salinity correction, since it will take into
account water saturation in the flushed zone.
Neu Log Cont
'Neutron logging contractor'. Select the appropriate contractor from the drop-down list.
Neu Tool Type
'Neutron tool type'. Select appropriate tool type from the drop-down list.
If the appropriate tool type cannot be found, and its response is significantly different to
any other tool type, it is possible for the user to create a new tool type and tool response
parameter file. See Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology.
Neu Sp mineral
'Neutron special mineral' in decimal porosity units. Used for neutron/density and
neutron/sonic porosity models when the mineral model chosen includes a defined special
mineral.
'Sonic' Tab

Sonic Equ
Equation used for calculating sonic porosity. Options are :
Wyllie time average equation
Raymer Hunt equation
Sonic Lime
'Sonic limestone travel time' in mSec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic porosity model. Default
49 (160 mSec/m).
Sonic Sand
'Sonic sandstone travel time' in mSec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic porosity model. Default
56 (180 mSec/m).
Sonic Dol
'Sonic dolomite travel time' in mSec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic porosity model. Default 44
(145 mSec/m).
(40) Sonic water
'Sonic water travel time' in mSec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic and sonic porosity model and
bad hole sonic porosity. Default 189 (620 mSec/m).
Sonic Cp
'Sonic compaction factor'. Used in the Wyllie time average equation (Default 1.0).
DT Sp mineral
'Sonic special mineral travel time' in mSec/ft. Used for neutron/sonic porosity model
when the mineral model chosen includes a defined special mineral.
'EPT' Tab
The 'EPT' Tab will only be visible if the user has set up an 'ETP / TPL' curve on the 'Porosity and
Water Saturation Analysis' module ('Input Curves' tab).

TP water
'Propagation time for water' in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. If not
entered, TP water will be calculated from formation temperature and salinity in the flushed
zone.
TP Lime
'Propagation time for limestone' in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must
be entered if the EPT is used. Default 9.1.
TP Sand
'Propagation time for sandstone' in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT.
Must be entered if the EPT is used. Default 7.2.
TP Dol
'Propagation time for dolomite' in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must
be entered if the EPT is used. Default 8.7.
TP Clay
'Propagation time for clay' in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT. Must be
entered if the EPT is used. Default 8.0 normal range 7-16.
TP Hc
'Propagation time for hydrocarbon' in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT.
Must be entered if the EPT is used. Normal values gas 3.3, oil 4.7-5.2.
TP Sp mineral
'Propagation time for special mineral' in nsec/m. Used for calculating Sxo from the EPT
when mineral model chosen includes a defined special mineral.
'Coal / Salt / Kill' Tab

Coal Logic
'Flag to turn on the Coal Logic'. The level is considered to be Coal when :
Density < Rho Coal
Neutron > Neu Coal
Sonic > Dt Coal
If either 'Rho Coal', 'Neu Coal' or 'Dt Coal' is left blank, then they will not be used in the
logic.
Rho Coal
'Density limit to test for coal'. The level is considered coal when :
Density < Rho Coal
Neutron > Neu Coal
Sonic > Dt Coal
If either Rho Coal, Neu Coal or Dt Coal is left blank, then they will not be used in the logic.
Neu Coal
'Neutron limit to test for coal'. The level is considered coal when :
Density < Rho Coal
Neutron > Neu Coal
Sonic > Dt Coal
DT Coal
'Sonic limit to test for coal'. The level is considered coal when :
Density < Rho Coal
Neutron > Neu Coal
Sonic > Dt Coal
Salt Logic
'Flag to turn on the Salt Logic'. The level is considered to be Salt when :
Density < Rho salt
Neutron < Neu salt
Sonic < Dt salt
If either 'Rho salt', 'Neu salt' or 'Dt salt' is left blank, then they will not be used in the
logic.
Rho Salt
'Density limit to test for salt'. The level is considered salt when :
Density < Rho salt
Neutron < Neu salt
Sonic < Dt salt
If either Rho salt, Neu salt or Dt salt is left blank, then they will not be used in the logic.
Neu Salt
'Neutron limit to test for salt'. The level is considered salt when :
Density < Rho salt
Neutron < Neu salt
Sonic < Dt salt
DT Salt
'Sonic limit to test for salt'. The level is considered salt when :
Density < Rho salt
Neutron < Neu salt
Sonic < Dt salt

Kill Logic
The 'Kill Logic' parameters only become available if the 'Kill Analysis Flag' output curve is
selected in the 'Porosity and Water Saturation Analysis' module 'Output Curves' tab. The logic
parameters have been added so that the user can now turn off the analysis over certain zones.
Examples of zones over which to do this would be cased intervals, extreme bad hole or volcanic
sections where standard analysis is impossible.
The user sets the 'Kill Val/Crv 1' and 'Kill Val/Crv 2' plus the 'Kill Operator' parameters to reflect
the situation for when the analysis should be turned off. When the logic is true the porosity and
volume outputs will be set to 0.0 and the water saturations will be set to 1.0. All other outputs will
be set to null values. The default plot will show the 'killed' zones as brown shading in the '
Lithology' track.
'MultiMin 1' Tab
Model Type
'Multi-mineral model type'. Options are :
U/Rho : 3 mineral volumes will be calculated from Umatrix and Rhomatrix
Rho/Dt : 3 mineral volumes will be calculated from Rhomatrix and DTmatrix
U/Rh/Dt : 4 mineral volumes will be calculated from Umatrix, Rhomatrix and
DTmatrix
Mineral 1 : mineral volumes will be set to 0 except Mineral 1 which will be 1-Phie-Vcl
The last four methods are used to force the mineralogy to a fixed value.
Clay Corr Input

Flag: if set to 'On' then the Umatrix, DTmatrix and RhoMatrix curves are corrected for
clay using the input clay volume. The input clay volume curve is also used to clay-correct
any water saturation equation.
If set to 'Off' then the input Vcl curve is ignored and clay can be calculated as one of the
minerals.
This is used only with the multi-mineral option.

Min1 Clay ?
If the 'Clay Corr Input' flag is set to 'Off' (is not 'checked'), then setting the Min1 Clay?
flag to true ('checked') allows this mineral to be counted as clay. The VWCL output curve
will be the same as the mineral volume for 'Mineral 1'. This clay volume will also be used to
correct the water saturation equations for clay.
If the 'Clay Corr Input' flag is set to 'On' (is 'checked') then the 'Min1 Clay?' parameter
has no effect. Clay volume is taken as the input VCL curve.
Min2 Clay ?
If the 'Clay Corr Input' flag is set to 'Off' (is not 'checked'), then setting the Min2 Clay?
Min3 Clay ?
If the 'Clay Corr Input' flag is set to 'Off' (is not 'checked'), then setting the Min3Clay?
Min4 Clay ?
If the 'Clay Corr Input' flag is set to 'Off' (is not 'checked'), then setting the Min4Clay?
will be the same as the mineral volume for 'Mineral 4. This clay volume will also be used to
'MultiMin 2' Tab
Min1 Umat
U matrix of Mineral 1
Min2 Umat
Min3 Umat

Min4 Umat
Min1 RhoMat
Rho matrix Mineral 1
Min2 RhoMat
Min3 RhoMat
Min4 RhoMat
Min1 DtMat
DT matrix Mineral 1
Min2 DtMat
DT matrix Mineral 2
Min3 DtMat
DT matrix Mineral 3
Min4 DtMat
DT matrix Mineral 4
'MultiMin 3' Tab
Min1 Rho True

'Rho matrix true Mineral 1'. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to
calculate a total clean matrix density. The clean matrix density is used to calculate porosity
from the density if the grain density source parameter 'GD source', on the 'Matrix' tab is
set to 'Multi-mineral'. This is the default setting if the multi-mineral options are activated.
Min2 Rho True
from the density if the grain density source parameter 'GD source', on the 'Matrix' tab, is
Min3 Rho True

Min4 Rho True
Min1 Dt True
'DT matrix true Mineral 1'. This is used along with the calculated mineral volumes to
calculate a total clean matrix DT. The DT matrix is used to calculate secondary porosity
from the sonic.
Min2 Dt True
from the sonic.
Min3 Dt True
from the sonic.
Min4 Dt True
from the sonic.
Min1 TP
'TPL matrix Mineral 1'. Propagation time for mineral 1 in nsec/m. Used for calculating
Sxo from the EPT. Must be entered if the EPT is used. This is used along with the
calculated mineral volumes to calculate a total clean matrix Propagation time.
Min2 TP
Min3 TP
Min4 TP
21.4.3 Porosity and Sw Equations and Methodology
The following block diagrams summarise the overall methodology of this module.
Porosity and Water Saturation Logic

The 'Neutron Density Porosity' option is treated separately since its logic is more complicated,
with three separate options for controlling the calculations. The three options are:
'Variable hydrocarbon density',
'Variable matrix density', and
'Variable clay volume'.

The options work in series, and can all be active at any depth level.
Neutron Density Porosity Logic
The 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module logic options are described below, under the
following headings:
Coal and Salt Logic

Calculate Filtrate Salinity and Density
Calculation of TPL Water
Calculate Hydrocarbon Hydrogen Index and Apparent Density
Density Porosity model
Neutron Porosity Model
Neutron Look-up Tables
Sonic Porosity Model
Neutron - Density Porosity Model
Variable Hydrocarbon Density Logic
Variable Matrix Density Logic
Variable Clay Volume Logic
Neutron Sonic Porosity Model
Pass Through Porosity Option

Laminated Sw Model
Porosity Limits / Bad Hole Logic
Porosity Limit Shaly Zones and Bad Hole
Total Porosity and Bound Water Saturation Calculation
Multi-Mineral Analysis
Water Saturation Equations
Flushed Zone Sxo Calculations
Sxo Limits
Variable 'm'
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
PHIFLAG Logic
Clay Type Distribution Equations
1. Coal and Salt Logic

If the Coal and Salt logic are activated, and the input porosity tools meet their cut-off values, then
the output curve VCOAL or VSALT will be set to a value of 1.0 over those intervals, and all
porosity outputs will be set to '0.0' and all water saturation outputs to '1.0'.
Coal is detected if :
Density < Rho Coal
Neutron > Neu Coal
Sonic > Dt Coal
Salt is detected if:

Density < Rho salt
Neutron < Neu salt
Sonic < Dt salt
It is not necessary to use all the porosity input tools to flag the Salt or Coal; only those which
work. A blank parameter input will remove that cut-off criterion from the logic.
2. Calculate Filtrate Salinity and Density

If the mud filtrate salinity or mud filtrate density are not entered, then they are calculated from the
entered Rmf.
ppm
gm/cc
Where
Temp = Entered formation temperature F.
Rmf75 = Rmf value converted to 75F.
For oil-based mud, if filtrate salinity or density are not entered, they are calculated from Rw using
the same equation as above.
3. Calculation of TPL Water

If TPL water is not entered, it is calculated as follows:

Where
Sal = Salinity of filtrate in ppm10-6
T= Formation temperature F.
Rmf = resistivity of filtrate at formation temperature.
For oil-based mud, Rw is substituted for Rmf.
4. Calculate Hydrocarbon Hydrogen Index and Apparent Hydrocarbon Density
Where
= Input hydrocarbon density
5. Density Porosity Model

If the density porosity model is selected, then porosity is calculated as follows:
Where
= Matrix density, can be a curve, parameter or calculated from the mineral
volume (multi-mineral options).
= Input bulk density log
= Wet clay density
= Filtrate density, calculated in 2 or entered as a parameter
= Apparent hydrocarbon density, calculated in.4, entered as a parameter
Vcl = Wet clay volume
Sxo = Flushed zone water saturation
6. Neutron Porosity Model

If the neutron porosity model is selected, then porosity is calculated as follows:
Where:
= Input neutron log
Vcl = Wet Clay volume
NeuCl = Neutron wet clay value
NeuMatrix = Neutron matrix correction
Exfact = Neutron excavation factor
NeuSal = Neutron formation salinity correction
NeuHyHI = Neutron hydrocarbon apparent hydrogen index
The Neutron salinity correction is only calculated if the 'Neu Form Sal' parameter on the Den /
Neu parameters tab is 'checked' as 'On'. The salinity correction is calculated from the Neutron
Tool look-up table that is defined for a particular neutron logging tool, selected with the 'Neu
Tool Type' parameter. The entry into the Look-up table will be formation porosity, flushed zone
salinity and matrix density. The result will be an interpolation between the values in the Look-up
table. The matrix type in the Look-up table will depend on the input matrix density and the '
Mineral Model' parameter.
For example, if the mineral model chosen was 'Sand/Dolomite' and the input matrix density was
2.75 g/cc, then the correction would be half way in-between the correction for Sand and Dolomite.
For special mineral models, the salinity correction will assume the same salinity correction for the
special mineral as for the main mineral.
The Neutron matrix correction 'NeuMatrix' on the 'Matrix' parameters tab will be calculated from
the Neutron tool look-up tables for the defined tool. The result will depend on the actual formation
porosity, the input matrix density and the mineral model. Therefore, if the matrix density indicates
a mixture of minerals, then the same mixture will be used to define the overall neutron mineral
response.
If the Neutron hydrocarbon apparent hydrogen index (NeuHyHI) is entered as a parameter then
the Neutron excavation factor (Exfact) will be set at 0.0. This is done to allow any corrections for
hydrocarbons to be turned 'off' by setting the NeuHyHI input parameter to 1.0 when calculating
porosity from the Neutron log alone. The NeuMatrix parameter is either calculated from the look
up tables using the entered Matrix Density to set the mineral type or if the 'Rho Matrix' input
parameter is set to a 'blank' value. Its value then will be the value of the 'Neu Matrix' parameter.
Hence, if the user wants to use the input neutron log for porosity, with no corrections for matrix or
hydrocarbon, the following parameters should be set :
Neu Matrix = 0.0

Matrix Density = 'Blank'

NeuHyHI = 1.0
7. Neutron Tool Look-up Tables

The neutron tool look-up tables are ASCII user-editable text files, which define the response for a
particular tool, for Limestone, Dolomite and Sandstone, at different porosity values. It is assumed
that the input neutron porosity is in Limestone porosity units. Formation salinity corrections at
each porosity value are defined for each standard matrix type. This allows proper matrix and
salinity corrections to be defined for any type of neutron tool.
A number of neutron tool 'look-up' tables are provided with the IP software, but the user can
create a new table for a tool not previously defined. To do this the user must :
1. Add the new tool into the file 'Neu_Parm_Files.neu', which is found in the IP program
directory. This file defines the names shown in the 'Porosity and Water Saturation'
module 'Parameter' table, plus the file names of the look-up tables.
2. Create the new look-up table. It is best to copy an existing file and modify it. The
spacing between the parameters is not important, but the number of parameters in each
line and the number of porosity lines are important.
The following is an example of one of the tables:

$ Interactive Petrophysics
$
$ Sch_CNL.neu file
$ Contains lookup table for Schlumberger CNL TNPH
$
$
$ Data is arranged in columns as follows :
$ True Phi (limestone matrix), Sandstone Matrix correction, Dolomite Matrix correction, Salinity correction Sand,
Salinity correction Lime, Salinity correction Dol
$ Formation Salinity corrections are for following values 50, 100, 150, 200, 250 Kppm and in this order
$ Porosity values must not be changed
$
$phi ss Dol 50 SS 100 150 200 250 50 LS 100 150 200 250 50 Dol 100 150
200 250
.00 .020 -.006 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000
.0000 .0000
.02 .022 -.009 -.0012 -.0032 -.0040 -.0056 -.0060 -.0012 -.0024 -.0032 -.0036 -.0040 -.0020 -.0044 -.0064
-.0076 -.0092
.05 .028 -.012 -.0030 -.0080 -.0100 -.0140 -.0160 -.0030 -.0060 -.0080 -.0090 -.0100 -.0050 -.0110 -.0160
-.0190 -.0230
.10 .036 -.017 -.0070 -.0140 -.0190 -.0230 -.0280 -.0060 -.0120 -.0160 -.0200 -.0210 -.0100 -.0190 -.0270
-.0330 -.0380
.15 .045 -.022 -.0120 -.0220 -.0290 -.0340 -.0350 -.0100 -.0190 -.0260 -.0300 -.0340 -.0120 -.0240 -.0330
-.0400 -.0450
.20 .049 -.030 -.0160 -.0270 -.0340 -.0370 -.0380 -.0140 -.0260 -.0320 -.0350 -.0390 -.1960 -.0290 -.0370
-.0420 -.0440
.25 .051 -.037 -.0160 -.0370 -.0330 -.0340 -.0330 -.0160 -.0290 -.0350 -.0390 -.0390 -.0180 -.0300 -.0370
-.0400 -.0410
.30 .052 -.045 -.0150 -.0350 -.0290 -.0290 -.0270 -.0200 -.0310 -.0380 -.0380 -.0380 -.0180 -.0300 -.0340
-.0360 -.0330
.35 .049 -.052 -.0130 -.0180 -.0190 -.0190 -.0150 -.0200 -.0310 -.0350 -.0350 -.0330 -.0160 -.0260 -.0290
-.0280 -.0260
.40 .046 -.059 -.0100 -.0140 -.0140 -.0120 -.0070 -.0180 -.0280 -.0310 -.0300 -.0270 -.0150 -.0230 -.0240
-.0210 -.0180
.45 .043 -.066 -.0120 -.0140 -.0140 -.0100 -.0030 -.0170 -.0240 -.0280 -.0260 -.0220 -.0150 -.0220 -.0210
-.0170 -.0130
.50 .040 -.073 -.0110 -.0120 -.0110 -.0060 .0020 -.0160 -.0220 -.0250 -.0220 -.0170 -.0140 -.0200 -.0180
-.0130 -.0080
.55 .037 -.080 -.0100 -.0100 -.0080 -.0020 .0070 -.0150 -.0200 -.0220 -.0180 -.0120 -.0130 -.0180 -.0150
-.0090 -.0030
.60 .034 -.087 -.0090 -.0080 -.0050 .0020 .0120 -.0140 -.0180 -.0190 -.0140 -.0070 -.0120 -.0160 -.0120
-.0050 .0020
The Neutron tool look-up table shown above has been colour-coded so that the reader can more
easily understand the file layout. Each lithology type is colour coded; Limestone (Black),
Sandstone (Red) and Dolomite (Blue) and the numbers are the Porosity Unit corrections (in
decimal notation) for Sandstone and Dolomite at different salinities.

The values of porosity extend to 60 pu., and it is necessary to complete the table up to this value
even though it is unlikely that there are any published results for these high porosities. It is
necessary to extrapolate the data as accurately as possible.
Creating a Neutron Look-up Table

The Look-up table is created in the following way:
Take the 'Neutron Porosity Equivalence Curves' Chart for the tool you wish to add to IP.
An example is shown in the diagram below.
Tabulate, using an existing look-up file as a template, the corrections between the
Limestone porosity values (at 0%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%,
45%, 50%, 55% and 60% p.u.) and the true porosities for a Sandstone matrix and a
Dolomite matrix.
For example, in the diagram below, Limestone Porosity is 20%, the correction for a Sandstone
matrix is the difference between the true Sandstone matrix porosity '25%' and 20% i.e '+5%'. The
correction for Dolomite matrix is the difference between the Limestone matrix porosity 20%, and
the true Dolomite matrix porosity, '15%' i.e. '- 5%'. NOTE: all values in the table should be in
decimal notation.
The Formation Salinity corrections are calculated and tabulated in the following way:
Using the Neutron Porosity equivalence chart and the appropriate Neutron log environmental
correction nomograph for the tool you are considering, back-calculate the Limestone matrix
porosity for true sandstone and dolomite porosities at 0%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%,
35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55% and 60% p.u. for each matrix type.
Take the environmental correction nomograph and select the 'Formation Salinity' panel. An
example is shown below:

Calculate the equivalent Limestone matrix porosity value for Sandstone or Dolomite
porosities of 0%, 2%, 5%, 10%, 15%, 20%, 25%, 30%, 35%, 40%, 45%, 50%, 55% and
60%.
Enter each equivalent Limestone matrix porosity value into the Formation Salinity panel
of the nomograph and calculate the magnitude and sign (+/-) of the porosity correction at
50, 100, 150, 200 and 250 k ppm formation salinity.
Tabulate the data as shown in the example file shown above, in the column order
described ( Sandstone - 50 SS 100 150 200 250, followed by Limestone - 50 LS 100 150
200 250 and Dolomite - 50 Dol 100 150 200 250).
8. Sonic Porosity Model

If the sonic porosity model is selected, then porosity is calculated as follows:
'Wyllie' equation:
Where
Dt = Sonic input curve
Dtma = Sonic matrix value
Dtcl = Sonic clay value
Dtfl = Sonic filtrate value
Dthy = Sonic hydrocarbon
Cp = Compaction factor
'Raymer' equation:

Where
Vma = 1/Dtma
Vf = 1/Dtfl
Vclay = 1/Dtclay
Vlog = 1/Dt
9. Neutron Density Porosity Model

For the logic flow, see the block diagram above.
'Variable Hydrocarbon Density' logic:

The program solves the following equations for porosity and hydrocarbon density:
'Variable Matrix Density' logic:

Using the input 'Mineral Model' parameter, the program calculates the porosity for each mineral
from the neutron and density logs. For the Sand/Limestone/Dolomite model, the program first
decides, based on the matrix density, whether the Sand/Limestone or Limestone/Dolomite
model should be used. Once the four porosities (density porosity for 2 minerals and neutron
porosity for 2 minerals) have been calculated, using the equations in Section 5 (Density Porosity
Model) and Section 6 (Neutron Porosity Model), above, the crossplot porosity is calculated as
follows:
Where
= Neutron corrected porosity for matrix 1
= Neutron corrected porosity for matrix 2

= Density corrected porosity for matrix 1

= Density corrected porosity for matrix 2
Once the porosity has been calculated, then the matrix density is calculated from the
density equation in section 5.
'Variable Clay Volume' logic:

The program solves the same equations as for the variable hydrocarbon density logic described
above, except for porosity and clay volume. The hydrocarbon density being known.
10. Neutron Sonic Porosity Model

The model uses the same logic as the 'Variable matrix density' logic in the Neutron/Density
model, except that the sonic log is substituted for the Density log, and 'Dt matrix' is calculated
from the porosity. Sonic porosities are calculated using the equations in Section 8, therefore the
user has the choice of sonic porosity models.
11. Pass Through Porosity Model

This option assumes that porosity is calculated externally to the Porosity and Water Saturation
module. The user inputs the porosity curve and it is used in the calculations of water saturation.
The parameter 'Input Porosity' (on the 'Phi Logic' tab) must be set to indicate whether the input
porosity is an effective' or 'total' porosity.
If 'Input Porosity' is set to Effective then :

= Phi input
=
If 'Input Porosity' is set to Total then :
= Phi input
Where
is entered as an input parameter or is calculated from the dry clay density (see section
below).
12. Laminated Sw Model
When this option is selected Sw and Sxo are calculated in the sand lamination using the selected
Sw equation but substituting the following inputs;
PhiT = PhiTLam
Phie = PhiLam
Vcl = VclLam
Rt = RtLam
Rxo = RxoLam
RtLam and RxoLam are either input parameters / curves or are calculated as follows;
RtLam = (1.0 - Vlam) * Rt * Rshale / ((Rshale - Rt) *Vlam)
RxoLam = (1.0 - Vlam) * Rxo * Rshale / ((Rshale - Rxo) * Vlam)
Where
Vlam = Calculated volume of shale / clay lamination in the whole rock.

Rshale = The entered 'Res Lam Shale' parameter.
If calculated then RtLam and RxoLam are output as curves.
Due to the nature of the equation the results are very sensitive to the Rshale parameter. Hence,
to keep results within sensible numbers the RtLam and RxoLam are limited to 200 ohmm.
The above chart shows the sensitivity of the laminated sand resistivity to the shale lamination
pick. The three lines have been made to all go through 40% shale lamination. The three lines
represent a resistivity of shale of 1.0, 1.5 and 2.0 ohmm. The resulting sand resistivities are
respectively; 50.0, 5.75 and 2.83 ohmm. Hence, a small change in the pick of shale resistivity can
have a large effect on the calculated Sw results. Hence, it is much better if an external, calculated
sand resistivity can be used.
Once the Sw's in the sand laminations are calculated the total rock saturations are calculated
assuming all hydrocarbons are in the sand laminations.
Sw = SwLam
SwT = 1.0 - PhiTLam * (1.0 - SwTLam) * (1 - Vlam) / PhiT
13. Porosity Limits / Bad Hole Logic

If the Bad Hole discriminator logic is switched on, then a 'Porosity from Sonic' will be calculated
over the 'Bad Hole' interval, using the equations described in Section 8. The Dt matrix input value
will be the parameter 'Sonic matrix'. The following logic will be applied:
If Disc. Curve > Disc Min and Disc. Curve < Disc Max then
14. Porosity Limit Shaly Zones and Bad Hole

In order to limit porosity in very Shaly zones, or zones which are badly washed out (with
unreasonably high porosities), the following limits are applied:
= (PhiMax+DeltaPhiMax)x(1.0-Vcl)

If Vcl > 'Vcl cut-off' then
15. Total Porosity and Bound Water Saturation Calculation

If the total clay porosity parameter is not entered, it is calculated from the dry clay density as
follows:
Where
= Dry clay input parameter
= Wet clay input parameter
= Filtrate density
= Phi total clay
Total porosity and bound water saturations are calculated as follows:
Where
= Total porosity
= Effective porosity, result from porosity model equations
Swb = Bound water saturation
16. Multi-mineral Analysis

If the PEF curve is entered as an input, then 'U', 'U clay', 'U water' and 'U hydrocarbon' are
calculated :
U= Pef x ( + 0.1883) x 0.93423

UClay = PefClay x ( + 0.1883) x 0.93423
Uwat = 0.00481 x Sal + 0.3883

For gas ( less than 0.4)
Uhyd = 0.119 x
For Oil :

Uhyd = 0.133 x
Rho matrix apparent is calculated as per Section 9, assuming a variable matrix density and a
Sand/Lime/Dolomite mineral model. This will calculate a hydrocarbon-corrected apparent matrix
density. Clay volume is set to zero unless the parameter option to 'Clay corrected input' is set. In
this case the Rho matrix apparent will be clay-corrected using the input VCL curve.
If the PEF curve is entered then the U matrix apparent will be calculated as follows :
Porosity is the neutron/density crossplot porosity as calculated for the Rho matrix apparent
calculation. Clay volume is set to zero unless the parameter option to 'Clay corrected input' is
set. In this case the U matrix apparent will be clay corrected using the input Vcl curve.
If the sonic curve is used as an input, then DT matrix apparent will be calculated as in Section 10,
above, using a Sand/Lime/Dol mineral model. This will make a hydrocarbon-corrected apparent
sonic matrix. Clay volume is set to zero unless the parameter option to 'Clay corrected input' is
set. In this case the DT matrix apparent will be clay corrected using the input Vcl curve.
For the three mineral option the following equations are solved for mineral volumes:
If model is Umatrix/RhoMatrix
If model is Dtmatrix/RhoMatrix
For the four mineral option the following equations are solved :
Where :
are the entered mineral density parameters
U1 U4 are the entered mineral U parameters
DT1-DT4 are the entered mineral DT parameters
V1 - V4 are the result dry mineral volumes
If negative volumes are calculated they are set to zero and the other volumes are recalculated
keeping the same ratios so that the total of all volumes is 1.
If the porosity method parameter has been set to 'Density' and the matrix density option

parameter set to 'Multi-mineral' (default settings for Multi-mineral) then the matrix density is
calculated as follows :
Where :
are the entered true mineral density parameters
The 'true' mineral density can be different to the apparent mineral density if the minerals are not
the standard Limestone / Dolomite / Quartz. For example, Clay could have an apparent matrix
density of 3.0 but a true density of 2.5. This is due to the apparent crossplot porosity in the clay
calculating an apparent matrix density which is much too high.
The dry mineral volumes are corrected to bulk volume as follows :
Where Vcl is set to zero, unless the parameter option to 'Clay corrected input' is set. The bulk
volume minerals are set into the output mineral volume curves.
If the parameter option to 'Clay corrected input' is set to 'false' and any of the parameter options
'Min1 Clay ?' - 'Min4 Clay ?' are set to 'true', then the output clay volume VWCL (default name)
is set to sum of the minerals that have had their parameter option set to 'Clay'. This allows one or
more of the minerals to be identified as clay and used in the water saturation equations.
17. Water Saturation Calculations

The following options are available for calculation of water saturation:
Archie:
This can be re-arranged to give an effective water saturation:
For a total water saturation, which is used in the water saturation comparison, the equation is as
follows:
Archie PhiT:
This can be re-arranged to give a total water saturation:

For an effective water saturation, which is used in the water saturation comparison, the equation
is as follows:
Simandoux:
Modified Simandoux:
Indonesian (Poupon-Leveaux):
Modified Indonesian
Dual Water:
if the 'm source' parameter is set to 'm*' then 'm' is calculated as follows
Qv is either entered as a curve or is calculated from PhiT using the 'a' and 'b' input parameters.
The 'a' and 'b' parameters can be interactively selected through the '1/PhiT versus Qvapp'
crossplot..
The 'Cm*' parameter is used to adjust the weighting on the variable 'm*' and is entered as a
parameter (Default is 1.0).
If the 'm source' parameter is not set to 'm*' the 'm*' used in the equation will be the input 'm'
parameter.
Juhasz (Waxman-Smits):

Waxman-Smits:
Qv is either entered as an input curve or is calculated from the following equation:
'a' and 'b' are entered parameters and can be interactively selected through the '1/PhiT versus
Qvapp' crossplot.(see the Interactive plot section above).
B is either an entered parameter or it is calculated from the following equation:
if the 'm source' parameter is set to 'm*' then 'm' is calculated as follows :
The 'Cm*' parameter is used to adjust the weighting on the variable 'm*' and is entered as a
If the 'm source' parameter is not set to 'm*', the 'm*' used in the equation will be the input
'm' parameter.
Where
m = Cementation factor
m* = Cementation factor used for "Dual Water" or "W & S" equations
n = Saturation exponent
a = Tortuosity factor
Sw = Effective water saturation
SwT = Total water saturation
Swb = Bound water saturation
Rw = Formation water resistivity
Rwb = Bound water resistivity
Rt = Input resistivity curve
Rcl = Resistivity of the clay

Qvn = "Normalized" cation exchange capacity per unit total pore volume
Bn = "Normalized" equivalent conductance of clay cations (Qvn/Cwapp crossplot)
Qv = Cation exchange capacity per unit total pore volume
B = Equivalent conductance of clay cations
T = Formation temperature in degrees centigrade
Qvn is output as a curve if the 'Juhasz W&S' equation is set as the default Sw equation. Apparent
water conductivity is also output (see Section 20). The interactive Qvn versus Cwapp crossplot
can be used to set the 'Bn' factor. The 'Bn' factor is adjusted on the crossplot so that the 100%
wet line goes through the wet shaly points. It should be noted that there is a strong correlation
between the bound water volume (PhiT minus Phie) and the 'Bn' factor. If you change the bound
water by changing the dry clay density (or total porosity clay) then the Qvn/Cwapp relationship will
change and the 'Bn' should be adjusted.
The cementation factor can either be entered as a parameter, an input curve, calculated using the
Shell formula, or calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs.
If calculated from the Shell formula, the following equation is used:
If the 'm vari wth Vcl' parameter is set to 'On', then over zones where Vcl > Vcl cut-off, 'm' is
adjusted as follows:
This logic has the effect of removing any hydrocarbons from shale intervals.
The saturation exponent can be entered as a parameter, an input curve, or if 'm' has been
calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs, then 'n' can be set to 'm' plus a fixed value. This is done by
setting the 'm plus value' parameter.
If the Archie PhiT, Dual Water, Juhasz or Waxman Smits saturation equation has been used,
then the effective water saturation is calculated as follows:
18. Flushed Zone Sxo Calculations

Sxo can be calculated in the following ways:
from a user-selected Rxo curve,

estimated using an empirical formula, or
from a user-selected EPT TPL curve.
Rxo curve:
The same equation that was chosen for the Sw calculation will be used for Sxo. The parameters
are substituted as follows:
Rmf for Rw
Rxo for Rt

Rmfb for Rwb

RxoCl for Rcl
Empirical formula:
The 'Invasion Factor' is a user-entered parameter.
EPT TPL curve:
Where
TPL = Input TPL curve
TPclay = Input parameter TP clay
TPhyd = Input parameter TP hydrocarbon
TPmatrix is calculated from the input parameters for TPlime, TPsand, TPdolomite and
TPspecialMineral. Using the calculated matrix density and the Mineral Model parameters, an
extrapolation is made between the TP matrix parameters to calculate an apparent TPmatrix,
which is used in the Sxo calculation.
If the multi-mineral option is set then TPmatrix is calculated using the mineral volumes and the
entered TPmatrix parameters.
Where :
are the entered mineral TP matrix parameters
Sxo Limits
The porosity logs generally have a shallow depth of investigation and as such measure in the
Flushed zone. An estimate of the water saturation seen by the porosity tools (Sxo) is therefore
required for porosity determination.
No matter which Sxo method has been selected, the following limits are always applied to the final
Sxo curve, in order to give sensible water saturation values for a given drilling mud environment.
This limited Sxo curve is then utilised in the porosity equations.
Oil Based Mud (OBM)

As no additional water is introduced into the formation with the use of oil-based muds then Sxo
can not be greater than the water saturation in the undisturbed zone (Sw). Therefore, when the '
OBM?' option is selected (when the 'OBM Flag?' is 'checked') for a zone, the Flushed zone water
saturations are limited using the following logic:

Consequently, Sxo is usually the same as Sw in hydrocarbon zones in OBM environments.
If the 'OBM Flag?' is turned 'on', (on the 'Phi Logic' tab) then Sxo can be calculated ('Sxo
Method' parameter, on the 'Sw Logic' tab) either from :
an input Rxo curve or
an input EPT TPL curve, or
set to 'Invasion Factor', in which case Sxo will be equal to the 'Invasion Factor'
parameter.
The 'Invasion Factor' parameter is the same parameter used in water-based mud logic, when no
Rxo tool is available, but is used in a different way with OBM.
NOTE: the 'Sxo Limit' logic ('Limits / Bad Hole' tab) is not used (options are 'greyed out')
when the 'OBM?' option is selected.
Water Based Mud (WBM)

Water based mud's introduce additional water into the formation and as such Sxo will be greater
than or equal to Sw. Therefore, when the 'OBM?' option ('Phi Logic' tab) is not selected for a
zone, the saturations are limited using the following logic
Consequently, Sxo is usually the same as Sw in water bearing zones in WBM environments.
Sxo Limit? Option

The 'Sxo Limit ?' option, in the 'Limits /Bad Hole' parameter tab, when 'checked', turns 'on' the
upper bound limit Sw^SxoLimit in the Mud Logic as described in the Sxo Limits above. NOTE: It
is only available in water-based mud where the 'Sxo Method' parameter ('Sw Logic' tab) is set to
Rxo or ETP TPL. It is useful to turn this option on in WBM environments for the situation where a
micro resistivity (Rxo) tool loses pad contact and calculates too high an Sxo. This will limit the Sxo
to the value of Sw^SxoLimit in such zones. The 'Sxo Limit' is generally not reached in OBM
environments.
19. Variable 'm'

If the user has selected to calculate a variable 'm', then this is calculated using the chosen water
saturation equation given in Section 16, solving it for 'm' by using the Sxo value calculated from
the EPT TPL curve.
The resultant 'm', which can be output as a curve, can be limited in its values by setting the
parameters 'min m value' and 'max m value'. These limits allow the restriction of 'm' to sensible
values.
20. Iteration Loops

The input porosity logs have a hydrocarbon correction applied, using the Sxo value calculated
from the porosity. Since Sxo is needed to calculate porosity, and porosity is needed to calculate
Sxo, an iterative process is used. The iteration loop continues until the difference between
iterations in porosity and Sxo are as follows:
difference < 0.001

Sxo difference < 0.002
21. Final Calculations

Vdcl = Volume dry clay
BVW = Bulk volume water
BVWsxo = Bulk volume water flushed zone
Vsilt = Volume Silt
Vshale = Vcl + Vsilt Shale volume
Rwapp = Rw apparent
Rmfapp = Rmf apparent
Cwapp = 1 / Rwapp Apparent water conductivity
Rwapp, Rmfapp and Cwapp are converted to the temperature entered for Rw and Rmf
respectively.
Apparent Qv
PhiT_recp = 1 / PhiT Reciprocal of PhiT
If both the EPT TPL and the Rxo curve are entered, and Sxo is calculated from the EPT, and the '
m' is not calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs, the following calculations are made:
1. Rmf equivalent. The equations in sections 16 and17 are solved for Rmf using the value
of Sxo calculated from the EPT TPL curve. The results are output in the RMFEQ curve.
2. A Bulk volume irreducible water is calculated. This is the amount of formation water left
in the flushed zone. The Rmf equivalent calculated in 1 (above) should be the value of Rmf
if all the formation water is flushed out by the filtrate. Any variance from this can be used to
calculate the amount of unflushed formation water.
Bulk volume water irreducible
The following limits are applied to BVWIRR:
BVW > BVWIRR > 0
If hydrocarbon corrected log is requested to be output, the following calculations are made:
Density hydrocarbon corrected

DenHcCor =
Neutron hydrocarbon corrected

NeuHcCor =
Sonic hydrocarbon corrected
for Wyllie
DtHcCor =
for Raymer
DtHcCor =
Vflc =
If a Ro output curve is entered then Ro is calculated from the appropriate Sw equation in Section
16 with Sw set to 1.0. This curve can be useful to judge the appropriateness of the water
saturation model. Ro should equal Rt in the non-hydrocarbon zones.
If a Density Reconstructed output curve is entered then this density curve is calculated using the
equation in Section 5. This curve will generally be the same as the input density curve except in
regions of bad hole where the porosity could have been calculated from the sonic. The curve is
useful for input into the Rock Physics modules or where a bad-hole corrected density is needed.
If the multi-mineral option is selected and a sonic curve is available then a secondary porosity is
calculated :
Sonic matrix density is calculated from the mineral volumes and the true DT matrix values:
Where :
are the entered true mineral DT matrix parameters
Sonic porosity is calculated as per section 8 using the DT matrix calculated above. Clay volume is
set to zero unless the parameter option to 'Clay corrected input' is set.
Secondary porosity is calculated :
The secondary porosity unlimited can go negative therefore another curve is output which limits
the secondary porosity to be greater than zero.
22. PHIFLAG Logic

The output curve PHIFLAG is a 'Logic' flag curve. It can contain any combination of the following
values:
PHIFLAG LOGIC
VALUE
0 No limits were applied to the results.
1 Bad hole logic used. Porosity set to be equal to the sonic porosity.

2 Hydrocarbon iteration loop did not converge after 20 loops.

3 Porosity set to be equal to the maximum porosity limit (see section 12).
4 Porosity was limited to be greater than 0.
5 Sxo Limit parameter is set.
6 Neutron/Density model. Porosity was calculated from only the neutron log.
Density log was incompatible with selected logic options.
7 Neutron/Density model. Porosity was calculated from only the density log.
Neutron log was incompatible with selected logic options.
8 Iterative solving of the saturation equations did not converge after 10
loops
9 If the calculated VWCL curve is greater than the 'VCL Limit' or the
calculated Phie curve is less than the 'Phie limit' then Phie = 0.0001 and
all output saturation curves are set to 1.0
If the calculated Phie curve is less than the 'Phie Sw Limit' then all output
10
saturation curves are set to 1.0
11 The Sw or SwT curves have been clipped to the 'Swi Limit'. The SwU or
SwT curves have not be changed.
For a normal execution of the program at any depth level, the PHIFLAG value should be 'zero'.
Any time the curve reads any other value, then the user should investigate the depth level to see if
the results are reasonable.
23. Clay Type Distribution Equations
Shale/Clay Volumes
If Vlam < Vcl then the model Dispersed/Laminated is used and
Vstruc = 0
Vdisp = Vcl - Vlam
Otherwise the Laminated/Structural model is used and
Vdisp = 0
Vstruc = Vcl - Vlam
Limits
Vlam must be between 0 and 0.99

Vlam + Vstruc + Vdisp = Vcl
Where
Vlam : Volume laminated clay / shale.
Vcl : Volume wet clay, normally the input Vcl.
Phie : Effective Porosity.

Phi Max : Maximum Porosity in clean sand. Input parameter in 'Limits /

BadHole' tab.
Laminated properties
These are the properties of the sand laminations.
PhieLam is limited using the same logic as the Phie curve. This is shown in Section 13.
It is assumed that there is no hydrocarbon in the shale lamination but that the entire hydrocarbon
content is in the sand laminations. Hence, Sw laminated is calculated as follows:
SwLam is limited to be between 1.0 and 0.001
Where
PhieLam : Effective Porosity in the sand lamination.
SwLam : Effective Water Saturation in the sand lamination.
BVWLam : Bulk Volume Water in the sand lamination.
VclLam : Clay Volume in the sand lamination.
If using the 'Make Total Porosity Display' option then the following extra calculations are made
for the new output curves:
Where
PhiTCl : Total porosity in 100% clay
The following are extra output curves

21.5 Cut-off and Summations

The 'Cut-offs and Summation' module allows the user to interactively define 'Net Reservoir' and
'Net Pay' cut-off criteria and zones, and to calculate the average petrophysical properties of
porosity, clay volume and water saturation for each zone within a petrophysical interpretation.
The 'Cut-off and Summation' functionality allows the user to compute zone average values for
up to 7 input curves, in addition to the 3 'default' porosity, Sw and clay volume curve inputs. The
user also has the option to set up and execute up to 5 'Summation Reports'. This allows the user
to generate 3 extra sets of output, in addition to the traditional 'Net Reservoir' and 'Net Pay'
Summation reports. The increased versatility of this new set-up will allow the user, for example, to
compute zonal average properties for reservoirs containing different fluid types (gas/oil/water) or,
in a mixed clastic / carbonate geological section, to determine the zonal properties of the separate
clastic or carbonate beds in the well. In the simplest case, should the user simply not apply any
cut-off criteria, then the module will compute and report zonal averages for all defined zones /
formations in the subject well.
The Summation results are output in various file formats and/or to a printer.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Interpretation' 'Cut-off and Summation'
option or from the icon on the 'Interpretation' toolbar. The 'Cut-offs and Summation Setup'
window is used primarily to set up the curves to be used, the curve cut-off values to be applied,
any additional 'Reports' that the user wishes to generate and any output curves to be created.
NOTE: after the first time that the 'Run' button is pressed, any changes to the cut-off
parameter values must be made on the 'Cut-off and Summation Parameters' screens or on
the interactive log plot. However, the number of curves selected for averaging and the
input curve names can be updated/changed on the setup 'Input Curves' screen. 'Clicking'
the 'Apply' button will update the curves used in the Summation exercise.
The set-up window is organised on 3 tabbed screens. These are :
'Input Curves'
'Reports Set-Up / Default Cut-offs'
'Output Curves'
'Input Curves' Tab
Section 21.5 Interpretation : Cut-off and Summations

Up to 10 input curves can be entered into this screen for use in the summation
computation.
The first three curves are pre-defined as '1. Porosity', '2. Water Saturation', and '3.
Clay Volume'.
The additional 7 curves (rows 4 - 10) are user-defined options and can be any curve the
user selects as an input. For example, a calculated permeability curve might be used.
The 'Cut-off Name' column allows the user to type in a text string which describes the
curve being used as a cut-off. The names are used as log track titles in the Cut-off and
Summation Interactive log plot.

If the 'Use' column is 'checked' next to a curve then zonal average values for the
'checked' curve will be computed and presented in the output report, whether or not the
'checked' row is used as a cut-off. This gives the user the flexibility to experiment with
the number and type of curves used in the Summation calculation and the number of
curve averages reported in the output file or printed report.
The 'Short Name' column allows the user to type in an abbreviated curve name. When
the user selects either the 'Run' or 'Apply' button and the summation calculation is
performed, the Short Name is used to populate the column headers in the Cut-off and
Summation Parameters Screens.
In addition, when the user creates an output report to file or printer, the Short Names are used as
column headers in the report.
The 'Curve Type' column allows the user to set a 'Type' for the input Porosity, Water
Saturation and Clay Volume curves. In effect, setting a 'Curve Type' applies a
pre-processing routine to the input curves. The 'CurveTypes' perform the following
operations:
1. 'Phi' - clip the input curve to values greater than zero.

2. 'Vcl' - clip the input curve to values between zero and one. This allows the user,
for example, to select a clay volume from GR curve as the input. The program will
clip the curve values to lie between zero and one before the summation
calculations are performed.
3. 'Sw' - clip the input curve to values between zero and one. Also, this 'Type' tells
the program to compute a porosity-weighted average for the input curve when

computing zonal averages.
The 'Input Curve' column allows the user to select the curves to be used in the
Summation Report, either as curves for defining the cut-off criteria or as curves for which
average values, by zone, are required.
The 'Cut-off Type' column allows the user to set the 'sign' of the the cut-off type if a
curve is to be used as a cut-off criterion. Options are selected from a drop-down list.
The 'Average Method' column allows the user to define the averaging method to apply
to input curves. The options are available from a drop-down list. The options are : '
Arithmetic', 'Geometric' and 'Harmonic'.
The 'Result Precision' column allows the user to type in / define the number of decimal
places to which the zonal average values are reported in the file or print output. The
default setting is 3 decimal places. The maximum setting is 6 places of decimal.
However, the text string length to file or printer is set to 8 characters, so setting to a '
Result Precision' of 6 is only useful for reporting very small decimal numbers, for
example very low, small fractional permeabilities.
The 'Output Curve Cum CrvH' column allows the user to create cumulative 'curve
thickness' curves, if required. For example, if a permeability curve is specified as an
input, then 'checking' the 'Output Curve cum CrvH' cell for this row in the 'Input
Curves' screen will compute a cumulative permeability footage curve which sums all
depth steps meeting the specified Net Pay cut-off criteria.
The 'Add Zone X/Y location to report' 'checkbox, if 'checked', will include the zonal
mid-depth-point UTM rectangular coordinates for each interpretation zone in the output
file or print-out for the Summation exercise. These coordinates can only be computed if
the well has a valid deviation survey and surface location loaded into IP.
The 'TVD, TVT Depth Curve' box allows the user to calculate TVD or TVT Net and Pay
thicknesses. The user selects the name of the TVD or TVT curve for the well, from the
drop-down curve list.
The 'Use same cut-off value for all zones' box forces the same cut-off values to be
used for all zones. This is useful if the user does not want to change cut-offs for different
interpretation zones.
The 'Parameter set name' box is used to name the file where the 'Cutoff' parameters
will be stored after an interpretation is finished. Parameter Sets are saved by selecting
the 'Save Parameter sets' option in the main menu. The same name is also used to
save the Parameter Set listing to the hard disk with an extension of '.TXT'. The 'Print
Parameter set' menu item is used to do this.
The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the 'Cutoff'
Parameter Sets. See Parameter Set Management.
The 'Run' button will execute the summation calculations and will offer the user the
option to launch the 'Cut-off and Summation' interactive log plot. NOTE: once the 'Run'
button has been used, the default settings for cut-off values can no longer be edited on
the second set-up tab. Any further modifications must be made in the 'Cut-off and
Summation Parameters' window.
The 'Apply' button allows the user, after the 'Run' button has been used once, to modify
the Input curves screen, for example to modify the optional curve selection for which to
calculate zonal averages.
'Reports Set-Up / Default Cut-offs' Tab

The 'Reports Set-Up / Default Cut-offs' Tab allows the user to set up the cut-off criteria to be
used in the Summation exercise. The 'default' computation only requires the user to fill in cut-off
values in the 'Reservoir' report and 'Pay' report columns for the selected Porosity, Water
Saturation and Clay Volume curves on the 'Input Curves' Tab. An additional three optional

reports can be set up in the remaining columns to the right of the 'default' columns. In the
example shown below the cut-offs are set up as:
'Reservoir' (default) - Porosity >= 0.1, Clay Volume ,<= 0.5

'Pay' (default) - Porosity >= 0.1, Clay Volume <= 0.5, Water Saturation <= 0.5
'Sw < 0.45' (optional) - Porosity >=0.1, Clay Volume <= 0.5, Water Saturation <= 0.45
'PHIT > 0.15' (optional) - Clay Volume <= 0.5, Water Saturation <= 0.5, Porosity (note
different porosity curve selected) >=0.15
The 'Default Cut-offs' values are used to initialize the calculations. If the user
subsequently wishes to make changes to cut-off values, these changes must be applied
from the Cut-off and Summation Parameters screens.
The 'Report Title' row allows the user to type in names that will be used to distinguish
each Summation calculation in an output report. The 'defaults' are 'Reservoir' and 'Pay'
reports. Report titles permit a maximum 25 alphanumeric characters in each text box.
The 'Report Title' text entries are used as headings in the output file/printout and as the
name shown in the Cut-off and Summation interactive log plot 'Flag' shadings. See '
Cut-off and Summation Interactive Plot'.

The 'Short Name' row allows the user to type in an abbreviated report name that will be
used to name the 'Flag Curve' generated by each summation calculation. The 'Short
Name' allows a maximum of 4 characters in the name.
The 'Use report' row allows the user to switch on/off one or more of the summation
reports by 'unchecking' /'checking' the appropriate cell in the grid. 'Un-checking' a
column will deactivate that report. The user can then use the 'Apply' button to re-run
the summations, excluding the 'un-checked' report(s).
The 'Default Cut Value' grid allows the user to set up the curve cut-off values to be
used for each summation report. Values typed into the 'Reservoir' report column for
Porosity, Water Saturation and Clay Volume automatically populate the appropriate cells
in the 'Pay' report column. For optional reports, the user can type in the cut-off values to
be used in the appropriate row(s) of the grid. In the example shown above, Report 3 (
REP3) uses a lower Sw cut-off than that in the 'default' reports and Report 4 (REP4)
uses a different porosity curve to define Net Reservoir / Net Pay.
The 'Default Use' column allows the user to 'check' / 'uncheck' options in the grid to
modify the summation computation criteria.
'Output Curves' Tab
The 'Output Curves' tab allows the user to set up the names of the output curves generated from
the Cut-off and Summation module. If a particular output curve is not needed, then the user can
set its name to a 'blank' entry. The 'PayFlag' and 'ResFlag' curves are used in the interactive log
plot display, and should always be calculated. The other default curves are:

Cumulative Reservoir Porosity Thickness (ResPhiH)

Cumulative Reservoir Thickness ('ResPhiSoH' - 'net')
Cumulative Reservoir Clay Volume Thickness ('ResVclH')
Cumulative Pay Porosity Thickness ('PayPhiH')
Cumulative Pay Thickness ('PayPhiSoH' - 'pay')
Cumulative Pay Clay Volume Thickness ('PayVclH')
The 'Net Flag' row displays the Flag curve names for each active / selected report.
The 'Net Height' row displays the name of the 'Cumulative height' curve for each active /
selected report.
The 'Cumulative Output Curve' column headers provide the user with a shortcut to
typing in many curve names for the various reports. By 'clicking in either the
'Cumulative' or 'Output Curve' column header cells, the program will automatically fill in
appropriate cumulative output curve names for each report scenario. In the example
above the REP3 column has been filled in with all required output curve names. The
same operation was performed for the REP4 column, but only the cumulative
permeability thickness curve (REP4RHOBH) was required as an output. The other
curve names were deleted by 'clicking' in individual cells and hitting the keyboard 'Delete
' key.
The user 'clicks' the 'Run' button to start the 'Cut-offs and Summation Report' interpretation. If
an old parameter set has been loaded, or the user has already run the module, then the user will
be asked whether the log plot should be re-initialized. The user should normally answer 'Yes' to
this, since this sets up all the special interactive plot features. An answer of 'No' will leave the
current plot active.
If the user has already 'Run' the summation calculations but subsequently wishes to change the
input curve selection or to deactivate one of the optional reports, for example, simply make the
changes then 'click' the 'Apply' button. This will update the parameters and report results. You
will also be asked whether you want to re-initialize the interactive log plot. The user should
normally answer 'Yes' to this, since this sets up all the special interactive plot features. An answer
of 'No' will leave the current plot active.
21.5.1 Cut-off and Summations Interactive Plot

The 'Cut-offs and Summation' module interactive plot consists (from left to right) of: a Depth
track, 'Zone' track, a TVD Depth track (if theTVD option is selected) and 'Input Curve' tracks (one
track per input curve) with track titles as typed into the 'Input Curves' Tab of the set-up screen.

The 'Zone' track is used to perform the following functions:
1. To display the current zonation used in the interpretation

2. To create and delete interpretation zones
3. To move zone tops.
To create a new zone by splitting a current zone, click in the zone track at the depth for the split
and choose from the pop-up menu 'Split Zone'.
To delete a zone, choose 'Delete Zone' from the pop-up menu. Zone tops and bottoms can be
moved by placing the cursor on the top of a zone in the zone track, and, with the left mouse
button, drag the top to a new position. It is possible to have gaps between zones. To remove a
gap, drag the bottom of the zone above a gap to below the top of the zone below the gap.
The 'Input Curve' tracks are all similar in appearance. They contain a single input curve, together
with the flag curves of all the 'Reports' that the user has defined in the set-up screens. If a
particular curve is used in a Report as a cut-off criterion, a cut-off 'line' is also displayed in the log

track.
1. The Flags are labelled as in the 'Report Title' field in the 'Reports Set-Up / Default
Cut-offs' Tab of the set-up window. The Flag curves appear as coloured bars at either
side of each track.
2. The 'Cut-Off' values that were set up for individual curves are displayed as vertical
interactive lines in their respective tracks. To interactively change a cut-off, place the
mouse cursor on the cut-off line. The name of the cut-off parameter and its value will be
displayed at the bottom left hand corner of the main window. Use the left mouse button to
drag the line to its new value. When the mouse button is released, that zone will be
re-calculated and all displays updated.
3. If the right-hand mouse button is clicked in a log track, a pop-up menu will appear. The
menu will allow the user to:
turn 'on' and turn 'off' the net pay /net reservoir /optional report 'use' options.
This function is identical to the user opening the 'Cut-off and Summation
Parameters' screen and 'checking' or 'unchecking' the equivalent curve 'Use'
column on the appropriate 'Report' tab.
a histogram of the input curve or any of the Flag curves in the track can be
displayed, with an interactive line to change the cut-off value (See Histogram
Section).
crossplots of the cut-off parameters can be displayed, with interactive lines
allowing the changing of cut-off parameters (See Crossplots Section).

Undo/Redo
Once the Interactive cutoff lines lines have been altered undo/redo arrows appear in the top
left-hand corner of the log plot. These allow the user to go back to the original position of the
interactive lines. As the arrows are 'clicked' the interactive lines move and the output curves are
recalculated. The undo/redo arrows only work if the well and zones remain unchanged during the
current interpretation session.

21.5.2 Printing Cut-off and Summation Results

The 'Print' button on the 'Cutoff Parameters' window will launch the following list of options:
This menu allows the user to output the summation results report to a printer, file or to the
clipboard in a variety of different formats with or without a listing of curves.
The 'Normal Report' 'File' option launches a 'Save Parameters to File' dialog where
the results will be written to a user-defined file name in the default output directory .
The default file name uses the name, with the ".txt" extension.
The 'Comma Delimited' option will write the file using commas to separate the fields
and will have a file extension of ".csv". This facilitates loading the data into a
spreadsheet application. To output the '.csv' file using semi-colons instead of commas
as the delimiter go to 'Tools' 'Options' 'Miscellaneous Options' 'CSV
Delimiter'.

The 'Tab Delimited' option will write the file using tabs to separate the fields and will
also have a ".txt" extension but will be a Tab Delimited type.
The 'RTF' format can be used to load into word processing software and contains the
formatting information for the text. The output file will have a ".RTF" extension.
The 'ClipBoard' options allow the user to save the reports directly onto the clipboard for
subsequent pasting into WordTM or PowerPoint TM documents.
If the 'Report With Curve Listing' options are chosen then, in-between the normal
summation results a listing of curve data can be displayed. See the section below to set
up the listing.
Report With Curve Listing

This option creates an output report / file in which summation results for each zone are listed,
followed by a listing of the user-selected curves for that depth interval. If the option to create a
curve listing in the report is selected, the following window is displayed.

The functionality of this window is identical to the Curve Listing / Curve Edit set-up module. Any
curve in the database can be selected. Discriminators can be used to limit the output as well as
setting the output data frequency. In the above example only data that count as net reservoir will
be listed. The listing data frequency is at all levels.
Report With Detail Interval Breakdown

This option gives the user the ability to view a listing similar to the report generated within the
module. Plus there is a detailed breakdown for each zone with a Gross Interval, Total Number of
Intervals, Total Net Thickness, Mean Interval Thickness, Thinnest Interval Thickness and Thickest
Interval Thickness for each of the Reservoir and Pay intervals. Both the Reservoir and Pay
intervals can be listed or either Reservoir or Pay can be listed by using the drop-down selection
box.
The net thickness is determined by Bottom minus Top plus depth step. The Top is the depth of
the first instance of where the flag curve turns on. The Bottom is last depth where the flag curve is
on. To illustrate this further; think of an interval where there is just one step with the flag curve on.
Top = Bottom but thickness will be the depth step.
Interval averages are the average values of all the intervals. The main report zonal averages are
the thickness weighted averages. Hence interval average multiplied by the number of intervals
does not necessarily equal zonal average.

On the main report all zone averages are thickness weighted averages not arithmetic averages.
The Default curves for the interval listing are PHIE, SW and VWCL although more curves can be
added by clicking on an empty box within the 'Curves to output' and using the drop-down curve
listing to pick other curves.
An example of part of a detailed interval breakdown is shown below.

21.5.3 Cut-off and Summations Equations and Methodology

Each depth in the data is considered a discrete interval, with the recorded depth being the centre
of the interval. Therefore, when making averages over an interval, only half of the top and bottom
depth increments are counted. The following diagram provides an example explaining how 'net
reservoir' would be calculated:

Net
8000.0 0
8000.5 0
8001.0 1
8001.5 1
Average from 8000-8004 (gross 4) will
8002.0 1 include only half of the top and bottom interval
Net = (1 x 6 + 1 x 0.5) x .5 = 3.25
8002.5 1
8003.0 1
8003.5 1
8004.0 1
It is worth pointing out that the above equation misses out the zero points as in total there are nine
intervals and so the equation should really be written like this:
Net = [((1 x 6) + (1 x 0)) + ((0.5 x 0) + (0.5 x 1))] x 0.5 = 3.25
Average porosity:
Average water saturation:
Average Clay volume:
Extra curves Arithmetic average:

Extra curves Geometric average:
Extra curves Harmonic average:
Where
i = i'th input value
hi = i'th input interval
n = number of samples
For the Geometric and Harmonic averages, any input value which is less than or equal to zero,
will be ignored and not included in the final average.
Output Curves
The output cumulative curves are calculated after each zonal computation. They include only the
data within all the defined zones. Therefore, if a level is not defined as being in a zone, it will not
be included in the cumulative curves, regardless of whether the level meets the cut-off criteria.
Result Output Listing

To obtain the result output listing, use the 'Print Parameter set' menu item on the main menu
under 'File' or the 'Print' button on the cut-off parameters window.
Example listing 1 :
cut-off SUMMARY REPORT
Well : Test well # 1
Date : 09/02/98 11:24:31
NET RESERVOIR ROCK SUMMARY
Zn Zone Name Top Bottom Gross Net N/G Av Phi Av Sw Av Vcl Phi*H
Phi*So*H
# TVDSS TVDSS TVDSS TVDSS TVDSS
1 Top Gas Zone 7790.00 7875.00 85.00 69.50 0.818 0.196 0.263 0.147 13.620
10.041
-7590.00 -7675.00 85.00 69.50 0.818
2 Water 7875.00 8225.00 350.00 282.50 0.807 0.173 0.629 0.168 48.976
18.169
-7675.00 -8025.00 350.00 282.50 0.807
3 Bottom Gas 8270.00 8420.00 150.00 90.00 0.600 0.187 0.360 0.177 16.797
10.746
-8070.00 -8220.00 150.00 90.00 0.600
4 Bottom Water 8420.00 8620.00 200.00 181.75 0.909 0.195 0.659 0.127 35.505
12.102
-8220.00 -8420.00 200.00 181.75 0.909
All Zones 7790.00 8620.00 785.00 623.75 0.795 0.184 0.556 0.155 114.899
51.058

-7590.00 -8420.00 785.00 623.75 0.795
NET PAY SUMMARY
Phi*So*H
# TVDSS TVDSS TVDSS TVDSS TVDSS
1 Top Gas Zone 7790.00 7875.00 85.00 65.00 0.765 0.200 0.248 0.130 13.013
9.785
-7590.00 -7675.00 85.00 65.00 0.765
2 Water 7875.00 8225.00 350.00 46.25 0.132 0.215 0.208 0.093 9.960
7.887
-7675.00 -8025.00 350.00 46.25 0.132
3 Bottom Gas 8270.00 8420.00 150.00 70.50 0.470 0.199 0.291 0.138 14.031
9.945
-8070.00 -8220.00 150.00 70.50 0.470
4 Bottom Water 8420.00 8620.00 200.00 14.50 0.073 0.202 0.405 0.115 2.931
1.744
-8220.00 -8420.00 200.00 14.50 0.073
All Zones 7790.00 8620.00 785.00 196.25 0.250 0.203 0.265 0.123 39.935
29.362
-7590.00 -8420.00 785.00 196.25 0.250
cut-offs USED
Zn Zone Name Top Bottom Phi Pay Sw Pay Vcl Pay

# PHIE SW VWCL
1 Top Gas Zone 7790.00 7875.00 > 0.100 < 0.500 Y < 0.500
2 Water 7875.00 8225.00 > 0.100 < 0.500 Y < 0.500
3 Bottom Gas 8270.00 8420.00 > 0.100 < 0.500 Y < 0.500
4 Bottom Water 8420.00 8620.00 > 0.100 < 0.500 Y < 0.500
Depth Units : ft
TVD / TVT depth curve name : TVDSS Units : ft
Example listing 2 : Part listing with option of including curve listing between zonal
summaries.

Well : Test Well 3
Date : 03/12/02 16:55:33
Phi*So*H
#
1 Upper Oil 7778.00 7924.50 146.50 142.50 0.973 0.213 0.363 0.057 30.336
19.323
DEPTH VWCL PHIE SW ResFlag PayFlag

FT Dec Dec Dec - -
7790. 0.05327 0.2008 0.6609 1. 0.
7800. 0.3844 0.09666 0.9356 1. 0.
7810. 0.2673 0.1397 0.4536 1. 1.
7820. 0.05524 0.2044 0.2316 1. 1.
7830. 0.5224 0.1188 0.5447 1. 0.
7840. 0.01823 0.2184 0.2054 1. 1.

7850. 0.03271 0.2272 0.2322 1. 1.

7860. 0.1014 0.1846 0.4652 1. 1.
7870. 0.03495 0.2362 0.3478 1. 1.
7880. 0.04284 0.2058 0.1591 1. 1.
7890. 0.03141 0.2395 0.1348 1. 1.
7900. 0.03785 0.196 0.2191 1. 1.
7910. 0.1669 0.1822 0.3379 1. 1.
7920. 0.03822 0.2229 0.5205 1. 0.
Phi*So*H
#
2 Upper water 7924.50 8250.50 326.00 288.50 0.885 0.178 0.975 0.099 51.287
1.269
DEPTH VWCL PHIE SW ResFlag PayFlag

FT Dec Dec Dec - -
7930. 0.06897 0.1768 0.8746 1. 0.
7940. 0.1337 0.1587 0.8541 1. 0.
7950. 0. 0.1885 1. 1. 0.
7960. 0.02743 0.1863 0.9994 1. 0.
21.5.4 Cut-off and Summations Parameters

The 'Cutoff Parameters' window allows the user to change any Cutoff parameter, and 'create',
'delete' and 'edit' interpretation 'Zones'. The window is selected from the main menu '
Interpretation' 'Cut-off and Summation Parameters' option or using the speed button on the
'Interpretation' toolbar.
The 'Cutoff Parameters' functionality is organized onto a number of 'tabs', depending on the
number of 'Reports' the user wishes to generate. The 'default' set up, for 'Net Reservoir' and '
Net Pay' computation parameters, will look like the screen shown below:

If additional 'Reports' are switched 'on', by 'checking' the 'Use report' cell in the 'Reports Set-Up
/ Default Cut-offs' tab of the launcher screen, then correspondingly more 'Parameter tabs' will be
available for editing. This is shown below, where a third report (Sw < 0.45) and fourth report
(PHIT > 0.15) have been 'checked' for execution:

In terms of the number of parameters visible, the Parameters tabs expand to accommodate up to
7 optional additional curves that the user can specify in the Setup screens. Each additional curve
will have a 'Curve Short Name / Cut' e.g. 'RHOB Cut' column where the user can type in a new
cut-off value (See 'Input Curves' tab on the Set-up screens) and a 'Short Name / Use' e.g '
RHOB REP3 Use' column which the user needs to 'check' if the cut-off values are to be used in
the computation (see 'Reports Set-Up / Default Cut-offs' tab). The user can then further tailor
cut-off criteria, for example, by 'Using' an additional curve cut-off in a particular zone or set of
zones.
The 'Cutoff Parameters' tabs are arranged left to right across the Parameters window. They are:
Zone Depths
Reservoir Cut-offs
Pay Cut-offs
Additional Cut-offs
Reservoir Results
Pay Results
Additional Report Results
The Parameter tabs displays the Cut-off parameters arranged as columns, left to right, across the
page and with the zones arranged in rows down the page.
'Zone Depths' Tab

This tab permits the user to manage the zone names for the Summation report. Zone names and
associated top and bottom depths can be edited manually under the 'Zone Depths' tab.

Parameter tabs except the 'Zone Depths' tab. This is accomplished by 'ticking' the 'Show
Additional Zone info' tick-box. The user then has the option of showing the zone name or the
zone depths on each tab. Depending on which option is chosen, when you select another
Parameter tab, the zone names or zone depths will be shown in the left-hand column of the 'grid'.
The 'Show Default Info' option is just displaying the 'Zone #' column populated with the zone
number.
NOTE: this functionality is available on any of the tabs.

The 'Zone Name' column is there if the user wishes to type in an optional zone name.
The 'Zone Name' will be output in the report.
The 'Zone Top' is the Top Depth for a zone.
The 'Zone Bottom' is the Bottom Depth for a zone.
The 'Lock Zone' column enables the user to lock zones. This prevents any changes
being made to the parameters in that zone in any of the tabs within the module. It also
prevents changes being made interactively to the zones in the Cut-off and Summation
Interactive plot.

The 'Sub Total' parameter allows the user to compute average reservoir properties for
two different scenarios:
1. 'Sub Total' can be used to compute average reservoir properties over a number of
zones, as illustrated above; A Sand (1980.13 - 2079.342m) is a 'Sub Total' of 'A Sand Oil'
(1980.13 - 2007.652m) and 'A Sand Water' (2007.562 - 2079.342m), or
2. 'Sub Total' can be used to compute average reservoir properties for a user-defined
depth interval, which is, for example, half the thickness of an existing zone.
'Sub Total' zones are not displayed on the interactive plot and have no associated cut-offs, but
use the interpretation results from the 'normal' zones to determine net pay or net reservoir
average properties.
The user flags that a zone is a 'Sub Total' by 'checking' the appropriate cell in the grid. In the
example shown above, the 'A Sand' zone is flagged as a 'Sub Total' zone whose top depth is
that of the 'A Sand Oil' zone and whose bottom depth is that of the 'A Sand Water' zone.
NOTE: If a TVD Curve has been selected on the 'Input Curves' Tab of the launcher screens then
additional columns will be reported on the 'Zone Depths' Tab. These are:
'TVD/TVT Top' - the True vertical depth of the Zone Top.

'TVD/TVT Bottom' - the True vertical depth of the Zone Bottom
Managing Zones
Clicking the 'New zone' button will launch the following window:
To add a new Zone or 'Sub Total' zone, the user should :
select one of the existing zones from the window by 'clicking' on it, so that it is
highlighted.
Then 'click' on one of the three buttons 'Add Before', 'Add After', to place the new zone
in the listing, or 'Split Zone'. For the 'Split Zone' the user must give the depth to split the
selected zone.

The 'Copy Zone #' box allows the user to select the cut-off parameters (Vcl, Phi and
Sw) from an existing zone to populate the new zone with. The user types in the number
of the zone whose parameters will be used. For example, it is possible to add a new
zone after zone 4, but copy the parameters from zone 1 into this new zone.
Once a new zone has been created, the user must type in or cut/paste its top and
bottom depths into the 'Zone Depths' tab. NOTE: zones cannot overlap, but one can
have a gap between zones.
'Reservoir and Pay Cutoffs' Tabs

These tabs are initially populated with the cut-off parameters that the user sets up on the Cutoff
and Summation 'launch' screens.
If a parameter is an 'On / Off'-type flag, then 'clicking' it will change its state. If it is a 'list'-type
parameter, then 'clicking' on it will produce a pop-up menu where the parameter can be changed.
The 'Zone Depths' tab allows the user to change zone tops and bottoms, and set a zone name.
The 'Reservoir Results', 'Pay Results' and any additional report 'Results' tabs have no editable
fields and are used to display the results of the calculation.

NOTE: Simply changing a parameter in the display will not immediately mean that a zone is
re-calculated. The user must click the 'OK' button again in order to re-calculate all zones
and update all displays.
The 'default' Reservoir and Pay cut-off parameters are described below. NOTE: Numbers in
parentheses ( ), prefixing a parameter name, relate to the 'Monte Carlo Error Analysis' module
and correspond to Cut-off module inputs found in the file MonteCarloDefaults.par.
'Reservoir Cutoffs' Tab

Min Res Height
Allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it to count as net
reservoir.
Default is 0. (All depth intervals will count towards net if they meet the cut-off criteria).
(3) Phi Cut Res/Pay
Porosity cut-off value.
If the input porosity curve value is greater than or equal to this value, then the level can be
considered for Pay or Reservoir if the level also meets all the other cut-offs.
Phi Res Use
Flag
Set to 'On' ('checked') to use the porosity input for a Net Reservoir cut-off.
(6) Sw Cut Res/Pay
Water saturation cut-off value.
If the input water saturation curve is less than or equal to this value, then the level can be
considered for pay or reservoir if the level also meets all the other cut-offs.
Sw Res Use
Flag
Set to 'On' ('checked') to use the water saturation input for a Net Reservoir cut-off.
(9) Vcl Cut Res/Pay
Clay volume cut-off value.
If the input clay volume curve is less than or equal to this value, then the level can be
considered for pay or reservoir if the level also meets all the other cut-offs.
Vcl Res Use
Flag
Set to 'On' ('checked') to use the clay volume input for a Net reservoir cut-off.
'Pay Cutoffs' Tab

Min Pay Height
Allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it to count as Net Pay.
Default is 0. (All depth intervals will count towards pay if they meet the cut-off criteria).
Phi Pay Use
Flag
Set to 'On' ('checked') to use the porosity input for a Net pay cut-off.
Sw Pay Use
Flag
Set to 'On' ('checked') to use the water saturation input for a Net Pay cut-off.
Vcl Pay Use
Flag
Set to 'On' to use the clay volume input for a Net pay cut-off.
'Additional Cutoffs' Tabs

Extra Reports Tabs are only activated if the user sets up additional 'Reports' with associated
input curves in the 'Cutoff and Summation set-up' screens. Up to three extra reports can be set

up, each with its' own optional set of cut-off criteria. The user has immense flexibility in how to
use these additional reports. They do not necessarily have to be set up to report Net and/or Pay.
The example shown below, however, is set up as a 'Pay' report with a 'Report Title' "SW < 0.45",
'Short Name' "REP3". The number of columns displayed will depend on the number of curves
selected in the Set-up 'Input Curves' screen. For each selected curve there will be a pair of
adjacent columns named using the following syntax:
CurveName / Cut / Report Short Name (e.g. 'Phi Cut REP3') and
CurveName / Report Short Name / Use (e.g. 'Phi REP3 Use').
Type in a cut-off value in the '...Cut...' column and 'check' the adjacent '...Use' column if you wish
to use a particular curve as some form of discriminator.
The 'Additional Reports' parameters are described below. NOTE: Numbers in parentheses ( ),
prefixing a parameter name, relate to the 'Monte Carlo Error Analysis' module and correspond
to the Cutoff inputs found in the file MonteCarloDefaults.par.
All additional Cutoff Parameter tabs have a common column format, with the 'Report Short Name
' (in the example shown above, 'REP3') inserted into the column headers and the Cutoff Tab
labelled with the 'Report Title' ('SW < 0.45'). The 'Short Name' has been replaced by 'XXXX' in
the following listing, for simplicity.
Min XXXX Height

Allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it to count in whatever
Report computation is being executed.
Default is 0. (All depth intervals will be counted, if they meet any cut-off criteria that may
have been set).
(12) Other cut-off 1
'Other input curve 1' cut-off value.
If the user decides to apply some cut-off criteria, and if the 'other input curve 1' is >= or <=
(depending on setting on input curve window) to this value, then the level can be used in
the report if the level also meets all the other cut-offs.
Other cut-off 1 Use
Set to 'On' ('checked') to use the extra cut-off curve 1 input for a cut-off.

Extra input curve 2 cut-off value.

If the extra input curve 2 is >= or <= (depending on setting on input curve window) to this
value, then the level can be considered for pay or reservoir if the level also meets all the
other cut-offs.
Other cut-off 2 Use
Extra input curve 3 cut-off value.
If the extra input curve 3 is >= or <= (depending on setting on input curve window) to this
value, then the level can be considered for pay or reservoir if the level also meets all the
other cut-offs.
Other cut-off 3 Use
'Reservoir Results' Tab

The 'Reservoir Results' tab allows the user to view the results of a summation calculation for Net
Reservoir - determined by the application of the Porosity and optional Clay Volume cut-off criteria
- for each defined zone.
The 'Reservoir Results' parameters are described below:
Gross Interval
Gross interval
Result parameter. Non-editable.
Net Res
Net reservoir interval
Net/Gross Res
Net/Gross ratio for the reservoir interval
Av Phi Res
Average porosity in the reservoir interval.
Av Sw Res
Average water saturation in the reservoir interval. This is a porosity-weighted average.

Av Vcl Res
Average clay volume in the reservoir interval.
Other Curve Av (Name) Res
Average of the additional input curves 1-7 in the reservoir interval. Average type
(Arithmetic, Geometric, Harmonic) is specified on the input curve window.
PhiH Res
Computed Porosity - Thickness product of reservoir rock meeting the Porosity and
optional clay volume cut-off criteria.
PhiSoH Res
Computed Hydrocarbon Pore thickness product of reservoir rock meeting the Porosity
and optional clay volume cut-off criteria.
Other Curve (Name)H Res
Cumulative thickness of the additional input curves 1-7 in the reservoir interval. Average
type (Arithmetic, Geometric, Harmonic) is specified on the input curve window.
additional data will be reported in the 'Reservoir Results' Tab. These are:
TVD/TVT Gross
True vertical depth Gross Zone Thickness
TVD/TVT Net Res
True vertical depth Net Reservoir Thickness
TVD / TVT N/G Res
True Vertical Depth Net to Gross Ratio
NOTE: If '$$' are seen in the columns then this indicates that there is 'null' data in that zone
interval.
'Pay Results' Tab

The 'Pay Results' tab allows the user to view the results of a summation calculations for Net Pay
- determined by the application of the Vclay, Porosity and Water Saturation cut-off criteria - for
each defined zone.

The 'Pay Results' parameters are described below:
Gross Interval
Gross interval
Net Pay
Net pay interval
Net/Gross Pay
Net/Gross ratio for the pay interval
Av Phi Pay
Average porosity in the pay interval.
Av Sw Pay
Average water saturation in the pay interval. This is a porosity-weighted average.
Av Vcl Pay
Average clay volume in the pay interval.
Other Curve Av (Name) Pay
Average of the additional input curves 1-7 in the reservoir interval. Average type
(Arithmetic, Geometric, Harmonic) is specified on the input curve window.
PhiH Pay
Computed Porosity - Thickness product of reservoir rock meeting the Porosity and
optional clay volume cut-off criteria.
PhiSoH Pay
Computed Hydrocarbon Pore thickness product of reservoir rock meeting the Porosity
and optional clay volume cut-off criteria.
Other Curve (Name)H Pay
Cumulative thickness of the additional input curves 1-7 in the reservoir interval. Average
type (Arithmetic, Geometric, Harmonic) is specified on the input curve window.

additional data will be reported in the 'Pay Results' Tab. These are:
TVD/TVT Gross
True vertical depth Gross Zone Thickness
TVD/TVT Net Pay
True vertical depth Net Pay Thickness
TVD / TVT N/G Pay
True Vertical Depth Net to Gross Ratio
NOTE: If '$$' are seen in the columns then this indicates that there is 'null' data in that zone
interval.
'Additional Results' Tabs
If the user has set up any additional 'Reports' in the set-up screens, each scenario will create an
extra 'Results' tab. The 'SW < 0.45 Results' tab shown in the screen above is an example. Up
to 3 reports, in addition to the default 'Net Reservoir' and 'Net Pay' reports are possible.
The user has complete flexibility in how to set up and use these additional reports. The input
curve selection is therefore important in determining whether the computed output is a 'Net
Reservoir', 'Net Pay' or 'Other' type of report.
Cut-off and Summation Parameter 'Help'

The 'Help' buttons on the parameter screens are unique to the program in the sense that they will
launch a small window (example below) which will provide information on individual parameters in
the display. Once the window is displayed, the user places the mouse cursor over a parameter in
the parameter window, and the 'help' for that parameter is displayed.

Column Edits
If the user wants to set all the parameters in one column of the parameter screen to the same
value then the header of the column should be 'clicked'. This will turn the column header box to
green. Now, any one parameter that is changed in that column will change all the parameters in
the column to the same value. To turn the column edit off, click the column header again and its
colour will return to grey. Column edits remain active while the well stays loaded in memory. They
have to be reset, if required, next time the well is loaded. The following shows a column edit
turned on for the 'Phi cut-off' parameter.
The 'Close' Button

The 'Close' button on the parameter window closes the window, but does not cancel any changes
made to the parameters. If the user closes the window without clicking 'OK' then the changes
made will not come into effect until some other interactive parameter is changed for that zone,
and therefore forces a re-calculation of the zone.

21.6 Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

The 'Multi well Cutoff and Summation' module allows the user to run the 'Cutoff and
Summation' computation for multiple wells from a single window. The module has sophisticated
reporting options that allow results from multiple wells to be written to one report file. The module
can be used to either re-run the current 'Cutoff and Summation' results in each well with some
modification, for example to a changed VCL cut-off, or can be run to create the 'Cutoff and
Summation' results for each well from scratch.
This module works with the single well Cut-off and Summation module. It provides a multi-well
front-end to the module. Once this module is run, all the settings and results produced will
also be found populating the single well module. Therefore, if one does not want to lose the
settings and results that are currently in the single well cut-offs they should be saved before
starting to use the multi-well cut-off module. To do this, see the section below on the 'Topsets'.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Interpretation' 'Multi Well Cutoff and
Summation'. On selecting 'Multi Well Cutoff and Summation' the 'Select Wells' module
appears. This allows the user to create a well list or to select from a saved well list.
To select a well, 'click' on one or more of the available wells and then use the left arrow (>) to
move the selected item to the right panel. Wells can also be dragged from the 'Available Wells'
panel to the 'Selected Wells' column. The double arrow (>>) boxes will move all wells from the
available to the selected or vice versa.
Once the wells have been selected the 'Multi Well Cutoff and Summation' module opens. It
consists of 7 tabs:
'Curve Set-Up'
'Input Curves'
Section 21.6 Interpretation : Multi-well Cutoff and Summation

'Output Curves'
'Zones'
'Reports'
'Cutoffs'
'Results'
The user must set up all the window 'tabs' before 'clicking' the 'OK' button to calculate the '
Summation Results'.
'Curve Set-up' Tab

The 'Curve Set-up' tab allows the user to select the curves that will be used in the Cutoff /
Summation routine. One must set up the 'Porosity' and 'Water Saturation' curves to be used for
the report. A 'Clay Volume' curve is optional. One can also optionally select up to 7 additional
curves that will have zonal averages computed for them, in each selected well. For example, one
might want to report average Gamma Ray value, average bulk density or average computed
Permeability by zone. You must type in a 'Cutoff Name' and 'Short Name' for each additional
curve to be used.
The averaging technique used for each additional input curve can also be changed using the
drop-down list in the 'Average Method' column. Clicking in a cell in this column allows you to
choose on of 'Arithmetic', 'Geometric' or 'Harmonic' averages.

The 'Use' column allows the user to include or exclude an input curve row from the Summation
report. For example, if the user had made a report as shown above and then wished to remove all
the 'optional curves' from the report, the user could simply 'uncheck' the 'Use' column for the extra
'Cutoff Name' entries and re-run the report without having to remove the extra input curves for
every well.
If you have deviated wells, which have TVDSS curves, you can output a Summation report using
TVDSS depths by 'checking' the 'Calculate TVD/TVT report' check-box.
'Input Curves' Tab

The 'Input Curves' tab sets up the input curves for the selected wells. Curves must be entered
into the 'Porosity' and 'Water Saturation' rows in the grid, for each well. The 'Clay Volume'
curve is optional, but must be entered if clay volume is used as a cut-off. Up to 7 other input
curves can be entered. If a name is entered in the 'Cutoff Name' column of the 'Curve Set-up'
tab, a corresponding row will be set up on the 'Input Curves' tab. If an input curve is not used as
a cut-off then it is not necessary that the curve is entered for all wells. For example, if the average
core permeability was going to be included in the report then this curve could be entered only for
the cored wells in which the curve exists.
If a curve name is typed into the 'Default Curve Name' column, the program will try and find the
appropriate curve in all selected wells and will populate that row of the grid. Alternatively,
manually select curve names by 'clicking' in a cell and selecting the curve from the drop-down list.

The 'TVD/TVT' entry is used for entering TVD or TVT depth curves. If entered, the net
thicknesses will be output in TVD or TVT thickness. It is not necessary that all wells have a TVD
curve. The report will show which depth reference is being used for each well.
'Output Curves' Tab

The 'Output Curves' tab allows the selection of curve names for the output results. If a curve
name cell is left blank then no curve will be output. To change a curve name, select the cell and
type in a new name or choose a curve name in the well from the drop-down list. To change all
curve names in one row, type the new curve name in the 'Default Curve Name' column. Typing a
'blank' in a cell in this column will remove the curve output for all wells.
The 'Pay Flag' and 'Reservoir Flag' curves must be output. However, their names can be
changed from the default names.

'Zones' Tab
The 'Zones' tab allows the user to set up Summation 'Zones'. Zones do not have to exist in all
wells. 'Blank' zone 'Top' and 'Bottom' depth cells indicate that a zone is absent in a well. For
example, in Well 'A3', below, zone 'd' is not present.
To create a new zone, type a zone name into an empty cell in the 'Zone Name' column.
To delete a zone, 'click' the mouse cursor in a cell in the appropriate row and 'click' the '
Delete Zone' button.

The 'Sub Total' parameter column allows the user to compute average reservoir properties either:
over a number of zones, i.e. a 'composite' zone, or

to compute a sub total which is, for example, half the thickness of an existing zone.
'Sub Total' zones have no associated cut-offs, but use the interpretation results from the 'normal'
zones to determine net pay or net reservoir average properties. The user flags that a zone is a '
Sub Total' by 'checking' the appropriate cell in the grid. For example, if one wants to have a
summary of the top two zones one could create a 'Sub Total' of the top two zones. To make a
zone a 'Sub Total', click in the 'Sub Total' column. To automatically create a new 'Sub Total' for
all wells, click the 'New Sub Total' button. The following window will appear.

Select the zones to be grouped together as a 'Sub Total' and enter a name for this 'Sub Total'.
Clicking the 'OK' button will then create the new 'Sub Total'.
The order in which zones appear in the final report depends on the type of report required. If a
separate result file is created for each well, then the zones will be ordered by depth. For reports
with all the well results in a single file, the order of the zones will be the same as the order in the '
Zone' tab. To change the order of zones click in a row and use the 'up' and 'down' arrows on the '
Zone' tab.

'Reports' Tab
The 'Reports' tab allows the user to set up the type of report to be produced. The default setting
is to create a combined 'Net Reservoir' and 'Net Pay' report, labelled Reservoir' and 'Pay' for each
of the selected wells. To output a 'Report Name', 'check' the 'Use' column.
'Cutoffs' Tab
The 'Cutoffs' tab allows the user to set up cut-off values for each zone. The same zonal cut-offs
are used in each selected well in the grid. All zones, set up in the 'Zones' tab, will be displayed
here except 'Sub Totals'. 'Sub Totals' have no associated cut-off values, since they are created
from other zones, which have their own cut-offs defined.

If cut-offs do not need to be applied to an input curve, for example for 'Gamma Ray' in the screen
capture shown above, remove the 'ticks' from the 'Use' column for that curve. To turn 'on' and 'off'
all the ticks in a column, click on the 'Use' label in the column header, to activate it, then click in a
cell in the column to toggle between 'checked' and 'un-checked'.
To change the 'cut-off value' for all zones in a column, edit the value in the top row of the grid
and then click on the 'Value' label in the column header. This will set all the cut-off values to the
same as the top cell value.
The 'Minimum Height' allows the user to set the minimum thickness of a zone in order for it to
count as net reservoir ('Reservoir' sub-tab) or net pay ('Pay' sub-tab). The default is 0. (All depth
intervals will count towards net if they meet the cut-off criteria).
The 'Cutoffs' tab grid can be scrolled to the right to view any extra input curves, if these are
required in the output report.
'Results' Tab
The 'Results' tab sets up the type of report to generate. Two basic outputs can be produced.
These are:
'Output Individual files per well' radio button, if selected, will create a separate output
file for each well. Each of these files will be identical to that which is normally produced
by the single well cut-off and summation module.
The 'Output one file for all wells' radio button, if selected, will output all the well
summation results into one single file.

The 'Separate pay and Reservoir results' check-box, if 'checked', will activate the 'Sort
by Zone' and 'Sort by Well' radio buttons, which allow the separation of the pay results
and reservoir results so that they can be grouped by zone or well. If not 'checked',
results will be output in a similar format to the single well summation report, combined in
one file.
The 'Sort by zone' box, if 'checked', will output the results sorted by zone. For
example all the results for top zone will be displayed for each well then all the
results for the second zone etc...
The 'Sort by Well' option will output the results sorted by well, but separating the
pay and reservoir results into different sections.
The 'Output Field average results' check-box, if 'checked', will create a new entry in
the output results file called 'All Wells'. This entry will contain the field average values
for all the zones. The field averages are 'net thickness weighted' averages.
'Add Zone X/Y location to report' check-box, if 'checked', will include, where deviation
survey data are available in the selected wells, in the output report, the X/Y coordinates
of the top of each reservoir zone.
'Output TVD depths on same line as Measured Depths' check-box, if 'checked', will
create additional columns in the output file reporting the top and bottom depths in
TVDSS, and net TVD thickness for each reservoir zone. The default option
('un-checked') is to put a second line in the report that contains the TVD/TVT/ Net results
for each zone.
'Output to' - Summation Reports can be sent directly to a printer or to a disk file by
selecting one of the 'Output to' radio buttons. Selecting the 'File' option allows the user
to choose the format of the output file. The comma-delimited file is compatible with
spreadsheet programs. The .rtf file output will contain a format similar to what was sent
to the printer. When the 'OK' button is clicked, the program will automatically launch a

program to display the file results. The program launched will depend on the setup
default program for the file type. For example '.csv' could launch Microsoft Excel, '.txt'
could launch Microsoft NotePad and '.rtf' could launch Microsoft Word. To output the '
.csv' file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter go to 'Tools' 'Options
' 'Miscellaneous Options' 'CSV Delimiter'.
'Topsets' button
The 'Topsets' button has several functions:
It allows the user to save all the current cut-off results, for all wells, under a new cut-off
Set name. This could be useful if one wanted to restore the previous cut-offs and zones
at a later date.
It allows the user to reload a saved 'Tops Set'.
It loads Tops Sets of different types to the cut-offs Tops Set. This means that a Tops Set
that has been loaded to IP using the 'Edit Zones /Tops Sets' functionality, can be
imported into the multi-well cut-offs module and then used for producing summation
reports. Clicking the 'Topsets' button produces the following window:
The top section of the window allows the user to save the current parameters for the cut-off
modules for the individual wells selected. This is the same functionality as seen in the 'Load and
Save Parameter Sets' button on the cut-off input window, except that it runs on all wells currently
selected in the module. The Set name is entered into the box and then the 'Save to Database' or '
Save to Disk File' is 'clicked'.

To restore a previously saved Parameter Set, select the required Set in the list window and click '
Load from Database'. If the 'All Sets' box is 'checked' then Sets of a different type to a 'Cutoff'
Set can be loaded. In this case only the zone names and zone top depths will be loaded. It is
possible that Parameter Sets for all wells may not be available to load. The number of wells 'Num
Wells' found for each Parameter Set name is displayed. If a Parameter Set is not available for a
particular well then nothing will be loaded for that well. However, the Parameter Sets will be
loaded for the other wells.
The 'Load From Disk File' button allows the the user to re-load Parameter Sets that have been
written to separate disk files using the 'Save to Disk File' button.
The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons on the main window allow the user to save and restore the
multi-well cut-off setup windows. The multi-well cut-off setup is not saved when you exit the
program or change the database. Therefore, it is good practice to save the format after running
the module.
An example output for two wells, plus the all wells average follows. The listing was generated
using the 'Sort by Zone' option.
Date : 25/04/02 10:23:44
Well Zone Name Type Units Top Bottom Gross Net N/G Av Phi Av Sw Av Vcl Phi*H Phi*So*H
All Wells C Sand MD 97.75 97.00 0.992 0.222 0.141 0.024 21.517 18.477
XYZ 1 C Sand MD ft 7295.00 7416.50 121.50 121.50 1.000 0.206 0.197 0.021 25.020 20.087
XYZ 3 C Sand MD ft 6970.00 7044.00 74.00 72.50 0.980 0.248 0.064 0.030 18.014 16.867
All Wells B Sand MD 97.00 97.00 1.000 0.236 0.131 0.043 22.905 19.895
XYZ 1 B Sand MD ft 7416.50 7552.00 135.50 135.50 1.000 0.223 0.194 0.039 30.284 24.421
XYZ 3 B Sand MD ft 7044.00 7102.50 58.50 58.50 1.000 0.265 0.010 0.053 15.527 15.368
All Wells Mid Shale MD 19.50 6.50 0.333 0.171 0.128 0.156 1.112 0.970
XYZ 1 Mid Shale MD ft 7552.00 7565.50 13.50 2.75 0.204 0.187 0.478 0.086 0.514 0.268
All Wells A Sand MD 52.00 44.8 0.863 0.189 0.681 0.046 8.475 2.701
XYZ 1 A Sand MD ft 7565.50 7656.50 91.00 77.5 0.852 0.187 0.770 0.037 14.492 3.339
XYZ 3 A Sand MD ft 7128.00 7141.00 13.00 12.2 0.942 0.201 0.161 0.099 2.458 2.063
All Wells All Zones MD 66.56 61.3 0.922 0.220 0.222 0.039 13.502 10.511
XYZ 1 All Zones MD ft 7295.00 7656.50 361.50 337.25 0.933 0.029 0.161 0.032 9.832 8.252
NET PAY SUMMARY
Well Zone Name Type Units Top Bottom Gross Net N/G Av Phi Av Sw Av Vcl Phi*H Phi*So*H
All Wells C Sand MD 97.75 97.00 0.992 0.222 0.141 0.024 21.517 18.477
XYZ 1 C Sand MD ft 7295.00 7416.50 121.50 121.50 1.000 0.206 0.197 0.021 25.020 20.087
XYZ 3 C Sand MD ft 6970.00 7044.00 74.00 72.50 0.980 0.248 0.064 0.030 18.014 16.867
All Wells B Sand MD 145.88 145.13 0.995 0.231 0.134 0.037 33.581 29.092
XYZ 1 B Sand MD ft 7416.50 7552.00 135.50 134.75 0.994 0.224 0.192 0.039 30.119 24.339
XYZ 3 B Sand MD ft 7044.00 7102.50 58.50 58.50 1.000 0.265 0.010 0.053 15.527 15.368
All Wells Mid Shale MD 92.44 78.19 0.846 0.227 0.129 0.047 17.720 15.428
All Wells A Sand MD 98.22 54.59 0.556 0.217 0.174 0.045 11.866 9.803
XYZ 1 A Sand MD ft 7565.50 7656.50 91.00 20.50 0.225 0.187 0.415 0.012 3.835 2.243
XYZ 3 A Sand MD ft 7128.00 7141.00 13.00 10.50 0.808 0.207 0.111 0.096 2.178 1.936
All Wells All Zones MD 66.56 53.69 0.807 0.225 0.144 0.038 12.069 10.325
cut-offs USED

Zone Name Phi Pay Sw Pay Vcl Pay

C Sand > 0.100 < 0.500 Y < 0.500
B Sand > 0.100 < 0.500 Y < 0.500
Mid Shale > 0.100 < 0.500 Y < 0.500
A Sand > 0.100 < 0.500 Y < 0.500

21.7 Auto Update of Analysis Modules
If the 'Auto update Porosity and Water Saturation' menu item is 'checked', then every time the
Clay Volume module is run, the Porosity and Water Saturation module will be run automatically
afterwards.
If the 'Auto update Cut-off and Summation (PhiSw)' menu item is 'checked', then every time
the Porosity and Water Saturation module is run, the Cut-off and Summation module will be run
automatically afterwards.
If the 'Auto Update Cut-off and Summation (MS)' menu is 'checked' then every time the Mineral
Solver module is run, the the Cut-off and Summation module will be run automatically afterwards.
These options allow the interpretation modules to be chained together so that changes in any one
module will propagate through the other modules without the user having to manually run them.
When the program is first started up these options are not switched on.
Another way of linking the modules is to use the 'Link Zones / Top Sets' module.
NOTE: These options should be turned 'off' if using the 'Multi-well Parameter Distribution'
module. This is because the Zone Sets will be automatically run before they are properly
set up.
Section 21.7 Interpretation : Auto Update of Analysis Modules

21.8 NMR Normalization

Schlumberger and Halliburton (post 2000) provide T2 and T1 distributions that span 4 log
decades, 0.3ms to 3000ms or 0.5ms to 5000ms. Baker Atlas and Halliburton (pre 2000) provide
T2 distributions that do not span complete decades and vary depending on the data gathered,
e.g. 4ms to 512ms, 0.5ms to 1024ms, 1ms to 4096ms.
The problem with asymmetric distributions is that they cannot be plotted properly on a log grid and
as a result they are usually plotted without any grid behind them. That means the user cannot
properly plot a cut-off or any other T2 value such as oil T2, max water T2, or peak value.
It also means that when the user uses the interactive plot in the NMR Module to pick a cut-off they
are not picking what they thought they were. It does calculate the correct results for whatever
cut-off is in the parameter if the start and stop times are mapped correctly. But the cut-off does
not sit against the T2 distribution properly in the log plot as the log plot cannot plot incomplete
decades.
The T2 Normalization module re-samples the T2 array and produces a polynomial fit through the
array. This creates a smooth fitting curve through the array with many more points than the initial
array. The polynomial curve then has to be normalised with the porosity in order to not overcall
the porosity. The resulting T2 output array curve can then be correctly plotted and easily
compared to other T2 arrays.
T2 Distribution
The 'Base T2 array distribution base curve name' must be entered for NMR porosities to be
calculated (not necessary if only Sw calculations are wanted). Array data in IP are either stored in
array curves or they consist of groups of curves with a common 'base name' with a numerical
Section 21.8 Interpretation : NMR Normalization

extension attached to the 'base name'. The user either selects an array curve or selects any curve
in an array curve group, in which case the program will automatically select the other curves. The '
Units' box tells the program whether the input T2 data porosities are in measurements of '%' or
'dec'.
The 'Tool Type' drop-down allows the user to select from one of the pre-defined tools. By
changing the tool type the defaults for the setup are altered. All the defaults can be manually
changed by 'clicking' on the 'Advanced Setup' button and adjusting the settings. NOTE: the
defaults for the tools are found in the file NMR_Tools.csv in the IP program directory. These can
be added to or modified by the user.
The T2 distribution will be normally calibrated directly in porosity. However, it is found that for
some older tools some calibration factor is needed to convert the T2 array data to porosity. This is
best done by using the input T2 total porosity curve produced by the logging company to calibrate
the T2 array data. This curve is always provided along with the T2 array data and should be
loaded along with the T2 array data.
To calibrate the T2 array data 'check' the 'Calibrate T2 Porosity using input curve' box and
select the calibration curve name. The units of the input curve must also be selected. IP works
with porosities in decimals. However, the NMR porosities as produced by the logging companies
are often in percent.
T2 Advanced Setup
If the 'Advanced Setup' button is 'clicked' the following panel is displayed:
The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allows the user to only use part of an
array. If these fields are left blank then all of the array will be used.
NOTE: the Schlumberger CMR plus tool can encode the T2 distribution in a 90 sample array.
Only the last 30 samples represent the T2 distribution data. For this tool the 'Start sample
number' should be set to 61 and the 'Stop sample number' to 90.
The 'Start T2 time' and 'Stop T2 time' must be entered. They are time values for the end points
of the T2 distribution. These can generally be found on the well site log header.
The 'T2 Start, Stop times are bin mid point times' check-box tells the program whether values
entered represent the left/right edge of the porosity T2 bins or whether they represent the middle
values of the first and last bin. In general for all Schlumberger tools this box should not be
'checked' but for Numar (Halliburton / Baker Atlas) tools the box should be 'checked'. The
difference in results will be small except for those tools that use a low number of bins.
The defaults for the Schlumberger CMR are 3 and 3000. For the CMR plus tool, which can
measure much faster decay times, the default values are 0.3 and 3000.
Normalized Output T2 Distribution

In this data set a Schlumberger CMR T2 array is converted from a 3 to 3000 ms T2 to a 0.3 to

3000 ms T2.
The results of this can be seen below:


21.9 NMR Interpretation

The 'NMR Interpretation' module allows the user to interpret the T2 array data produced from
NMR tools. The module allows the user to set a T1 or T2 cut-off for free fluid (FF) and also for
clay-bound fluid (BF). Permeability is calculated using the 'Timur / Coates' permeability equations
and, if some external permeability data is available, the module will allow automatic calibration of
the equation coefficients.
With the optional input of a resistivity curve, water saturation can be calculated using the Dual
Water equation. The logic uses the NMR for total porosity and clay bound water and the NMR Swi
to limit the lower value of Sw.
Capillary pressure curves can be generated from the T1 or T2 array curves. These need to be
calibrated to an imported capillary pressure measurement made on the actual rock. The module
provides an interactive tool for doing this calibration. Crossplots of the generated capillary
pressure curves can be made. The curves can also be used to generate a Sw height curve from
the entered FWL, water and hydrocarbon densities.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Interpretation' 'NMR Interpretation'. The
module consists of 6 tabbed screens. These are:
'Input Curves'
'Output Curves'
'Parameters'
'Permeability'
'Pc Calibration'
'Pc Crossplot'
'Input Curves' Tab
Section 21.9 Interpretation : NMR Interpretation

T2 Distribution
The 'Base T2 array distribution base curve name' must be entered for NMR porosities to be
calculated (not necessary if only Sw calculations are wanted). Array data in IP are either stored in
array curves or they consist of groups of curves with a common 'base name' with a numerical
extension attached to the 'base name'. The user either selects an array curve or selects any curve
in an array curve group, in which case the program will automatically select the other curves. The '
Units' box tells the program whether the input T2 data porosities are in measurements of '%' or
'dec'.
T1 distribution data can be handled exactly the same as T2 distribution data although, of course,
different cutoffs will be required. Throughout this document T2 will be referred to but this should
be considered as interchangeable with T1.
The 'Tool Type' drop-down allows the user to select from one of the pre-defined tools. By

changing the tool type the defaults for the setup are altered. All the defaults can be manually
changed by 'clicking' on the 'Advanced Setup' button and adjusting the settings. NOTE: the
defaults for the tools are found in the file NMR_Tools.csv in the IP program directory. These can
be added to or modified by the user.
The T2 distribution will be normally calibrated directly in porosity. However, it is found that for
some older tools some calibration factor is need to convert the T2 array data to porosity. This is
best done by using the input T2 total porosity curve produced by the logging company to calibrate
the T2 array data. This curve is always provided along with the T2 array data and should be
loaded along with the T2 array data.
To calibrate the T2 array data 'check' the 'Calibrate T2 Porosity using input curve' box and
select the calibration curve name. The units of the input curve must also be selected. IP works
with porosities in decimals. However, the NMR porosities as produced by the logging companies
are often in percent.
NMR Sw Calculations Input Curves

To make Sw calculations using the NMR the user must enter deep resistivity (Rt) and temperature
curves. The temperature curve is used for correcting Rw values to formation conditions and also
optionally calculating a bound water conductivity.
The PhiT and VCL curve are used only when the user does not want to use the NMR input for
clay bound water calculations (older tools didn't measure this). The user needs to set the 'CBF
Method' parameter in the 'Sw logic/Limits' sub-tab of the 'Parameters' tab to use these inputs.
Optional Input Curves

The 'Optional Input Curves' are used partly for comparison purposes and partly to make
moveable oil displays with the 'NMR clay bound fluid' being compared to the 'Bulk Volume
Water' from normal log analysis (QC plot).
The TVDss input is used for calculating a capillary pressure at a height above FWL. This is used
for calculating the Sw height curve from the NMR Pc curves.
If the T2 curve is not available (for example, when preliminary wellsite logs are only available)
then it is still possible, given the NMR porosities, to use the module to calculate water saturations.
In this case the user must enter the NMR total porosity and NMR free fluid optional curves to allow
the module to run.
Parameter Sets
The 'Parameter set name' is used to set the default name for the output of the parameter listings.
The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the NMR parameter Sets.
See 'Parameter Set Management' for more information on how to do this.
'Null all result curves before running calculations' if 'checked' will null all output curves from a
previous interpretation before starting the calculations on a new interpretation.
T2 Advanced Setup
If the 'Advanced Setup' button is 'clicked' the following panel is displayed:

The 'Start sample number' and 'Stop sample number' allows the user to only use part of an
array. If these fields are left blank then all of the array will be used.
The 'Start T2 time' and 'Stop T2 time' must be entered. They are time values for the end points
of the T2 distribution. These can generally be found on the well site log header.
The 'T2 Start, Stop times are bin mid point times' check-box tells the program whether values
entered represent the left/right edge of the porosity T2 bins or whether they represent the middle
values of the porosity T2 bins. In general for all Schlumberger tools this box should not be
'checked' but for Numar (Halliburton / Baker Atlas) tools the box should be 'checked'. The
difference in results will be small except for those tools that use a low number of bins.
The defaults for the Schlumberger CMR tool are 3 and 3000. For the CMR-200 and CMR plus
tools, which can measure much faster decay times, the default values are 0.3 and 3000.
Tool Start Stop Start T2 Stop T2

Sample Sample
CMR 1 30 3 ms 3000 ms
CMR-200 1 30 0.3 ms 3000 ms
CMR+ 1 30 0.3 ms 3000 ms
NOTE: If the Schlumberger CMR plus tool has been logged in a Multi-Wait mode it also encodes
the T2 distribution in a 90 sample array T2_DIST_MW curve. Only the last 30 samples
represent the T2 distribution data. For this input array the 'Start sample number' should be set
to 61 and the 'Stop sample number' set to 90.
For the new Schlumberger MR Scanner the following table provides information on how to set up
IP depending on the mode logged.
Mode Start Stop Start T2 Stop T2

Sample Sample
SP - T1 1 64 1 ms 9000 ms
data
SP - T2 1 64 1 ms 3000 ms
data
SP - DC 1 64 10 500,000
data
T1 - T1 1 64 1 ms 9000 ms
data
T1 - T2 1 64 1 ms 3000 ms
data
T1 - DC 1 64 10 500,000
data
RP - T2 1 30 0.5 ms 3000 ms
data
HR - T2 1 30 0.5 ms 3000 ms
data
BMR - T2 1 30 0.5 ms 3000 ms

data
BF - T2 1 30 0.5 ms 3000 ms
data
Where
SP mode is Saturation Profiling mode using shells 1+4 or 1+4+8
T1 mode is T1 Profiling mode using shells 1+4 or 1+4+8
RP is T2 Radial Profiling mode using shells 1+4 or 1+4+8
HR is High Resolution mode using shells LHR+3 or UHR+3
BMR is Basic MR Processing mode using shells 1+4
BF is Bound Fluid mode using shell 3 only
Data directly from field MAXIS software cannot be displayed directly in Geoframe or IP. Data from
the field must be processed through the Geoframe MRX Preprocessor module in order to split out
the different shell information for processing.
To display a distribution in IP, add the distribution to a Log Plot as a 'Waveform'. Choose 'Define'
next to 'Waveform' in Log Plot format window. For T2 distribution in SP mode the following '
Waveform' settings are recommended:
The data format of Numar (Halliburton / Baker Atlas) MRIL NMR tools depends on the tool
version, the vendor and the vintage of software used for processing; but the T2 bin times will
always be mid-point bin times. For all Baker Atlas MRIL data and Numar (Halliburton) MRIL
data prior to 2003 the output is typically an 8 to 12 bin T2 distribution, with T2 bin times as
powers of 2, although some data sets were processed with more bins.
The number of bins and the T2 times depends mostly on whether the tool logged effective or total
porosity. Typically, 8 and 9 bin data will be effective porosity and go from 4 ms to 512 ms or 1024
ms. While 12 or 13 bin data will be total porosity and go from 0.5 ms to 1024 ms or 2048 ms.


Sample Sample
MRIL-B 1 8 4 ms 512 ms
MRIL-C 1 9 4 ms 1024 ms
MRIL-Ctp 1 12 0.5 ms 1024 ms
MRIL-Pri 1 12 0.5 ms 1024 ms
me
MRIL-Pri 1 13 0.5 ms 2048 ms
me
Numar/Halliburton typically only provide discrete bin data which can be used as provided, whilst
Baker Atlas often provide cumulative bin data which may need to be manipulated in order to
provide discrete bins prior to use.
Numar/Halliburton also typically provide a 200 element array curve for plotting purposes, TASPEC
, which can also be used as an input. The start and stop times will, for this vector, be the same as
used for the regular discrete bins.
Array data provided by Baker Atlas frequently contain extra 'zero value' samples at the beginning
and end of the array, purely for plotting aesthetics. Care must be taken to make sure the correct
T2 start and stop times are selected depending on whether these extra 'bins' are included in the
processing or not. For example, 8 bin data from 4 ms to 512 ms may be provided in a 10 bin array
from 2 ms to 1024 ms.
The data format of Halliburton/Sperry Sun MRIL-Prime (post 2003) and MRI-LWD tools will
typically be a 54 bin array curve, T2DIST or T1DIST, although 200 element arrays were also
provided for plotting, TASPEC curve. The 54 bins were based on multiples of the powers of 2
starting at 0.5 ms, and although they are usually presented to 5000 ms the last bin is actually at
4870.99 ms. The 200 bins were from 0.3 ms to 3000 ms in order to be comparable with previous
generation logs. Again, the T2 bin times will always be mid-point bin times.

Sample Sample
MRIL-Pri 1 54 0.5 ms 4870.99
me ms
MRIL-Pri 1 200 0.3 ms 3000 ms
me
Baker Atlas MREX T2 data is typically provided in a 26 bin array curve, TPOR. Again with the first
and last bins set to zero for plotting aesthetics. The 24 T2 times solved for in the inversion are
multiples of the powers of 2 starting at 0.3535 and ending at 1024, as given in the bin centre
times array curve, BCNTR. NOTE: the T2 bin times are mid-point bin times. With the extra
zeros the 26 bins go from 0.25 ms to 1448.15 ms.

Sample Sample
MREX 1 26 0.25 ms 1448.15
ms
'Output Curves' Tab

The 'Clay Bound Fluid Cutoff' box should be 'checked' if the NMR measures clay fluid (newer
tools). When checked the T2 clay bound cutoff is used to calculate effective and total porosity.
When not checked the NMR PhiT and Phie are the same.
If the 'Remove Clay Bound fluid from Coates Permeability calculation' box is 'checked' then
the option is available to remove the clay-bound fluid from the Timur / Coates permeability
equation (effective porosity rather than total porosity is used).
To output the porosity bin curves check the Make Porosity Bin Curves box. The user needs to
select the number of bins to output and enter the bin start and stop times in the table. The value
output in the bin curve will be the NMR porosity between the two T2 entered times. It is possible to
have bins that overlap. However, when all the bins are summed, the results will no longer be the
NMR porosity.
To output PC curves from the T2 distribution check the Make Pc Curves from T2 box. Set the
output pressure units required.

The following are the output curves created by this module. If an output curve is not wanted then
uncheck the box next to its name.
NMR effective porosity (nmrPhie): Porosity calculated from the T2 spectrum above the
clay bound cutoff. If no clay bound cutoff this equals the NMR total porosity.
NMR total porosity (nmrPhiT): Porosity calculated from T2 spectrum with no cutoffs.
NMR Total bound fluid (nmrBFT): The total bound fluid, both clay and capillary bound.
This will be the same as nmrBFTc or NMRTt depending on the method selected
NMR clay bound water (nmrCBW): The porosity calculated below the T2 clay bound
cutoff.
NMR capillary bound fluid (nmrBFE): The total bound fluid minus the clay bound
fluid.
NMR free fluid (nmrFF): The porosity calculated above the T2 bound water cutoff. For
the tapered method this is nmrPhiT minus nmrBFT.
NMR Swe irreducible (nmrSwiE): Effective irreducible water saturation. nmrBFE /
nmrPhie.
NMR SwT irreducible (nmrSwiT): Total irreducible water saturation. nmrBFT /
nmrPhiT.
NMR Sw bound (nmrSwb): Bound water saturation. nmrCBM / nmrPhiT.
NMR permeability (nmrPerm): Permeability calculated from Timur/ Coates equation.
Bound Fluid total cutoff (nmrBFTc): Total bound fluid calculated using the cutoff
method. The calculated porosity below the T2 bound water cutoff.
Bound Fluid eff. cutoff (nmrBFEc): Effective bound fluid calculated using the cutoff
method. The calculated porosity below the T2 bound water cutoff and above the clay
bound cutoff.
Bound Fluid total Tapered (nmrBFTt): Total bound fluid calculated using the tapered
method.
Bound Fluid eff. Tapered (nmrBFEt): Effective bound fluid calculated using the
tapered method.
NMR SwT (nmrSwT): Total water saturation, calculated from the input Rt curve and the
Dual Water equation. Limited between 1.0 and 0.0.
NMR SwT unlimited (nmrSwtU): Total water saturation unlimited, calculated from the
input Rt curve and the Dual Water equation. Values can be greater than 1.0.
NMR SwE (nmrSw): Effective water saturation, calculated from SwT and nmrSwb.
Limited between 1.0 and 0.0.
NMR SwE unlimited (nmrSwU): Effective water saturation unlimited, calculated from
Sw and nmrSwb. Can be greater than 1.0.
Final effective porosity (Phie_f): Effective porosity used for calculating Sw. This will
be the same as the nmrPhie except if the parameter Phi Method is changed from
NMR. In this case the porosity will be the entered porosity parameter / curve Phi In.
Final total porosity (Phie_f): Total porosity used for calculating Sw. This will be the
same as the nmrPhie except if the parameter Phi Method is changed from NMR. In
this case the porosity will be the entered porosity parameter / curve Phi In.
Final clay bound water (Phie_f): Clay bound water used for calculating Swb used in
the Sw calculations. This will be the same as the nmrCBW curve except if the
parameter CBF Method is changed from NMR. In this case the CBW will either be
calculated from the entered input PhiT curve (CBW = PhiT nmrPhie) or Vcl curve
(CBW = Vcl x PhiT Clay).
NMR BVW (nmeBVW_f): Bound water volume (Phie_f x nmwSw).
NMR BVWT (nmeBVWT_f): Total Bound water volume (PhiT_f x nmwSwT).
NMR Rw apparent (nmrRwapp): Apparent water resistivity. Calculated from Rt and

Phie_f.
NMR z wet (nmrZwet): Water saturation equation z parameter assuming rock is 100%
wet.
NMR z Swi (nmrZwet): Water saturation equation z parameter assuming rock is at
irreducible saturation (at nmrSwirT).
NMR z (nmrZ): Calculated z parameter from Z Slope and Z offset parameters or if
the m n Method parameter is set Parameter then from the m and n
parameters.
T2 free cutoff (T2cutoff): T2 bound water cutoff output.
T2 bound cutoff (CBFT2cut): T2 clay bound water cutoff output.
Sw Logic flag (nmrLogic): Dual water Sw equation logic flag.
NMR Pc pressure (nmrPc): Pc pressure curve calculated from the T2 input curve (array
curve, same number of elements as the T2 input curve).
NMR Pc Sw (nmrPcSw): Pc Sw curve calculated from T2 input curve (array curve).
NMR Sw Height (nmrSw_Ht): Sw calculated from the T2 PC curves using the FWL,
Water density and Hydrocarbon density parameters.
NMR phi Bin Curves (nmrBin*): Output porosity bin curves. Up to 7 different porosity
bins can be output.
'Parameters' Tab
There are 7 sub-tabs within the 'Parameters' tab.
'Zone Depths'
'T2 Cutoffs'
'Permeability'
'Sw Parameters'
'Sw Fluids'
'Sw logic / Limits'
'Pc Curves'
Zone Depths sub-tab

Contains the standard fields associated with parameter Sets.
T2 Cutoffs sub-tab

'Free Fluid Cut' : Free fluid cutoff value. This is displayed as an interactive line on the
plot. A curve can be entered for a variable T2 cutoff.
'Cly B Fluid Cut' : Clay bound fluid cutoff. Only used if the option on the Output
Curves tab 'Clay Bound Fluid Cutoff' is checked. This is displayed as an interactive
line on the plot. A curve can be entered for a variable cutoff.
'BF Method' : The method for calculating the final Bound fluid porosities.
T2 cutoff will calculate the BF using a straight cutoff set in above parameters.
Tapered will use a weighted cutoff where each T2 bin will have a different
cutoff.
Maximum option will take the maximum value calculated by the two other
methods.
'Tapered Constants' : Options are Sand, Carbonate and User. By changing this
parameter the Tapered m factor and Tapered b factor parameters are changed.
The User option will allow the user to set their own factors.
'Tapered m factor' : This is the m factor is the weighting factor equation used to
determine the bound fluid in each T2 bin.
Wi = 1.0 / (m.T2 + b)
'Tapered b factor' : This is the b factor is the weighting factor equation used to
determine the bound fluid in each T2 bin.
Permeability
The parameters in this section are used with the Timur / Coates permeability equation.

'Perm Const' : The a constant.

'Perm FF/BF Exp' : The b exponent.
'Perm Phi Exp' : The c exponent.
Sw Parameters
The parameters in this section and 'Sw Fluids' section are used to calculate Sw from the Dual
Water equations below. Two basic forms of the equation are used, one where the Archie
parameters m and n are defined; the other where m and n are converted to the Z function
parameter, which is defined by the equation below.
Where
or
'a factor' : Archies a factor.

'm exponent' : Archies Cementation m exponent.
'n exponent' : Archies Saturation n exponent.
'm n Method' : Select Parameter to use the entered m and n parameters.
Select Z Function to use Z method of calculating the equations.
'Z wet' : Z wet value used in the Z equation.
'Z irreducible' : Z irreducible value used in the Z equation.
Sw Fluids

'Rw' : Formation water resistivity in ohmm.

'Rw Temp' : Formation water resistivity temperature. Units of the value are set at the
base of the tab. If left blank, then the Rw value entered will be assumed to be at
formation temperature. If not blank then the Rw will be converted to formation
temperature using this value and the entered temperature curve.
'Rwb Method' : if set to Parameter then Rwb will be calculated from the entered Rwb
and Rwb Temp parameter. If set to Function then Rwb will be calculated from the
Coates Dual water Ccw function.
Where
T is in degF
'Rwb' : Bound water resistivity in ohmm.

'Rwb Temp' : Bound water resistivity temperature. Units of the value are set at the base
of the tab. If left blank, then the Rwb value entered will be assumed to be at formation
temperature. If not blank then the Rwb will be converted to formation temperature using
this value and the entered temperature curve.
Sw logic / Limits

'Phi Method' : This selects the source for the porosity used in the Dual Water and
permeability equations. Select NMR to use the NMR PhiT value. If analyzing a zone
where the NMR porosity is not correct (i.e. gas affected) then select Phie Para or PhiT
Para and enter a porosity curve under the Phi In parameter. The selection of Phie
Para or PhiT Para will depend on whether the entered porosity curve is a total or
effective porosity. The program will convert an effective porosity to a total porosity using
the NMR clay bound porosity.
'Phi In' : This is the input curve used for porosity when the Phi Method is set to Phie
Para or PhiT Para.
'CBF Method' : This selects the source for the clay bound fluid used in the Dual Water
equation to calculate Swb. Normally this would be NMR but for older tools which did not
measure CBF an alternative method can be selected.
Select PhiT in Crv to use the PhiT input curve setup on the Input Curves tab.
In this case CBF will be the difference between the NMR porosity (assumes
effective) and the PhiT curve.
Select VCL in Crv to use the Vcl input curve setup on the Input Curves tab. In
this case CBF will be Vcl multiplied by the PhiT Clay parameter. PhiT will be
the NMR effective porosity plus the CBF.
'PhiT Clay' : Total porosity of 100% clay. Used for calculating CBF porosity when the
CBF Method is set to VCL in Crv.
'Swi Limit' : This is the minimum value of SwT that can be output. When the calculated
SwT is less than the limit, SwT is set to the limit and the logic flag is set to 2. Defaults to
0.0.
'FF Sw Limit' : When the NMR Free fluid is below this limit then it is assumed that there
are no movable fluids and therefore any water saturation calculations are meaningless.
When the FF is less than this limit, SwT is set to 1.0 and the logic flag is set to 3.
Defaults to 0.005.
'Phi Sw Limit' : When the NMR effective porosity is below this limit it is assumed water
saturation calculations are meaningless. When the nmrPhie is less than this limit, SwT
is set to 1.0 and the logic flag is set to 4. Defaults to 0.0.
'CBW Sw Limit' : When the NMR clay bound fluid is above this limit it is assumed the
rock is too shaly for meaningful water saturation calculations. When the nmrCBF is
above this limit SwT is set to 1.0 and the logic flag is set to 5. Defaults to 1.0.
Pc Curves
These parameters are used when the Make Pc Curves from T2 option is checked on the
Output Curves tab. The T2 distribution is converted to PC pressures using the calibration

parameters.
Where
Pci and T2i is the Pc and T2 value at the ith value in the T2 array.
The results are in psi units. If the output units for the Pc curve is not psi then the
results are converted to the selected output units
The calculation of the Sw height curve is done by first calculating the capillary pressure at a depth
and then using this to look up the saturation in the Pc curve which have been created from the T2
distribution.
'Nmr to PC Offset' : This is the Pc offset calibration parameter in the above equation.
'Nmr to PC Gain' : This is the Pc gain calibration parameter in the above equation.
'FWL TVDss' : Free water level used to calculate the height above contact used in the
Sw height Pc calculation.
'Water Density' : Density of the water used in the Pc height calculations. The units for
this are set at the base of the input tab.
'Hyd Density' : Density of the hydrocarbon used in the Pc height calculations. The units
for this are set at the base of the input tab. If a curve is entered here to try and account
for a variable hydrocarbon density its values at a depth must be the average
hydrocarbon density of the hydrocarbons below this depth (i.e. the program does not
integrate the hydrocarbon curve).
'Permeability' Tab
The 'Permeability' tab allows the calibration of the 'Timur / Coates' equation constants. Some
external source of permeability data must be available to do this.

The user must enter the input curves for 'Porosity', 'Bound fluid', 'Free fluid' and 'Permeability'.
The first three of these input curves would normally be the output from the NMR porosity
calculations.
The 'zone to work on' is selected from the 'Zone to use' drop-down box. When a zone is chosen,
the current values for the 'a', 'b' and 'c' coefficient constants for that zone will be displayed in the '
a', 'b' and 'c' coefficient boxes.
The user can calibrate the equation to the input permeability data by 'clicking' the 'Calculate
Coefficients' button. The 'a', 'b' and 'c' coefficients will be computed and displayed. The 'Fix'
check boxes allow the user to fix a coefficient to a value and then calculate the other coefficients.
It is possible to fix two coefficients and calculate the third. The 'Defaults' button will return all
coefficients to the default values.
The 'Update Parameters' button will copy the current parameters to the currently-selected zone
and then re-run the NMR permeability. If, the 'Zone to use' is changed to 'All' before the 'Update
Parameters' button is 'clicked' then, when the 'Update Parameters' button is 'clicked', the

constants will be copied to all zones.
The 'Make Crossplot' button will create a crossplot of the NMR permeability versus the input
permeability. This will allow the user to see how well the calibrated permeability fits the known
input permeability. An example of the crossplot follows.
'Pc Calibration' Tab

The 'Pc Calibration' tab allows the calibration of the T2 Pc equation. T2 is converted into Pc
using the following equation :
Where
Pci and T2i is the Pc and T2 value at the ith value in the T2 array. The Pcgain and Pc
offset parameters are the calibration parameters.

The calibration is done by matching a T2 distribution to a real Pc curve that has been loaded into
IP. The Pc curve is converted to a pore radius distribution and overlaid with the raw T2 curve and
the calibrated T2 curve.
The conversion of the Pc curve to a pore radius distribution makes assumptions about the contact
angle and interfacial tension and is only approximate but is adequate for the calibration since its
absolute value is not necessary, as long as we know how to go back and forward from capillary
pressure to Pore radius. The equation used is :
Where
Pc pressure is in units of Psi.
The Pc curve Sets are selected in the top panel. The 'Pc Use Curve', which is optional, is the
same flag curve used in the Capillary pressure module to flag bad points inside a Pc curve. Once
the Pc curve Set is selected the depths of the individual curves found will be shown in the 'Pc
Curve Depth' box. The user selects the depth of the curve wanted. The curve will be displayed in
the calibration graph. The T2 distribution, also displayed in the calibration graph, can be selected
by changing the depth value in the 'T2 Depth box'. It is possible to use a different depth for the
T2 distribution and the Pc curve.

The graphic Y axis will by default be a normalized pore volume. The T2 and Pc curves being
normalized separately. The normalization adjusts the Y axis values so that when all are summed
they add up to 1.0. If the Y axis Sw values box is ticked the Y axis is converted to water
saturation. The X axis stays the same.
The calibration can be done either as a one point shift where the Offset parameter is changed
and the gain is fixed at 1.0 or a two point calibration where the gain and offset are adjusted.
For the calibration to be meaningful the T2 distribution should be from a water zone. Oil or
gas zones will affect the T2 signal in the long wait times making their values meaningless as far
as a comparison to a Pc curve. If calibrating in an oil or gas zone the late part of the T2
distribution should be ignored and the calibration done only near the irreducible water part of the
Pc and T2 curves.
The calibration is performed by clicking on the Calibrate button. This will display on the graph
two or four vertical lines. Two lines for the one point and four for the two point calibration. The
lines are labeled and mark the start and end point of the shift required for the calibration. The
user can interactively adjust the point positions by placing the cursor on a line and dragging the
line to a new position.
One Point Calibration

The one point calibration can either calibrate the pore entry pressure point, i.e. the late T2 times
corresponding to the largest pores (this will only be valid in a 100% wet T2 distribution). Or
calibrate in the irreducible water saturation point, i.e. the early T2 times corresponding to the
bound water.
The following example is calibrated in the late T2 times to match the Pc pore entry pressure.

To calibrate at the irreducible end, the Y axis as Sw display may be more useful. Here we are
trying to match the plateau seen in T2 distribution to the irreducible Sw seen in the Pc curve.

Two Point Calibration

The two point calibration allows both end points to be calibrated at the same time. Remember the
T2 distribution is only valid in a water zone for the large pores.

Using the calibrations

To use the calibration to make the Pc curve from the T2 distribution the calibration parameters
need to be copied into the NMR zonal parameter table. This is done by clicking the Update
Parameters button. The parameters will be copied into the zone displayed in the 'Zone' box. If
All is chosen then the same calibration parameters will be copied into all zones.
It will probably be necessary to have different sets of calibration parameters for different rock
types. This can either be done by zoning the well into different intervals or using trend curves as
the calibration parameters. The trend curves values could be created in a user formula using a log
facies curve to select the calibration parameters, which could be created in this module from
different Pc curves selected by facies.
'Pc Crossplot' Tab

The 'Pc Crossplot' tab allows the viewing of the T2 Pc curves inside the crossplot module. Since
a Pc curve will be created at each depth step the options allow for a subset of the available curves
to be displayed.
By default the NMR Pc curves are selected for display but the module could be used to display
any PC curves.

Print
The 'Print' button will allow the parameters used in the interpretation to be output to a printer or a
disk file. An example printout is displayed below.
NMR PARAMETERS
NMR PARAMETERS
Well : Test CMR 3.5
Date : 09/22/2008 17:57:16
Input
T2 array : T2_norm Tool Type : Schlumberger CMR-Plus (3
NMR Phi Cal. Curve : CMRP T2 Start time : 0.3
T2 Stop time : 3000. Times are mid pnts : No
Rt : ILD Temperature : Temp
Total Porosity : Fnl:PHIT Clay Volume : Fnl:VWCL
Output Curves
NMR effective porosity : nmrPhie NMR total porosity : nmrPhiT
NMR capillary bound fluid : nmrBFE NMR Total bound fluid : nmrBFT
NMR free fluid : nmrFF NMR clay bound water : nmrCBW
NMR Swe irreducible : nmrSwiE NMR SwT irreducible : nmrSwiT
NMR Sw bound : nmrSwb NMR permeability : nmrPerm
Bound Fluid total cutoff : nmrBFTc Bound Fluid eff. cutoff : nmrBFEc
Bound Fluid total Tapered : nmrBFTt Bound Fluid eff. Tapered : nmrBFEt
NMR SwT : nmrSwT NMR SwT unlimited : nmrSwtU
NMR SwE : nmrSw NMR SwE unlimited : nmrSwU

Final effective porosity : Phie_f Final total porosity : PhiT_f

Final clay bound water : CBW_f NMR BVW : BVW_f
NMR BVWT : BVWT_f NMR Rw apparent : nmrRwapp
NMR z wet : nmrZwet NMR z Swi : nmrZswi
NMR z : nmrZ Sw Logic flag : nmrLogic
T2 free cutoff : T2cutoff T2 bound cutoff : CBFT2cut
NMR Pc pressure : nmrPc NMR Pc Sw : nmrPcSw
NMR Sw Height : nmrSw_Ht NMR phi Bin 1 : nmrPhiB1
NMR phi Bin 2 : nmrPhiB2 NMR phi Bin 3 : nmrPhiB3
Zone number 1 Top : 4735.50 Bottom : 4914.50

Free Fluid Cut : 25. Cly B Fluid Cut : 2. Perm Const : 13081.98047
Perm FF/BF Exp : 2.3012 Perm Phi Exp : 4. BF Method : T2 cutoff
Tapered Constan : Sand "a" factor : 1. "m" "n" Method : Z Function
Z Slope : 0.87746 Z offset : 1.30172 Rw : 0.256
Rw Temp : 60. Rwb Method : Function Phi Method : NMR
Swi Limit : 0. FF Sw Limit : 0.005 Phi Sw Limit : 0.
CBW Sw Limit : 1. CBF Method : NMR nmr to PC Offse : 3.
nmr to PC Gain : 1. FWL TVDss : 4850. Water Density : 1.
Hyd Density : 0.7

Free Fluid Cut : 25. Cly B Fluid Cut : 2. Perm Const : 13081.98047
Perm FF/BF Exp : 2.3012 Perm Phi Exp : 4. BF Method : T2 cutoff
Tapered Constan : Sand "a" factor : 1. "m" "n" Method : Z Function
Z Slope : 0.877 Z offset : 1.3 Rw : 0.2
Rw Temp : 60. Rwb Method : Function Phi Method : NMR
Swi Limit : 0. FF Sw Limit : 0.005 Phi Sw Limit : 0.
CBW Sw Limit : 1. CBF Method : NMR nmr to PC Offse : 3.
nmr to PC Gain : 1. FWL TVDss : 4850. Water Density : 1.
21.9.1 NMR Interactive Plot

By 'clicking' the 'Make Plot' button the user can select two interactive log plots. A 'QC
comparison Plot' for viewing the NMR data or an 'Interpretation Plot' for displaying calculated
results for permeability and water saturations.
QC comparison Plot
An example NMR QC comparison plot is shown below:

On the above plot, Track 2 contains the zoning scheme for the cut-off and permeability
parameters. By right mouse 'clicking' in the track, new zones can be created. This
functionality is identical to the interactive zone functionality seen in other 'interpretation'
modules.
Track 'Swi' contains an overlay plot of Sw from the petrophysical analysis and SwiT
(irreducible) calculated from the NMR (see NMR equations).
Track 'Phi Bins' contains the porosity bin results (if set up).
Track 'Comparison' is a quality control track which compares the input logging
company's NMR porosities against the IP-calculated porosities. This can be used to
check that the correct start and stop T2 time have been set and that the results
generated for free fluid match the logging company's free fluid with the same T2 cut-off.
Track 'NMR Phi' gives the breakdown of the clay-bound (if used), capillary-bound and
free fluid volumes as seen by the NMR.
Track 'Movable Fluids' will give a display of the volumes of bound water, movable water
and hydrocarbon seen in the rock, if a BVW (bulk volume water) input curve is entered.
Track 'T2' displays the NMR T2 waveform with the interactive T2 cut-offs for free fluid
and clay bound fluid (if set up). To change a cut-off value 'click' on the cut-off line and
drag it to a new value. While dragging, the value will be displayed in the bottom left
corner of the log plot. Once the mouse button is released the porosities and
permeabilities will be instantly recalculated and the plot re-displayed.
Interpretation Plot
An example NMR Interpretation plot is displayed below.

Track 'Swi' contains the nmrSwiT (irreducible) calculated from the NMR; the water
saturation calculated from NMR porosities and input resistivities nmrSwT; the saturation
height curve calculated from T2 Pc curves using the entered FWL.
Track 'Phi Bins' contains the porosity bin results (if set up).
Track 'NMR Phi' gives the breakdown of the clay-bound (if used), capillary-bound and
free fluid volumes as seen by the NMR.
Track 'Resistivity' contains the input resistivity Rt curve. By right mouse clicking in the
track an interactive Pickett plot can be displayed either Rt / Phie or Rt / PhiT. See the
PhiSw module for more information on the working of these Pickett plots.

Track 'Salinity' displays the Rw apparent curve nmrRwapp which is calculated from
PhiT and Rt assuming the interval is wet. The track contains a Rw and Rwb interactive
line. These can be moved by clicking and dragging to a new value.
Track 'Z param' displays the Dual Water Z parameters. nmrZswi is the Z factor
assuming the zone is at irreducible water saturation. nmrZwet is the Z factor assuming
the zone is 100% wet. The nmrZ curve is the calculated Z parameter. The nmrZ curve
will normally fall between the two other curves except when the interval calculates over
100% Sw in this case the curve will be greater than the nmrZwet curve.
The track contains Z wet and Z irreducible interactive lines. These can be moved by
clicking and dragging to new values. Z wet should be adjust to overlay nmrZswi in a clean
wet zone and Z irreducible should be adjusted to indicate minimal free water in a zone
assumed to be at irreducible conditions. For further details on the Z function please refer
to the 'NMR Equations'.
Track 'Logic' the nmrLogic curve displays the special logic results from the Sw
calculations. A value of 0.0 means the calculations were made with no limit logic being
applied. See 'NMR Equations' for the values.
Track 'Sw. The track displays the nmrSwtU curve which is the SwT unlimited (not
clipped between 0.0 and 1.0) from the Dual Water saturation equation. The nmrSwU
curve is the equivalent Sw effective curve calculated from the SwT and Swb results,
again unclipped. The nmrSwb curve is calculated from the NMR clay bound water. The
unclipped Sw curves are displayed rather than the nmrSwT and nmrSw curves so that
the user can see any overshoots from 100% values.

Track Porosity will give a display of the volumes of bound water, movable water and
hydrocarbon seen in the rock.
Track Perm shows the NMR permeability and Core Permeability (if setup).
Track T2 displays the NMR T2 waveform with the interactive T2 cut-offs for free fluid
and clay bound fluid (if set up). To change a cut-off value 'click' on the cut-off line and
drag it to a new value. While dragging, the value will be displayed in the bottom left-hand
corner of the log plot. Once the mouse button is released the porosities and
permeabilities and saturation will be instantly recalculated and the plot re-displayed.
21.9.2 NMR Equations

There are seven sections within this chapter on NMR equations and methodology.
Basic NMR Equations

NMR Tapered Cutoff
Dual Water Saturation Calculations
Limits
SwLogic Flag
Other Calculations
NMR T2 to Pc curve
Basic NMR Equations

NMR total porosity (nmrPHIT)
PhiT = Sum of the porosity in all the T2 bins.
NMR effective porosity (nmrPHIE)

Phie = Sum of all the bins above the T2 clay bound cut-off. If no clay bound cut-off is set
then this will be the sum of all the bins.
Clay bound fluid (nmrCBF)

CBF = PhiT Phie
Free Fluid (nmrFF)

FF = Sum of all bins above the capillary bound fluid cut-off. Or if the tapered method is
select a weighting factor is applied to each bin (see below).
Bound Fluid (nmrBFT)

BF = PhiT - FF
Bound Fluid effective (nmrBFE)

BFE = Phie - FF
Irreducible total water saturation (nmrSwiT)

Swi = 1.0 FF / PhiT = BFT / PhiT
Irreducible effective water saturation (nmrSwiE)

Swi = 1.0 FF / Phie = BFE / Phie
NMR permeability (nmrPerm)

Where 'a', 'b' and 'c' are the entered 'Timur / Coates' permeability constants.
If the 'Remove the Clay Bound fluid from the Coates Permeability calculation' has been
'checked' (see 'Output Curves' tab) then Phi will be substituted for PhiT in the equation.
The Phi or PhiT used in this equation normally come from the NMR, however, in gas zones the
NMR porosity will be too low. In these circumstances it is possible to change the Phi Method to
use an external porosity curve for the Sw and permeability calculations. The input curve is entered
as the zonal parameter (Phi In, Sw Logic / Limit tab).
NMR Tapered Cutoff

In some situations the standard cut-off method can underestimate the total bound water volume
and a tapered function can yield a more reliable result.
For example when the T2 distribution has a very narrow spectrum that can be easily fitted with a
single large exponential decay rate, i.e. a long T2 as would be the case in well sorted, coarse
grained, high porosity sandstone. In this situation a cut-off will often yield unreasonably low
bound water volumes, and sometimes even zero, which causes the computed permeability to be
erroneously high.
A tapered function, sometimes referred to as spectral function, addresses this by assuming that
each pore size will contain some bound water and assigning weighting factors to each pore size.
Small pores will have a large weighting factor as most of the water in a small pore will be bound,
and large pores will have a small weighting factor as most of the water in a large pore will be
mobile.
The equation for the tapered bound fluid is as follows:
Where
n = the number of bins in the input T2 distribution.
PHIi = the porosity associated with each bin in the input T2 distribution.
and Wi is the weighting factor associated with each bin given by:
Where
m = the input tapered function coefficient.
b = the input tapered function offset.
T2i = the T2 time associated with the ith bin in the input T2 distribution.
Based on a global core study of some 340 sandstone samples and 71 carbonate samples default
coefficients have been derived as follows:

Sandstones m= 0.0618 b=1

Carbonates m = 0.0113 b =1
(Coates et al, "A new characterization of bulk-volume irreducible using magnetic resonance",
paper QQ 38th Annual SPWLA Symposium 1977).
The module allows the user to select one of the two default constants or input their own.
Bound fluid effective for the tapered method is calculated as:
nmrBFEt = nmrBFTt nmrCBF
There are also situations when the total bound water volume derived from a tapered function can
be too low. For example, in a hydrocarbon bearing interval at irreducible water saturation, the
water signal may have a weighting factor of less than one associated to it by the tapered function
even though all of it is bound water. Hence, total bound water volume may more accurately be
taken as the maximum of the tapered and cut-off methods.
The module outputs both cutoff and tapered method bound fluids and the final answer used can
be set to one or the other or the maximum of the two.
Dual Water Saturation Calculations

The standard dual water equation is displayed below. The big advantage of using this equation
with the NMR is that one of the major uncertainties Swb is measured directly by the NMR (Swb =
CBF / PHIT). Also PhiT is directly measured and does not need to be calculated from other
porosity tools.
or
Where
Rw : Entered parameter. The program will convert to formation temperature.
Rwb : Either an entered parameter converted to formation temperature or
calculated from the following equation.
where T is in units of degF.
Swb : Calculated from NMR (Swb = CBW / PHIT) or if NMR CBW is not available
(older tools did not measure this) can be calculated from input PhiT curve or input
VCL curve. PhiT and VCL being calculated from traditional logs in other modules.
PhiT curve :

PhiT = Input PhiT Curve

CBW = PhiT nmrPhie
VCL curve :
CBW = VCL(input curve) x PhiTClay
PhiT = CBW + nmrPhie
PhiTClay = total porosity in 100% clay, entered parameter
PhiT : Normally nmrPhiT, but can be changed in gas zones to an external curve.
Set the Phi Method parameter to Phie Para or PhiT Para and enter the input
porosity curve under the Phi In parameter.
Rt : Entered input curve.
a : Archie a parameter.
m, n : Archie m and n parameters. These are not used if the m n Method
parameter is set to Z Function.
Sw effective is calculated from SwT using the following equation :
Z Function
The dual water equation can be rewritten as :
Where
If Z is plotted against Sw for a particular PhiT, 'm' and 'n' then a plot like this shown below is
produced:

The actual curve is plotted in blue however it can easily be seen that apart from very low Sws the
curve can be approximated very well by the linear curve in red. Z will always be the same as the
cementation factor 'm' when SwT = 1, at the left side of the plot.
The module allows the user to use this linear line as an alternative method of selecting m and n
and solving the equation.
If the parameter m n Method is set to Z function then Z will be calculated by the equation:
Where
'Z offset' is the parameter 'Z irreducible' and 'Z slope' is the difference between
the parameter 'Z irreducible' and 'Z wet'.
The 'Z irreducible' and 'Z wet' parameters can be picked from Interactive Plot (see 'NMR
Interactive Plot' section).
In order to help pick the 'Z irreducible' and 'Z wet' parameters theoretical Z curves are output for
the wet and irreducible conditions.
At SwT = 1, then this becomes

At irreducible, this becomes:
nmrZwet and nmrZswi can be considered as end-points in the Sw computation; they will overlay
each other where there is no free fluid, claystones and siltstones, and will separate with increasing
free fluid with nmrZwet kicking to the right (higher Z) and nmrZswi kicking to the left (lower Z).
The position of the computed Z between these two end-points is related to Sw, with increasing
resistivity, i.e. decreasing conductivity Ct, giving a lower Z and hence lower Sw.
The default values of 2.0 for 'Z wet' and 1.6 for 'Z irreducible' are reasonable values for most
clastics and frequently give reliable results. Users should exercise caution when adjusting these
parameters from the defaults.
The 'Z wet' parameter should be selected so that it overlays nmrZwet in a clean wet sand. This is
effectively the cementation exponent m and picking it is analogous to picking a wet trend on a
Pickett Plot. If you pick through the middle of the trend you will show some lobes of
hydrocarbons and if you pick the extreme right hand edge of the trend (higher Z) you will show no
hydrocarbons at all, i.e. SwU will be greater than 100%.
The 'Z irreducible' parameter should be selected so as to show minimal free water in a zone the
user believes to be at irreducible saturation. In a zone with very little bound fluid 'Z irreducible'
should be just a little lower than nmrZswi, i.e. to the left, and further to the left of 'Z irreducible'
as the bound fluid volume increases. 'Z irreducible' should not be picked to overlay nmrZswi as
'Z irreducible' corresponds to the offset in the straight line relationship where SwT = 0 in the
graph above, and Swi will not be zero.
Alternatively, a cross-plot of nmrSwT against nmrZswi for the zone believed to be at irreducible
can help in identifying the correct selection of 'Z irreducible'. If a straight line is projected from
the Z wet point at nmrSwT =1 on the right hand edge of the plot, down through the data believed
to be at irreducible, to the left hand edge where nmrSwT =0, the value of Z at this point is 'Z
irreducible'. The example below shows a plot from a 40ft sand where 'Z wet' was to taken as 2,
determined from a nearby wet sand, and 'Z irreducible' was determined as 1.7 from the
cross-plot.

The difference between 'Z wet' and 'Z irreducible' is the slope of the Z function and is effectively
a gain control on the computed Sw, i.e. how much reduction in Sw there should be for a given
increase in resistivity. Hence, caution needs to be used in selecting 'Z irreducible' to avoid being
overly optimistic. 'Z irreducible' is typically between 0.2 and 0.5.
If the Z function is not used for SW calculation the Z value is still calculated and output using the
fixed values of m and n.
The Z factor is limited to a minimum value of the nmrZswi. This limits the SwT calculation
to the nmrSwiT. This limit is applied regardless whether the Z function is used or not.
Limits
Several limits can be applied to restrain the final results to reasonable values.
'Swi Limit' : This limits the SwT calculated to a minimum of this value. Useful if
unrealistically low values of Sw are being calculated. Default value 0.0.
'FF Sw Limit' : This limit stops the calculation of SwT when the NMR is indicating so
little free fluid to make any calculation meaningful (FF < limit makes SwT = 1.0). Default
value 0.005.
'Phi Sw Limit' : This limit stops the calculation of SwT when the effective porosity is too
low to make any calculation meaningful (Phie < limit makes SwT = 1.0). Default value
0.0.
'CBW Sw Limit' : This limit stops the calculation of SwT when the clay bound water is
too high to make any calculation meaningful (CBF > limit makes SwT = 1.0). Default
value 1.0.
When any of the limits are invoked the Sw logic output curve will indicate which ones were used.
SwLogicFlag

The output curve SWLOGICFLAG is a logic flag curve. It can have one of the following values:
SWLOGI LOGIC
CFLAG
VALUE
1 The Z equation loop did not converge after 20 iterations
2 SwT curve has been clipped to the Sw irreducible (Swi) parameter
limit. The SwU and the SwTU curves have not changed.
3 SwT curve has been set to 1.0 due to the Free Fluid Volume being
below the limit.
4 SwT curve has been set to 1.0 due to the Effective Porosity being
below the limit.
5 SwT curve has been set to 1.0 due to the Clay Bound Volume
being above the limit.
8 SwT equation loop did not converge after 10 iterations.
For a normal execution of the program at any depth level, the SWLOGICFLAG should be zero.
Other Calculation
Rw apparent is calculated and displayed on the interactive log plot. It is calculated as follows :
Where
m = entered m parameter or if the Z function is being used
m = Zoffset + Zslope
Rwapp is converted to the temperature of the entered Rw Temp parameter or if this is not
entered left at formation temperature.
NMR T2 to PC curve
The theory about converting T2 distributions to Pc curves an be found in the SPE paper 81057
Deriving Capillary Pressure and Water Saturation from NMR Transversal Relaxation Times by J.
C. Glorioso.
The module outputs two array curves which contain the capillary pressure results.
nmrPC contains the pressures in units set by the user on the Output Curves tab.
nmrPcSw contains the water saturations associated with each Pc pressure.
The array curves will have the same dimensions as the T2 array curve.
In IP we convert the T2 to Pc using the following equation. The 'PCgain' and 'PCoffset'
parameters need to be found by calibrating results to an actual PC curve (see section on T2 to Pc
calibration).

The Pc Sw curve is calculated from T2 array values. The module assumes that the highest T2
time will be the 100% Sw value. From this value each T2 bin porosity is converted into a
saturation (BinPhi / PhiT) and subtracted from the previous value. The lowest T2 time will have
0% Sw.
The output Pc curves can be displayed in the crossplot module. The PC Crossplot tab allows
these to be easily setup.
Saturation Height Curve

The Pc curves can be used to calculate a saturation height curve. This is done by first calculating
a capillary pressure at a depth and then using this to look up the Sw value in the T2 PC curve.
Where
FWL : Entered parameter
TVDss : Entered curve
Density Water : Entered parameter
Density Hydrocarbon : Entered parameter
The Sw height curve is displayed in the 'Interpretation Plot'.
The values obtained by this method will only be as good as the calibration of the T2 to Pc curve.
This calibration will change with rock type. Hence it is highly recommended to use these results
with caution.

21.10 Cased Hole

The 'Cased Hole' log interpretation tools are included here.
The following tools are included under the 'Cased Hole' menu item:
'TDT Stand-Alone Sw analysis'

'TDT Time Lapse'
21.10.1 TDT Stand Alone

The 'TDT Stand Alone' module is used to calculate water saturation from thermal decay tools
(TDT) or any pulsed neutron tool that measures the formation capture cross section ('Sigma'). A '
Porosity' curve is needed as input. A 'Clay Volume' curve input is optional. These curves are
best taken from an open hole log analysis.
Section 21.10 Interpretation : Cased Hole

The results are very sensitive to clay volume due to the high value of sigma clay. It is therefore
important that a correct clay volume is entered into the module. The sigma curve can, in fact, be
used as a clay indicator in the 'Clay Volume' module (enter 'Sigma' as the user-defined linear
clay indicator). If no 'Clay Volume' curve is entered then clay volume is assumed to be 'zero'.
The 'Matrix Density Curve', if entered, is used to set the value of sigma matrix.
The 'Sw Open Hole' and 'BVW Open Hole' curves are optional choices and are only used as part
of the display in the Interactive Plot.
The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the Parameter Sets (See
Parameter Set Management). The working Parameter Set for this module is named : '
TDT_Stand_Alone' and type 'TDT_Stand_Alone'. This can be seen in the Edit Zones / Top sets
module.

The 'Zones' tab allows the user to create and edit the interpretation zones. This can also be done
on the interactive plot. It is also possible to lock zones using the 'Lock Zone' column. If this is
'checked' then the zone is grayed out in all tabs and the parameters for that zone cannot be
changed. This also applies to interactive parameter lines on the interactive plots.
To add a new zone, the user selects one of the old zones from the window. The user must click
on one of the three buttons 'Add Before', 'Add After', or 'Split Zone'. For the 'Split Zone' the
user must give the depth to split this zone. The 'Copy Zone #' box is used to select which zone to

copy the parameters from for the new zone to be created. It is possible to add a new zone, for
example, after zone 4 but copy the parameters from zone 1 into this new zone.
The 'Delete Zone' button allows the deletion of one or more zones. Select the zones to delete,
and click 'Ok'.
The 'Parameters' tab allows the user to change any of the input parameters. Column edits are
possible by clicking in a column header, the header will turn green and then any changes to any
parameter in the column will result in all the parameters in the column having the same value.
However, if a zone is locked then the zone won't update with the new value.
Parameters
Sigma Water : If formation water salinity is known, the sigma water value can be looked
up in most log chart books(Schlumberger Tcor-2) or use the 'Conversions 2' tab within
the 'Basic Log Analysis Functions' module. The value can also be picked interactively
from the 'SigWatApp' curve.
Sigma Hyd : The sigma hydrocarbon value can be looked up in most log chart books
(Schlumberger Tcor-1) or use the 'Conversions 2' tab within the 'Basic Log Analysis
Functions' module.
Sigma Clay : Sigma clay can be picked from the sigma curve in the shales. The
values can be chosen interactively on the log plot. It should be adjusted so that the '
SwTDTU' curve reads 1.0 in the wet shaley zones.
Sigma Sand : Sigma matrix for sandstone. This value will be used when the input
matrix density is 2.65 gm/cc (Default 4.3 CU).
Sigma Lime : Sigma matrix for limestone. This value will be used when the input
matrix density is 2.71 gm/cc (Default 7.1 CU).
Sigma Dol : Sigma matrix for dolomite. This value will be used when the input matrix
density is 2.85 gm/cc (Default 4.7 CU).

Matrix Den : Input matrix density used to control the sigma matrix. Will be ignored if
the 'Matrix Input' parameter is set to 'Curve'.
Matrix Input : Selects whether the matrix density is taken from an input curve or the '
Matrix Den' parameter.
Model Input : This selects the type of mineral mixture model that is used to calculate
sigma matrix. The options are 'SS-LS-DOL' which will use a
sandstone-limestone-dolomite model or 'SS-DOL' which will use a sandstone-dolomite
model.
Sigma Matrix: Sigma matrix is normally calculated from an input grain density curve.
However, the parameter 'Sigma Matrix' allows the user to enter a 'Sigma Matrix' value
(or curve) directly. When a curve or value is entered then the other matrix parameters
are greyed out.
Interactive Plot

The interactive plot is created by clicking on the 'Make Plot' button. Three interactive lines are
available to change parameters for 'Sigma Clay', 'Sigma Water' and 'Sigma Matrix'. The Sw and
BVW curves will only appear in the plot if they have been entered on the 'Curve' tab.
Track 4 contains the reconstructed Sigma curves, 'SigRec', 'SigRecWat', 'SigRecHyd' plus the
original Sigma curve. The yellow shading is between the sigma water ('SigRecWat') and the
sigma hydrocarbon ('SigRecHyd') reconstructed curves. The actual sigma should fall in the yellow
range if the parameters are all set correctly.

Undo/Redo
Sigma / Porosity Crossplot

If the user right mouse 'clicks' in track 3 and selects the 'Porosity / Sigma' crossplot the following
crossplot is displayed:

The scales may need to be adjusted. The overlay lines are created automatically when the Sw
calculations are run and are adjusted for sigma matrix, water and hydrocarbons. If any of the
sigma end-points are changed , then the crossplot will have to be re-launched in order to pick up
the changed overlay lines. The lines on the crossplot are constant Sw lines. Shale intervals are
normally plotted above the 100% Sw line.
Output Curves, Equations and Methodology

Sigma Matrix - 'SigMat'
RhoMat (matrix density) will either be taken from the input curve or from the input parameter,
depending on the Matrix Input chosen method.
If the 'Sandstone - Dolomite' method is chosen then
If the 'Sandstone - Limestone - Dolomite' method is chosen then

Water Saturation - 'SwTDTU'
'SwTDT' will limit the 'SwTDTU' curve to between 1 and 0.
Bulk Volume Water - 'BVWTDT'
Sigma Water Apparent - 'SigWatApp'
Reconstructed Sigma Curves - 'SigRec', 'SigRecWat', 'SigRecHyd'

These are QC type curves and are used to get a feel of the range of values to be expected for a
100% wet zone and a 100% hydrocarbon zone. The reconstructed open hole sigma curve should
fall between the wet and hydrocarbon curves.
Sigma Open Hole Reconstructed - 'SigRec'
Sigma Water Reconstructed - 'SigRecWat'
Sigma Hydrocarbon Reconstructed - 'SigRecHyd'

21.10.2 TDT Time Lapse

The 'TDT Time Lapse' module is used to calculate water saturation from differences between two
thermal decay tool (TDT) logs or any pulsed neutron tool logs that measures the formation
capture cross section ('Sigma'). An accurate 'Porosity' and original Water Saturation ('Sw Base')
curve is needed as input, which is best taken from an open hole log analysis.
The method uses the differences between the two sigma curves, run at different times, to
calculate the change in water saturation. Using this method the matrix properties of the rock do
not influence the results and much more accurate changes in water saturation can be calculated
in comparison to the TDT Stand Alone analysis.
The method relies on the changes in sigma being wholly related to changes in water saturation.
Hence, if different tool types are used for the different Sigma runs the tool difference must be
somehow normalized out before an accurate Sw change can be calculated.
The 'Sigma new' curve is the most recently run log. The 'Sigma Base' curve is the sigma curve
that represents the formation saturated with hydrocarbons as shown by the 'Sw base' curve. The '
Sigma Base' curve should be run on the well after completion before any water movement has
occurred.
Several sigma logging passes are usually made over the reservoir. These should be first depth
matched and then averaged before using the averaged value in this module. The Curve Average
module using the 'Lateral Averaging' option can be used for this.
The 'Clay Volume' and 'Porosity' input curve can be optionally used to set cut-offs for the
intervals to apply the analysis. This is useful for removing non-net intervals. The 'BVW Open Hole
' curve is optional and is only used in the automatic plot.
The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the parameter sets. See

Parameter Set Management. The working parameter set for this module is name : '
TDT_Time_Lapse' and type 'TDT_Time_Lapse'. This can be seen in the Edit Zones / Top sets
module.
on the interactive plot. It is also possible to lock zones using the 'Lock Zone' column. If this is
'checked' then the zone is grayed out in all tabs and the parameters for that zone cannot be
changed.

copy the parameters from for the new zone to be created. It is possible to add a new zone, for
example, after zone 4 but copy the parameters from zone 1 into this new zone.
The 'Delete zone' button allows the deletion of one or more zones. Select the zones to delete,
and click OK.

possible by clicking in a column header, the header will turn green and then any changes to any
However, if a zone is locked then the zone won't update with the new value.
Parameters
Sigma Water : If formation water salinity is known, sigma water value can be looked up
in most log chart books (Schlumberger Tcor-2)
Sigma Hyd : The sigma hydrocarbon value can be looked up in most log chart books
(Schlumberger Tcor-1).
Phi Cutoff : If the input value of porosity is less than this value the interval is
considered as non reservoir and the 'Delta Sw TDT' output
curve will be 0. Set to 0 to disable this option.
Vcl Cutoff : If the input value of clay volume is greater than this value the interval is
considered as non reservoir and the 'Delta Sw TDT'
output curve will be 0. Set to 1 to disable this option.
Default Plot

The default plot is created by clicking of the 'Make Plot' button. There are no interactive lines on
the plot.
Equations and Methodology

Delta Sw - 'DltSwTDT'

Cut-offs
Sw time lapse - 'SwTDTU' and 'SwTDTU'
'SwTDT' will be the same as 'SwTDTU' except it will be clipped between 0 and 1.0.
Bulk Volume Water - 'BVWtdt'

Section
22
Advanced Interpretation
22 Advanced Interpretation
A number of Modules are grouped under the banner of 'Advanced Interpretation'. The following
modules are included :
'Mineral Solver'
'Monte Carlo Uncertainty Analysis'
'Batch Monte Carlo'
'Fuzzy Logic'
'Multiple Linear Regression'
'Neural Networks'
'Cluster Analysis for Rock Typing'
'Principal Component Analysis'
'Fluid Substitution'
Shear Sonic QC/Create
Density Estimation
Fluid Substitution
Laminated Fluid Subs
Elastic Impedance
'Pore Pressure Calculations'
Density Estimation
Overburden Gradient Calculation
Run Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient calculations
'Saturation Height Modeling (Capillary Pressure)'
Capillary Pressure Setup
Cap. Pressure Functions
Saturation Vs. Height Curves
Section 22. Advanced Interpretation :

Senergy Advanced Interpretation 1021
'Saturation Height modeling (Log Curves)'

Log Sw Vs. Height Functions
'Eastern European Resistivity Corrections'
Section 22. Advanced Interpretation :

22.1 Interactive Mineral Solver

The interactive 'Mineral Solver' module is used to solve for mineralogy, porosity and fluid
saturations in a well. The Mineral Solver modules comprise the Mineral Solver Preprocessor
tool and the Mineral Solver model interfaces.
The user enters:
a 'Mineral' or 'Rock' model of the formations penetrated,

the logging tools / equations / constants to be used, and
the parameters relating the tool equations to the Mineral model.
The program will then try to solve the system of equations to find the most probable Lithology /
Fluid result for each depth step in the well. This is traditionally called a 'Probabilistic
Interpretation'.
22.1.1 Mineral Solver Overview

The interactive 'Mineral Solver' module is used to resolve mineralogy, porosity and fluid
saturations in a single reservoir or multiple reservoir zones within a wellbore. It can also be used
for cased hole calculations using input sigma curves.
The user enters:
Section 22.1 Advanced Interpretation : Interactive Mineral Solver

The different 'Mineral' or 'Rock' models of the formations drilled,

the logging tools to be used, and
the parameters relating the tool equations to the Mineral models.
The program will then try to solve the system of equations to find the most probable result for
each layer in the well. This is traditionally called a 'Probabilistic Interpretation'. The workflow
used for this type of 'Probabilistic Interpretation' in IP is as follows.
1. Create 'Mineral Models' that describe the main minerals and fluids in the rock column.
For a Carbonate / Oil reservoir such a model could include : Limestone, Dolomite,
Anhydrite, Clay, Oil and Water.
2. Select the Logging tools (Equations) that are available in the well and add these to the
model. The user should input at least the same number of tools (equations) as there are
minerals and fluids in the model.
3. Enter the 'equation end-points' (100% mineral readings) for each mineral. For
example, 100% Calcite density would be 2.71 g/cc, for 100% fresh water the density
would be set to 1.0 g/cc.
4. Enter the 'weighting factor' for each equation. This is the relative importance of one
equation to another. For example, the density tool is generally considered to provide a far
more accurate measurement of porosity than the sonic tool. Hence, the weighting on the
density should be higher.
5. The Model is run and the 'reconstructed' tool responses are compared to the original '
input' tool responses. The results are presented in a log plot view.
6. The user adjusts the 'end-point parameters' and / or Mineral model to give the best
possible reconstruction.
One often finds that a single Mineral Model is not sufficient to describe all the formations present
in a well. For example, one model is needed for a carbonate interval, another for a clastic interval.
Special models are often required for zones of bad-hole conditions, where some of the logging
tools are not reading valid values.
For multiple Mineral Model interpretations the typical workflow is extended as follows :
7. Each Mineral model is individually set up and adjusted to give the best results for the
depth interval to which it applies.
8. The separate Mineral models are combined to give a final 'Combined Result'. The
models are combined on a zonal basis, using a 'Mixing Routine'. The 'Mixing Routine'
allows the use of logic statements to decide which model should be used for the '
Combined Result'. Mixing routines can be as simple as setting a single model over a
zone or more complex - for example, using multiple logic statements to determine which
model to use for each individual depth level.
9. When making the final combined plot it is now possible to smooth the transition between
models using the 'Mdl Merge Dist' function.
Fluids
Most logging tools that respond to lithology read quite shallow and are normally assumed to read
in the flushed zone close to the borehole wall. The normal way to set up a Miner Solver model is
to include in the model only the fluids in the flushed zone. The Sw value is calculated after the
model has been resolved from the porosity and deep resistivity curve.
However, it is possible to run the Mineral Solver with both flushed zone fluids and un-invaded
zone fluids in the same model. This allows the user to then specify for each input tool whether the

tool reads in the flushed zone, the un-invaded zone or somewhere in between the two. This can
become important for tools like the neutron, which read somewhat deeper than the density and
hence can need more correction for hydrocarbon than what is calculated in the flushed zone.
22.1.2 User Interface

User Interface
The 'Mineral Solver' user interface comprises 2 modules:
the 'Preprocessor' module

the 'Mineral Solver' module
Mineral Solver Preprocessing

The Mineral Solver 'MinSolve Preprocessing' module consists of two tabs.
'General' - this allows the user to calculate :
'Volumetric Cross Section' ('U') curve from inputs of density and PEF curves
'U' is calculated from the equation
U = Pef x (RHOB + 0.1883) x 0.93423
'Conductivity' ('Ct' and 'Cxo') curves from input Rt and Rxo curves.
'Dry Weight to Volume Conversion' - this performs :

Elemental volume fractions conversion from mineral dry-weight fractions .

Dry weight fractional data from XRD core analysis, can be converted to mineral
volume fractions and used as input to the Mineral modelling.
XRD Weight % to Volume % Conversion

Core X-ray diffraction mineral analysis data is usually provided by core laboratories in 'weight
percent of the dry fraction' of the rock. In order for this data to be used in the 'Mineral Solver'
module it should be converted into a 'wet volume percent'. This conversion is performed here.
The conversion is controlled by the following equation :
Wet Vol % = (Dry Weight %) x (1 Porosity) x (Rock Grain Density) / (Mineral Grain
Density)
The 'Rock Grain Density' and 'Porosity' can be taken from the routine core analysis results. The
'Mineral Grain Density' will be fixed for a particular mineral and can be found in the standard Log
chart book reference tables ( See Useful Links). The 'Porosity' part of this correction is usually
the most important input and, if the 'Mineral Grain Density' is not known exactly - for example in
clay, then a good estimate is generally quite satisfactory.
The user must load XRD weight % curves, for example, from an XRD analysis results
spreadsheet, as illustrated below, together with the Grain Density (GDen) and Porosity (CPor)
curves.
In the 'Dry Weight to Volume Conversion' tab, the user sets up the XRD mineral 'Weight %'
curves and the appropriate Porosity and Grain Density curves and fills in the names for the output
'Mineral Volume Curves'. The 'Input Mineral Density' values for many common minerals are
stored in an external file, MINDEF.PAR, located in the IP program directory. The user has three
options for filling in the 'Mineral Density' data:

You can either;

Take the presented 'default' density value for a mineral, or
Manually type in a new value for an existing mineral, or
If the mineral is not in the list, type in an appropriate density value.
The Pre -Processor settings can be saved to an external 'Mineral Solver Preprocessor' ASCII
file (.mpp) for later recall.
'Click' the 'Run Tab' button to execute the calculations.
Mineral Solver
The 'modelling' interface to 'Mineral Solver' consists of a window with 4 'tabbed' sections. These
are :
'Curves' - allows the user to set the input curves used for Sw calculations and the
names of the output curves which are generated for each separate model and for the '

Combined Model'.
'Parameters' - contains input data which are mainly used for Sw calculations, with the
parameters arranged on 'sub-tabs' listed on a zone by zone basis. The tab also allows
the user to set options for the neutron and sonic equations.
'Models' - sets up the different 'Mineral Models' used in the interpretation.
'Mixings' - sets up the different 'Mixing Models' that can be used to generate the final
'Combined Result' model.
'Curves' Tab
Input curves
The input 'Temperature' curve is used to convert the input resistivity parameters, like Rw and
Rmf, to their downhole values.

The input Rt and Rxo curves are used to calculate Sw and Sxo. If these curves are not entered,
it is still possible to calculate Sxo inside the model using an Rxo conductivity curve or an EPT
TPL curve. If no Sw can be calculated, then Sw is assumed to be 1.0 and the Sxo result must
also be 1.0, unless the 'OBM ?' option (on the 'Parameters' - 'Sw Logic' sub-tab) is turned 'on'.
'Checking' the 'OBM ?' option forces Sxo <= Sw.
A 'No Calculation flag' curve can be used to turn off calculations over certain zones. When the
input 'Flag curve' is any value, other than Zero or Null Value (-999), then no calculations are
made over this depth level. In such 'No Calculation' zones, the water saturation curve results
are set to 1.0, porosity curves to 0.0 and mineral volumes to 0.0. This can be useful if zones
where no analysis is possible have been flagged using a different IP module and the user just
wants to turn off the module over these zones. An example for use would be over coal beds
which have been picked using the interactive curve splice.
Output Curves
The output curves are created for each Model and for the 'Combined Model'. No Set names
should be included with the curve names. The output curves will automatically be put into the
appropriate curve Set for the model that is being run.
Some of the result curves are only calculated for particular water saturation equations, for use in
some of their special interactive plots. If a curve is not needed as an output, the user can delete
the curve name from the 'Output Curves' list and it will not appear in the result curve Sets.
In addition to these output curves, each model will output the model mineral volumes and fluid
volumes and the reconstructed input curves (***_re) together with the input curve uncertainties
curves (***_me) 'minus error' and (***_pe) 'plus-error', where '***' is the input curve name.
'Parameters' Tab
The 'Parameters' tab is used to enter parameters for all Models. There are 5 'tabbed' pages for

entering the parameters. These are:
'Zones / Mixings'
'Waters Clays'
'Sw Logic / Limits'
'Sw Params'
'Sonic /Neutron'
The 'Temp. input Units' list box in the middle panel of the form (shown above) is used
to set the temperature units for the resistivity temperature parameters entered on the '
Waters Clays' tab.
The 'New zone' button: This is used to create a new parameter zone. On 'clicking' the '
New zone' button, the following window will appear. It is also possible to create a new
zone interactively from the 'Mineral Solver' interactive plots.
To add a new zone, the user selects (highlights) one of the existing zones in the window. The user
must then 'click' on one of the three buttons 'Add Before', 'Add After' or 'Split Zone'. For the '
Split Zone', the user must give the depth to split the highlighted zone. The 'Copy Zone #' box is
used to select the zone from which to copy the parameters for the newly-created zone. It is
possible to add a new zone, for example, after Zone 2 and to copy the parameters from Zone 1
into this new zone.
Once a new zone has been created, the user must select the zone depths in the parameter
window on the 'Zone Depths' tab. Zone depths must not overlap, but there can be gaps between
zones.
The 'Delete zone' button on the Parameters window allows the user to delete one or

more zones from the list. Select the zones to delete and click 'OK'.
The 'Null combined model result curves' check box. This option, if 'checked' will set
all 'Combined Model' result curve values to the null value (-999). This allows the user
to further tune individual models and experiment with the Mixings criteria in order to
generate the best probabilistic reconstruction.
Column Edits
If the user wants to set all the parameters in one column of the 'Parameters' screens to the same
value, then 'click' in the 'Header Title' box of the column. This will turn the column header box to
green as shown below. Now, any one parameter that is changed in that column will change all the
parameters in the column to this same value. To turn the column edit 'off', 'click' the column
header again and its colour will return to grey. Column edits remain active while the well stays
loaded in memory. They have to be reset, if required, the next time the well is loaded. The
following shows a column edit turned on for the 'Rw' parameter on the 'Waters Clays' tab.
(Parameters) 'Zones / Mixings' Sub-Tab
'Zone Name' : Optional zone name.

'Zone Top' : Top of current zone.

'Zone Bottom' : Bottom of current zone.

'Lock Zone' : This column allows the user to lock zones within the module. After a zone
has been 'checked' then in all the tabs that zone is 'grayed' out.
'Zone Mixing' : Model 'mixing' scheme to be used for this zone. Set up on the 'Mixings'
tab.
'Mdl Merge Dist' : If the 'Mdl Merge Dist' parameter is not zero then a smooth transition
between the two models will be made where the transition will be the 'Mdl Merge Dist'.
For example, if the 'Mdl Merge Dist' is set to 2.0' in a 0.5' step Set then the transition
will occur over 4 samples. Assuming the transition is from Mdl1 to Mdl2 then the first
depth step of the transition will take 20% of the volumes from Mdl1 and add those to
80% of Mdl2. The second step will take 40% of Mdl1 and 60 % of Mdl2. The third step
will take 60% of Mdl1 and 40% of Mdl2 and the fourth step will take 80% of Mdl1 and
20% of Mdl2.
Porosity, BVW, Sw, Sxo and Vcl along with mineral volume curves are transitioned
between models. The combined reconstructed curves will not be transitioned and will
be as if the 'Mdl Merge Dist' is set to 0.0 (i.e. off). The 'Model_Num' output curve will
now be an array curve with a 'X' dimension as the number of models in the analysis.
Each 'X' dimension represents the amount of contribution the model makes to the final
result. The 'X' columns will be in the same order as the models are created.
The above plot shows three models being mixed to a final combined result. The 'Mix' track shows
where each model is being used. The brown bars indicate the model being used. The 'Mdl Merge
Dist' is set to 0.0 and no transitioning is used.

In the above plot the 'Mdl Merge Dist' is set to 2.0 and a 4 depth step transitioning is used. The '
Mix' track colours indicate the percentage amount of each model used at a depth.
The 'Model_Num' output curve displays the percentages of each model at a depth level. The
columns will always add up to 1.0 (100%) at each depth level.
The calculations are made by first setting each column in the array with either a 1 (model selected
at depth level) or 0 (model not selected). Then the columns are filtered one at a time using the '
Mdl Merge Dist' as the filter length and as a box filter. Finally, the array values are normalized at
each depth level so that they add up to 1.0.
(Parameters) 'Waters Clays' Sub-Tab

'Rw' : Formation water resistivity.

'Rw Temp' : Temperature associated with 'Rw'; Temperature units are set in the 'Temp.
input Units' box at the bottom of the 'Parameters' window. The program will convert the
'Rw' to formation temperature using the entered temperature curve. If the 'Rw Temp'
field is 'blank' then the 'Rw' will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and no
conversion will be performed.
'Rmf' : Mud filtrate resistivity.
'Rmf Temp' : Temperature associated with 'Rmf'; Temperature units are set in the '
Temp. input Units' box at the bottom of the 'Parameters' window. The program will
convert the 'Rmf' to formation temperature using the entered temperature curve. If 'Rmf
Temp' field is 'blank' then the 'Rmf' will be assumed to be at formation temperature, and
no further conversion will be performed.
'Rw bound' : Clay-bound-water resistivity. Used in the 'Dual Water' saturation equation
option. The value can be estimated from the 'Rw apparent' curve in the Shaly wet
sections. 'Rw bound' can be adjusted to give 100% Sw in these zones.
'RwbTemp' : Temperature associated with 'Rw bound'; Temperature units are set in the
'Temp. input Units' box at the bottom of the 'Parameters' window. The program will
convert 'Rw bound' to formation temperature using the entered temperature curve. If '
Rwb Temp' is 'blank' then 'Rw bound' will be assumed to be at formation temperature,
and no further conversion will be performed.
'Rmf bound' : Clay-bound-water resistivity in the flushed zone. Used in the 'Dual Water'
saturation equation option. Normally the same as 'Rw bound' but it can be different due
to the different response of the micro-resistivity curve to the deep resistivity curve in
Shaly zones. The value can be estimated from the 'Rmf apparent' curve in the Shaly
wet sections. 'Rmf bound' can be adjusted to give 100% Sxo in these zones.
'RmfbTemp' : Temperature associated with 'Rmf bound'; Temperature units are set in
the 'Temp. input Units' box at the bottom of the 'Parameters' window. The program will
convert 'Rmf bound' to formation temperature using the entered temperature curve. If '
Rmfb Temp' is 'blank', then 'Rmf bound' will be assumed to be at formation
temperature, and no further conversion will be performed.
'Res Clay' : Resistivity of the Clay. Used for the 'Simandoux', 'Modified Simandoux'
and 'Indonesian' water saturation equations. Can be chosen on the resistivity / Vclay
crossplot.
'Rxo Clay' : Resistivity of the Clay seen by the micro-resistivity tool. Used for the '
Simandoux', 'Modified Simandoux' and 'Indonesian' water saturation equations for
calculating 'Sxo'. Normally the same as 'Res Clay', but could be different due to the
different response of the micro-resistivity curve to the deep resistivity curve in Shaly
zones. Can be chosen on the Rxo / Vclay crossplot.
'PhiT Clay' : Total porosity of the Clay. Must be entered and greater than 0 unless '

Bound Water' is part of the Mineral Model. 'PhiT Clay' can be calculated from the
mineral volumes and output as an 'Output' equation curve. This curve can then be
entered as the 'PhiT Clay' parameter.
(Parameters) 'Sw Logic / Limits' Sub-Tab
'Saturation (Sat) Equation' :

Saturation equation. Used for calculation of Sxo and Sw. The following equations are available:
Archie
1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw)
Archie PhiT
1/Rt = PhiT**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw)
Same as Archie except PhiT used instead of Phie.
Simandoux
1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw) + Vcl.Sw / Rcl
Modified Simandoux
1/Rt = Phi**m.Sw**n / (a.Rw.(1-Vcl)) + Vcl.Sw / Rcl
Indonesian (Poupon-Leveaux)
1/Rt**.5 = ((Phi**m/(a.Rw))**.5 + Vcl**(1-Vcl/2)/Rcl**.5 ).Sw**(n/2)
Dual Water
1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n/a.(1/Rw + Swb/SwT(1/Rwb-1/Rw))
Juhasz
1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n.(1+Bn.Qvn/SwT)/(a.Rw)
Qvn = Vcl*PhiClay / PhiT
Bn = B normalized, entered parameter
Waxman-Smits
1/Rt = PhiT**m.SwT**n.(1+B.Qv/SwT)/(a.Rw)
B = entered parameter or calculated from T and Rw
Qv = a / PhiT + b
where 'a' and 'b' are entered parameters.

Qv can also be entered as a fixed parameter or an input curve.
'Sw Method' : Method for Sw calculation. Options are :

Rt : Sw calculated from Rt resistivity input curve.
Min Model : Sw will be calculated from the mineral model. It is assumed that the
model will output Sw (Hydrocarbon Volume un-invaded zone / Total Fluid
volume). If the model does not output an Sw, then Sw will be 1.0.
No Calc. : If set then Sw calculations will not be made. The following curves will
be set to a null value: Sw, Swu, SwT, SwTu and BVW. The 'Sxo Limit' logic will
not be used. The 'No Calc' options are designed to solve models where either
no Rt curve is available (eg. cased holes) or models where no hydrocarbons are
wanted.
'Sxo Method' : Method for Sxo calculation. Options are :
Rxo : Sxo calculated from Rxo resistivity input curve.
Min Model : Sxo will be calculated from the mineral model. It is assumed that the
model will output Sxo (Hydrocarbon Volume / Fluid volume). If the model does
not output an Sxo, then Sxo will be 1.0.
Inv Fac: If the 'Sxo Method' is set to 'Inv Fac' (invasion factor) then Sw will be
assumed to be 1.0 for the calculations.
No Calc. : If set then no Sxo calculations will be made. The following curves will
be set to null values: Sxo, Sxou, SxoT, SxoTu, BVWsxo. The 'No Calc' options
are designed to solve models where either no Rt curve is available (eg. cased
holes) or models where no hydrocarbons are wanted.
'OBM ?' : (Oil base mud ?) flag. If set to 'On' then the following logic is applied:
Sxo must be less than or equal to Sw. Invasion factor logic with OBM assumes
that Sxo <= Invasion factor. Therefore if the Invasion factor is set at 0.5 then Sxo
will be the minimum of 0.5 or Sw. The default value is 0.5.
'Sw Sxo Inv Logic' : This sets the Sw Sxo invasion logic. By default this is set to true.
When 'checked' on Sxo >= Sw in Water Based Mud and Sxo <= Sw in Oil Based Mud.
When 'un-checked' this logic is disabled along with the 'Sxo Limit' logic. Overall, this logic
can be used to model complicated invasion where the normal relationship between Sxo
and Sw no longer holds true. An example of the could be situations where the OBM breaks
down and the water fraction in the OBM invades.
'm vari wth Vcl' : Variable cementation factor 'm' with Vcl flag. Used for bad-hole with
the Vcl cut-off. If set to 'On' and If Vcl > Vcl cut-off then
m = m*10**(Vcl-Vcl cut-off).
This has the effect of removing any hydrocarbons in zones of high clay content.
'Vcl cut-off' : Vclay cut-off as a decimal fraction. If Vcl > Vcl cut-off and 'm vari wth Vcl
' flag is set then;
m = m*10**(Vcl-Vcl cut-off)
'Sxo Limit ?' : Limit Sxo flag. If set to 'On' then Sxo < Sw**SxoLimit.
'Sxo Limit' : Sxo limit exponent. If the 'Sxo limit' flag is set, then Sxo < Sw**SxoLimit.
The default value is 0.2.
'Invasion factor' : Invasion factor. This is used to calculate Sxo when no Sxo device is
available. For water based mud Sxo = (Sw + InvasionFactor) / (1 + InvasionFactor). For
Oil based mud Sxo = InvasionFactor.
'Phi Sw Limit' : When effective porosity PHIE < 'Phie Sw Limit' value, Sw and SwT

etc.. will be set to 1.0 (100%).

'Vcl Sw Limit' : When Volume Wet clay VWCL > 'Vcl Sw Limit' value, effective
porosity PHIE will be set to 0.0001, Sw, SwT etc... will be set to 1.0 (100%).
'Swi Limit' : The minimum value of Sw allowed. This limit is applied to the effective
water saturation Sw, if an effective Sw equation is used. The limit is applied to the total
water saturations if a total Sw equation is used. NOTE: this limit does not affect the
SwU or SwTu curves, just the Sw and SwT curves. If the Swi Limit has be used at a
depth level then the PhiFlag output curves is set at a value of 7.
(Parameters) 'Sw Params' Sub-Tab
'm source' : Source for Archie 'm' factor. Options are :

Parameter: Input from fixed parameter or enter an input curve.
Shell: Calculate from the Shell formula m = 1.87 + 0.019 / Phie
m*: m variable with Qv. Only available for Dual Water and W&S
equations.
Rxo and Ept: A variable 'm' is calculated from Rxo, using the Sxo calculated
from the EPT from the mineral model. The resultant 'm' value is limited by the
parameters 'min m value' and 'max m value'.
m*: Used only for the 'Waxman&Smits' and 'Dual Water' equations. A
variable m* is calculated.
m* = m + Cm(1.128 Y + 0.22 (1-e**(-17.3Y))) 'Waxman-Smits'
m* = m + Cm(0.258 Y + 0.20 (1-e**(-16.4Y))) 'Dual Water'
Y = Qv PhiT / (1 - PhiT)
where Cm is an input parameter
Qv = a/PhiT + b
where 'a' and 'b' are entered parameters. Qv can also be entered as an
input curve.
'n source' : Source for Archie 'n' factor. Options are :
Parameter : Input from fixed parameter or enter an input curve.
Rxo and Ept : A variable 'm' is calculated from Rxo, using the Sxo calculated
from the EPT from the mineral model. 'n' is set equal to the resultant 'm' plus the
parameter 'm plus value'.
n = m + mPlus
'a factor' : Archie equation 'a' factor / tortuosity factor.
'm exponent' : Archie 'm' factor or cementation factor. Use when m source parameter is
set to 'parameter'.
'n exponent' : Archie 'n' factor or saturation exponent. Use when n source parameter is
set to 'parameter'.
'min m value' : minimum 'm' value when 'm' is calculated from Rxo and Ept.

'max m value' : maximum 'm' value when 'm' is calculated from Rxo and Ept.
'm plus value' : addition to variable 'm' to calculate 'n'. Used when 'n source' is set to
Rxo and Ept. n = m + mPlus.
'B fact Juhasz' :
B factor (equivalent conductance of clay cations) in the Juhasz Waxman-Smits
equation.
Default 1.0 meq/ml
Can be set interactively using the Cwa / Qvn crossplot.
'B fact W&S' :
B factor (equivalent conductance of clay cations) in the Waxman-Smits equation.
If left blank then this is calculated from formation temperature and Rw.
'Qv' :
Qv factor for Waxman-Smits or Dual Water (variable m*) equation can be a fixed
parameter or an input curve.
Qv can be calculated from the mineral volumes and output as an 'Output' equation
curve. This curve can then be entered as the Qv parameter.
If left blank then Qv is calculated from :
Qv = a / PhiT + b
Where 'a' and 'b' are the entered Qv 'a' and 'b' constant parameters.
'a' and 'b' can be selected interactively from the 1/PhiT QvApp crossplot.
'Qv 'a' Const' :
The 'a' Constant in the Qv equation :
Qv = a / PhiT + b
Used in the Waxman-Smits Sw equation.
'Qv 'b' Const' :
The 'b' Constant in the Qv equation :
Qv = a / PhiT + b
'Cm*' :
Used in the m* equation to vary the weighting factor of the variable m*. Default is
1.0.
m* = m + Cm(0.258 Y + 0.2 0(1 - e**(-16.4Y))) 'Dual Water'
m* = m + Cm(1.128 Y + 0.22 (1 - e**(-17.3Y))) 'Waxman-Smits'
(Parameters) 'Sonic / Neutron' Sub-Tab
'Sonic Equ' : Equation used for calculating sonic porosity. Options are :
Wyllie time average equation

Hunt Raymer equation

'Sonic Cp' : Wyllie equation compaction factor. Default 1.0
'Neu Form Sal' : Neutron formation salinity correction flag. Set to 'On' if you want the
program to make formation salinity corrections. The formation salinity correction
depends on true porosity and water saturation. If set to 'Off' then the neutron water
hydrogen index will be set to 1.0. If the neutron tool has already had formation
salinity corrections applied, then 'un-check' this option. It is better to have the
program perform the salinity correction, since it will take into account water saturation in
the flushed zone. This parameter will have no effect if the Neutron Water HI is not set to
'Auto'.
'Neu Log Cont' : Neutron logging contractor. Select the appropriate contractor from the
drop-down list.
'Neu Tool Type' : Neutron tool type. Select appropriate tool type from the drop-down list.
If a tool type cannot be found, and its response is significantly different to any other tool
type, it is possible for the user to create a new tool type and tool response parameter
file. See 'Porosity and Water Saturation' module. This parameter will have no effect if
the Neutron mineral end points for Sand, Limestone and Dolomite are not set to 'Auto'.
'Models' Tab
The 'Models' tab is the main window for setting up the 'Mineral Models'.
'Models' are created or viewed by 'clicking' the left and right arrow buttons at the top left hand
corner of the 'Models' window. Up to 20 models can be created and used together in a well.

The 'Model Name' can be typed into the 'Name' box. This is useful for reflecting the use of each
model. For example 'Main Sands', 'Bad Hole', 'Fulmar Sand', 'Reef' etc, depending on the
complexity of the geological section in the well under analysis. If the 'Model Name' is changed,
the user is prompted whether the long Set name should be changed to reflect the Model name.
The 'Result set' box will display the Set name that the results from the model will be written to.
The Set can be selected from the drop-down menu or a new Set can be created by clicking the '
Edit Sets' button.
The 'Add Global Set Names' window will display all the Set names in the current well and allow
the user to add a new Set name. The actual Set will only be created when the model 'Run' button
is clicked. The 'Full name' usually should reflect the model name and the 'Short' Set name, the
model numbers. However, the user has full control over naming conventions.
The Model Grid

The 'Model' grid is set up by specifying a set of 'minerals' across the top row of the window and a
set of 'equations' which are selected in the second-from-left-hand column in the window. For
each 'Mineral' and 'Equation' there will be an 'end-point parameter' (the result of the equation if
the rock was composed 100% of that mineral). The grid can be visualized as setting up a matrix of
linear equations, each equation being of the form :
Y = Min1 x Vol1 + Min2 x Vol2 + Min3 x Vol3 + Min4 x Vol4 .

Where
Y = Input tool value or fixed constant
Min1 - Min4 = Mineral end-point values for each mineral 1-4
Vol1 - Vol4 = Result volumes
Equation Columns (on the left hand side of the 'Models' window)
1. 'Curve / Val' : This is the 'Y' value of the equation. Enter either an 'input curve' name,
or a fixed value for 'constant', or, in the case of mineral volumes, the 'unity' equation'
which ensures that all mineral volumes, when modelled and summed, total 100%, or 1.
2. 'Equation' : This is the 'Equation' type. The 'Equation' type is used to decide what sort
of logic to use for the equation. For example the non-linear equations are recognised by
the 'Equation' type. NOTE: It is very important that this is set correctly, especially for
'Density', 'Neutron', 'U', 'Sonic', 'EPT' and the 'Conductivity' equations. The equations
are explained in more detail in the 'Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology' Section.
3. 'Eq. Mode' : the Equation Mode options are selected from the drop-down list. They are:

'Model' - The equation is used in the model for solving the mineralogy.
'<Limit' - The equation is a limit equation. The results of the mineralogy must be
less than the input 'Curve / Val'. This can be used for setting maximum limits for
resultant minerals or fluids.
'>Limit' - The equation is a limit equation. The results of the mineralogy must be
greater than the input 'Curve / Val'. This can be used for setting minimum limits
for resultant minerals or fluids.
'Output' - The equation is not used in the model, but the results of the
mineralogy is used to output a result curve. This can be used to output useful
curves that can be used to QC the interpretation (Grain Density) or intermediate
curves that are needed to calculate Sw's (Qv, Total Clay porosity). It can also be
used to create conventional logging curves that are missing in a well (e.g. sonic,
density etc).
4. 'Use' : The 'Use' column, if 'checked' for an 'Equation' row will mean that the equation
will be included in the model. If not 'checked', the equation will not be used. This is useful
for temporarily removing an equation from the model in order to see what effect this has
on the results.
5. 'Confidence' : The equation 'Confidence' sets the weighting factor for the equations.
The smaller the confidence number, the more the weight that will be attached to this
equation (exception to this is the resistivity equation). The values entered are in the
units of the equation. For example 'Density' confidence would be in gm/cc, 'GammaRay' in
API units. One can directly relate the confidence value to how accurate the reading of the
tool is, in terms of the response equation. 'Constant' equations also have confidence
numbers which again relate to the weighting on these equations. It is possible to enter an
input curve for the equation confidence. This will allow the user to change the confidence
for each database step interval. This can be useful, for example, in badly washed-out hole,
where the density equation / tool accuracy decreases markedly. Equation 'confidence
curves' can be created in other modules in IP (e.g. User Formula).
6. 'Inv. Fact.' : The 'Invasion Factor' sets the invasion depth of the equation. A value of
1.0 means the equation reads in the flushed (Sxo) zone and will be effected by fluids in
this zone. A value of 0.0 means the equation reads in the un-invaded (Sw) zone. Values
between 0 and 1 are possible and allows the equation to read partly in the flushed and
partly in the un-invaded zone. It is possible to enter a curve for the invasion factor. The
curve must have values between 0 and 1. This would allow the depth of invasion to be
controlled at a level by level basis.
Mineral Columns
A mineral is added to the grid by 'clicking' in an empty cell in the top 'Mineral' row of the grid.
Mineral parameters are then set up in the separate columns defined by the user. The 'Mineral', '
Type', 'Shading' and 'Use' rows are described below:
1. 'Mineral' : The 'Mineral' row entries define a label for each mineral in a model. The
mineral name is used for picking default properties for mineral end-points from the default
tables. The Mineral name can be selected from the drop-down list or a name can be
manually typed in. Names that are not in the drop-down list will not have any default
end-point values defined.
2. 'Type' : 'Type' can only be selected from the drop-down list. It can have values of :
'Water Sxo' - flushed zone water
'Bound Water'

'Hyd. Sxo' - flushed zone hydrocarbon

'Matrix'
'Wet Clay' or
'Dry Clay'
'Water Sw' - un-invaded zone water
'Hyd. Sw' - un-invaded zone hydrocarbon
This field is very important in calculating the Model results. The mineral 'Type' is used for
calculating porosity, water saturation and clay volume.
NOTE: The user cannot mix 'Wet Clay' and 'Dry Clay' types in the same model or 'Wet Clay' and
'Bound Water'.
This field is also used for telling the program whether a fluid is in the flushed zone 'Water Sxo'
and 'Hyd. Sxo' or is in the un-invaded zone 'Water Sw' and 'Hyd. Sw'. It is not necessary to
include un-invaded fluids in the model unless one of the input equations is set to read in the
un-invaded zone (Inv. Fact. < 1.0).
3. 'Shading' : This is used for the default Log Plots. It allows the user to specify how each
mineral will appear on the interactive log plot displays.
4. 'Use' : The 'Use' row, if 'checked' for a mineral column, will mean that the mineral will be
included in the model. If not 'checked', the mineral will not be calculated. This is useful for
temporarily removing minerals to see what effect this has on the results.
5. 'Result' : The 'Mineral Volume' output curve name.
Mineral End-Points
The 'Mineral End-Point' parameters need to be completed for all minerals and all equations.
Certain end-point parameters can be automatically calculated. If this is possible, then the
parameter entry cell will have a blue background colour. If 'Auto' is entered then the parameter
will be automatically calculated. If a 'value' is entered then that actual value will be used. In order
for the program to use the non-linear equations for the Neutron curve, the 'Calcite', 'Quartz' and '
Dolomite' parameters must be left at 'Auto'.
For the water minerals the 'Auto' option will mean that the density and HI of the water will be
calculated from the entered Rmf value (in the Parameter table) corrected for current depth and
temperature. For OBM or un-invaded zone water the value will be calculated from the Rw
parameter.

If the parameter entry cell background colour is green, then this will be a hydrocarbon-entry cell
and the entered value should be in down-hole true hydrocarbon density. The program will convert
the true hydrocarbon density to its tool response equivalent (i.e. for density - electron density and
for neutron - hydrogen index).
Any end-point value can be entered as a curve. This would allow 'Trend curves' created by the '
Interactive Trend curves' module, to be used to vary parameters on a level by level basis.
New Models
By selecting the 'Equation' type first, all the default mineral end-points will be automatically
entered in the table when 'Minerals' are selected. The program will also try to look up an
appropriate input 'Curve Name' for each equation. If a curve is not found, the user will have to
manually select the input curve. The Defaults for this list can be changed by editing the
MINEQDEF.PAR file found in the IP program directory or by selecting the menu item 'Tools' '
Defaults' Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults which launches the file in the
WINDOWS Notepad. The 'Equation' drop-down list contains the following options:

The 'Mineral Equation Defaults' (MINEQDEF.PAR) and 'Mineral System Defaults' (

MINDEF.PAR) files work together and allow the user to define new minerals with new default
values for the input equations.
'Mineral' names can be selected from a drop-down box in the topmost, 'Mineral', row of the
Model grid or the name can be typed in. The drop-down list is activated by 'clicking' in a 'Mineral'
cell. When the user highlights a Mineral and releases the mouse button, the Mineral is selected
and its default properties populate the appropriate column in the Model grid.

The minerals displayed in the drop-down box are pre-defined with default parameters for some
tools. The mineral defaults list can be changed or added to, by editing the MINDEF.PAR file found
in the IP program directory or by selecting the menu item 'Tools' 'Defaults' Edit Mineral
Solver Mineral System Defaults.
If the user wants to delete a line then changing the 'Equation' type to blank will do this.
Selecting a Depth Interval

The 'Depth interval' on the 'Models' tab is used to select the depths to run the current model
over, when the 'Run Model' button is clicked. The user inputs a top depth and bottom depth into
the appropriate boxes or uses the (...) button to select depths from a Parameter or Zone /Tops
Set.
These Model depths will be ignored when the 'Combined Model' is created using the 'Run' button
at the bottom of the 'Mineral Solver' window. In this case the intervals are taken from the '
Mineral Solver' parameter zones.
Options
When the 'Options' button is 'clicked', the following window is launched. This screen allows the
user to change various settings for how the model is run and results displayed. The separate
'panels' are described below:

Water Saturations
If the 'Automatically Add Sxo equation into Model' is 'checked' (default) then the Sxo
equation will be added into the model at run time. The Sxo equation looks like the
following :
0 = (Sxo-1)Vwater + Sxo *Vhydrocarbon1 + Sxo * Vhydrocarbon2 + ...
Where
Vwater : Volume of water flushed zone
Vhydrocarbon1 : Volume of first entered hydrocarbon flushed zone
Vhydrocarbon2 : Volume of second entered hydrocarbon flushed zone
Sxo : Calculated from entered Rxo curve using the selected Sw
equation
NOTE: if 'No Calc' has been set in the 'Parameters' 'Sw Logic' sub tab 'Sxo Method' then do not
'check' this option.
If the 'Automatically Add Sw equation into Model' is 'checked' then the Sw equation

will be added into the model at run time. This is used if un-invaded fluids have been
added into the model. If no un-invaded fluid are used then checking this will have no
effect.
The Sw equation looks like the following :
0 = (Sw-1)VwaterU + Sw *VhydrocarbonU1 + Sxo * VhydrocarbonU2 + ...
Where
VwaterU : Volume of water un-invaded zone
VhydrocarbonU1 : Volume of first entered hydrocarbon un-invaded zone
VhydrocarbonU2 : Volume of second entered hydrocarbon un-invaded zone
Sw : Calculated from entered Rt curve using the selected Sw
equation
NOTE: if 'No Calc' has been set in the 'Parameters' 'Sw Logic' sub tab 'Sw Method' then do not
'check' this
option.
The Sw and Sxo equation confidence can be set using the relevant boxes. The default value of
0.01 (1 saturation unit) gives good results normally.
Hydrocarbon Densities
By checking the boxes in this section the user can enter true hydrocarbon densities on the mineral
end-point parameter grid. For the neutron tool this will also allow a gas excavation factor
correction to be made.
Model Plot Options (Applies to all Models)

'Display reconstructed resistivity curves' : if 'checked', this option will add two more
tracks to the 'Model Plot', which will contain the input Rt and input Rxo curves with the
reconstructed Rt and Rxo curves superimposed. These reconstructions are not part of
the main equation solver and do not indicate how well the model end-point parameters
are set up. However, they do indicate how well the water saturation equation works,
especially in the water zones. In the hydrocarbon zones the curves should reconstruct
perfectly.
'Display reconstructed Sxo and Sw curves' : if 'checked', then on the 'Model Plot',
tracks will be added to show the reconstructed Sw and Sxo curves superimposed on the
model input Sxo and Sw curves. These tracks will only be shown if the 'Automatically
Add Sxo and/or Sw into Model' options are on. Normally the curves will overlay
perfectly. However, if the user has relaxed the Sxo and/or Sw equation confidences
then there could be slight differences between the input and reconstructed curves.
'Display valid but unselected input curves and their model reconstructions' : if the
user has entered an equation as part of a model, but has chosen not to use the equation
(the 'Use' cell is not 'checked'), IP will continue to reconstruct the input equation / curve
if this option is 'checked' and display the results on the 'Model Plot'. The curve
reconstruction track for such a curve will not have the yellow shading seen on the curves
that are actually used in the Model.
'Display output equation results' : if 'checked', a new log curve track for each output
equation will be added to the 'Model Plot'.
'Display Constant and limit equation results' : if 'checked', this option will add a curve
track to the 'Model Plot' for each constant and/or limit equation in the model. Each
track will display a straight line (i.e. a constant value) where a 'limit' is reached.
'Display invaded zone fluids in separate track' : if 'checked' a track will be created to

the right of the 'Model' track and it will contain the invaded fluid porosity curves. These
are the same fluid porosities that are shown in the model volumes track except if the '
Display Movable fluids plot in Model results track' option has been 'checked' on.
'Display Un-invaded zone fluids in separate track' : if 'checked' and un-invaded fluids
are used then a track will be created to the right of the 'Model' track and it will contain
the un-invaded fluid porosities.
'Display Movable fluids plot in Model results track' : if 'checked' the model results
track, rather than containing the mineral and fluid volumes in the flushed zone, will
contain a movable fluid plot to the right side of the minerals volumes. The movable fluid
plot will contain Phie, BVW and BVWSxo.
The following example shows the separate tracks for invaded and un-invaded fluids plus the
movable oil display in the 'Model' track.
'Mixings' Tab
The 'Mixings' tab allows the user to create sets of rules on how to combine Models to create the
final 'Combined Model Results'.

Further details on the 'Mixings' functionality is found under the 'Combined Model Results'
section of this document.
Cased Hole Calculations

If the mineral solver is to be used for cased hole calculations using sigma curves then the
following parameters should be set.
'Curves' tab
'Input Curves' - Rt and Rxo curves should be absent.
'Parameters' tab - 'Sw Logic' sub-tab

'Sw Method' is set to 'No Calc'
'Sxo Method' is set to 'Min Model'.
The saturation is then calculated from the input sigma curve in the model.
'Parameters' tab - 'Waters Clays' sub-tab

'Rmf' should still be entered as this will be used to calculate salinities, which are used for
automatically calculated parameters for neutron logs.
'Models' tab
From the 'Options' button the 'Model Options' window can be accessed. Turn off the '
Automatically Add Sxo equation into Model' and 'Automatically Add Sw equation into
Model' options.
The output curves Sxo and SxoT will be the saturations calculated by the model. The difference
being the clay bound water. Sw and SwT will be absent since the 'Sw Method' is set to 'No Calc'.

22.1.3 Interactive Plot

The 'Interactive Plot' is created by 'clicking' the 'Make Plot' button to the right of the 'Options'
button. The 'Make Plot' button at the bottom of the page will create the 'Combined Model' plot.
The interactive functions enabled in the log plot depend on the settings in the zonal parameters.
Most of the special interactivity is concerned with the type of water saturation equation selected.
Therefore, if the user changes the water saturation equation it is best to recreate the interactive
plot by re-clicking the 'Make Plot' button.
Undo/Redo

the set-up of the module has been changed i.e. a new zone created, then there might be
'greyed-out' actions. These 'greyed-out' actions relate to the previous set-up of the module. In
order to redo or undo any of these actions then the module will have to be changed back to its
previous state.

Track 2: Zones
The 'Zone track' is used to display the current zonation used in the interpretation. This track
allows the user to create and delete zones and to move zone tops.
To create a new zone by splitting a current zone, right mouse 'click' in the zone track at
the depth for the split and choose 'Split Zone' from the pop-up menu .
To delete a zone, choose 'Delete Zone' from the pop-up menu.
Zone tops and bottoms can be moved by placing the cursor on the top of a zone in the
zone track and, with the left mouse button, drag the top to a new position. It is possible
to have gaps between zones. To remove a gap, drag the bottom of the zone above a
gap to below the top of the zone below the gap.
Track 3: Resistivity
The 'Resistivity' track will have the Rxo and Rt input curves displayed.
If the Indonesian, Simandoux or modified Simandoux equations are selected then the Clay
parameter interactive lines will be displayed. The pop-up menu will also allow a Wet Clay Volume /
Resistivity crossplot, where the value of clay resistivity ('Res Clay') can be chosen interactively.

Also available are Porosity / Resistivity crossplots (Pickett plots) where Rw and 'm' (cementation
factor) can be changed interactively. The text boxes at the base of the Pickett crossplot list the Rw
at formation temperature ('Rw Form Temp') as well as the Rw value that is entered into the
Parameter table, which could be at a different temperature (default 60 degF).

Track 4: Salinity
Rw Apparent and Rmf Apparent are automatically calculated from the 'Phi Total', resistivity
curves, and 'a' and 'm' parameters. The resulting resistivity is converted to the temperature used
for the Rw or Rmf parameter (Rw or Rmf temp. parameter). The displayed interactive lines are
Rw and Rmf. If the 'Dual Water' model is selected, then RwB (Rw bound) and RmfB (Rmf
bound) interactive parameter lines will also be displayed.

If the 'Juhasz' / 'W&S' equation is chosen then a 'Cwapp / Qvn' crossplot will be added to the
track pop-up menu.

If the 'Waxman-Smits' equation is chosen, then a PhiT_recp (1/PhiT) / Qvapp crossplot will be
added to the track pop-up menu.
Track 5: Saturations
The 'Saturation' track will contain the calculated SwU and SxoU curves, which are the 'unlimited
' curves and can have values greater than 1.0. The Sw and Sxo curves will be clipped to 1.0
(100%). The 'xxxU' curves are good for visualizing, in the water zones, how much over the 100%
line Sw and Sxo are being calculated. Thus, it is possible, by adjusting Rw, to arrive at statistically
100% Sw in a water zone.
The SxoU curve has no logic limits applied to it. Hence it could be less than Sw in a Water-Based
Mud system, or greater than Sw in an Oil-Based Mud system.
NOTE: Replace SxoU and SwU with Sxo and Sw for any final plots.
Track 6: Porosity
The 'Porosity' track will contain the Total and Effective porosity calculations plus a moveable-oil
plot (BVW and BVWSXO).
Track 7: Model Volumes Results

The model volumes will be displayed. The shading used will be the same as that set up in the
model grid.
The hydrocarbon and water displayed will be the flushed-zone volumes . The water volume may

not exactly match the BVWSXO curve. This is due to the Sxo and BVWSXO curves being
calculated after the model calculations from the input Rxo curve. However, they should be very
close.
Track 8: Error
The Model 'Normalized Total Error' curve (TotErr) is displayed. Error values greater than 2.0 are
displayed in red. This can be used by the user to visualize how well the results reconstruct.
The PhiFlg curve will display any error or logic flags output by the calculations. Curve values and
their meaning are shown in the equations and methodology section. The user needs only to be
concerned if the PhiFlg curve value is non-zero.
Track 9+ Curve Reconstructions

There will be one track per input curve equation. Constant equations are not displayed. The track
contains the original input curve plus, in yellow shading, the 'Confidence Band' for the curve. The
Confidence Band width is set on the Model grid. The reconstructed curve is displayed in red
colour. The closer the reconstructed curve is to the original curve, the better the Model and the
results fit and the lower the Total Error will become.
Track Rt Reconstruction
If the 'Display reconstructed resistivity curves on model plots' option is 'checked' on the '
Options' page, then two extra tracks will be displayed. One for Rt and one for Rxo. Two curves
will be displayed in each track: the original resistivity and the reconstructed resistivity. Yellow
shading will show any differences between the curves. Note that there are no 'confidence shading'
associated with these curves since they are not part of the Mineral model.
22.1.4 Interactive Crossplots

The 'Crossplot' button on the 'Models' tab allows the creation of crossplots of any of the input
curves with the mineral end-points displayed on them. 'Clicking' the 'Crossplot' button will display
the follow window.

The user can select a crossplot and then select the mineral end-points to be displayed on the
crossplot. A maximum of 8 mineral end-points can be displayed on each crossplot. NOTE: The '
Select Minerals' panel will only list those minerals which can be displayed on the selected
crossplot. Mineral end-points which are entered as 'Auto' (blue shaded boxes in the Model grid) or
hydrocarbon parameters that are entered as true down-hole densities (green shaded boxes in the
Model grid) will not be included in the 'Select Minerals' list.
The 'Swap Axes' 'check' box allows the user to interchange 'X' and 'Y' axes in the crossplot
set-up window.
The 'Interactive Run' 'Check' box allows the user to turn off the automatic re-running of the
model each time an endpoint parameter is changed on the crossplot. For slow computers or
complicated models it is better to make all the changes needed to the parameters then run the
model manually at the end.

The crossplot will show the mineral end-points as red circles, labelled with the mineral name. By
left 'clicking' on the mineral point the user can drag the point to a new position. When the mouse
button is released the model will automatically be re-run and the user can evaluate the results.
Multiple crossplots can be displayed at the same time. Each one has to be set up as described
above. Mineral end-points that are displayed in different crossplots will move simultaneously when
the user moves any of the single points.
Once the interactive points have been moved then redo/undo arrows appear in the top left-hand
edge of the crossplot. These allow the user to go back to the original positions of the mineral
end-points.

22.1.5 Save Load and Delete Models

Save, Load and Delete Models
The 'Save Model' button will save an individual model to a disk file. This can be useful
for moving models between wells or for copying models when creating a new model.
The 'Load Model' button will reload a saved model and replace the current model with
its values. There are two options from where to pickup saved models :
1. 'Project Model' This will present a dialog to select a model from the project well
directory.
2. 'Default Model' This will present a dialog to select a model from the default
Mineral Solver model area. This is a directory (..\Mineral Solver Models) found in
the IP program directory. The user may add models to this directory by using
the 'Save Model' button and selecting this directory to save to. This directory
allows users to save their common models for reuse in other wells or projects.
The 'Delete Model' button deletes the current model.

Sets of models and their 'Mixings' can be saved though the 'Load and Save Parameter Sets'
button. This will save everything associated with the Mineral Solver set-up for the well. If 'model
Sets' need to be copied between wells, the correct way to achieve this is by using the 'Load
/Save Parameter Sets' functionality, NOT by using the 'Save Model' and 'Load Model' buttons.
22.1.6 Mineral Solver Calibration

The 'Calibrate' button brings up the 'MinSolve Model Calibration' window. The Calibration
window is arranged on 3 'tabbed' screens.
These are :
'Calibrate'
'Multi-well Select'
'Discriminators'
This functionality can be used to calibrate the mineral end-points using core data. The calibration
can be made from data from any wells currently loaded to the IP database. Discriminators can be
used to filter the data to be used in the calibration. The calibration is performed using multi-linear
regression and is made for each equation, separately. Certain parameters can be selected as '
fixed' and the regression will be run to find the best solution for the other, variable parameters.
Core X-ray diffraction mineral analysis data is usually provided by core laboratories in 'weight
percent of the dry fraction' of the rock. In order for this data to be used in this module it should
be converted into a 'wet volume percent'. This conversion can be made in the user formula
module. The equation needed is :
Wet Vol % = (Dry Weight %) x (1 Porosity) x (Rock Grain Density) / (Mineral Grain
Density)
The 'Rock Grain Density' and 'Porosity' can be taken from the routine core analysis results. The 'Mineral
Grain Density' will be
fixed for a particular mineral and can be found in the standard Log chart book reference tables( See Useful
Links). The 'Porosity' part of this correction is usually
the most important input and, if the 'Mineral Grain Density' is not known exactly - for example in clay, then
a good estimate is generally
quite satisfactory.

'Calibrate' Tab
The 'Calibrate' grid is very similar to the 'Model' set-up grid and it consists of a number of '
equations' arranged in rows down the grid and a number of 'mineral' columns across the grid. It is
not possible to change either the number of equations or the number of minerals since these are
selected from the original 'Model' grid. However, if the user changes the minerals or number of
equations in the 'Model' grid then the 'Reset' button on the 'Calibrate' window will change the '
Calibrate' grid to conform to these changes.
NOTE: if 'Reset' is selected, all input mineral volume curves will have to be re-entered.
If a mineral or equation is not required for the calibration, then this can be turned off by
'un-checking' the 'Use' box.
'Equation' Columns
1. 'Curve' : Input equation result curve. Cannot be changed on this grid. This is picked up
automatically when the module is first run or the 'Reset' button is 'clicked'. The curve can
be changed on the 'Multi-well Select' tab.
2. 'Use' : If 'checked' then the calibration will be run for the equation when the 'Calculate'
button is clicked. It is also used to decide what end-point parameters are passed back to
the 'Model' grid when the 'Copy Parameters' button is clicked.
3. 'Corr Coeff' : Displays the correlation (R2) coefficient of the regression. The field is
non-editable.
4. 'Num Points' : Displays the number of points used in the regression. The field is
non-editable.
'Mineral' Rows
1. 'Mineral' : This is the name of the mineral as displayed in the 'Model' grid.
2. 'Curve / Val' : The input curve name for this mineral is entered. This can also be
entered on the 'Multi-Well Select' tab. It is also possible to enter a fixed-value volume for
a mineral by typing a number in this row. If the user leaves an input curve volume 'blank',
then the program will add up all the volumes from the other curves and assume the
remainder belongs to the blank input entry. It is only possible to leave one input curve
blank. The units of the input volume curves must be set as either 'Dec (V/V)' or 'Percent %
' using the drop-down box on the top left of the grid.
3. 'Use' : If 'checked' then this mineral will be used in the regression. If 'un-checked' then
all parameter-end points for this mineral will be ignored. It is also used to decide what

end-point parameters are passed back to the 'Model' grid when the 'Copy Parameters'
button is 'clicked'.
4. 'Fixed / Var' : By 'clicking' in this row the user can change the option for each mineral
from 'Variable' to 'Fixed' and back again. When the option is 'Variable' and the 'Calculate
' button is 'clicked', the regression will return the calculated mineral end-point. When the
mineral is set to 'Fixed' the user can manually enter the end-point value into the grid and
the regression will use this value as a fixed part of the equation. This allows the user to
enter known end-points, for example the density of fresh water at 1.0 gm/cc.
'Multi-well Select' Tab
The 'Multi-well Select' grid allows the the user to select input logs and mineral volume curves
from multiple wells. The user selects the 'Well' from the drop-down list of wells loaded in memory
and then selects the compatible logs and mineral volume curves. The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom
Depth' rows allow the user to select a specific part of a well to use for the calibration.
The first column of the grid will contain the well which is currently being evaluated with the '
Mineral Solver' module. Changing the curve names in the 'Logs' section will automatically
change the names on the main 'Calibrate' grid.
The 'Use' row is used to decide which wells are to be used in the calibration. This allows the user
to quickly evaluate the influence of individual wells on the calibration results.
'Discriminators' Tab

The 'Discriminator' grid allows the user to apply more stringent filters to data that are to be used
in the model calibration. For example, if the user believed the core mineral volumes were not
accurate when the permeability was very low, then the discriminator shown above could be used
to select only those data where the permeability is greater than 0.1mD.
NOTE: If using log data from multiple wells, then any discriminator curve must be available in all
wells.
'Calculate' Button
When the 'Calculate' button is 'clicked', a multiple linear regression is run for each equation line
that is selected ('Use' column ticked). The equation of regression is :
Input Curve = Min1 x Vol1 + Min2 x Vol2 + Min3 x Vol3 ..
Where
Min1, Min2, Min3 are the mineral end-point parameters that are solved for.
Vol1, Vol2, Vol3 are the input curve mineral volumes
For cases where the mineral end points are 'Fixed' the equation is re-arranged so that the fixed
minerals are subtracted from the Input curve before the regression is run.
Notice that the difference between this equation and the normal multi-linear regression is that
there is no 'constant term' in the result co-efficient's.
By using the 'Use equation' and 'Use mineral' selections the user can work on one equation at a

time to get the optimum result. It may be necessary to fix several of the mineral end-points in
order to get a sensible result. Several iterations will normally be needed to obtain the optimum
result.
'Reset' Button
The 'Reset' button is used to re-set the minerals and equations back to the 'Model' defaults. This
is useful if the model is changed (new mineral or new equation added) since the changes will not
be reflected in the calibration window until the 'Reset' button is clicked.
NOTE : The 'Reset' button will clear all input volume curve names.
'Copy Parameters' Button

The 'Copy Parameters' button, when 'clicked', will transfer the selected mineral end-point values
back to the 'Model' grid. The selected parameters are chosen by using the 'Use' column and row
selectors. In this way it is possible to select each individual parameter. It is not necessary to
transfer all the parameters that were used in the regression 'Calculation'.
22.1.7 Combined Model Results

When the user 'clicks' the 'Run' button at the bottom of the main 'Mineral Solver' window, the '
Combined Model' results are calculated. The results will be stored in the 'Combined Models
Result Set' (Msol). The user can select the 'Combined Models Result Set' from the drop-down
box or create a new Set by 'clicking' on the 'Edit Sets' button.
If the user has 'checked' the 'Auto Update Cutoff and Summation (MS)' option in the '
Advanced Interpretation' menu then each time the 'Mineral Solver' module is run the 'Cutoff
and Summations' module (if set-up) will be run as well.
The 'Combined Model Results' are created zone by zone. The zones are those set up in the '
Parameters' tab.
The program looks at the 'Mixings' model for each zone and then runs all the individual models

needed for the mixing rules. The 'Combined Model' results for the zone are then created using
the mixing rules for the zone.
For an explanation on how the program deals with transitions between models see the 'User
Interface' chapter and the 'Zones / Mixings' tab.
Tab 4 (Mixings)
The 'Mixings' tab allows the user to create sets of rules on how to combine models to create the
final 'Combined Model' results.
'Mixings' are created or viewed by 'clicking' the left and right arrow buttons at the top of the
window, next to the 'Mixing' label. Up to 5 different sets of mixing rules can be created and
applied in an interpretation.
The 'Name' box allows the user to name each 'Mixing'. This name is used to identify and set the '
Zone Mixing' on the 'Parameters' tab - 'Zones / Mixings' sub-tab. The 'Default Model' name
must be selected from the drop-down list at the top of the 'Mixings' tab This list contains all the
models that have been created in the 'Models' tab. The 'Default Model' is used if all the mixing's
rules fail to come up with a model for a depth step.
If a single, 'constant' model is required over a zone then the only thing that needs to be set is the '
Default Model'. The other rules can be left blank.
Mixing Rules
For each depth level in a zone the program applies the mixing rules sequentially from the top of
the list downwards and stops when any statement becomes 'true'. The model selected will be the
one for that rule. If no rule evaluates to 'true' then the default model will be used.
The Columns in the Mixings 'grid ' are described below:

Column 1. 'Use' - To have the program evaluate the row then a tick must be entered in a
row.
Column 2. 'Value / Curve / Formula' - the user can input either;
A fixed value, or
A curve name must be entered. The curve can be any curve in the database and
can include the output of a model. Since all the models are evaluated before the
final 'Combined Model' results are made using the mixings, then a model result
curve is perfectly valid. However, do not include a result curve from the '
Combined Model' set, or
A Formula, which can be typed into the appropriate grid cell.

Column 3. 'Func' -This is selected from the drop-down box and can be one of the standard
logic functions.
Column 4. 'Value / Curve / Formula' - A fixed value, a curve name or a formula must be
entered.
Column 5. 'What to do' - The user selects from the drop-down box either 'Then', 'and' or '
or'.
'Then' allows the selection of a model from the 6th column.
'and' joins this logic statement with the next line with the 'and' logic.
'or' joins this logic statement with the next line with the 'or' logic.
The lines are evaluated from the top down and when an 'or' or 'and' statement is found, the two
lines that are connected with the statement are evaluated before the next line is read. For
example, if we have three logic lines (Line1, Line2 Line3) :
Line1 or Line2 and Line3 : will evaluate true if Line3 is true and either Line1 or
Line2 is true.
Line1 and Line2 or Line3 : will evaluate true if Line3 is true regardless whether
Line1 or Line2 is true.
Column 6. 'Model' - The user must select a Model from the drop-down list if the previous
column was a 'Then' statement.
Interactive Combined Model Plot

When the 'Make Plot' button is 'clicked' at the bottom of the screen an interactive 'Combined
Model' plot is made. The user has a choice of 'No Reconstructed Curves' or 'Include
Reconstructed Curves' to make before the selected 'Combined Model' plot is created.

The 'Combined Model' plot has the same Resistivity, Salinity, Saturation and Porosity tracks as
the 'Single Model' result plots. The same interactive line and water saturation parameter
crossplots are available as in the 'Single Model' plot.
The results of each Model are displayed in separate tracks. The 'Mix' track contains the '
Model_Num' output curve which is automatically created and put into the 'Combined Model' Set.
The curve shows which model is used for the 'Combined Model' results, on a level-by-level basis.
The values will correspond to the 'Model number' in the 'Model' tab.
The 'Error' track will contain the Combined Model 'normalized total error' curve plus the
combined PhiFlag curve.
Print
The 'Print' button gives the user the following options.
If outputting to an external file, the file name will be the 'Parameter Set Name' as entered on the '
Mineral Solver' window, with an extension of '.txt'.
The output file gives all the models, parameters and 'mixing's' used in the analysis.
Load / Save Parameter Sets

The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to save the full 'Mineral Solver'
parameter Set into the database under a separate name or to a disk file. Saved parameter Sets
can also be recalled. See 'Parameter Set management'.
The currently- displayed parameter Set is automatically saved into the well database when the
well is saved. To completely delete the current parameter Set use the Manage Zones/ Tops
Sets module, select the 'Mineral Solver' parameter Set, called 'MinSolve', and click the 'Delete'
button.

22.1.8 Mineral Solver Equations and Methodology

The main flow logic in 'Mineral Solver' is shown in the above flow diagram. The logic consists of
an iterative loop which is repeated until the porosity and Sw terms converge between loops. This
methodology allows for the solving of non-linear equations using a linear equation solver. The
non-linear equations are made linear by adjusting their input end-point mineral values knowing
what the porosity and water saturation values are.
The results of the process should be very similar to those obtained by non-linear solvers. The
advantages of this technique over the non-linear solver are speed and stability. Both techniques
use iterative processes to refine their results and find the best result. However this technique
keeps the iteration outside the pure mathematical manipulations where knowledge of what is
going on can be used to converge on the correct result many times faster. Non-linear solvers can
also from time to time be extremely sensitive to the input initialization and may become unstable.
Equation Solver
Equations
Limit Equations
Output Equations
Mineral Types
Water Saturations
Iteration Loops
Final Calculations
Phi Flags
Equation Solver
The linear-equation solver incorporated into this module comes from 'Numerical Recipes'
(Cambridge University Press) and the technique used is 'Singular Value Decomposition'. This
technique is very fast and stable.
The equation solver solves a set of normalized linear equations. The following steps are used to
solve the equations :
1. Each equation is normalized by dividing all terms in the equation by its confidence
weighting.
2. The equations are solved by 'Singular Value Decomposition'.
3. If any of the volume result terms are negative then the largest negative term is set to
zero and removed from the model. The equation solver is re-run and results checked for
negative terms. This continues until all volumes are positive.
4. The result volumes are adjusted so that they add up to 1.0. Due to the way the
equation solver works, the unity equations will not necessarily force the results to
absolutely 1.0. (The tolerance of the unity equation is set at 0.01 by default).
5. The input logs are reconstructed from the volume results.
6. The total normalized error is calculated from the difference between the input log and
results. The following equation is used to calculate the total error.
Where
InputLog i = i'th input log
Reconstructed i = i'th reconstructed log from the volume results
Confidence Weight i = i'th log confidence weighting

Equations
The entered equations can be used for four different uses or modes. The equation mode ('Eq.
Mode') is selected on the model grid and can be one of the following :
Model : The equation is used in the model for solving the mineralogy.
> Limit : The equation is a limit equation. The results of the mineralogy must be less
than the input 'Curve
Val'. This can be used for setting maximum limits for resultant minerals or
fluids.
< Limit : The equation is a limit equation. The results of the mineralogy must be greater
than the input
'Curve / Val'. This can be used for setting minimum limits for resultant minerals
or fluids.
Output : The equation is not used in the model, but the results of the mineralogy are
used to output a result curve. This can be used to output useful curves to QC
the interpretation (Grain Density) or intermediate curves that are needed to
calculate Sw's (Qv, Total Clay porosity). It can also be used to create normal
logging curves that are missing in a well (sonic, density etc).
The general form of an input equation for all equation modes is :
Y = Vol1 x Min1 + Vol2 x Min2 + Vol3 x Min3 ...
Where
Y = Input tool curve or fixed value. For 'Output' equations, this will be the result
curve.
Vol1,Vol2,Vol3 = Calculated result volumes
Min1,Min2,Min3 = Mineral end-point values
The 'Equation Type' selected on the Model grid controls the non-linear equations. Output
equations also use the equation type to control the end point parameters used in the construction
of the output curve. The following sections describe how different equation 'Types' are handled in '
Mineral Solver'.
'Unity equation'
'Porosity equalization'
'Invasion Factor'
'Density equation'
'Neutron equation'
'Neutron Tool look-up tables'
'Sonic equation'
'EPT equation'
'Weight Percent (Wt%) equation'
'Volumetric cross-section (U) equation'
'Conductivity equation'
'Resistivity equation'
'Un-invaded Zone Resistivity / Conductivity equations'
'Constant equation'
'Sxo equation'
'Sw equation'
'Saturation Output equation'

Unity equation
The unity equation, which is always included in the model, states that the sum of all the mineral &
Fluid volumes must be equal to 1 :
1 = Vol1 + Vol2 + Vol3 .
Porosity equalization
If invaded and un-invaded fluids are included in the model then the fluid porosity in both the
flushed and un-flushed zone must be the same. This equation is automatically added if both
invaded and un-invaded fluids are used in a model.
VwatU + VhydU1 + Vhyd2U + ... = Vwat + Vhyd1 + Vhyd2 + ...

or
0 = -VwatU VhydU1 - Vhyd2U - ... + Vwat + Vhyd1 + Vhyd2 + ...
Invasion Factor
The invasion factor for each equation sets the proportion of un-invaded zones and invaded zone
fluids seen by the equation. A value of 1.0 indicates the equation sees only invaded fluids. A
value of 0.0 then only un-invaded fluids. Values in between allow mixing of volumes.
Whether a fluid is in the invaded or un-invaded zone is setup by the 'Mineral Type' option. 'Water
Sxo' and 'Hyd. Sxo' are invaded zone fluids. 'Water Sw' and 'Hyd. Sw' are un-invaded zone
fluids.
When the model is solved, the mineral end points for the fluid are multiplied by the Invasion
Factor (IF) for invaded fluids and 1-IF for un-invaded fluids.
The Invasion Factor (IF) is used for those tools which are believed to read deeper than the
flushed zone. The neutron tool, for example, is quite often felt to read more in the un-invaded
zone than the flushed zone therefore a value of closer to 0.0 might be appropriate.
Density equation
The density equation is linear. However, the hydrocarbon and water mineral end-points can be
automatically calculated.
Basic equation:
ppm
gm/cc
where
Temp = Entered formation temperature F.
Rmf75 = Rmf value converted to 75F.
For oil-based mud Rw and Rw temperature will be used in same equation as above.

where
= Entered hydrocarbon end-point value
Neutron equation
The neutron tool end-points for sand, limestone and dolomite are non-linear and depend on the
type of neutron tool. If the user selects the mineral end-points for these minerals to be 'Auto' then
the end-points will be calculated, dependent on porosity and water saturations.
Basic equation:
The hydrocarbon and water Hydrogen Indices (HI) end-points can also be calculated. If the user
has selected to have the program calculate the hydrocarbon HI then this will be adjusted for
excavation effects.
It is also possible to change the zone where the neutron tool is reading from the flushed (Sxo)
zone to the un-invaded (Sw) zone.
Water-HI
The water-HI is calculated from the neutron salinity look-up tables and takes into account the
matrix type and the water salinity seen by the neutron tools. If the Neutron Salinity parameter is
set to 'off', then the water-HI will be 1.0.
Dolomite and Quartz matrix HI

If the end-point parameter is set 'Auto' then it will be calculated from the neutron look-up tables
taking into account the porosity at the depth level.
Hydrocarbon-HI
If the hydrocarbon-HI end-point is set to be calculated from an entered hydrocarbon density, then
it is calculated as follows:

Where
Vcl = Wet Clay volume.
NeuCl = Neutron wet clay value end point.
Exfact = Neutron excavation factor.
NeuSal = Neutron formation salinity correction.
Sx = Water saturation as seen by the neutron tool.
NeuHyHI = Neutron hydrocarbon apparent hydrogen index.
Neutron Tool look-up tables

The neutron tool look-up tables are ASCII-formatted, user-editable text files, which define the
response for a particular tool, for Dolomite and Sandstone, at different porosity values. It is
assumed that the entered neutron porosity is in Limestone units. Formation salinity
corrections at each porosity value are defined for each standard matrix type. This allows for the
proper matrix and salinity corrections to be defined for any type of neutron tool.
Several neutron tool look-up tables are provided with the software, but the user can easily create
a new table for a tool not previously defined. To do this:
1. Add the new tool into the file 'Neu_Parm_Files.neu', which is found in the program
executable directory. This file defines the names shown in the module parameter table,
plus the file names of the look-up tables.
2. Create the new look-up table. It is best to copy an old one and modify it. The spacing
between the parameters is not important, but the number of parameters in each line and
the number of porosity lines are. The following is an example of one of the tables:
$
$ Sch_CNL.neu file
$ Contains lookup table for Schlumberger CNL TNPH
$
$
$ Data is as follows
$ True Phi, Sandstone Matrix, Dolomite Matrix, Salinity corr Sand, Salinity corr Lime, Salinity
corr Dol
$ Salinity correction are for following values 50, 100, 150, 200, 250 Kppm and in this order
$ Porosity values must not be changed
$
$phi ss Dol 50 SS 100 150 200 250 50 LS 100 150 200 250
50 Dol 100 150 200 250
.00 .020 -.006 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000
.0000 .0000 .0000 .0000 .0000
.02 .022 -.009 -.0012 -.0032 -.0040 -.0056 -.0060 -.0012 -.0024 -.0032 -.0036 -.0040
-.0020 -.0044 -.0064 -.0076 -.0092
.05 .028 -.012 -.0030 -.0080 -.0100 -.0140 -.0160 -.0030 -.0060 -.0080 -.0090 -.0100
-.0050 -.0110 -.0160 -.0190 -.0230
.10 .036 -.017 -.0070 -.0140 -.0190 -.0230 -.0280 -.0060 -.0120 -.0160 -.0200 -.0210
-.0100 -.0190 -.0270 -.0330 -.0380
.15 .045 -.022 -.0120 -.0220 -.0290 -.0340 -.0350 -.0100 -.0190 -.0260 -.0300 -.0340
-.0120 -.0240 -.0330 -.0400 -.0450
.20 .049 -.030 -.0160 -.0270 -.0340 -.0370 -.0380 -.0140 -.0260 -.0320 -.0350 -.0390
-.1960 -.0290 -.0370 -.0420 -.0440
.25 .051 -.037 -.0160 -.0370 -.0330 -.0340 -.0330 -.0160 -.0290 -.0350 -.0390 -.0390
-.0180 -.0300 -.0370 -.0400 -.0410
.30 .052 -.045 -.0150 -.0350 -.0290 -.0290 -.0270 -.0200 -.0310 -.0380 -.0380 -.0380
-.0180 -.0300 -.0340 -.0360 -.0330
.35 .049 -.052 -.0130 -.0180 -.0190 -.0190 -.0150 -.0200 -.0310 -.0350 -.0350 -.0330
-.0160 -.0260 -.0290 -.0280 -.0260
.40 .046 -.059 -.0100 -.0140 -.0140 -.0120 -.0070 -.0180 -.0280 -.0310 -.0300 -.0270
-.0150 -.0230 -.0240 -.0210 -.0180
.45 .043 -.066 -.0120 -.0140 -.0140 -.0100 -.0030 -.0170 -.0240 -.0280 -.0260 -.0220
-.0150 -.0220 -.0210 -.0170 -.0130
.50 .040 -.073 -.0110 -.0120 -.0110 -.0060 .0020 -.0160 -.0220 -.0250 -.0220 -.0170
-.0140 -.0200 -.0180 -.0130 -.0080
.55 .037 -.080 -.0100 -.0100 -.0080 -.0020 .0070 -.0150 -.0200 -.0220 -.0180 -.0120
-.0130 -.0180 -.0150 -.0090 -.0030

.60 .034 -.087 -.0090 -.0080 -.0050 .0020 .0120 -.0140 -.0180 -.0190 -.0140 -.0070
-.0120 -.0160 -.0120 -.0050 .0020
The values of porosity go up to 60 pu., and it is necessary to complete the table up to this value,
even though it is unlikely that there are any published results for these high porosities. It is
advisable to extrapolate the data as accurately as possible.
Sonic equation
The sonic 'Wyllie' equation is linear as long as the 'compaction factor' is set to 1.0
This can be re-written:
or in the terms of volumes:
To accommodate the compaction factor we multiply all the fluid parameters (water plus
hydrocarbon) by the compaction factor and we ignore the compaction factor term in the 'VolMat'
term. Since the compaction factor term is only an adjustment to give reasonable porosities in
unconsolidated formations, it is felt that this compromise is acceptable.
The 'Hunt-Raymer' equation as used in IP is :
Where
Vma = 1/Dtma
Vf = 1/Dtfl
Vlog = 1/Dt
This is a non-linear equation and as a non-linear equation it has been hard-coded into the
module. To accommodate this in 'Mineral Solver' a relationship has been determined between
the Wyllie compaction factor, as used in 'Mineral Solver' and the Hunt-Raymer equations above.
This relationship is :
Cp = 0.65156 + 0.8109 * Phi + 0.01322 * Dtma - 0.003261 * Dtfl
Phi units are decimals, Dtma and Dtfl units are usec/ft.
This relationship is used as part of the iteration loop. Dtma and Phi come from the results of the
Model solver. The calculated Cp value is used in the Wyllie equation above.
EPT equation
The TPL curve can be used for calculating flushed-zone water saturation directly in the Mineral
model. If the EPT equation is entered, then the Sxo equation should be removed from the model.
See the 'Options' selection on the model window. The 'Sxo Method' parameter should be set to '

Min Model' so that, for the final results, Sxo will come from the EPT result.
If the TPL curve from the EPT tool is entered, equation type EPT, then the water end-point values
can be set to 'Auto' and it will be calculated from the flushed-zone water salinity as follows :
Where
Sal = Salinity of filtrate in ppm10-6
T = Formation temperature F.
Rmf = resistivity of filtrate at formation temperature.
For oil-based mud, Rw is substituted for Rmf.
Weight Percent (Wt%) equation

Spectral Gamma Ray tools output curves that measure dry weight percent results either in the
form of minerals or actual elements. In order to use them inside the mineral solver these curves
need to be converted into volumes. This can be done automatically by setting the 'Equation' type
to a 'Wt%' curve. As well as this, an output 'Grain Density' equation needs to be setup.
The key to the conversion is that the equation type has the 'Wt%' in the name. If the input curve is
really in units of percent then it will also get divided by 100. This conversion will happen if the
curve units are '%' or 'pec'.
The equation used for the conversion from weight to volume is:
Wet Vol % = (Dry Weight %) x (1 - PhiT) x (Rock Grain Density) / (Mineral Grain Density)
Where
Rock Grain Density = Total dry rock grain density
Mineral Grain Density = Dry grain density of the mineral / element being converted
The 'Rock Grain Density' and 'Mineral Grain Density' come from the 'Grain Density' equation.
A type setup for an ECS tool is shown above. The output grain density equation will give the dry
grain density of the rock. The density of wet clay has been entered as 2.78 which is the dry grain
density not the wet grain density.

The 'ECS_Clay (Wt%)' equation sets the value of 'Wet Clay' as 0.85 rather than as 1.0. This is
because the setup is using a wet clay model and the ECS is measuring dry clay. Hence, if the
zone is 100% wet clay and the total porosity in the clay is 0.15 then the ECS_Clay input curve will
read 0.85 after conversion from weight to volume.
ECS_Clay (Vol) = ECS_Clay (Wt%) x (1 - 0.15) x (2.78 / 2.78)
For a dry clay model the ECS_Clay parameter would be 1.0. For a dry clay model a typical setup
is shown below.
Volumetric cross-section (U) equation

If the 'U' equation is selected, then both the hydrocarbon and water end-point values can be
automatically calculated from the true hydrocarbon density and the water salinity. The following
equations are used.
Uwat = 0.00481 x Sal + 0.3883
For gas (Input Hyd Den less than 0.4)
For Oil :
'U' must be calculated from the Pef and Rhob curves outside of the 'Mineral Solver' module. The
equation for this is as follows :
Conductivity equation
Flushed-zone water saturation is normally calculated from the input of the Sxo equation into the
model. However, it is possible to add a conductivity curve directly into the model. This is not the
recommended method, since the water saturation equation used is limited to a modified Archie
with 'n' = 'm'.
Archie's equation
Is re-written in terms of conductivity with 'n' = 'm'

or
If the input curve and end-point parameters have the 1/mth root taken, then the equation becomes
linear.
In 'Mineral Solver' this equation is generalized so that conductive minerals and multiple waters
can be entered. The generalized equation is :
where
Cwati = i'th input water end point parameter.
Cmini = i'th input conductive mineral end point parameter.
Vwati = i'th result water volume.
Vmini = i'th result mineral volume.
The user enters the flushed-zone conductivity curve and the conductivity of the waters and any
conductive minerals (Clays). The program takes care of the conversions to the 1/mth root.
The confidence factor has 1/mth root taken of it before using in the solver. The 'input confidence'
shading shown on the result track is shown in terms of errors in the solver. Hence the shading
width is related to 1/mth root of the entered confidence. Example :
Input conductivity = 500 mmho
Input confidence = 5 mmho
'm' = 2
Solver input value = 22.3 (1/mth root)
Solver confidence = 2.24
Output confidence range
+ error = (22.3 + 2.24)^2 = 602.2 mmho
- error = (22.3 - 2.24)^2 = 402.4 mmho
An example of a set-up for the conductivity equation is shown below.
Clay conductivity has been set at 250 mmhos or4.0 ohmm. Rmf is set at 16,000 mmhos or 0.063
ohmm.
The parameter set-up has been changed to use the results from the model for Sxo. 'Sxo Method'
set to 'Min Model'.

The model option has been changed from 'default' to remove the Sxo equation from the model.
Sw will still be calculated using the input Rt curve and the specified water saturation equation (in
this case 'Indonesian').
Resistivity equation
Flushed-zone water saturation is normally calculated from the input of the Sxo equation into the
model. However, it is possible to add a resistivity curve directly into the model. This is not the
recommended method, since the water saturation equation used is limited to a modified Archie
with 'n' = 'm'.
The logic for this is exactly the same as the Conductivity equation above except resistivites are
used instead of conductivities.
The user enters the flushed-zone resistivity curve and the resistivity of the waters and any
conductive minerals (Clays). The program converts the resistivites to conductivities and takes the
1/mth root.
The confidence factor is converted to conductivity and has 1/mth root taken of it before using in
the solver. The 'input confidence' shading shown on the result track is shown in terms of errors in
the solver. Hence the shading width is related to 1/mth root of the entered confidence. Example :
Input resistivity = 2 ohmm = 500 mmho
Input confidence = 200 ohmm = 5 mmho
'm' = 2
Solver input value = 22.3 (1/mth root)
Solver confidence = 2.24
Output confidence range
+ error = (22.3 + 2.24)^2 = 602.2 mmho = 1.661 ohmm
- error = (22.3 - 2.24)^2 = 402.4 mmho = 2.485 ohmm
An example of a set-up for the resistivity equation is shown below.

Clay resistivity has been set at 4 ohmm. Rmf is set at 0.063 ohmm. The confidence has been set
at 200 ohmm.
The parameter set-up has been changed to use the results from the model for Sxo. 'Sxo Method'
set to 'Min Model'.
The model option has been changed from 'default' to remove the Sxo equation from the model.
Sw will still be calculated using the input Rt curve and the specified water saturation equation (in
this case 'Indonesian').
Un-invaded Zone Resistivity / Conductivity equations

For direct calculation of Sw within the model a 'Cond. Sw' and 'Res. Sw' type equations can be
added. These equation work the same as the 'Cond. Sxo' and 'Res. Sxo' equations described
above. Except the entered water parameters relate to formation water (Rw) not Rmf. Since these
equations read in the un-invaded zone the 'Invasion Factor' must be set to 0.0. The '
Automatic Add Sw equation' option must be turned off and the parameter 'Sw Method' must be
changed to use 'Min Model'.

This is not the recommended method, since the water saturation equation used is limited to a
modified Archie with 'n' = 'm'.
Constant equation
Constant equations are extra equations that the user adds to give more information about the
mineral model. The Unity equation can be considered as a constant equation.
An example of a constant equation would be 2% of the rock contains Pyrite. This can be written
simply : 0.02 = VPyrite and added into the model. The following example shows this equation
added.
Another example could be that the bound water volume in the wet clay was 0.15. This equation
would be written.
This would be entered into the model like this :
If multiple clay volumes are used in the model then the total porosity for each clay mineral can be

set. The equation for bound water would be written as follows :
The constant end point parameters for the equation are the clay total porosity divided by one
minus the clay total porosity. This is to take into account that the output volumes are dry clay
volumes.
The above example shows how the bound water porosity can be set for Illite and Chlorite. By
choosing the 'BoundWater' equation the defaults for this constant equation can be set
automatically.
The confidence level for these constant equations should be set at about 0.01. This would
represent a 1% volume error in the result, since the constant equations have units of volume.
Dependencies between different minerals can be set up such as in this example below:
If Orthoclase is 20% of Quartz

Orthoclase = 0.2 * Quartz
Hence
0 = (0.2 * Quartz) - Orthoclase
This would be entered into the model like this:
Sxo equation
When the Sxo equation is added into the model the equation is as follows:

which can be re-written:
Where
Vwater i = i'th Mineral of type Water in the invaded zone
Vhydrocarboni = i'th Mineral of type Hydrocarbon in the invaded zone
Sxo = Flushed zone saturation calculated from Rxo
The equation controls the ratio of the Water to the hydrocarbon in the model in the flushed zone.
Sxo is calculated as part of the iteration loop using the input Rxo curve and the selected water
saturation equation. The use of Sxo as part of the model allows the proper non-linear saturation
equations to be used and fully integrated into the model.
Sw equation
The Sw equation is similar to the Sxo equation except it works in the un-invaded zone. When the
Sw equation is added into the model the equation added is as follows:
which can be re-written:
Where
VwaterUi = i'th Mineral of type Water in the un-invaded zone
VhydrocarbonUi = i'th Mineral of type Hydrocarbon in the un-invaded zone
Sw = Un-invaded zone saturation calculated from Rt
The equation controls the ratio of the Water to the hydrocarbon in the model in the un-invaded
zone. Sw is calculated as part of the iteration loop using the input Rt curve and the selected water
saturation equation.
Saturation Output equation

If the user wants to calculate a fluid saturation directly from the model results it is possible by
selecting the output equation SaturationEff or SaturationTot. The output curve name then
needs to be changed to reflect what is being calculated. The user then selects the fluids that will
go into the saturation calculation by placing a 1.0 in the parameter value for the fluid. Multiple
fluids can be selected.
The effective saturations are calculated by:
The total saturations are calculated by:

The following is a model that includes Gas and Oil in the flushed zone and outputs the effective
gas and oil saturations of the flushed zone.
Limit Equations
Limit equations are used to control the maximum or minimum results for individual minerals /
fluids or groups of minerals / fluids. The program first solves the model without any limit equations
and then checks the limit equations to see if the result fits within the limits. If the results fall
outside a limit equation then this equation is added into the model and a new solution is sought
(see the flow diagram above). The limit equations are added one at a time and the model is
completely resolved before adding another equation. The order that equations are added is the
order that they are entered into the grid.
Limit equations added into the model are treated like constant equations. The Confidence value
for the limit equation is used to adjust the weighting on the equation. This means that the results
could still be outside the limits of the equation depending on how well the model works. Setting a
maximum porosity limit over a zone where the hole is badly washed out and the density is reading
far too low will not necessarily produce a good result. The figure below shows a result in a zone
where the hole is washed out and a porosity limit of 0.05 has been added. The results show all the
curves to be badly reconstructed with a large total error. The results are clearly wrong because
the model does not work in this interval. Limit equations should only be used to make minor
adjustments to the results. If a limit equation is going to radically alter the balance of the other
equation, as in this example, then it probably should not be used. In this case a bad hole model
should be constructed that removes the density curve from the model.
The porosity limit equation is written as follows :

This will set the maximum porosity to 0.3. The following shows how this is set up on the Model
grid. If the equation type of PhiLimit is selected from the drop-down menu in the 'Equation'
column then the equation will be automatically set up.
Setting a maximum limit of 0.2 Calcite in a model would be set up as follows:
Output Equations
If the 'Eq. Mode' is set to 'Output' then the equation is not used in the model to calculate mineral
volumes but it is used to output a log curve that is created from the result mineral volumes and the
end point parameters for the 'Output' equations. The output curve name is set under the 'Curve /
Val' column.
The 'Equation' column is used to set the type of output equation used in the creation of the curve.
For 'Sonic', 'Density', 'Neutron', 'Conductivity', 'Ept' and 'U' equations the same parameter
end-points and special processing that is performed when used in the model is also performed
when used as an 'Output' equation. For example, if an output equation type was set to 'Sonic'
then the sonic equation type (Wyllie or Hunt Raymer) and compaction factor would be taken into
account.
For normal linear equations the following equation is used to calculate the output curve.
The following extra special procession 'Equation' types are available for 'Output' equations :
Grain Density

This output equation is designed to output a rock grain density. The user enters the matrix density
of the minerals that are to be included in the grain density and sets a parameter value of 0.0 for
those minerals or fluids that are not to be included. The program will calculate the grain density as
follows :
The above example will give the clean grain density of rock. To include the clay in the grain
density one would need to set the 'Wet Clay' end point parameter to the density of the clay. The
fluids have the end point parameters set to 0.0 so are not included in the grain density.
Qv
This output equation is designed to output a Qv curve for use in the Waxman Smits or Dual Water
equation. The output Qv curve is calculated as follows.
The mineral end point parameters need to be set for the clay minerals only. The end point
parameters can be calculated from the CEC of the clay and its density and total porosity.
Since :
Then the end point parameter for wet clay parameters will be :
and for dry clay parameters

The above example will output a Qv curve (Qv_ms) for the Illite and Chlorite clay minerals. The
output Qv curve can be fed directly into the Sw parameter grid (see below) and used in the
Waxman & Smits or Dual Water equations. The output curves are calculated after each loop of
the mineral solver and before the water saturation calculations are made.
PhiTClay
This output equation is designed to output a clay total porosity curve for use in the Waxman Smits
or Dual Water equation. This should be used for wet clay models only. The output PhiTClay curve
is calculated as follows.
The mineral end point parameters are set for the wet clay minerals only. The other minerals and
fluids are set to zero. The Wet clay minerals end point parameters used in the PhiTClay equation
are the total porosities in 100% wet clay for each mineral. If only one clay mineral is used then the
result curve will be a fixed constant and it's value can be entered directly into the parameter grid '
PhiT Clay' parameter.
The above example will output the curve 'PhiTcl_ms'. The Illite wet clay porosity is set to 0.156
and the Chlorite to 0.101. The output curve will have values between 0.156 and 0.101. In zones of
zero clay the program will output the value of the first clay mineral (in this case it would be 0.156).
The 'PhiTcl_ms' curve can be input into the parameter grid (see below) to be used to calculate
the total porosity from the effective porosity that is calculated from the model.
For dry clay models the 'PhiTClay' is the bound water and should be entered as a mineral / fluid

directly into the model grid. The bound water volume should be calculated by using a constant
equation (see the above section on Constant Equations).
Mineral Types
The 'Mineral Types', set from the drop-down menu, control how a mineral is to be used to make
the final results. It is very important that the correct 'Type' is set.
Un-invaded Fluids
Matrix types of 'Water Sw' and 'Hyd. Sw' are the fluids in the un-invaded zones. These are not
used for calculating porosity and do not have to be entered unless an equation has fluids that
read in the un-invaded zone (see Invasion Factor above). The porosity in the un-invaded zone
will be the same as the porosity in the invaded zone (see Porosity equalization above).
Clay Model and Porosity

The clay added into the model can either be 'Dry Clay' or 'Wet Clay'. An error message will result
if wet and dry clays are mixed in a model. 'Bound Water' can only be added into a 'Dry Clay'
model.
Regardless of whether a 'Dry' or 'Wet' clay model is created, the program calculates effective and
total porosity and any of the water saturation equations can be used.
Wet Clay Model
Where
Vwateri = i'th Mineral of type Water Sxo
Vhydrocarboni = i'th Mineral of type Hydrocarbon Sxo
Vwetclayi = i'th Mineral of type Wet Clay
Phie = Effective Porosity
Phit = Total Porosity
Vdcl = Volume dry clay
PhitClay = Entered parameter total clay porosity ('PhiT Clay')
Dry Clay Model
If bound water is included in the model then :

If no Bound water is entered into the model then we assume that the water entered is total
porosity then :
PhitClay is the 'Total Clay Porosity' parameter entered in the zonal parameter section ('PhiT
Clay'). This can be a curve which can be calculated from the mineral volumes as an Output
equation curve.
Flushed Zone Water Saturation

If the 'Sxo Method' parameter is set to 'Min Model' in the parameter section, the resulting Sxo
will be calculated from the mineral model volumes.
For the 'Wet Clay' model or the 'Dry Clay' model where 'Bound water' is included in the model :
For the 'Dry Clay' model where 'Bound water' is not included in the model and the 'Water'
mineral is taken as total porosity :

Water Saturations
Water Saturations (Sw and Sxo) can either be calculated directly from the model by setting the '
Sw Method' and 'Sxo Method' parameter in the parameter table or by using one of the Sw
equations below. It is recommended not to use the direct method, since the water saturation
equation used is limited to a modified Archie with 'n' = 'm'.
Flushed zone and un-invaded zone water saturations are calculated after the porosity is obtained
from the linear-equation solver.
The following options are available for calculation of water saturation:
Archie:
Archie PhiT:
Simandoux:
Modified Simandoux:
Indonesian (Poupon-Leveaux):
Modified Indonesian:
Dual Water:

if the 'm' source parameter is set to 'm*' then 'm' is calculated as follows
Qv is either entered as a curve or calculated from PhiT using the 'a' and 'b' input parameters as
below. Qv can be calculated from mineral volumes and output as an Output Equation curve and
then entered as an input parameter curve.
The Cm parameter is used to adjust the weighting on the variable 'm*' and is entered as a
If the 'm' source parameter is not set to 'm*' the 'm*' used in the equation will be the input 'm'
parameter.
Juhasz (Waxman-Smits):
Waxman-Smits:
Qv is either entered as a fixed value or input curve or calculated from:
Where 'a' and 'b' are entered parameters and can be interactively selected through the
1/PhiT / Qvapp crossplot.(see the Interactive Plot section above)
B is an entered parameter or calculated from:
if the 'm' source parameter is set to 'm*' then 'm' is calculated as follows

The Cm parameter is used to adjust the weighting on the variable 'm' and is entered as a
If the 'm' source parameter is not set to 'm*' the 'm*' used in the equation will be the input 'm'
parameter.
Where
m = Cementation factor
m* = Cementation factor used for Dual Water or W & S equations
n = Saturation exponent
a = Tortuosity factor
Sw = Effective water saturation
SwT = Total water saturation
Rw = Formation water resistivity
Rwb = Bound water resistivity
Rt = Input resistivity curve
Rcl = Resistivity of the clay
Qvn = "Normalized" cation exchange capacity per unit total pore volume
Bn = "Normalized" equivalent conductance of clay cations (Qvn/Cwapp
crossplot)
Qv = Cation exchange capacity per unit total pore volume
B = Equivalent conductance of clay cations
T = Formation temperature in degrees centigrade
Qvn is output as a curve if the Juhasz equation is set as the default Sw equation. Apparent water
conductivity is also output. The 'interactive Qvn/Cwapp' crossplot can be used to set the Bn
factor (see the Interactive Crossplot section above). The Bn factor is adjusted on the crossplot
so that the 100% wet line passes through the wet shaly points. It should be noted that there is a
strong correlation between the bound-water volume (PhiT-Phie) and the Bn factor. If the user
changes the bound-water by changing the 'PhiTclay' parameter, then the 'Qvn/Cwapp' will
change and the Bn should be adjusted.
The cementation factor can either be:
entered as a parameter.
entered as an input curve.
calculated using the Shell formula.
calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs.
calculated from Qv to produce a variable m*. Dual Water and W&S equations only.
For the 'EPT/Rxo' option then the EPT tool must be part of the mineral model and the 'Sxo
Method' parameter must be set to 'Min Model'. The Sxo equation option should not be included
in the mineral model since the EPT equation will be used to calculate the flushed-zone saturation
as part of the mineral model.
If 'm' is calculated from the Shell formula, the following equation is used:
If the 'm vari wth Vcl' parameter is set to 'On', then over zones where Vcl > Vcl cut-off, ' m' is
adjusted as follows:

This has the effect of removing any hydrocarbons in the shales. This adjustment occurs after any
calculation of a variable 'm*'.
The saturation exponent can be entered either:
as a parameter,
as an input curve, or
if 'm' has been calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs, then 'n' can be set to 'm' plus a fixed
value. This is done by setting the 'm plus value' parameter.
If the Archie PhiT, Dual Water, Juhasz or Waxman Smits saturation equation has been used,
then the effective water saturation is calculated as follows:
Flushed zone water saturations

The same equation that was chosen for the Sw calculation will be used for Sxo. The parameters
are substituted as follows:
Rmf for Rw
Rxo for Rt
Rmfb for Rwb
RxoCl for Rcl
If no Rxo tool is available then Sxo can be calculated from an empirical formula. The 'Sxo
Method' parameter must be set to 'Inv Fac' and the 'Invasion Factor' parameter is used to set
the relationship between Sw and Sxo. The equation used is :
The default value of the 'Invasion Factor' is 2.0. The following graph shows the relationship
between Sxo and Sw with different invasion factors.

In Oil-Based Mud, the invasion factor parameter gives the actual value of Sxo in the flushed zone.
Hence an invasion factor of 0.5 would give a maximum Sxo in the flushed zone of 0.5.
Sxo limits
For water based mud (WBM) Sxo is limited to be greater than Sw.
If the 'Sxo Limit' flag parameter is set, then Sxo will also be limited to the following:
For oil based muds (OBM) Sxo is limited to be less than Sw.
Variable 'm' and 'n'

If the user has selected to calculate a variable 'm', then this is calculated using the chosen water
saturation equation, solving it for 'm' by using the Sxo value calculated from the EPT TPL curve.
The resultant 'm', which can be output as a curve, can be limited in its values by setting the
parameters 'min m value' and 'max m value'. These limits allow the restriction of 'm' to sensible
values.
Iteration Loops
The input 'auto-calibrated' end-point parameters and the Sxo equation need the porosity and
flushed-zone water saturation to be entered. To calculate the porosity and Sxo, the mineral
calculation needs to be solved. Hence, an iterative loop is used to solve the results. The iteration
loop continues until the difference between iterations in porosity and Sxo are as follows:

f e difference < 0.001

Sxo difference < 0.002
Final Calculations
BVW = Bulk volume water
BVWsxo = Bulk volume water flushed zone
Rwapp = Rw apparent
Rmfapp = Rmf apparent
Cwapp = 1 / Rwapp Apparent water conductivity
'Rwapp', 'Rmfapp' and 'Cwapp' are converted to the temperature entered for Rw and Rmf
respectively.
Qvn = Normalized Qv (Juhasz W&S plot)
QvApp = Apparent Qv (W&S plot)
PhiT_recp = 1 / PhiT Reciprocal of PhiT (W&S plot)
If the Rxo curve is entered, and Sxo is calculated from the EPT mineral model, and 'm' is not
calculated from the EPT/Rxo logs, the following calculations are made:
1. Rmf equivalent. The flushed-zone water saturation equations are solved for Rmf using
the value of Sxo, calculated from the mineral model. The results are output in the RMFEQ
curve.
2. A Bulk volume irreducible water is calculated. This is the amount of formation water left
in the flushed zone. The Rmf equivalent, calculated in 1 (above), should be equal to the
value of Rmf if all the formation water is flushed out by the filtrate. Any variance from this
can be used to calculate the amount of residual formation water.
Where
BVWIRR = Bulk volume water irreducible
The following limits are applied to BVWIRR:
BVW > BVWIRR > 0
PHIFLAG
The output curve PHIFLAG is a logic flag curve. It can have one of the following values:

PHIFLAG LOGIC
VALUE
2 A Limit equation was used in the model results
4 Main linearization loop did not converge after 20 iterations
5 Solver did not converge after 30 iterations
6 Sw curve set to 1.0 due to 'Phi Sw Limit' or 'Vcl Sw Limit' parameter
limits being reached
7 Sw limited to Sw irreducible parameter
8 Sw equation loop did not converge after 10 iterations
For a normal execution of the program at any depth level, the PHIFLAG should be zero.

22.2 Monte Carlo Error Analysis

The 'Monte Carlo Error Analysis' module uses a Monte Carlo simulation to estimate the errors in
a petrophysical analysis. The user enters the distribution of possible errors in the interpretation
parameters and input curves. The program, using the error distributions, randomises the input
parameters and makes multiple passes through the analyses modules. The results for each
simulation are accumulated and a distribution of the results can be made.
22.2.1 Monte Carlo Error Analysis

The 'Monte Carlo Error Analysis Module' uses a Monte Carlo simulation to estimate the errors
in a petrophysical analysis. The user enters the distribution of possible errors associated with the
interpretation parameters and the input curves. The program, using the error distributions,
randomizes the input parameters and makes multiple passes through the analysis modules. The
results for each simulation are accumulated and a distribution of the results can be made.
Section 22.2 Advanced Interpretation : Monte Carlo Error Analysis

The module is accessed under the main 'Advanced Interpretation' menu 'Monte Carlo Error
Analysis'.
The Monte Carlo User Interface

The user interface is organized on 'tabbed' screens. The 'Model' tab is used to set up the
interpretation workflow that will be analyzed.
The user selects the IP interpretation modules to include in the workflow. Each module that is
selected (the 'Use' column is 'checked') has a 'set-up' screen. The 'module' set-up tabs have
some properties which are common throughout the interface for setting up curves and parameters
for the Monte Carlo simulation runs. These properties are illustrated for the 'Clay Volume'
module in the following screen capture.


The 'Use' column - 'checking' a row, flags that the entered row is to be used in the Error
analysis workflow.
'Parameter Name' - lists the parameter names found within the interpretation modules'
(in this case 'Clay Volume') Parameter Set.
The 'Type Shift' column allows the user to select the 'type of shift' to be applied to each
parameter. Three options are available from the a drop-down box list:
'Linear' : The parameter is changed by adding or subtracting the shift.
Result = Input + Shift
'Percent' : The parameter is changed by using a percent shift.
Result = Input x (1 + Shift / 100)
'Reciprocal' : The reciprocal of the parameter is changed by adding or
subtracting the shift.
Result = 1 / ( 1 / Input + Shift )
The 'Shift Distribution' column allows the user to select the type of random distribution
to apply to each parameter. Three options are available from the drop-down box list:
'Gaussian'
'Triangular', and
'Square'.
The program uses a random number generator, seeded through the CPU clock time, to calculate
the shifts for each parameter for each simulation. At the start of each simulation, each parameter
is changed using a different random number.
The 'Initial Value' column displays the current range of starting values for the
parameter. Since each module could have multiple zones with different values in each,
the maximum and minimum values are shown in the 'Initial Value' entries.
The 'Low Value Shift' and 'High Value Shift' columns set the ranges for the shifts in the
parameters. These values must be positive values. For the 'Gaussian' distribution the 'Low
Value Shift' + 'High Value Shift' represents four standard deviations. The following diagrams
show how the distribution type, 'Low Value Shift' parameter and 'High Value Shift' parameter
affect the distribution shape.
The 'Gaussian' distribution is limited to 2.5 standard deviations either side of the Mean value. If
the random number generator comes up with a value outside of this range, then another random
number will be chosen. This is done to try and keep the distribution within reasonable limits, since
very large shifts in parameters will make some parameters, like Rw, have non-sensible results

(negative) and will result in the interpretation module refusing to run.
The number of visible 'set-up' screens in the Monte Carlo Error Analysis interface depends upon
which interpretation modules / Parameter Sets are selected for use in the Monte Carlo simulation
workflow on the 'Model' tab. The following list includes all the IP modules that can be run in a
simulation, together with the output curves and output graphic results in the form of histograms,
crossplots and Tornado plot.
'Model'
'Clay Volume'
'Porosity Sw'
'Mineral Solver'
'Cut-off'
'User Programs'
'Input Curves'
'Dependencies'
'Output'
'Histo's'
'Xplots'
'Tornado Plot'
These module 'tabs' are described below.

'Model' Tab
The 'Model' tab allows the user to set up the Monte Carlo analysis workflow. For each simulation
iteration, the program will run the interpretation modules in the order displayed on this screen
(from top to bottom). The interpretation modules are selected by choosing the module name from
the drop-down box and then 'checking' the 'Use' box adjacent to the Module name. The screen
shot shown above illustrates the set-up for a 'conventional' deterministic interpretation workflow
which includes the 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity / Water Saturation' and 'Cut-off and Summation'
modules. The individual module 'tabs' are described below, in the 'Clay Volume, Porosity /Sw
and Cutoff' tabs section.
NOTE: The order in which modules are run can be changed by 'clicking' in the grey space to the
left of the 'Use' column. The user can then drag a Module entry line up or down, to a new
position.
The 'Mineral Solver' can be run as a 'module'. This allows the results of a probabilistic
interpretation to be included in the Monte Carlo Error computation. The 'Mineral Solver'
module must already have been run on the subject well before selecting the 'Mineral
Solver' Parameter Set in the Monte Carlo operation. An additional 'Mineral Solver' tab
will be visible in the MonteCarlo interface when this module is 'checked', as described
below.
The 'Formula' and 'Multi-Line Formula' modules can be used to perform functions that
are not available in the standard log analysis modules. Multiple 'Formula' modules can
be included in a workflow. Therefore, a simple log analysis workflow could be built up by
simply running 'Formula' or 'Multi-Line Formula' several times without using the 'Clay

Volume' or 'Porosity Sw' modules.

The 'Fuzzy Logic' and 'Multi-Linear Reg(ression)' modules can be included in the
workflow. This allows results from these analysis modules, to be added to the Monte
Carlo Error computation. Hence, if you are using the 'Fuzzy Logic' module to compute a
permeability curve, for example, then the errors in the input to the Fuzzy Logic
computation can be modeled.
The 'Curves from Zones' module can also be included in the workflow. This module
turns zoned parameters into curves. Since the Monte Carlo Error Analysis changes the
parameters in modules, then, if the results of these parameters are used to calculate
other results, the inclusion of this module in the workflow allows the user huge flexibility
over what calculations are made. For example, the zone average PHI Res values from
the 'Cut-off and Summation' module could be written to an output curve using this
module and then another computation ('User Formula' / 'Multi-line Formula') could be
run using the parameter 'Curve', for instance, to compute permeability for each Monte
Carlo model iteration.
Any 'User Program' that is currently available to the program can also be used in the
model. In the drop-down box there will be the name of the user programs. In the
example above, only the Archie user program is available.
NOTE: In order for any modules to be used in the workflow, they must have been set up and run
on the well data before using the Monte Carlo module. You must, therefore, have made an
interpretation before starting. This includes the User Programs.
The 'Set Name' box on the 'Model' tab gives the name of the Parameter Set to be used for the
module. For the 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity Sw' and 'Cutoff' modules this Set name will default to
the current Parameter Set loaded in memory. If the user wants to select another Parameter Set
from disk, then the full file name can be entered.
To use the 'Formula' or the 'Multi-line Formula' modules, the user must have first saved the
formula to disk using the 'Save Formula' button in their respective windows. The user then enters
the full file name of the saved user formula in a row under the 'Set Name' column heading. The '
Browse' buttons are very useful in selecting the full file names.
The 'Cutoff' module is not required in the workflow list, but when not used, it limits the results to
only showing the foot by foot errors on the output curves.
The 'Set Name' box, below the data input 'grid', allows the user to select the output name of the
file into which to store the full Monte Carlo simulation results. The results and input parameters
are saved by 'clicking' the 'Save' button or 'File' Save Parameter Set 'Monte Carlo' on the
main menu. The results, once saved, can be re-loaded by clicking the 'Load' button on the Monte
Carlo window and selecting the saved file name.

'Clay Volume', 'Porosity Sw' and 'Cutoff' Tabs
'Clay Volume', 'Porosity Sw' and 'Cutoff' tab screens allow the user to specify the input
parameters to be used for the simulations. The defaults are read from a user-editable disk file '
MonteCarloDefaults.par', stored in the IP program directory.
The user can select which parameter to use by 'clicking' in the 'Use' box. All parameters by
default are selected. Many of these parameters will in fact not be used in the analysis. This does
not cause a problem, since changing a parameter that is not used will have no effect on the
results.
The parameter names are identical to those shown in each Interpretation module's 'Parameter'
windows.
Mineral Solver Tabs

When the 'Mineral Solver' is selected as an input module to the Monte Carlo Error analysis and
the 'Use' column is 'checked' adjacent to the module name, the 'Mineral Solver' tab will be
launched, as illustrated below:

The 'Mineral Solver' tab contains two sub-tabs; 'Zonal Parameters' and 'Model Parameters'.
The 'Model Parameters' sub-tab contains the following elements:
'Model Name' drop-down list - a list of the 'models' contained within the 'Mineral Solver'
Parameter Set.
'Use' column - 'check' a row to use it in the Monte Carlo computation.
'Mineral Column' - drop-down list of the 'Minerals' and 'Fluids' used in the Mineral
Solver model.
'Equation Line' - drop-down list of the 'Equations' / 'Tools' used in the Mineral Solver
model.
'Shift Type' - 'Linear', 'Percent' or 'Reciprocal'.
'Shift Distribution' - 'Gaussian', 'Triangle' or 'Square'.

'Initial Value' - Equation end-point value for the selected 'Mineral', taken from the
Mineral Solver model.
'Low / High Values' - 'default values' are filled in which are equal to the Mineral
end-point value plus or minus 10% of the 'valid value'. The user can change these
values.
The 'Zonal Parameters' screen is illustrated below:
The user can edit any of the 'Initial Value' and 'Low / High Value Shift' entries for the
parameters loaded from the 'Mineral Solver' Parameter Set. The 'Parameter Name' correspond
to the saved 'Mineral Solver' parameters in that module.
'User Programs' Tab

The 'User Programs' tab allows the user to specify the input parameters to be used for any
simulations which include 'User Programs'. The default 'Low Value Shift' and 'High Value Shift'
parameters are 10% of the initial value.
NOTE: The Monte Carlo module looks for the 'User Program' (UP) Parameter Sets for the
subject well in order to determine the available 'User Programs' for inclusion in the simulation
run. For a 'User Program' to appear in the 'User Program' drop-down list, you must first have
run the 'User Program' in the subject well and saved the UP Parameter Set.
If more than one 'User Program' is used, the user must change the 'User Program' in the 'User
Program' drop-down box and change the parameters for each 'User Program' used in the
workflow set up under the 'Model' tab.

'Input Curves' Tab
The 'Input Curves' tab allows the user to specify the type of errors to be applied to the input
curves. The same options are available as for the Interpretation module parameter shifts.
The 'Input Curves' options are the only way the user can vary results in the 'Formula' module. If
you want to use a constant value in an equation and vary that constant during the simulation; then
the constant value must be converted into a 'Constant' curve (using the formula module) and use
the curve, instead of the constant value, in the original formula. You can then add the constant
curve to the 'Input Curves' list and vary it as a normal curve.
'Dependencies' Tab

The 'Dependencies' tab allows the user to set dependencies between parameters. This can
mean that if one parameter is changed, for example - to increase its value, then the second, '
dependent' parameter will also be increased. The degree of correlation between the parameters
can be set using the 'Correlation' parameter. A 'Correlation' parameter of zero (0) will mean
that there is no correlation. A value of 1 equates to a 100% correlation and a value of '-1' equals
an inverse 100% correlation.
The 'Correlation' works by taking the randomly-selected shift for 'Parameter 1' and applying the
same shift to dependent 'Parameter 2'. If the correlation is 'negative' then the shift will be the
inverse amount. For correlation coefficients of less than 1, the correlated shift will then have a
randomness applied to it - depending on the value of correlation. A coefficient of 0.5 will apply a
randomness of half what would have been selected if the coefficient was 0.0.
To illustrate the procedure the following crossplots show an 'm' and 'n' dependency correlation of
0.5 and a 'Neu Wet Clay' and 'Rho Wet Clay' dependency correlation of -0.8.

'Output' Tab
The 'Output Curve Names' allows the user to select up to 10 curves to be output. For each
output curve, the program will calculate the Mean and Standard Deviation statistics on a
level-by-level basis. Any curve can be chosen as an output curve. For example, if the user wants
to see how a simulation input curve varies, add its name to the output list. The output statistics
curves (Mean, plus one standard deviation & minus one standard deviation) are output to the '
Curve Set' entered in the box below the 'Output Curve Names' list panel. To add a new Set to

the well click the 'Edit Sets' button.
The 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' boxes allow the user to limit the interval over which to run
the simulation. The output curves will have their statistics calculated over this interval exactly. For
the 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity Sw' and 'Cutoff' modules, each module zone will be calculated if its
depth interval overlaps with the entered 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' interval. The 'User
Formula' and 'Multi-Line Formula' modules, if they are included in the simulation run, make no
checks to see if the depth ranges overlap, but just run the interval specified on the formula input
screen.
The 'Stop simulation at' box puts a maximum limit at which to halt the simulations. The user can
halt the simulation at any time by 'clicking' the 'Stop' button on the 'Simulation Run Window'.
The maximum number of simulations allowable is 5000, the default value is 2000.
The 'Update Graphics every' box allows the user to set the iteration steps between updates of
the graphical output displays. If the workflow runs very slowly then this number may need to be
changed to meet the users speed requirements.
The 'Output Percentiles' boxes allow the user to select the percentiles to display in the results
listing. By default, the 10th percentile will be the 10th percent lowest value of all the simulation
results, except for Sw where it will be the 10th percent highest value. If this convention does not
suit the user, then it can be changed by editing the 'MonteCarloDefaults.par' file (stored in the IP
program directory) and changing the 'Results' section at the end of the file.
The 'Auto Log Plot' button will change the Log Plot display to a standard display giving the result
curves mean values and their standard deviations. For each output curve, three other curves are
created in the well. The curve mnemonics and format are illustrated below:
XXXMN 'Mean Result' curve

XXXPSD 'Plus one standard deviation'
XXXMSD 'Minus one standard deviation'
Where XXX is the original curve name
The following is an example of the 'Auto Log Plot' with the default input curves. The original
curves (PHIE, SW, VWCL and PHIT) are displayed as dashed lines. It should be noted that the
original curves are the direct output of the 'Interpretation' modules and that they will display the
results of a single 'deterministic' simulation. The user will therefore see values that fall outside the
standard deviation range during the Monte Carlo simulation run. Once the simulation is finished
the curves will be restored to their original value and should fall very close to the Mean value.

The 'Histograms' button will display a set of histograms, which can be set up under the 'Histo's'
tab. The following is an example output.

The histograms are displayed with the Mean value displayed as a vertical blue line and a one
standard deviation line in green either side of the Mean line. The green curve represents a
'Gaussian' distribution curve fitted to the data. Optionally a 'Triangular' distribution line can be
fitted.
By right-mouse 'clicking', or selecting the menu, the user can copy the graphics to either the
printer or the clipboard. The graphics copied to the clipboard are saved as an enhanced metafile
(.emf) and can be pasted and re-sized in standard presentation-type software.
The 'Crossplots' button will display a set of crossplots, which can be set up under the 'Xplot's'
tab. The following is an example output.

The 'Result Listing' button will display the zonal results which were set up in the 'Cut-off'
module, along with their percentile results from the simulation. The following is an example of
part of a listing.

The top line for each zone lists the original 'deterministic' results from the 'Cutoff' module. The
second line of the report gives the Mean value of all the individual 'probabilistic' simulation results.
The following lines then display the probabilistic percentile results as defined by the user.
NOTE: Each simulation run randomly changes the input curves and interpretation parameters.
The parameters used for each simulation iteration are saved in-memory. At the end of the
MonteCarlo simulation run, which could involve several thousand iterations, the values used for
every parameter are ranked from low to high and basic statistics are run on each one. The Mean
and Percentile results are calculated on an individual parameter-by-parameter basis. So, for
example, the AvPhi Res P50 value will not necessarily come from the same simulation iteration
as the Av VCL Res parameter P50 value. This means that a straight multiplication of the P50
'Gross thickness', P50 'Net to Gross Ratio', P50 AvPhi Res and P50 (1-Av Sw Res) values will
not yield the exact P50 value for the 'Net PayThickness Res' (Phi*So*H) parameter, though it
should be close. It is up to the user to decide on how to use the results and resolve the
discrepancies between the interdependencies.
Parts of the screen listing shown above can be copied to the clipboard by highlighting the required
text, then with a right mouse 'click' select 'Copy Listing to clipboard'.

'Histograms' ('Histo's) Tab
The 'Histo's' tab allows the user to set up the histograms to be displayed. Up to nine different
histograms can be displayed together. Histograms can be either made from the input parameters
and curves (in this case what is displayed are the shifts applied to the parameter at each
simulation level), or made from one of the output summation results. The user selects the
parameter to create a histogram for from a drop-down box and 'checks' the 'Use' box to display
the histogram.
The 'Zone' box applies to the output result histograms. The user can select which zone to plot.
The 'Lft Scale' and 'Rht Scale' boxes allow the user to select the histogram scale. If left blank,
the program will select a scale that displays the total range of values.
The 'Overlay' box allows the user to select what type of overlay lines are displayed on the
histogram. The default is to have a 'Gaussian' distribution. The 'Triangular' distribution will put a
triangle on the histogram connecting the left most point to the highest point to the right most point.
The 'Display' button will update the histogram plot with any changes that have been made.

'Crossplots' Tab
The 'Xplot's' tab allows the user to set up the crossplots to be displayed. Up to nine different
crossplots can be displayed together. Crossplot axes can be made either of the input parameters
and curves (in this case what is displayed are the shifts applied to the parameter at each
simulation level), or one of the output summation results. The user selects the names of the
different axes from drop-down boxes and 'checks' the 'Use' box to display the crossplot.
The 'Zone' box applies when the user selects an X or Y axis name which is an output
result. The user can select which zone to plot.
The 'Lft Scale', 'Rht Scale', 'Bot Scale' and 'Top Scale' boxes allow the user to select
the crossplot scales. If left blank, the program will select scales to encompass the total
range of values.
The 'Display' button will update the crossplots with any changes that have been made.
The default crossplots and histograms can be changed by editing the '
MonteCarloDefaults.par' file (stored in the IP program directory).
The 'Start' Button

The 'Start' button will activate the Monte Carlo simulation run. The following window is displayed.

The 'Simulation Count' allows the user to see how many iterations have been made.
The 'Pause' button temporarily pauses the simulation to allow the user to look at the
current results without the screens continually updating. Once paused, the 'Run' button
becomes active, and 'clicking' this restarts the simulations.
The 'Stop' button stops the simulation at the current count, restores all parameter sets
and curves to their starting position, and cleans up the temporary curves.
Results from the simulation can be output to the printer or to a disk file by selecting 'Print
Parameter set' under 'File' on the main menu.
'Run Errors'
It is quite likely that the user will experience error messages similar to that shown below.
These are caused when the input parameter has been adjusted by the program to have a value
that lies outside the normal expected range, and the interpretation module will not run with that
value. If this happens, click 'OK' and then stop the simulation. It will then be necessary to adjust
the appropriate parameter, which is going outside its normal range, by changing the 'Shift' values
associated with that parameter.
The parameters that are most likely to cause this problem are resistivity-type parameters,
which make no sense if they become negative.
Print Button
If the 'Print' button is 'clicked', the user has the option to output the simulation results to a text file
or to the printer. The listing will include result listing plus a list of all input parameters used in the
simulations along with their shifts.
If the 'Simulation Raw results data to file' is 'clicked', then a '.csv' (comma delimited) file is
produced containing all of the raw output data from each simulation run. This file will contain one
line of text per simulation run. Each line will have all the input shifts and output results. This file is
designed to be loaded into a spreadsheet for detailed analysis by the more expert user. To output
the '.csv' file using semi-colons instead of commas as the delimiter go to 'Tools' 'Options' '
Miscellaneous Options' 'CSV Delimiter'.

'Tornado Plot' Tab
The 'Tornado Plot' error analysis display shows the relative importance of each parameter in the
overall error associated with a result parameter.
In order to calculate the errors, a set of workflow runs is made. For each parameter in the Monte
Carlo analysis, two runs are made; one with the parameter set to its low value and one set to its
high value ( 2 standard deviations for Gaussian distributions). All other parameters are kept to
their default values. This can take a little time to run, but once run, a tornado plot can be made for
any output parameter without having to re-do the simulation runs. Any change in the Monte Carlo
Error Analysis set-up will mean the 'Tornado Plot' error runs will have to be re-made.
The 'Calculate errors' button will run the error analysis. The 'Display Plot' button will activate the
'Tornado Plot' and run the error analysis, if not previously run.

The 'Tornado Plot' displays the errors associated with any of the output parameters. Parameters
are selected from the 'X Axis Parameter' list box at the bottom of the plot. Parameters can be
displayed by zone or 'All' zones can be displayed. The plot is displayed with all selected input
parameters shown in the Y axis with decreasing importance towards the bottom of the plot. The
red bands show the effect of the selected input parameter on the output parameter. The Monte
Carlo error ranges for each parameter, along with their starting values, are displayed on the right
of the plot. A '%' sign indicates that the shift for the parameter is in percent. An 'R' character
indicates that this is a reciprocal shift (see the section on 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity SW' and '
Cut-offs' Tab, above).
The Tornado plot can either be sent to the clipboard for inclusion in another document or sent
directly to a printer by either using the 'Print' button or else right mouse 'clicking' on the plot to
display the two options 'Copy Graphics to Clipboard' and 'Output to Printer'.
22.2.2 Batch Monte Carlo

The 'Batch Monte Carlo' module allows the user to set up and run the Monte Carlo simulation
program on multiple wells. Since the Monte Carlo simulation can take considerable time to run
(from minutes to hours depending of the workflow model), batching multiple wells can mean that
the process can be run overnight without the need of user input.

Before the 'Batch Monte Carlo' can be run, a parameter model file must be created in the
regular Monte Carlo Error Analysis module. This is done by setting up and running the 'Monte
Carlo Error Analysis' module on one well. Once run (only a few simulations are needed), the
results are saved as a 'Model' file by using the 'Save' button at the bottom of the 'Monte Carlo
Error Anaylsis' module window.
The user selects the wells to run the Monte Carlo analysis on and the 'Monte Carlo Parameter
Model file' to use.
The 'Stop simulation at' box allows the user to select the number of simulations to run for each
well. This will override the number set in the regular 'Monte Carlo Error Analysis' parameter file.
The 'Output listing to disk' will output for each well the zonal result listing. This file will be put
into each wells 'output directory'. Therefore, it is important that separate output directories
are used for each well, otherwise the results will all be written to the same file.
The 'Output listing to printer' will send the zonal result listing, for each well, to the printer.
The 'Raw Simulation Results to disk' will output the raw simulation results for each well. This
file will be put into the wells output directory.
The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the saving and restoring of the setup for the batch job.

'Model' Tab
The model set allows the user to set the parameter set names for the workflow for each well. This
is necessary since the user might be using different parameter set names in different wells.
The 'Set Default Set names for all wells' button is very useful since it searches each well in turn
and looks up the default set names for each module in the workflow.
'Input Curves' Tab

The input curve set-up allows the user to check that all the correct curves have been selected for
the curve input. These are the curves that have been set up in the Monte Carlo to have simulated
errors in them. If a curve is missing for a well, then the following message will be displayed when
the 'Run' button is clicked :
The user can choose to ignore the error and continue. If this is done then this curve will be
removed from the Monte Carlo input curves.
'Output Curves' Tab

The output curve setup allows the user to set the output curves that are created in each well.
These are the curves that have been set up in the Monte Carlo to have foot by foot statistics
generated on them. If a curve is missing for a well then the following message will be displayed
when the 'Run' button is clicked :
The user can continue but no statistics will be generated for the missing output curve.
'Run' Button
The 'Run' button starts the batch job. The first thing the module does is to check the input for
each well before starting the simulations. If any errors are found the following message will
appear.

The user must fix the problem and then start the batch job again.
The error message dialog at the bottom of the window reports the status of the job and whether
any errors were found. Right mouse clicking on the dialog will bring up a pop-up menu where the
selected messages can be copied into the clipboard for inclusion into another document.
It is recommended that a test run is made for all wells with 1 or 2 simulations set in the 'Stop
simulation at' box so that the user is confident that every thing is setup correctly before setting
the final number of simulation runs (2000) and letting the program run for many hours.
'Stop' Button
The 'Stop' button will display the following message. The user can either let the current well finish
and then the batch job will be aborted or stop the current Monte Carlo run using the 'Stop' on the
Monte Carlo count window (see below) to abort the run immediately. The message window will
report what has been done.

22.3 Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

The 'Fuzzy Logic' Curve Prediction module uses the mathematics of 'Fuzzy Logic' as described
by Cuddy, S. (1997) in his paper "The Application of the Mathematics of Fuzzy Logic to
Petrophysics" (Paper S. 38th Annual Symposium of the SPWLA), to allow the prediction of a '
Result curve' from a number of 'Input curves'.
'Fuzzy Logic' is a type of logic that recognizes more than just a simple 'true' or 'false' value. With
Fuzzy logic , propositions can be represented with degrees of truthfulness or falsehood.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Advanced Interpretation' menu list.
The 'Fuzzy Logic' module is arranged on 4 'tabs' :
'Input'
'Create Model'
'Model Statistics'
'Run Model'
These tabs allow the user to set all the curve 'Inputs', 'Create the Fuzzy Logic Model', view the '
Model Statistics' and 'Run Model' to generate the 'Output curve' in the subject well. The
Section 22.3 Advanced Interpretation : Fuzzy Logic Curve Prediction

following sections describe the 'Tabs' and what the user must do to create the model, evaluate the
effectiveness of the model and run the model in a subject well (or wells).
'Input' Tab
The 'Input' tab allows the user to select multiple wells and their associated 'Input curve' names
that will be used to build the 'Prediction Model'.
'Well Name' - In the top ('Well Name') row of the grid, the user selects the wells needed
to create the model. For each well, the user must choose the input curves to be used in
the Prediction Model.
'Curve to Predict' - The second row of the grid, 'Curve to Predict', contains the name
of the curve that the user wishes to 'predict'. The 'Curve to Predict' values are sorted in
order of value then divided into bins so that all bins have the same number of data. In
addition, all 'Input Curves' are divided into the same bin sizes according to 'Input
Curves' data at the same depths as 'Curve to Predict' depths. If a well is not to be
used in the creation of a model, then leave the 'Curve to Predict' cell blank for that well.
In the grid shown above, the 'Curve to Predict' cell is left blank in well 'Well 2'. We are

therefore trying to create a model to predict curve 'PERMCORE' in Test Well 3 ('Well 2')
, using the inputs of SGR, RHOB and TNPH. The user can use up to eight input curves
per well, in a Prediction run.
'Input Curves(s)' - The 'Input Curve' types should be the consistent for all wells. For
should be in the same row of the grid. Note, however that 'Curve Names' can vary from
well to well.
'Default Name' Column - The 'Default Name' column is used to identify the selected
input curves on other displays. For example, the labels on the 'Bin Statistics'
crossplots (see later). The 'Default Name' is also used to indicate whether or not an
input curve row should be used in the Prediction model. If the 'Default Name' cell is left
'blank' then the row (and its' associated curves) will not be used to build the Prediction
model. This is very useful for switching between models without having to re-enter all the
curve names for all the wells. For example, the user can enter the curve names for
Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr and Resistivity for multiple wells and then by just 'blanking
out' the 'Default Name', create a much simpler model, using (for example) just the Gr
and Density curves.
'Log Norm' Column - The 'Log Norm' column, if set to 'Yes' will normalize the curves in
that particular row of the grid. This is done by taking the base 10 logarithm of the curve
before using it in the Prediction model. All other displays in the Fuzzy Logic module will
then reflect this. For example, when the 'Log Norm' flag is set to 'Yes', then the
minimum and maximum reported values for a curve (See 'Model Statistics') will be the
logarithmic maximum and minimum for that particular input curve.
The 'Top Depth - Model Build' and 'Bottom Depth - Model Build' rows are used to
limit the depth range of the data used to create a Prediction model. The default top and
bottom depths are the log minimum and maximum depths in each selected well.
Changing these depth values allows the user to create a Prediction model using only a
subset of the selected curve data, for example over an interval where core has been
taken. Using the 'Top Depth - Model Run' and 'Bottom Depth - Model Run' rows
allows the user to apply the Prediction model to the entire logged interval in the
Prediction well. Once a Prediction Model has been built, The 'Top Depth - Model Run'
and 'Bottom Depth - Model Run' rows are used to specify the depth interval over which
to run the Prediction model in the subject well. The default depths are the log minimum
and maximum depths in the well.
The 'Discriminator Curve 1' and 'Discriminator Curve 2' rows are used to input '
discriminator curves', which can be used to further constrain the data used in model
building and also to restrict which depth intervals to run the model over.
alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to build or apply the Fuzzy
Logic model. To use the dialog you must click the mouse cursor in an appropriate depth
entry box ('Top Depth / Bottom Depth' 'Model Build' or 'Model Run' rows). You then
have the option to select a Zone/Tops Set from the drop-down list and use these depths
in one well or in multiple wells (click the 'All Wells' button).

The 'Report' button gives the user the options to either 'Save Report' or 'Print Report'.
If 'Save Report' is selected then a 'Fuzzy.Txt' file is saved in the currently loaded
database folder. The report can then be viewed on the users screen. Below is a
screenshot of part of the saved report. Selecting 'Print report' will send the 'Fuzzy.Txt'
directly to the users default printer.

The 'Reset form' button clears all the user defined entries in the module returning the
module to its default state.
NOTE: To be able to select curves from a 'Curve Set' the user must first 'click' a cell in the
appropriate 'Well' column and then use the 'Curve Set' drop-down menu.
'Create Model' Tab
The 'Create Model' tab is used to set up the Prediction Model logic and to create a Model.
Input curve data will be divided into a number of data 'Bins' for use in the Model. The number of
'bins' must be between 2 and 100. Two types of 'bin sorting' can be applied :
1. 'Variable size bins' : This is generally used only for discrete input data such as
facies numbers. The user must enter the starting bin number and the bin width. The data
will then be sorted into bins according to the discrete values of the input data. For

example, if you have 'facies-type' data with facies numbers between 1 and 8, then set the
number of bins to '8', the starting bin number will be '1' and the bin width will be '1'.
2. 'Equal sampled bins' : The program will make a preliminary pass through the input
data to calculate the data maxima and minima for all curves. IP will then set the bin
spacings so that an equal proportion of data will be placed in each bin. This will not always
provide an exactly equal number of samples in each bin. Problems could arise when one
has more identical data values than there should be samples in a bin.
For example, if one has a dataset with 100 samples and 20 of the samples have the same
value, then, if the number of bins is set to 10 (i.e. ten samples per bin) the program can
not distribute the data equally into each bin. This will not prevent the Model from running,
since the data is handled in the same way as for the 'Variable size bins'. However, the
user should be aware of this potential complication when viewing the 'Model statistics' -
See below.
The 'Weight bin by number of samples in bin' is used in Prediction mode when the 'Variable
size bins' option is chosen. The default is to have this box 'checked'. This then adjusts the
probability that the data belongs to a bin by the number of samples in the bin. For example, if one
is trying to predict facies and the input data are representative of the overall facies distribution,
then the probability that a facies exists at a level is also dependent on the overall probability that
the facies exists. If the input data are felt not to represent the distribution of facies, for example,
you lack data for 1 facies, then unchecking this box will remove the weighting function when
calculating the probabilities and better results can be obtained.
The 'DISCRIMINATORS' can be used for limiting the data for input into the model and also for
The 'Model Set Name' is the file name used to save the parameters, when using the Save
Parameter Sets menu function.
The 'Run' button is used to calculate the statistics for the Prediction model. After the statistics are
calculated the program will automatically display the 'Model Statistics' tab (see below).
'Model Statistics' Tab

The 'Model Statistics' tab displays the results of the 'Model Build' calculations. Statistics are
displayed for individual bins (the Bin Number - 'Bin#' is shown in the top left hand cell of the '
Model Statistics' grid). To view the statistics for different bins in the model, use the 'Scroll Bin
statistics' left & right arrows.

'Number Values' - shows a count of the data points for each input curve falling within
each data bin.
The 'Mean Value', 'Standard Deviation' and 'Minimum / Maximum Value' columns
report the statistics for each input curve in the selected data bin.
The 'Show Stats Histo's' button, when 'clicked' generates a set of histograms for the input
curves, for the data in the current data bin. The 'Bin #' is shown in the title line, at the top of the
Histogram plot. By clicking the 'Scroll Bin statistics' left-right arrows, the user can scroll through
the histograms of the input curves for individual data bins. An example of a histogram plot is
shown below:

A normal 'Gaussian' distribution line is overlain on the actual input curve data. The vertical green
lines represent one Standard Deviation either side of the Mean value (the blue vertical line). To
print these histograms, or copy the graphics to the clipboard the user should 'right mouse-click' on
the plot and select one of the 'Print' options.
The 'Show Curve Xplots' button on the 'Model Statistics' tab, when 'clicked', produces a set of
crossplots of the 'bin Mean value' versus 'bin number' (Bin #) for each input curve. An example
is shown below:

The green vertical bars represent one Standard Deviation either side of the bin Mean value (the
horizontal orange bar). To print or copy the graphics to the clipboard right-mouse-button click on
the plot and select the required 'Print' option.
'Run Model' Tab

The 'Run Model' tab allows the user to set up the output curves for the Prediction Model and to
'run' the Fuzzy logic model in the Prediction well.

The 'Run' button will run the model displayed in the 'Model Statistics' tab for all wells specified
under the 'Input' tab.
The 'Output curves' generated by the model will depend on which 'Output Result' boxes are
'checked'. The output curve names can be selected by 'checking' the 'Output Result' check
boxes, next to the 'Most Likely', '2nd Most Likely' and 'Wt av. 2 most likely' labels.
'Most Likely' : The result with the highest probability.

'2nd Most Likely' : The result with second highest probability.
'Wt av. 2 most likely' : A weighted average of the two most likely results. The following
equation is used:
Where:
Res_ml = 'Most Likely' result
Res_2l = '2nd Most Likely' result
Prob_ml = Probability of 'Most Likely' result
Prob_2l = Probability of the '2nd Most Likely' result
'Probabilities all bins' : 'Checking' this box will generate a probability array curve. Each

bin will be a different sample in the array. This can be used to make a VDL type plot of
probability versus bin number.
'Most Likely high/low probability' : 'checking' this box will generate high (_mlH) and
low (_mlL) probability results curves for the 'Most Likely' result.
'Wt av. 2 most likely high/low probability' : 'checking' this box will generate high
(_avH) and low (_avL) probability results curves for the 'weighted average of the two '
Most Likely' results.
The output curves, under the 'Curve Name' column heading, are where the results of the model
are stored. The values in these curves are the Mean bin values calculated in the model creation.
The output curves, under the 'Probability' column heading, give the probability associated with
the computed results. This is a 'relative' rather than an 'absolute' probability, and its value does
depend on the number of curves used in the model. Therefore, one cannot compare the
absolute values of two models created using different numbers of input curves. (See
Section 30.5.)
The output curves, under the 'Closeness of fit' column heading, provide an indication of how
good the results are. The curve compares the 'result' to the 'original' curve, which was used to
create the model. The comparison is made on 'bin distance'.
For example, if the original curve was in bin 4 and the result is in bin 6 then the 'Closeness of fit'
curve will have a value of 2. The result is always positive. If there is no data for the original curve
then the 'Closeness of fit' curve will have a null value (-999). No 'Closeness of fit' curve is
generated for the weighted average result, since this makes no sense.
The output curves, under the 'Result Bin' column header, list the bin numbers of the result
curves. This will be the bin number with the highest probability for the 'Most Likely' result.
These curves are useful when displaying the probabilities as VDL-type displays. The curve can be
plotted on top of the VDL to show which bin has been selected for the result.
The 'Output curves' under the 'Low curve name' and 'High curve name' titles give the high /
low probability results. See 'Most Likely Result Range' Section, below.
The values under the 'Percentile' title give the percentile distance away from the selected result
to calculate the high / low probability results. See 'Most Likely Result Range' Section below.
The 'Default Curve Name' box is used to change the 'Output Curve' names easily, without
having to re-type all curve boxes. The user enters the 'root' part of the output name and clicks '
Apply'. This will change all the output curve names on the tab.
The 'Show Log Plots' button will generate a generic plot of the results. An example is displayed
below. The Cfit_ml and Cfit_2l curves are displayed as points since the input curve to display, in
this example, was core permeability PERM, also plotted as points.
Curves can also be written to different Sets by choosing the 'Output Set' name in the 'Output
Results Set' box or by creating a new Set by clicking the 'Add Set' button. In multi-well exercise
Sets will be automatically created in wells that do not contain the new Set.
The 'Null All output Curves' button will set to Null data (absent) all the 'Output curves' from the
module. This is useful for clearing the results from a plot before rerunning a model, to ensure that
the model is outputting to the correct intervals.

A histogram of the 'Closeness of fit' curve can be easily generated by clicking the right mouse
button in the track containing that curve. An example of such a histogram is shown below. From
the cumulative frequency curve one can easily see, in this example, that 80% of the results are
within 2 bins and 75% are within 1 bin of the 'Most Likely' result.

The 'Show Cross Plot' button will generate a generic plot of the results. An example is shown
below. The crossplot will seem to be banded since the results have only discrete values (the
mean of each bin).

22.3.1 Equations and Methodology

The user chooses the number of bins into which the 'training data' is to be divided. The program
sorts the 'training data' into roughly 'equal-sampled bins', starting at the lowest values and
extending to the highest. For each data 'bin' the program calculates the Mean ( ) and the
Standard Deviation ( ) for all the associated curves to be used in the prediction. The Mean and
Standard Deviation values are then used by the program, when run in prediction mode, to find the
'Most Likely' result.
To make the prediction, the program first calculates the 'fuzzy probability' that an input log is in a
certain bin. The following equation is used for this:
Where
P(Cb) - The probability that curve C is in bin 'b'
nb - The number of samples in bin 'b'
C - The input value for curve C
b - The mean value for curve C for bin 'b'

b- The standard deviation for curve C for bin 'b'
The probabilities for all the input curves are then combined as follows:
Where
Pb - The total probability for bin 'b'
P(C1b) - The probability for curve C1 for bin 'b'
The 'Most Likely' solution will be the 'bin' with the highest probability. The program outputs the '
Most Likely' bin result, the 'second highest probability' bin, and a 'weighted average' of these
two highest results. The weighting is done as follows:
Where:
Rav - Average weighted result
Rml - Most likely result
Rsl - Second most likely result
Pml - Probability of most likely result
Psl - Probability of the second most likely result
'Most Likely' Result Range

To give a quantitative feel for the errors in the results, 'High' and 'Low Result' Curves can be
generated for the 'Most Likely' and the 'Weighted Average' results. These curves are
constructed as follows:
At each level the 'bin probabilities' are converted to a normalized (0-1) cumulative frequency
distribution.
The 'Result Bin Percentile' is found (ResPC).
The 'Low result' is the bin that has the percentile ResPc Er.
The 'High result' is the bin that has the percentile ResPc + Er.
Where 'Er' is the percentile error entered on the 'Run Model' tab.

The figure above shows an example of how the high and low bin numbers are calculated using a
percentile error of 25%. To find the high and low result, extrapolations are made between the bin's
Mean result values.
If the resultant shifted cumulative frequency is outside the normalized range (01) then the result
value will be the Mean value for the first bin or last bin plus or minus two standard deviations of
the spread of data in the bin. This gives some feel for the range of data in the end bin members.
The following plot shows the results of the high and low curves in track 2. The heavy red curve is
the 'Most Likely' result while the yellow shading gives an indication of the range (fuzziness) of the
results. Track 5 contains the bin probabilities plotted as a VDL. The heavy black curve is the
position of the 'Most Likely' bin.


22.4 Multiple Linear Regression

The 'Multiple Linear Regression' module allows the user to predict a 'result curve' from a
number of 'input curves', using a 'least squares' regression routine, which will try and find the best
fit to the input data.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Advanced Interpretation' 'Multi Linear
Regression'.
'Input' Tab
The 'Input' tab (similar to the Fuzzy Logic module) sets up the input curve names to be used.
Multiple wells can be used to create the prediction model.
Select the wells needed to create the model on the first line of the grid. Once a well is selected,
choose the curves to use in the model. The second line of the grid 'Curve to Predict' is the data
to be used to create the model. If a well is not to be used in the creation of a model, but only for
Section 22.4 Advanced Interpretation : Multiple Linear Regression

prediction, then leave the 'Curve to Predict' cell blank.
The 'Default Name' column is used to identify the input curve for reference on other
displays. It is also used to see if an input curve row should be used in the model. If the '
Default Name' is blank then the row will not be used. This is very useful for switching
between models without having to re-enter all the curve names for all the wells. For
example, the user can enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr and
Resistivity for multiple wells and then by just 'blanking out' the 'Default Name' for a
curve, create a much simpler model, using (for example) just the Gr and Sonic curves.
The 'Log' column will normalise the curve by taking the base 10 logarithm of the curve
before using it. All other displays in the module will then reflect this.
The 'Top Depth Model Build' and 'Bottom Depth Model Build' rows are used to limit
the data used in the creation of a model. The defaults are the total well depths. They are
not used for running a created model. This allows the creation of a model using a subset
of the data, and checking of the model on all the data.
The 'Top Depth Model Run' and 'Bottom Depth Model Run' rows are used to specify
the interval over which to run the model. The defaults are the total well depths.
The 'Discriminator Curve 1' and 'Discriminator Curve 2' rows are used to input
discriminator curves which can be used to limit the data used in model building and also
restrict which intervals to run the model over.
alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to build or apply the
Multi-linear regression model. To use the dialog you must click the mouse cursor in an
appropriate depth entry box (Top Depth / Bottom Depth 'Model Build' or 'Model Run'
rows). You then have the option to select a 'Zone/Tops Set' from the drop-down list and
use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click the 'All Wells' button).
The 'Load model from disk' and 'Save model to disk' buttons allow the user to load or
save models to / from external disk files. Models can also be saved using the 'Save
Parameter Set' menu item.
NOTE: To be able to select a Curve Set you first have to select a cell in a well column.

'Create Model' Tab
The 'Create Model' tab is used to set up the model logic and create a model.
The 'Model Set Name' is the file name used to save the parameters, when using the 'Save
Parameter Set' menu function.
The 'Run' button is used to calculate the coefficients for the model. After the coefficients are
calculated, the program will automatically display the 'Regression Results' tab (see below).
'Regression Results' Tab

The 'Regression Results' tab displays the results of the model creation calculations. The
coefficients are displayed, corresponding to each input curve. 'Norm Coefficients' are also
displayed to give an indication of how much each input curve affects the model. The closer the
normalized coefficient value is to 'zero' for an input curve, the lower its effect on the model build.
Conversely, the closer the value is to 'one', the more important is the curves' effect on the model
build.
Additional information such as the 'Total number of data points' used from the input curves and
the 'R2' (R-squared) value are shown.
To obtain the result as a formula, 'right-click' anywhere in the coefficients 'grid' and 'click' the '
Copy as Formula' menu item. This will put the result in the clipboard as a formula and can be
pasted into other fields or documents.
'Run Model' Tab

The 'Run' button will run the model displayed in the 'Regression Results' tab for all wells
specified under the 'Input' tab.
The 'Result curve name' box is the curve name used when the model is run on the wells entered
in the 'Input' tab. This curve can also be output to different sets by choosing the set name in the '
Output set' box or creating a new set by clicking the 'Add Set' button.
The 'Null All Output Curves' button will set to Null data (absent) all the output curves from the
module. This is useful for clearing the results from a plot before re-running a model to ensure that
the model is outputting to the correct intervals.
The 'Clip resultant curve' box will, when 'checked', restrict the output curve to have values within
the minimum and maximum values entered.
The 'Show Log Plots' button will generate a generic plot of the results. An example is displayed
below. Since the 'curve to predict' was core permeability 'Perm' it is plotted as points.

The 'Show Crossplot' button will generate a generic multi-well crossplot of the results. An
example is shown below.


22.5 Neural Networks

The 'Neural Networks' curve prediction module uses neural networks to allow the prediction of a
result curve from a number of input curves.
A neural network is a mathematical model that is inspired by the way biological nervous systems,
such as the brain, process information. It is composed of a number of highly interconnected
processing elements (called neurons) which work together to solve the problems presented to it.
Neural Networks learn by example, a process known as 'training' the network, which involves
adjustments to the synaptic connections that exist between the neurons.
The neural network that IP uses is a commercial product by Neuro Solutions - www.
neurosolutions.com
The IP neural networks are built with NeuroSolutions 5.5. The number of Hidden layers = 1. For
further information visit their website at www.neurosolutions.com
Section 22.5 Advanced Interpretation : Neural Networks

The Neural Networks module is arranged on 4 'tabs' :
Input
Training Settings
Discriminators
Model Run Settings
The following sections describe the 'tabs' and what the user must do to train the neural network,
and how to run the model in a subject well (or wells).
'Input' Tab
The 'Input' tab allows the user to select multiple wells and their associated 'Input Curve' names
that will be used to train the Neural Network Model.
'Well Name' - In the top ('Well Name') row of the grid, the user selects the wells needed

to create the model. For each well, the user must choose the input curves to be used by
the Neural Network Model.
'Curve to Predict' - The second row of the grid, 'Curve to Predict', contains the name
of the curve that the user wishes to 'predict'. This is only required for wells that the user
wishes to train with.
'Input Curves(s)' The 'Input Curve' rows contain the names of the curves that the
user wishes to use to predict the 'Curve to Predict'. The 'Input Curve' types should be
the consistent for all wells. For example, all gamma ray logs should be in the same row
of the grid, all density log curves should be in the same row of the grid. NOTE: Curve
names can vary from well to well. You can use up to eight input curves per well.
'Default Name' column - The 'Default Name' column serves several purposes:
1. The values in the 'Default Name' cells are used as the default curve names
when a new well is added to the grid. When a new well is added, if the well
contains curves that match the default names then those curves are
pre-selected for the user.Each 'Default Name' is automatically filled in the first
time a curve is selected for that row, and can be changed manually thereafter.
2. The 'Curve to Predict' default name is used as the name of the output curve if a
'Curve to Predict' has not been supplied for a well.
3. The default names are also used to indicate whether or not an input curve row
should be used in the Neural Network Model. If the 'Default Name' cell is left
'blank' then the row (and its' associated curves) will not be used to build the
model. This is very useful for switching between models without having to
re-enter all the curve names for all the wells. For example, the user can enter the
curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr and Resistivity for multiple wells
and then by just 'blanking out' the 'Default Name', create a much simpler model,
using (for example) just the Gr and Density curves.
'Log' Column - The 'Log' column, if 'checked' will take the base 10 logarithm of the
curve before using it in the Neural Network Model. For curve data which is in logarithmic
form (such as core permeability) this can greatly improve the accuracy of the predicted
results.
Use Well for Training If this is 'checked' for a well then the data from that well will be
used when training the Neural Network. This (in conjunction with Use Well for Model
Run) allows the user to include both wells that they wish to train on and wells that they
wish to predict in the same model.
Zone Set for Training Neural network training is performed on zones of data (see
the Training section for more details). For this purpose special Neural 'Training Zones'
Sets are used. Use this drop-down box to select an existing Neural 'Training Zones'
Set, or type a new name to create a new one. The specified zone Set is created when
the Show Plot for Training button is clicked.
Show Plot for Training this button opens a Training log plot window for the
appropriate well. See the Training section for more details.
Use Well for Model Run If this is 'checked' for a well then an output curve will be
predicted for that well when the neural network model is run.
'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' These rows are used to specify the depth interval
over which to run the Neural Network Model in the subject well. The default depths are
the log minimum and maximum depths in the well. These depths can be changed with
the 'Get Depths from Zones' button, or by manually entering new values.
Show Plot for Model Run this button opens a log plot window for the appropriate
well which shows the input curves and the output curve for the appropriate well. NOTE:
If the model has not yet been run for the well, this will just show the input curves.

alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to run the Neural Network
Model. If the 'Full Well Range' box is 'checked' then the 'Zone/Top Set', 'Top' and '
Bottom' boxes are grayed out as the full well range will be used. To select zones then
'uncheck' the 'Full Well Range' box the user then has the option to select a Zone/Tops
Set from the drop-down list and use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click
the 'All Wells' button).
The 'Load Setup' and 'Save Setup' buttons allows the loading and saving of models.
This remembers all the settings on the Neural Networks form.
The 'Report' button allows the user to print or save a report on the status of the neural
network (Well details, Training Settings, Training Results and Model Run Settings). The
button has two options when clicked; 'Save Report', which saves the report as a text file,
and 'Print Report', which allows the report to be output directly to a printer.
NOTE: To be able to select curves from a 'Curve Set' the user must first 'click' a cell in the
appropriate 'Well' column and then use the 'Curve Set' drop-down menu.
Training the Neural Network

For each well that the user wishes to use to train the neural network the following steps should be
performed:
1. Select the Curve to Predict.
2. Select the Input Curves.
3. Make sure the wells Use Well for Training entry is ticked.
4. Either select an existing Training Zones' Set or enter the name of a new Set that you
wish to create.
5. Click the wells Show Plot for Training to bring up the wells Training log plot window.
6. NOTE: The Training log plot is a specialised version of a normal plot window with some
of the more advanced options removed, but new neural network specific buttons added.
7. On the Training log plot window, create zones (in the second log plot track) that contain
representative examples of good data. The data within these zones is what will be used
to train the neural network.
For most purposes a small number (4-8) of narrow zones is enough to generate good results. See
the Neural Networks Scenarios section for more details.
NOTE: that in Training log plots, zones can be created simply be clicking in the zone track.

Once training zones have been created for all training wells the neural network can be trained.
NOTE: that if any of the training wells do not contain training zones a warning message will
appear and the training will not start.
To train the neural network click the Train Neural Network button which appears at the top-left
of each Training log plot window. A progress bar will appear showing the progress of the training.
If large training zones are used the training may take a few moments to complete.
Once the training is complete, each open Training log plot window will show a new curve (suffixed
with _nnt for neural network training) alongside the existing Curve to Predict. These curves
allow the user to see how well the neural network has been trained. If there are areas where the
network has not trained well try creating additional zones in those areas and training again.
NOTE: that these _nnt curves are temporary and will be removed when the Neural Networks
form is closed.

NOTE: that the results can be different each time the neural network is trained, even if the input
data and training zones have not been changed. This is due to the fact that each training run
begins with randomised settings and this is normal behaviour for a neural network. As such, it can
often be helpful to train the network several times to see if the results vary each time and decide
which results fit best. To aid this approach each training run can be undone with the Undo
Training button if the user decides that the results are worse than the last training run.
Once the user is happy with the training results they can, if desired, save the trained neural
network model by clicking the Save Model button. This saves the neural networks trained state
to a file, which can be re-used for subsequent model runs (see the Model Run Settings tab).
The last trained model can also be saved in the Model Run Settings tab.
Running the Neural Network

For each well that the user wishes to run the neural network on the following steps should be
performed:
1. Select the Input Curves.
2. Make sure the wells Use Well for Model Run entry is ticked.
3. Make sure the wells 'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' are correct.
Once the user is happy they can click the Run Model for selected Wells button located at the
lower-right of the Input tab. A progress bar will appear showing the progress of the model run.
Once the progress bar disappears the model run is complete.
The resulting output curves can be viewed by clicking the appropriate wells Show Plot for
Model Run 'Show Plot' button.
'Training Settings' Tab

The 'Training Settings' tab is used to specify various training options that are used when training
the neural network.
The Default Zone size is used when creating training zones in the Training log plot windows. It
specifies the size of the training zones created in the Training log plot. NOTE: that this is specified
as a number of data points, not as a depth. This option can be changed at any time and any new
zones created will have the new size.
The rest of the settings in this tab are used when actually training the neural network (with the
Train Neural Network button). These settings can be changed at any time and will be used the
next time the Train Neural Network button is clicked.
Use a single average value from each zone? 'Ticking' this option will instruct the
neural network to use a single average value from each training zone. If this option is not

selected then all curve readings within each training zone are used.
Training passes This specifies how many times the neural network will be trained
each time the Train Neural Network button is clicked. It is often prudent to train more
than once as, due to the randomised initial settings used in each training run, the neural
network can sometimes get stuck with what it (erroneously) thinks are the best results.
The default value of 3 works well to stop this from happening.
Epochs per pass This specifies how many times the training data (collected from the
'Training Zones') is presented to the neural network each time it is trained. The default
value of 100 is a good value for the neural networks supplied with IP.
Cross-validation This specifies how much of the training data is to be used by the
neural network to cross-check its training results. This is used by the network to guard
against possible over-training (where the network erroneously begins to believe that a
particular set of outcomes is more likely than others). Setting this option to 0% will
disable cross-validation checking. It is good practice to use cross-validation checking but
for small data sets it is not always practical.
Use classification network (for facies prediction)? This option will switch the
neural network to a special classification mode which is useful for categorised
predictions, such as predicting Facies. See the Neural Networks Scenarios section for
more details.
The 'Training Results' box lists all the training results.

'Model Run Settings' Tab

The 'Model Run Settings' tab is used to specify various options that are used when running the
neural network with the Run Model for selected Wells button:
Output_Curve Suffix This is appended to the output curves name so that the curve
can be easily identified.
The 'Overwrite existing output curves?' check-box gives the user the ability to
overwrite output curves from an 'old' Neural Network session with curves from a more
recent session.
Output Result Set Output curves can be written to different Sets by choosing the
output Set name in the 'Output Results Set' box or by creating a new Set by clicking the
'Add Set' button. NOTE: In multi-well exercise Sets will be automatically created in wells
that do not contain the new Set.
'Closeness of Fit Curve' - Output curve displayed on the log plots which gives the user
an idea of how close the predicted curve was to the original data.
Round output to nearest integer? This option will round all data in the output curves

to the nearest whole number. This provides an alternative method of predicting Facies
data.
Overwrite existing output curves This specifies whether to overwrite existing
curves with the same name or not. For example: predicting a RHOB curve will create an
output curve called RHOB_nn. If this option is ticked, predicting again will overwrite the
existing RHOB_nn curve. If this option is not ticked then predicting again will create a
RHOB1_nn curve, with the next run creating RHOB2_nn.......etc.
Use the last trained model Selecting this option instructs the neural network to use
the last trained model when creating output curves. This option will not be available if the
neural network has not been trained since opening the neural networks form.
Save Model - - This saves the last trained model to a file, which can be re-used for
subsequent model runs.
Load Model User can browse for a saved model.
Additional Buttons
'Report' - There are two options available
'View Report' - this displays a text file of the Neural Networks Prediction
Parameters similar to the one in the screenshot below:

An explanation of the Training Results displayed in the report is given below:

Epochs Trained - number of epochs actually performed in that training pass, which may
not be the same as the epochs per pass requested as the training may have decided to
stop because cross-validation showed it was beginning to over train.
Epoch of Best Cost - if present this shows which epoch produced the best results for
that training pass. This is for information only and isnt really of any practical use. If not
present it means that this training pass did not improve on the previous one.
Best Cost - if present this shows the minimum error that was achieved in the training
pass (the lower the better). This is the error that was achieved during the Epoch of Best
Cost.
Raw Sensitivity - shows the sensitivity of each input - basically how much affect each
input has on the output. If all sensitivities are of the same magnitude then all inputs are
equally important, but if for example one input is significantly lower than the rest (e.g. 5,

6, 0.1, 5.5) then you could probably exclude that input without adversely affecting the
results, and it may in fact improve the results.
'Print Report' - Sends the text file of the Neural Networks Prediction Parameters
to the user's default printer.
'Reset Setup' - this will clear all the input wells and resets other options to their default
settings.
'Load Setup' - loads a saved Neural Network setup from a user defined location.
'Save Setup' - saves a Neural Network setup to a user defined location. The file is
saved by default as 'NeuralNetworks.nns' into the IP project folder.
Neural Networks Scenarios
Continuous Log Prediction

The following advice applies to predicting continuous log curves:
When creating training zones, create a small zone for each distinct lithology evident in
each curve.
A small number of zones (4-8) is often enough to produce good results.
If certain lithologies are not predicting well, try adding additional zones within the
affected lithologies.
Remember to select zones that represent examples of good data. Ignore areas of
obviously incorrect data.
Do not use a classification network.
Do not round the output.
Using a single average value from each zone may be applicable if a large number of
small zones are created.
Core Porosity Prediction

The following advice applies to predicting core porosity curves:
Create a single training zone that covers all of the core data. This is safe as input values
that do not contain any core data will be automatically ignored during training.
Do not use a single average value from each zone.
Facies Prediction
There are two ways to predict Facies data:
1. Using a classification network:
Enable the classification network option on the 'Training Settings' tab.
NOTE: that the classification network can predict a maximum of 10 categories of Facies.
2. Rounding the output curves

Enable the 'Round output to the nearest integer' option on the 'Model Run Settings'
tab.

22.6 Cluster Analysis

The 'Cluster Analysis' module uses standard statistical routines to allow the user to cluster the
data into groups to produce an electrical facies log. This log can then hopefully be used to
correlate to geological facies.
The module is accessed under the main menu 'Advanced Interpretation' 'Cluster Analysis
for Rock Typing' menu item.
The 'Cluster Analysis' module is a arranged on six tabs:
'Input'
'Discriminators'
'Cluster Means'
'Cluster Consolidation'
'Cluster Output'
'Crossplot'
These tabs allow the user to set all the curve inputs, determine the number of clusters and the
clustering method, to generate the cluster output in the subject well or wells. The following
sections describe the 'Tabs' and what the user must do to create the model, evaluate the
effectiveness of the model and run the model in a subject well (or wells).
Section 22.6 Advanced Interpretation : Cluster Analysis

'Input' Tab
The 'Input' tab allows the user to select multiple wells and their associated 'Input Curve' names
that will be used for clustering. Below is a multiple screenshot showing one way in which the
columns can be populated. However, other ways of populating the grid are possible. One way is
to select the Well from the drop-down box then select the curve, again from a drop-down list. The
'Use Curve' and 'Default Name' columns will auto-populate.

'Use Curve' - 'check' this column to select a curve to be used in the cluster analysis.
'Clicking' on the arrow will select/deselect all the curves. This is very useful for
switching between models without having to re-enter all the curve names for all the wells.
For example, the user can enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr and
Resistivity for multiple wells and then by just 'un-checking the 'Use Curve', create a much
simpler model, using (for example) just the Gr and Density curves.
curve is selected for that row, and can be changed manually thereafter. The values in the '
Default Name' cells are used as the default curve names when a new well is added to the
grid. When a new well is added, if the well contains curves that match the default names
then those curves are pre-selected for the user.
'Log' column - if 'checked' will take the base 10 logarithm of the curve before using it in
the cluster analysis. For curve data which is in logarithmic form (such as core permeability)
this can greatly improve the accuracy of the predicted results.
'Well' column - in the top ('Well Name') row of the grid, the user selects the wells needed
to create the model. For each well, the user must choose the input curves to be used by
the cluster analysis module.
'Input Curve' rows - contain the names of the curves that the user wishes to use for
cluster analysis. The 'Input Curve' types should be the consistent for all wells. For
should be in the same row of the grid. NOTE: Curve names can vary from well to well. You
can use up to eight input curves per well. 'Clicking' on the arrow next to the 'Input Curve'
after first entering a 'Default Name' and 'checking' the 'Use Curve'
column will auto-populate all the selected wells in that row with the curve name associated
with the 'Default Name' curve type.
'Use Well for Model Build' - if this is 'checked' then the data from that well will be used in
the cluster analysis model build.
'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' these rows are used to specify the depth interval over
which to run the cluster analysis in the subject well. The default depths are the log
minimum and maximum depths in the well. These depths can be changed with the 'Get
Depths from Zones' button, or by manually entering new values.
'Use Well for Model Run' - if this is 'checked' then the data from that well will be used in
the cluster analysis model run.
'Show Plot' - this button opens a log plot window for the appropriate well which shows as
default; the input curves, cluster distribution curve and the facies clustering results
curves each in a separate track. NOTE: If the model has not yet been run for the well then
this will just show the input curves.
curves', which can be used to further constrain the data used in model building and also
to restrict which depth intervals to run the model over.

alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to run the cluster analysis
Set from the drop-down list and use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click the '
All Wells' button).
'Use Custom Plot Format' - if this is 'checked' then it allows the user to type in or browse
for a saved plot format that they wish to use.
'Report' - this has two options 'Print' or 'File'. Selecting 'Print' will send the
ClusterAnalysis.txt file directly to the users default printer. The 'File' option will save
ClusterAnalysis.txt to the currently loaded database folder.
'Multi-well Plot' - creates a multi-well plot, in the 'Well Correlation Viewer' module, of the
currently selected 'Model Run' wells. This is very useful for comparing clustering results.
The 'Reset form' button clears all the user defined entries in the 'Input' tab of the module,
returning this tab to its default state.

'Cluster Means' Tab

The 'Cluster Means' tab is used to run the K-mean clustering on the data. The data used is from
all wells selected from Model Build on the Input tab. In order to calculate the clusters the
Mean values for each curve and each cluster must be initialized with some value. The
initialization can be done in three ways:
manually type numbers into the grid,
click the Seed Clusters button,
use the Crossplot button to interactively move pre-assigned points.
If wanting to use the interactive crossplot it is best to use the Seed Clusters as a starting point
for the points on the crossplot.
The Seed Clusters button seeds the grid by performing a principal component analysis on the
input data. The results are sorted and the data is divided up equally into the required number of
clusters using the 'Number of Clusters' box. The input data in each cluster is then averaged to
give the mean seed points. The screenshot below shows the mean values after 'clicking' on the
Seed Clusters button.

Once the 'Mean' columns are filled with values 'click' on the 'Run Clustering' to fill the rest of the
grid. An error message like this may appear;
If this happens then re-run the clustering again to get a similar result to the screenshot below..

If a row has a small value in the '# Points' column then the row can be selected by 'clicking' in the
'Mean' column of the row to be deleted and then 'clicking' on the 'Delete Row' button.
'Clicking' the 'Crossplot' button displays the 'Multi-Curve Crossplot' module.

This displays all the curves cross-plotted against each other with the Z axis showing the clusters.
The cluster mean points are displayed as filled circles. Histograms for each of the curves with all
of the data from the selected wells is also shown.
It is possible to resize the crossplots by using the buttons in the top-left of the module. If data falls
outside the scales then a quick way of seeing the data is to hold the cursor over a crossplot and
then drag, whilst holding down the right mouse button, the cursor vertically - this changes the Y
axis scale. If the right mouse button is held down and the cursor dragged horizontally then the X
axis is changed. Alternatively the scales for each curve can be set in the 'Crossplot' tab.
To zoom in on a certain area of the crossplot hold the left mouse button and drag the cursor over
the data that needs to be enlarged. A small white box will be drawn. Once the left mouse button is
released the crossplot resizes focussed in on the area of interest.

'Clicking' on the drop-down 'Output' box enables the user to send the display to the users default '
Printer', to 'Clipboard' or to 'File'. The display can be saved to 'File' as an *.emf, *.bmp, *cgm,
*.gif, *.jpg, *.png or a *.tif file.
The drop-down box in the top right corner allows the user to select from the different cluster Sets
which have been created in the 'Cluster Consolidation' tab. The Z axis and cluster mean colour
bars will change to reflect the Set chosen. The colours and values of the cluster Sets can be

changed in the 'Cluster Output' tab.
'Z axis colors from "All Clusters" set' - if this is 'checked' then the Z axis colours set
up in the 'Cluster Output' tab for the 'All Clusters' Set will be used even if a different
'User set' is selected in the drop-down box. This is very useful for quickly comparing the
differences between cluster Sets.


'Edit Cluster means' - only if this is 'checked' is the user able to move the cluster mean
points interactively on the crossplots using the mouse cursor. When the cluster is
released, after moving it with the mouse, the mean value on other crossplots with the
same X and Y axis will update. The mean values in the 'Cluster Means' tab will also
update.
'Display only Selected' - allows the user to display selected clusters. To select a cluster
'click' on the 'Show' cell next to the cluster to be displayed. To select all the clusters
'click' on the 'Show' cell itself. To deselect all the clusters click on the 'Show' cell again.


'Auto Update' - having this 'checked' means that any changes to selected wells or
clusters will take effect immediately. However, if there are many wells and clusters the
crossplots may be slow in refreshing. In this case it may be better to 'uncheck' the box
and use the 'Update' button for applying changes.
'Display Cluster Means' - 'Unchecking' this will remove the cluster mean points from the
crossplots.
'Display Z Axis Colors' - if this is 'un-checked' then all the cluster mean points are
displayed in blue. NOTE: if the 'Run Clustering' hasn't been run then all the crossplots
points will be in blue and there will be no horizontal Z axis colour bar visible at the bottom
of the module screen.
It is possible to edit the displayed Z axis cluster colours by selecting different colours from the
drop-down list. The Z axis colours for each individual cluster can also be turned on or off by
'checking' the 'Show' column. For any changes to take affect 'click' the 'Update' button, if the '
Auto Update' is 'un-checked'.
'Wells Z Axis' - 'checking' this box allows the user to view the cluster data with the Z

axis displaying the well colour instead of the cluster colour. The cluster mean circle for
each cluster remains visible depending on if it has been selected.
'Cluster Consolidation' Tab

Once the K-mean clustering is completed the user normally ends up with more clusters than can
be justified geologically. The next step in the analysis is to consolidate the clusters into
meaningful groups. This is done either manually by assigning clusters to groups using the
crossplot or log plot displays or automatically by using hierarchical clustering on the individual
clusters. The automatic grouping is done by using a hierarchical clustering technique and then
specifying the number of groups wanted in the 'Number of cluster groups' box. A 'Cluster
Grouping Dendrogram' plot shows how the clusters are grouped hierarchically.

There are 5 different clustering methods which can give quite radically different results. The
Dendrogram can be saved to 'Printer', 'File' or 'Clipboard' using the 'Output Dendrogram'
button.
Cluster groupings can be copied to the 'Cluster Output' tab using the 'Copy clusters to User set
' box for the creation of facies curves. This allows the user to plot different groupings on a log plot
to try and determine which is more geologically feasible. NOTE: there is a maximum number of
User sets which is seven, as this is the number allowed in the 'Cluster Output' tab.
A Cluster Randomness Plot can be used to help select the number of groups. This plot shows
how random the clustering is in comparison to a completely random arrangement of clusters.

'Cluster Output' Tab

The Cluster Output tab allows the creation of the cluster curves in the wells. It also allows the
manual editing of cluster groups and the shading colours on the output plots. NOTE: users should
not use colours with shading i.e. bitmaps as the crossplot program won't be able to recognise the
bitmap and will supply an alternative colour.

'Null all output curves before running calculations' - will set to Null data (absent) all
the output curves from the module. This is useful for clearing the results from a plot
before re-running a model to ensure that the model is outputting to the correct intervals.
'Copy Selected Column' - click in the column that you want to copy (either the 'Value'
or 'Shading' column) and enter a 'User Set' number and then 'click' the 'Copy Selected
Column' button. Apart from creating copies of cluster Sets this is also a useful way of
clearing unwanted results by selecting an empty 'User Set' and then copying it to the
unwanted 'User Set'.
'Cluster Distance output curve' - this is the distance between clusters that was
calculated from the 'Clustering Method' selected from the 'Cluster Consolidation' tab.
'Output Curves' - to create the output curves, which then can be plotted either in the '
Multi-well Plot' or from the 'Input' tab 'Show Plot', this button MUST be clicked.
'Output Curve set' - the output curve Set for the Cluster Analysis output curves can be
changed here. An existing Set can be selected from the drop-down menu or a new Set
created using the 'Edit' button and the 'Add Set Names' module.

In the screenshot below, four wells have been selected from the same field. K-mean clustering
has been performed with an initial 15 clusters - the 'L_FaciesAll'. The 'L_Facies' used the same '
Clustering Method' but was restricted to 11 cluster groups. The 'L_Facies2' used 8 cluster
groups and the 'L_Facies3' used 5 cluster groups. The program attempts to keep similar colours
and values for the cluster groups in order to keep the log plots looking broadly similar.
To view the results of the clustering 'click' the 'Output Curves' button and then 'click' the '
Multi-well Plot' button. This opens up the 'Multi-Well Correlation Plot' with a default facies plot
for each of the wells selected.

Alternatively, the user could go to the 'Input' tab and select 'Show Plot' for one of the wells and a
single well facies plot will be displayed.

'Crossplot' Tab
The crossplot scales for each of the selected curves can be changed here and the multi-curve
crossplot can be opened by 'clicking' the 'Crossplot' button.

22.6.1 Theory of Cluster Analysis

The module works in two stages. Firstly, the data is divided up into manageable data clusters.
The number of clusters should be enough to cover all the different data ranges seen on the logs.
15 to 20 clusters would appear to be a reasonable number for most data sets. The second step,
which is more manual, is to take these 15 to 20 clusters and group them into a manageable
number of geological facies. This may involve reducing the data to 4 to 5 clusters.
Stage-1 K-mean clustering

The first stage of 'Facies Clustering' uses the K-mean statistical technique to cluster the data
into a known entered number of clusters. For this to work an initial guess has to be made of the
mean value of each cluster for each input log. The initial guess can affect the results and in order
to get good results the initial values should cover the total range of the logs. The initial guesses
can be manually entered in the K-mean table of the 'Cluster Means' tab or the automatic seeding
option can be used - 'Seed Clusters' button of the 'Cluster Means' tab.
The automatic seeding option works by calculating the first principal component log of the data.
This will normally contain most of the variation in the data and hence is an ideal way to seed the

data to give maximum coverage in the seeded values. Once the principal component log is
calculated the data is sorted. The data is then divided up equally into the number of wanted
clusters. From the data in each cluster the average value for each log is calculated and this value
is used as the seed point.
K-mean clustering works by assigning each input data point to a cluster. The routine tries to
minimize the within-cluster sums of squares of the difference between the data point and the
cluster mean value. The routine works by calculating the sum of the squares difference for a data
point and each cluster mean and assigning the point to the cluster with the minimum difference.
Once all the data points have been assigned to the clusters the new mean values in each cluster
are calculated. Using the new mean values the routines starts again re-assigning the data to the
clusters. This loop continues until the mean values do not change between loops. These then
become the results.
All input log data is normalized (standardized) before starting so that each input log has the same
dynamic range. The normalization is done by calculating the mean and standard deviation of the
log and then normalizing the data by subtracting the mean and dividing by the standard deviation.
Hence a normalized log data value of 1.0 or -1.0 will be one standard deviation.
The 'Cluster Means' grid shows the mean values plus other statistics.
'# Points' : This is the number of data levels in each cluster.

'Cluster Spread' : Within each cluster this is the standard deviation of the distance of
each data point from the cluster mean (units are standard deviation of the
original data). Hence, the lower this value the tighter the data is clustered around its
mean value.
'Mean' : This is the mean value of the log for the cluster in units of the input log (i.e.

un-normalized).
'Std Dev'. : This is the standard deviation of the data in a cluster for the log. This allows
the user to see for an individual log how its data is grouped in an individual cluster.
Large standard deviations for all clusters would indicate that this log bears little influence
on which cluster the data is assigned to and could probably be excluded from the input
with little change in the results.
Stage-2 Cluster Consolidation
Cluster consolidation can be done completely manually by using the crossplot and log plot output
to group data, or a hierarchical cluster technique can be used to group the data.
Hierarchical clustering works by computing the distances between all clusters and then merging
the two clusters closest together. The new cluster distance to all other clusters is then recomputed
and the two closest clusters merged again. This process continues until you have only one
cluster. The results can be plotted as a dendrogram, which IP displays. The dendrogram shows
how the clusters were merged and the order they were merged. The numbers at the top of each
branch give the merging order. The original results from the K-mean clustering are shown at the
base of the plot.
IP has five different clustering methods which decide how the clusters are merged. The different
methods will show considerably different results. The default method 'Minimize the
within-cluster sum of squares distance' gives good results for separating out the different log
lithologies into different clusters.
The five methods differ in how the distance calculation is updated after two cluster have been
joined.
If we assume, in the diagram below, cluster "A" and "B" have just been joined to form cluster "Z",
and we need to calculate the distance of "Z" with another cluster called "C".
For the different techniques the calculations are made as follows:

'Minimum distance between all objects in clusters' - the distance from Z to C is the
minimum of the distances (A to C, B to C).
'Maximum distance between all objects in clusters' - the distance from Z to C is the
maximum of the distances (A to C, B to C).
'Average distance between merged clusters' - the distance from Z to C is the average
distance of all objects that would be within the cluster formed by merging clusters and C.
'Average distance between all objects in clusters' - the distance from Z to C is the
average distance of objects within cluster Z to objects within cluster C.
'Minimize the within-cluster sum of squares distance' - clusters are formed so as to
minimize the increase in the within-cluster sums of squares. The distance between two
clusters is the increase in these sums of squares if the two clusters were merged.
In general, 'Minimum distance between all objects in clusters' will yield long thin clusters while
'Maximum distance between all objects in clusters' will yield clusters that are more spherical. '
Average distance between merged clusters' and 'Minimize the within-cluster sum of
squares distance' tend to yield clusters that are similar to those obtained with 'Average distance
between all objects in clusters'.
The grouping of the clusters into a known number of groups is easily done by stopping the
grouping at a certain cutoff level. In IP, the dendrogram automatically colours each grouping in a
different colour. The groupings above the cutoff are in black. The following plot shows a cutoff at
5 groups.
It is possible to analyse the groupings to decide at which level adding another cluster gives more
information or is just adding noise. The 'Cluster Randomness Plot' provides this information.

The chart calculates for each number of cluster groups the perceived randomness of the data.
The higher the value the less random the clusters are - i.e. more structured data.
The randomness is calculated by first calculating the average number of depth levels per cluster -
i.e. the average thickness of a cluster layer. This is performed on the original log data. Then the
theoretical average thickness is calculated assuming the clusters to be assigned randomly at
each depth level. The randomness is the ratio of the two. A value of 1 would be totally random,
higher values less random.
Av. Thickness = Number of depth levels / Number of cluster layers
Random Thickness = S pi / (1 pi)

Where pi is the proportion of depth levels assigned to the ith cluster.
Randomness index = Av. Thickness / Random Thickness
The plot is interpreted by picking the number of clusters that are least random (highest peaks). In
the above example, a cluster grouping of 6 or perhaps 10 would seem to give the most likely
information into the grouping of the log data.
For more information on Cluster Analysis techniques a good starting point is 'Multivariate Pattern
Recognition and Classification Methods, Geological Log Analysis Using Computer Methods, J.H
Doveton'.

22.7 Principal Component Analysis

Principal component analysis (PC) is a technique used to reduce multidimensional data sets to
lower dimensions for analysis. This technique can be useful in Petrophysics and Geology as a
preliminary method of combining multiple logs in to a single or two logs without losing information.
The PC curves then can be used for various tasks like multi-well tops correlation and regression
analysis.
Method
The input data is normalized for each curve. This is done for each data point by subtracting the
curve mean value and dividing by the curve standard deviation. The normalized data is then used
to create the principal component curves. The total variability in the data for each PC curve is
reported on the 'Output' tab. The Eigen vectors are also reported in the listings.
An example of the result is shown below.
% Variability / Eigen vectors
Pc % Variability rhob dt nphi gr

1st 48.88 -0.29412 0.56258 0.66652 0.39083
2nd 37.51 0.68196 -0.27708 0.14744 0.66062
3rd 11.06 0.50637 0.77419 -0.36116 -0.11741
4th 2.54 0.43819 -0.08581 0.63527 -0.63012
Input curves normalization
rhob dt nphi gr
Mean Value 2.63535 64.53714 0.1321 79.13452
Std Deviation 0.15722 9.54118 0.07116 43.40833
In the above example 48.9% of the total variability in the data can be seen in the PC1 curve. PC2
curve will have 37.5%. Hence the first 2 curves will contain 86.4 of the variability. Hence we have
practically reduced the information in the 4 curve input to 2 curves.
The result PC curves are calculated from the Eigen vectors by taking an input data level in a well.
Normalizing the data using the normalization data and then multiplying the normalized curves by
the corresponding Eigen value for the curve and adding up the result.
In the above example listing the PC1 curve will be computed as follows
PC1 = -0.294 (Rhob 2.635)/0.157 + 0.563 (Dt 64.53)/9.54 + 0.667 (Nphi 0.132)/0.071 +
0.391 (Gr 79.13) / 43.41
The 'Principal Component Analysis' module is set out in a similar way to the other 'Advanced
Interpretation' modules. There are three tabs 'Input', 'Discriminators' and 'Output'.
'Input' Tab
Select the wells on which to perform PC and the curves by using the drop-down lists in the 'Well'
column.
Section 22.7 Advanced Interpretation : Principal Component Analysis

'Use Curve' - 'check' this column to select a curve to be used in the PC analysis.
'Clicking' on the arrow will select/deselect all the curves. This is very useful for
switching between models without having to re-enter all the curve names for all the
wells. For example, the user can enter the curve names for Neutron, Density, Sonic, Gr
and Resistivity for multiple wells and then by just 'un-checking the 'Use Curve', create a
much simpler model, using (for example) just the Gr and Density curves.
curve is selected for that row, and can be changed manually thereafter. The values in
the 'Default Name' cells are used as the default curve names when a new well is added
to the grid. When a new well is added, if the well contains curves that match the default

names then those curves are pre-selected for the user.
'Log' column - if 'checked' will take the base 10 logarithm of the curve before using it in
the cluster analysis. For curve data which is in logarithmic form (such as core
permeability) this can greatly improve the accuracy of the predicted results.
'Well' column - in the top ('Well Name') row of the grid, the user selects the wells
needed to create the model. For each well, the user must choose the input curves to be
used by the PC analysis module.
'Input Curve' rows - contain the names of the curves that the user wishes to use for PC
analysis. The 'Input Curve' types should be the consistent for all wells. For example, all
gamma ray logs should be in the same row of the grid, all density log curves should be
in the same row of the grid. NOTE: Curve names can vary from well to well. You can use
up to eight input curves per well. 'Clicking' on the arrow next to the 'Input Curve'
after first entering a 'Default Name' and 'checking' the 'Use Curve'
column will auto-populate all the selected wells in that row with the curve name
associated with the 'Default Name' curve type.
'Use Well for Model Build' - if this is 'checked' then the data from that well will be used
in the PC analysis model build.
'Top Depth' and 'Bottom Depth' these rows are used to specify the depth interval over
which to run the PC analysis in the subject well. The default depths are the log minimum
and maximum depths in the well. These depths can be changed with the 'Get Depths
from Zones' button, or by manually entering new values.
'Use Well for Model Run' - if this is 'checked' then the data from that well will be used
in the PC analysis model run.
'Show Plot' - this button opens a log plot window for the appropriate well which shows
as default; the input curves and the PC analysis result curves each in a separate track.
NOTE: If the model has not yet been run for the well, this will just show the depth curve.

curves', which can be used to further constrain the data used in model building and also
to restrict which depth intervals to run the model over.
alternative way of specifying the depth ranges over which to run the Neural Network
Set from the drop-down list and use these depths in one well or in multiple wells (click
the 'All Wells' button).

'Use Custom Plot Format' - if this is 'checked' then it allows the user to type in or browse
for a saved plot format that they wish to use.
'Report' - this has two options 'Print' or 'File'. Selecting 'Print' will send the
PrinCompAnalysis.txt file directly to the users default printer. The 'File' option will save
PrinCompAnalysis.txt to the currently loaded database folder.
'Multi-well Plot' - creates a multi-well plot, in the 'Well Correlation Viewer' module, of the
currently selected 'Model Run' wells. This is very useful for comparing PC results.
The 'Reset form' button clears all the user defined entries in the 'Input' tab of the module,
returning this tab to its default state.

'Output' Tab
After selecting Wells, curves and intervals in the 'Input' tab and using the 'Discriminator' tab to
remove possibly erroneous data the 'Output' tab is where the user can run the PC analysis and
generate results.

The user has the option to select which curves to output using the 'Output' check-box. The output
curve names are also user selectable and editable. The '% Variability' column is only filled in
once the 'Run' button is 'clicked'.
The 'Output Curve Set' is defaulted to 'PC (Principal Component)', however, this is user
editable. 'Clicking' on the 'Edit' button brings up the 'Add Set Names' module where users can
create a new curve Set.

In the 'Analysis data selection' section there are two options;

'Principal component analysis run on each individual well' - this will run the PC
analysis on each individual well in turn and then output the PC curves for each well. To
see the results of the analysis use the 'Multi-well Plot'. NOTE: the PC analysis runs
nearly instantaneously so there will be no on-screen indication that the analysis has run.
'Principal component analysis run on model build wells' - this runs the analysis on
all the wells which have their 'Use Well for Model Build' 'checked'. A '% Variability' is
calculated for all the combined wells and displayed.
'Null all output curves before running calculations' will set to Null data (absent) all the output
curves from the module. This is useful for clearing the results from a plot before re-running a
model to ensure that the model is outputting to the correct intervals.
The 'Run Model Only' outputs the PC curves without recalculating the PC analysis equations.
'Run' button runs the PC analysis and produces the PC output curves.

22.8 Rock Physics

The 'Rock Physics' section in IP contains the following independent modules:
'Shear Sonic QC/Create'

'Density Estimation'
'Fluid Substitution'
'Laminated Fluid Substitution'
'Elastic Impedance'
22.8.1 Shear Sonic QC / Create

The 'Shear Sonic QC / Create' module can be used to:
create a synthetic shear sonic curve from a compressional sonic log, or

to quality control a recorded shear sonic curve.
The Shear sonic curve is a required input to the Fluid Substitution Module.
The module is accessed under the main 'Advanced Interpretation' menu 'Rock Physics' '
Shear Sonic QC/Create' and is arranged on 2 'tabbed' screens. The tabs are described below:
Section 22.8 Advanced Interpretation : Rock Physics

'Create DT Shear' Tab
To create a DT Shear Curve:

The user must enter the 'DT compressional' input curve and the name of the 'DT shear' output
curve. The units of the input sonic curve can be selected by changing the 'radio button' in the '
Units' box. NOTE: while the input sonic curve can have metric or imperial units, the
equation constants for calculating the shear sonic curve are always in Km/sec.
The 'DT shear' curve is calculated using the Greenberg-Castagna (1992) empirical relationships
for different minerals. The 'default' constants are those defined by Greenberg-Castagna for 100%
brine-saturated rocks. The default constants ('a' const, 'b' const and 'c' const) can be changed
by the user. If the user changes any of the constants, clicking the 'Reset default coefficients'
button will return the coefficient values to their original values.
The 'Mineral Method' radio buttons allow the user to select the method of mineral input to the
computation.
The input mineralogy can be set either :
by selecting the 'Curves' Mineral Method radio button and then by entering input curve
names for each mineral volume in the 'Mineral - Input Curve' column, or
by selecting the 'Fixed Volumes' radio button and entering fixed volumes of different
minerals in the 'Volume' column. Mineral volumes can be entered either in percent or
decimals (default) by toggling between the 'Mineral Volumes' - 'Percent' or 'Decimals'

radio buttons.
The 'Default' mineral radio button specifies which mineral is used as the default when the other
minerals do not add up to 100%. For the example above, only a Shale input mineral curve has
been entered and the default mineral has been set to sandstone. Therefore, the mineral mixture
will be the shale volume specified by the VCL curve with the sandstone volume being 1 VCL.
The resulting 'DT shear' output curve is calculated by first computing the equivalent velocities for
all the pre-defined minerals and then averaging the results using a Voigt-Reuss-Hill averaging
technique. This technique creates mineral volume weighted arithmetic- and weighted
harmonic-averages and then takes the average of these results. The following equation is used :
Where
Xi = Volume of i'th mineral
Vsi = Shear velocity of i'th mineral
Vs = Shear Velocity
NOTE: Once the inputs are to the user's satisfaction then 'click' 'OK' for the 'DT shear' curve to
be calculated.

'DT Shear QC' Tab
The 'Shear Velocity QC Crossplot' generated by this module uses the Greenberg-Castagna
empirical relationship to check that the recorded shear sonic curve is a good shear curve and not
a mud-wave or Stoneley-wave velocity produced by poor processing of the sonic waveform data.
The user enters the measured 'DT compressional' and 'DT shear' sonic curves. The module
generates the equivalent compressional and shear velocity curves (Vp and Vs) plus the '
Poissons ratio' (PoisRatio), 'Vp/Vs Ratio', 'Bulk Modulus' (KB) and 'Shear Modulus' (Mu)
curves. The input units for the slowness curves and the output units for the velocity curves can be
set by the user by selecting the appropriate radio buttons in the 'In Units' and 'Out Units' panels
of the interface.
The 'Poissons Ratio' is calculated as follows :
Shear QC Crossplot
The 'Crossplot Interval' and 'Lithology Lines' panels of the interface are used to set up the QC
crossplot.
The 'Crossplot Interval' sets up the depth range to be covered by the crossplot and can be set
either :

by selecting the 'Interval Depths' radio button and specifying the top and bottom
depths, or
by selecting the 'Zonal Depths' radio button and specifying an 'Interval set' and 'Zone'
number.
The 'Lithology Lines' panel allows the user to set up the crossplot overlay lines that will be
displayed on the QC crossplot.These overlay lines are created each time the user clicks 'Run' and
they represent the relationships set up on the 'Create DT shear' tab. Changing the coefficients for
the relationships on the 'Create DT shear' tab' will change the shape of the overlay lines on the
crossplot but only when 'OK' is clicked, to make a new crossplot.
When the user clicks 'OK', a crossplot of 'Vp versus Vs' is created.
The 'Crossplot Z axis' curve is optional. The 'default' setting is to use the gamma ray curve.
The following crossplot, which was created by the DT Shear QC set up shown in the above
window.

22.8.2 Density Estimation

'Density Estimation' provides the user with a means to generate a density curve from sonic log
data.
When density log information is not available, it is often estimated from P-wave velocity (Vp) using
an empirical relationship. A number of authors have published 'density-from-sonic transit time'
algorithms. The methodologies included here are those of Gardner1, Bellotti et al2 and Lindseth3
.
The 'density-from-sonic transit time' methodology has the advantage that it can be used ahead of
drilling, by utilising seismic data, converting seismic interval velocities (V, in ft/sec) to sonic transit
times (1/V *106 (usec/ft).
The 'Input curve' is a sonic log curve.
The model to be run (Gardner, AGIP Bellotti, Lindseth) is selected by 'checking' the appropriate
box. Parameters such as the coefficients for the Gardner transform can be edited, saved and
re-called. A number of passes can be made through the various models and, if possible, the '
Output Rhob' curve can be calibrated against a well containing a RHOB curve.
Output curves are 'RhoGard', 'RhoAgip' and 'RhoLind' , depending on which method is selected.

Depth intervals for the computation can be input manually, or by selecting the button and
choosing the appropriate 'Tops Set' from the 'Select Zone Depths' window. The default depth
range is that covered by the sonic log.
Note
Bellotti et al2 found more acceptable results comparing actual FDC curves to their
'Unconsolidated formations' equation. (illustrated by examples from the Adriatic, Mauritania and
Indonesia see Reference 2).
REFERENCES
1. Gardner G. L. F., Gardner L.W., & Gregory A.R. (1974) Formation velocity and density - the
diagnostic basics for stratigraphic traps Geophysics 39, 770-780.
2. Bellotti, P. Di Lorenzo, V. & Giacca, D. - Overburden gradient from sonic log Trans. SPWLA,
London March 1979
3. Lindseth, R. O., (1979) Synthetic Sonic Logs a process for stratigraphic interpretation,
Geophysics v.44 no.1 p.3-26
22.8.3 Fluid Substitution

Fluid Substitution is a process of removing the effect of the drilling fluid from the sonic and density
log measurements and then restoring the log responses to those resulting from the original
reservoir fluids at their original saturations. The output density and sonic (velocity) curves are
subsequently used to generate an Acoustic Impedance (AI) log. The AI log is used to calculate a
reflection co-efficient (RC) series for the boundaries between rocks of different lithologies. The
RC log is then used in the computation of synthetic seismograms.
The 'Fluid Substitution' module is accessed from the main 'Advanced Interpretation' menu '
Rock Physics' 'Fluid Substitution'.
The module input parameters and functionality are arranged on a number of 'tabs'. These are:
'Fluid Properties'
'Input Curves / Matrix'
'Average Gassmann'
'Discriminators'
'Log Fluid Substitution'
The tabs are described below.
'Fluid Properties' Tab

Fluid properties need to be calculated for all fluid zones used in the 'Fluid Substitution'
calculation. This, at a minimum, will include the 'Flushed' zone (zone seen by the sonic tool) and
the 'Reservoir' zone (the zone away from well bore influence). The 'Substitution' fluids need only
to be entered if different fluids are to be substituted into the reservoir. The same fluid properties
can be used for all zones.

The 'View Properties' panel and its associated radio buttons, highlighted in bold blue font, is
used to 'toggle' the screen view of the 'Fluid Properties Results' between different fluid zones.
The user can toggle the display between the the 'Flushed' zone, 'Reservoir' zone and '
Substitution' zone fluid properties by 'clicking' on the appropriate radio button ('Flushed',
'Reservoir' or 'Substitution').
The 'Fluid Properties' tab is arranged in 5 'panels'. These are:

'Reservoir Pressure and Temperature'
'Water'
'Oil'
'Gas'
'Fluid Properties Results'
To calculate the fluid properties the user can either;

enter appropriate 'Density', 'Bulk Modulus' (K) and 'Velocity' values directly into

the 'Fluid Properties Results' panel at the bottom of the window, or

alternatively,
fill in the 'Water', 'Oil' and 'Gas' panels to calculate these fluid properties. When
the 'Calculate' button is clicked adjacent to each fluid type, the 'Fluid
Properties Results'are updated in the table.
The 'Reservoir Pressure and Temperature' values and their associated units must be
entered, in order to calculate any of the fluid properties.
'Water' : The user can either enter the salinity (in ppm NaCl) of the formation water or
an Rw value and the associated Rw Temperature. The user should select the
appropriate 'radio button' to flag that the formation water is 'Gas Free water' or 'Gas
Saturated water'. Alternatively a 'Gas/Water Ratio' (GWR) can be entered. By clicking
the 'Calculate' button the water properties will be updated in the 'Fluid Properties
Results' panel.
'Oil' : The user must enter the oil density (API) at atmospheric pressure, its associated '
Gas Density' and either the Gas/Oil Ratio (GOR) value (and its units) or 'check' the '
Gas Saturated' check-box. 'Checking' the 'Gas Saturated' check-box prompts IP to
calculate the GOR, assuming the oil is gas-saturated. By clicking the 'Calculate' button
the oil properties will be updated in the 'Fluid Properties Results' panel.
'Gas' : The user must enter the 'Gas Density', relative to air, at atmospheric pressure.
By clicking the 'Calculate' button the gas properties will be updated in the 'Fluid
Properties Results' panel.
'Fluid Properties Results' : Fluid Properties ('Density', 'Bulk Modulus' (K) and 'Velocity'), if
known, can be entered directly into the data table or calculated from the 'Water' , 'Oil' and 'Gas'
calculations described above. If two properties of a given fluid are known / entered, the third
property can be calculated by clicking the 'Calculate' button in the bottom right hand corner of the
panel.
For example, if the 'Density' and the 'Velocity' values are known then the 'Bulk Modulus' can be
automatically calculated by 'clicking' 'Calculate'. The formula used used is:
Bulk Modulus = Density x Velocity^2
The correlations used for calculating the 'Oil', 'Gas' and 'Water' properties are the ones presented
by Batzle and Wang (1992) in 'Seismic Properties of Pore Fluids'.
'Input Curves / Matrix' Tab

The user must provide the 'Input Curves' for 'Compressional' sonic and 'Shear' sonic, either as
velocity or slowness curves and select the curve units from the 'Sonic input Type and Units'
panel. 'Bulk Density', 'Porosity', and 'Water Saturation' curves are also required as inputs.

The user can either enter a flushed-zone water saturation (Sxo) curve name or, if no Sxo curve is
available, then this can be calculated by using the 'Empirical Sxo' option. When selecting the '
Empirical Sxo' method, Sxo is calculated from the Water Saturation input curve. The user has
the choice of two relationships, depending on whether the well was drilled with Oil-Based Mud or
Water-based mud. The empirical relationships are the same as those used in the 'Porosity and
Water Saturation Module' and are shown on the screen as labels below the 'Water Based Mud'
and 'Oil Based Mud' radio buttons. The 'IV' parameter is the 'Invasion Factor' in the 'Water
Based Mud' logic.
The selection of one of the 'Display Velocity units' options converts the units of all the velocity
curves on this tab and on the 'Average Gassmann' tab.
NOTE: It also sets the units for the output velocity curves under the 'Log Fluid Substitution' tab.
Matrix Properties
'Matrix Properties' must be entered in the 'Matrix Properties' grid. Several default minerals can
be selected from the drop-down box or the user can create their own minerals and define the

associated matrix properties.
Each default mineral has a set of default matrix properties. These can be edited as necessary by
the user. The default mineral values are taken from the publication 'The Rock Physics
Handbook (Tools for Seismic Analysis in Porous Media) by G. Mavko, T. Mukerji and J.
Dvorkin (1999). An input 'Mineral Volume' curve must be entered for each mineral, except for
the 'Default Mineral'. The curves must contain the mineral volumes in decimal fractions. Only one
mineral can be designated as the 'default'. The 'default' is used to make up matrix volumes to
100%. A mineral volume curve name is not needed for the 'Default Mineral'.
'Average Gassmann' Tab

The 'Average Gassmann' tab is used to investigate the validity of the fluid and matrix properties
with respect to the input velocities and input petrophysical parameters, on a 'zonal' basis. It is also
used for a rapid evaluation of the effects of fluid substitution. The input data are inverted for the
dry rock parameters using Gassmann's equation.

The elastic parameters for two-phase fluid mixtures are calculated using a saturation curve and
the fluid mixing approach of Brie et al (1995) "Shear Sonic interpretation in Gas-bearing
Sands" SPE 30595 (pp701 - 710). The 'Fluid Mixing Law Exponent' is designed to account for
the effect of 'patchy' saturation (different fluids in different pores) at logging frequencies.
Accounting for this effect is more important with gas/water systems than oil/water fluid systems.
Brie et al (1995) proposed using a value of 3 to simulate the effect of patchy saturation in
gas/water systems. In oil/water systems a value of 1.5 is close to a Voigt-Reuss-Average mix.
It is important to note that this type of fluid mixing is only used for the dry parameter inversion. On
the 'Log Fluid Substitution' tab, homogenous (Reuss) mixing is used to simulate the effect of
fluid mixing at seismic frequencies.
The 'Dry Rock Poisson Ratio' parameter is subsequently used in the 'Log Fluid Substitution'
tab. It is also important in the set-up for the Fluid Substitution Crossplot which is launched from
the button at the bottom of this interface. The IP program uses the approach of Gregory (1977)
for Gassmann fluid substitution, to predict Vs from dry rock Poisson ratio and Vp inputs. As a
rule of thumb, values of dry rock Poisson ratio range between 0.1 and 0.2 for consolidated rocks
(average 0.15) and between 0.1and 0.25 for relatively unconsolidated rocks.
Zonal Log Average

The user selects the interval over which the program is to average the log curve properties. The
interval can be specified either:
By selecting the 'Interval Depths' radio button and entering a 'Top' and 'Bottom' depth,
or
By selecting the 'Zonal Depths' radio button and using 'Zonal Depths' (selected from an
IP Parameter or Tops Set) and then selecting the 'Zone' number.
If the 'Use Discriminators for averages' check-box is 'checked', then the selected interval is
additionally constrained by the user-defined discriminators which can be set on the '
Discriminators' tab.
'Clicking' the 'Calculate Averages' button will calculate the zonal averages for all the input curves
and display the results in the list under the 'Log Average' headings. The water saturation
averages are porosity-weighted averages. The same average values will also be set into the white
edit boxes, except for the 'Porosity' value which is calculated from the input density log, mineral
volumes, matrix densities and fluid properties. The 'Dry Rock Properties' and 'Fluid Properties
Flushed Zone' are also calculated.
The user can change the values in the white edit boxes to see what effect it has on other
parameters.
Changing the Vp or Vs values will change the 'Dry Rock Properties'.

Changing RhoB will change the 'Porosity' value and the 'Dry Rock Properties'.
Changing the mineral volumes will change the 'Porosity' value and the 'Dry Rock
Properties'. One can not change the volume of the default mineral since this is
calculated from the other volumes.
Changing the 'Fluid Density' will change the 'Porosity' value and the 'Dry Rock
Properties'.
Changing the 'Fluid Modulus' or 'Fluid Velocity' will change the 'Dry Rock Properties'.
Changing the hydrocarbon type will change the 'Porosity' value, 'Fluid Properties' and
the 'Dry Rock Properties'.

Changing the 'Porosity' value will change 'RhoB' and the 'Dry Rock Properties'.
Sw cannot be changed since it is not used in the calculations.
Changing Sxo or the 'Fluid Mixing Law Exponent' will change the 'Porosity' value, '
Fluid Properties' and the 'Dry Rock Properties'.
Changing the Dry Matrix 'Bulk Modulus' will change the Vp input.
Changing the Dry Matrix 'Shear Modulus' will change the Vs input.
Changing the Dry Matrix 'Poisson Ratio' has no effect on the other parameters but does
affect the fluid substitution of the average data ('Fluid Substitution Crossplot' button)
and the log curves ('Log Fluid Substitution' tab).
Changing the Dry Matrix 'Modulus Ratio' has no effect.
An option is available to use the 'Reuss harmonic average formula' for fluid mixing in order to
back out the effect of flushed-zone hydrocarbons on the sonic log. This methodology uses a
harmonic-type averaging of the fluid properties. This is normally considered to overestimate the
influence of gas on the sonic tool and an empirical fluid mixing law is usually used. However,
under certain conditions it is found to give better results. If this option is turned off (default) then
the empirical mixing law is used.
Fluid Substitution Crossplot

'Clicking' the 'Fluid Substitution Crossplot' button produces a display similar to that illustrated
below. The purpose of the Fluid Substitution crossplot is to enable the user to visualize the
relationships between the velocities, density, AI and Poissons Ratio results. The user can change
the Y and Z axes and scales for the crossplot. The data plotted in the graphic display are listed in
the grid at the base of window. The user can edit the Sw values in the first row of the grid and, if
the values are changed, then the other parameters will be recalculated.

The table data are calculated by taking the property values displayed on the 'Average Gassmann
' tab and computing the 100% wet values for velocities and densities. The 100% wet values are
then fluid substituted with the varying amounts of hydrocarbons (1-Sw's). The fluid properties for
bulk modulus are calculated using the Reuss average formula (harmonic average).
The 'Porosity' panel allows the user to change the computed zonal averaged porosity value and
to see the effect of this change on the fluid substitution. The equations used for recalculating the
properties are only valid for relatively small changes in porosity.
The 'Output' button allows the crossplot to be output to a printer, to a file in enhanced metafile
format or directly to the clipboard. The table can be output to the clipboard, which then can be
directly pasted into other windows programs.
The 'Discriminators' tab allows the user to further constrain which data are used for the '
Average Gassmann' zonal log averages and also to discriminate the zones to be fluid-substituted
in the 'Log Fluid Substitution' calculation.

If different discriminators are required for the 'Average Gassmann' and the 'Log Fluid
Substitution' then the user must manually change the values between running the two functions.
Up to 6 discriminators can be used simultaneously and combined using 'and' or 'or' type logic.
Discrimination can either be between a curve and a value or between two curves.
'Log Fluid Substitution' Tab

The 'Log Fluid Substitution' tab performs a fluid substitution on the data in the input density and
sonic logs at the well step increment. Along with the fluid-substituted density and sonic curves,
both fluid-substituted Acoustic Impedance and Poissons Ratio curves are calculated and velocity

and sonic slowness curves are output.
Flushed zone Hydrocarbon type

The user selects the hydrocarbon type ('Gas' or 'Oil') that is seen in the flushed zone. The
program will use the flushed-zone fluid properties for this hydrocarbon type to back out the effect
of the flushed zone on the density and sonic logs. This allows wells drilled with Oil-Based mud
which drill through gas-bearing reservoirs to use the Oil-Based mud oil properties to correct the
logs before substituting the reservoir gas properties back into the logs.
Analysis Interval
The output curves will only be changed over the user-selected analysis depth interval. The user
has two choices :
'Interval Depths'. The user sets the interval top and bottom depths manually or uses the
'Select Zones /Tops' button to select a depth range from an existing Zone / Tops
Set in the subject well.

'Zonal Depths'. The user selects the required 'Top Set'. The analysis will be run on all
Zones in the selected Tops Set.
NOTE: If the Tops Set has gaps between zones, then gaps will appear in the output results
curves.
The 'Use Discriminators for net reservoir' 'check' box and the 'Net reservoir input curve' list
box are used to discriminate reservoir rock (permeable rock with porosity) from non-reservoir rock
(shale or non-permeable rock). The fluid substitution will only be performed on the reservoir
quality rock. The non-reservoir rock will contain the same output values for density and
sonic as those in the input curves. The 'Net reservoir input curve' is a computed flag curve in
which values greater than 0 are counted as reservoir rock. If both a 'Net reservoir input curve' is
selected and'Use Discriminators for net reservoir' is 'checked', then each depth level must
pass both tests before any fluid substitution is performed.
Actual Reservoir fluid type (as seen by Sonic / Density tools)

This box will either contain one interval, if the 'Interval Depths' button is selected, or will contain
one row per zone in the 'Top Set', if the 'Zonal Depths' button is selected. The screen shot
shown above illustrates the view when the 'Zonal Depths' is selected.
The user must select the hydrocarbon type for each zone. NOTE: If a zone is 'water-wet', then
leave both the 'Oil' and 'Gas' 'check boxes' 'un-checked'.
Substitute Fluids
If the user wants to substitute different fluids or use a different water saturation profile to that
found in the actual well, then the 'Substitute Fluids' check-box should be 'checked'.
The user must select the new hydrocarbon type for each zone. If the zone is 'water-wet' then
leave both the 'Oil' and 'Gas' columns 'un-checked'.
The 'Substitute Sw curve' box must contain the curve name for the new Sw curve. The user can
use the same Sw curve as that entered under the 'Input Curves / Matrix' tab.
Output Curves
The user enters the names for the result curves. The 'Substituted' line of output curves is only
created if the 'Substitute Fluids' box is 'checked'. If an output curve is not needed then delete the
curve name from the 'Output Curves' grid.
The 'Run' button will create the output curve, if necessary, and perform the fluid substitution.
The 'Log Plot' button creates a new log plot that contains the input curves and results curves of
the fluid substitution. The following is an example plot.

The 'Null All Output Curves' button will set null (absent) values in all the 'Output Curves'. This
can be useful if one wants to clear the result log data from a log plot and start again.
The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons at the bottom of the window allow the user to save and re-load
parameter Sets, which contain all the parameters associated with the Rock Physics modules. The
Rock Physics modules are 'Shear Sonic QC / Create', 'Fluid Substitution', 'Elastic Impedance'
and 'Laminated Fluid Subs'.
The 'Print' button outputs a listing of the parameters used in the module and the results from the
Average Gassmann calculations. The following is an example listing :
Fluid Substitution Parameters
Well : Test Well 1

Date : 22/08/01 17:12:34
Fluid Properties
Flushed zone
Brine Oil Gas
Density (gm/cc) 1.008 0.675 0.293
Bulk Modulus (GPA) 2.375 0.589 0.134
Velocity (ft/sec) 5035 3064 2223
Reservoir zone
Brine Oil Gas
Density (gm/cc) 1.008 0.675 0.293
Bulk Modulus (GPA) 2.375 0.589 0.134
Velocity (ft/sec) 5035 3064 2223
Matrix Properties
Mineral Name Quartz Wet Clay

Density (gm/cc) 2.650 2.600
Modulus (GPA) 37.000 21.000
Velocity (m/sec) 6050 3410
Input Curve VCL
Default Mineral Yes

Average Gassmann results
Log Inputs
Data from interval : 7776.00 7922.50
Log Value Value Used

Vp (m/sec) 3563 3563
Vs (m/sec) 1982 1982
Vp/Vs Ratio 1.797 1.797
Poisson Ratio 0.276 0.276
Density (gm/cc) 2.307 2.307
Quartz (dec) 0.769
Wet Clay (dec) 0.231 0.231
Porosity (dec) 0.179 0.184

Sw (dec) 0.332 0.332
Sxo (Dec) 0.503 0.503
Flushed zone fluid mixture is Oil / Brine

Fluid mixing law exponent is 3.000
Fluid Properties
Density (gm/cc) 0.843
Modulus (GPA) 0.8162
Velocity (m/sec) 984
Dry Rock Properties

Bulk Modulus (GPA) 16.131
Shear Modulus (GPA) 9.066
Poisson Ratio 0.263
Modulus Ratio 1.779

22.8.3.1 Equations and Methodology

The following block diagram gives a possible workflow to use with the Rock Physics modules.


Average Gassmann Equations

Shear Modulus
Where
Vs = Input average shear velocity
= Input average density
Wet Bulk Modulus
Where
Vp = Input average compressional velocity
Matrix Modulus using Voigt Reuss-Hill mixing scheme
Where
Voli = Average volume of i'th mineral
Kmini = Modulus of i'th mineral
n = Number of minerals
Matrix Density
Where
= Matrix density of i'th mineral
Fluid Density
Where
Sxo = Input average flushed zone water saturation
= Oil or Gas density in the flushed zone
Fluid Modulus calculated using fluid mixing law exponent
Where
= Oil or Gas Modulus in the flushed zone
= Water Modulus in the flushed zone
Exp = Fluid Mixing Law exponent
If the 'Reuss Harmonic Average Formula' option is selected (by 'ticking' the check box) for
flushed zone mixing, then the Fluid Modulus is calculated as follows:

Porosity
Dry rock Modulus using Gassmann
Dry Poisson Ratio
Modulus Ratio
Fluid Substitution Crossplot

These equations assume that the pore Bulk Modulus and Dry Rock Poissons Ratio stay the same
as porosity changes. This is true for small changes in porosity.
Pore bulk modulus from original porosity from Average Gassmann
Where
= Porosity from Average Gassmann calculation
Dry bulk Modulus
Where
= Porosity from crossplot window
Shear Modulus
Fluid Density for each Sw value in crossplot

Where
= Oil or Gas density reservoir zone
= Water density reservoir zone
Fluid Modulus for each Sw value in crossplot using Reuss average formula
Where
= Oil or Gas Modulus reservoir zone
= Water Modulus reservoir zone
Density from porosity for each fluid density
Shear velocity for each density
Bulk Modulus wet for each fluid Modulus
Compressional velocity for each Bulk modulus
Acoustic Impedance for each Vp and density
Poisson ratio wet for each Vp and Vs
Log Fluid Substitution Equations

If Sxo is not entered as an input curve then Sxo can be calculated using one of the empirical
equations:

For Water based mud:
Where
Sw = Input Sw curve
Inv = User entered invasion factor (default 1.0)
For Oil based mud:
Sxo = minimum of Sw or SwMax
Where
SwMax = User entered maximum Sw (default 0.5)
Fluid density is calculated for the invaded zone, reservoir zone and special fluid substitution
Fluid substituted densities
100% wet
Reservoir conditions
Special fluid substitution
Where
= Input log density
= Input porosity
= Density of brine for the reservoir fluids
= Density of the fluid mixture in the flushed zone
= Density of the fluid mixture in the reservoir zone
= Density of the fluid mixture for the special fluid substitution
Dry Matrix properties using Voight-Reuss-Hill average method
Where
Voli = Vol of i'th input mineral
Kmini = Modulus of i'th mineral
n = Number of minerals

Fluid Modulus in the flushed zone using fluid mixing law exponent.
Where
= Oil or Gas Modulus flushed zone
= Water Modulus flushed zone
Exp = Fluid Mixing Law exponent
Dry Modulus from Dry Poisson Ratio as per Gregory 1977, Hampson & Russell
Shear Modulus
Shear Velocity
Bulk Modulus flushed zone

Bulk Modulus at 100% wet
Compressional Velocity at 100% wet
Fluid Modulus at reservoir conditions using Reuss formula
Bulk Modulus at reservoir conditions
Compressional Velocity at reservoir conditions
Fluid Modulus at special fluid substitution conditions using Reuss formula
Bulk Modulus at special fluid substitution conditions

Compressional Velocity at special fluid substitution conditions
22.8.4 Laminated Fluid Subs

Laminated Reservoir Fluid Substitution
This module was developed by Chris Skelt, Chevron.
This Gassmann equation based fluid substitution application transforms density and sonic logs to
any saturation condition. Like many commercial programs there are two stages to the program.
The input logs are first transformed to the 100% water saturated condition to verify the integrity of
the invasion corrections, and then modeled at specified conditions of reservoir fluid type and
saturation.
The user selects one of two alternative models depending on whether the shale is evenly
distributed within the sand or present in discrete laminations not resolved in the log interpretation1.
If the shale is evenly distributed (the shaley sand model) the bulk modulus of the solid fraction is
modeled as a weighted average of the moduli of all the components of the rock. In laminated
reservoirs, fluid effects only occur within the sandy laminations, and the appropriate moduli and
porosity are those of the sandy laminations. Experience shows that the modeled results are often
more sensitive2 to the choice of shale distribution than to the uncertainty in fluid or rock properties,
so it is very important to model the shale distribution appropriately.
If a shear sonic log is not available the program iteratively solves the Gassmann equation for the
100% water filled result and uses the Greenberg-Castagna (GC) model to estimate the shear
slowness.
Although the program is principally a Gassmann implementation, alternative models for computing
dry frame bulk modulus are also available. These are useful for validating results and parameter
picks.
The program was designed around the needs of the Petrophysicist and Geophysicist working in
clastic environments. It has not been validated in carbonates, and reference to sands in this
document reflects our awareness of the limitations of a Gassmann type model in carbonates.
1 Skelt C, "Fluid substitution in Laminated Sands", The Leading Edge, May 2004.
2 Skelt C, "The influence of shale distribution on sensitivity of compressional slowness to reservoir
fluid changes", SPWLA 45th Annual Symposium, 2004.

22.8.4.1 Operational Instructions

The module is accessed under the main menu 'Advanced Interpretation' 'Rock Physics' '
Laminated Fluid Subs'. Parameters, inputs and outputs are entered through a series of tabs:
'Fluid Properties'
'Rock Properties'
'Input Curves'
'Output Curves'
Program theory and suggestions for QC are described in the 'Equations and Methodology'
chapter.
'Fluid Properties' Tab
Fluid Property Calculators

Fluid properties may be obtained from several sources. If the zone of interest is more than a
single reservoir, we recommend setting up trend curves for the fluid properties. This can be done
by interpolating between properties computed (say) every thousand vertical feet.
'Batzle and Wang 1992 Fluid Calculator'. This is provided for compatibility with other
commercial programs that still use these algorithms. This option is not generally
recommended because the results are only valid over a limited range of temperature
and pressure. 'Clicking' on this button opens the following module:

'CSM-UH FLAG program Fluid Calculator'. Only available to Colorado School of

Mines-University of Houston consortium members. FLAG computes approximate water,
oil and gas properties using limited input data. NOTE: The consortium members need to
place the FLAG programs in the IP IntPetro35 directory.
PVT data measured on locally acquired fluids is not always available, but is a better
source of fluid properties, especially for oil.

Initial Saturations - 'Flushed Zone - Zonal Fluid properties'

The user enters density and bulk modulus for up to three fluids at initial saturations, that is to say
the saturations corresponding to the input density and sonic logs specified on the 'Input Curves'
tab. 'Den Filtrate' or 'Mod Filtrate' may have oil or water properties depending on the mud type.
In permeable reservoirs drilled with water base mud, standard log analysis practice is to assume
that there is no formation water in the invaded zone. In OBM, filtrate invasion should be estimated
as part of log analysis. If changes in hydrocarbon saturation are thought to influence the elastic
properties of the rock, or to put in another way, the effect of invasion on the density and sonic log
responses should be considered.
In OBM we recommend using a multi-mineral multi-fluid program such as IPs 'Mineral Solver' for
the log analysis with a model designed to solve for the three fluids actually present in the invaded
zone. If a shaley sand log analysis program is run the computed hydrocarbon density (RHOHY
is the IP default mnemonic) needs to be transformed to the corresponding fractions of OBM
filtrate and formation hydrocarbon.
In wells with large vertical zones of interest or stacked oil and gas reservoirs, formation
hydrocarbon properties may be defined by trend curves spliced from the oil and gas property
trends.
The 'Woods Mix Factor' allows the user to simulate patchy saturation by stiffening the fluid
mixture. A value of one honors Woods Law and zero mixes the fluids by Voigt average of the bulk
moduli. Intermediate values are weighted averages of Woods and Voigt averaging.
In general we assume that the logs respond to the invaded zone. However, if the user believes
that, say, the density responds to the invaded zone while the sonic logs respond to the

undisturbed zone, he could adjust the density to undisturbed zone saturation using simple linear
superposition and specify undisturbed zone saturations in the initial saturations box of the inputs
tab.
When specifying invaded zone fluid properties used to substitute to the wet case the user should
be aware of the distinction between bulk density and the apparent density of light hydrocarbons
that determines the density log response.
All fluid moduli are entered in GPa. Fluid densities are entered in the project density units, either
g/cm3 or kg/m3.
Modeled Reservoir Saturations - 'Undisturbed Zone - Zonal Fluid Properties'

The user enters properties for oil, water and gas in the undisturbed zone. Usually we model
oil-water and gas-water mixtures. There is also provision for three phase cases such as critical
gas saturation in an oil column or a secondary gas cap on residual oil.
The formation water properties specified here are usually the same as those in the invaded zone.
The oil and gas properties may be actual or hypothecated. It is good practice to test the sensitivity
of computed results to a range of hydrocarbon properties to assess the importance of accurate
PVT data. For example, the sensitivity to oil GOR may be tested by running models with oil
properties corresponding to zero GOR, and to bubble point.
'Rock Properties' Tab
Fluid Substitution Model

The user selects the type of shale distribution by using either the 'Laminated Sand Model' or '
Shaley Sand Model' radio buttons. The tabs appearing in the lower half of the screen under '
Zonal Properties' reflect the different inputs needed by the two models. Once the parameters for
both models have been set, the user can toggle between the two options and evaluate the effect
of shale distribution model choice on computed results.
The 'Pass Through Inputs on Computation Breakdown' box is 'checked' to make the outputs
continuous over intervals where the Gassmann equation breaks down. It should be left
'un-checked' to identify these problem areas while refining the model, and 'checked' for the final
pass of the program.
The program populates the 'Rocks and default parameters' table from the
FluidSub_Default_Parameters.par file in the IP installation directory. The user can edit this file
to add rocks and minerals and change parameter values.
The rocks listed under 'Rocks and default parameters' are the default values for the solid
components of the log analysis results. If the 'Laminated Sand Model' is selected, laminated
shale properties are specified under the 'Zonal Properties' tab, and only the rocks and minerals
present in the sand laminations are selected in this table. When running the 'Shaley Sand Model
', shale should also be present in the table. The order of the columns determines the order in
which the rocks are plotted from left to right in the results plots.
The 'Default Mineral' volume fraction is calculated as the volume unaccounted for after summing
the porosity and the other volumes, not by its rock volume curve name. This allows the user to run
fluid substitution using a solid model that is simpler than the log analysis results.
The 'Bulk K' and Greenberg-Castagna (G/C or GC) coefficients for the rocks and minerals
appearing in the table are the program defaults used to populate new models.

Zonal Properties
This panel contains a number of sub-tabs. NOTE: The 'Laminated Shale' sub-tab is only
available when the 'Laminated Sand Model' radio button is 'checked'.
'Zone Depths' sub-tab - The zones can be manually edited in the 'Zone Depths' sub-tab
but new zones are created in the 'Fluid Properties' tab using the 'New zone' button,
which opens the 'Add Zone' selection window.
'Laminated Shale' sub-tab - The 'Laminated Shale' sub-tab is only available when the '
Laminated Sand Model' radio button is 'checked'.
'In Crv Phi Lam' allows the user to specify a curve representing the porosity of
the sand laminations in place of computing sand lamination porosity from
effective porosity and the shale lamination fraction.
The density ('Rho Lam Sh') and compressional slowness ('DTc Lam Sh') of the
shale laminations may be constants or trend
curves.
NOTE: that the shale laminations within a sand package are usually denser and faster than the
intervening massive shales.
The definitions of the GC coefficients 'Lam Shale 'a', 'Lam Shale b'', and 'Lam Shale c' are
consistent with the constants used in 'Rock Physics' 'Shear Sonic QC / Create'.

'Rock Properties' sub-tab - The user specifies the bulk modulus for each component of
the rock other than laminated shale. The individual bulk moduli are mixed to determine
the bulk modulus of the solid material using the Voigt and Reuss averages weighted by
the 'Voigt Mix Fact'. A value of 0.5 is synonymous with the Hill average and is
recommended in the absence counter-indications.
'G/C Coeffs' sub-tab - The user specifies GC coefficients for the rocks in the 'Rock
Properties' menu. They are used for shear sonic prediction if a shear log is not
available, and for estimation of the fluid effects in the laminated model whether or not a
shear log was run. They should therefore be validated as part of the workflow any time
the Laminated Model is run.
'Cutoffs / Limits' sub-tab - 'Phi Max' is the maximum porosity allowed for the sand
laminations and acts as a limit in cases where the computation of sand lamination
porosity goes unstable in low net to gross intervals. It should be set at the highest

porosity anticipated for the zone of interest.

The 'Vsh Max' and 'Phi Min' are cutoffs beyond which the fluid substitution
computations are suppressed and the outputs set equal to the inputs.
The 'Kill Logic' is additional to the cutoffs and allows the user to use an external
flag to suppress computation. It uses the same logic as that defined in the '
Phi/Sw' module.
'K_df Model' sub-tab - The program always computes dry frame bulk modulus using the
Gassmann equation, but also offers alternative models that may help validate or
diagnose problems with Gassmann results. In some circumstances, such as low net to
gross laminated reservoirs or very unconsolidated formations the alternative models may
yield more stable results than the Gassmann equation.
The alternative models are all explained in detail in the literature, and are described in briefly in
the accompanying Program Theory document. Each model uses different input parameters, and
the unused parameters are greyed out in the menu.
The menu of alternative models does not claim to be exhaustive, so the user may also enter an
external K_df from another model or from laboratory measurements.
NOTE: that the K_df model choice is a zoned parameter, so the user could for example use the
Gassmann model in deeper reservoirs and one of the alternative models in higher porosity
reservoirs where the Gassmann solution for K_df is ill-conditioned.
'Input Curves' Tab
Elastic logs, Porosity and Shale fraction

The 'Density', 'DT Compressional' and 'DT Shear' logs are usually the edited, quality controlled
logs. If no shear log is available then the entry is left blank and the program uses the coefficients
entered on the 'G/C Coeffs' tab to compute DTs using the Greenberg-Castagna method. '

Porosity' (Phie in this case) and 'Shale Lamination Index' (VShLam) are from log analysis.
VshLam and VShale are not synonymous. VShLam is the volume fraction of shale laminations,
determined by reference to core data or using a log-based method such as Thomas-Stieber.
When using the laminated model the program transforms the input porosity to sand lamination
porosity using
Phi_Slam = Phie / (1 VshLam)
unless the 'In Crv Phi Lam' entry is 'checked' on the 'Laminated Shale' tab. The computation of
Phie should take account of Gassmanns contention that electrostatically bound water is part of
the rock frame and capillary bound water part of the pore system.
Additional solid fractions in more complex mineralogical models are input under the 'Rock
Properties' tab.
Initial Saturations
In general these are the saturations of the fluids in the invaded zone. Only two should be
specified. The program calculates the third on the basis that the three saturations sum to one.
Saturations may be curves or constants.
For example, for a gas well drilled with water-based mud, the user would specify Sxo for filtrate
saturation and zero for oil saturation and the program would compute invaded zone gas saturation
equal to 1 0 Sxo.
Modeled Reservoir Saturations

In this case Sw_HC is a modeled water saturation for a hydrocarbon-filled model. Setting oil
saturation to zero describes a gas reservoir.
Invasion corrections to the logs are made by entering the reservoir fluid saturations computed
from the logs here.
One special case is substituting to 'dry frame conditions' to estimate the density and velocity of
the formation in the absence of fluids. This is achieved by setting water saturation to zero and gas
saturation to one and entering gas density and bulk modulus of zero.
'Output Curves' Tab

Three sub-tabs are found under the 'Output Curve' tab.
'Elastic Properties Output Curves' - list the elastic properties computed from the
density and slowness at observed, wet and modeled saturations.
'QC Checks Output Curves' - essential QC outputs for the user to verify that the
program has run as intended.
'Diagnostics and Output Curves' - diagnostics to identify breakdowns in the
computations.
Output Set
In order to distinguish the results of each fluid and saturation scenario, it is recommended to use
a three letter scheme where the letters specify the basic model (in this application Laminated or S
haley Sand) the hydrocarbon type (Gas, Oil, Water or In-situ) and the saturation model (H
ydrocarbon filled, In-situ or Fizz). Some examples are tabulated.
Code Shale HC Saturation Comments

type
LII Laminated In-situ In-situ Laminated sand/shale invasion
compensation
SII Shaley In-situ In-situ Evenly distributed shale invasion
sand compensation
LGI Laminated Gas In-situ Fill all HC bearing intervals with gas
according to the observed water saturation
LGH Laminated Gas HC filled Fill all sands with gas using hydrocarbon filled
saturation model
SOH Shaley Oil Oil Filled Fill all sands with oil using hydrocarbon filled
Sand saturation model
Output Curve units

Elastic Moduli are output in GPa. The user may select velocity and impedance units. The
selections shown in the figure are recommended for compatibility with Greenberg-Castagna and
for unit compatibility with the output rock and fluid moduli.
In the event that the user or his client wants to work with moduli in psi, the conversion from GPa
to psi is 1 Mpsi = 0.145038 GPa. For conversions between feet and meters, note that 1 foot is
precisely 0.3048 meters, and that I meter is approximately 3.2808 feet.

Elastic Properties Output Curves

The 'Observed' properties are computed from the input density and slowness curves and are
intended to provide the user with a complete set of elastic properties corresponding to the
observed logs. Changing the substitution model has no effect on these results because they are
computed from the input density and slowness. The formulae used are from linear elastic theory
and are listed under 'Elastic Property Formulae'.
The 'Wet' properties are derived from the wet density and slowness curve that are the result of
substitution from the observed logs using the specified initial saturations and fluid properties.
These outputs are unaffected by changes in the saturations and fluids specified for the
undisturbed zone.
The 'Modeled' column holds the modeled reservoir saturations.
All the entries in each column may be toggled on and off by clicking on the 'Use' button. Since the
observed and wet cases are unaffected by changes in the modeled saturation there is no need to
compute these for all modeled cases.
QC Checks Output Curves

These outputs allow the user to verify that the program is using the input data as intended, and for
basic troubleshooting in the case of unexpected results. The curves specific to the model not
being used are greyed out.

Curve definitions are tabulated below
Phie_fs Porosity used by the program. Usually the effective porosity from
log analysis
K_Flxo Bulk modulus of the mixture of three fluids in the invaded zone.
Check this to verify that it behaves consistently with the specified
saturations, fluid properties and Woods factor.
Rho_Flxo Density of the mixture of three fluids in the invaded zone.
K_FlRes Bulk modulus of the mixture of three fluids in the modeled zone
Rho_FlRes Density of the mixture of three fluids in the modeled zone
Volume of Rock n The individual rock volumes used by the program to compute the
bulk modulus of the solid fraction if more than one non-shale
material is in the model. There should be a simple mapping from
log analysis results to these volumes.
No_Com_Flg = 0 if computation runs.
= 1 if porosity or shale fraction outside cutoffs

= 2 if the Gassmann equation cannot be applied, for example

because the computed formation bulk modulus is greater than the
computed modulus of the solid fraction.
Vshlam Shale lamination volumetric fraction
Phi_Slam Sand lamination porosity. This may be computed from input

effective porosity or input directly.
Kvo_Slam Voigt computation of bulk modulus for the solid fraction in the
sandy laminations
Kre_Slam Reuss computation of bulk modulus for the solid fraction fraction
in the sandy laminations.
Kr_Slam Hill average of the Voigt and Reuss computations.
K_df_lam Dry frame bulk modulus of the sandy laminations, computed using
the algorithm specified on the K_df Model tab.
K_df_Gas_Lm Dry frame bulk modulus of the sandy laminations, computed using
the Gassmann equation. This computation is always made,
irrespective of which K_df_Model is selected.
K_ReSolFlL Reuss average of solid and fluid components of the sandy

laminations. Data points lying below this value are evidence of
bad data or incorrect parameter picks.
PR_df_Lam Sand lamination dry frame Poissons ratio.
Kvo_WRoc Voigt computation of the bulk modulus of the mixture of non-shale

solids and shale (Whole Rock).
Kre_Wroc Reuss computation of the bulk modulus of the mixture of

non-shale solids and shale.
K_Wroc Hill average of the Voigt and Reuss results.
K_df Computed whole rock dry frame bulk modulus using the algorithm
specified on the K_df Model tab.
K_df_Gass Dry frame bulk modulus of the whole rock, computed using the
Gassmann equation. This computation is always made,
irrespective of which K_df_Model is selected.
K_Re_SolFl Reuss average of solid and fluid components of the whole rock.
Data points lying below this value are evidence of bad data or
incorrect parameter picks.
PR_df Whole rock dry frame Poissons ratio
Diagnostics Output Curves

These curves are not usually output but may be selected to help the user diagnose awkward error
conditions in the results, especially those related to breakdown of the Gassmann equation. The
formulae for the curves named tmp* are listed in the 'Equations and Methodology' section '
Compressional Sonic Log substitution to wet' document. NOTE: that the program computes K

dry frame only once, during the computation from observed to wet (***OtoW). The same dry
frame value is used to predict the ****_Wet (brine-filled) and ****_Res (modeled) elastic
properties.
Elastic Property Formulae
Conversion factors are for moduli are in GPa, velocities in ft/s, impedances in g/cm3.km/s, density
are in g/cm3 and slowness in s/ft.
Compressional impedance
Shear impedance
Compressional to shear velocity ratio
Bulk Modulus

Compressional Velocity in km/s
Shear Velocity in km/s
Poissons ratio
Hiltermans acoustic impedance
Lamda Rho 'LaRh'
Mu Rho 'MuRh'
Shear Modulus
Youngs Modulus
Compressional Modulus
Make Plot
The 'Make Plot' button lists three template plot options:
'Elastic properties plot'
'Velocities and Poissons Ratio Plot'
'QC plot'
Print
There are three print options:
'Parameters to Printer'
'Parameters to File'
'Parameters to Both File and Printer'

22.8.4.2 Equations and Methodology
Introduction
Fluid substitution follows petrophysical log analysis. The two activities share many input curves
and parameters. For example, the lithology and invaded zone fluid saturations from log analysis
are key principal inputs to fluid substitution, and the pressures and temperatures used for log
analysis are used to estimate the bulk moduli and densities of the fluids used in fluid substitution.
Inconsistencies in fluid substitution results may identify shortcomings in log analysis, so iteration
between log analysis and fluid substitution is common.
The four tabs on the main program define the order in which the user sets up the input and output
parameters. Wherever possible, mnemonics are consistent with conventions used elsewhere in
IP.
The program first runs substitution from the observed logs to the 100% water saturated case, and
then uses these results as the input to a simulation of any modeled saturation condition. The user
should run quality checks on the observed to wet results to verify correct treatment of the invaded
zone fluids before drawing any conclusions from the modeled zone results.
Data Preparation
Many of the inputs needed for fluid substitution are known once a provisional log analysis pass
has been made.
The log analysis outputs should include wet shale, effective porosity and an analysis of the
invaded zone hydrocarbon density, or fractions of gas, oil and OBM filtrate in the invaded zone.
In his classic paper1, Gassmann stated that electrostatically bound water should be considered
part of the rock frame, while capillary bound water is included in the porosity.
The rock fraction may include as many or as few components as the geology and data indicate.
The user should verify that the solid fractions plus effective porosity sum to 1.0. If a simple
sand-shale model was run, a sand fraction should be calculated as:
A 'Vshale' rather than 'Vclay' interpretation is recommended. If the shale intervals are interpreted
as 100% shale with zero porosity, their density, slowness and bulk modulus may be estimated by
reading the logs directly. If shale intervals are interpreted as clay-silt mixtures with significant
porosity it is more difficult to estimate the clay properties because pure clay does not occur in the
log analysis results.
The Greenberg-Castagna compressional-shear velocity relation works well in many areas. The
user needs to specify GC coefficients for all the rock components present in the sand laminations
in the laminated model. It is permissible to assign small fractions of secondary minerals with
unknown GC coefficients the same coefficients as sand, or alternatively to lump together quartz
and any secondary mineral into a single composite rock quartz-feldspar-mica or 'QFM' type rock.
Fluid Substitution program theory and model - Observed to Wet

This section describes the fluid substitution from observed to wet conditions using the Gassmann
equation.
The density, shear sonic and compressional sonic are handled sequentially, and the validity of
each step depends on the previous results. So for example, there is no point in trying to diagnose
a problem with compressional sonic substitution if there are inconsistencies in the density and
shear substitution.

Density log substitution to wet

The observed density log is transformed using the estimated hydrocarbon density HC from log
analysis using the formula:
In practice, the hydrocarbon density is the properties of the mixture of hydrocarbons in the
invaded zone, for example, OBM filtrate and gas.
Shear sonic log substitution to wet

On the assumption that the density and shear sonic log are both reading the same fluid mix, the
shear sonic log may be transformed using the assumption that shear modulus is unaffected by
fluid content:
Compressional sonic log substitution to wet

Selection of the 'Laminated Sand' or 'Shaley Sand' model determines whether the following logic
applies to the whole formation, or to the sand laminations alone.
Compute invaded zone fluid modulus Kf using a weighted average of the Woods (or Reuss) and
Voigt mixing models. Weight the Woods model by 'Woods factor' (Woodfac), for which the default
value is 1 for Woods mixing. This approach is a simple way of honoring the observation that the
invaded zone fluid mixture often behaves as though stiffer than predicted by the Woods model.
See the 'Fluid Properties' tab for more details.
Start with a Woods factor of 1.0, and reduce if necessary to achieve a plausible result in
substitution to the wet case. The figure below shows how a Brie2 exponent of 3 compares with
various values of Woodfac.

Woods Factor for Fluid Mixing

3.000
K_Woods
2.500 K_Serial
Woodfac 0.25
Bulk Modulus (GPa)

2.000 Woodfac 0.5
Woodfac 0.75
1.500 Brie Exp 3
1.000
0.500
0.000
0.000 0.200 0.400 0.600 0.800 1.000
Water Saturation
Compute the solid rock bulk modulus Kr using a weighted average of the Reuss and Voigt mixing
models. Weight the two cases by the Voigt factor, for which the default value of 0.5 yields the Hill
average. A maximum of five rocks is allowed. Generally the secondary minerals such as
feldspars, micas and heavy minerals are lumped together with sand to create a
'quartz-feldspar-mica' or QFM rock. For simplicity this example shows only three solids.
Compute the formation shear modulus. NOTE: that we assume that this is unaffected by changes
in fluid content, and therefore in principle there are two alternative formulae:
Compute the observed formation bulk modulus from the observed density and sonic logs:
Compute the dry frame bulk modulus using the Gassmann equation, assigning K for the invaded
zone fluid mixture to the porosity. The numerator and denominator are available as tmp1_OtoW
and tmp2_OtoW and are useful diagnostics of program breakdown.
Compute the wet bulk modulus using the Gassmann equation rearranged as shown, assigning

the formation water bulk modulus to the porosity. The numerator and denominator of the formula
are output by the program as tmp3_OtoW and tmp4_OtoW.
Compute the wet compressional sonic using the following formula:
These wet results, particularly the wet compressional, should be compared with the GC derived
wet compressional, and any discrepancies understood.
This completes the observed to wet program sequence in the shaley sand case. Similar logic
applies to the laminated model, but it differs in several key aspects.
Laminated model considerations

The following figure shows how effective porosity and shale fraction relate to the laminated
reservoir model.
The laminated model differs from the shaley sand model in two key respects:
1. The porosity relates to the sand laminations. It is derived from the effective porosity using
the formula:
The shale lamination fraction may be derived from a correlation with core based sand
fraction, or a Thomas-Stieber density-neutron analysis.
2. The fluid effects the differences between the observed and fluid substituted values of
the logs only occur in the sand laminations, and need to be attenuated by multiplying by
the sand lamination fraction
Laminated and Shaley Sand models compared

The laminated model estimates the shear slowness in the sand laminations using
Greenberg-Castagna, and adds the computed fluid effect to the input log. Consequently the two
shale models give different results in the absence of shale laminations, although the difference is
negligible if valid Greenberg-Castagna coefficients are specified.
To a first approximation, the shaley sand model may be considered a special case of the
laminated model with a shale lamination index equal to zero, but with one important difference. In
the laminated model, the magnitude of the fluid effects is determined using a shear slowness
estimated from the compressional using the Greenberg-Castagna method. This is done to
preserve stability in low net to gross laminated intervals where the shale correction becomes
ill-conditioned. The output shear slowness is equal to the observed log plus the computed fluid
effects. If a shear log is available, the shaley sand model uses it in substitution to wet and from
wet to modeled saturation.
If no shear log is present, the program iterates to wet compressional predicted shear using
Greenberg-Castagna. In these circumstances the evenly distributed shale model is a special case
of the laminated model with a shale lamination fraction VshLam of zero throughout.
Alternative models for dry frame bulk modulus
Gassmann Model
Computer programs apply the Gassmann equation in the forms:
or .
An alternative statement of the model:
leads to the graphical illustration.

Graphical illustration of the Gassmann equation.

Points lying on the Reuss average of the solid and fluid properties have zero dry frame modulus,
and points lying below the line have negative calculated dry frame modulus, or more likely
incorrect fluid, solid, porosity or solid material composition. The intercept porosity fR is implicit in
the equation and not normally computed.
Critical Porosity Model

The critical porosity model3 is based on the observation that bulk moduli of water saturated
samples measured in the laboratory lie close to a straight line between the solid material modulus
at zero porosity and the Reuss average of the solid and fluid properties at the 'critical porosity', the
point at which the sample transitions between solid and emulsion like behaviour. At this point the
bulk and shear moduli of the dry frame are both zero. The equation for dry frame bulk modulus is
The shear modulus is unaffected by fluid content and points lie on a straight line between zero at
critical porosity and the solid material shear modulus at zero porosity.
The model is purely empirical and no claims are made for any basis in physics. Nonetheless, the
parallel with the graphical display of the Gassmann model is noteworthy, though the implied
analogy between the critical porosity and Gassmanns fR is apparently illusory.

Graphical illustration of bulk versus the critical porosity model.

Shear modulus is zero at the critical porosity, implying zero shear velocity. Our implementation of
fluid substitution does not honour this precisely, and instead estimates shear modulus from the
bulk modulus and GC coefficients.
Krief Model
The Krief model is another empirical model that differs from the critical porosity model at very high
porosity as shown on the figure. The model may be refined by altering the term m from its
default value of 3. Unlike the critical porosity model, the Krief model allows for shear propagation
at very high porosity.

Bulk modulus from the Krief Model
Soft, Stiff, Intermediate and Mixed sand models

This family of models4 is based on the premise that the stiffness of the dry frame is related to the
effective stress (simplified to an equivalent average effective stress) via the mechanics of grain to
grain interaction defined by the Hertz-Mindlin theory. Dry frame modulus is also a function of the
porosity of the original sand pack at the time of deposition, the coordination5 number, the degree
of adhesion between grains and the shear modulus of the solid material.
The Hertz-Mindlin theory gives the following pressure dependent expressions for dry frame bulk
and shear moduli where a fraction f of the grain contacts have perfect adhesion:
Where
C is the coordination number
GR the solid rock material shear modulus
P the average effective stress
n the Poissons ratio of the solid material
f0 the original porosity.

The (uncemented) soft sand model follows the lower Hashin-Shtrikman bound between the
properties at the original and zero porosity. Cementation is assumed to occur away from the grain
contacts. The intermediate model is a special case of the soft sand model with KHM defined by a
coordination number equal to 15.
The stiff sand model follows the upper Hashin-Shtrikman bound between the original and zero
porosity end points, and assumes an adhesion fraction of one, that friction prevents slippage
between the grains.
The mixed model is a weighted average of the soft and stiff sand models, favouring the soft model
at high porosity and the stiff model at low porosity in line with some6 observations.
The figures below compare the models, and show the influence of the adhesion fraction.
Bulk Modulus from soft, intermediate, stiff and mixed sand models.

Models other than 'Stiff Sand' have zero adhesion between grains
Bulk Modulus from soft, intermediate, stiff and mixed sand models.
All models have total adhesion (zero slippage) between grains.
Block diagrams showing Observed to Wet logic



Quality control - Substitution to wet
Quality control should verify that the results of saturation to wet have no visible imprint from the
original saturations. The scheme shown here has worked in many areas. The figure below shows
key inputs and outputs for QC. Track 3 shows the formation volumes that should match the log
analysis results. Tracks 4 and 5 show the invaded and undisturbed zone saturations. At this stage
the undisturbed zone saturations are only relevant for identifying hydrocarbon-bearing intervals.

Track 6 shows the input effective porosity, and if a laminated model was used the computed
un-discriminated sand lamination porosity. The remaining tracks show some of the key elastic
logs. This plot shows a subset of the curves plotted under 'Make Plot' 'Elastic Properties Plot
'.
Cross-plots are also useful. The distribution of density versus effective porosity should not depend
on water saturation. The left hand plot shows the observed (olive) and water substitution (blue)
over the water and gas legs in the same well. The presence of gas reduces the density for a given
effective porosity. The right hand plot shows the substitution to wet for the entire interval, coloured
by the computed water saturation. Correct treatment of the fluid effects on the density log is
indicated by the wet substitution collapsing on to a single trend with no saturation dependence as
shown on the right.
The fluid effects on shear slowness are small, but it is still worthwhile making the plots as they
may also be used to validate the raw shear data.

The Gassmann equation is defined in terms of bulk modulus, so successful computation of wet
bulk modulus can be verified using similar logic. As before, the left hand plot shows the observed
and wet data, while the right hand plot shows how bulk modulus has collapsed on to a single trend
after fluid substitution.
Wet compressional slowness is computed from wet bulk modulus, and similar reasoning is
applied.

Geophysicists are interested in the effects of fluids on the VpVs ratio. This may be examined by
reference to cross-plots of shear against compressional slowness for the observed (left) and wet
substituted data (right) as shown below. The gas effect on compressional slowness is evident on
the left hand plot, while on the right the points from the gas bearing intervals lie on a similar trend
to the data from the water leg.
Alternatively, the consistency of the VpVs ratio may be evaluated in plots against effective
porosity as shown below.
Substitution to Modeled Saturation
Fluid substitution program theory and model - wet to modeled

Once a model for substitution from observed to wet has been established, substitution to any
other fluid condition and saturation profile is a largely mechanical exercise.
The undisturbed zone saturations are used to specify the modeled saturation condition. There are
a number of common scenarios.
1. 100% water saturated. The program always computes the responses (Rho_Wet,
DTc_Wet and DTs_Wet) with the effective porosity filled with formation water. A number
of QC checks are made with this set of curves.
2. Observed fluids and saturations. The water saturation input is the petrophysicists best
estimate of true formation saturation. Any low hydrocarbon saturations in water zones

must be removed to prevent spurious effects in the modeled results. In a gas reservoir, set
the oil saturation to zero. In wells with oil and gas, compute one or other of oil and gas
saturation equal to zero or one minus Sw according to the hydrocarbon present.
3. Fill zones with hydrocarbon. The effect of filling wet zones with hydrocarbon can be
simulated by selecting a modeled water saturation curve driven off a correlation observed
in hydrocarbon bearing zones. A simple correlation with shale fraction or effective porosity
often works well. The example shown below worked in one of our fields. The correlation
was picked off a cross-plot and clipped at one.
4. Fill zones with fizz. A fizz saturation may be defined by limiting a curve such as SwHC
specified above between 0.85 and 1.0. This is illustrated below where Swirr_Phie (track
19) came from the function in the cross-plot above and closely matches the calculated
saturations in the hydrocarbon bearing intervals. Sw_Fiz_Phi is Swirr_Phie clipped at a
minimum value of 0.85. Sw1 in track 18 is the water saturation from log analysis. The are
fill identifies the oil and gas sands.

5. Compute dry frame properties. Correlations with static mechanical properties measured in
the laboratory are usually made with respect to dry frame properties which may be thought
of as the density and slowness of the rock frame with no contribution from fluids. This case
is achieved by setting gas saturation to unity, and specifying a gas with zero density and
bulk modulus.
Block diagrams showing wet to modeled logic


Quality control - Substitution to modeled saturation

QC of computed outputs should address these questions
1. Were the fluid saturations and properties correctly specified, or did the user make an
error? Do the different cases differ as expected?
2. Are there any spikes or other obviously wrong results?
3. How confident should we be in the results?
1. Fluid properties correctly specified

The standard plot formats provided in IP are designed to illustrate the key input saturations. For
example, the plot below identifies the filtrate invasion and reservoir hydrocarbon (gas) in the
invaded zone and fluids in the undisturbed zone in tracks 4 and 5.

Other checks depend on circumstances For example, since most reservoir fluids are have lower
density and stiffness than mud filtrate, the invasion corrected logs should lie further from the wet
case than the observed logs. The result of running a gas-filled model in a gas bearing sand
should be similar to the invasion corrected case.
Filling a zone with gas at low (fizz) saturation should lower the density slightly. At moderate
pressure it should yield a compressional sonic close to the gas filled case. The effect of low gas
saturation is reduced at high pressure.
2. Spikes and wrong results

Density and shear slowness substitution results are generally stable, as the equations are robust
and unlikely to break down.
Several conditions cause Gassmann equation breakdown.
If the formation bulk modulus is higher than the computed modulus of the solid fraction
the Gassmann equation cannot be applied. This condition tends to occur in tight
streaks, typically carbonates, in shales or very shaley formations. Because the formation
is tight, fluid effects are likely to be small and the user should pass the input curves
though to the outputs. This condition is identified by No_Com_Flg equal to 2.
Poorly specified parameters or the application of a shaley sand model in a laminated
reservoir can result in unstable, zero or negative dry frame bulk modulus. This condition
can be identified by inspecting the K_df output curve. This is not usually a problem when
applying the laminated model
3. Assessing confidence in the results

The QC of the wet case result should verify that initial saturation effects have been removed, and
similar plots of the results of filling the interval with gas or oil should verify consistency in the
modeled results.
There is often uncertainty in the modeled fluid properties, particularly for oil. Passes may be made
using a range of fluid properties to quantify the effects of uncertainty. We generally find that the
oil-filled model results are quite sensitive to the specified GOR, and that PVT measurements and

FLAG estimates are quite different, while in gas models at moderate temperature and pressure
the results are very insensitive to changes in the specified gas properties.
The influence of the choice of shale distribution model may be assessed by running passes with
the laminated and evenly distributed shale model. The sensitivity to shale model choice is often
larger than the sensitivity to the plausible fluid property range.
Notes
1. Gassmann classic paper, translated by Berryman's students.
2. Brie A, et al, "Shear Sonic Interpretation in Gas-Bearing Sands", 1995, SPE 30595
3 Mavko, Mukerji and Dvorkin, 1998, "The Rock Physics Handbook", Cambridge University Press.
4. Mavko, Mukerji and Dvorkin, 1998, "The Rock Physics Handbook", Cambridge University Press.
5. The coordination number is the number of grains in contact with each grain. Published data
from Murphy (1982) suggests that this

varies from about 8 to 14 as porosity reduces from 0.4 to 0.2. it is also thought to increase
with clay content.
6. R.Beardsley, personal communication, 2007.
22.8.5 Elastic Impedance

The Elastic Impedance (EI) is as calculated by P. Connolly in 'The Leading Edge' paper (1999).
The equation used is the one for high angle inversion (equation 4.1). There is little difference
between the low angle equation and the high angle equation for angles below about 20. For
angles above 30 the low angle equation starts to become unstable.
Where
Vp = Compressional velocity
Vs = Shear velocity
K = Constant representing the average for the interval
= Bulk Density
= Incidence angle

Input curves
The user enters the Vp, Vs and density curves and their appropriate units.
Result Elastic Impedance Curves

'Base Name' : One EI curve will be generated for each angle requested to be processed. The
result curve names will consist of the 'Base Name' plus the angle number. For the above example
the output curve names are EI_10, EI_20 and EI_30.
'Angles' grid box : The user enters the angles to process. Up to 10 different angles can be
processed at once.
'K' constant
The 'K' constant for the EI equation must be entered. The 'Calculate K from interval' button can
be used to calculate the average 'K' over the selected interval. If this button is clicked the
following pop-up window will appear :

If the user selects 'Yes' then an output curve called EI_Kconst will be created in the well. This will
be the instantaneous 'K' value over the whole well.
The average 'K' value, for the selected depth interval, will be displayed in the 'K Constant' box
window regardless of whether the user has chosen to create an EI_Kconst curve.
Calculation Units
The user can select the calculation units for the velocity and density input into the EI equation.
Due to the form of the equation the result curve shapes will be different depending on the
calculation units. NOTE: Unit conversion can not be made afterwards on the output curve but
must be made on the input curves.
EI Normalization
Since the overall average values of the EI curves depend on the angles, the EI normalization
allows the curves to be normalized to the AI curve at defined depths so that the differences
between the AI curve and the EI curves can be easily seen.
Check the 'Normalize to AI curve' box to turn on the normalization.
Enter the logs depths at which to normalize the curves. At these depths the EI normalized curves
will be identical in value to the AI curve. The normalization is done by taking the ratio of AI/EI at
the normalization depths and applying this ratio to the EI curve away from these depths. If more
that one normalization depth is entered then the normalization value between the entered depths
will be a linear extrapolation of the values at the entered depths.
Intervals
The user can either select the depth range over which to calculate the EI curves or select a tops
set and the zones over which the calculations are to be made.
The 'Run' button will make the calculations and update the log plots.
The 'Log Plot' button will produce a drop-down box that will allow the user to choose either to add
to the current log plot or to create a new log plot. The following is an example of a 'New Plot'. If
the 'Add to current plot' is selected then the right hand EI/AI track, seen in the example below,
will be added to the right hand side of the current plot.


22.9 Pore Pressure Calculations

The 'Pore Pressure Calculation' Modules comprise the following three tools:
'Density Estimation',
'Overburden Gradient Calculation'
'Run Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient calculations'
These tools can be used to evaluate the subsurface pressures encountered within a well. They
enable the user to model Overburden (OB), Pore (PP) and Fracture (FP) pressures based on
conventional log curves, drilling information and seismic data input. It can be used as a pre-drill
(predictive) and while-drilling (real-time) tool, as well as for post-drilling analysis to update and
refine OB, PP and FP models.
In pore pressure computations many data types are integrated to provide as comprehensive a
sub-surface pressure analysis as possible. Data collation, preparation and QC are essential
pre-analysis steps. The diagram below, while not providing an exhaustive list, illustrates the types
of data that should be retrieved and accessible before starting an analysis.
Section 22.9 Advanced Interpretation : Pore Pressure Calculations

When data compilation is complete, the following 'Preparation workflow', should be followed within
Interactive Petrophysics (IP); before proceeding to the Pore Pressure evaluation modules:

Then proceed to the main 'Interpretation' menu 'Pore Pressure Calculations'. The following
options are available under the 'Pore Pressure Calculation' menu:
The technical papers on which these modules are based are listed in the 'Pore Pressure
References' Section. The inexperienced user is advised to locate and read at least a few of these
references to familiarize themselves with the techniques / calculations being used.
Recommended reading would include the following:
1. SPE Reprint Series No.49 "Pore Pressure and Fracture Gradients".

2. Mouchet, J-P., Mitchell, A. Abnormal Pressures While Drilling - Manuels Techniques 2 Elf
Aquitaine (1989)

22.9.1 Density Estimation

'Density Estimation' provides the user with a means to generate a density curve from sonic log
data for use in the 'Overburden Gradient Calculation'.
When density log information is not available, it is often estimated from P-wave velocity (Vp) using
an empirical relationship. A number of authors have published 'density-from-sonic transit time'
algorithms. The algorithms included here are those of Gardner1, Bellotti et al2 and Lindseth3.
The 'density-from-sonic transit time' methodology has the advantage that it can be used ahead of
drilling, by utilising seismic data, converting seismic interval velocities (V, in ft/sec) to sonic transit
times (1/V *106 (usec/ft).
The 'Input curve' is a sonic log curve.
The model to be run ('Gardner', 'AGIP Bellotti', 'Lindseth') is selected by 'checking' the
appropriate check-box in the top left hand corner of each model 'panel'. The model equations are
given in each model panel. Parameters such as the coefficients for the Gardner transform can be

edited, saved and re-called. A number of passes can be made through the various models and, if
possible, the Output density (RHOxxx) curve can be calibrated against a well containing a RHOB
curve.
Output curves are RhoGard, RhoAgip and RhoLind , depending on which method is selected.
'Depth intervals' for the computation can be input manually, or by selecting the button and
choosing the appropriate 'Tops' set. The default depth range is that covered by the sonic log.
NOTE : Bellotti et al2 found more acceptable results comparing actual FDC curves to their
'Unconsolidated formations' equation. (illustrated by examples from the Adriatic, Mauritania and
Indonesia see Reference 2).
REFERENCES
See 'Pore Pressure References' section for the technical papers referenced here.
22.9.2 Overburden Gradient Calculation

The 'Overburden Gradient Calculation' tool is the second module within the Pore Pressure
Calculation 'suite' and calculates the instantaneous average overburden gradient and overburden
pressure curves relative to the 'reference depth' datum , whether that is KB (TVD KB) , Mean Sea
Level (TVDSS) or TVD Sea Bed.
NOTE: we are working in a 'True Vertical Depth' domain in both the 'Overburden Gradient
Calculation' module and the 'Run Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient calculation' module.
This module permits the user to model the overburden gradient OBGrad and overburden
pressure OBPres curves for the well under evaluation. The OBGrad curve can be modelled
directly from a combination of :
User-selected density curve data and / or

User-input average density values (with associated top and bottom depths).
in the absence of density logs, 'Look-up tables' or
An empirical 'Amoco' relationship can be used.
NOTE: While a default 1 psi/ft (19.25 lbs/gal) overburden gradient may give acceptable results for
onshore wells, it is not recommended for use with deep water interpretations, where the effects
of depth of water and thickness of poorly-consolidated sediments need to be evaluated more
rigorously.
The 'Overburden Gradient Calculation' screen is divided into a number of 'panels':
'Input Well Data'

'Input Density Curves or Fixed Values'
'Intervals where Density Curve is Missing'

'Overburden Results Curves'
Input Well Data

This section requires the user to select a 'Depth Curve'. If the subject well is vertical then the
'measured depth' DEPTH curve would be suitable. However, if the well is significantly deviated
then a TVD KB, TVD SS or TVD SB (referenced to Sea Bed) depth curve should be computed
and selected. The user should also, if necessary, use the 'Well Depths Editor' functionality to
extend the subject wells depth range to surface before running this module. This enables the
Overburden Gradient and Overburden Pressure curves to be computed over the entire well, rather
than only where wireline logs have been loaded.
'KB Height' is picked up from the 'Well Header Info.' 'Default Parameters' tab if the data has
been entered there. Otherwise, type in a KB elevation above your well depth datum - usually
Mean Sea Level offshore ( the 'Air gap').

'Water Depth' / 'Density'. In the offshore drilling situation the Water Depth and Water Density
values are required to compute the overburden contribution of the water column. The water
density value can be input using the following units - lbs/gal, psi/ft, gm/cc, Kg/m3.
Input Density Curves or Fixed Values

This 'grid' table enables the user to select a density curve, either from the 'Density Estimation'
calculation, or from an existing well log, or user-entered constant values of bulk density over a
depth range, for use in the computations. The OBGrad and OBPres curves are then created by
an integration operation performed on the density log data and any other values added into the
grid. The values of 'Water Depth' / 'Density' allow the calculation of the overburden gradient
contribution of this interval to the final model.
Intervals where density curve is missing

For intervals within the subject well, where no density curve exists, the following section provides
a means to compute 'missing' overburden gradient and pressure data. This section allows the
user to apply a number of methods for computing a 'continuous' overburden gradient curve from
surface / reference depth to Well Total Depth.
1. The user can apply an empirical relationship, selected by 'checking' the 'Amoco Avg.
Sediment Density' option, then by typing an average sediment density value into the text
box and selecting a density 'unit' from the drop-down list. This method is documented by
Traugott, M.4. The relationships are shown below:
if you know the value to input
Where
OBG = Overburden Gradient
W = water depth (ft)
8.5 = assumed sea water density (lbs/gal)
D = TVD depth below KB (ft)
A = Air gap (ft)
= average sediment density (lbs/gal, gm/cc, etc.)
If you do not have a value, 'checking' the 'Amoco Compaction Relationship' option
will calculate the average sediment density input to the 'Amoco Avg. Sediment Density'
method, using the following equation.
= 16.3 + [(D-W-A) / 3125] 0.6
This simple compaction relationship is only suitable for sand/shale sequences that have not
experienced unloading/uplift. The value, 0.6, is an empirical exponent.

2. Alternatively, a user-defined 'Lookup tables' overburden gradient curve can be loaded

directly into IP. Details of the data formatting and file naming conventions required for this
are included in the 'Overburden Gradient Curves' section.
Three overburden gradient curves have been included with IP. These are:
The 'Offshore Texas/Louisiana' dataset was provided by Unocal.

The 'Average GOM (Amoco)' data was taken from Figure 2 in the 'Fracture Prediction
for the New Generation' paper, by Eaton and Eaton5.
The 'Deepwater GOM (Amoco)' data was based on calculations by Barker and Wood6.
By including an air gap and water depth / water density in the computation, the 'Barker &
Wood' overburden gradient curve can be calculated for any water depth from the rig
depth reference point (RT / KB) using the following equation:
Cum. Av. Formation. Bulk Density (lb/gal) = 5.3 * (TVDBML) 0.1356

(where depth units are in feet and TVDBML = TVD depth Below Mud Line)
Overburden Results Curves

The output results curves OBGrad (gradient) and OBPres (Pressure) curves, their curve units
and the 'Output Depth Type' can all be selected in this panel.
The 'Output Depth Type' drop-down list allows the user to change the datum for the output
curves. For example, if the input data is relative to TVD KB, the output curve could be adjusted to
a TVD Sub Sea datum or TVD Sea Bed datum, depending upon the way the user wishes to use
the 'Pore Pressure Calculations' Module.
NOTE: It is good practice to decide upon an Output Depth Type for the Overburden
Gradient calculations and use that same reference consistently in the Pore /Fracture
gradient module.
The Module buttons have the following functions:

'OK' - executes the computations using the curves, values and methodology that the
user has selected.
'Make Plot' - launches a QC log plot to show the computed overburden gradient and
overburden pressure curves.
'Save' - allows the user to save the module settings to an external (.obu) file.

'Load' - allows the user to re-load a set of saved settings from an external (.obu) file.
22.9.3 Pore & Fracture Pressure Gradient Calculations

'Run Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient calculation' is the third module within the 'Pore
Pressure Calculations' suite.
This module provides the user with the methodologies to generate Pore Pressure and Fracture
Pressure gradient models for the study well, based on the analysis of input log curves and
additional drilling information, when this is available.
The 'Pore Pressure Gradient' parameters and set-up are organized on a number of screen 'tabs'
. These are:

'Input'
'Output Curves'
'Parameters'
'Well Data'
'Result Xplot'
An additional tab, 'Daines Parameters', will only be visible if the user elects to '
Calculate Fracture Gradient / Pressure from:' and selecting 'Daines' methodology.
The tabs are described below.

References to technical papers whose techniques are implemented in this module are provided in
the 'Pore Pressure References' section.

'Input' Tab
The 'Input' tab allows the user to select the log curves and well depth data to be used in the
interpretation, together with the Pore Pressure and Fracture Pressure Gradient models to be
applied to the data. Log curves can be selected from the drop-down menu boxes.
The 'Input' tab is split into a number of panels:
'Well Input Data' Panel

This section allows the user to set up a number of well properties which IP uses in the pore
pressure calculations.
The 'Overburden Gradient Curve' input is the output results curve calculated in the '
Overburden Gradient Calculation' module or a user-supplied curve. The input curve

units are selected from the adjacent drop-down list.

Overburden Gradient Curve 'Ref' - This is the depth 'Reference Datum' that was used to
create the Overburden Gradient (OBGrad) and Overburden Pressure (OBPres) curves.
The 'Depth Curve' should be the curve that was used in the Overburden Gradient
calculation module. This could be the DEPTH curve if the subject well is vertical, or a
computed TVD KB or TVDSS curve when the well is significantly deviated.
The Depth Curve 'Ref' (reference) is selected from the adjacent drop-down list.
The 'Shale Discriminator Curve' can be selected from the drop-down list box and
should be either :
1. A clay volume curve from the output of running the 'Clay Volume' interpretation
module, or
2. Another 'clay indicator' curve (e.g.GR).
When the 'Shale Discriminator Curve' check box is 'checked' and the interactive Log plot for this
module is launched, a shale discriminator track with interactive cut-off line will be visible. This
helps the user to select shale intervals for use in the pore pressure calculations.
'KB Height (Air Gap)' - the Kelly Bushing elevation for the well. This value will be
automatically filled in, if the appropriate value has been entered into the 'Manage Well
Header Info.' module, on the 'Default Parameters' tab. The user can type the 'KB
Height' value into the box if it is empty.
'Water Depth' - The 'Water Depth' value will be automatically filled in, if the appropriate
value has been entered into the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, 'Default
Parameters' tab. The user can type the 'Water Depth' value into the box if it is empty.
The water depth value should be a positive integer.
'Water Density' - The pore pressure calculations take into account the pressure exerted
by the height of the water column in the offshore environment. The user should type in
an appropriate sea water density value and 'Unit'. The IP default value is 8.5 lbs/gal,
which is equivalent to 0.441psi/ft or 1.018 gm/cc.
Pressure Gradient Conversion Factors

Typical conversion factors between lbs/gal, psi/ft and gm/cc are included here for reference:
1.0 lbs/gal = 0.051948 psi/ft
1.0 psi/ft = 19.25 lbs/gal
1.0 gm/cc = 8.3454 lbs/gal
1.0 psi/ft = 2.30666 gm/cc
A Fresh water pressure gradient would be 0.434 psi/ft or 8.345 lb/gal

A Saturated brine pressure gradient would be 0.519 psi/ft or 9.991 lb/gal.
'Calculate Pore Pressure Gradient / Pressures from' Panel

The 'Calculate Pore Pressure Gradients / Pressure from' panel sets up the curves to be used
as Pore Pressure 'indicators'. The underlying computations are based on Eaton's7 methodology
and use a deep-reading resistivity, a sonic log and/or a Drilling Exponent (Dxc) curve as inputs.
The user 'checks' the models to be initiated when the calculations are executed.
Eaton established the following empirical relationships, based on the principle that the
relationship between an 'observed' parameter versus a 'normal' parameter ratio and the formation
pressure depends on changes in the overburden gradient. In IP, Shale 'Normal Compaction
Trend' (NCT) lines are established for each input curve (sonic, resistivity and Dxc) and the
deviation of the 'observed' log response from the appropriate NCT line is used to compute a Pore

Pressure, using the calculated overburden gradient OBGrad curve. The Eaton relationships are
illustrated below:
Resistivity:
Sonic:
Drilling Exponent:
Where
S/D = Overburden Stress Gradient (Psi/ft)
P/D = Formation Pore Pressure gradient (Psi/ft)
P/Dn = Normal Pore pressure gradient (Psi/ft)
Rsh = Shale resistivity (ohmm)
DTshale = Shale travel time (usec/ft)
Dxc = Drilling exponent in Shale
The Eaton 'exponents' used in these equations are sufficiently reliable for widespread use in
exploration wells. However, where for example, calibration pressure data is available from offset
wells, the exponents can be validated. The Eaton exponents can be modified on the 'Parameters'
tab of this module.
In equations where the Eaton exponent is 1.2 (Resistivity and Dxc) , the range can be between
0.9 2.00. In the DTshale equation, where the exponent is 3.0, the range can be 2.0 4.0.
Eaton's method is generally accepted as the most widely applied pore pressure evaluation
technique.
If the Resistivity model is 'checked' there is an option, on the input screen, to correct the resistivity
curve to a constant temperature, using a user-defined temperature curve.
The Arps equation has been used to temperature correct the resistivity log. The temperature
correction has the effect of reducing the drift of the resistivity curve with increasing
depth/temperature. The temperature-corrected resistivity curve is called ResCorr in the 'Output
curves' scheme. An alternative temperature correction equation (Amoco) replaces (+6.77) with
(-6) in the Arps equation and can be applied as a 'user-formula' from the 'User Defined Formula'
module.
Note that the 'Resistivity' method has a number of limitations which must be considered
during an evaluation:

Variations in Cation Exchange Capacity (CEC) will affect the normal shale compaction
trend line (NCT_Res).
Formation temperature and fluid salinity effects are significant, especially at shallow
depths.
The computation calculates pore pressures in low TOC shales only.
The methodology becomes less accurate at deep burial depths where porosity is low.
'Calculate Fracture Gradient / Pressure from' Panel

The 'Calculate Fracture Gradient / Pressure from' Panel allows the user to select a Fracture
Gradient calculation model to apply in the subject well. The available models are :
'Eaton'
'Matthews & Kelly'
'Modified Eaton'
'Barker & Wood'
'Daines'
These models are described more fully in the 'Fracture Gradient Models' section. The user
should 'check' the radio button of the 'Model' to be used. Both the 'Eaton' and 'Matthews and
Kelly' models incorporate additional 'Options', which can be selected from the drop-down lists.
Please refer to the 'Fracture Gradient Models' section for more details.
'Output Curves' Tab

The 'Output Curves' tab allows the user to either; take the default IP curve names for computed
pressure and gradient curves, or to rename individual curves to the users own specifications.
Output pressure units, gradient units and depth references are also selected here.

The 'Calculate Pore Pressure Tolerances' check box, if 'checked' before the model is run, will
create 'High-side' and 'Low-side' curves for each input to the Pore Pressure model. For
example, If the sonic log is used to model pore pressure, then the interactive log plot display will
show the computed Pore-Pressure-from-Sonic curve within a shaded 'envelope' defined by the '
High-side' and 'Low-side' curves.
The user must type a value into the '% Tolerance' box to be used to calculate these additional
curves. For example, a value of '5', the default value, would allow IP to calculate the 'Pore
Pressure plus 5%' ('High-side') and Pore Pressure minus 5% ('Low-side') curves.
The 'Null Output Curves' button, when 'clicked' allows the user to set all output curve values to
-999. This can be useful if the user has 'run' a model and then wishes to experiment with different

depth ranges for the pore/fracture pressure gradient calculations, for example, or if the user
wishes to change the Fracture Pressure model and re-run the calculations without having to
delete the results curves before proceeding.
'Parameters' Tab
The 'Parameters' tab contains a number of 'sub-tabs' which give the user further interactivity with
the Pore and Fracture pressure calculations. The sub-tabs are:
'General'
'Resistivity'
'Sonic'
'D Exponent'

The 'General' sub-tab permits the user to create / delete zones, to edit zone top/ bottom depths
and to manually edit the cut-off value for the Shale Discriminator curve, including the ability to turn
on/off the Shale discriminator curve in any zone.
The tab also allows the user to input a 'normal' hydrostatic gradient value, the 'Hydro Gradient'
parameter, and 'Hyd Grad Units' (hydrostatic gradient units). This value is used in the Eaton
Pore Pressure models (the 'P/Dn' term). The IP default normal hydrostatic gradient is set at 1.0
gm/cc (Fresh water).
The 'Resistivity', 'Sonic' and 'D Exponent' sub-tabs allow the user to modify the Eaton
exponents (described above), if the default values do not generate a pore pressure curve that

matches closely to some measured subsurface calibration pressures from, for example, RFT. All
tabs contain the same column headings, which are described below.
The 'Eaton Exp.' (Exponent) column contains the 'default' exponent for resistivity, sonic
and Dxc as determined by Eaton. This parameter is user-editable.
The 'Filter Length' option allows the user to select a 'smoothing' distance over which the
output Pore Pressure, Fracture gradient and pressure curves ('PPG_XXX', 'FG_XXX
'and 'PP_XXX') are averaged. The filter length, in units of 'depth steps', must be entered,
and be a whole, odd number between 3 and 2001 for both the 'Square' and 'Bell' filters.
NOTE: setting the 'Filter Length' to a value of '1' will compute the output curves at the input curve
depth increment and will calculate the exact output values according to Eatons equations.
Applying a 'Filter Length' will result in an 'averaging' of the Output curves, which will depend on
the 'type' of filter selected and the 'Filter Length' value.
The 'Filter Type' parameter, can be 'toggled' to select an appropriate filtering algorithm.
The choices are 'Square' and 'Bell'. These are described briefly below:
The 'Square' (or box) filter will apply an equal weight to all samples in the filter.
The 'Bell' shape filter applies a sine wave shape filter to the data. The following
formula is used to calculate the filter weights.
Where
Wtj = Filter Weight at j'th level
FiltLen = Filter Length
The 'Extra Gaps' parameter allows the user to extrapolate across data gaps in the
selected Res_Shale, Son_Shale or Dex_Shale curves since these curves will have
gaps where the 'Shale discriminator' cut-off value is not reached. When 'checked' this
option helps to make a continuous pair of output Pore Pressure and Fracture gradient
results curves for each selected pore pressure indicator curve.
The'Extrap Abv Zone' parameter allows the user, in a 'zoned' interpretation, to select to
extrapolate above a zone, in order to create continuous pore pressure and fracture
gradient and pressure curves. If 'checked' the output curves will be displayed as

continuous curves.
'Daines Parameters' Tab

The 'Daines Parameters' tab is only visible when the 'Daines Fracture Gradient Model' is
selected on the 'Input' Tab. This screen allows the user to set up the data to create or load a '
Poissons Ratio' curve that is intrinsic to the Daines methodology. See the 'Fracture Gradient
Models' section for a full description.
The tab contains two data input 'panels'.

1. The upper 'Manual Input for User-Created Poissons Ration Curve' panel is used to
manually create a Daines 'Poissons Ratio' curve. The user enters a top and bottom
depth value and selects a 'Lithology' from the drop- down list. The Daines Poissons ratio
value is filled in automatically. By tabulating the lithologies penetrated in the subject well,
IP will create the Poissons Ratio curve for the well when the 'OK' button is 'clicked'. IP
also creates a 'Facies Code' curve (Facies_PP) based on the selected lithologies. This
curve is added to the interactive log plot display as a 'graphic lithology' track with bitmap
shading for each lithology type.

2. The lower panel is used to input 'Daines Leak Off Test' (LOT) Data Input' information.
These data are used to calibrate the 'Daines Fracture Gradient' Model. The user should
fill in the data 'grid' with any LOT data that has been acquired in the subject well. See the '
Fracture Gradient Models' section for more information.

'Well Data' Tab

The 'Well Data' tab is used :
To record 'Casing Strings' details, including Leak Off Test pressures.

To compute 'Mud Weight' (gradient) and mud pressure curves. NOTE: If a 'Mud
Weight' curve is selected or created, it will automatically appear in the 'Pore Pressure
Gradient Results' and 'Fracture Gradient Results' tracks of the Interactive Log Plot.
To record 'Operational Problems', for use in the interactive and final crossplots.

'Casing Strings' sub tab

Casing string details are manually entered into the blank 'Casing information' table. Users can
select a casing size from the drop-down list or type in their own values.
The 'Mud Weight' sub-tab

The 'Mud Weight' sub-tab allows the user either:
to select an existing mud weight curve (loaded elsewhere in IP) which can be used to to
generate a 'mud pressure' curve, or
to manually enter depths and mud weights into a table, choosing the appropriate mud
weight units, and select the 'Create curves' button.

Mud weight (gradient) and pressure curves are created with the names that the user enters into
the data entry boxes at the top of the tab.
The 'Operational Problems' sub-tab

The 'Operational Problems' sub-tab gives the user the opportunity to record any operational or
formation/drilling information that might be useful to store and display on the Results Xplot.

Symbols have been linked to some common problem types and these can be added to the Xplot
annotations by using the button at the bottom of the 'Well Data / Operational
Problems' sub tab. This operation pastes the well data information into the 'Results Xplot -
Annotations' table with the ability to add to the existing annotations or to replace the current
annotations. Additional comments can then be added in the text box of the 'Annotations' tab
When the user is satisfied with the pore and fracture pressure interpretation in the interactive
window, a results crossplot (Xplot) can be output.
'Results Xplot' Tab

This 'tab' allows the user to choose whether to plot modelling results as Depth versus Pressure
or as Depth versus Pressure Gradients, by selecting the appropriate 'X axis Scale'. The user

can then choose the units to be used to display the pressures.

'Mud weight lines' can be displayed as overlays on the Pressure plot by toggling the 'Display
Lines' 'check' box. Overlay line units can be selected from the drop-down 'Units' box.
Default overburden-, pore- and fracture pressure curve names from the interpretation are
available to plot. Curves can be added or de-selected by 'un/checking' the 'Plot' column on the
left hand side of the window. Curve attributes (colour, symbol, weight, title) can all be changed
interactively.
The plot is displayed by selecting .
Additional well information can be added to a plot from the 'Annotations' tab. Text and symbols

are placed on the plot by inputting XY coordinates (which depend on the type of plot required) and
then by typing in comments and selecting font size and colour. Plots are updated for new
annotation data by clicking on the button.
Both the Depth versus Pressure 'Fan Diagram' and the Depth versus Pressure Gradient '
Gradient' Plot' can be annotated with casing shoe symbols, RFT pressure points, Leak Off
Pressure values and operational comments to identify hole stability problems such as mud losses,
stuck pipe, Kicks / well flows. Additional curve data such as mud weight /ECD curves can be
added to the display. Examples of the two plot formats are illustrated below. All annotations, log
curves and plot scales can be saved to a format file (.fpt) in order to be able to reproduce the plot
at a later date.

The 'Options' tab allows the user to add a plot title and subtitle, set X and Y axis names, depth
labelling intervals and add a legend to the gradient and pressure plot.
Example of a Depth versus Pore/Fracture Pressure Plot
Example of a Depth versus Pore / Fracture Gradient Plot

22.9.3.1 Running the Model

When all input curve data, Leak Off Test information (for 'Daines' Fracture Gradient Model), Mud
Weight and Output curve options are entered into the interface and the Pore and Fracture
Gradient models have been selected, the module should be initiated by 'clicking' the 'OK' button.
Click the 'Make Plot' button to launch the module's 'Interactive Log Plot'.
The 'Interactive Log Plot' comprises of:
a 'Depth' track,
a 'Zone' track,
a 'Shale Discriminator' track,
'Pore Pressure Model' tracks; one each for Resistivity , Sonic, Dxc, depending on what
was 'checked' in the 'Input' tab. The sonic and resistivity curves are displayed on a
logarithmic scale versus depth.
'Pore Pressure Gradient Result' and 'Fracture Pressure Gradient Result' tracks'.

The computed output Pore and Fracture Pressure gradient curves are illustrated in the
two tracks on the right hand side of the plot. If a 'Mud Weight' curve has been selected
or created in the 'Well Data' - 'Mud Weight' sub tab, then this curve will also be
automatically added to the 'Results' log tracks.
The 'Zone' track enables the well to be 'zoned' according to user requirements; for
example - to separate major intervals of shale lithology from non-shale.
The 'Shale Discriminator' track allows the user to set the interactive 'Shale
discriminator line' for the well, in the log plot display. The Shale indicator can also be
switched 'on'/'off' (right-mouse-button 'click' in track) for a particular zone. This is the
'default' method for selection of Shale Intervals which will be used for computing the
Pore and Fracture pressures and gradients.

Moving the interactive 'Shale Discriminator' cut-off line results in corresponding changes
to the amount of highlighted log curve (in red) in the adjacent 'Pore Pressure Model'
tracks. Only the highlighted (red) 'Shale' data are used in the computations. The Pore
Pressure Gradient (PPG) and Fracture Gradient (FG) Results tracks are immediately
updated for any changes the user makes to shale cut-offs or for any manual edits that are
made to shale intervals in the Resistivity, Sonic and Dxc evaluation tracks.
Sonic, Resistivity and Drilling Exponent are displayed in separate 'Model' tracks in the
interactive display. A Normal Compaction Trend (NCT) line for sonic log response in
shale (NCT_Son), for resistivity in shale (NCT_Res) and for D exponent in Shale (
NCT_Dex) are also displayed in the appropriate track.
Editing 'NCT' Lines

The 'NCT' (Normal Compaction Trend) lines are interactive and are initially defined by 2 blue
marker points, which can be moved around within each input curves 'Model' track.
To change the position / slope of the NCT line in a particular track:

1. Left-mouse-button 'click' in a 'Model' track to open the editing dialog,

Right-mouse-button 'click' on the 'Editing NCT' option (highlighted in the following figure).
2. Place the mouse cursor over one of the blue coloured interactive points. The cursor
changes to a cross (+) symbol.
3. 'Click' and hold down the mouse button and drag the point to another place in the log
track. The NCT line will be re-oriented and the pore and Fracture pressure gradient
calculations for that input curve will be recalculated.
4. Additional NCT 'points' can be added to an existing line by right-mouse button clicking in
a track. The point will be added to the NCT line and the pore and fracture gradient
calculations will be re-run.
The NCT lines can be 'zoned' by adding extra calibration points. This is done by 'clicking' the left
hand mouse button to create a point, and then by dragging the cursor to an appropriate place in
the track.

Adding points either side of a zone boundary preserves the original trend line and new trend.
To remove unwanted points, put the mouse cursor over a blue calibration point, the cursor
changes to a cross, press the 'Delete' key on the keyboard.
Based on Eaton's methodology, the difference between the 'normal' trend line and the 'observed'
(log) curve is converted to a Pore Pressure measurement. This is immediately updated in the '
Pore Pressure Results' track on the right hand side of the plot. The 'Fracture gradient' curve is
similarly updated as a result of changing the Pore pressure curve, since it is calculated as a
function of the Pore pressure and Overburden pressure gradients. This is only true if either the '
Daines', 'Eaton' or 'Matthews & Kelly' models are selected.
Editing Shale Intervals for Individual Pore Pressure Models

Further interactivity is included within the evaluation plot. 'Right-mouse-button clicking' in a 'Pore
Pressure Model' track launches a drop-down menu. Editing options are found at the top of the
menu list.
In order for the Editing options to be active, the 'Shale Discriminator' must be switched 'off'
in the zone the user is working in. This is done by right -mouse-button 'clicking ' in the 'Shale
discriminator' track and selecting 'Use Cutoff turn Off' option, or, alternatively, go to the '
Parameters' tab / 'General' sub-tab, 'un-check' the 'Use Cutoff' entries and click the 'OK' button.
As well as allowing the NCT line to be edited, additional options - 'Add Interval' and 'Delete
Interval' are available to allow the user to manually edit the 'Shale' data, highlighted in red, in the
interactive plot. An editing option is selected by clicking on it. A 'tick' will appear next to the
'active' editing mode, as shown below, where 'Delete Interval' is the active mode.

The 'Add Interval' option allows the user to 'digitize' additional shale points, which might not have
been picked up by the Shale discriminator and interactive Shale cut-off line. The user can either
add individual 'Shale points' by 'clicking' in the log curve track or shale 'intervals' can be added
by 'clicking & dragging' with the mouse cursor over the depth interval to be added as 'Shale'.

The 'Delete Interval' option can be used to de-select some, or all, of the highlighted 'Shale
points' selected for a particular pore pressure indicator. The user selects the editing option from
the drop-down menu in the interactive log track and 'click & drags' the left mouse button over the
interval to be deleted. The highlighted, red coloured ResShale, SonShale or DexShale points/
line are removed from the plot. The computations are automatically re-run for the edited pore
pressure indicator curve and the results curves are updated.
When you are happy that the Pore and Fracture Gradient interpretation you have made supports
the observations and measurements made while drilling / logging the subject well, you can
proceed to make the summary Crossplots.
Summary Crossplots can be created for the subject well, either as 'Pore / Fracture
pressure gradients versus depth' or as 'Pore / Fracture Pressure versus depth', the
so-called 'Fan diagram'. These are described in the 'Viewing Output Results' section.
22.9.3.2 Viewing Output Results

The 'Result Xplot' 'tab' allows the user to choose whether to plot modelling results as 'Depth
versus Pressure' or as 'Depth versus Pressure Gradients'; to add 'Annotations'; and to add '
Plot titles and axis titles' for the output to clipboard.
The 'Curves / Scales' sub-tab

The 'Curves / Scales' sub-tab is where the user sets up the curves , depth range and type of
'Results' plot to output.
The 'Y Axis' panel allows the user to select a Depth curve and its' depth 'Type' for the output plot.
The 'X Axis' panel allows the user to toggle between the two available plot formats - 'Plot
Gradients' or 'Plot Pressures'.
The 'Plot Gradients' option, if selected, will created a 'Depth versus Pressure
Gradient' plot. The 'Units' drop-down list allows the user to select an output pressure
gradient 'unit' for the crossplot. The user chooses a unit from lbs/gal, gm/cc, Kg /m3,
psi/ft.
The 'Plot Pressures' option, if selected will create a 'Depth versus Pressure' plot. The
'Units' drop-down list changes to list appropriate pressure units. These are 'Bar and
psi.
'Mud weight lines' can be displayed as overlays on the Results Pressure plot by toggling the '
Display Lines' 'check' box. Overlay line units can be selected from the drop-down 'Units' box. If
the user changes the Mud weight line 'units', clicking the 'Set Default' button will refresh the Mud
Weight lines for the selected units. The line values can also be edited manually to change the
overlay lines on the results crossplot.

The 'Input Curves' panel - Default overburden, pore and fracture 'pressure' or pressure 'gradient'
curve names from the interpretation are available to plot. Changing the 'X Axis Scale' between '
Plot Gradients' and 'Plot Pressures' changes the default settings for the curves to be used in
the crossplot. Curves can be added or de-selected by 'un/checking' the 'Plot' column on the left
hand side of the window. Curve attributes (colour, symbol, weight, title) can all be changed
interactively. For example the user might have some RFT pressure points which they wish to
display. These can be added as a new curve in the 'Input curves' grid in an empty row in the
grid. Fill in the 'Title' cell for each curve. This will set up the legend that appears on the bottom of
the Results Crossplot.
The Annotations sub-tab

Additional well information can be added to a plot from the 'Annotations' tab. Text and symbols

are placed on the plot by inputting XY coordinates (which depend on the type of plot required) and
then by typing in comments and selecting font size and colour. Plots are updated for new
annotation data by clicking on the 'Make Plot' button.
Both the Depth versus Pressure 'Fan Diagram' and the Depth versus Pressure Gradient '
Gradient' Plot' can be annotated with casing shoe symbols, RFT pressure points, Leak Off
Pressure values and operational comments to identify hole stability problems such as mud losses,
stuck pipe, Kicks / well flows. Additional curve data such as mud weight /ECD curves can be
added to the display. Examples of the two plot formats are illustrated below. All annotations, log
curves and plot scales can be saved to a format file (.fpt) in order to be able to reproduce the plot
at a later date.

The 'Options' sub-tab

The 'Options' sub-tab allows the user to add a plot title and subtitle, set X and Y axis names,
depth labelling intervals and add a legend to the gradient and pressure plot.
The 'Pore Pressure Gradient' module outputs two Crossplot displays that are set up in the '
Results Xplot' tab - 'Curves / Scales' sub tab. The options are to display results as depth versus
'Gradients' or depth versus 'Pressures' plots.
Both the depth versus pressure 'Fan Diagram' and the depth versus pressure gradient 'Gradient'
plot can be annotated with casing shoe symbols, RFT pressure points, Leak Off Pressure values
and operational comments to identify hole stability problems such as mud losses, stuck pipe,
Kicks / well flows. Additional curve data such as mud weight /ECD curves can be added to the

display. Examples of the two plot formats are illustrated below. All annotations, log curves and
plot scales can be saved to a format file (.fpt) in order to be able to reproduce the plot at a later
date.
Example of a Depth versus Pore/Fracture Pressure Plot
Example of a Depth versus Pore / Fracture Gradient Plot

22.9.3.3 Fracture Gradient Models

Five Fracture Gradient models are implemented in IP. These are:
'Eaton'
'Matthews & Kelly'
'Modified Eaton'
'Barker and Wood'
'Daines'
The Eaton, Matthews & Kelly and Daines Fracture gradient models utilise the Overburden
Gradient curve computed in the 'Overburden Gradient Calculation' module. Pore Pressure and
Fracture Pressure gradients are computed simultaneously when these models are run. The
Barker & Wood methodology is an empirical relationship based on observations of actual well
Leak Off Test (LOT) data and was established for application to the Deep Water Gulf of Mexico

region.
An outline of the four models is given below.
PLEASE NOTE that Mouchet et al6 (1989) were very critical of all fracture gradient
methodologies because, either the computations considered over-simplistic geologic/tectonic
models or they introduced additional unknowns e.g. Daines tectonic component to the stress
determined by Poissons ratio. The methods should therefore be approached with caution and
take into consideration other critical factors such as well trajectory, the nature of the formation
being tested to leak off and knowledge of the in-situ stresses on a local as well as regional scale.
'Eaton' Fracture Gradient Model
Eaton10 (1969) attempted to take into account the subsurface stress regime in fracture gradient
calculation, by using the Poisson's Ratio an elastic constant reflecting the horizontal to vertical
stress ratio.
Where :
= Poissons ratio.
F/d = Fracture Gradient.
S/d = Overburden Gradient.
P/d = Pore Pressure Gradient.
This equation can be applied worldwide given that the following 3 steps are followed:
1. determine overburden gradient

2. determine pore pressure gradient
3. determine Poisson's Ratio for the study area.
Eaton further developed algorithms to calculate the input Poisson's Ratio values for Gulf Coast
and Deep water GOM cases. Eaton and Eaton11 (1997) describes equations applicable for
Poissons Ratio calculations for well depths from 0 5000 ft below mud line/Sea Bed and for
depths of > 5000 ft below mud line/Sea Bed for the US Gulf Coast and Deep Water GOM cases.
These equations are illustrated below and are implemented under the 'Model' drop-down list
when the 'Eaton' Model is selected.

'Gulf Coast' Poisson's Ratio Calculation
0 4999 ft (Depth) below mud line/Sea Bed:
> 5000 ft (Depth) below mud line/Sea Bed:
'Deep Water' Gulf of Mexico Poisson's Ratio Calculation
0 4999 ft (Depth) below mud line/Sea Bed:
> 5000 ft (Depth) below mud line/Sea Bed:
The Poisson's Ratio versus depth curves resulting from these equations are illustrated below:

The appropriate curve is then applied in the calculation of Fracture Gradient and Fracture
Pressure for the interactive plot and the Results Xplot.
'Matthews & Kelly' Fracture Gradient Model

Matthews and Kelly9 (1967) model is based on Gulf Coast Texas and Louisiana sandstones and
assumes a constant OBG of 1 psi/ft, therefore it is of little use outside the GOM coast region
The Fracture Pressure formula is of the form:
Where:
F = Fracture Pressure
Ki = the 'effective stress coefficient'

= (S P) = net effective overburden stress
S = Overburden stress
P = Pore pressure

Matthews and Kelly derived Ki curves from plots of effective overburden stress (S-P) vs Ki,
back-calculated from offset well Leak Off data. Ki curves exist in the literature (Reference 9) for
South Texas Gulf Coast (S Tx Coast) and Louisiana Gulf Coast (LA G Coast). These have been
digitized and incorporated as look-up tables which the user can select from the 'Options'
drop-down list.
NOTE: It is only possible to use this approach when the Ki vs depth is well known for a specific
area.
'Modified Eaton' Fracture Gradient Model

Simmons and Rau (1988) proposed a 'Modification' to the Eaton technique for predicting
Fracture Pressures / Gradients in the offshore drilling environment. The 'modification' they
proposed was to take into account the effect of a water column on the composite vertical rock
stress at the depth of interest in the subject well. This recognizes that the hydrostatic pressure of
the sea water above the sediments would provide a contribution to the overburden load. In using
this Fracture Gradient model the input Overburden Gradient curve should be referenced to a TVD
Sub Sea datum.
1. The Overburden gradient curve is used as an input to the 'Composite Vertical Stress' equation:
(Equation 1)
Where:
= Composite Vertical Stress.
WD = Water Depth.
OBGrad = Overburden Gradient curve.
Dsed = Sediment Penetration Depth.
2. This is input to the calculation of the 'matrix stress ratio' (Ke) at the 'Effective Depth' (Deff),
where;
(Equation 2)
and Deff = the 'effective sediment penetration depth' defined by :
Deff = (Water Depth/2) + DSed (Equation 3)
Where
DSed = Sediment penetration depth
3. Using Eaton's basic Fracture Pressure equation (Equation 4), the anticipated Fracture
Pressure is calculated.:

(Equation 4)
Where:
FP = Fracture Pressure.
PP = Pore Pressure.
Ke = Matrix stress Ratio.
= Composite Vertical Stress.
4. The Fracture Pressure Gradient is calculated by dividing each calculated pressure by its
associated depth value.
NOTE: the resulting Fracture Pressure and Fracture Gradient curves are referenced to a TVD
subsea datum and will have to be adjusted if a Rig Floor/ Kelly Bushing datum is required.
'Barker & Wood' Fracture Gradient Model

Barker and Wood13 (1997). This method has been used specifically for the pre-drill estimation of
shallow below mud line (BML), Deep Water Gulf Of Mexico (GOM) fracture gradients in the
Central and Western parts of the GOM (to a depth of ca. 8000 ft below mud line, in water depths
ranging between 2000 and 7000 ft). The method utilizes a typical GOM deep water, shallow
below mud line sediment bulk density estimate and requires no other data. The method is limited
to depths up to approximately 8000ft BML.
More than 50 Leak off Tests (LOT) from 20 GOM wells were analysed. Using the water depth
and LOT information from all these wells, the authors' found the best fit curve through these data
to be given by:
Cum. Av. Formation. Bulk Density (ppg) = 5.3 * (TVDBML) 0.1356
Therefore, adding the hydrostatic pressure of the water column (assumed an 8.55 lbs/gal water
density) to the bulk density from the equation above computes the total overburden pressure.
Since the model assumes that the fracture gradient is equal to the overburden gradient in the
shallow sediment overburden, the fracture gradient can be calculated by dividing the overburden
pressure by the depth of interest RKB.
If choosing to run this option for fracture gradient computation, the output curve name will
correspond to whichever curves are being utilised for the pore pressure calculation. For example,
if pore pressure is being computed using the sonic log, the output fracture gradient curve will be
FG_Son since the IP naming scheme does not include the methodology used to create the curve.
The user has the facility to change the fracture gradient and fracture pressure curve names to
appropriate defaults (e.g. FG_BW, FP_BW) before running the model.
'Daines' Fracture Gradient Model

Daines12 (1980). This method attempts to account for regional stress ratios, rock type and
variable overburden in the computation of Fracture Gradient and Fracture Pressure. Daines
solves the following equation to compute Fracture Gradient (FG):
Where:

= Poisson's Ratio (Daines reference table)
= Horizontal tectonic stress (equivalent to minimum effective stress - )
= Maximum effective compressive stress (Overburden Pressure (S) minus

Pore Pressure (P))
S = Overburden Pressure
P = Pore pressure
The methodology assumes that, in a relatively relaxed basin setting, the horizontal to vertical
stress ratio, termed , remains relatively constant with depth and is defined by :
for the test depth can be calculated at the first good Leak-Off test point in a well. Knowing
(S-P) will allow the calculation of and thus values of can be readily calculated for all other
depths in the well.
The Daines Fracture Gradient model is calibrated to the first Leak Off Test (LOT) in compacted
formation. This is manually input in the 'Daines Parameters' tab as a 'LOT Depth' and 'LOT
Press' (psi). In a 'zoned' well, all rows in the table must contain a depth and LOT pressure for the
computation to run. A single LOT depth / pressure pair can be copied to all rows by 'switching
on' the column headers and filling in the first row of data.
Daines Fracture Gradient methodology uses as input 'Poissons Ratio' data for the overburden, in
order to calculate the Fracture Gradient curve. The Daines Poissons Ratio data can either :
1. be entered into the upper grid in the 'Manual Input for User-Created Poissons Ratio
Curve' panel, or
2. the user may load and use a 'Poissons Ratio' curve derived elsewhere, by 'checking'
the 'Use existing PR Curve' radio button.

The geological column must be divided up by the user into broad lithological units using all
available data (cuttings descriptions / wireline logs / composite and mud logs). The top and
bottom depths for each lithology interval are entered manually into the 'Poissons Ratio' table. A
drop- down list of descriptive lithologies appears by 'clicking' on the 'Default Lithology' column.
The data for the table are found in the IP program directory in the '
Poisson_Ratio_Lithologies.par' file. The descriptors correspond to a table in Daines original
paper.
Each lithology descriptor has a default 'Poissons Ratio' value associated with it, taken from
Daines12. When a lithology is selected, the Daines 'Poissons Ratio' is automatically filled in on
the grid. These values can be manually edited. A 'Facies Code' field is also automatically filled
in when a lithology is chosen. This code is linked to a symbol library and can be used to generate
a 'Facies Curve' (Facies_PP), which in turn can be used to create a lithology column for the final
Pressure Plot.

22.9.3.4 Pore Pressure References

REFERENCES
1. Gardner G. L. F., Gardner L.W., & Gregory A.R. (1974) Formation velocity and
density - the diagnostic basics for stratigraphic traps Geophysics 39, 770-780.
2. Bellotti, P. Di Lorenzo, V. & Giacca, D. - Overburden gradient from sonic log - Trans.
SPWLA, London March 1979.
3. Lindseth, R. O., (1979) Synthetic Sonic Logs a process for stratigraphic
interpretation, Geophysics v.44 no.1 p.3-26.
4. Traugott, M. - Pore Pressure and Fracture Pressure Determinations in Deepwater -
Deepwater Technology Supplement to World Oil, August 1997.
5. Eaton B.A. and Eaton T.L. Fracture gradient prediction for the new generation - World
Oil (October 1997).
6. Barker, J. W. and Wood, T.D. Estimating Shallow below Mudline Deepwater Gulf of
Mexico Fracture Gradients (1997) Houston AADE Annual Technical Forum.
7. Eaton, B.A. (1972) Graphical Method Predicts Geopressures Worldwide - World Oil
182, 6, 51-56.
8. Matthews, W.R. and Kelly, J.(1967) How to Predict Formation Pressure and Fracture
Gradient - Oil &Gas Journal, 65, p92-106.
9. Eaton B. A., (1969) Fracture Gradient Prediction and its Application in Oil Field
Operations - J.Pet.Tech. 21, p1353-1360.
10. Daines S.R. (1980) The Prediction of Fracture Pressures For Wildcat Wells - SPE
9254.
11. Simmons E.L. & Rau, W.E. (1988) Predicting Deepwater Fracture Pressures: A
Proposal (SPE 180250)
OTHER USEFUL REFERENCES
12. Pore Pressure and Fracture Gradients - SPE Reprint Series No.49 (1999 edition).
13. Mouchet, J-P., Mitchell, A. Abnormal Pressures While Drilling - Manuels Techniques 2
Elf Aquitaine (1989).
22.9.3.5 Overburden Gradient Curves

Overburden Gradient Curves
User-created overburden gradient curves can be created externally to IP and then loaded for use
with the Pore Pressure modules.
A number of Overburden Gradient (OBG) curves have been included within the IP Pore Pressure
module; namely 'Offshore Texas / Louisiana' (Unocal) and 'Deepwater GOM (Amoco)' and '

Average GOM (Amoco)'. These overburden gradient curves have been taken from the available
literature and are stored within the IP source directory as text files. Where sufficient local well
data and burial history knowledge is available, further OBG curves can be added to IP by the
user.
The data is stored as a space-delimited text file with the '.obg' file extension (e.g.
Amoco_Deep_GOM.obg). The file name must also be recorded in the 'OBG_Files.obg' file which
references all the individual OBG data files. Examples of the text file formats is included below:
(extract from 'Offshore_Texas_Louisiana.obg'):
$ Overburden gradient for Louisiana Texas offshore

$ Supplied by Unocal March 2003
$ Units
Ft lbs/gal
$
$ Data
5.000 9.009
10.000 9.061
15.000 9.112
20.000 9.164
25.000 9.216
30.000 9.268
35.000 9.320
Note: Lines with a '$' prefix are comment lines added to describe the source of the overburden
gradient data.
Format for the OBG_Files.obg file:
$
$ OBG_Files.obg file
$ Contains list of overburden gradient files that are available
$
$ Format is
$ OBG file name ',' Name displayed in the OBG module
$
Offshore_Texas_Louisiana.obg, Offshore Texas/Louisiana
Amoco_Deep_GOM.obg, Deepwater GOM (Amoco)
Gulf_of_Mexico_Amoco.obg, Average GOM (Amoco)

22.10 Saturation Height Modelling (Cap. Pressure)

The 'Saturation Height Modelling' suite of modules is designed to enable the IP user to create '
Saturation versus height' functions from either capillary pressure (Pc) data or from calculated
water saturation curves, or a combination of both approaches.
The Capillary Pressure modules allow the user to QC the raw Pc measurements and make
corrections for overburden stress, for clay-bound water and for laboratory to reservoir conditions
conversion. Multiple Sw versus Capillary Pressure functions can be derived.
Log-derived water saturation curves can be used, in conjunction with Free Water Level (FWL)
depths to derive 'Sw versus Height above FWL' functions.
The 'Saturation Modelling' modules have a multi-well interface and allow the user to consolidate,
QC and interrogate data from multiple wells in a field / study area.
Core plug Capillary Pressure array data and their associated Saturation, Porosity and
Permeability values are loaded from external sources using the 'Capillary Pressure Data
Loader' module. Alternatively, the 'ASCII Load' or 'Interval Loader' modules can be used if
desired.
The 'Saturation Modelling' suite is comprised of 4 tools that are interrelated.
These are:
1. 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up'

2. 'Capillary Pressure Functions'
3. 'Saturation versus Height Curves'
4. 'Log SW versus Height Functions'
For example, the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up' module is used to QC and edit capillary pressure
(Pc) curves. The core plugs flagged as 'Good' or 'Part Good' plugs from this module are used as
Section 22.10 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling (Cap. Pressure)

input to the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. The 'Saturation versus Height Curves'
module is used with the functions derived in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' or the 'Log SW
versus Height Curves' module to model Saturation versus Height above the FWL in multiple
wells.
NOTE: All four modules write their parameters / set-up to a common external parameter file.
When the 'Save' button is clicked on any one of the module interfaces, the parameters are written
to this external Parameter Set (.cap file) which, by default, is located in the IP project root
directory. The parameters are also saved automatically into the project database file
IPDBProj.dat. These project files are saved for each user logging into the database. Hence, if
the parameters need to be shared by multiple users it is highly recommended to save them
separately using the 'Save' button.
22.10.1 Capillary Pressure Set-Up

The 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' interface is used to set up the study well (or
wells) and their Capillary Pressure (Pc) and associated Water Saturation (Sw) datasets. The
corrected / converted Pc and water saturation curves that are output from this module are
subsequently used in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module. The functionality within the '
Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' module allows the user to :
Set-up the study wells and input Pc and saturation curves to use,
Select the output Set into which the results curves will be written,
Convert Pc data from different measurement techniques to a common 2 phase system,
Optionally stress-correct and /or apply a Clay-bound water correction to the Pc data.
Visualize raw and corrected Pc Curve data and quality check the data.
Edit bad data points from the Pc dataset.
NOTE: IT IS IMPORTANT TO UNDERSTAND THAT ALL CORE PLUGS (FROM ALL WELLS)
THAT ARE 'FLAGGED' AS 'GOOD' OR 'PART GOOD', ON THE 'DATA VIEW / EDIT' TAB IN
THIS MODULE AND WHICH HAVE THE 'SELECT PLUG' COLUMN 'TICKED' ARE
AUTOMATICALLY SELECTED FOR USE IN THE 'CAPILLARY PRESSURE FUNCTIONS'
MODULE AND WILL BE LOADED WHEN THAT MODULE IS LAUNCHED. SUBSEQUENT
PROCESSING, TO DERIVE PC VS SW FUNCTIONS, REQUIRES THE USER TO SET UP &
USE 'DISCRIMINATOR' LOGIC TO CREATE SUBSETS OF THE CORE PLUG DATASET FOR
ANALYSIS.
The 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' interface comprises of 3 'tabbed' screens.
These are:
'Curves Set-Up'
'Correction Parameters'
'Data View / Edit'

'Curves Set-up' Tab

The 'Curves Set-up' tab is used to select wells and their associated Capillary Pressure (Pc) and
Saturation (PcSw) curve data. The interface is a large tabular display, where each row in the grid
can be used to set up a different well for QC and correction of its Pc dataset. Each output name
for each Pc curve is differentiated by appending a number (1,2,3.....) automatically to the end of
the curve name. This gets over the problems seen in previous versions of IP of how to handle
multiple Pc curves all at the same depth.
To overcome the problem of incompatible input and output Sets,where one input Pc curve might
be in a regular Set while another is in an irregular Set, an option has been added 'Output Sets
same as PC curve Input sets'. This option will be 'checked' by default for all new projects. When
it is 'checked' the output Set will have the same step size as the input Set. NOTE: if the Capillary
Pressure module has been previously run using IP v3.4 then this option won't be 'checked' and
the output curves won't have a number appended to them. This is to maintain compatibility with IP
v3.4 datasets.
NOTE: it is no longer possible to select an 'Output Set' in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions'
module. All output curves from this module will be placed in the Set selected in the 'Curves
Set-up' tab of the 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' module.
The user chooses a 'Well Name' from the drop-down list box in the 'Well Name' column and then
sets up the remaining curve entry boxes and input curve units for each well.
IP will accept capillary pressure (Pc) data in the following units:

psi
Bar
Kg/M2
Mpa
The program converts Pc pressure values to 'psi' based on the user-input units.
Saturation values and Porosity values can be supplied either as Percentages or as
decimals. IP will convert to decimals based on the user-input units.
Permeabilities can be supplied as milliDarcies (mD) or m2. IP will convert the values to
milliDarcies for all computations.

Default output curve units are 'psi' for corrected Capillary Pressure curves and decimals
for Corrected Pc Saturation curves.
The grid column names and their functions are described below, progressing from left to right
through the screen.
'Curve Identification' - The 'Curve Identification' column is found on all 3 'Set-up and
Correction' Tabs. Because of the multi-well functionality of this module, this column is
present to help the user to keep track of which well and which curves they are working
on and visualizing.
When the user selects the Capillary Pressure (Pc) and Pc Saturation curve names for a
well on the 'Curve Set-up' tab, this column populates with a summary text string,
containing the 'Database Well Number' followed by the input Pc and Pc Saturation
Curve names in the following notation:
For example - W:6 Pc/PcSw which translates to IP database "Well 6" followed by the 'Capillary
Pressure input curve name' & 'Pc Saturation input curve name', as illustrated below:

Identically named 'Curve Identification' columns are found on both the 'Correction Parameters'
and 'Data View /Edit' tabs to help the user to navigate through the corrections and visualization
screens. NOTE: - THIS COLUMN IS USER EDITABLE - you can clear the 'default' text and
manually type in a simpler, or more informative text string if you wish to do so.
The screen capture shown above illustrates the interactive drop-down menus available within the '
Curves Set-up' interface.
Column Descriptions:
'Well Name' - This column allows the user to select the database wells to be worked on. Wells
are chosen by 'clicking' in a blank cell in the 'Well Name' column, then selecting a well name from
the drop-down well list.
'Pc Curve In' - Select the Capillary Pressure (Pc) curve / array name for the subject well
from the curve drop-down list.
'Pc Units In' - Select the input Capillary Pressure (Pc) curve units from the drop-down
list. The options are:

Pounds per square inch (psi)

Bar (Bar)
Kilograms per square meter (Kg/m2)
MegaPascals (MPa)
'Pc Sat Curve In' - Select the input Saturation Curve / Array for the subject well from
the curve drop-down list.
'Pc Sat Units In' - Select the Saturation Curve units from the drop-down list. The options
are:
'%' - percentage
'dec' - decimal
'Pc Sat Type in' - The 'Pc Sat Type in' parameter is used to indicate how the input Pc
Saturation data has been reported in the external data file. The user must set whether
the Pc Saturation data is being reported in terms of the 'wetting' or 'non-wetting' fluid
phase. For example, in the case where the Mercury Injection saturations are being
reported as Mercury Saturation (the non-wetting fluid) ,'SHg', then the user would
choose the 'Non Wet' option and the IP program would compute the wetting-phase
Saturation as the output 'corrected Pc Water Saturation' ('SwPcCorr') curve using a
formula of the following form:
SwPc = 1 - (Snw)
Where:
Snw = input Non-wetting-phase Saturation.
SwPc = Wetting Phase Water Saturation.
Water Wet - should be set when the measurement technique reports saturation
as the wetting phase saturation.
Non Wet - should be set when saturation data is reported in terms of the
non-wetting fluid.
'Measurement Type In' -Select an option from the drop-down list. The choices are:
Mercury Inj - Measurements from Mercury Injection
Centrifuge - Measurements from Centrifugation
Porous Plate - Measurements from Porous Plate Apparatus
Curve - If Capillary pressure data are loaded into IP from an external source, for
example a spreadsheet, which contains data measurements from different Pc
measurement techniques ('Mercury Injection', 'Porous Plate', 'Centrifuge'), the
measurement techniques can be differentiated by giving each a numerical '
Measurement Method' 'flag' value in the spreadsheet. The 'Measurement
Method' 'Flag' values can be loaded into IP, as a curve, at the same time as the
Pc and Pc Saturation data and this curve can then be selected from the '
Measurement Type In' drop-down list. The 'Measurement Type In' curve
values then have to be 'mapped' to the correct 'measurement technique' values
on the 'Correction Parameters' tab, in the 'Method ID' column of the 'Reservoir
and Laboratory Fluid /Rock Properties' table.
'Porosity Curve In' - the input Core Porosity curve name. NOTE: the core porosity
should be overburden corrected as the function generated will be used with log porosity.
'Porosity units In' - the units of the data in the Core Porosity curve.
'Permeability Curve In' - the input Core Permeability curve name. NOTE: the core
permeability should be overburden corrected only if used with log data which has
generated an overburden corrected permeability. I.e. log and core data should be the
same with respect to overburden correction.

'Permeability Units In' - the units of the input Core Permeability curve.
'Pc Corr. Out' - The Corrected Capillary Pressure (PcCorr) output curve.
'Pc Corr. Units Out' - the units of the data in the Corrected Capillary Pressure curve.
'Pc Sat Corr. Curve Out' - The Corrected Pc Water Saturation (SwPcCorr) output
curve.
'Pc Sat Curve Units Out' - The units of the data in the Corrected Pc Water Saturation
curve.
'Pc Use Flag Curve Out' - This is an array curve of the same dimensions as the input
Pc Pressure and Pc Saturation array curves The array contains values, either 'zero' or
'one', which 'indicate 'Bad' or 'Good' data points, respectively, within the Pc data input
arrays. Where a 'Bad' point on a Pc curve has been edited out during the QC process, a
'PcUse' Flag value of 'zero' is set in the corresponding array position in the 'PcUse'
curve. This curve is updated when the user performs any edits to the Pc versus
Saturation dataset, using the Crossplot tool. See 'Data View / Edit' below.
'Pc Height Curve Out' - This converts the corrected Pc curve to a height curve. Allows
for the crossplot of Height against Sw for each plug to be made. It is an array curve with
the same dimensions as the Pc curve.
'Closure Correction Curve Out' - This curve contains any Sw closure correction that
needs to be applied to the Raw Sw curve. The values in this curve can be set from the '
Data View / Edit' tab.
'Pore Size Curve Out' - This curve converts the Pc and Sw input curves into an array
curve of pore size. The curve is an array curve of X dimension of 80. Each X value
represents a pore size. The first X value is a pore size of 0.01 microns and the 80th X
value is a pore size of 100 microns. The scale is logarithmic with 20 X values per
decade. The curve is plotted as a waveform.
'Pc Normalized Curve Out' - This curve converts the Pc and Sw input curves into an
array curve which represents the Pc curve and can be used to plot the Pc curve on the
log plot as a waveform. The curve has an X cell dimension of 51. Each cell represents
2.0 saturation units. The value in the cell is the pressure value. The transformation is
approximate due to the coarseness of the cells.
'Correction Parameters' Tab

As well as depending upon grain size, grain shape, sorting and cementation, the relationship
between capillary pressure and water saturation is dependant upon the interfacial tension
between the two immiscible fluid phases present and the contact angle between the wetting
phase and the rock surface and the density difference between the two fluids. Capillary pressure
curves can be defined for any 2 phase fluid system in a given rock. The only variables are the '
Contact Angle' (q) and the 'Interfacial tension' (s) . One can therefore normalize capillary
pressure curves from different measurement techniques to a single system. One can also convert
from one fluid system to another, given the knowledge of these two variables in the two systems.
The 'Correction Parameters' tab is set up to allow the user to define the 'Laboratory' and '
Reservoir' values of 'Contact Angle' and 'Interfacial Tension' for the respective 'Mercury
Injection', 'Centrifuge' or 'Porous Plate' methodologies. These values will be used to convert
laboratory measured capillary pressures to a Reservoir fluid system and not the core porosity. Pc
data can also be 'Stress-corrected' to reservoir conditions and 'Clay-Bound Water' corrections can
be applied.

Clicking the 'Run Corrections' button will perform all the stress / clay-bound water corrections
and the Laboratory-to-Reservoir conversions to create a consistent set of Pc and associated
wetting-phase saturation data for analysis.
Reservoir and Laboratory fluid / rock properties Table

This table is used to set up the 'default' values for 'Contact Angle' (q) and 'Interfacial Tension' (
s) values for the 3 Capillary Pressure methodologies. This will allow the user :
1. To 'Normalize' capillary pressure data from different laboratory methods, or
2. To convert Pc data from one fluid system to another, say from 'Laboratory' to
'Reservoir'.
Default values for 'Interfacial Tension' and 'Contact Angle' parameters are provided. However,
the table is fully editable to the users own requirements.
'Measurement Type' - The 'Measurement Type' column lists the 3 Pc experimental

methodologies. These are:
Mercury Injection
Centrifuge
Porous Plate
'Method ID.' - if the user has imported Capillary Pressure data into IP, for example, from

a spreadsheet containing a combination of 'Mercury Injection' and 'Porous Plate'

measurements, where each plug is 'flagged' with a value to represent the measurement
'method', IP can be set up to recognize the Capillary Pressure measurement method so
that the program can automatically apply the appropriate conversions. To do this:
1. The user loads the 'Measurement Method' data from the external spreadsheet,
as a curve, into IP.
2. On the 'Curves Set-up' tab, under the 'Measurement Type In' column, select
this 'Measurement Method' flag curve.
3. On the 'Correction Parameters' tab, in the 'Method ID' column, Type in the flag
curve values that correspond with the measurement techniques in the data file.
'Contact Angle Laboratory' - This is the laboratory-defined Contact Angle for the
measurement system used.
'Interfacial Ten. Laboratory' -This is the laboratory-defined Interfacial Tension for the
measurement system used.
'Contact Angle Reservoir' - This is the subsurface Contact Angle for the fluid system
under investigation.
'Interfacial Ten. Reservoir' - This is the subsurface Interfacial Tension for the fluid
system under investigation.
The 'Restore Defaults' button - should the user edit the default Laboratory 'Contact
Angle' and 'Interfacial Tension' values and then decide to return the values to the IP
default settings, clicking the 'Restore Defaults' button will reset the values in the first 3
columns of the table.
Reservoir properties Default

Reservoir Fluid system 'default values' for 'Contact Angle' and 'Interfacial Tension' for a 'Gas
/Water' or an 'Oil / Water' system can be quickly set by 'clicking' either of the buttons in the '
Reservoir properties Default' panel, as shown below:
Clicking 'Set Gas / Water' returns 'Contact Angle Reservoir' 0 degrees and 'Interfacial
Tension Reservoir' 50 dynes/cm.
Clicking 'Set Oil / Water' returns 'Contact Angle Reservoir' 30 degrees and 'Interfacial
Tension Reservoir' 30 dynes/cm.
These default values are user- editable in the 'Reservoir and Laboratory fluid / rock

properties' table, should you have an independent source for these data.
Pc Height
The 'Pc Height' box allows the user to select the densities used for the conversion from Pc
pressure to Height above FWL. The formula used in the conversion is:
Height = PcCorr / (Water Density - Hyd Density)
PcCorr will be the corrected Pc value. The Height will be in the same units as the database depth
curve. Densities are converted to the correct units for the formula. The corrections are performed
when the 'Run Corrections' button is 'clicked'.
Corrections to Pc Curves Table

The 'Corrections to Pc Curves' table allows the user:
1. to convert the Laboratory Pc data to a 'Reservoir' fluid system,
2. to apply stress corrections and
3. to 'Clay Correct' the Pc data. During cleaning and drying of 'shaly' core plug samples,
clay-bound water could be lost. IP allows you to correct for the lost clay-bound water. A
'Qv' input curve is required for the Clay correction to work.
Several Columns ('Stress Correct', 'Clay Correct' and 'Convert to Reservoir') are 'Flag'
columns. To set all rows in a column to 'on', click in the first row of the table so a 'tick' appears,
then 'click' the Column header and the remaining cells will be ticked automatically. To de-select a
column, clear the tick from the top row, then 'click' in the column header, all rows will be cleared.
Similarly, if you wish to fill any column with the same numerical value, type the value into the
appropriate cell in the first row in the table, 'click' the column header and the value will be copied
to all empty rows in that column.
'Curve Identification' - The 'Curve Identification' column lets you see which well you
are setting up corrections for. For example, in the picture shown above, All three wells
are to be Stress-corrected, using the 'PhiRes/PhiLab Factor' set to 0.9562, while only
Well 6 is to be 'Clay Corrected' using an input Qv curve and a Salinity of 30Kppm NaCl.
All three wells will have the 'Convert to Reservoir' applied. See 'Convert to Reservoir'
, below.

Stress Corrections
'Stress Correct' - This is a 'Flag' which switches the Stress-correction calculation 'on'
('checked') or 'off' ('un-checked'). The Stress Correction is performed by applying the
following formulae:
PcCorr = Pc * ('PhiRes/PhiLab Factor') ^ (-0.5)

&
SwPcCorr = 1- [(1-SwPc) * (PhiRes/PhiLab Factor)]
Where:
Pc = input Raw Pc pressure curve
SwPc = input Pc saturation (wetting phase) curve
PcCorr = Stress Corrected Pc Curve
SwPcCorr = Stress Corrected Pc Saturation (wetting phase)
PhiRes/PhiLab Factor = Stress Correction Factor.
'PhiRes/PhiLab Factor' - This is the Porosity correction factor (in decimal notation),
from Laboratory to Reservoir conditions, that is activated / applied when the 'Stress
Correct' Flag is 'on' (ticked).
Clay-bound-water Corrections
'Clay Correct' - This is a 'Flag' which switches the 'Clay Correction' 'on' ('checked') or
'off' ('un-checked'). During cleaning and drying of core plug samples, clay-bound water
could be lost. Where an Air/Mercury measurement system has been used, applying the
'Clay Correct' Flag provides a correction for the missing clay-bound water, using a
supplied 'Qv' input curve and a Formation Water Salinity value.
The 'Clay Correction', based on the method described by Hill, Shirley and Klein 1979 (
SPWLA 20th annual Symposium Paper AA - "The Central Role of Qv and Formation
Water Salinity in the Evaluation of Shaly Formations") is performed by applying the
following two equations to the input Pc and PcSw curves:
PcCorr = Pc* (F) ^ (-0.5)

&
SwPcCorr = 1- (1 - SwPc) * F
Where:
Pc = input Raw Pc pressure curve
SwPc = input Pc saturation (wetting phase) curve
PcCorr = Clay-Corrected Pc Curve
SwPcCorr = Clay-Corrected Pc Saturation (wetting phase)
F = Clay Correction Factor which is calculated from the equation :
F = 1 - [0.6425 * (Salinity ^ (-0.5) + 0.22 ] * Qv]
Where:
Salinity = formation water salinity (Kppm NaCl equivalent).
Qv = Cation exchange Capacity per total pore volume (meq/ml).
'Salinity (Kppm NaCl)' - This is the salinity input value to be used, together with 'Qv'
input curve, for the 'Clay Correct' calculation.
'Qv meq/ml Curve In' - The user must choose the Qv input curve, from the drop-down

list box, if the 'Clay Correct' Flag is 'on' (ticked).
Conversion to Reservoir Fluid System

'Convert to Reservoir' - This is a 'Flag' which switches 'on' ('checked') / 'off'
('un-checked') the 'Laboratory to Reservoir' conversions set up in the upper, '
Reservoir and Laboratory fluid / rock properties' table. If 'Convert to Reservoir' is
ticked for a row in the table, the Laboratory Pc data will be converted to the selected
Reservoir 'Oil / Water' or 'Gas /Water' fluid system when the 'Run Corrections' button
is clicked.
The conversion uses the following equation, multiplying the known Pc values by the
'absolute' ratio of the Laboratory and Reservoir 's*Cosq' values:
Where:
Pc, Res = Capillary Pressure at Reservoir Conditions.
Pc, Lab = Capillary Pressure at Laboratory Conditions.
s Lab = Interfacial Tension under Laboratory Conditions.
q Lab = Contact Angle under Laboratory Conditions.
s Res = Interfacial Tension under Reservoir Conditions.
q Res = Contact Angle under Reservoir Conditions.
Closure Correct
If the 'Closure Correct' column is ticked, then the values in the 'Closure Corr.' curve
will be used to correct the input Sw curve to give the 'SwCorr' curve. The correction is
performed as follows:
SwCorr = Sw (input) - SwClosure
Sw(input) is the water saturation input curve. The units of the Closure curve will be the
same as the output Sw units.
'Run Corrections'- 'Clicking' the 'Run Corrections' button will execute all the fluid
system (Lab. / Reservoir) conversions and stress / Clay-bound-water corrections that
have been set up on the 'Correction Parameters' tab in the following order:
1. Convert input Pc Saturation data to Non-wetting phase saturations (check the 'Pc Sat
Type In' parameter setting).
2. Perform the Stress Correction, if selected, on the input Cap. Pressure curves and
Non-wetting phase saturation data.
3. Apply the Clay-bound-water correction, if selected.
4. Convert saturation data to Wetting phase saturations.
5. Perform the Laboratory to reservoir Pc Corrections, if selected.
'Clear All' - 'Clicking' the 'Clear All' button will remove all well and curve settings from
the 'Curves Set-up' grid. You will be prompted to confirm that this is what you want to
do. NOTE - any Pc curve edits that you have performed up until the point when

you click 'Clear All' will be lost by confirming 'yes' to this operation.
'Save' - 'Clicking' the 'Save' Button WILL ONLY SAVE the current curve set-up,
Correction parameter table settings and Data View options. IT DOES NOT SAVE the
output curves or edited curves for each well to the IP database. REMEMBER to save
your study wells to the IP database at the end of a session using either the 'Save
current well to database As.' or 'Save All Wells to Database', under the IP 'File'
menu.
'Load' - 'Clicking' the 'Load' button will launch a browse window that allows you to
restore the parameter settings from a 'Saved' session.
'Data View / Edit' Tab

The 'Data View / Edit' tab is used :
1. To set up a Crossplot graphical window which will allow you to visualize and perform
data edits on a multi-well Pc dataset. Two tables, 'Select Pc Curves for Display' and '
Select Individual Plugs for display' control which core plugs are available for
visualization and editing. The two tables are connected and interactive. 'Clicking' between
'Curve Identification' rows in the left-hand table changes the entries in the core plug table
on the right hand side of the screen.
2. To select the core plugs that will go into the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' regression
routines.
The 'Data View / Edit' tables give the user the ability to visualize:
The 'Raw' & / or 'Corrected' Pc vs Pc Saturation curve for a single core plug from one
well,
The 'Raw' & / or 'Corrected' Pc vs Pc Saturation curves for multiple core plugs from one
well,
The 'Raw' & / or 'Corrected' Pc vs Pc Saturation curves for multiple core plugs from
multiple wells.
Individual core plug data from each well can be visualized using the 'Make Crossplot'
functionality and then plugs can be 'Flagged' as 'Good' or 'Bad'. Where a plug is flagged as 'Bad
', the Pc curve will be excluded from the dataset that is used in the 'Capillary Pressure
Functions' module. Edited Pc curves, where one or more data points have been 'deleted', are
given a 'Part Good' status.
The 'Data View / Edit' interface contains 2 tables; 'Select Pc Curves for Display' and 'Select
Individual Plugs for display'.

Select Pc Curves for Display Table

Clicking in the 'Curve Identification' column in a row refreshes the adjacent 'Select Individual
Plugs for display' table with the core plug details for that particular well.
'Curve Identification' - the common 'Well / Curve' identification field that allows you to

keep track of which well you are processing through the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up
and Corrections' module. Click in the well row to set up the right-hand table with the
core plug data for that well.
'Plot Raw' column - 'tick-box' entry field that flags that you want to view the 'Raw' input
Pc vs. input Pc Saturation curves for a particular well or wells.
'Plot Correction' column - 'Tick-box' entry field that flags that you want to view the
'Corrected' output 'PcCorr' vs. 'SwPcCorr' curves for a particular well or wells.
'Corrected' curves can be viewed after you have set up and run all the curve unit
conversions and executed the curve stress / clay / reservoir correction routines found on
the 'Correction Parameters' tab.
'Select All Plugs' column - 'tick-box' entry field that flags that you want to view all plugs
for a particular well. Depending upon the combination of 'checked'boxes in a row in this
table, you can choose to view all raw curves, all corrected curves or all raw curves and
all corrected curves', simultaneously. Putting a 'tick' in this column in a particular row of
the grid, automatically 'ticks' all the individual plug entries in the adjacent table. The
selected plugs are automatically available for use in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions'
module.
'No. Plugs Selected' - This column contains the 'count' of 'core plugs that have been
flagged in the right-hand table, by placing 'ticks' in the 'Select Plug' column . The user
can view individual Pc versus Saturation curves and decide whether the data is valid, or
not, or to be edited. 'Bad' plugs can be switched 'off' by 'ticking' the 'Plug Bad' column
in the right-hand table.
Select Individual Plugs for display Table

This table gives you the option to classify individual core plugs in each well in the dataset as '
Good' or 'Bad'. Setting a plug to 'Bad' will exclude it from further calculations. A plug status of '
Good' or 'Part Good' flags a core plug for inclusion in the dataset for further processing in the '
Capillary Pressure Functions' module. Setting a core plug Status to 'Good' or 'Bad' is usually
done after visualizing the Pc versus Sw data for that core plug, using the 'Make Crossplot' tool.
You can manually select the plugs you wish to pass through to the 'Capillary Pressure
Functions' module by 'ticking' the 'Select Plug' column in an individual row in the grid.
Alternatively, click in the 'Select Plug' column header to select all core plugs, or use the 'Select
All Good Plugs - This Curve' button to quickly select all the 'Good' and 'Part Good' core plugs
from the highlighted well for further processing.

The columns in the table are described below:
'Colour column' - This colour is the same colour as the plug will be plotted on the
crossplot if the Z axis option is set to 'Well /Curve Set'. This is a visual reference only.
To edit the plug colour use the 'Edit Format' -> 'Select Wells and Curves' option within
the the crossplot module.
'Select Plug' - Place a tick in this column for each core plug you wish to see displayed
with the crossplot tool. 'Click' in the column header to toggle between 'select all plugs'
and 'select no plugs', or use the 'Select All Good Plugs - This Curve' button to select
curves to visualize. Those plugs that have the 'Select Plug' column ticked will become
part of the dataset that will be available to the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module.
'Plug Depth' - This is the core plug depth taken from the input Pc array dataset.
'Plug Type' - This is the capillary pressure measurement 'Method', set using the '
Measurement Type In' parameter on the 'Curves Set-up' tab.
'Plug Phi' - This is picked up from the input core porosity curve.
'Plug Perm' - Picked up from the input core permeability curve.
'Plug Status' - Text field, the text reflects the position of the user-entered 'ticks' in the
adjacent 'Plug Good' or 'Plug Bad' Columns. The text entries are:
'Good',
'Bad' and,
'Part Good' - if a plug has been QC'd using the crossplot tool and some of its Pc
/Sw data points have been edited out, it will have a 'Plug Status' of 'Part Good'.

'Plug Good' / 'Plug Bad' - The 'Plug Good' and 'Plug Bad' columns are 'Flag'-type
entry fields which let the user set the 'Use' status of individual core plugs during the QC
process. 'Plug Good' means that all Pc and associated Sw data points for a core plug
are valid data points.
WARNING - clicking in the 'Plug Good' or 'Plug Bad' column header is a quick way to change the
status of all the data points for all plugs in a well, HOWEVER - there are serious implications for
your data should you use this functionality.
Clicking the 'Plug Good' column header will launch the following Warning Message
Changing all Plugs to 'Plug Good' status will reset all the plugs that you have QC'd and possibly
edited (by removing spurious data points) to 'Good'. Your data is returned to its un-edited state.
Any edits you have made are discarded.
If a core plug is labelled as Plug Status = 'Part Good' (meaning that one or more data points have
been edited out), clicking in an individual cell in the 'Plug Good' column launches the following
warning message:
Changing a single plug from 'Part Good' to 'Plug Good' status will reset all the data points in the
core plug that you have edited. Your data is returned to its un-edited state. Any edits you have
made are discarded.
Clicking the 'Plug Bad' column header will launch the following Warning Message

Changing all plugs for a well to 'Plug Bad' status will mean that none of the Pc / Sw data for that
particular well will be available for the next 'curve fitting' step in data processing.
Clicking in an individual cell in the 'Plug Bad' column launches the following warning message:
Changing a single plug to 'Plug Bad' status will set all the Pc data points for that plug to 'Bad'.
This means that none of the Pc / Sw data for that particular plug will be available for the next
'curve fitting' step in data processing.
'Closure Correction' - This is picked up from the input closure curve. The values can be
edited in the table. Changing the values in the table changes the values in the input
curve.
'Select All Good Plugs - All Curves' Button - allows the user to quickly set-up all
curves in all wells for visualization in the crossplot interface.
'Select All Good Plugs - This Curve' Button - allows the user to quickly set-up all
curves in the currently-highlighted well for visualization in the crossplot interface and for
use in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module.
'Make Crossplot' - 'Clicking' the 'Make Crossplot' button launches the crossplot tool,
with the Pc datasets you have selected on the 'Data View / Edit' screen loaded into the
graphic interface.
The Capillary Pressure Crossplot Display.

The Crossplot display is used to visually quality-check the 'Corrected' (& / or 'Raw') Pc datasets.
You must make your own decisions as to whether each curve is 'Good' or 'Bad'. If for example,
you think a Pc Curve is a 'Double curve', i.e. a 'composite' curve composed of two curves, each
representing one pore network, it should be excluded from your dataset. Obviously invalid Pc
versus Saturation curves should also be discarded. Simply set the 'Plug Bad' flag to 'on' (ticked)
in the 'Data View / Edit' right hand table. Rogue data points within individual Pc curves can be
edited out using the crossplot functionality as described below.
The Crossplot displayed below has been set up using the Well A4 and its' corrected core plug
data. The plotting 'set-up' tables provide you with the flexibility to set up and visualize any
combination of Pc curves on one crossplot. You can set up a crossplot for :
a single raw or corrected Core Plug Pc dataset in one well.
The raw and corrected Pc datasets for a single core plug in one well.
Multiple raw or multiple corrected Pc datasets for one well
The same flexibility is available for multi-well displays.
To set up a Pc pressure versus Pc Saturation crossplot

'Click' on a 'Curve Identification' cell in the 'Select Pc Curves for Display' table, the

cell background changes to a green colour. The 'Select individual Plugs for display'
table refreshes to show all the plug entries in that well /curve.
'Click' in the 'Plot Correction' cell for that row.
'Click' the 'Select All Good Plugs - This Curve' button. A tick appears in the 'Select
Plug' column in the right-hand table. Note the Well Number is displayed in the title of
the right-hand table, after the colon (:). Initially, all core plugs are flagged as 'Plug Good
', with a tick in the 'Plug Good' column of the 'Select individual Plugs for display'
set-up table.
'Clicking' the 'Make Crossplot' button displays the following menu which allows different crossplot
templates to be selected. For QC'ing plug data the 'Pc V Sw. Z axis Use flag' crossplot must be
selected. The Phi and Perm crossplots cannot be used for QC'ing the plugs interactively. The
reason for this is that these crossplots don't know about the PcUse curves and hence can't
change their values.
The height plots allow the Pc curve to be displayed as height against the Sw curve and thus give
a better indication as to which part of the curve is applicable to the reservoir.
If the 'Pc v Sw. Z axis Use flag' crossplot is selected then the following crossplot is displayed.

The initial view displays the Pc versus Pc Saturation curves for all the plugs for all the wells
selected in the 'Curves Set-up' tab. The plugs corresponding to well A4 (database well 8) have
to be selected and the 'Z Axes' 'Well / Curve Set' ticked.
We can see that there are a number of curves with suspect data points. These plugs can be
removed by either;
Flagging the entire plug in the 'Plug Bad' column in the 'DataView / Edit' screen, which
removes all the data points in the Pc curve from further analysis. Then re-launch the
crossplot with the 'excluded' plugs not displayed, or
Alternatively we can 'clean up' the obvious incorrect data points in each Pc curve using
the crossplot editing menu.
We may have to expand the crossplot scales to see all the data points in the graphic interface, as
shown below. The editing sequence is shown in the next screen capture.


NOTE: if multiple points are on top of each other then the 'Remove / Restore data point' will only
change the top point. Hence, it is best when QC'ing Pc curves to work on one Pc curve at a time.
The Graphical window 'Z Axes' button can be used to 'toggle' the crossplot view of the core plugs.
By setting 'Z Axes' to 'Curve' you will see the data points drawn in colours to represent either
'Good' or 'Bad' status (see below left). By setting 'Z Axes' to 'Well / Curve Set' you will see each
Pc curve in a separate colour (see below right):
All 'Bad' Pc points have a 'zero' value written into the output 'PcUse' Flag curve. The 'PcUse'
curve is an array curve of the same dimensions as the input Pc and Pc Saturation arrays. Valid Pc
/ Pc Saturation data have a 'PcUse' Flag value of 'one'.

The Crossplot module has been changed to allow sets of discriminators to be assigned to
different Pc curves. This now allows multiple 'PcUse' flag curves to be created in different output
curve sets.

Typical QC Workflow
1.Load Pc and Pc Saturation data from external spreadsheet / array curves. Import Core
Porosity & Permeability curves and a 'Measurement Method' Flag, if such data is available.
2. Open the 'Curves Set-up' tab and select each well and its Capillary Pressure (Pc) and
Pc Saturation (PcSw) curves, setting the input curve units to the correct values.
3. Type in a 'Well identifier' in the 'Curve Identification' column for each well that has
been set up.
4. Ensure that the 'Pc Sat Type In' is set to 'Water Wet' if the input PC Saturation data is
reported as Water saturation, or 'Non Wet' if the raw Pc Saturation data is reported in
terms of the laboratory 'Non-wetting' fluid phase.
5. Select a 'Measurement Type In' from the drop-down list or, if a 'Measurement Method'
flag curve has been loaded into IP, select the Flag curve from the drop-down list.
6. Select the Core Porosity and Core Permeability curves and their associated curve units.
7. Select the Output Results Curve Set from the 'Output Results Set' list-box at the
bottom of the window.
8. Select the Output corrected Pc curve, 'Pc Corr', units.
9. Select the Output corrected Pc Saturation curve, 'SwPcCorr', units.
10. Crossplot Raw Pc curves.
11. Determine 'Closure Correction'.
On the 'Correction Parameters' tab:
12. If 'Measurement Type In' was set to a Flag curve name, type in the curve values
corresponding to the Measurement type - 'Mercury Injection', 'Centrifuge' &/or 'Porous
Plate' techniques.
13. Set up the 'Reservoir and Laboratory Fluid /Rock Properties' table. Ensure that
you are happy with the Laboratory and Reservoir values for the fluid and rock system '
Contact Angle' and 'Interfacial Tension' parameters.

14. Set up the lower, 'Corrections to Pc Curves' table if you want to apply Stress
corrections or Clay-bound-water corrections to the raw Pc and Pc Saturation data.
15. 'Tick' the rows in the 'Convert to Reservoir' column that you wish to apply the
'Contact Angle' / 'Interfacial Tension' (laboratory to reservoir) conversions to. Leave this
column blank if you simply wish to convert input Pc Pressure curves from multiple wells to
a consistent output curve unit (psi, Kg/m2/Mpa/Bar) or to convert Pc Saturation values
from '%' to 'decimal'.
16. 'Tick' the 'Stress Correct' rows and enter a 'PhiRes/PhiLab Factor' for the wells that
require stress correction applying.
17. 'Tick' the 'Clay Correct' rows and enter a 'Salinity' and 'Qv Curve in' curve name for
the wells that require clay-bound-water correction applying.
18. 'Tick' the 'Closure Correct' rows for wells that require closure correction.
19. 'Click' the 'Run Corrections' button.
On the 'Data View/ Edit' Tab:
20. 'Click in a 'Curve Identification' row in the left-hand table. The 'Curve Identification'
Name will be highlighted in green. The right-hand table will refresh with a list of core plugs
available in that well.
21. If you have clicked the 'Run' button, to perform Pc Pressure and Pc Saturation
corrections, 'tick' the 'Plot Correction' cell (in the 'Select Pc Curves for Display' table)
for the highlighted row. This will set up the crossplot to only display the corrected Pc and
Pc Saturation data.
22. 'Click' the 'Select All Good Plugs -This Curve' button. This will set all the core plugs
for display in the crossplot.
23. 'Click' the 'Make Crossplot' button at the bottom of the screen to launch a crossplot
which will display all the core plugs for your selected well.
24. Use the Crossplot 'Create Curve from areas' functionality to QC individual Pc vs PcSw
curves, flagging 'Bad' curves and editing invalid points from individual curves.
25. Save all your set-up parameters by 'clicking' the 'Save' button.
26. Important - Under the 'File' menu, use the 'Save all Wells to Database' or 'Save
Current Well to Database as..' options to save all your output curves.
22.10.2 Capillary Pressure Functions

The computations built into the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module are used to find a curve
fitting function or a set of curve fitting functions which can be used to represent the Qc'd and
corrected capillary pressure (Pc) dataset from the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up' module. There are
two basic methods of doing this :
1. 'One Equation for all Pc curves' option - Find a single equation which fits all (or a
subset) of the data, or
2. 'Separate equation for each Pc curve' option - Fit curves through each individual Pc
curve, then combine the fitting parameters into a 'Combined equation'.
When 'One Equation for all Pc curves' is selected, the user can create 'Leverett 'J' function'
curves for all, or selected groups of Pc curves by setting up 'Models' and 'Discriminator' logic.
Different 'Models' can be created which represent different Pc functions. A 'Model' may represent
a particular function equation (eg Leverett-J Function) or may represent the application of different
'Discriminators' used to create the function. For example, a standard scenario would be to create
separate models that can be applied over different porosity ranges. i.e. a model that works in the

10-15% porosity range, a second model for the 15-20% porosity range and a third for the 20-25%
porosity range. To speed up the selection of a model there is a 'Regression Function
Comparator' which will run through all of the models and give a rating for each. The user can
then select the one that suits.
An alternative approach is to use the 'Separate equation for each Pc curve' option. When this
option is selected, the user can run one of three non-linear regression equations on all, or
selected Pc curves, by setting up 'Models' and 'Discriminator' logic. The curve fit coefficients for
each individual Pc curve can then be combined into a 'Combined Equation' which describes the
best fit line for those Pc curves.
The 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module takes, as inputs, the wells and Pc curves ('PcCorr', '
SwPcCorr', 'PcUse') that are created in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up' module. Each core
plug that was flagged as 'Plug Status' 'Good' or 'Part Good' and has the 'Select Plug' column '
ticked' in the 'Individual Plugs for Display' table on the 'Data View / Edit' tab is loaded into this
module. Therefore, to be able to modify the number of core plugs being used as inputs to this
module, the 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up' module should be kept open. Each Model can have a
different set of plugs. The Model being used is displayed in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and
Corrections' window.
This module creates 'Curve Fitting Model' functions. These functions are then applied, using the
'Saturation versus Height Curves' module.
NOTE: it is no longer possible to select an 'Output Set' in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions'
module. The output curve from this module will be placed in the Set selected in the 'Curves
Set-up' tab of the 'Capillary Pressure Set-Up & Corrections' module. The output curve will
automatically have a 1.2.3....etc appended to its name as it is stored in the defined Set. The user
does not have to do anything to the output name or output Set within this module.
The 'Capillary Pressure Functions' Interface

The 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module is set up on two 'tabbed' screens. These are:
'Equations', and
'Discriminators'
Different Pc 'Models' can be set up using the control buttons and 'scroll arrows' at the top of the
module interface. The menu bar is illustrated below:
'Model' - The 'Model' number in the top left-hand corner of the screen is incremented if

more than one Pc curve fitting model is defined by the user. The 'left' and 'right' arrows
allow the user to scroll through the Pc curve fitting models defined for the current
dataset. For example, one could set up different models to reflect different porosity or
permeability classes.
'Name' - the model 'Name' can be manually typed into the text entry box to allow the
user to discriminate between Pc curve fitting models.
'Type' - the model 'Type' determines how the capillary pressure curves will be used to
build a curve fitting model. The options are:
'One Equation for all Pc curves'

'Separate equation for each Pc curve'
Depending upon the users choice of 'Type', the 'Equations' tab will toggle between two distinctly
different views. These two views are described below.
'New Model' - This button creates a new Pc curve fitting Model. The user is offered the
choice of copying the current model or of opening a new, 'blank' model. 'Clicking' the '
New Model' button opens the following message:
NOTE: Copying an existing model can be a quick way of setting up multiple models using the
same curve fitting routines, but allows you to set up different 'Discriminator' logic for each new
model, for example by applying different porosity or permeability ranges or different facies
classes.
'Delete Model' - This button deletes the currently-displayed Pc Curve fitting model.
Clicking the 'Delete Model' button will launch a message similar to the following
message:
Click 'Yes' to confirm the delete operation, Click 'No' to cancel the operation.
Discriminators
The 'Discriminators' tab is used to partition core plug data. Discriminators can be used to 'tune'
the input data for the regression computation, for example using Porosity or Permeability curves,
or a Facies flag to investigate the relationships to these parameters. Different discriminators can
be set up for a number of models and used to generate appropriate Pc curve fitting functions to
represent your core data.

There is now an option to select a generic input curve as a discriminator, for example 'Input
PcSw(dec)', since each input Pc curve Set will have a different name, discriminating multiple input
Sets is now impossible. The generic input curve will automatically select the correct input curve
when getting data from each Pc curve group. The units of the generic input curve, in brackets,
show the user the input curve units. These units are setup when the output curves are setup in
the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module.
Zones can now be used to select the Pc data to be used within Models. If 'Use Zones' is ticked
then only Pc plugs found within the selected zones will be used.
The curve fitting Model 'Types' are described here:
'One Equation for all Pc Curves' Interface

When the 'One Equation for all Pc curves' option is selected, the 'Equations' tab looks similar
to the screen capture shown below.

To apply the 'One Equation for all Pc curves' curve fitting 'Type' :
1. Select a 'Method' from the drop-down list box. The options are:
a. 'Leverett J Function'
b. 'Leverett J Function, porosity modifier'
c. 'Porosity & Height Function 1'
d. 'Porosity & Height function 2'
e. 'Porosity & Height function 3'
f. 'Porosity and Pc Lambda function'
'Leverett J Function' - If this option is selected, the program will compute the Leverett
'J' function for all the Pc curves in the dataset, depending upon the 'Discriminator' logic
set up by the user. The Leverett 'J' function allows Pc data to be normalized to take into
account changes in permeability ('K' - the input Core Permeability curve) and Porosity ('
f' - the input core porosity curve). The following screen display is opened:

The screen displays the equation of the 'Leverett J Function':
J = 0.2166 * Pc / (s * COSq) * (K/f)
Where:
J = dimensionless capillary pressure (Pc) function.
Pc = the input, corrected capillary pressure ('PcCorr' curve), psi (input curve is
converted to psi).
s = Interfacial Tension (Gas/water or Oil/water system), dynes/cm.
q = Contact Angle (Gas/water or Oil/water system), degrees.
K = Core Plug Permeability, mD. This curve is selected in the 'Capillary Pressure
Set-Up' module, 'Curves Set-Up' tab).
f = Core Plug Porosity, fractional. This curve is selected in the 'Capillary
Pressure Set-Up' module, 'Curves Set-Up' tab).
You must enter 'Interfacial Tension' (s) and 'Contact Angle' (q) values. Default settings for (gas
/ water) or (oil / water) can be set up by 'clicking' one of the two buttons; 'Set Gas / Water' or '
Set Oil / Water'. The text-box entries are user-editable if you want to input different values for
these parameters.
The curve fitting 'Regression Equation', used to fit the 'J' function curves, is selected from a
drop-down list. Three non-linear regression methods are available. They are:
'Lambda' - Lambda is a capillary pressure-specific curve fitting function, where Sw = a *
J^(-l) + b
'Hyperbola' - A hyperbolic curve fitting function, where Sw = a / (J-b) + c.

'Exponential' - an exponential curve fitting function, where Sw = a * e^(b*J) + c.
Where
'a', 'b', 'l' and 'c' are fitting constants in the respective equations
If the 'Weight Regression' box is ticked on then the points that go into the regression are
weighted by the reciprocal of the Sw value. The Sw value will be in decimal units and the
maximum weighting factor will be 10. Therefore an Sw of 1.0 will have a weight of 1 and an Sw of
0.1 will have a weight of 10. The overall effect of this is to weight the regression towards low Sw
values.
''J' output curve name' - The 'Leverett J function' curve is output for each well/core
plug in the dataset. The 'default' name is 'Lev_J'. NOTE: it is no longer possible to
attach a Set name to the output curve name. The output curves will be automatically
output to the same Set as the Pc corrected curves. In addition a 1, 2, 3..... is
appended by default at the end of the curve name. This ensures that each curve is
unique and plugs at the same depth won't overwrite. Hence, if the output Pc curve for
the second Pc curve group is called PCcore:PcCorr2 then the output regression curve
will be called PCcore:SwCpReg2. The same restrictions apply to the output curves from
the 'Separate equation for each Pc curve' type models.
'Leverett J Function, porosity modifier'- This method uses the cementation exponent
'm' to incorporate a 'tortuosity' factor into the equation, which can reduce scatter in the
corrected Pc data. This could be used where the permeability range of the core plugs is
large. If this option is selected the following screen display is opened:
The screen displays the equation of the 'Leverett J Function, porosity modifier' which is .
J = 0.2166 * Pc / (s * COSq) * (K/f^m)

where:
J = dimensionless capillary pressure (Pc) function.
Pc = the input, corrected capillary pressure, psi (input curve is converted to psi).
s = Interfacial Tension (Gas/water or Oil/water system), dynes/cm.
q = Contact Angle (Gas/water or Oil/water system), degrees.
K = Core Plug Permeability, mD.
f = Core Plug Porosity, fractional.
m = cementation exponent.
The user needs to input 'Interfacial Tension' (s) , 'Contact Angle' (q) and Porosity modifier ('m')
values. Default settings for Contact Angle and Interfacial Tension (gas / water) or (oil / water) can
be set up by 'clicking' either of the two buttons 'Set Gas / Water' or 'Set Oil / Water'. The
text-box entries are user-editable if you have different values for these parameters. The 'default' '
m' value is set at a value of 2.8.

The curve fitting 'Regression Equation' used to fit the 'Leverett J function, porosity modifier'
data is selected from a drop-down list. Three non-linear regression methods are available.
These are:
'Lambda' - Lambda is a capillary pressure-specific curve fitting function, where Sw = a *
J^(-l) + b
'Hyperbola' - An hyperbolic curve fitting function, where Sw = a / (J-b) + c.
'Exponential' - an exponential curve fitting function, where Sw = a * e^(b*J) + c.
Where
'a', 'b', 'l' and 'c' are fitting constants in the respective equations
Both 'Hyperbola' and 'Exponential' regression fits are better suited to use in poor quality rock,
because they are not very good at representing sharp transition zones seen in high porosity /
permeability reservoir.
If the 'Weight Regression' box is ticked on then the points that go into the regression are
weighted by the reciprocal of the Sw value. The Sw value will be in decimal units and the
maximum weighting factor will be 10. Therefore an Sw of 1.0 will have a weight of 1 and an Sw of
0.1 will have a weight of 10. The overall effect of this is to weight the regression towards low Sw
values.
''J' output curve name' - The 'Leverett J function, porosity modifier' output curve is
saved for every well/plug in the analysis dataset. The 'default' curve name is 'Lev_J'.
Three additional non-linear 'Porosity / Height' functions, relating wetting-phase saturation to

Capillary Pressure can be selected from the 'Method' drop-down list. These methods are suitable
for poor quality (low porosity & permeability) reservoir rocks which have significant transition
zones :
'Porosity & Height Function 1' - If this option is selected the following screen display is opened:
'Porosity & Height function 2'- If this option is selected the following screen display is opened:
'Porosity & Height function 3'- If this option is selected the following screen display is opened:

'Porosity & Pc Lambda Function' - if this option is selected the following screen display is
opened:
The units of the Pc variable in the equations will be the units of the 'output Pc curve' set-up in the '
Capillary Pressure Set-Up and Corrections' module. The porosity variable (f) units will always
be decimals.
'a', 'b', 'l' and 'c' are fitting constants in the respective equations.
When analyzing the results of applying one of these three functions, using the crossplot tool, no
Regression line function is created.
2. After selecting a 'Curve Fitting Method', click the 'Run Regression' button which is
located above the grid which occupies the bottom half of the interface. The 'Regression
Results' table in the lower part of the window will be populated with data.
Regression Function Comparator

The 'Regression Comparison' button is only visible when the 'One Equation for all Pc curve'
curve fitting type is selected. When 'clicked' a regression is performed for all models and a
comparison of the results is shown in a separate window, sorted with the best R2 at the top. The
user can select any result and then click 'Use Selected' and the main form will update with this
model. This allows the user to quickly review all models to find the best fitting one.
The 'Regression Results' Panel

When the 'Run Regression' button is clicked, the grid panel in the lower part of the 'Equations'
tab display will update to display the 'Best Fit' (Result) regression line equation and other statistics
and coefficients associated with the regression equation solution. The tabulated entries depend

upon the Curve 'Method' and 'Regression Equation' selected. The following screen capture
illustrates the 'Equations' tab display after setting up a 'Leverett J, porosity modifier' Function,
and 'Lambda' curve fitting regression equation:
The data rows in the table are described below:
'Result Equation' - the regression 'best fit' equation is illustrated in the top row of the
grid. This equation can be 'copied' from the table, using right-mouse-button
functionality, into the WINDOWS clipboard so that it can be pasted into the IP 'User
Formula' calculation module or into an external document. The equation cannot be
edited directly in this row of the table. However, individual coefficients can be edited in
their respective data rows.
'R2 Regression Coeff.' - The R2 correlation coefficient for this line fit is shown in row 2
of the grid.
'Num of Pc Crvs used' - this is a 'count' of the number of input Pc curves meeting the
'Discriminator' cutoffs. 'Discriminators are set on the 'Discriminators' tab and by default
the 'PcUse' Flag from the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module is
included in order to discriminate 'Good' from 'Bad' data points.
'Num of Points used' this is a 'count' of the number of valid data points in the Pc
Curves, used in the regression.
'Coefficient' rows - depending upon the curve fitting 'Regression Equation' selected,
there will be one row in the table for each coefficient in the regression equation. In the

example shown above there are entries for 'a', 'l',and 'b' coefficients. The coefficient
entries are user-editable fields. If you edit a coefficient entry, the corresponding entry in
the 'Result Equation' line will be updated. To reset an edited coefficient to its original
value, either;
manually type in the original value and click the 'Output Regression Sw Curves'
button, or
'clear' the coefficient entry value and 'click' the 'Run Regression' button again.
'Clicking' the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button at the bottom of the screen will then apply
the regression equation to the input Pc or 'J' function data and will compute the 'Water Saturation
from Pc Regression' (SwPcReg) curve for each core plug. If in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up
and Corrections' module the 'Output Sets same as PC curve Input sets' box has been
'checked' then the output curve SwPcReg will be automatically output to the Set that the input Pc
curves are in. Plus a 1,2,3....will be appended to the curve name for each time the module is run,
so the user will see SwPcReg1, SwPcReg2 etc curves. in the Set that contains the input capillary
pressure curves. This removes the old problem of over-writing the output curve every time the
module was run.
The 'Crossplot Results' button, launches a number of QC plots. The options are described
below, in the 'Output and Visualization' section.
Output and Visualization Buttons

Output regression curves and data visualization is performed using the buttons at the bottom of
the 'Equations' window
'Output Regression Sw Curves' button - 'clicking' the 'Output Regression Sw Curves'

button creates a 'Water Saturation from Pc Regression' curve ('SwPcReg') for each
Core Plug in the active dataset. The default output curve name is shown in the
text-entry box next to the 'Sw Regression Results Curve Name' label. The text box
curve name is user-editable, should you wish to change the name. The default output
Curve Set is the Set that was created / selected as the output curve Set for the corrected
curves from the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module. If the user wants
to place the Sw Regression result curve into a different Set than the output Set defined
in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module then use the 'Output Set'
button to select the Set from the drop-down list. If the user then chooses another model
the 'Output Set' will have to be defined again.
'Crossplot Results' button - clicking the 'Crossplots Results' button opens a
drop-down menu containing 3 options. These are:
'Sw measured / Sw regression comparison'

'Individual Pc curve comparison'
'Input Pc curves with Regression line'
Examples of the crossplot types are given below:

'Sw measured /Sw regression comparison'

This display illustrates the effectiveness of the curve fitting computations. Plotting input corrected
water saturation curves (SwPcCorr) versus water saturation from a regression fit (SwPcReg)
gives a visual indication of how well the regression equation fits to the input data.
'Individual Pc curves comparison'

This display illustrates, for each core plug, the input, corrected Water Saturation (SwPcCorr)
curve and its corresponding 'J' function regression curve, (Lev_J). The crossplot should only
be used to compare a single core plug and its 'J' function regression equivalent. Displaying
all the wells / curves is meaningless in this plot.
In the well list, to the right-hand side of the crossplot display, wells are listed in the following order
:
'(1) Well 1 Plug 1'

'(1) Well 1 Plug 1 Reg' (regression)
'(1) Well 1 Plug 2'
'(1) Well 1 Plug 2 Reg' (regression)
etc...

'Input Pc curves with Regression line'

This display allows you to view the input saturation (SwPcCorr) versus 'J' function (Lev_J) for all
the selected core plugs in one crossplot, together with the 'Single Fitting Curve' that has been
computed from these data. In the screen capture shown below the 'Lambda' regression line
solution is shown as a green dashed line and the associated Regression equation is shown on the
crossplot as a 'User Line'.

'Separate equation for each Pc curve'

This Model 'Type', as shown below, will take all the corrected Pc versus saturation input data from
the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module and will allow the user to fit curves
through each individual Pc curve, then combine the fitting parameters into a 'Combined Equation
' iteratively running regression calculations on each individual curve fit calculation.
The 'Equations' tab, when 'Separate equation for each Pc curve' is selected looks similar to the
following screen capture.

You should :
1. Select a 'Regression Equation' from the drop-down list at the top of the window which
will be applied to the Pc data for each 'Good' or 'Part Good' core plug. Three non-linear
regression methods are available. These are:
'Lambda' - Lambda is a capillary pressure-specific curve fitting function, where

Sw = a * Pc^(-l) + b
'Hyperbola' - An hyperbolic Pc curve fitting function, where Sw = a / (Pc-b) + c.

'Exponential' - an exponential Pc curve fitting function, where Sw = a * e^(b *

Pc) + c.
The units of the Pc variable in the equation will be the units of the output Pc curve set-up in the '
Capillary Pressure Set-Up and Corrections' module.
2. Set up any 'Discriminators' you wish to apply, on the 'Discriminators' tab, for
example, to select data from within a certain porosity range.
3. 'Tick' the 'Weight Regression' box to weight the points by the reciprocal of the Sw
value if a weighting is required.
4. 'Click' the 'Run Regression' button at the top of the screen. Underneath the 'Run
Regression' button, the number of Pc curves found is presented. If Discriminator logic is
turned on, this number will be updated to reflect the number of 'Good' and 'Part Good'
plugs detected in the current dataset that meet the discriminator logic cut-offs. The two
on-screen tables are populated with the results of the regression run.
The upper, 'Individual Equations Statistics' table provides a listing of each individual
core plugs Pc curve fitting coefficients, the R2 correlation coefficient and the number of
data points used in each regression. The equation coefficients change, depending upon
the 'Regression Equation' selected, when the 'Run Regression' button is clicked. The '
Use' column for a plug can be 'un-checked' if the user wants to remove the regression
results from the 'Combined Equation Statistics' results. The vertical scrollbar on the
right hand side of the table allows you to analyze the list of individual plug statistics.
The 'Combined Equation Statistics' table, in the lower part of the window, contains the
combined statistics for each regression equation coefficient, from all the selected core
plugs.

The data rows in the 'Combined Equation Statistics' table are described below:
'Average Value' - reports the average value, for each coefficient, of all the individual
core plug curve fit regressions.
'Median Value' - reports the Median value, for each coefficient, of all the individual core
plug curve fit regressions.
'Min / Max Values' - reports the minimum and maximum values found in the individual
core plug curve fit regressions for each coefficient.
'Standard Deviation' - reports the Standard Deviation of the individual core plug curve
fit regressions for each coefficient.
'Correlation Curve (X)' - Drop-down curve selection list. Choose a curve name to
correlate a coefficient against.
'Correlation Type' - Drop-down list box. Select a correlation 'Type' from the drop-down
list. The options are:
'y = Av. Value'
'y = Median Value'
'y = f(x)'
'x = f(y)'
'RMA'
'2nd Order Poly'
'3rd Order Poly'
These are described more fully, below:
'y = Av. value' - This is the 'default' setting when the module is first opened. The
coefficient values in the 'Combined Equation' text box correspond to the 'a', 'b' and 'l'
or 'c' coefficient 'Average Value' (first row in the table) from the 'Combined Equation'
statistics table, as illustrated below:

'y = Median value' - select this option to return the 'Median Value' (second row in the
table) for each coefficient from the 'Combined Equation' statistics table.
Correlation 'Types' can also be equations. The options are:

'y = f(x)' - linear regression where 'Coefficient' (Y) is a function of the selected
'Correlation Curve' (X). The squared Y-error distances are minimised.
'x = f(y)' - linear regression where 'Correlation Curve' (X) is a function of the selected
'Coefficient' (Y). The squared X-errors are minimised.
'RMA' - The 'RMA' (reduced major axis) line-fit gives an equation that is midway
between the above methods.
'2nd Order Poly' - Second Order Polynomial regression equation.
'3rd Order Poly' - Third Order Polynomial regression equation.
In the case, where one of the five 'Correlation Type 'equations' is selected, then you should
follow the workflow steps listed below.
1. Select the 'Correlation Curve (X)' curve by clicking in the ''a' Coeff' column, in the '
Correlation Curve (X)' cell and choose a curve from the curve drop-down list.
2. Select the 'Correlation Type' in the ''a' Coeff' column - the example illustrated below
uses 'RMA' for the 'a' Coefficient versus Core Porosity ('RawC: Phi') regression.
3. If you want to set either the 'X' or 'Y' curve as a logarithmic curve, 'tick' the 'Log (X)' and
/ or 'Log (Y)' tick boxes.
4. Click the 'Run' button in the ''a' Coeff' column - the regression R2 value and equation
coefficients are listed underneath the 'View' button. The 'Combined Equation' text box is
updated to reflect the new calculation 'Type' and coefficients. So, in the example illustrated
below, the equation 'a' and 'b' coefficients, for the relationship between Core Porosity (
RawC:Phi) and ''a' Coeff' are included into the 'Combined Equation' window.

The relationship between the Correlation Type (X) and coefficient (Y) can be visualized by clicking
the 'View' button in the appropriate 'coefficient' column. A crossplot window is launched which
shows the cross plotted data and includes the regression line fit to the data and its' equation. An
example is shown below:

The crossplot display options are described below :

'Copy Graphics to Clipboard' - the graphics can be copied to the WINDOWS
clipboard.
'Output to Printer' - the graphics can be output directly to a connected printer.
'Edit Regression Line' - if this is selected the regression line can be moved by grabbing
the ends of the line and moving the line. The new equation is shown at the base of the
plot and also transferred back into the module window.
'Create Area' - this is used to select an area on the plot by clicking on the plot. Each
click will create a new point and which joins to the last created point. The area
automatically closes. Each point can be dragged to a new position. A point can be
deleted by placing the cursor on a point and hitting the 'Delete' key.
'Delete Area' - deletes the created area.
'Re-run Regression using Area' - this re-runs the regression using the points within the

created area. The results will be displayed at the base of the plot and also in the '
Combined Equation' text box within the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' module.
In the example illustrated below, If the 'Correlation Type' is set to '2nd Order poly' function for
the 'a' coefficient and this regression is run, the 'Combined Equation' text box will be updated
such that the second order polynomial best fit regression equation is substituted for the single
coefficient (''a' Coeff') value in the equation, as shown below:
'Combined Equation Statistics' table entries (continued):
'Log(X)' - 'tick' -box flag that, when ticked, takes the Log of the 'X' value before the
regression is run (click the 'Run' button).
'Log(Y)' - 'tick'-box flag that, when ticked, takes the Log of the 'Y' value before the
regression is run (click the 'Run' button).
'Run Regression' - 'Clicking' the 'Run' button in a coefficient column, runs the
regression computation for that particular coefficient.
'View' - 'clicking' the 'View' button in a coefficient column launches a crossplot display of
the 'coefficient' versus 'X' curve data. The regression line will also be shown on the
crossplot.
'R2 Correlation' - output correlation coefficient statistic for the X (curve) versus
Y(coefficient) regression function.
''a' Coeff' - output regression coefficient for the X (curve) versus Y(coefficient)
regression function.
''b' Coeff' - output regression coefficient for the X (curve) versus Y(coefficient)
''c' Coeff' - output regression coefficient for the X (curve) versus Y(coefficient)
The 'Combined Equation' text box displays the regression equation resulting from
whichever Correlation 'Type' has been selected for the Combined regression dataset.
5. Click the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button. An 'Sw-from-regression' output

curve ('SwCpIndReg') will be calculated for each core plug in the list. In addition a '
Combined-equation-Sw-from-regression' output curve ('SwCpReg') will be computed
for each core plug in the list.

Output and Visualization Buttons

Output regression curves and data visualization is performed using the buttons at the bottom of
the 'Equations' window
'Output Regression Sw Curves' button - 'clicking' the 'Output Regression Sw Curves'

button creates a 'Water-Saturation-from-Regression' curve ('SwCpIndReg') for each
Core Plug in the active dataset that meets the users 'Discriminator Logic' settings for a
particular 'Model'. The default output curve name is shown in the text-entry box next to
the 'Individual Curve Sw Regression Results, Curve Name' label. The text box curve
name is user-editable, should you wish to change the name.
If the user wants to output the results curves to a different Set than that defined in the 'Capillary
Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module then use the 'Output Set' button to select a different
Set.
The result curve for the 'Combined equation Sw Regression Results, Curve Name' is
output as curve 'SwCpReg'.
'Crossplot Results' button - clicking the 'Crossplots Results' button opens a
drop-down menu containing 4 options. These are:
'Ind. Eqs : Sw mea / Sw Reg comparison'

'Ind Eqs : Pc curves comparison'
'Comb. Eqs : Sw mea /Sw Reg comparison'
'Comb. Eqs : Pc curves comparison'
Examples of the crossplot types are given below:
'Ind. Eqs : Sw mea / Sw Reg comparison' Plot, using a Porosity discriminator, (in this example
porosity must be < 15% - nine plugs are filtered from a larger dataset and are displayed in the
crossplot). The output shows a near-perfect 1:1 regression curve fit for each separate plug, as
we are regressing only one curve at a time.

'Ind Eqs : Pc curves comparison': This plot is used to view each individual plugs' Pc versus Sw
relationship and its' individual regression equation curve fit.

'Comb. Eqs : Sw mea /Sw Reg comparison' - This plot illustrates the comparison between the
individual Core plug saturations versus the 'Combined Equation' computed Saturation line fit.
This plot will show much wider data scatter than for the individual curve regressions since it is
using a single 'Combined Equation' to try and fit each individual plugs' Pc versus Sw data.

'Comb. Eqs : Pc curves comparison' - Compares each individual core plug Pc versus
saturation relationship against the 'Combined Equation' regression curve fit. The 'Combined
Equation' regression fit has a postscript 'Reg' after the plug depth label.

The regression results can be output to a printer, text file or to the clipboard from the drop-down
menu visible when the 'Print' button is clicked. The report includes all the regression results for
the individual plugs. Below is a sample from an output report.
Model (1) : Lev J Phi < .15
Individual regression run of each Cap Pressure curve

Regression Type : Lambda
Regression Equation : Sw = a.Pc^(-?) + b
Number of Pc curves :3
Sw Weighted regression used : No
Pc Plug Use 'a' Coeff '?' Coeff 'b' Coeff 'R2' corr. No. Points
W(8) Depth:4400.19 Yes 0.2885 -1.9828 0.1932 0.998 41
W(8) Depth:4403.23 Yes 0.6839 -2.3015 0.1945 0.995 31
W(8) Depth:4403.39 Yes 0.3272 -1.067 0.1733 0.981 47
(Y) 'a' Coeff '?' Coeff 'b' Coeff 'R2' corr.

Average Value 0.43323 -1.78377 0.18698 0.99119
Median Value 0.32724 -1.9828 0.19318 0.99451
Min Value 0.28852 -2.30148 0.17326 0.98145
Max Value 0.68392 -1.06704 0.19449 0.9976

Std Deviation 0.218 0.6408 0.0119 0.0086

Corr. Curve (X) RawC:Phi RawC:Phi RawC:Phi
Correlation Type RMA y = Av. Value y = Av. Value
Log (X) No No No
Log (Y) No No No
'R2' correlation
'a' Coeff
'b' Coeff
'c' Coeff
'd' Coeff
Result equation
Sw = (-999. - 999. * RawC:Phi) * Pc^(-1.78377) + 0.18698
Discriminators
RawC:Phi < 0.15
and
SwPcCorr < 0.9
Zones Selected from set : Tops1

RN26 RN23 LS-3 (top 4C)
22.10.3 Saturation Versus Height Curves

The 'Saturation Versus Height Curves' module is used to take the functions that have been
developed in the 'Capillary Pressure Functions' and 'Log Sw Vs. Height Functions' modules
and to apply these functions to multiple wells and multiple reservoir zones. The module can also
be used to calculate an unknown 'Free Water Level' (FWL) in a well, using a function to predict
the 'Most Likely' value.
The user sets up the input wells and curves and then creates 'Hydrocarbon Models' -
incorporating Free Water Level depths and depth ranges over which to run a set of functions. '
Function Sets' are created in the 'Function Mixing Setup' tab. This allows the user to specify
which function is to be used in which circumstance. An example of this would be the use of
different functions dependent on a certain porosity range or facies coding. Obviously, the '
Functions Mixing' set up should follow closely the discriminators used to create the functions in
the first place, however a considerable degree of flexibility is allowed. Hence it is possible to
create a function using discriminators for porosity > 0.1, for example, but apply the function to all
porosity ranges.
The module has been further enhanced to handle situations of gas over oil reservoirs. To
calculate capillary pressure in the gas leg, for use in a Pc function, it is necessary to know the
gas/oil contact plus the density of the gas and oil.
NOTE:
1. The 'Functions Mixing Setup' relies on a consistent curve naming convention in all
selected wells. So, for example, if a 'Function' discriminator setting uses a curve called '
PHIE', then this curve must be available in all wells.
2. On the 'Sw Height' tab ('Setup Input / Output curves' sub-tab) 'continuous' porosity /
permeability input log curves, calibrated to core data (where available), are the required
'input' types. Sparse data Core Porosity and / or Core Permeability curves are not suitable
for use in this module.

The user interface is organized on tabbed screens. These are:

'Sw Height', which has 2 sub-tabs:
'Setup Input / Output Curves'
'Hydrocarbon Models'
And the
'Functions Mixing Setup' tab
The 'Sw Height' - 'Input / Output Curve' tab

The 'Sw Height' - 'Input / Output Curve' tab is illustrated below. This interface is used to set up
the input wells, input porosity, permeability and water saturation log curves and the TVDSS curve
for each well. The outputs from this module are 4 curves;
'Sw Height Curve Out' - Water Saturation as a function of Height above FWL (Sw_Ht).
'Sw Pc Curve Out' - Water Saturation from Pc curves calculated from height above
FWL (Sw_PcHt). This curve will only contain data if Capillary Pressure data has been
entered in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up and Corrections' module. For each Pc plug
found above the FWL, the calculated capillary pressure for this depth will be used to look
up the Sw value in the Pc curve. The corrected Pc data is used.
'Hght Above Cont Curve Out' - Height above contact (HtAbCont). This is the height, in
units of the well (feet / metres), above the FWL in vertical depth.
'Pc pressure Curve Out' - Pc pressure above contact (PcAbCont). This is the Pc
pressure calculated at each depth level from the vertical depth above the contact using
the hydrocarbon and water densities. This does not include any IFT correction factor.

The porosity and water saturation input curves must be in decimal units. The permeability input
curve which is used in the 'J' function and the 'RQI' function should either be in units of
milliDarcies (mD) or SI units of 'm2'. The units are read from the curve 'Units' attribute and the
input value is converted to 'mD' before being used in the calculations.
The 'Sw Height' - 'Hydrocarbon Models' tab

The 'Sw Height' - 'Hydrocarbon Models' tab is used to set up the 'Wells', 'Free Water Level',
'calculation depth ranges' for the study wells.
There are a number of control buttons at the top of the 'tab' interface which are there to help the
user to set up different hydrocarbon models, for example, for different reservoir intervals and
different hydrocarbon fluid types. The controls are illustrated below:

The user interface is used to set up separate Hydrocarbon models in multiple wells - in order to
accommodate one, or more, field-wide Hydrocarbon contact scenarios. Subsets of wells can be
selectively evaluated, for example, in a fault compartmentalized reservoir where different Free
Water Levels exist in different fault blocks.
'Use' Wells to be used in the current model are selected for use by ticking the box.
'TVD Free Water Level' True Vertical Subsea Depth value must be entered for each
selected well.
'TVD Gas Oil Contact' - True Vertical Subsea Depth of the gas oil contact. This is only
required for calculations using Pc models and for Gas-over-Oil reservoirs, otherwise
leave blank.

'MD Calc. Top Depth' Top depth for the output calculated Sw curve. If not entered will
be the top of the well.
'MD Calc. Bot Depth' Bottom depth for the output calculated Sw curve. If not entered
will be the bottom of the well or the FWL, which ever is shallower.
'Hyd Density' Hydrocarbon density. Used for calculating capillary pressure. Not
required if Log Functions are used. Can be entered as a fixed value or as a curve. This
allows compositional hydrocarbon densities to be used. If a curve is entered the capillary
pressure at a level is calculated by calculating the thickness weighted average of the
input density curve from this level to the contact (either FWL or GOC). This allows for
high angle wells where the hole angle may be varying over the interval of calculation.
'Gas Density' - This is the gas density for Gas-over-Oil reservoirs. The oil density is
entered under the 'Hyd Density' column. The column will be 'greyed' out if no GOC has
been entered. Numbers can still be entered in the column but no calculation will be made
on them. Can be entered as a fixed value or as a curve. This allows compositional
hydrocarbon densities to be used.
'Water Density' Water density. Used for calculating capillary pressure. Not required if
Log Functions are used.
'Density Units' Units of the Hydrocarbon and Water density values. Used for
calculating capillary pressure. Not used if Log Functions are used.
'IFT Corr Factor' Interfacial tension correction factor. Used either for converting Pc
Functions fluid type to actual fluid type or for normalizing Pc functions to Log Sw values.
'IFT Gas Corr Fact' - This is the gas IFT for Gas-over-Oil reservoirs. It is used to adjust
the Pc value to account for the differences between the IFT and contact angle used in
the corrected Pc curve data and the actual reservoir IFT and contact angle. The column
will be 'greyed' out if no GOC has been entered.
'Function Mixing' Select the function mixing to use for each selected well. These are
set up on the 'Function Mixing Setup' tab.
'Make Plot' Click the 'View' button to create an interactive plot for the well showing the
results of the saturation height curve.
Model Calculations
Click the 'Run All Wells' button to make the calculations for the selected wells for this
hydrocarbon model. This outputs the 'Sw_ht' and 'Sw_PcHt' curves set up on the 'Setup Input /
Output Curves' tab.
If the 'Null output Sw Curves' box is 'checked' then the output curves are deleted and
re-initialized before the calculations are made. Warning: if you are using multiple
hydrocarbon models, checking this box will delete the results from other models.
Oil Situation
The calculations are made using the functions setup for the function mixing selected. If capillary
pressure functions are used, the Pc value used in the functions is calculated as follows.
Pc = (DenWater DenHyd) x HT x IFTCorrFactor
Where
DenWater = Entered density of the water
DenHyd = Entered density of the hydrocarbons
HT = TVD height above the entered FWL
IFTCorrFactor = Entered IFT correction factor
Output units are the same as the corrected Pc output curves in the 'Capillary Pressure Set-up'

module. These are the units expected by the functions.
Gas over Oil Situation

The Pc value is calculated as follows.
Between the FWL and GOC

Pc = (DenWater - DenHyd) x (FWL - HT) x IFTCorrFactor
Above the GOC

Pc = (DenWater - DenHyd) x (FWL - GOC) x IFTCorrFactor + (DenWater - DenGas) x
(GOC - HT) x IFTCorrFactorGas
Where
DenWater = Entered density of the water
DenHyd = Entered density of the hydrocarbons
FWL = TVD free water level
GOC = TVD gas oil contact
HT = TVD height above the entered FWL
IFTCorrFactor = Entered IFT correction factor
DenGas = Entered density of gas
IFTCorrFactorGas = Entered IFT correction factor for the gas zone
If a Pc function has been developed and is to be used in both the Gas and Oil zones then the '
IPTCorrFactorGas' is used to adjust the IFT and contact angle differences between the gas and
oil fluid properties.
For example, if the function was developed for oil with an IFT value of 30 and a contact angle of
30 degrees, then used in gas with an IFT of 50 and a contact angle of 0 degrees. The '
IFTCorrFactorGas' would be equal to 50 x Cos(0.0) / (30 x Cos(30.0) = 1.924
Interactive Log Plot

By clicking the 'View' button under the 'Make Plot' column an interactive plot for the selected well
will be displayed. The plot shows a comparison of the calculated Sw curves against the log Sw
curve. The Pc Sw values curve 'Sw_PcHt' is also displayed as individual points wherever a Pc
value exists.

A Zone Set is automatically created in the well called 'CapPress FWL'. The FWL for the model is
the bottom of the zone. By dragging the bottom of the zone up or down, the Sw model will be
recalculated and the results displayed. If multiple models are used then the Zone Set will have
more than one zone. Each zone will represent a model, for example, for different fluids in different
reservoirs.
In the Sw comparison track (track 4) the 'IFT Corr Factor' is displayed as an interactive line. The
user can drag this line to adjust this parameter. When the value is changed the Sw model is run
and the plot updated. This allows the user to manually set the value to give the best match with
log Sw results.
Track 7 displays the pore size distribution curve.

The pore size is given as a radius in microns and the equation for its calculation is shown below:
R = 2* IFT * Cos (CA) /Pc
Where
R = Radius
IFT = Interfacial tension at lab conditions
CA = Contact angle at lab conditions
Pc = Capillary pressure
The report from the module has been enhanced to give the Pc equation for each well and also the
Function model equation. The equations can easily be cut and pasted for use in other
applications.
SATURATION HEIGHT
Hydrocarbon Model : Gas

Well :Exp 4
TVD FWL : 3128.8 MD Top Depth : MD Bot. Depth :
Hyd. Density : 0.2 gm/cc Water Density : 1. gm/cc IFT Corr. Factor : 1.14
Functions Mixing : Log Mixing

Pc = (3128.8 - TVDSS) * 1.29659 psi
Function Mixing : Log Mixing

Default Function = Log Function : Log Function 1
Model Functions
Pc Function : Lev J Phi > .2
Sw = 0.1174 * (Pc * 3.84900E-2 * (K/)^0.5)^(-0.43881) + 0.28661
Log Function : Log Function 1

Sw = 1.0 / ( (3.59475 + h^0.3406) * ^0.74781 )
Fluid Contact Fitting

If an Sw model has been established for a field this can be used to asses whether a new well with
no clear FWL fits the established field FWL or has a different FWL. This is done by estimating the
depth range within which the FWL sits and then running the Sw model many times over this depth
range to see which set of results best fits the log-calculated water saturation. The 'Search for
best contact using log Sw data in selected wells' panel at the bottom of the window allows the
user to do this.
The panel works the following way:
1. Select the well or wells for which to run the search.

2. Enter the 'Contact between' depth range over which to run the search.
3. The 'Use Hydrocarbon volumes' button is 'checked' (default) to make the comparison
between model results and log results using porosity-weighted results. If not 'checked',
then the comparisons are made on just the Sw curves.
4. 'Click' the 'Search' button and the following window is launched, which shows the
progress of the comparison and the results of the computation. The 'Cumulative
Difference' value is the sum of the differences of the hydrocarbon volumes (or Sw's) for
each depth step above the current FWL, for all selected wells. The lowest values will be
the 'Most Likely' FWL.

5. The 'Best Fit FWL' depth is displayed as a label at the bottom of the panel.
6. 'Click' the 'Use Contact' button to copy this 'Best Fit FWL' depth into the 'TVD Free
Water Level' column of all selected wells and 'click' the 'Run All Wells' button to re-run
the model using this FWL depth.
IFT Fitting
When using capillary pressure curves to create Sw functions for a reservoir, one of the
uncertainties is the IFT value and contact angle for the fluids in the reservoir. Sometimes it is felt
that the log interpretation Sw values give better absolute values of water saturation due to these
uncertainties. The 'Search for best IFT correction factor' panel allows the user to find the best
IFT correction factor that makes the Pc functions match the log Sw values.
The panel works the following way:
1. Select the well or wells for which to run the search.

2. Enter the IFT 'Factor Between' range over which to run the search. The range is
logarithmic and the defaults of 0.1 to 5 are normally adequate.
3. The 'Use Hydrocarbon volumes' button is 'checked' (default) to make the comparison
between model results and log results using porosity weighted results. If not 'checked'
then the comparisons are made on just the Sw curves.
4. Click the 'Search' button and the window, shown below, will be displayed to show the
progress and the results of the comparison. The 'Cumulative Difference' value is the sum
of the differences of the hydrocarbon volumes (or Sw's) for each depth step above the
current FWL for all selected wells. The lowest values will be the best match IFT correction
factor.

5. The 'Best Fit IFT Correction Factor' is displayed as a label at the bottom of the panel.
6. 'Click' the 'Use' button to copy this factor into the 'IFT Corr. Factor' column for all
selected wells and 'click' the 'Run All Wells' button to re-run the model using this
correction factor.
'The Functions Mixing Setup' tab

The 'Functions Mixing Setup' Tab is used to set up the combination of 'Capillary Pressure' and
/ or 'Log Sw Vs. Height' functions that will be applied in the selected wells. The screen has a
number of 'control' buttons and text-entry boxes at the top of the window. These are illustrated
below:
The user sets up the 'Discriminator' grid, illustrated below, along with the selection of the '
Default Function' to choose the functions to be applied to the study wells.
NOTE: It is good practice to give 'Capillary Pressure' functions and 'Log Sw Vs. Height'
functions descriptive 'Function Names' that help you to select them from the drop-down list box.
This helps when you are trying to set up 'Mixing' discriminator logic. An example 'Mixing' set-up
is shown below:

If working with log functions, capillary pressure is not required. The equations only work with
height above contact. The Oil / Gas density and IFT correction factors are not used.

22.11 Saturation Height Modelling (Log Curves)

The 'Log Sw versus Height Functions' module is used to generate Water saturation (Sw)
versus Height functions from log curve data. This module does not require core data.
The user sets up the input data from one or multiple wells on the 'Input Curves' tab. A Free
Water Level (FWL) must be known in each well, from which the 'height above FWL' is calculated
for use in the functions. It is assumed that all wells are in the same depth units, whether this is
'Feet' or Metres'. DO NOT mix wells with imperial (Feet) and metric units (meters) in the same
function, unless the TVDSS input curves which are used as an input have been converted so they
all contain consistent units.
NOTE: This module can only be run after an interpretation to evaluate Porosity and Water
Saturation has been made in each well. If the RQI (Rock Quality Index) functions are to be used,
then a permeability curve will be also be required as an input.
The module allows the user to apply different curve fitting techniques to the log curve data with
the option to apply 'Discriminator' logic, for example, to derive average 'saturation versus height'
functions for different porosity classes. The 'Use' and the 'FWL TVDSS' is now setup and saved
by the model 'Function'. Hence, in a reservoir with multiple stacked reservoirs different functions
can be developed for each reservoir, with the the setup saved by function. To speed up the
selection of a model there is a 'Regression Function Comparator' which will run through all of
the methods and equations and give a rating for each. The user can then select the one that
suits.
The module is organized on 2 'tabbed' screens. These are:

'Input Curves' and
'Functions'.
The 'Input Curves' Tab

This screen is used to set up the wells and curves to be used in determining the log Sw versus
Height relationships. As noted above, the input Porosity (PHIE), Water Saturation (SW) and Bulk
Volume Water (BVW) curves must have already been computed in all subject wells. An optional
Section 22.11 Advanced Interpretation : Saturation Height Modelling (Log Curves)

permeability curve, which is used in the 'Rock Quality Index' (RQI) calculation, may also need to
be supplied.
A True Vertical Depth 'TVDSS' curve (NOTE: the 'Curve Type' of the TVDSS curve must be set
to depth in the 'Manage Curve Headers' module) and a Free Water Level (FWL) depth value in '
True Vertical Depth', must also be entered into the table.
Click in a blank cell in the 'Well Name' column to open the 'select well' drop-down list. All
in-memory wells are listed. Select a well from the list to load it into the interface.
Choose the curves for each well, in the appropriate columns.
Type in an appropriate 'Free Water Level' depth value, in ft / m TVDSS, for each well.
The Sw, Porosity and BVW input curves must be in the units of decimals (this is the standard
output for all IP interpretation modules). The permeability input curve which is used in the 'RQI'
function should either be in the units of 'md' or SI units of 'm2'. The units are read from the curve '
Units' attribute and the input value is converted to 'md' before being used in the calculations.
The 'Functions' Tab

'Log Sw versus Height Functions' are managed using the function 'counter' and operations
buttons found at the top of the 'Functions' tab.

'Function' - The 'Function' number in the top left-hand corner of the screen is
incremented if more than one log Sw vs. Height function is defined by the user. The 'left'
and 'right' arrows allow the user to scroll through the log Sw vs. Height functions defined
for the current dataset. For example, one could set up different models to reflect
different porosity or permeability classes.
'Name' - the Log Function 'Name' can be manually typed into the text entry box to allow
the user to visually discriminate between log Sw vs. Height functions.
'New Function' - This button creates a new Log Sw vs. Height function. The user is
offered the choice of copying the properties of the current function or, of opening a new,
'blank' function. 'Clicking' the 'New Function' button opens the following message:
NOTE: Copying an existing function can be a quick way of setting up multiple functions using the
same fitting routines, but allows you to set up different 'Discriminator' logic for each new function.
For example, you could apply different porosity or permeability ranges or different facies
discriminators for different functions.
'Delete Function' - This button deletes the currently-displayed 'Sw versus Height
function'. Clicking the 'Delete Function' button will launch a message similar to the
following message:
Click 'Yes' to confirm the 'delete' operation, Click 'No' to cancel the operation.
The 'Functions' tab is further subdivided onto 2 screens. These are:

'Equations' and
'Discriminators'
The 'Equations' Sub-Tab

The 'Equations' sub-tab is used to set up one or more 'Sw versus Height Functions' which
represent the wireline-log-derived 'Water Saturation as a function of height' curve. One function
or a number of functions can be used to describe a set of Sw versus height relationships, using
different equations and discriminator logic.
'FWL TVDSS' - If the free water level is changed on this tab then all the FWL values will
be changed on the 'Input Curves' tab. If the user wants to use different FWL's for
different wells in the development of the function then leave the 'FWL TVDSS' box blank
on the 'Functions' tab and enter values on the 'Input Curves' tab.
NOTE: If the same FWL's have been entered for each well on the 'Input Curves' tab then this
value will automatically be shown on the 'Functions' tab.
'Methods' - The 'Method' drop-down list, illustrated in the screen capture shown below,
provides the user with a number of methods of calculating water saturation, based upon
the user-selected Input curves and FWL depths set up in the 'Input Curves' tab.

The available 'Methods' are:
'Sw function of height', where Sw = f(h)

'BVW function of height', where BVW = f(h)
'Rock Quality Index', where Sw = f(RQI.h) & RQI = ( K /
f)
'Rock Quality Index, porosity modifier', where Sw = f(RQI.h) & RQI = ( K /
f^m)
(where an 'RQI' method is selected, an additional 'RQI' curve is output by the module)
Where:
Sw = Water Saturation
BVW = Bulk Volume of Water
h = Height above FWL
RQI = Rock Quality Index
K = Permeability (from logs) in mD
f = Porosity (from logs) in decimal format
m = cementation exponent
Four additional non-linear 'Porosity versus Height' functions, relating log water saturation to
height-above-FWL can be selected from the 'Method' drop-down list. These are:
'Porosity & Height function 1' where Sw = 1.0 / [(a +h^b).f^c]

'Porosity & Height function 2' where Sw = 1.0 / [(a +b.h^c)).f^d]
'Porosity & Height function 3' where Sw = [a + b.Log(h) +
c.Log(h)^2 + d. Log(h)^3 ] / [f^f]
'Porosity & Height Lambda function' where Sw = a.h^(b.f + c) + d
Where:
a, b, c, d, f are fitting constants.
'Regression Equation' - the 'Regression Equation' drop-down list, illustrated below,

provides the user with a number of options to line-fit the selected
'water-saturation-from-height' function that the user has selected from the 'Method' list.

The available Regression Equations are:
'Linear' where Sw = a + b.h

'Linear / Log' where Sw = a + b.Log(h)
'Log / Linear' where Log(Sw) = a + b.h
'Log / Log' where Log(Sw) = a + b.Log(h)
'Lambda' where Sw = a.(h)^(-l) + c
'Hyperbola' where Sw = a / (h - b) + c
'Exponential' where Sw = a.e^(b.h) + c
Where:
Sw = Water Saturation
h = Height above FWL
a, b, c, l = Fitting constants
Before running the regression it is possible to apply a weight to the non-linear regression
functions by 'ticking' the 'Weight Regression' box. This then weights the points that go into the
regression by the reciprocal of the Sw value. The Sw value will be in decimals and so the
maximum weighting factor will be 10. The effect of this is to weight the regression towards low Sw
values.
Evaluating Log Sw Versus Height above FWL relationships

To evaluate different 'Methods' and 'Regression Equations', the user should :
Select options from these two drop-down lists, then
Click the 'Run Regression' button. The 'Result Equation', the 'R2 correlation
coefficient', the 'Number of points used' in the regression and the regression fitting
constants (depending on the regression equation selected) are listed in the tabular
display in the centre of the window. An example is illustrated below:
To see a rating of all available models (there are 32 models) click on the 'Regression
Comparison' button.

Click the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button. The 'Water Saturation from Log Sw
vs. Height' regression ('SwLogHt') and the Height above FWL curve ('Ht_FWL') are
output to the selected 'Output Results' Set.
Click the 'Crossplot Results' button to launch the QC crossplots:

Regression Function Comparator

The 'Regression Comparison' button when 'clicked' performs a regression for all methods and
equations and a comparison of the results is shown in a separate window, sorted with the best R2
at the top. The user can select any result and then click 'Use Selected' and the main form will
update with this model. This allows the user to quickly review all models to find the best fitting
one.

Fitting an 'External' Sw vs. Height' function

An additional option in IP, for the scenario where the user already has a Log Sw vs. height
function from some external source and wants to apply that to the wells in IP, is to:
Select the wells & Plugs / Discriminator logic.

Find an equation of the required form, from the drop-down 'Regression Equation' list.
Manually enter the equation coefficients in the appropriate rows of the table. The '
Result Equation' row will update.
Click the 'Output Regression Sw Curves' button.
Use the 'Crossplot Results' options to QC the results.
The 'Discriminators' Sub-Tab

The 'Discriminators' sub-tab provides the user with a means to set up and experiment with
discriminator logic. Discriminators can be set, for example to filter data into different porosity or
permeability 'classes' or 'facies' classes. Different Log Sw Vs. Height above FWL functions can be
created using this functionality. Generic versions of the input curves can be selected.
The discriminators can be used to select data over certain depth ranges. This can be done by
typing in the depths. However if a 'Tops' set is available a flag curve can be created from the tops
using the 'Curves from Zones' module. Set the flag values for each zone to group together the
intervals to analyse so that the data intervals can be selected by using the result flag curve in the
discriminators.


22.12 Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

The 'Eastern European Resistivity Corrections' Module is a specialist tool developed by the
A.G.H University of Science and Technology, Krakw, and integrated into IP. The module
provides functionality enabling the correction of 'Normal' and 'Lateral' type resistivity curves for
hole size and environmental effects.
The documentation for this module is organised within 2 chapters, 'EERC Interface' and 'EERC
Theory' which provide details on how to use the module and secondly, give some background to
the theory and principles underpinning this module.
Section 22.12 Advanced Interpretation : Eastern European Resistivity Corrections

22.12.1 EERC Interface

The 'Eastern European Resistivity Corrections' (EERC) Module is accessed from the '
Advanced Interpretation' menu.
The Module is arranged on two 'tabs' allowing corrections to be applied to 'Lateral and Normal
Logs' and 'Multiple Lateral Logs' respectively.
The 'Lateral and Normal Logs' tab contains the largely automated functionality to correct a
combination of Normal and Lateral resistivity curves for borehole and environmental effects,
producing output curves for Rt, Ri, Rxo and a Di (diameter of invasion) curve.
The 'Multiple Lateral Logs' tab provides more sophisticated modelling functionality for use
when only Lateral resistivity curves are available.The user must understand and apply the
criteria for bed boundary definition using Lateral resistivity logs. The principles for utilising this
functionality are discussed further, under 'EERC Theory', Sections 1 and 2 .

The 'Lateral and Normal Logs' Tab

This screen allows the user to select and process a combination of Normal and Lateral resistivity
logs taking into account tool configuration, borehole temperature and mud resistivity
characteristics.
'Input Curves' : Requires the selection of a minimum of 3 Lateral and Normal

resistivity curves for processing.
'Tool Length' : this is determined from a consideration of the the tools electrode
configuration as illustrated in EERC Theory, Section 1.2 and Figure 4.
The 'Tool Length' is calculated depending on the type of device. Often in FSU/ Eastern
European logging, the Sonde name provides the required information.
For Lateral devices the Tool length is equal to : AB/2 + AM
For Normal Devices the Tool Length is equal to: AM/2.
For example :
Sonde Name (Type) Electrode Spacing Tool Length

B2.5A0.25M (Normal) B - 2.5m - A - 0.25m -M 0.25m / 2 = 0.125m
B0.5A2M (Lateral) B - 0.5m - A - 2.0m - M 0.5m / 2 + 2.0m = 2.25m
B7.5A0.75M (Normal) B - 7.5m - A - 0.75m - M 0.75m / 2 = 0.375m
M2A0.25B (Lateral) M - 2.0m - A - 0.25m - B 2.0m + 0.25m / 2 = 2.125m
NOTE: electrode configuration is often determined by local geology (Clastics or carbonates) and
resistivity conditions.
'Filter Lateral curves' : applies a 'smoothing' factor to the input Lateral curves. If the '
Filter Lateral curves' box is 'checked', the user should select the number of depth steps
to filter over. The filter value must be a whole, odd number.
'Input Temperature curve or value' : Select the temperature curve for the well,
computed in the 'Calculation' -> 'Temperature Gradient' module, or type in a
representative downhole temperature value to correct the resistivity curves to.
'Input Caliper curve or value' : Select a caliper curve for use in the hole size correction
or type in a hole size value.
'Mud Resistivity' : type in the mud resistivity value for the subject well.
'Mud Resistivity Temperature' : type in the temperature measurement at which the
mud resistivity reading was made.
'Hole Size' : 'Hole Size' must be entered in the default units for the caliper log - See Set
Default Units.
'Top / Bottom Depths' : These are the top and bottom depths over which the user
wishes to run the corrections. Leave the boxes blank to apply the environmental
corrections to the entire well. The button allows the user to specify depth intervals
from a 'Zone / Tops Set' selection window.
'Run' : The 'Run' button will apply the mud resistivity / temperature and hole size
corrections to the Input curves to create the output corrected Rt, Ri and Rxo resistivity
and Di (depth of invasion) curves.

'Result Plot' / 'Make Plot' : The 'Make Plot' button is initially 'greyed out'. It is activated
after the environmental corrections have been 'Run'. The following Log Plot is launched,
which shows a depth track on the left hand side next to a track containing the
Correlation Logs followed by the input curves in one track, the Results curves in the
next and the Diameter of Invasion curve in the final, right hand, track. The Rt curve is
also added to the 'Input Resistivities' track as a dashed line in red.
'Correlation Logs' : 2 Additional curves e.g GR and NPHI can be added to the 'Result
Plot'. The two drop-down lists allow the user to choose the curves to display.
'View Normal Curves' : This Plot option activates a series of reference theoretical '
Normal' curves. See EERC Theory, Section 2.
'View Lateral Curves' : This Plot option activates a series of reference theoretical '
Lateral' curves. See EERC Theory, Section 3.

If the Normal Curves and Lateral Curves crossplots are activated, the user is able to 'click' at a
depth point in the 'Input Resistivities' track of the 'Result Plot' and points, corresponding to the
number of Normal and Lateral curves selected, will plot on the charts. In the example shown
above, a single point will appear on the 'View Normal Curves' Crossplot reference charts and two
points will appear on the 'View Lateral Curves' Crossplot charts as illustrated below.
'Save' / 'Load' : The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save the borehole / tool
configuration set-up for the environmental corrections to an external (.env) file.
'Zone #' : The left and right arrow buttons allow the user to create new environmental
'Zones' for the environmental corrections. These could correspond to a new hole section
with different bit size, a change of mud chemistry, change of logging tools ...etc. The
set-up for each zone can be individually saved and recalled. NOTE: To update the
current parameters you have to click 'Run'.
'Delete Zone' : The 'Delete Zone' button allows the user to select and delete a zone from
the zone list.

The 'Multiple Lateral Logs' Tab

This tab enables the user to set up the processing window for multiple Laterolog environmental
corrections, in order to compute the Rt, Ri, Rxo, resistivity curves and the Di and DiRxo
'diameter of invasion' curves.
The theory relating to the environmental correction of the Lateral curves is described in EERC
Theory, Section 2.
'Input Curves' : Lateral curves 1 - 5. The user selects the Lateral curves from the
drop-down list boxes for use in the module. NOTE: a minimum of 4 Lateral curves is
required.
'Bed Tops curve' : This is a user-created curve that controls where bed boundaries are
modeled. This is critical for Lateral log processing and if this box is left blank, IP will
prompt for a valid curve name if the user attempts to 'Run' the computation and the '
Interactive Plot' is called up. Bed tops are identified by the user according to the rules
described in the Theory section. See in particular EERC Theory, Sections 1.2 and

Section 2.1 for a discussion of the principles involved in selecting 'Bed Tops'.
The user works interactively on the screen, examining 5 (or 4) Lateral curves and two additional
correlation logs in order to find minima or maxima on the curves. For both extremes the user
should pick a common depth point for all logs, but a small depth misalignment between log
extremes can often be observed and can be accepted. The user then decides the depth at which
they want to put the top of the bed, according to the principles of the theory of Lateral logs and
using their knowledge of the geological environment for the logged formation. In defining tops it
should be remembered that the shortest Lateral log has the most important role, because its
curve has the highest vertical resolution.
When the model is 'Run' and the Interactive Plot is activated, the user can create / edit the Bed
Tops curve on-screen as illustrated below:

'Input Temperature curve or value' : Select the temperature curve for the well,
computed in the 'Calculation' -> 'Temperature Gradient' module or type in a
representative downhole temperature value to correct the resistivity curves to.
'Input Caliper curve or value' : Select a caliper curve for use in the hole size correction
or type in a hole size value.
'Mud Resistivity' : type in the mud resistivity value for the subject well.
'Mud Resistivity Temperature' : type in the temperature measurement at which the
mud resistivity reading was made.
'Hole Size' : 'Hole Size' must be entered in the default units for the caliper log - See Set
Default Units.
'Top / Bottom Depths' : These are the top and bottom depths over which the user
wishes to run the corrections. Leave the boxes blank to apply the environmental
corrections to the entire well. The button allows the user to specify depth intervals
from a Zone Set selection window.
'Run' : The 'Run' button will apply the mud resistivity / temperature and hole size
corrections to the 'Input Curves' to create the output corrected Rt, Ri and Rxo resistivity
and Di / Dixo (depth of invasion) curves.
'Interactive Plot' / 'Make Plot' : This button only becomes active after the 'Run' button
has been executed. The Interactive plot is launched. The plot contains a Correlation
track, Laterals (input curves) track, Result Resistivities track and Diameter of Invasion
track. The 'Result Resistivities' track in the log plot contains the 'squared' Rt, Ri are
Rxo curves computed from the input Lateral curves.
'Correlation Logs' : two additional log curves can be added to the 'Interactive Plot' as
correlation curves e.g. GR, Neutron, Sonic.
'Result curves' : The 'Result curves' button is initially 'greyed out'. After the 'Run'
button is 'clicked', the button becomes active and the user can view the model results by
'clicking' the 'Result curves' button. This action will launch a crossplot window which
displays the 'Input Curves' average resistivity values (one 'dot' per input curve per
bed) superimposed on the 'Lateral theoretical resistivity curves' charts. If the user
moves the mouse cursor up / down the Laterals track between 'beds' on the Interactive
Plot, the chart will automatically update to show the 'best fit' chart selected for that bed.
In a 'thin bed', 4 charts are displayed - 'clicking' on a small chart launches a larger
crossplot.

'Lateral curves' : Shortcut to theoretical Lateral curve reference charts (h/d > 32). See
EERC Theory Section 2.2. The charts can be printed directly from the 'print' icon or
copied to a clipboard for pasting into other applications.
'Thin beds curves' : Shortcut to theoretical Lateral 'Thin Beds' curve reference charts (
h/d <= 32) See EERC Theory, Section 2.4 The charts can be printed directly from the
'print' icon or copied to a clipboard for pasting into other applications.
'Save' / 'Load' : The 'Save' and 'Load' buttons allow the user to save the borehole / tool

configuration set-up for the environmental corrections to an external (.env) file.
'Zone #' : The left and right arrow buttons allow the user to create new 'Zones' for the
environmental corrections. These could correspond to a new hole section with different
bit size, a change of mud chemistry, change of logging tools ...etc. The set-up for each
zone can be individually saved and recalled. By creating and applying environmental
zones where necessary, the user can compute the required Rt, Ri and Rxo curves for
an entire well section.
'Delete Zone' : The 'Delete Zone' button allows the user to select and delete a zone
from the zone list.
22.12.2 EERC Theory

The following chapter provides a discussion of the theory applying to 'Normal' and 'Lateral'
resistivity log environmental corrections.
1. Introduction
'Normal' and 'Lateral' logs are the oldest resistivity measurements in well logging and are
strongly influenced by the borehole environment in which the measurements have been recorded.
The simple construction of the logging tools and, in particular, the fact that the electric current
beam is not focussed, are the most important reasons for the application of environmental
corrections.
Recording five Lateral logs, or two Normal and one Lateral, in so-called 'Side-Wall Resistivity
Logging' or 'Simplified Resistivity Logging', has been very popular in Central and Eastern
European countries and in the Soviet Union for many years (Baa et al3 1999). Countless such
logs are stored in archives everywhere and they are a very important source of information. In
recent times and with other data, they provide very important additional information on reservoir
formation parameters.
1.1 A Brief History of Classic Resistivity Logging Theory
In early 1940's Alpin (Alpin2 1964, Dakhnov6 1967) presented a theoretical solution for the
Poisson equation for the electric field potential in a borehole surrounded by an invaded zone and
a virgin formation, when the source of the electric field is located in the borehole axis. In his model
it is assumed that each of the layers (the borehole, the flushed zone, the invaded zone and the
virgin formation) is cylindrical, coaxial, homogeneous and isotropic, and is infinite in the z-direction
( , where h represents the bed thickness). Figure 1 presents the basic model and the full
nomenclature. The assumption of infinity allows neglecting the mutual influence between the
electric field in a given bed (point) and an adjacent one, in the interpretation process.

The analytical solution of the field equations is the basis for constructing sets of theoretical curves
for the Normal and the Lateral resistivity logging tools. The equation for the ideal Lateral device (
or , see Figure 2 for the idealized tool representation) is shown here below:
(Equation 1)
Where: Ra = apparent resistivity, Rm = mud resistivity, L = device length, and d = borehole

diameter.
is a function of the resistivity parameters of the formation and the invaded zone, and of
the borehole geometrical parameters, i.e. diameter of the borehole and the invaded zone.
is expressed in terms of the modified Bessel functions I0, I1 and K0, K1. The integrand is
complicated and oscillating, and to calculate the theoretical curves, the 64-point Gauss
quadrature method has been chosen. The accuracy of the integral calculation is 0.5 per cent (
Abramovitz, Stegun1 1970).

The analytical solution is the basis for calculating sets of theoretical curves
, where Rt represents the true formation resistivity. The family of
theoretical curves calculated for a two-layer formation (only borehole and virgin zone) plays the
main role. It comprises the curves for various modules , and is the
starting point to any interpretation. The other theoretical curves, calculated for a three-layer
formation (borehole, invaded zone and virgin zone) are grouped in families according to the
constant parameters Ri/Rm and D/d, where Ri and D are the resistivity and the diameter of the
invaded zone respectively. These theoretical curves are the basis of the interpretation, which
consists in the comparison of five measured points (one for each device at the same depth
reference) on each of the curves for each of the individual devices, to the
theoretical values on the curves and choosing the parameters (
) that give the best-fit curve as a result. Figure 3 illustrates an example of
such an interpretation.

The theory is significantly more complicated for a formation consisting of a bed of given thickness,
with adjacent beds above and below it, and intersected by a borehole. The solution for such cases
has been found by Pierkov9 (1964) using the results of analog modelling. A numerical solution
has been also obtained on the basis of Alpin's 'induced charges' method and a way of calculating
the full set of theoretical curves has been presented (Ossowski8 1990). Modeled and calculated
curves have been collected for many cases of the two-layer formation (borehole and virgin zone)
for a defined bed and surroundings. The theoretical curves are
grouped according to the constant parameters characterizing the formation model: h/d and
, where: Rs represents the resistivity of the surrounding beds (shoulder bed resistivity,
assumed to be the same from the top and the base of the given bed).
1.2 Normal and Lateral Devices and Their Resistivity Curves

Figures 4a and 4b show the schematic layout of Normal and Lateral logging devices, with various
electrode arrangements. Each device consists of two circuits:
the imposed current circuit, always including electrodes A and B, and

the measuring (potential) circuit with electrodes M and N.
A knowledge of the distance between electrodes is essential in defining whether the tool
measures the potential of the electric field (Normal devices) or the potential gradient
(Lateral devices).
Exchanging the role of electrodes (AB to MN) has no influence on the logging results: the
resistivity curves do not change. The length of the device is determined according to the
sketch in Figure 4. The measurement reference point is also indicated in Figure 4. The radius of
investigation of a device depends on its length and for Normal devices it is approximately twice
the length and for Lateral devices only a single length (Pirson10 1963). The devices are named "
bottom", when the pair of MN (AB) electrodes is placed in the lower part of a device and "top" in
the reversed case. For the remainder of this consideration we will assume that a set of five Lateral
logs, or two Normal and two Lateral logs, can deliver complete information on the resistivities in
the flushed zone, the invaded zone and the virgin formation.

A characteristic resistivity anomaly is observed in the case of a single high resistivity bed
in low resistivity surroundings. In Normal logs the resistivity curve shows the anomaly to
be symmetrical with respect to the midpoint of the bed. With a Lateral device, however, the
response is asymmetric with two characteristic points: a minimum at the top of the given
bed and a maximum at the base. They are distinctly visible and are shown schematically in
Figure 5. These points are the basis for identifying given beds in a continuous resistivity curve
recorded in a borehole traversing discrete beds of varied lithology.

1.3 Interpretation
The approach to the interpretation, i.e. correcting the measured resistivity logs for borehole
effects and presenting resistivity values for the various sections of the borehole and formation
environments, is based on fitting the so-called measured curve (constructed on the basis of the
measured logs and consisting of 5 (or 4 points minimum) in the case that only Lateral devices are
available, and 4 (or 3 points minimum) in the case where both Normal and Lateral devices are
available, obviously all at the same depth level, to the theoretical one (Bala et al.3 1999; Jarzyna
et al.5 1999; Jarzyna et al.7 2002).
The two possible measurement set-ups require two different approaches:
a). For five (four) Lateral logs of different radii of investigation the logged profile is subdivided
into a sequence of discrete beds of different resistivity (different lithology and/or saturation
of the pore space) and each bed is then treated as having constant parameters. The
interpretation delivers a set of constant values for each bed, resulting in a set of 'squared',

corrected resistivity curves.

b). For two Lateral and two Normal curves (or for three of them) the interpretation is done
continuously, i.e. for each set of resistivity samples at each depth level.
2. LATERAL CURVES
2.1. Identification of the Beds and Apparent Resistivity Readings
The initial identification of the beds is necessary only when there are no Normal logs (Approach
a). above). The beds are the basis for defining intervals of apparent resistivity. In Approach b). the
apparent resistivity values at the given depth are sampled directly from the logs.
As already mentioned, the Lateral resistivity curve has characteristic points - minima and maxima
- associated with beds boundaries. Bed boundaries are selected as follows:
for a high resistivity bed surrounded by low resistivity beds and for the "bottom" Lateral
device, the maximum of an anomaly indicates the base of the bed and the minimum the
top (see Figure 5).
For the inverse case (a low resistivity bed surrounded by high resistivity beds or the "top"
Lateral device) the appearance of the anomaly is also reversed and bed boundaries are
selected accordingly.
In practical terms the interpretation on the computer screen proceeds as follows:
Looking at the plot of several apparent resistivity curves vs. depth, the interpreter picks the depths
of the tops of beds that can be identified. The characteristic extremes should hopefully be visible
on each curve (5 or 4 curves) and there may well be some depth shift between some of them. In
this case, the interpreter has to decide on a single depth for an extreme, common for all logs. In
these cases, the curve recorded by the shortest Lateral device is the most useful. The tops
picked on it should be considered definitive for interpretation, since the shortest Lateral device
is considered in this context as the log having the highest vertical resolution.
Two additional logs (used as correlation logs, usually GR or NPHI or LL3) are also presented on
the screen. They are helpful in identifying bed boundaries. The top-picking procedure is greatly
helped by learning and understanding the nature of the geological formations under investigation:
are the beds (fairly) homogeneous or laminated?, or fining (coarsening) upwards? Any information
on the morphology of the beds will help to position the pick in the optimal place, bearing in mind
that there will be a balance to be struck between the shape and amplitude of the apparent
resistivity indicated by each device, their vertical resolution and the influence of the borehole
environment. Knowledge of the stratigraphy will help to establish the best pick. There must be no
gaps in the subdivision of the log profile into beds, i.e. the base of one bed becomes the top of the
next bed.
For each bed the following set of parameters is collected:
the depth of the top (Htop ) and the depth of the base (Hbase ) defined according to the rule
described above, and the thickness of the bed (h = Hbase - Htop ),
the maximum resistivity, Ramax, for the so called "thin" resistive beds (h/d <32), or the
minimum resistivity, Ramin, when a low resistivity thin bed is surrounded by resistive
neighbors,
the average resistivity, Raav, for the so-called "thick" beds (h/d>=32), calculated taking

into account all resistivity samples from the log inside the depth interval Hbase - (Htop -
0.2h),
the average caliper, d, in the interval h,
the resistivity of adjacent beds, Rs. This parameter is necessary in the interpretation of the
"thin" beds. Rs is calculated as an average value of two readings from the curves
recorded by the Lateral device at points LL=1.05 and LL=2.625 m. The Rs value is then
taken as average resistivity in the section of 0.5h above the top of the given bed. This
procedure to determine Rs is justified by the greater influence of the formation resistivity at
the top of the given layer on the measured Ra under consideration, for the "bottom" Lateral
device (which is in any case the most common tool configuration).
2.2 Interpretation in "Thick" Beds, h/d >= 32
In this case the Alpin's2 solution curves are the basis for the interpretation. The following
assumptions (mentioned earlier) for the validity of theoretical curves are respected in every case:
Thickness of the given bed is infinite ( ),
Cylindrical coaxial layers: borehole (diameter d), homogeneous invaded zone (diameter D,
resistivity Ri) and virgin zone (resistivity Rt) are present.
2.2.1 Determination of Rx0, Ri and Rt
At each depth level, values of apparent resistivity (Ramax or Ramin, Raav) are read and
normalized by dividing them by the resistivity of the mud Rm, corrected for formation
temperature. The correction of mud resistivity for temperature is made according to the
formula:
Rm(tbed) = Rm(tmud pit) * (tmud pit + 21.5)/(tbed+21.5)

(Equation 2)
(Equation 3)
where:
= resistivity of the mud at the temperature of the bed midpoint (tbed) [ohmm]
Rm(tmud pit) = resistivity of the mud in the mud pit (tmud pit) [ohmm]
t0 = annual mean surface temperature [C]
Gg = geothermal gradient [C/m]. For temperature expressed in [F] the factor 21.5 in (
Equation 2) should be changed to 6.77.
Each apparent resistivity ratio is individually corrected for the influence of the
borehole, yielding . The two-layer theoretical curves are used for this correction.
Then, a so-called 'measured curve' is constructed. This curve

approximates the changes in resistivity of the given bed in the radial direction. The measured
curve is then fitted to the theoretical curves to get the true (interpreted) resistivities of the
cylindrical 'flushed', 'invaded' and 'virgin' zones.

If all values of are close (within 10%) we assume that there is no invaded
zone, and the true resistivity of a formation, Rt, is equal to: , where i is a number
of Lateral curves included in the interpretation.
If, after the correction, the values of obtained from the short devices are
different from those obtained from the long devices, the three-layer case applies and an
invaded zone is present. In this case we have "increasing" (Ri>Rt) or "decreasing"(Ri<Rt)
influence of the mud filtrate on formation resistivity.
After analysis of apparent resistivities recorded by several devices of various lengths in

beds of different lithology and formation properties, it was observed that t resistivity
recorded by the shortest device (LL(1), where in many cases LL(1)=0.55 m) is strongly
influenced by mud filtrate. This means that the resistivity recorded by the shortest device
and corrected for borehole effects represents the resistivity of the flushed zone,
. If there is no shortest device, Rx0 is not determined
If and are close (within 10%), the resistivity of the invaded zone,
Ri, is derived from the average . In the next step the theoretical three-layer
curves are chosen, which are closest to the just-calculated Ri. Then, four
values, i=2,, 5 are compared to curves of constant and various Di/d until the best
fit of the four points to the theoretical curve is obtained. Finally, the module of the
theoretical curve is taken as the basis to calculate the resistivity of the virgin
zone, Rt. The measure of the best fit is the minimum of the sum of the squares of the
differences between the measured points and the corresponding relevant points on the
theoretical curve. If two values of Ri have been chosen, Rt is calculated as an average,
and D/d is also determined as an average of the parameters of the chosen theoretical
curves used in the interpretation.
If either the second device resistivity, (Ra(i=2)), Case aa), or the third device resistivity (R
a(i=3)), Case bb), are not available, the criteria for the determination of the invaded zone
resistivity, Ri, and the diameter of that zone, D, are changed as follows:
o aa). and D = LL=3 (in most cases LL=3=2.625 m);
o bb). and D= LL=2 (in most cases LL=2=1.05 m);
The so-called 'annulus' occurs only when the formation contains oil in addition to
formation water. In the pore space, formation water is being displaced in preference to oil
when mud filtrate invasion is taking place. In this case, low values of the apparent
resistivity ratios or can be observed. If the difference in apparent
resistivity ratio between point 4 and point 5 is less then 20% then point 4 is taken into

interpretation. If the difference between apparent resistivities of points 3 and 5 is also less
then 20%, point 3 is included in the interpretation. In the opposite cases the mentioned
points are excluded from the interpretation. These considerations are correct only in the
case of decreasing mud filtrate invasion. An annulus is considered only when:
. If one of these devices is unavailable, the

assumptions mentioned are not applicable and an annulus is not taken into consideration.
If the apparent resistivity of the longest devices (LL(4) or LL(5)) was not recorded, the
interpreting procedure (fitting of the measured points to the theoretical curves) uses the
points from devices LL(2), LL(3) and LL(4) or LL(2), LL(3) and LL(5) and the module of the
theoretical curve, , yields the resistivity of the virgin zone.
2.3 Determination of the Diameter of the Flushed Zone and the Invaded Zone
It has been assumed that the shortest Lateral device delivers the information for the flushed zone.
Bearing in mind the tool geometry, the diameter of this zone is considered to be equal to the
length of the shortest device (in most cases 0.55m). If there is no log for the shortest device the
parameters for the flushed zone are not determined.
The diameter of the invaded zone is obtained automatically during the interpretation using
three-layer theoretical curves.
If the second (next longer) device has not been run, the diameter of an invaded zone is set equal
to the length of the third one, or, conversely, if the third device has not been run, the diameter of
the invaded zone is equal to the length of the second device.
2.4. Interpretation in "Thin" Beds, h/d < 32

The interpretation of the "thin" beds is based on the set of curves derived using an analog model
and presented by Pierkov9, for ratios h/d =1,, 24 and on the results of numerical modelling for
h/d=32, for the full set of ratios Rt/Rm and Rs/Rm. For all theoretical curves the assumption is
made that the parameters characterizing layers and beds are constant.
To perform the interpretation, the following parameters are chosen using the model of a two-layer
geological formation without invaded zone:
Maximum or minimum apparent resistivity, divided by mud resistivity at formation

temperature, Ra/Rm,
Thickness of the selected bed relative to borehole diameter, h/d,

Resistivity of adjacent beds, also Normalized by the mud resistivity, Rs/Rm.
2.5 Selection of the Theoretical Curves
For each interpreted bed, after determining the parameters: named now and
h/d, named now , the four families of theoretical curves: with
the closest parameters: and , are selected. The interpretation is performed
independently for each curve family and, at the end, a weighted average of the results is
calculated.

2.6 Determination of the Weights for the Four Families of Theoretical Curves
The factors and are the selected parameters for the families of the theoretical
curves and they differ from the measured ones, and . A numerical measure
of this difference for each family is defined as follows:
(
Equation 4)
where: = the resistivity of an adjacent bed in the nomogram for a given model,
= the resistivity of an adjacent bed read from the measured resistivity curve.
Similar nomenclature is assumed for the thickness h. Weights are in the range [0-1]. If a weight is
less then 0.25, the relevant family is not included in the interpretation. It is only possible to take a
single curve family into the next stages.
2.7 Correction for Borehole and Shoulder Bed Effects
Corrections are made for each apparent resistivity in the selected bed on the basis of the curve
recorded by each device. The outcome is the result of reading the module
of the theoretical two-layer curve in the family described by Rs/Rm and h/d closest to the
measured point. The value of derived in this way is the basis for the next steps in
processing.
2.8 Resistivity of the Virgin Zone
According to the approach proposed by Pierkov9, the true resistivity of the virgin zone is
determined on the basis of the apparent resistivity of the curve measured with the longest device,
. In the interpretation procedure presented here, the true resistivity is the
weighted average of the values of taken from the four (or less) families of
curves included. Before determining true resistivity Rt, new weights have to be calculated:
(
Equation 5)
where:
N = the number of families of the theoretical curves fulfilling the previous criterion of
. Resistivity of the virgin zone is then calculated according to the equation:
(Equation 6)

Double calculation of the weights (wi and Wi) follows naturally from their definitions. The sum of
the weights at each level must be equal to unity. Calculation of the true resistivity of the virgin
zone according to Equation 6 requires the determination of new weights Wi.
When there is only the resistivity curve recorded by the shorter LL(4) device, becomes
the basis for the determination of Rt.
2.9 Resistivity and Diameter of the Invaded Zone
The curves for the two-layer model are the basis for the determination of the diameter of the
invaded zone.
When five apparent resistivities, recorded by five devices with different radii of investigation and
corrected for borehole and adjacent beds are available, the interpreter proceeds as follows,
obtaining the following results:
2.9.1 Resistivity, Rx0, and diameter, Dx0, of the flushed zone, equal to and LL(1)
respectively;
2.9.2 If two short device curves give similar values of (within 20%) and the third
one gives a value that is distinctly different (the difference between the third and an
average of the first two first higher than 20% of the average) the calculation
proceeds as follows:
2.9.2.1 Determine the average of the resistivities of the two first devices
average1,
2.9.2.2 Determine the average of the resistivity of the third device and the average1
average2,
2.9.2.3 If (average2- average1)/ average1<35%, the third device is considered to

still show the resistivity of the invaded zone, and Ri is calculated as follows:
, and the diameter of the invaded zone D is set to

be equal to LL(3) (in many cases 2.625 m),
2.9.2.4 If (average2- average1)/ average1>35%, the third device indicates a

resistivity close to that of the virgin zone and Ri is calculated as follows:
and the diameter of the invaded zone is set equal to LL(2)

(in many cases 1.05 m),
2.9.3 If the first device resistivity differs by more then 20% from the resistivities of the
second and third (either greater or smaller), the resistivity of the invaded zone is
calculated as the average of the second and third device resistivity,
if the difference between them is not higher than 35%, in

other cases the resistivity of the invaded zone is set equal to the resistivity of the

second device, and the diameter, D, is to the LL(2).
2.9.4 If are similar for four devices, it means either; there is no invasion, or the
invasion is very deep. In this case Ri is calculated as an average of the four
resistivities, and the diameter of invasion in the same

sense as previously described does not exist. In the authors' experience, however, a
certain difference between resistivities Rx0, Ri and Rt can still exist despite previous
considerations and the assumption of no invasion. If this is the case the interpreter
should take into account following additional conditions:
2.9.4.1 If , D=Dx0=LL(1),
2.9.4.2 If not, D= LL(3).
2.10 If the shortest device (LL(1)) has not been run, resistivity Rx0, and the diameter Dx0, of the
flushed zone are not determined. This case is similar to that discussed in point 3.5.4.1,
only with D=LL(2).
2.11 If the second device (LL(2)) has not been run, the assumption for all the cases discussed
above is that the resistivity of the invaded zone equals the resistivity shown by the curve of
the third device, , and the diameter of the invaded zone equals the
length of this device, D=LL(3).
2.12 If the third device (LL(3)) has not been run, in all the cases discussed above the resistivity
of the invaded zone equals the resistivity shown by the curve of the second device,
, and the diameter of the invaded zone equals the length of the
second device, D=LL(2). In the case discussed in point 3.5.4.2 we have D=LL(4).
3. LATERAL AND NORMAL CURVES
3.1 Continuous Interpretation with a Combined Set of Lateral and Normal Logs
The method of resistivity interpretation with combined Lateral and Normal curves is different from
that using only Lateral curves. There is no need to identify and pick beds and the interpretation is
performed continuously, i.e. at each depth point.
In the interpretation, the parameters obtained from four (or three) resistivity logs are used
simultaneously. For each combination of apparent resistivities (Lateral and Normal logs) true
resistivities for all zones (flushed, invaded and virgin) are calculated. The theoretical curves for
two- and three-layer models of the formation are also obtained from Alpin's2 solutions for the
Lateral devices:
and for the Normal devices:

All assumptions made for this approach are also satisfied.
Apparent resistivities are sampled at each depth from all curves in the combined Lateral-Normal
set:
They are corrected for the influence of the borehole (mud resistivity at formation temperature and
borehole diameter) and then form the basis of Alpin's2 theoretical two-layer curves. Four
independent, corrected resistivities are thus obtained:
and .
As in the case of the Lateral curve interpretation and with the same procedures, the corrected
resistivities are expressed as Normalized with the mud resistivity.
3.2 Resistivity and Diameter of the Flushed Zone
The assumption is made, that the short Normal device (length=LN1) delivers the resistivity of the
flushed zone, . According to the model of the Normal tool, the radius of investigation
of a Normal device is taken as being equal to the double of its length, for standard muds with
resistivity 2-10 times greater than formation water resistivity (Chapellier4 1992). In this procedure
it is assumed that Dx0 is a little less then 2LN1 and is taken to be 90% of the double length of the
short Normal, 2LN(1).
3.3 Resistivity and Diameter of the Invaded Zone

The resistivity of the invaded zone, Ri, is calculated as the average of the resistivities of the two
Normal devices: .
The diameter of the invaded zone, D, is obtained automatically from the average of the
parameters in the families of curves selected for the computation of Fmin , as shown in Section
4.3 here below.
3.4 Resistivity of the Virgin Zone
The resistivity of the virgin zone is calculated on the basis of the resistivity ratios used to calculate
the function F in Equation 7, below. The assumption here is that two short devices with small
radius of investigation deliver the resistivity of the invaded zone (including the flushed zone), while
two longer devices with greater radius of investigation deliver the resistivity of the virgin zone.
This is shown schematically in Figure 6. On the background of the family of the theoretical
two-layer curves, two lines have been drawn for LL1 and LL2 (Lateral) and for LN1 and LN2 (Normal)
and they intersect all theoretical curves in the points with parameters for all ratios Ri
/Rm and D/d.

For each depth level the function F can now be calculated as follows:
(Equation 7)
where:
and

Everywhere in Equation 7 the index meas(i) means the ratio calculated for the measured
resistivities. Resistivity values used in the ratios with index theor(i) have been read from the
theoretical curves. The complete set of four ratios is shown above, but in the calculation of
function F only three of them are involved, as shown in Equation 7. The factors with index meas(4)
and theor(4) are only used in the case when the short Normal device LN1 has not been run.
For each family of the theoretical curves with given parameters
and D/d the individual values for are taken on the vertical lines for L/d equal to LN1
/d, LN2/d for the Normal devices and on the vertical lines for LL1/d and LL2/d for the Lateral
devices. Values of are determined in most cases by suitable interpolation between
neighboring curves. In familiar fashion, the families of theoretical curves defined by the
parameters and D/d, for which function F has the minimum value Fmin has been retained.
They are the basis for the calculation of Rt and the final Rt value is calculated from the average of
the three values obtained for the Lateral resistivities and for the longer Normal resistivity.
In order to shorten the processing time of the interpretation, the given parameters Ri/Rm and D/d
obtained from the resistivities of Normal devices have been used directly as keys for the selection
of the nearest families of theoretical three-layer curves. Also, the F function is calculated for
limited group of parameters and not for the entire possible set.
3.5 Absence of One Resistivity Curve
In the interpretation procedure there are provisions for such cases, when we have the minimum of
three resistivity logs. In these cases the F function can still be calculated with the relevant ratios
according to measured logs available.
3.5.1 When the second Normal device has not been run, only Rx0 is obtained and the
assumption is made that .

3.5.2 When the shortest Normal device has not been run, the resistivity of the flushed zone
is not determined. Ri is calculated only on the basis of .
3.6 Additional Boundary Condition
When a measured point lies outside the space of the calculated theoretical curves, it is assumed
that Rt/Rm =1000 if it is above or Rt/Rm=0.5 if it is below.
In either case there is no differentiation between Dx0 and D.
4. REFERENCES



Section
23
Multi-Well
Senergy Multi-Well 1413
23 Multi-Well
To handle large multi-well projects within IP a number of modules have been developed to make
the task easier. These modules can be accessed from this menu or from some of the other main
menu items as shown below.
'Manage Multi-Well Header Info.'. This module can also be accessed from within the '
Well' 'Multi-Well Options' menu.
'Manage Multi-Well Curve Sets'. This module can also be accessed from within the '
'Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers'. This module can also be accessed from within the
'Well' 'Multi-Well Options' menu.
'Manage Multi-Well Zones/Tops'. This module can also be accessed from within the '
'Multi-well Parameter Distribution'.
'Multi-Well Batch Operation'.
'Multi-Well Change Parameters'.
'Multi-Well Curve Statistics'. This module can also be accessed from within the 'View'
menu.
'Multi-Well Correlation Viewer'. This module can also be accessed from within the '
View' menu.
'Multi Well Cutoff and Summation'. This module can also be accessed from within the '
Interpretation' menu.
Section 23. Multi-Well :

23.1 Multi-Well Parameter Distribution

The 'Multi-well Parameter Distribution' module is used in a multi-well 'field-type' interpretation. It
is used to copy 'Parameter Sets' from one well to other wells in the same project. The correct
input and output curves should be created and the user can check to see if the input curves have
been correctly chosen. At the same time as copying the parameters, the Zone Tops for each '
Parameter Set' are changed to reflect the zone tops in the other wells. NOTE: If zones have been
locked in a well's Parameter Set which is then subsequently distributed to other wells then the
locked zones will appear in the other wells Parameter Sets.
A typical workflow for a multi-well field study could be as follows :
The user sets the well focus to the well with the interpreted 'Parameter Sets' and then starts the '
Parameter Distribution' module. The following window will appear.
Section 23.1 Multi-Well : Multi-Well Parameter Distribution


The user should select the multi-well 'Zone /Tops' Set that is common to all wells, from the '
Common Tops/Zones set' drop-down list box. These zones do not have to be the same as the
interpretation parameter zones. If this box is left 'blank' then the Zones Sets will still be copied to
the user-selected wells but the zone tops depths will remain the same as in the original well.
'Wells to Populate'. The user selects the wells into which to copy the selected '
Parameter Sets'.
'Tops/Zones sets to distribute'. The user selects the 'Parameter Sets' from the current
well to copy to the other wells. The 'Clay Volume', 'Porosity / Sw' and 'cut-off' are the
three primary interpretation 'Parameter Sets'.
The 'Select All' and 'Select None' buttons, located beneath the 'Wells to Populate' list
enable you to toggle between selecting or de-selecting all wells in the list.
'Select - Well List' allows the user to use a previously created well list to 'check' the '
Wells to Populate' boxes.
The 'Select All' button, located beneath the 'Tops/Zones sets to distribute' list, if
'clicked', will automatically select all the listed 'Parameter Sets'. Use the 'Select None'
button to deselect all the Sets.
'Copy using zone names' - If 'checked', will allow the user to more-accurately
distribute 'Parameter Sets' to multiple wells in an IP project or to distribute parameters
to multiple penetrations of reservoir zones in a single horizontal well. NOTE: this is a
special case as the user is required to be more rigorous in setting up the zones in the
interpretation modules. It is only useful if the names of all zones are defined in all the
Sets being distributed and in the common 'Tops Set'.
The 'Run' button will distribute the 'Parameter Sets'. The user will be asked to confirm
whether or not to overwrite existing Sets.
The following is an illustration of how the tops are correlated between the common 'Parameter
Sets' and the distributed Sets.

To illustrate the usage of the 'Copy using zone names' option further see the following example
below:
In this example there are three wells B7, B1 and B4. B7 is the 'active' well. "Final Tops" is the
common 'Tops Set'. The user wants to distribute the 'Tops Set' "Test" to wells B1 and B4.
NOTE: the 'Tops Set' "Test" has zone names and depth intervals that are not found in any Set
within the wells B1 and B4. If the parameter distribution is performed with the 'Copy using zone
names' 'un-checked' then a "Test" 'Tops Set' is created in wells B1 and B4. The depth intervals
for each zone are realigned using the common 'Tops Set' as a guide.
This method does not require that the zones in the parameter Sets being copied have the same
top and bottom depths or have the same number of zones as the common 'Tops Set'. This gives
this method the advantage of allowing interpretation Sets with different zonation schemes to be
moved from well to well with their depth intervals being realigned using a different zonation
scheme.

If this procedure is now repeated but with the 'Copy using zone names' 'checked' then an Error
message will appear informing the user that the well B1 does not have any zone names in
common with the "Test" 'Tops Set'. The user can either remove the well or select a Set (to be
distributed) that does have similar zone names to the common Set or uncheck the 'Copy using
zone names' box.

So this option is only really useful if all zones are named consistently between wells. If this is done
then it is possible to have a base vertical well interpretation parameter Set being copied to a
horizontal well with repeat zones (named the same).
If an interpretation 'Parameter Set' is selected in the 'Top/Zones sets to distribute' list then a
tab will appear with the name of the interpretation module. This allows the user to look through all

the wells and check that the 'Input Curves' for that module have the correct curves assigned to
them. Currently, the list of 'Input Curves' includes all of the curves in the interpretation module
whether they are used in the interpretation or not. The screenshot below illustrates this point.


When the 'Distribute' button is 'clicked' a number of 'Confirm' messages may appear depending
on the individual database circumstances. If, as in the case illustrated above, there are missing
curves then the following message will appear:
If the user answers 'Yes' to this then they are taken back to the 'Clay Volume' tab of the '
Parameter Distribution' module and can type in a curve name or select a curve name from the
drop down lists for the missing curves. If, however, they are quite happy that all the wells have the
correct curves for the module then the user should select 'No' or 'No to All'. If the user answers '
No to All' then all the '{Try to populate on run}' messages disappear. As the 'Clay Volume'
module is normally the first module to be run in a petrophysical analysis the input curves are not
dependant on another module so there isn't a chance of missing curves being populated on run.
However, for the 'Porosity and Water Saturation' and 'Cutoff and Summation' modules if these
have missing curves, due to the modules not previously being run, then the curves will be filled in
as they are created.
The module then checks to see if the wells have the 'Clay Volume' parameter Set already and if
they do then the following message will appear:
This gives the user the chance to remove a well that they don't want the 'Clay Volume' parameter
Set replacing in.
In the following example the 'Clay Volume' parameters are being distributed from well A1 to wells
A2, A3, A4, A6 and A7. The 'Distribute and Re-run Analysis' button is 'clicked'.

The reason why the analysis failed in well A3 was because there wasn't a neutron curve available
in that well. The user had the chance to correct this when they received the second 'Confirm'
message but chose to ignore it and attempted to run the analysis. To avoid this type of scenario
the user could have removed the well from the 'Parameter Distribution' module or furnished a
neutron curve for the well or changed the 'Clay Volume Analysis' in well A1 to use a Double Clay
Indicator of Density and Sonic instead of Density and Neutron.
The output curves for each well can be the same as those in the 'Parameter Set' being
distributed. However, within the module there is the functionality to create new Sets and change
the depths and step of the output Set.
In the example below the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module has been run on well A1 with the
output curves going into a Set called "O" (Output). To distribute this 'Parameter Set' to wells A2,
A3 and A4 the 'Parameter Distribution' module is opened. As well as the 'Clay Volume' tab
there is now an 'Output Sets' tab.

The 'Output Sets' tab allows the user to quickly see which wells have the same output Set as the
in-focus well.
By 'clicking' on a yellow cell, i.e. a well that has the output Set already in it, the 'Well Set Depths
Editor' is opened. The user can then change the output Set depth interval, the step and the units
of that output Set.
If the well does not have an output Set of the same name as the in-focus well's 'Parameter Set'
then this Set will be created in the well when the 'Distribute' button is 'clicked'. The top and
bottom depths and step for the created output Set will be taken from that well's 'Default' Set. This
can subsequently be changed by going back to the 'Output Sets' tab and clicking on the now
yellow cell to bring up the 'Well Set Depths Editor'.

If the 'Mineral Solver' 'Parameter Set' is chosen to be distributed then the trend curves as well as
the input curves for each model appear in the 'MinSolve Interp' tab.


23.2 Multi-Well Batch Operation

The 'Multi-Well Batch Operation' module is used to run multiple IP module scripts, on one or
more wells, in a single 'batch' procedure. The module is accessed from the main 'Multi-Well'
menu 'Multi-Well Batch Operation'.
Well Selection List

'Loaded Wells' - If this option is chosen then by clicking in a blank row in the 'Wells'
panel a well name can be chosen from the drop-down well list. Alternatively, all the wells
currently loaded in memory and those not loaded can be added to the list
simultaneously, by clicking on the 'Wells' panel title.
Section 23.2 Multi-Well : Multi-Well Batch Operation

'All Database Wells' - If this option is chosen then only those wells which have been
saved to memory will be shown. When this option is chosen the 'Display with Well
Name' panel becomes 'active'.
Display with Well name

There are a number of choices from which the user can choose to include a well comment or API
number or UWI with the well name. This should make it easier for the user to distinguish wells.
'None'
'Well Comment'
'API number'
'UWI'
NOTE: if a selection other than 'None' has been made, the user won't see any change to the well
name until the 'Wells' column header is 'clicked' or the individual well is reselected from the
drop-down list within the 'Wells' column.
The 'Select - Well List' button allows the user to utilize the 'Well List' functionality to select and
load sub-sets of database wells.
The 'Batch Operation' Panel

The 'Batch Operation' panel contains 6 columns; 'Use', 'Module', 'Parameter File Name / Set
Name', 'Output Set', 'Top Dep' and 'Bot Dep'.
The 'Use' column lets the user select which modules are to be run in the batch process.
To select / de-select individual modules to run in the batch process, the user should 'tick'
the 'Use' cell for that module. Clicking on the 'Use' column title, 'toggles' all module
rows that have been filled in, between 'selected' ('checked') and 'de-selected'
('un-checked') modes.
The 'Module' options for each line can be selected from the drop-down menu.

Click in the first empty 'Module' cell to see the full drop-down list of options. as illustrated above.
The small zone icon in front of some of the modules indicates that in these modules, if selected,
the user can define the interval over which the module will run. For the other modules the interval
over which they will run has been defined within the module. If the user wants to change the
interval then they would have to go into the module, select the depths, run the module and then
select it within the Batch Operation module.
NOTE: The shown list includes User Programs which may not be available to every IP user.
The following modules can be run in the batch process. NOTE: the text in parentheses "()" at the
end of each line in the following list is the file extension that IP uses to identify different Set types
when they have been saved externally as disk files:
Formula : User Formula module (.frm)

Multi-Line Formula : Multi-Line Formula module (.mlf)
Temperature : Temperature Gradient module (.tem)
ZoneCurves : Zones to Curves. Converts zone numbers into a 'Flag' curve or
Interpretation module parameters, for example 'Gr Clay', to a
continuous curve. Or, where a Tops Set has been set up to define a 'Flag' curve, the curve
is created using Zone Names and an associated user-selected flag value (.ztc).
Filter : Filter module. Filters log curves (.flt)
Basic Log Func : Basic Log Functions module. One or more of the function tabs can
be run (.blc)

Fill Data gaps : Fill Data Gaps module (.fdg)

Basic Log Anal : Basic Log Analysis module. One or more of the calculation tabs can
be run (.set)
Clay Volume : Clay Volume Interpretation module (.set)
Porosity Sw : Phi /Sw interpretation module (.set)
Mineral Solver : Mineral Solver module (.set)
Cutoff : Cut-off and Summation module (.set)
UserPrograms : Any available user program ('Archie', 'Differentiate', 'Normalize
Array', etc....) (UsrProg..)
The modules that are to be run in the batch process for the selected list of wells must have saved
Parameter Sets. Parameter Sets are saved from within the actual interpretation modules that
have been run on individual wells. The user can see them by using the 'Load / Save Parameter
Sets' button 'Save to Database' or 'Save to Disk File' buttons in each module. See '
Parameter Set Management' for more details.
The 'Parameter File Name / Set Name' column - The user adds the Parameter Set
name to the data 'grid'. Zoneable Parameter Sets, generated by the interpretation
modules, can either be saved 'internally' within the IP database, or as 'external' (.set)
files in individual well subdirectories. 'Internal' parameter sets are distinguished by
having a grey background colour and a name without any file path prefix. 'External'
parameter sets are distinguished by containing a full file path and file name. NOTE: In
the example shown below, the 'Clay Volume' parameter Set is an 'internal' set ("Clay")
and the 'Porosity / Water Saturation' parameter set ("PhiSw.set") is an 'external'
parameter set.
See 'Parameter Set Management' for more details. The 'Browse' buttons can be used to find
and select the required 'external' file names (.set, .frm, .mlf, etc...). When an Interpretation
module is selected from the list e.g. 'Clay Volume', the 'Parameter File Name / Set Name' cell in
that row of the grid will default to pick up the 'internal' Parameter Set 'type' for the selected
module. To choose another, 'external' Set, click the 'Browse' button to search for and load an
appropriate Parameter Set file (file extension is '.set').
'Output Set' column - this allows the user to select a Set into which the output curves
from the selected module will be output to. The 'Module Set' is the output Set of the
selected module. The output Set can be different to the Module Set of the module. So if
the user decides to run the Clay Volume module on a number of wells the user can
output the results of the Clay Volume module to a different Set than the Clay Volume
Parameter Set (Module Set) which is defined within the module. Output Sets can be
selected from the drop-down list of all available Sets.

'Top Dep' / 'Bot Dep' column - this allows the user to define the depths over which a
module will be run. Depths can either be typed directly into the 'Top Dep' / 'Bot Dep'
columns or can be selected using the symbol. 'Clicking' on this opens the 'Select
Zone Depths' dialogue box. Here the user can select Top Sets and individual zones.
These can be displayed within the 'Multi-Well Batch Operation' module as either
depths or zones using the 'Return' radio buttons.

The modules will be run in the order they are displayed (from top to bottom) in the window.
Therefore, if one module depends on the results of another, it will be important that the running
order in the list is correct. The order the modules are run in can be re-arranged by clicking in the
grey column to the left of the 'Use' column and dragging a row up or down to another position.
Curve Sets
If a Set name is not available in the drop-down list then 'clicking' the 'Add Set' button will launch
the 'Add Set Names' dialog which allows the user to create a new Set name which will appear in
all the in-memory wells.
'Separate Parameter Set per Well' - This check box has the following functions:
If not 'checked' - the program will search for the specific Parameter Set /
Formula / User Program that is displayed in the 'Parameter File Name / Set
Name' column and these Parameter Sets / Formulae / User Programs will be run
on all wells in the Well list, when the 'Run' button is clicked.
If 'checked' - the program will search the WELL**** subdirectories of each well
in the well list for the particular Parameter Set / Formula / User Program names
set up in the 'Module' list. This gives the user the ability, for example, to call
slightly different user formulae for different wells (as long as the user formulae
have the same name) or to select different interpretation Parameter Sets for
individual wells (as long as they are named consistently). The 'Parameter File
Name / Set Name' column display will change to show the Parameter Set /

formula name only, without the full directory path extension. When the 'Run'
button is clicked, the 'Batch Operation Process Log' panel in the lower part of
the window will indicate whether a Module has been run successfully in a well or
an error message will be displayed where a Parameter Set / Formula does not
exist.
'Set Path' button : The user can use this button to fully specify the directory path of each
of the Modules called in the 'Multi-Well Batch' operation. This is useful if several users
need to run the same multi-well batch files, since the full file location of each Set/
Formula/User Program is saved into the Batch (.fbt) file.
'Clicking' the 'Run' button will start the batch processing operation. The process is run by loading
the saved Parameter Set into the module and executing it. As the batch operation executes, a
scrolling information 'log' will be visible in the 'Batch Operation Process Log' text panel at the
bottom of the window. Any errors found while running the module will stop the batch process and
the following 'Confirm' dialog will appear along with the error message in the module :
The user will be prompted to 'Continue with the batch items ?'. The user has three choices:
1. If the user chooses 'Yes', to continue with the process, then the 'Confirm' dialog will be
closed and the rest of the batch process will continue, step by step, for every well in the
routine. Choosing this option then requires the user to confirm 'Yes' to every error that is
flagged in the process log window. This could be a laborious task if there are tens or
even hundreds of wells in the batch operation. The alternative in such a situation is to
click the 'Yes to All' button (See below).
2. If the user chooses 'No', the batch process will stop. The 'Multi-Well Batch Operation'
window will stay open but the user can try to correct the errors in the 'failed' well, before
re-running the batch operation. NOTE: Any modules showing errors in the information
window will not have been run.
3. Clicking the 'Yes to All' button will continue to run the selected modules and will simply
provide error information on failed processes. The batch process will not stop at each
'failure' but will continue to run all selected modules on all wells in the well list. When
the batch operation has finished, the user can then examine the 'Batch Operation
Process Log', analyse the failures and correct the modules, re-selecting only the 'failed'
wells and re-run the batch routine.
It is possible to cancel a running Multi-Well Batch operation by 'clicking' on the 'Cancel' button.

The 'Batch Operation Process Log' can be copied to a text file by right-mouse-clicking on the
information window to launch the 'Select All' / 'Copy' / 'Delete All' dialog.
'Select All' - selects all the text in the process log

'Copy' - copies the selected text into the Windows clipboard
'Delete All' - clears all text from the Process Log information window.
The selected messages will be copied to the clipboard and can be pasted into another
application.
The 'Save' button - allows the user to save a batch operation to a text (.fbt) file.
The 'Load' button - allows the user to re-load a batch process from a saved (.fbt) file.
The 'Clear All' button - allows the user to clear both the selected 'Wells' and the '
Modules' from the Batch Operation interface.
The 'Clear Wells' button - allows the user to clear the 'Wells' panel of all entries.

23.3 Multi-Well Change Parameters

The 'Multi-Well Change Parameters' module allows the user to change one or more parameters
in an interpretation module and (optionally) to re-run the analysis with the new parameter(s). This
can be useful if a field-wide interpretation has been made and new data has been acquired (for
example a new Rw value, or a different cementation factor 'm') that means changing an
interpretation parameter in all wells in the Field.
The module comprises 2 tabbed screens. The 'Wells' tab allows the user to select / deselect
wells to make changes to. The 'Parameters' tab allows the user to set up the 'Parameter Sets'
and petrophysical parameters that are to be changed in all the selected wells.
1. On the 'Wells' tab the user selects the wells to work on , either by 'ticking' individual well
entries or by clicking the 'Select All' button which will 'tick' all in-memory wells. The '
Un-Select All' button will remove any 'ticks' from the selected wells. The 'Select - Well
List' allows the user to select wells using a previously created well list. When a '
Parameter Set' is selected, any well that does not contain that particular Set will be
'greyed out' on the 'Wells' tab.
2. On the 'Parameters' tab, select the 'Parameter Set' which includes the parameter that
is to be edited.
3. The 'Output Parameter' drop-down list will be populated with all the relevant
Parameters for that particular 'Parameter Set'. The values for the selected parameter will
be displayed in the 'grid' panel, organized by zone (rows) and by well (columns). The
Section 23.3 Multi-Well : Multi-Well Change Parameters

program will try to set all zones with the same 'Zone name' on the same line, if no zone
names have been used, then the zones will be listed in increasing depth order.
Petrophysical parameter values can be edited in two ways:
1. One at a time - by manually changing each value in the grid by typing the value in or by
selecting a curve from the drop-down list,
2. collectively - by 'clicking' in a row or column header, which will turn green (indicating a
column or row edit). In this mode, changing one value in the selected row or column will

automatically change all the values in that row or column to the selected value. If a curve
has been selected rather than a value the curve will be selected for all rows or columns.
These actions are illustrated below:
Column Edit:
Row Edit:
3. If all values of a parameter need to be changed in all zones and all wells then edit the
value in the 'New Value' box and click the 'Apply to All Wells All Zones' button. For
flag-type parameters ('yes' / 'no'), for example, 'GR Use', 'OBM?', 'N/D Use', the check
box to the left of the 'New Value' box is activated and can be used to switch 'on' or 'off' the
selected flag.


To Change a 'Flag Type' Parameter in all wells, all zones:
Multiple parameter values for the same 'Parameter Set' can be changed simultaneously. After
changing one parameter, select the second parameter and make the changes to that one.
Continue selecting parameters and making changes until finished. The parameters that have
been modified are listed in the panel in the top right hand corner of the window. Modifications are
not applied to the IP wells until the the 'OK' button or the 'Re-Run Analysis' button is clicked.
NOTE: If the user changes the 'Parameter Set' before clicking the 'OK' or 'Re-Run Analysis'
button, any modifications to the previously selected 'Parameter Set' will be lost.
The 'OK' button, when clicked, will make the changes to the selected parameters for each well.
Changes that are made are recorded in the message panel at the base of the window.

By right mouse button clicking in the message window box, the selected messages can be copied
to the clipboard for inclusion in a document, all messages can be deleted and all lines in the
dialog box can be selected. The message box size can be re-arranged by placing the cursor on
the grey area just above the box and then dragging the box to a different height.
The 'Re-Run Analysis' button, when clicked, will firstly save all parameter changes and then
re-run the analyses used by the 'Parameter Sets'. Results are reported in the message window.

Section
24
Tools
Senergy Tools 1443
24 Tools
The 'Tools' menu provides the user with the ability to manage certain 'Defaults' property files
associated with IP. The editable files include:
Curve type and Curve system parameters

Mineral Solver System and Mineral Solver Equations parameters
Crossplot Overlay Lines
Monte Carlo Error Analysis Parameters
Log measurement unit conversions for Caliper, Density and Sonic logs
Neutron Tool-Type set-up parameters
Other 'Tools' include the following:
Shading Types
Edit Global Sets
Edit Zone colours
Edit Dip Symbols
Edit Palettes
Edit Default Lithology
Edit Curve Aliasing
Set Default Units
Message Board
Program Protection
Options
Section 24. Tools :

24.1 System Defaults

IP 'System Defaults' settings are found in the 'Tools' Menu item. The purpose of the IP 'Default'
files is to provide the user with a mechanism to set up / edit / extend the functionality of some of
the modules in IP. The 'Defaults' files are ASCII text files which set up parameters, for example,
for the display characteristics for log curves when they are loaded into IP (CPARMDEF.PAR), or
for the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module, initializing parameters (MonteCarloDefaults.par).
A user may want to set up their own 'user' Defaults files or to add extra options into the existing IP
program Defaults files. The available operations are listed in the menu shown above. IP Defaults
files exist for the following:
Curve System Defaults (file - CPARMDEF.PAR). This file contains the IP program
default display characteristics (line colour, left and right curve display limits, Crossplot &
Histogram minimum and maximum scales) that are set for many common log curves
when they are loaded into an IP project/database. See the 'Edit Curve System
Defaults' section.
Curve Type Defaults (file - CurveType.opt). This file contains the list of generic curve
'Types' that IP uses to auto-select curves for some IP modules.See the 'Edit Curve
Types Defaults' section.
Curve Alias Defaults (file - CurveAlias.txt) This file is used to set up alternative 'Load'
names for logs being imported into IP. This is useful if you want log curves, from a
number of data sources & with different curve mnemonics, to be loaded into IP with a
common name. See the 'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' section.
Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults (file - MINDEF.PAR). This file contains the
default minerals and their properties for the Mineral Solver module. The user can add
extra minerals and their matrix properties to the table, or edit the properties of existing
minerals. See the 'Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Defaults' section.
Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults (file - MINEQDEF.PAR). This file contains
the mineral 'Equation' default settings for the Mineral Solver module. Any equation that
is selected in the 'Model' screen is set up according to the parameters in this file. New
equation types can be added to the list. See the 'Edit Mineral Solver Mineral
Equations' section.
Section 24.1 Tools : System Defaults

Senergy Tools 1445
Crossplot Overlays Setup File (file - Overlay_Files.ovl). This file contains the
descriptions and file names of all available Crossplot overlay line files. If the user
creates a new overlay file, the name must be added to this file in order for the new
overlay lines to be visible within IP, in the Overlay drop-down list in the Crossplot set-up
screen. See the 'Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File' section.
Monte Carlo Defaults (file - MonteCarloDefaults.par). This file contains the default
settings for the Monte Carlo Error Analysis module, including the parameters to be
included, the distribution types (Gaussian, Square , Triangular) and the high and low
shift values for each input curve or parameter. See the 'Edit Monte Carlo Defaults'
section.
Unit Conversions Defaults (file - UnitConversion.par). This file contains the list of
curve unit abbreviations that IP recognizes for Density, Sonic and Caliper logs and the
associated conversion factors from the input unit to gm/cc for Density, to uSec/ft for
Sonic and to inches for Caliper. The user can add extra 'recognized units', together with
their associated conversion factors to this file. See the 'Edit Unit Conversion Defaults'
section.
Neutron Tool Type Setup File (file - Neu_Parm_Files.neu). This file contains a list of
the logging service companies and the neutron tool look-up tables that are available in
IP. See the 'Edit neutron Tool Types Set-up File' section.
User-defined 'Default' files can be created and / or edited using the following options:
'Edit User Curve System Defaults'. This will create a file called
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR in the IP program directory if it does not already exist, or, if it
does exist, it will open the file for editing. The purpose of this file is to allow the user to
set up alternative curve display settings to those in the CPARMDEF.PAR file, without
altering the CPARMDEF.PAR file contents. For example, if the user wishes to change
the default curve colour for each possible Density curve (RHOB, ZDEN, RHOZ etc..) ,
you can create the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file, cut and paste the row entries for the
three curves from the CPARMDEF.PAR file into the '_USER.PAR' file and change the
'colour' setting for each row there. Save the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file. When you
next open IP and attempt to load one of the RHOB, RHOZ or ZDEN curves, IP will use
the entries in the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file in preference to the CPARMDEF.PAR
entries. See the 'Edit Curve System Defaults' section.
'Edit User Curve Type Defaults'. This will create a file called UserCurveType.opt in
the IP program directory if it does not already exist, or, if it does exist, it will open the file
for editing. The user can add their own curve 'Types' into this file. See the 'Edit Curve
Types Defaults' section.
[Note: When Corporate Folders is enabled all the text files listed are searched for in each folder in
turn from the top down]
'Program Level' and 'Project Level' Defaults

All the Defaults files listed above can be found in the IP program directory. These are the '
Program Level' Defaults files. Editing any of these files will mean that any changes made to the
files will be seen in any IP database that is opened using the current IP executable, when the
appropriate interpretation module is launched.
'Project Level' Defaults files are files that are created / stored in an IP 'Project' directory and will
only be called upon by IP when the user opens that particular project. Project Level Defaults allow
the user to customize some parameters, without affecting the IP 'Program Level' settings. The
Project Level Defaults will be used in preference to the IP Program Level Defaults, where they

exist. The Lithology.opt, DefaultUnits.opt and ShadeTypes.opt files are examples of 'Defaults'
files that can be saved at the Project level and allow the user to tailor colour tables, Lithology
shading and Density/Sonic/Caliper Curve settings on a project by project basis.
NOTE: if you have changed any Default files and you wish to keep your edited files when a new
version of IP is installed on your PC, remember to save the edited files in another folder/directory
before installing IP from the installation CD. Then copy your edited files back into the IP program
directory, overwriting the existing files.
24.1.1 Edit Curve System Defaults
The 'Edit Curve System Defaults' option allow the user to set the display properties of curves
when they are loaded to IP.
When a curve is loaded to the IP program, IP cross checks the loaded curve name against the file
'CPARMDEF.PAR', which is found in the IP Program directory. If the curve name is found, its
display properties (left / right scales, line colour, Lin/log scaling, histogram and Crossplot scaling)
will be set, based on the properties in the CPARMDEF.PAR file. The user can add new lines to
this file or change the existing settings for a particular curve or curves.
If a user is continuously finding that they are loading curves to IP whose names are not in the
CPARMDEF.PAR file, then they should add them into the file. This will save having to change the
curve properties manually every time the curves are loaded.
The 'Edit User Curve System Defaults' option allows the user further flexibility in setting curve
display criteria. The user can copy text lines from the existing CPARMDEF.PAR file into this file (
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR) and set up line thickness, colour etc... for each curve. When IP is next
launched, the two files CPARMDEF.PAR and CPARMDEF_USER.PAR are merged, with the
curve display criteria from the _USER file taking precedence over the CPARMDEF.PAR file. This
allows the user to perform curve system edits, without physically editing the CPARMDEF.PAR
file.
Alternatively, when curves have been loaded into IP, the user can use the 'Manage Curve
Headers' module to pass new curve names and their display parameters to the
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file. This is performed by 'right-mouse clicking' in the 'In Name'
column, in the appropriate row of the curve grid. Two options will be launched in a new window:

Senergy Tools 1447
'Add Curve Type to file' will append the selected Curve Type details to the text file
UserCurveTypes.opt, which is created in the IP program directory the first time this option is
chosen. The new Curve Type is added to this file and subsequent additions are appended to the
file contents.
'Add Curve Properties to file' will append the selected curve row display properties to the
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file.
The menu items are simply shortcuts to editing the files. The editing is performed using Windows
Notepad. If you are working on a single monitor PC or laptop and you wish to edit this file using
the WINDOWS Notepad, in Notepad select the 'Format' menu item and switch off (un'check') the
'Word Wrap' feature to activate the horizontal scroll bar to be able to see all the entries in the file.
24.1.2 Edit Curve Types Defaults
The 'Edit Curve Types Defaults' menu item provide a shortcut to the file CurveType.opt located
in the IP program directory.
Curve Types are used in IP to help with the auto-selection / 'aliasing' of curves used in some
interpretation modules. On loading curves, the user can choose to fill in the 'Curve Type' cell in
the load 'grid'. Alternatively, 'Curve Type' can be filled in later, in the Manage Curve Headers
display. For example, a curve RHOB would be loaded as type Density, a curve GR as type
GammaRay.
If the user loads curve data into a well and wishes to add a new 'Curve Type' for a particular
curve to IP, he can do so using the 'Edit / List Well Curve headers' module. The user types a '
Curve Type' name in the 'Curve Type' column. Then, by 'right clicking' in the 'In Name' column
of the appropriate row, two options are available:

The first time the 'Add Curve Type to file' is run, a blank text file UserCurveTypes.opt is
created in the IP program directory. The new 'Curve Type' is added to this file. Subsequent
additions are appended to this file.
24.1.3 Edit Curve Alias Defaults

The 'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' menu item allows the user to set up a default set of 'Curve Alias'
names, which will be interrogated every time the user selects a LAS, LIS or DLIS formatted file to
load into IP using the 'Load Data' modules. If an input curve has an 'alias' defined in the
CurveAlias.txt file, found in the IP program directory, that 'alias' name will appear as the 'In
Name' column entry in the 'Load Data' grid and the curve will be loaded to IP using the 'alias'
name.
This 'Curve Alias' file is particularly useful if the user is loading curves from a number of different
service company data files and wishes curves in IP to be named consistently, regardless of data
source.
The 'Curve Alias' defaults file can also be used in the 'LAS Batch Load' module as a type of 'm
ask' file. The CurveAlias.txt file is used automatically by the IP program and does not have to be
manually selected for use. Input curves from the external LAS file will be loaded according to any
aliases that have been set up in the 'Curve Alias' file. Unlike a conventional 'mask' file however,
all other curves in the external LAS files will be loaded to IP using their default 'external' name (a '
mask' file loads only those curves listed in it).
Selecting the 'Edit Curve Alias Defaults' option launches the WINDOWS 'Notepad' application
with the CurveAlias.txt file loaded into it. The file format is very simple and consists of pairs of
curve names that should be 'linked', one pair per line in the file. The following characters are
acceptable to separate the 'external file' name from the 'IP load' name: comma, space, tab and
semicolon. An example 'alias' file is given below.
$ 'Curve Alias Defaults' file
$ Curve name order is as shown with 'external curve name' first,
followed by 'IP Alias name'.
$ Curve name should be separated by a space, tab, comma or semicolon
character.
LLD2 <space> LLD
MSFL1 <tab> MSFLC
PHICORE2; PHICORE

Senergy Tools 1449
RHOB1, RHOB
The 'Curve Alias file name' box within the 'LAS Batch Load' module must contain the valid
mask file name if the 'Use Mask to select curves' box has been 'checked'. The 'Edit Mask File'
button can be used to create or browse to the correct file name.
For information on the 'Curve Aliasing' module, which is a separate module to this and relates
with how curves are handled within modules rather than in the initial loading of curves, then follow
the link.
24.1.4 Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults
The 'Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults' option allows the user to set up the default
minerals for the 'Mineral Solver' probabilistic model.
The button is a shortcut key to a text editor that opens the MinDef.par file. This file contains the
default mineral parameters for the 'Mineral Solver' module.
If you are working on a single monitor PC or laptop and you wish to edit this file using the
WINDOWS Notepad, in Notepad select the 'Format' menu item and switch off (un'check') the
'Word Wrap' feature to activate the horizontal scroll bar.
24.1.5 Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equations Defaults
The 'Edit Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults' option allows the user to set up the Mineral
Equation defaults for the 'Mineral Solver' probabilistic model.
The button is a shortcut key to the WINDOWS 'Notepad' that opens the MinEqDef.par file. This
file contains the mineral equation parameters for the 'Mineral Solver' module. Parameters can
be added / changed by the user.
'Word Wrap' feature to activate the horizontal scroll bar this makes it easier to see the format of
the file.

24.1.6 Edit Crossplot Overlay Set-up File
The 'Edit Crossplot Overlays setup file' menu item provides a shortcut to the file
Overlay_Files.ovl. This file contains the names and descriptions of available crossplot overlay
lines. The user can edit this file to add new overlay line file names that can be used within IP.
See Creating Crossplot Overlay Files for more details.
24.1.7 Edit Monte Carlo Defaults
The 'Edit Monte Carlo Defaults' menu item provides a shortcut to the file
MonteCarloDefaults.par. This file contains the defaults for the Monte Carlo Error Analysis
module.
'Word Wrap' feature to activate the horizontal scroll bar. This makes it easier to see the format of
the file.
24.1.8 Edit Unit Conversions Defaults
The IP program works with Density, Sonic and Caliper log curves defined in units of 'grams per
cubic centimetre', 'microseconds per foot' and 'inches', respectively.
The 'Edit Unit Conversions defaults' menu item provides a shortcut to the file
UnitsConversion.par which contains the list of 'units' that IP recognizes for Sonic, Density and
caliper curves and the conversion factors from the entered units to the 'defaults' described above.
The user can edit the file to add other units for these types of curves, if available.

Senergy Tools 1451
24.1.9 Edit Neutron Tool Types set-up File
The 'Edit Neutron tool types setup file' menu item provides a shortcut to the file
Neu_Parm_Files.neu. This file contains a list of Logging companies and neutron tool types for
which neutron parameter 'look-up' tables are available. The user can write a new lookup
parameter file (xxx.neu) and add the name to this file to make it available in IP.

24.2 Shading Types
The 'Shading Types' tool allows the user to define colour and pattern fills for use in log plotting
and for creating a graphic Lithology fill (see 'Edit Default Lithology' tool). All the standard palette
colours are available. The user has considerable interactivity with the 'style' of the shading that
appears on plots. The 'Style' options are illustrated below and are selected from a drop-down
menu on-screen.
The IP default shading scheme is stored in the IP program directory, in the file ShadeType.opt. If
the user edits the 'Shade Types' table and wishes to save the changes, 'check' the 'Save as
Project Default' box on the 'Define Shade Types' window. On clicking 'OK', a ShadeType.opt
file, containing the edited settings, is saved to the current IP 'project' directory. In effect, creating
a project-specific shading look-up file.
WARNING: If the user does not 'check' the 'Save as Project Default' box before clicking
'OK', the IP 'program' defaults file will be overwritten.
The button will restore the available shade settings to the IP 'program' version of the
ShadeType.opt file.
Section 24.2 Tools : Shading Types

Senergy Tools 1453
Bitmap images can be added into the 'Define Shade Types' window by clicking the 'Browse'
button in an empty row in the table and then navigating to the appropriate folder and bitmap
image. The bitmap file can be user-created or selected from the available bitmaps supplied with
the IP software. Bitmaps for lithology fill should be 16 x 16 pixels dimensions to be compatible
with Windows 98 installations. Larger bitmaps can be used with Windows NT, 2000 and XP
installations.
To delete an entry from the table the user simply deletes the 'Name' entry in the row
-to-be-deleted and the row is removed.
Lithology Curve Bitmaps

A set of bitmaps have been created to be used in the 'Create Edit Lithology' module. These
bitmaps are stored in the IP program directory in the 'Shading Bitmaps' sub-folder. The lithology
symbols are mapped to a 'Name', which the user should type in, in the left-hand column of the '
Define Shade Types' table. These 'Names' are then used to set up the 'Edit Default Lithology'
module.
PLEASE NOTE:
Shade 'Names' must be less than 10 characters in length.
There is currently a maximum of 30 Lithology shadings allowed in the 'Edit Default
Lithology' table.

A user can add their own bitmap lithology shading to the 'Shading Types' table by setting the '
Style' cell in an empty row to 'Clear' and then using the 'Browse' button to locate the required
bitmap file. To help manage these bitmaps it is good practice to organise the bitmap 'Names' in
alphabetic order. New bitmaps can be selected and named. The user can 'click and drag' in the
left hand column of the grid and move rows up / down the table to the appropriate position. This
helps when setting up / changing the 'Edit Default Lithology' table.
NOTE: if you have any Log Plots active when you try to edit the 'Shading Types', a warning
message will appear advising that you cannot work on/save shading type edits. You should
close all Log Plot displays while working on 'Shading Types'.
If the user clicks 'OK' to the 'Warning', the 'Shading Types' window is activated. However, no
edits to the table can be saved until all log plots are closed down. If the user selects 'OK' on
the 'Shading Types' window while a plot is still active, the following 'Error message' is displayed:
Click 'OK' to the Error message then close all log plot displays, then click 'OK' on the 'Shading
Types' to save your edits / additions.
The user can create new curve fill shadings by using Windows Paint or other bitmap editing
software to create a 16 x 16 bitmap. Save the file and add the bitmap file path to your 'Shading
Types' list by using the 'Browse' button.

Senergy Tools 1455
24.3 Edit Global Sets

The 'Edit Global Sets' dialog window allows the user to create new 'Set Names' that will be
copied to all 'in-memory' wells in an IP database. This provides a very quick method for
ensuring that consistent Set Names are added to wells in a multiple well database. In addition,
when the user moves between IP databases, the same 'Set Names' can automatically be made
available to every well in every database that the user accesses. For example, you might want
to add a 'Load' Set and a 'Calc' Set to every well in multiple databases. Type the names and a
descriptions into the window and the Sets are created.
This tool, when used in conjunction with the 'Manage Curve Sets' and 'Multi-Well Manage Curve
Sets', provides the means for creating, editing and managing Sets within an IP project.
The module launches from the 'Tools' Menu.
A blank 'Add Global Set Names' window is opened, which allows the user to type in a 'Short
Name' and a 'Full Name'.
The 'Short Name' is restricted to 8 characters in length.

The 'Full Name' can contain a longer text string description that provides more
information on the Sets contents, its' origin, or 'how the curves were calculated' etc....
'Step Regular' allows the user to make the created Set a regular step Set or an irregular
Step set.
When the 'OK' button is clicked, the Set name is propagated throughout the in-memory wells. If
additional wells are loaded into memory the Set names are also automatically created in these
wells.
As long as a Set name remains in the 'Add Global Set Names' window, any new wells that are
loaded into memory will have this Set name automatically created. If, however, the user deletes a
Set Name from the 'Add Global Set Names' window and additional wells are subsequently
loaded into memory, these wells will not have the 'global' Set name created for them.
Section 24.3 Tools : Edit Global Sets

To delete a 'global' Set - clear the Short Name entry box for the Set you wish to delete and click '
OK'.
The 'Save as Project Default' 'check' box has the following functionality :
If 'un-checked' (the default setting) the user-defined Set Names are available for any IP
database that the user connects to.
If 'checked' - the Set names that the user has defined are only applied in the
currently-active IP database.
If the user saves the 'global' Sets configuration with the check box 'checked', a file,
ProjectFileDefaultsSets.OPT, will be created in the active database's 'Root' directory. If the user
subsequently edits the configuration, for example to add another 'global' Set name in the 'Add
Global Set Names' dialog window and 'un-checks' the box, a warning message will appear.
Clicking 'Yes' will overwrite the file ProjectFileDefaultsSets.OPT, found in the IP installation
directory. This file contains a list of all 'global' (default) Set names. The message advises the
user that any changes they have made will overwrite existing settings in this file. This means that
newly created Set names will be available to all databases that the user has access to, not only
the currently active database.

Senergy Tools 1457
Clicking 'No' cancels the operations and returns to the 'Add Global Set Names' window.

24.4 Edit Zone Colors

'Edit Zone colours' allows the user to choose the colours that are used to display zones in log
plots, crossplots and histograms. The default colours shown below are used if no user-defined
colour set is used. The colours are defined in a file called Zonecolors.opt which is created in
each project.
To create a customized zone colour scheme the user 'clicks' on the colour box and selects from
the drop-down box. The default colour scheme uses 25 different colours for zones. However, new
zones with new colours can be added by 'clicking' the 'New Zone' button and selecting the colour
for this zone.
Zones can be deleted by selecting a zone and then 'clicking' the 'Delete Zone' button.
Section 24.4 Tools : Edit Zone Colors

Senergy Tools 1459
'Clicking' the 'Defaults' button returns all the colours to the system defaults.
Section 24.4 Tools : Edit Zone Colors

24.5 Edit Dip Symbols
The tadpole symbol table is used in conjunction with the log plotting of tadpoles (see the
TADPOLES section of the log plotting module). The form allows the user to assign a colour,
shape and name of a tadpole to a certain value. This value can then be used along with a tadpole
symbol curve to set the colour and shape of each tadpole in a log plot. The name is used in the '
Interactive Dip Picking' module so that the type of dip can be selected using the name.
The defaults are used if no user-defined set is created. The tadpole symbol sets are defined in a
file called DipSymbols.opt which is created in each project.
The user can add new rows or re-define the current rows. The value assigned to each symbol is
completely flexible and does not have to be sequential.
Section 24.5 Tools : Edit Dip Symbols

Senergy Tools 1461
24.6 Edit Palettes

There are two modes for editing or creating new palettes;
'Interactive' where ranges of colours can be set by 'clicking' on the two end-points, and
'Manual' where each colour in the palette can be changed individually.
The 'Palette' drop-down box allows the user to select a previously defined palette and edit it.
Interactive Mode
1. Highlight area in the palette result to change the colours. The 'All' button will highlight
the total palette.
Section 24.6 Tools : Edit Palettes

2. Select the 'From' button.

3. Select the colour by 'clicking' on the large colour box.
4. Select the brightness of the colour by clicking on the horizontal brightness bar. The
selected colour will be displayed in the highlighted 'From' box.
5. Select the 'To' button.
6. Select the 'To' colour and brightness. The palette changes will be displayed in the
palette bar.
Colours can also be set by changing the R (Red), G (Green) and B (Blue) slider bars. The user
can type in the actual R, G, B numbers.
Steps 1 though 6 can be repeated for different areas of the overall palette to build up the total
palette.
Manual Mode
The manual mode allows each value in the 256 colour palette to be individually changed.

Senergy Tools 1463
1. Select box in the palette.

2. Adjust the R, G, B slider bars to give the required colour.
This must be repeated for each colour in the palette.
Buttons
'Spectrum' This will create the default 'Spectrum' palette. Useful in cases where this
base palette has been changed or deleted.
'Save' This will save the palette under the current name, overwriting the file on
disk.
'Save As' This will allow a new palette to be created under a user-defined name.
'Restore' This will re-load the current palette from the disk undoing any changes.
'Close' Closes the module.

24.7 Edit Default Lithology

The 'Edit Default Lithology' tool provides the user with a pre-defined set of lithology bitmap
shadings which are linked to lithology 'descriptions'. The 'descriptions' are used in the 'Create /
Edit Lithology Curve' module to populate the drop-down list of shadings that the user chooses to
build the Lithology Curve from. The 'Edit Default Lithology' tool permits the user to 'map'
selected bitmap (.bmp) pictures, set up in the 'Shading Types' table, to lithology types for display
in a log plot track. The default settings are saved in the Lithology.opt file in the IP program
directory. The user can either:
use the IP default bitmaps, or
create your own bitmap file(s) and replace an existing IP default bitmap with the new
one, or,
edit the 'Default Lithologies' table to create your own, 'project specific' Lithology.opt
file.
NOTE: there is currently an upper limit of 30 lithology shadings permitted in the 'Edit Default
Lithology' table.
NOTE: If you make any changes to the 'Default Lithology' table, you should 'check' the 'Save as
project default' check box BEFORE clicking the 'OK' button. This creates and writes a
project-specific Lithology.opt file into the IP Project directory and prevents the user from
overwriting the IP Program version of this file.
Section 24.7 Tools : Edit Default Lithology

Senergy Tools 1465
The IP Program Default Lithology Table.

The Default Lithology File (Lithology.opt), shipped with the IP program, contains 29 bitmap
shading files, linked to lithology descriptions. These descriptions are listed in ascending
alphabetic order so that the 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module is easier to work with. The
user can choose to work with the IP Default Lithology bitmaps (stored in the IP Program directory,
in the '\Shading Bitmaps' sub-directory), or can edit the table to their own specifications and
include their own bitmap shadings. NOTE: bitmaps should have dimensions of 16 x 16 pixels.
The Microsoft 'Paint' tool was used to build the current IP defaults. Also, as mentioned above, the
table only allows a maximum 30 bitmaps to be used, so, if you wish to include different bitmaps
you may have to replace some of the existing entries.
Editing the Default Lithology Table

The user can edit the Default Lithology Table to their own specifications. You can:
Shorten the list of Lithology descriptions : if you wish to shorten the list of available
lithology bitmaps you should 'click' in a row that you want to remove from the IP Program

default list and click the 'Delete Row' button. The row will be removed from the table.
'Check' the 'Save as project default' check-box before clicking the 'Ok' button to save
your changes to a 'local', IP Project, Default Lithology file.
Change the bitmap shadings used : Each shading 'Name' is linked to an entry in the '
Shading Types' table. If the user wishes to keep the shading name, but wants a
different bitmap to be linked to it, the change should be made in the 'Shading Types'
table, by 'browsing' to the new bitmap and selecting it. IMPORTANT: 'check' the 'Save
as project default' check-box on the 'Shading Types' dialog to save your changes to
the current IP project, otherwise you will overwrite the IP program shading defaults file.
Change the Lithology Curve 'Index' Numbers : The 'Index' numbers are used in the '
Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module. The numbers are used to 'map' a bitmap
shading to a curve value in the Lithology curve. The user can, for example, make a
shorter Default Lithology table by deleting rows from the IP Program default table, then
edit the Index numbers to their own scheme. Index numbers must be unique for each
row of the Default Lithology Table. If you try to save your table, using the 'Ok' button, IP
will warn you if there are rows with the same index value. You will then have to edit the
index numbers to be unique. Remember to 'check' the 'Save as project default'
check-box to save your changes to the current IP project, otherwise you will overwrite
the IP program Lithology defaults file.
Re-arrange the order in which the descriptions are listed : The order in which the
rows are listed can be re-arranged by 'clicking' in the left hand border of the window,
adjacent to the row you wish to move. Then, holding down the mouse button, drag the
row up or down the list to a new position. Release the mouse button to place the row.
Adding a new Lithology to the Default Lithology Table : Click in an empty cell in the '
Name' column (middle column) and then choose a bitmap name from the drop-down
list. The user should then type in a 'Description' (in the right-hand column) which will
be used as the display name for the Lithology shading in a Log Plot display. The 'Index'
number should be filled in and be a unique number in the table.
Deleting an entry from the 'Edit Default Lithology' table : the user 'clicks' in the
row-to-be-deleted and the row is removed, when the 'Ok' button is clicked. NOTE: you
should 'check' the 'Save as project default' check box if you make any changes to the
default table. See below.
NOTE: If you make changes and click 'Ok' to exit the 'Edit Default Lithology' module, then run
the 'Create /Edit Lithology Curve' module for a well, and subsequently go back into the 'Edit
Default Lithology' tool and change the bitmaps or index numbers or add new rows, the Lithology
curve shadings could lose their mappings to the Lithology curve values and the curve will not
display correctly in the log plot. If you add a 'Name' or 'Names' back into your IP Project Default
Lithology table, make sure that it has an index number that has not previously been used/saved.
Then, in the log plot display that you are using the 'Create / Edit Lithology Curve' module in,
drag the Lithology curve from the display (using 'SHIFT + Left-mouse-button 'click & Drag'), then
re-select the track to plot the Lithology curve in. The Lithology curve will refresh with the new
bitmap shadings correctly set. Alternatively, delete the IP Project Lithology.Opt file and rebuild it
with the same names , bitmaps and index numbers, including the 'additional' entries and save
again as the 'Project Default'.
The screen shots shown below illustrate how a user-defined, IP Project Default Lithology table
can be created.

Senergy Tools 1467
'Save as project default' - The IP default Lithology shading scheme is stored in the IP program
directory, in the file Lithology.opt. If the user edits the Default Lithology table and wishes to save
the changes, 'check' the 'Save as project default' check box at the bottom of the window. On

clicking 'Ok', a Lithology.opt file, containing the edited settings, is saved to the current IP '
project' directory.
WARNING: If the user does not 'check' the 'Save as Project Default' box before clicking
'OK', the IP 'program' Lithology.opt file, located in the IP program directory, will be
overwritten.
'Print' - The 'Print' option allows the user to create a reference hardcopy of the 'Default Lithology'
settings, which includes the Index number, associated bitmaps pictures and 'Name' fields.

Senergy Tools 1469
24.8 Edit Curve Aliasing

The 'Curve Aliasing' module can be accessed from 'Tools' 'Edit Curve Aliasing'. Or it can be
opened from within 'Tools' 'Options' 'Curve Aliasing'.
The 'Curve Aliasing' module allows the user to construct a grid which reflects the user's
preference for certain curve mnemonics. These curve mnemonics will be ranked according to
their position in the grid with the top curve given the highest priority. When looking for a curve, to
say fill in a default log plot, the module runs through the grid in order. The first curve of the 'Curve
Type' it is looking for that exists in the well will be used. The module also works through the '
Curve Sets' in order if it can't find the curve of the correct 'Curve Type' in the 'Default Set'.
The screenshot below shows the 'Curve Aliasing' module with default 'Curve Types' and curve
names. As the 'Alias Mode' is set to 'Off' all the cells in the 'Curve Selection Order' and 'Set
Selection Order' grids are grayed out.
Section 24.8 Tools : Edit Curve Aliasing

Curve Aliasing Modes

There are three modes for the 'Curve Aliasing' module
'Off' - if this is 'checked' then IP will work as it previously used to by just using 'Curve
Types' to select curves. For example, a density log can be selected in a module by
typing in '@Density'. The program will look for a curve of type Density in the well, if
several density curves are found it will select the most recent one.
'Manual' - in this mode the curve aliasing works in a similar manner to the 'Off' mode
unless the entered curve name has a '#' symbol in front of it. This informs the curve
aliasing that the user is asking for a specific curve to be aliased and if needs be it will
locate a curve of the same type as the one entered if that specific curve can't be found
in the well database.
For example, if the user wants to populate the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module with
gamma ray, density and neutron curves then they should enter '#GR', '#RHOB' and
'#NPHI' in the relevant cells within the module. NOTE: within the alias Gamma, Density

Senergy Tools 1471
and Neutron 'Curve Type' column there

must be respectively, a GR curve, RHOB curve and an NPHI curve entered. When the
program is run, if a GR curve is found within the well database then it will use it.
However, if no GR curve is found the program will look down the Gamma 'Curve Type'
column and select the next available gamma ray curve in the list if it exists in the well. It
will then do the same for the RHOB curve and finally the NPHI curve.

The use of this method of curve aliasing provides for a very powerful tool when
combined with the 'Multi-well Parameter Distribution' module as the user can set the
alias table up with the curves that exist throughout the database in the order in which to
be used and then have the 'Parameter Sets' using the generic form of the curve name
which will then be applied across all the wells. NOTE: if curves exist within a database it

Senergy Tools 1473
is upto the user to make sure that they have a 'Curve Type' associated with them. The
curve aliasing won't work if there are curves within a well but the curves don't have an
associated 'Curve Type'.
'Automatic' - if a curve name is entered in a module but doesn't exist in the well then
the aliasing module will attempt to find a curve of the same 'Curve Type' in the grid as
long as there is a curve of similar name in the grid. It then uses the first available curve
in the well that matches the first available curve in the grid. If there are no curves of that
type in the well then the user will be informed.
For example, in the alias grid below there is a curve called 'timscurve' in the GammaRay
'Curve Type' column. This curve does not exist in any well. However, if this curve name
is entered into the 'Clay Volume Analysis' module as the Gamma Ray input curve and
the module is run, the module uses the first available gamma ray curve that it finds in
the well which matches the first available curve in the alias GammaRay 'Curve Type'
column, which is the GRAM curve.

The 'Curve Aliasing' module can be toggled between 'Off', 'Manual' and 'Automatic' from the
main IP toolbar as well as from within the module.

Senergy Tools 1475
'Use Final Curve' - if there is a 'check' in the 'Use Final Curve' column for that 'Curve
Type' then the module will only look for 'Final Curves'. These are searched for using the
same rules as for 'normal' curves. If a 'Final Curve' can't be located from the ones in the
grid the module then goes through all the final curves in that well attempting to find one
of the same type.

User Interface
There are two main grids within the module;
'Curve Selection Order' grid - top grid. The top row of this grid is populated by 'Curve
Types' or by user defined names. See 'Manage Columns' for more information about
this.
'Set Selection Order' grid - lower grid. This grid is populated with all the Sets associated
with each particular 'Curve Type'. In the screenshot above most of the 'Curve Types'
have a 'Default' Set. With some, like the Core 'Curve Type', having a number of
associated Sets other than just the 'Default' Set.

Senergy Tools 1477
The cells of the curve and Set grids can be typed into - NOTE: double click on the cell before
typing - or the user can click the 'Auto Populate' or 'Load Defaults' button and fill the grid in that
way. Users can also paste in from Excel.


Senergy Tools 1479
To move around the 'Curve Selection Order' grid more quickly than just using the horizontal
scroll bar the user can 'click' on a cell and then type in a letter which corresponds to the first letter
of the 'Curve Type' that the user wishes to find. For example, if the user is looking at the
XDeepRes column but wants to quickly check what is in the DeepRes column then the user
should click on an empty cell and type in 'D' and they will be taken to the DeepRes column which
is the first 'Curve Type' starting with the letter 'D'.
'Auto Populate' - when this button is 'clicked' the module will run through all the loaded
wells in the entire database looking for curves. If the curve has an associated type the
module will add this curve to the grid along with its Set. The 'Curve Type' name will go
into the column header of the 'Curve Selection Order' grid and the curve will go into
the column under the 'Curve Type' header. If a curve doesn't have an associated '
Curve Type' then it won't be selected. If a curve of the same 'Curve Type' exists in a
number of Sets then only one curve name is added to the column but the different Sets
from which the curves reside will be added to the 'Set Selection Order' grid. The order
in which the Sets are populated depends upon the order in which they appear in the well
from which they came. They can be re-ordered on the grid by 'dragging' and 'dropping'.
Curves can also be dragged and dropped to rearrange their column order. NOTE: the
grid must be saved first before curve or Set re-ordering can occur.
If the database has many different Sets then it isn't a good idea to use 'Auto Populate'
as the 'Curve Aliasing' table becomes very unwieldy.
'Load Defaults' - loads a default curve aliasing grid - CrvAlias.cax file. The default
curve aliasing grid can be program specific - saved to the users C:\Documents and
Settings\<username>\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35 folder or it can be
made project specific by using the 'Save as Project Defaults' check-box.
'Manage Columns' - this is used to edit the list of 'Curve Types' seen in the 'Curve
Selection Order' grid. The list is initially populated from the default curve alias file. '
Curve Types' can be deleted using the 'Delete Selected Columns' button or hidden by
using the 'Hide Selected Columns' button. NOTE: to see 'hidden' columns 'uncheck'
the box and click on the 'Hide Selected Columns' button again. If the box is not
'checked' then it gets shown.
Additional 'Curve Types' can be added by typing the name of the new 'Curve Type' into
the blank cell and clicking the "+" button.

'Paste' - if a user has a curve alias table already created in Excel then it can be pasted
into the grid using the 'Paste' button. Either the whole Excel sheet can be pasted or
individual columns.
'Export to Excel' - this exports the whole grid to Excel as a .csv file. The user can then
edit the curves, 'Curve Types' and Sets within Excel and re-import the grid back into the
'Curve Aliasing' module using the 'Paste' button.
'Clear' - this will clear all the curve names and Set names from the grid. NOTE: it won't
clear the 'Curve Type' names. To clear the 'Curve Type' names use the 'Manage
Columns' button and in the 'Column Selector' module 'Select All Columns' and use
the 'Delete Selected Columns' button.
For any changes made within the 'Curve Aliasing' module to take effect, the 'Save' button has to
be 'clicked'. If the same curve name appears in more than one 'Curve Type' column then error
messages will appear listing the conflicts when the 'Save' button is 'clicked'. The user will have to
resolve the conflicts before being able to 'Save' the table.

Senergy Tools 1481
'Clicking' 'OK' on the 'Error adding curve' message takes the user back to the 'Curve Aliasing'
module and the conflicting curves are highlighted with a red box in the 'Curve Selection Order'
grid.

24.9 Set Default Units

'Set Default Units' instructs the IP program how to interpret curve values, specifically for Sonic,
Density and Caliper logs, when their input curve 'units' have not been set to a 'Recognized Curve
Unit'.
For example, a density curve loaded to IP with curve unit 'UNKNOWN', will be treated as having
density units 'gm/cc' if the input curve's 'Curve Type' is set to 'Density' and the 'Set Units' tab
setting, for 'Density Logs', are as shown below, on the left hand screen capture.
The recognized curve unit abbreviations are displayed on the 'Recognised Curve Units' tab (see
below, right). If a curve has recognized units corresponding to an entry in the appropriate
'Density', 'Sonic' or 'Caliper' list, then its' values will be automatically converted by the
interpretation modules in IP before being used. New unit abbreviations and their appropriate
conversion factors can be added to the system defaults by editing the ASCII file
UnitsConversion.par which can be found in the IP program directory. See 'Edit Unit
Conversions Defaults' under the 'Tools' 'System Defaults' menu.
IP also uses the 'default units' to determine how parameters are displayed in the interpretation
modules.
For example, if the 'default units' for Density are set to Kg/m3, then all density parameters will be
displayed in Kg/m3. Any interactive parameter line will also be displayed in the same units.
However, this means that, for the interactive display parameter to work, the input logs for sonic,
Section 24.9 Tools : Set Default Units

Senergy Tools 1483
density and caliper must be in the appropriate 'default' units.
If 'mixed' units are used (for example - a sonic curve is loaded to IP with units of'uSec/m, but
sonic 'default units' is set to uSec/ft), the program will calculate the correct results, since IP
recognizes the unit uSec/m, but any interactive parameter picking for the sonic log curve will not
work.
The crossplot overlay files (see crossplot) will be automatically converted to the default units
when loading. The overlay disk files must be constructed using standard logging units
(gm/cc, uSec/ft and inches).
The 'Screen Display' units can be set to either 'inches' or 'centimeters'. These units are used with
the log plot to set various features, such as 'track width' and hardcopy length / width dimensions.
Curve defaults lookup file

'Use Project Defaults' check box - In the 'Curve defaults lookup file' panel, the 'Use Project
Defaults' check box, if 'checked', will tell IP to look for a project level file called
CPARMDEF_USER.PAR in the current IP project folder, from which the program can get
user-defined curve display parameters, which will be applied to newly-loaded curves. These
user-defined parameters will be used in preference to those defined in the IP program level file,
CPARMDEF.PAR, when new curves are loaded into the IP project. When the box is 'checked' IP
will create the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR project level file if it does not already exist. The file will
initially be empty. The user should copy/paste/edit rows from the program level file,
CPARMDEF.PAR, into the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file to make it work.
To reset a project to look up the IP program level Defaults CPARMDEF.PAR file, you must close
the IP project and delete the CPARMDEF_USER.PAR file from the IP Project folder. The 'Use
Project Defaults' check box will be 'un-checked' when you re-open the IP project.
'Use Metric File' - If the 'Use Metric file' check box is 'checked' then IP will look for the IP
program level CPARMDEF_METRIC.PAR file when loading and setting the display parameters for
imported curves. This file contains the metric-equivalent curve default display settings for Sonic,
Density and Caliper curves. If the 'Use Project Defaults' check box is also 'checked', then IP will
create a project level file called CPARMDEF_METRIC_User.PAR if it does not already exist and
the curve display settings in this file will take precedence over the IP program level file
CPARMDEF_METRIC.PAR, when new curves are loaded into the project.
NOTE: The file CPARMDEF_METRIC.PAR is designed mainly for use in Canada, where the
'standard' units are; for Sonic- uSec/m, for Density - KG/m3 and caliper - mm. Hence, a set of
different defaults for scales and units to those used elsewhere. Unless you work in these units,
do not use the metric option.
'Set as Project Default' - The 'Set as Project Default' check box, if 'checked' will save the
currently selected settings for Density/Sonic/Caliper logs /Screen display to a project level defaults
file called DefaultUnits.opt. This allows the user to save different combinations of settings for
different projects. When a project is opened where a DefaultUnits.opt file exists, the box will be
'checked'. The program will first search for the project level defaults file rather than defaulting to
the IP program level file, ProgDefs.opt.
If you want to reset to the IP program ProgDefs.opt file, you need to close IP, delete the file
DefaultUnits.opt from the project folder and re-start IP. This will 'un-check' the check box.
Section 24.9 Tools : Set Default Units

24.10 Message Board

The 'Message Board' tool allows the user to activate a 'logging' window which displays
messages, for example, regarding log data input operations. The
message board will normally only appear if there has been an error during the execution of an IP
process. The message board can be launched from the
'Message Board' option on the 'Tools' menu.
The 'Stay on Top' check-box, if 'checked', means that the Message Board window will always
launch as the topmost window on your monitor. To put the 'Message Board' in the background,
'un-check' the box.
Clicking the 'Clear' button will clear all the text entries out of the Message Board.
Section 24.10 Tools : Message Board

Senergy Tools 1485
24.11 Program Protection

A single, 'IP Proprietary' (IP) licensing mechanism is used for IP Version 3.3 and later versions.
The original 'Copy Control' system by Microcosm is no longer supported. To view the licence
properties for your installation, to transfer the licence from one PC to another and to update the
specialist modules available in your installation go to the 'Tools' 'Program Protection 'IP''
options.
Licences are set up by the Schlumberger licensing group. A unique customer ID number is
provided for the user which allows one copy of the licence to be downloaded from the website and
installed on a specific PC. Licences are tied to a physical PC and cannot be moved to another PC
unless they are uninstalled back to the licensing web server.
Upgrading Licences
Licences normally have a maximum version of IP with which they will work set at the time of their
creation. So if a user has purchased a licence at the same time as obtaining a copy of IP v3.4
then their IP licence max version will be v3.4. When they want to upgrade to IP v3.5 they will
also have to upgrade their licence max version. To do this, users should contact their SIS Account
Manager. Further details are given in IP Version 3.5 release Notes.pdf which are on the IP v3.5
CD.
Use Logging
Each time a user starts up or exits IP these events are logged to a text file 'IP_User_Log.txt'.
This file is stored where the protection system is installed and the same file will be used by all
network users. This allows system administrators to monitor the use of the program. An example
of part of one of these files is given below.
User Logon : Frank : On PC : pglpc65(11.11.11.2) : 15/10/02 18:22:52

User Logoff : Frank : On PC : pglpc65(11.11.11.2) : 15/10/02 18:22:58
User Logon : Frank : On PC : pglpc65 (11.11.11.2) : 15/10/02 18:41:07
User Logoff : Frank : On PC : pglpc65 (11.11.11.2) : 15/10/02 18:41:11
User Logon : Frank : On PC : pglpc65 (11.11.11.2) : 17/10/02 16:06:27
Multi-user network licences allow the movement of single licences to a local PC for work off site
(see 'Uninstall or Transfer Protection'). This movement is logged to a file 'IP_offsite_Log.txt'.
This file is also stored where the network protection system is installed and all users will use the
same file. An example of part of one of these files is given below.
Section 24.11 Tools : Program Protection

Protection moved to local PC : pglpc65 (135.135.135.165) : by user : frank : 23/10/02

12:16:23
Protection returned from local PC : pglpc65 (135.135.135.165) : by user : frank :
23/10/02 12:16:56
24.11.1 'IP Proprietary' Protection System

The 'Program Protection' option, located on the 'Tools' menu sets up the program copyright
protection for the users IP installation. The protection system can be set up either:
on an individual PC, or
a network protection system can be used.
The network licensing system can be set up either :
by each user accessing the licence file directly, or

a network licence server program can be used.
The network licence server allows the licence to be totally isolated from the users and hence
provides a higher level of security, ensuring that the licence file will not become accidentally
corrupted or deleted.
The protection system consists of a licence file 'IPSec.DAT'. This file must not be edited,
otherwise the licence will become invalid. The licence file must reside in a designated directory
on a designated PC. The directory and PC name are written into the file when the original licence
is created. If the file is moved to another location it will no longer work.
IMPORTANT: If you need to move the licence file; uninstall the protection (Check-out) and
then re-install it (Check-in) to the new location.
The properties of the licence can be viewed by listing the IPSec.DAT file. DO NOT edit this file.
The file contains the encrypted licence information plus some readable text. Each licence can
control the number of concurrent users for each module that is licenced. The expiry date for each
licence module can be uniquely set.

Senergy Tools 1487
Example IPSec.DAT file :

131 130 136 131 141 139 134 136 143 181 182 171 168 174 177 184 119 162 144 182 189 154
176 192 191 189 127 129 132 131 134 136 131 135 138 138 135 140 137 115 114 116 117 124
118 119 117 121 128 120 129 143 123 130 137 126 148 149 129 154 141 136 144 137 147 141
113 114 118
$ This is an IP licence file.
$ Please do not edit any data in this file
$ Your licence is as follows
$ DrivePath : c:\Program files\IntPetro
$ NetworkLicence : Yes
$ CanCheckOut : Yes
$ Base 2 29/09/2003
$ Statistical Prediction 1 29/09/2003
$ Monte Carlo 1 29/09/2003
$ Rock Physics 1 29/09/2003
$ Pore Pressure Prediction 1 29/09/2003
The top of the file contains binary encoded data. The licence details follow. The number of
licences for each IP module are given, followed by its expiry date (day / month / year). NOTE: an
IP licence expires at 00h 00min 01ms, users' local time, on the expiry date.The example above
shows that two 'Base' modules can be used simultaneously while there is only one each of the
speciality modules available.
Licence Checkout
When a user starts using IP, a 'Base' licence will be checked out from the main licence. For each
speciality module that the user runs, a licence will be checked out. The users who connect to the
licence can only check out the number of module licences that are available. An error message
will be displayed once the user-limit for a particular module is reached.
Every few minutes the licence file is checked to see if it is still available and valid. If there is a
break in the connection with the licence server then the user will be warned. If the connection is
not restored then after three warnings the program will shut down (the user normally has between
10-15 minutes before this occurs). It is good practice to save all data after the first warning and
then investigate the cause of the connection break.
On the rare occasion that IP crashes, or if the program is terminated externally, then the
licences that were being used will be re-instated for use by other people. However, there
may be a delay of up to 6 minutes before the licence becomes available again. For a single
user, non-server based licence it is possible to reinstate the licence before the six minutes
elapses by deleting the file IPUser.dat found within the same folder as the main licence file.
However, DO NOT delete this file in a multi-user system or the other users may be closed out of
IP unexpectedly with all the accompanying negative issues. Also be very careful that the main
licence file, IPSec.dat, is not deleted by mistake.

24.11.1.1 Install and Activate Protection
1. 'Automatic Installation via Internet'

This is the easiest way to install the protection and activate it. The user, however, must have
direct access to the Internet from the PC. If this is not possible then the 'Manual installation'
option needs to be run.
For Internet installation the user should :

enter the 'Customer ID' number required to activate the software,
Select the directory into which the licence file is to be saved, the 'Protection Directory',
and click 'Ok'.
The program will install the protection system and then dial out onto the Internet to obtain the
activation code. This can take a little time if the Internet connection is slow.
The program checks for a valid ethernet adaptor. If an adaptor is not found at the default IP

Senergy Tools 1489
address, the user can manually enter the valid IP number. This problem will only occur on network
servers which have multiple network adaptors.
The IP address that is needed is that of the PC on which the licence file will be installed (i.e. the
PC which has the 'Protection Directory').
2. 'Manual Installation'
If direct access to the Internet is not possible from the PC then a 'Manual Installation' can be
performed. The process is as follows:
1. Create a licence file (IPSec.dat) on the PC that the licence is required for. For IP
v3.5 the licence file (IPSec.dat) is stored in the users C:\Documents and
Settings\username\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35 folder rather than
the C:\Program Files\IntPetro35 folder.
The user selects the 'Protection Directory' into which the licence file is to be stored and clicks '
Ok'. The de-activated licence file will be created and the following windows will be displayed.

2. The licence file can then be sent by email or on a floppy disc to Schlumberger
Information Solutions (SIS) customercarecenter@slb.com for activation .
3. The activated file is returned to the user by Schlumberger. The user then
overwrites the original file with this activated IPSec.dat file.
3. 'Connect to a Working Network Protection System'

This allows the user to connect the program to a previously-installed network licence.
The user selects the directory that contains the licence file and then clicks 'Ok' or, if a licence
server is being used, the 'Server Name' box is filled in.
The 'Type' is used to set the type of network licence being used.
If the user is connecting directly to the licence file, select the 'File Based' option.
If a licence server program is being used, select either 'Host Name' or 'IP Address'.
For the 'Host Name' option - enter the name of the PC that the IP licence server program is
running on, in the 'Server Name' box.
If the 'IP Address' option is 'checked' then the IP address of the PC that the IP licence server
program is running on should be entered.

Senergy Tools 1491
24.11.1.2 Update Protection Options

The 'Update Protection Options' menu item allows the user to change the licence parameters.
This option is used to change the expiry date for the licence or to change the number of
currently-allowed specialist interpretation modules. NOTE: this option will be grayed out most of
the time as the licence won't require updating very often.
The 'Update automatically from Internet website' option is the only one available from the
menu system. The user must have direct access to the internet to use this option. Otherwise, to
update your licence you will need to obtain a new licence file from Schlumberger. They will
probably request a copy of the current licence file.
1. Update Automatically from Internet Website
The 'Customer ID' should already be entered. Click 'Ok' to update the licence file.
2. Manual Update
licences can be updated manually by obtaining a new licence file from Schlumberger Information
Solutions (SIS) - email customercarecenter@slb.com .

24.11.1.3 Uninstall or Transfer Protection
The options available under this menu depend on the type of protection system installed. In the
case illustrated above the user is connected to a licence which is installed on the users hard
drive.
The main reason for uninstalling a licence is to 'check-in' the licence on one computer so that
another user can then 'check-out' the same licence onto another computer.
1. 'Uninstall to Internet Website'
This will uninstall the protection system to the Internet website. Once the protection is uninstalled
it becomes available to reinstall on another PC. This is an easy way of moving the protection
system from one PC to another PC.
2. 'Remove Protection'

Senergy Tools 1493
To remove the current protection system click 'OK'. The licence file (IPSec.dat) will be deleted.
3. 'Move Network User Licence to Local PC'

This allows a user to temporarily transfer one of a set of Network licences to a local PC. This can
be useful if the user wants to work temporarily off the network (for example, away from the office).
This only works where there are at least two available network licences on the server.
The user selects the directory on the local PC where the protection system is to be installed. This
is normally the IP program directory - C:\Program Files\IntPetro35. The user 'checks out' (tick) the
IP specialist modules from the list of available modules. An IP 'Base' module is automatically
checked out during this process.
The user can now specify how long the licence is to be 'checked out' for. The minimum time is '0'

- (zero) days, up to a maximum of 30 days. '0' days means that the licence will be checked out
and activated up until midnight (24.00 hours) of the present day. '2' days means that the licence
will de-activate at 24.00 hours, 2 days from the present day. When the local offsite licence
expires, IP is deactivated on the PC. The available IP modules will automatically refresh to their
original number on the Office licence Server at the same time.
Another example: if someone is working offline, away from the office and does not have an IP
licence loaded locally, they can:
Create a licence file manually, See Manual Installation. The newly-created licence file,
IPSec.DAT, is non-active.
E-mail this file from the remote site to the office / Systems Administrator.
The Systems Administrator uses the 'Move Network user licence to local PC' option to
browse to the e-mailed licence file, 'checks out' the required licence features from the
Server licence and 'checks' the 'Activate a remotely created licence' option.
Click 'OK' to remove one licence from the server system and 'activate' the 'local' licence
file.
E-mail the activated local licence file to the remote site. The remote user can now
replace their original licence file IPSec.DAT with the e-mailed, activated licence file and
run IP.
4. 'Return Local licence back to Network'
To return the licence, the user must first reconnect to the network server system and then start
the program.

Senergy Tools 1495
The user enters the directory of the original network protection system and then clicks 'OK'. The
directory name will normally be already filled in. The protection system will be uninstalled from the
local PC and reinstalled onto the network licence.
24.11.1.4 View Protection Options

The 'View Protection Options' window provides the user with information about the
currently-installed protection system and shows which program functions are active. This is an
'information only' window. licence and Feature information is arranged on the following 'tabs'.
'Program Options' Tab

The 'Program Options' tab shows the available IP modules and their expiry dates. The licence '
numbers' show how many concurrent users there can be for each module.
The 'Total' column displays the number of available licences for each IP 'Feature'. The 'In Use'
column lists the number of licences being used at the time the 'View Protection Options' option
is opened, including those being used by the current application. This list does not include any '
Off Site' licences. The 'Off Site' column lists the number of licences that have been temporarily
transferred off site to a local PC.

'Checked Out' Tab

The 'Checked Out' tab, illustrated below, shows which modules are currently 'checked out' to the
user. The modules are only 'checked out' when they are being used. A user can only 'check in'
licences by exiting from the IP program.

Senergy Tools 1497
'Current Users' Tab

The 'Current Users' tab displays the users who are currently logged into the licence. This can be
useful if a licence is not available and the user needs to find out who is using the current licences.
The user name and the PC name are displayed.

24.11.1.5 Licence Server Installations

There are two methods of running IP on a computer network with a server-installed licensing
mechanism:
1. The IP executable code is installed on each local PC, with the licensing mechanism
installed on the server.
2. The IP executable code and licensing mechanism are both installed on the server. This
method has the advantage of centralizing the code in one place, but the loading of the IP
program will be slightly slower than for method 1 'local' install. Once loaded, however,
there should be no perceptible difference in speed of performance. This method can be
used with Microsoft 'Terminal Services' or 'Citrix' type installations.
Option 1: IP Installed On Individual PC's

1. Install IP from the CD onto each PC.
2. When the program starts, 'click' the 'Install Security' button.

Senergy Tools 1499
The following window is displayed:
3. Select the 'Connect to a working Network protection system'.

4. Type in the 'Protection Directory' of the installed protection system and click 'OK'. The
program will try and connect to the system. NOTE: that the protection directory must be a
mapped network drive - in v3.5 this will be C:\Documents and Settings\username\Local
Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35. The 'Type' option must be set to 'File Based'.
The 'Server Name' box is not used.
Option 2. Installation of IP and Licensing Mechanism on Server

The following is a procedure summary;
Install Interactive Petrophysics on PC server.

Activate IP licence on server PC.
Edit IPLicenceSvr.ini file with correct licence path & place in C:\Windows.
Install licence manager on server PC.
Start licence manager Program with Automatic type.
Install Interactive Petrophysics on client PC.
Connect client PC licence to the server PCs activated licence.
1. Interactive Petrophysics (IP) must be installed on the server by a user with administrator
rights. Default directory for installing IP is C:\Program Files\IntPetro3x. On a 64 bit OS
the default directory is C:\Program files(x86)\IntPetro3x.
2. If IP is already installed and the licence activated on the server PC machine then go to
Step 5.
3. Activate IP licence on the server PC.

Open Interactive Petrophysics. Go to 'Tools' 'Program Protection IP' '
Install and Activate Protection'.
If user has an internet connection on the server PC then choose 'Automatic
Installation via Internet'. If user does not have an internet connection on the
server PC choose 'Manual Installation' and continue to Step 4.
Click 'OK'
Fill in 'Customer ID' number in the 'Install via Internet' module. Set the '
Protection Directory' and note this path. The default protection directory is
C:\Program Files\IntPetro3x. NOTE: this directory on the server must have
read/write access for all users who will use the licence. In the daemon licence
server system case, the directory can be protected from all users.

Senergy Tools 1501
Click 'OK'. User will receive a message saying that the program has been
successfully activated. The user will then be prompted to select default units and
set a Project path.
To ensure that IP is properly activated go to 'Tools' 'Program Protection IP'
'View Protection Options'. Note the Customer ID number, licence features
and the number of users for each feature. Check that they match what was
requested.
NOTE: If the 'View Protection Options' window shows that modules are not
valid (i.e. expired date) then the licence was not properly activated. Please
contact your local SIS support representative.
Close down IP on the server PC machine.
NOTE: While attempting to activate IP licence via the internet if the user receives "Page Not
Found" error message check that the IP licence server website http://licmgr.senergyltd.com/ is
added to the users trusted websites.
NOTE: if the user is using a firewall(s) then make sure that port 2222 is open and available.
4. After the licence is properly activated on the server PC via the internet, continue to Step
5. If the user does not have an internet connection on their server PC then choose '
Manual Installation'. This will create a file called IPSec.dat within the default installation
directory which is normally C:\Program Files\IntPetro3x. Contact SIS support to
coordinate sending this IPSec.dat file to them for activation. Once SIS support send back
the activated IPSec.dat file replace the existing IPSec.dat file on the server PC with this
activated file.
5. Once Interactive Petrophysics has been activated on the server PC;

Go to C:\Program Files\IntPetro3x\Server Installation Files folder.
Open the IPLicenceSvr.ini file, found within the Server Installation Files folder,
in Notepad and edit the 'LicenceLoc' path so that it points to the location of the

licence file, IPSec.dat.

Example of a IPLicenceSvr.ini file:
[Config]
LicenceLoc=C:\Program Files\IntPetro3x
Save the file and close.
Copy the IPLicenceSvr.ini file to the Windows directory, usually C:\WINDOWS.
Run the batch file Install.bat file, that is in the 'Server Installation files'
sub-directory. The licence server daemon program will now run as a service on
the PC.
Go to 'Start' 'Settings' 'Control Panel' 'Administrative Tools' '

Services'.
Locate 'IPLicService'. Right-mouse click and go to 'Properties'. Change '
Startup Type' to 'Automatic' and select 'Start'. The service 'Status' should be
displayed as 'Started'.
6. After installing IP on the client machine, and with IP open, connect to the server PC's
activated licence.
From a client PC, open Interactive Petrophysics. At the 'Security system not set
up' window, select 'Install Security'.

Senergy Tools 1503
Choose 'Connect to a working Network protection system'.
Select either 'Host Name' or 'IP Address'.

The user enters the name of the PC server that is running the licence server
daemon program or enters the IP address of the PC server.
Please note, users connecting to the security licence through the daemon server
program will not be able to update the licence. Updates can only be performed by
the system administrator connecting directly to the licence from the IP installation
made on the PC. However, the user will be able to 'check out' an IP licence (if the
option and sufficient licences are available) to their local PC / laptop for use off
the network.
Users can determine who has the licence checked-out by viewing the
IP_User_Log.txt server log file which is located in the same folder as the
IPSec.dat licence file. Users can also view which other users are using the
server licence by going to 'Tools' 'Program Protection' 'View Protection
Options' and the 'Current Users' tab.
Daemon Licence Server

When the daemon licence server program is running, a 'padlock' icon will be shown in the system
tray.
To see the licence status, right-mouse click on the icon and select 'Show Summary'. The
following screen will be displayed.

Senergy Tools 1505
The 'View licence' button will display the current licence details. The 'Status ?' button will indicate
the state of the server. The 'Client/Server messages' 'tab' will show the licence check-outs as
they occur.
The 'Check-Outs' section of the 'Licence Info.' 'tab' will show details about which users have
taken a licence for use locally. See 'Moving of Network Licences to Local PC'.

24.11.1.6 Additional License Activation Instructions

These are additional licence activation notes as supplied by Schlumberger Information Systems in
response to all the support calls they have had to deal with over IP licence issues.
These notes can be used to step user through
Activating IP for the first time.

Updating licence that contains new features.
Upgrading IP software versions.
Now that your Interactive Petrophysics (IP) licence has been created or updated, there are some
steps your IT Administrator needs to implement in order for your current IP licence to reflect the
changes. To proceed, please identify your Interactive Petrophysics licence setup scenario from
the list below.
Internet access is necessary for all licence procedures below. If you do not have internet access
please contact SIS Customer Support Centre for assistance on manual activation of your IP
licence. Their contact information can be found at https://support.slb.com.
Interactive Petrophysics (IP) Licence Setup and Scenarios Instruction List
A. If you currently have no activated licence with IP and are installing & activating for the
first time for a standalone licence setup, then this list A can be followed.
B. If you currently have no activated licence with IP and are installing & activating for the
first time for a server licence setup, then this list B can be followed.
C. If you currently have an activated standalone licence with IP v3.4, will continue to stay
with this version of IP, and this licence represents a renewal of expiration date or simply
adding more modules, then this list C can be followed. If you also intend to upgrade
from v3.4 to v3.5, please see List E.
D. If you currently have an activated server licence setup with IP v3.4, will continue to
stay with this version of IP, and this licence represents a renewal of expiration date or
simply adding more modules, then this list D can be followed. If you also intend to
upgrade from v3.4 to v3.5, please see List F.
E. If you currently have an activated standalone licence with IP v3.4 and are ready to
upgrade to v3.5, you received a renewal of expiration date, or both then this list E can
be followed.
F. If you currently have an activated server licence with IP v3.4 and are ready to upgrade
to v3.5, you received a renewal of expiration date, or both then this list F can be
followed.
INSTRUCTION LIST A:
If you currently have no activated licence with IP and are installing & activating for the first time for
a standalone licence setup, then this list A can be followed.
1. Install IP. Choose Install Security > Automatic Install via Internet.

Senergy Tools 1507
2. Enter Customer ID Keycode # and click OK. IP should now be activated and user will
be prompted to set an IP database (default is ok) and set default units.
3. The activated licence file IPSec.dat file will be generated and should not be deleted or
moved from original location. User can proceed as normal.
INSTRUCTION LIST B:
If you currently have no activated licence with IP and are installing & activating for the first time for
a server licence setup, then this list B can be followed.
1. See the 'Licence Server Installations' chapter for steps on how to proceed for this
scenario.
INSTRUCTION LIST C:
If you are working on a standalone licence setup with IP v3.4, will continue to stay with this
version of IP, and this licence represents an expiration date renewal, please follow the
instructions below:
1. Open IP v3.4. Go to Tools > Program Protection IP > Update Protection Options.
Choose Update automatically from Internet Website.
2. User should be able to view licence information under Tools > Program Protection IP >
View Protection Options. User can proceed as normal.
INSTRUCTION LIST D:
If you are working on a server licence setup with IP v3.4, will continue to stay with this version of
IP, and this licence represents an expiration date renewal, please follow the instructions below:
1. Have all users exit out of IP & check in "offsite" licences so that no IP licences are in
use until this installation process is complete.
2. Stop IP licence service by going to Start > Programs > Admin Tools > Services >
IPLicService. Open service and choose stop.
3. Have IT personnel open IP v3.4 on PC server, go to Tools > Program Protection IP >
Update Protection Options > Update automatically via Internet website. Enter Customer
ID keycode #.
6. IT personnel can now view updated licence information under Tools > Program
Protection IP > View Protection Options.
7. Once IT personnel has confirmed IP v3.4 licence is activated, close out of IP v3.4 on
server.
9. Open IP licence service IPLicService. Startup type should stay at "automatic". Have IT
personnel start the IPLicService on the server so that service status is "started".
10. Have users re-open IP application and proceed as normal. The IP application should
already be pointing to the updated IPsec.dat file on the IP server PC.
INSTRUCTION LIST E:
NOTE: IP v3.4 and v3.5 databases are not backwards compatible. Databases from v3.4 can be
opened in v3.5, but databases from v3.5 cannot be opened in v3.4.
It is best practice to keep v3.4 and v3.5 databases separate until you are ready to upgrade a v3.4
database to v3.5.
If you are working on a standalone licence setup, you already have IP v3.4 installed, & when you
are ready to activate v3.5, please follow the instructions below:
1. Open IP v3.4. Go to Tools > Program Protection IP > Uninstall or Transfer Protection >
Uninstall to Internet Website. Enter Customer ID #.
2. Install IP v3.5. Please note there will be a separate installation directory that is default
C:\Program Files\IntPetro34.
3. Open IP v3.5. At the 'Security system not set up' window click on 'Install Security'.

Toggle on 'Automatic Installation via Internet'. (If you do you have internet access on your
machine, please choose 'Manual Installation', send IPSec.dat file located in your
installation directory to SIS support for activation before you proceed.)
4. Once IP v3.5 is activated, user will be asked to set default units & create a default
project. Also, user should be able to view your licence information under Tools > Program
Protection IP > View Protection Options. Your IPSec.dat file should now be located in your
IP v3.5 installation directory or in C:\Documents and Settings\PC username\Local
Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35. User can proceed as normal.
INSTRUCTION LIST F:
NOTE: IP v3.4 and v3.5 databases are not backwards compatible. Databases from v3.4 can be
opened in v3.5, but databases from v3.5 cannot be opened in v3.4.
It is best practice to keep v3.4 and v3.5 databases separate until you are ready to upgrade a v3.4
database to v3.5.
If you are working on a server licence setup, you already have IP v3.4 installed, & when you are
ready to activate v3.5, please follow the instructions below:
1. Have all users exit out of IP & check in "offsite" licences so that no IP licences are in
use until this installation process is complete.
2. Have IT personnel stop the IPLicService on server.
3. Have IT personnel open IP v3.4, go to Tools > Program Protection IP > Uninstall or
Transfer Protection > Uninstall to Internet Website. Enter Customer ID #.
4. Have IT personnel install IP v3.5 on server. Please note there will be a separate
installation directory that is default C:\Program Files\IntPetro35.
5. Have IT personnel open IP v3.5. At the 'Security system not set up' window click on
'Install Security'. Toggle on 'Automatic Installation via Internet'. (If you do you have
internet access on your server, please choose 'Manual Installation', send IPSec.dat file
located in your installation directory to SIS support for activation before you proceed.)
6. Once IP v3.5 is activated, IT personnel will be asked to set default units & create a
default project. Also, user should be able to view your licence information under Tools >
Program Protection IP > View Protection Options. Your IPSec.dat file should now be
located in your IP v3.4 installation directory or in C:\Documents and Settings\PC
username\Local Settings\Application Data\IntPetro35.
7. Once IT personnel has confirmed IP v3.5 licence is activated, close out of IP v3.5 on
server.
8. Have IT personnel edit the IPLicenceSvr.ini file located in C:\Windows directory to
reflect the directory path of installation directory of IP v3.5 (default is C:\Program
Files\IntPetro34).
9. In IPLicService, startup type should stay at "automatic". Have IT personnel start the
IPLicService on server so that service status is "started".
10. Have users install IP v3.5. At the 'Security system not set up' window click on 'Install
Security'. Choose 'Connect to a Working Network Protection System'. Choose either
Host Name or IP Address & enter in server information. IP v3.5 should now be activated
on user's machine & user will be asked to set default units & create a default project. User
can proceed as normal.
This updated licence is still compatible with previous versions of IP. However, you will need a
licence for each session of IP that is open. If user chooses to access IP v3.4 and server
information did not change, the licence path under Tools > Program Protection IP > Connect to a
Working Network Protection System will not change and it will be reading the updated licence file.
Remember, databases are not backwards compatible. Databases from v3.4 can be opened

Senergy Tools 1509
in v3.5, but databases from v3.5 cannot be opened in v3.4.

It is best practice to keep v3.4 and v3.5 databases separate until you are ready to upgrade
a v3.4 database to v3.5.
Please refer to Installation Notes.rtf document on installation CD for further information on

installation of IP v3.5.

24.12 Options
The 'Tools' menu 'Options' entry launches the 'IP Configuration' module.
The 'IP Configuration' interface is designed around a 'Tree View' window. The 'Tree' contents
can be expanded / viewed in the left-hand panel of the display. Clicking on a Title within the 'Tree
View' will populate the right-hand panel of the window with the linked 'Attribute' table or '
Connection' dialog.
At the base of the 'IP Configuration' window the 'Working folder' directory structure is listed.
Double clicking on this line opens the 'Working folder'. All the files that are accessed via the 'IP
Configuration' window are stored in this 'Working folder'.
The Current IP Configuration options are:
External Database Options - manage IP connections to external databases.

Well Options - display well position as Latitude / Longitude or UTM coordinates.
Well Attributes - create / edit / delete IP well 'cultural' attributes.
Log Attributes - create / edit / delete IP well 'logging' attributes.
Well Attribute Mappings - link IP Well Attributes to File Loader 'cultural'
parameters.
Log Attribute Mappings - link IP Log attributes to File loader 'logging'
parameters.
File Loader - create / edit / delete external file (LAS / LIS / DLIS) 'cultural' and 'logging'
Section 24.12 Tools : Options

Senergy Tools 1511
parameters.
Well Folder Structure - setup the directory structure for an IP database.
LAS 3 Configuration -
Miscellaneous Options - control error tracking messages in IP, set the Default Plots
location, enable Tabbed Workareas and fading Parameter windows, adjust Irregular Set
depth tolerance.
Custom Toolbars and Menus - arrange toolbar icons and IP menus.
Well Security - configure security options on 'in-memory' database wells.
Curve Aliasing - produce database specific curve ordering tables.
Corporate Search Paths - allows user greater control of IP file locations.
24.12.1 External Database Options

External Database Options
Clicking on the 'External Database Options' label launches a simple 'tick-box' dialog where the
user can switch 'on'/'off' the links to a number of external databases. If an option is 'checked'
then, under the 'Input / Output' menu, the corresponding 'External Database' connection icon
will be activated and visible in the menu, as illustrated below.
Some External Database links have their own configuration screens. These are listed in the Tree
view panel by expanding the 'External Database Options' branch. Set-up screens for the

connections to GEOLOG, OpenWorks, ODM and PETCOM are launched by clicking on

the appropriate 'Connection' label in the tree view.
The 'GEOLOG Connection' configuration screen is illustrated below. There are 3 possible
connection protocols (HTTP, SSH and Windows). One can select the preferred protocol from the
'Use Protocol' drop-down list at the top of the screen. The connection details, including
Usernames and Passwords are shown for each connection protocol. Details of the external
database connection protocols and configuration of these links is provided under the 'Connecting
to External Databases' chapter.
24.12.2 Well Options

Well Options
Clicking on the 'Well Options' label allows the user to select the default 'well location display'
mode (UTM Coordinates or Latitude / Longitude) for wells in the current database. If you change
the 'Display position as' setting and save the configuration, when you next open the 'Manage
Well Header Info' module, on the 'Position' tab, the well co-ordinates, if they have been loaded
into IP, will be in your selected format.

Senergy Tools 1513
Expanding the 'Well Options' 'tree' enables the user to view 'Well Attributes', 'Log Attributes', '
Well Attributes Mappings' and
'Log Attributes Mappings'.
'Well Attributes' and 'Log Attributes' are types of Dynamic Attributes and they provide the
user with the functionality to increase the number and types of data that can be loaded and stored
for a well in an IP database. The attributes provide the means to 'map' the diverse log parameter
and log header mnemonics found in LAS, LIS and DLIS files, to a consistent location within an IP
database.
The 'Reference' tables provide the place to store parameters within IP, 'File Loader' mnemonics
lists are used / extended to include new data types, then the mnemonics are 'mapped' to a single
IP Attribute. The principle is illustrated below:
Well Attributes
'Well Attributes' are 'cultural' well parameters such as 'Country', 'Location', 'Company', 'Field',
that can either be loaded from external data files or can be user-defined within IP to store some
data associated with a well. The 'Well Attributes' table is the 'reference' list of cultural attributes /
parameters for the IP program. You can use the IP well attributes list in its current state or you
can extend the list by adding new attribute names which will be created / activated in the 'Manage
Well Header Info.' module. The user can create new well attributes with textual 'Display Alias'
descriptions, for example 'Drilling Rig Name', 'Drilling Company', 'Block Number' and 'Quadrant
Number'. These well attributes appear in IP as labelled text entry boxes that the user can fill in for

each in-memory well. The data entered for these attributes is stored into the IP database. The
user could also set up the attribute 'Display Alias' labels in a language other than English.
Clicking on the 'Well Attributes' branch, as illustrated above, launches a 'grid' display in the right
hand side of the window. The grid contains four columns.
The left-hand 'Name' column contains an 'internal' IP Attribute 'Name'.
The second column contains a list of 'Display Alias' names. These 'Display Alias'
names are user-editable text entries that are used as labels for the Well 'cultural'
attributes in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module, on the 'General' tab, when the
user opens that module.
The 'LAS Output' column holds the well attribute mnemonics that will be exported with
any LAS file output from IP, if the attribute 'value' exists in the exported IP well.
The 'LIS Output' column holds the well attribute mnemonics that will be exported with
any LIS file output from IP, if the attribute 'value' exists in the exported IP well.
There are two kinds of 'Well Attributes' in IP. These are:

User-editable attributes - the user can add new attributes or delete existing attributes
or edit 'Alias' names for these attributes.
Fixed attributes - All the attributes prefixed with a double asterisk (**), as illustrated
below, are considered 'Fixed' attributes and correspond with those attributes that have,
to date, been stored in older versions of IP. The 'fixed' attributes are there to ensure
compatibility when updating older IP databases to IP V3.3 and later versions. 'Fixed'
attributes can not be deleted from the list, although their associated 'Alias' names can be
edited.
The list of 'Well Attributes' can be extended using the 'Add' button. One can insert additional
entries to the list. For example, you might want to add the new attributes 'Interpretation By:' and
'Interpretation Date:' to be able to record who has performed the interpretations on the current
database wells.
Click the 'Add' button at the bottom of the screen and type in a new 'Attribute' name into

Senergy Tools 1515
the window that is launched.

Click the 'OK' button to create the new entry. The 'Name' list will be sorted
alphabetically with the newly-created attribute placed accordingly.
Scroll down the page to the new 'Name' entry in the list and type in an 'Alias' in the
blank 'Alias' text box, as shown below:
The new 'Well Attribute' will be visible in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module on the '
General' Tab, as illustrated below. New entries are appended to the bottom of the list. When the
user adds data entries into these new fields that information will subsequently be saved to the
binary IPDBWellXXXXX.dat file when IP is closed or the well is saved to the database.

Any changes to the 'Well Attributes' can be exported to a file and distributed to other users using
the 'Export' button. By clicking the 'Export' button the user is prompted to save the configuration
to a file with the extension .configUpdate in the 'Working Folder'. This file can then be copied
into a different users 'Working Folder'. When the new user launches IP any *.configUpdate files
are read and merged into the main configuration file (Intpetro.CONFIG which contains all
configuration settings available under the 'Options' window) before it in turn is used to configure
IP.
Log Attributes
'Log Attributes' are those logging parameters, for example 'Mud Density', 'Mud Filtrate
Resistivity' and 'Bottom Hole Temperature' that are loaded into IP from external LAS/ LIS/ DLIS
files. In previous versions of IP the 'Log Attributes' were hard-wired into the program code and
IP would only load those attributes that it 'recognized'. The 'Options' functionality allows the user
to edit and expand the list of recognized attributes in order to capture new logging parameters.
The 'Log Attributes' table is the 'reference' list of logging attributes/parameters for the IP
program.

Senergy Tools 1517
The 'Log Attributes' table illustrated in the right-hand panel, above, contains a reference list of
external 'Log Header' parameters that can be saved to the IP well / database. The table
comprises of an 'internal' IP Log Attribute 'Name' in the left-hand column and, in the right-hand
column, a list of 'Display Alias' names. Log Attribute 'Names' prefixed with a double asterisk (**)
are 'fixed' attributes and cannot be deleted from the reference table. These fixed attributes
enable users to upgrade Pre IP Version 3.3 databases and save the logging parameters stored in
them. The 'Display Alias' names are user-editable text entries that the user can modify, if they
wish, to their preferred language or naming convention. New attributes can be added, deleted and
the 'Display Alias' name changed, if required.
The 'Display Alias' list of names dynamically populates the parameter list on the 'Logging' tab' of
the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module. The 'Log Attributes' table provides the reference list
for a 'mapping' system which enables the user to associate different service company log header
mnemonics / parameters to a single internal IP 'Log Attribute' name, so that the attributes can be
recognized by the IP program and saved within the IP database.
The 'Log Attributes' names are listed in alphabetical order in the IP Configuration table, but they
are listed in the 'Manage Well Header Info.' module in the order seen in a typical API log header
hardcopy. New, user-created log attributes that are added to the IP Log Attributes list will appear
at the bottom of the list on the 'Logging' tab.
Well Attribute Mappings

The 'Well Attribute Mappings' table, shown below, allows the user to set up the connections
(mappings) between the IP 'Well Attributes' reference table and external file (LAS / LIS / DLIS)
'cultural' mnemonics held within the 'File Loader' table. The mappings are used to identify

external file header mnemonics at load time and to correctly load / store them into the 'Manage
Well Header Info.' module for the selected IP well.
The 'Well Attribute Mappings' table has three columns 'File Loader Mnemonic', 'Description'
and 'Well Attribute'. The first 2 columns correspond to the 'File Loader' table entries. The 'Well
Attribute' column provides a drop-down list of the IP reference 'Well Attributes' that the user
'maps' to the 'File Loader' attribute.
For example, if there is a well parameter in an external file with a mnemonic of LCNM (Logging
Company Name) which is not currently mapped in IP. Then you need to:
1. Add a new 'File Loader' entry: Open the 'File Loader' dialog. 'Click 'Add' to launch the
'New Attribute Name' dialog. Type in the new mnemonic LCNM, add a description and
click 'Save'.
2. Click on 'Well Attributes'. 'Add'. Type in 'ServiceComp' and in the 'Display Alias'
column add a descriptive name for the attribute. NOTE: this step is only required if the '
Well Attribute' does not already exist.
3. Click on the 'Well Attribute Mappings' label to open that dialog.
4. Click the 'Add' button. This launches an 'Add Mapping' window.

Senergy Tools 1519
5. Choose the 'File Loader Mnemonic' (LCNM) from the upper drop-down list box.
6. Choose the appropriate IP 'Well Attribute', for example -'ServiceComp' (Service
Company), from the 'Well Attribute' drop-down list in order to map the 'File Loader'
attribute to the IP Well attribute. The attribute may have to be created - see point 2.
7. Click 'OK'.
This ensures that any file that is loaded into IP, if it contains the log parameter LCNM mnemonic
and a value, that IP will load its' value into the 'General' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info.'
module as the 'Service Company' parameter for that log file.
Log Attribute Mappings

The 'Log Attribute Mappings' table allows the user to set up the connections (mappings)
between the IP 'Log Attributes' reference table and external file (LAS / LIS/ DLIS) log header
mnemonics held within the 'File Loader' table. The mappings are used to identify external log
header mnemonics at load time and to correctly load / store them into the 'Manage Well Header
Info.' module ('Logging' tab) of the selected IP well.
For example, if there is a logging parameter in an external file with a mnemonic of RMTMP
(Temperature of Mud Resistivity Measurement) which is not mapped in IP. Then you need to:
1. Add a new 'File Loader' entry. Open the 'File Loader' dialog. 'Click 'Add' to launch the
'New Attribute Name' dialog. Type in the new mnemonic RMTMP and click 'OK'.
2. Scroll down the 'Name' list to the new RMTMP entry and type in its' description into the '
Description' text entry box.
3. Click the 'Save' button.
4. Click on the 'Log Attribute Mappings' label to open that dialog.
5. Click 'Add'. This launches an 'Add Mapping' window.

6. Choose the 'File Loader Mnemonic' (RMTMP) from the upper drop-down list box.
7. Choose the appropriate IP 'Log Attribute' -RMTemp (Mud Resistivity Measured
Temperature), from the 'Log Attribute' drop-down list to map the 'File Loader' attribute to
the IP Log attribute.
8. Click 'OK'.
This ensures that any file that is loaded into IP, if it contains the log parameter RMTMP mnemonic
and a value, that IP will load its' value into the 'Logging' tab of the 'Manage Well Header Info.'
module as the 'Mud Resistivity Temperature' value for that log file.
24.12.3 File Loader

File Loader
The 'File Loader' window contains a list of 'external' mnemonic 'Names' together with a '
Description' in a second column for each mnemonic, as shown in the screen capture, below.
These are LIS Log Header mnemonics which were previously hard-coded into IP. When a LIS
file was loaded into IP, any mnemonic that was identified by the IP program at load time would be
saved into the selected IP well. The extendable 'File Loader' list now allows the user to add new
'external' mnemonics and an associated description for each new 'Name' which can then be
'mapped' to an IP 'Well Attribute' or 'Log Attribute'.

Senergy Tools 1521
To add a new 'File Loader' entry:

Click the 'Add' button. This launches the 'New Attribute name' window.
Type in a new attribute name. Attribute names must be unique entries.
Click 'OK' to load the new 'Name' into the table. Scroll down to the new Attribute 'Name'
and type in a description

The IP Configuration File (Intpetro.config)

The Intpetro.config file (found in the IP program install directory - IntPetro35) contains all the
'default' settings and user-defined definitions and descriptions for a particular IP installation.
These settings include :
'External Database Options'

'Well Attributes'
'Log Attributes'
'Well Attribute Mapping'
'Log Attribute Mapping'
'File Loader'
'Miscellaneous'
This single HTML text file is organized into separate sections for each of these configuration
'elements'. If the user makes any changes in the 'Options' module user-interface, for example to
add, define and 'map' a new Log Attribute and then 'clicks' the 'Save' button, the change will be
stored directly into the Intpetro.config file. This means that the next time IP is launched, the
updated configuration file will be loaded and the new attribute will be available to load data into.
Also, if the user sets up connections to external databases through the 'Options' interface, these
settings will be saved to the Intpetro. config file, so that, on launching IP at a later date, the
connection settings will still be available.
Saving changes to a local Intpetro.config file

To save any changes made in the 'Options' interface directly to the configuration file, click the '
Save' button at the bottom of the 'IP Configuration' screen, after you have made your changes to
the tables.
Saving changes to individual Attribute Tables

Each 'Attribute' table in the 'Options' interface can be saved separately to an external

Senergy Tools 1523
.configUpdate file. By default these files are saved into the IP installation directory. The
Attribute tables and their associated configuration files are listed below:
'Well Attributes' Table - WellAttributes.configUpdate

'Log Attributes' Table - LogAttributes.configUpdate
'Well Attribute Mapping' Table - Well AttributeMapping.configUpdate
'Log Attribute Mapping' Table - LogAttributeMapping.configUpdate
'File Loader' Table - FileLoaderAttributes.configUpdate
Why might you want to do this ?
For example, saving changes so that 'corporate' settings for a particular Attribute table can be
distributed throughout an organization or between multiple IP users. In a non-English speaking
company for instance, with multiple IP users, a corporate 'Log Attribute' naming convention could
be set up by one user. By saving the 'Log Attribute' table to an external file, using the 'Export'
button, these changes could be written to a text file and e-mailed to all other IP users. The other
users could paste the file into their own IP installation directory and, the next time that IP is
launched, the text file is merged with the existing IntPetro.config file and updates everyone's IP
configuration.
24.12.4 Well Folder Structure

Well Folder Structure
This enables the user to change the folder structure for any new wells created in an IP database.
The well folder structure is only created when a new well is saved to the database.

The user has to 'click' 'Save' on the 'IP Configuration' module for the 'Well Folder Structure'
changes to be applied. However, as noted above, the 'Well Folder Structure' will not appear in
the database browser until the newly created well is saved, using the 'File' 'Save All Wells to
Database'.
If the user wishes to add more folders to the 'Well Folder Structure' or to apply the 'Well Folder
Structure' to wells already saved in the database then 'clicking' on the 'Apply To...' button opens
the 'Select Database Wells' module. The user can then scroll down the well list and select the

Senergy Tools 1525
wells to which to apply this new 'Well Folder Structure' to.


Senergy Tools 1527
If the user removes folders from the 'Well Folder Structure' then it is only newly created Wells
that will have the reduced 'Well Folder Structure'. The reduced 'Well Folder Structure' will not
be applied to 'old' saved Wells within the database. This is to prevent users from inadvertently
deleting data that may reside in the removed folders. If the user really wants to remove folders
from old, saved Wells then the user will have to do it manually via Windows Explorer TM.
24.12.5 LAS 3 Configuration

LAS 3 Configuration
24.12.6 Miscellaneous Options
Miscellaneous Options
The 'Miscellaneous Options' screen allows the user to set up eleven configuration options.
These are:

'Trace Level' - sets the level of IP process reporting that is sent to the IP Message
Board.
'Show Database Browser' - 'ticking' the check-box means that whenever you open IP,
the program will always launch with the IP Database Browser display on-screen.
'Default Plots Location' - this parameter, previously stored in the ProgDefs.OPT file,
sets up where IP looks for the 'default' log plot format files . The default setting is to the
IntPetro35 installation directory, 'Default Plots' sub-directory, which is shipped with the
application. If you have another, network location for multiple users to access a
common 'Default Plots' folder then this location should be set here.
'Use Tabbed Work areas' - 'check' if user wants multi-Work areas or 'uncheck' for just
one Work area. See 'User Interface and Data Entry' for more details on multi-Work
areas.
'Hide close button on Work areas' - 'check' if user wants to hide the close button on
any Work area tab. This will prevent the user from inadvertently closing down Work
areas.
'Enable fading Parameter windows' - if this is 'checked' then any Parameter window
(for example Clay Volume Parameters) will 'fade' - i.e. become semi-transparent if the
Parameter window is opened over an already opened window. This allows the user to
see through the stay-on-top Parameter window to the underlying window. Moving the
mouse cursor back over the faded Parameter window restores the Parameter window
opacity.
'Show Histogram Statistics Table' - If this is 'checked' then the statistics table will be
shown along with the curve histogram in the Histogram module. If 'Show Histogram
Statistics Table' is 'un-checked' then the statistics table won't be shown with the curve
Histogram. However, the user can select to show the statistics table from the 'Type'
menu within the Histogram module by using the 'Show Statistics Table'.
'Irregular Set depth tolerance' - when loading data into an irregular step curve Set the
program has to decide whether the depth of the data being loaded corresponds to depth
already in the Set or whether a new depth in the Set has been created. The 'Irregular
Set depth tolerance' parameter is the allowable difference between the two depths in
order to count the depths as the same.
For example :

Senergy Tools 1529
Current irregular Set depths:

8000.2
8010.6
8020.3
8040.1
Depths of data to be loaded:

8000.3
8020.6
8040.3
Using the default 'Irregular Set depth tolerance' of 0.2 ft then the irregular Set after
loading the data will be:
8000.2
8010.6
8020.3
8020.6
8040.1
The 8000.3 data will be loaded at 8000.2 and the 8040.3 data will be loaded at 8040.1. A
new 8020.6 depth will have to be created.
'CSV Delimiter' - this allows the user to select either 'Comma' or 'Semicolon' for
delimiting their output CSV files. This is especially useful for users of German language
Excel.
'Enable Background' - if the 'sunburst' background which appears on Histograms and
Crossplots in IP v3.5 is not to the users taste then 'unchecking' this box will revert the
Crossplot and Histogram backgrounds to their standard Windows colour.
'Work area Background' - if the user wishes to replace the background colour of the
Work area from the Windows default then they have the option of 'checking' the 'Solid
Colour' option and changing the colour to whatever they wish.

24.12.7 Custom Toolbars and Menus

Custom Toolbars and Menus
This has the same functionality as accessing the Toolbars by using the 'View' 'Toolbars' '
Your Toolbars and Menus'. Here it is possible to configure three user defined toolbars (User
Defined 1, User Defined 2 and User Defined 3) and user defined menus from the 'Toolbar' and '
Main Menu' tabs respectively.

Senergy Tools 1531
Customisation of a menu is achieved in a similar fashion in the 'Main Menu' tab, with the user
setting the name of the menu and then selecting and ordering the menu items.

The Custom Menu will appear next to the IP standard menu items at the top of the IP window
once 'Save' has been 'clicked'. To activate the User Defined toolbars 'click' 'View' 'Toolbars'
and 'tick' on the 'User Defined x'

Senergy Tools 1533
To delete a User Defined toolbar select the toolbar in the 'Destination Menu' on the 'Main Menu'
tab within 'Options' 'IP Configuration' 'Custom Toolbars and Menus' and then just move
all of the toolbar symbols out of the list using the left arrow button. This has the effect of deleting
the User Defined toolbar.

24.12.8 Well Security

Well Security
For more information on this option follow this link to 'Database Security'.

Senergy Tools 1535
24.12.9 Curve Aliasing

Curve Aliasing
By 'clicking' on the 'Click to Open in Own window' this will open the 'Curve Aliasing' module in
its own window which may be more convenient than having it open from the 'Options' module.
This module can also be accessed from 'Tools' 'Edit Curve Aliasing'.
24.12.10Corporate Search Folders

'Corporate Search folders' (CSF) are designed to allow for a folder(s) (normally a networked
shared folder) to be used as a common location allowing multiple users access to IP related
resources. Use of this feature is ideal when many users require shared access to such files as
Company Specific Log Plot Formats, User defined Overlay lines or User Programs, etc.
The following files are serviced by the 'Corporate Search folders':
Log Plot format files.

Crossplot and Histogram saved format files.
User Programs.

Crossplot Overlay line files.

All the default configuration files available from 'Tools' 'Defaults'.
When using Corporate folders the 'Load Format' pop-up menus (Crossplots/Histograms/User
Programs) mimic the folder structure as defined in 'Tools' 'Options' 'Corporate Search
folders'. If the 'Corporate Folders' is 'Disabled' then IP uses the default folder settings for
locating plot, crossplot and histogram formats; these are normally on the users hard drive.
However, if the 'Corporate Folders' is 'Enabled' then the user can specify the location of their
format files and map new folders to network drives as well as their hard drives.
[Note: the order in which the system searches through and displays the Corporate Folders is from
the top of the list down]
By 'clicking' on each of the 'Corporate search folders' their paths can be viewed in the 'Path'
box. New paths can be created by using the browse button and locating the required folder,
be it on the users hard drive or network drive. The order in which the folders are displayed can be
changed using the 'Order' up/down arrows.

Senergy Tools 1537
If incorrect paths for folders are typed into the fields then the path will be grayed out and show as
being offline. The user can use the browse for folder button to locate the correct path and use the
'Replace' button to update the 'Corporate search folders' list.
The 'Validate Folders' button can be used to quickly check that the path to the folders is valid, if
say, network drives are re-mapped.


Senergy Tools 1539

If a user moves a folder which has been mapped within the 'Corporate search folders' and
hasn't updated the 'Corporate search folders' then when the user attempts to access formats
within the Log Plots, Crossplot or Histogram modules an error message will appear informing the
user that the path to the folder that has been moved is no longer valid. The user could disable the
'Corporate Folders', re-map the moved folder or or use the 'Delete Invalid Paths' button to
delete the path (NOTE: this only deletes the path within the 'Corporate search folders' and not
the actual folders).
NOTE: for User Programs a user cannot edit or delete programs that exist on a Network folder.
This is a safety feature. Also with User Programs the programs must be stored on a network
drive in a sub-folder called "UserPrograms" in order for IP to detect them.
Sub-folders can be created and as long as they are named xxx.hst (histogram), xxx.xpt
(crossplot) or xxx.plt (log plot) and a .hst, .xpt or a .plt file exist within the relevant sub-folder then
the sub-folder will appear within the relevant module.
For example, the user creates a sub-folder called Test.hst in his I:\IP Databases\IP
Formats\Histogram Formats folder. Within this sub-folder is a GR.hst file.
If the user now opens up the Histogram module and 'clicks' on the drop-down arrow adjacent to
the 'Load Format' button, the sub-folder 'Test' now exists within the 'My Histogram Formats
Histogram' folder and the GR.hst histogram format file can be selected.

Senergy Tools 1541
Program Default Files

Many aspects of IP are configurable by editing various text files accessed from the 'Tools' '
Defaults' menu. This feature along with Corporate folders can enable a group of IP users to work
from a common set of configuration files. The configuration files currently catered for under this
mechanism are as follows:
Curve System defaults (default and User defined).

Curve Type defaults (default and User defined).
Curve Alias configuration.

Mineral Solver (default and User defined).

Crossplot Overlay setup file.
Monte Carlo settings.
Unit Conversions.
Neutron Tool Types.
The configurable files (*.opt, *.ovl, *.par, *.neu) could be saved to a network drive folder and then
each user maps a path to this folder in Corporate Search Folders.

Section
25
User Programs
25 User Programs
The 'User Programs' module allows the user to create their own analysis routines. The routines
can be very simple, one line routines or more sophisticated, long routines which loop through the
data multiple times. The routines are written by the user in either FORTRAN, PASCAL, C++,
VB.NET or C#.NET.
User program compiled code can be loaded and unloaded without exiting IP. A typical workflow
for creating a user program is to setup the parameters, write the code and then compile. Once
compiled without errors, the user will start testing. The testing and modifications of the code
should be all possible without exiting IP.
The FORTRAN and C++ compiler and Linker are from the Free Software Foundation (GNU) and
can be downloaded from the internet free of charge. http://gcc.gnu.org .
The IP CD contains a Windows Installer for the GNU compiler version 2.95 which can be run by
'clicking' on the 'Install GCC Compiler' button. This installer will install all necessary files and
setup all appropriate Environmental Variables.
Alternatively, if a manual install is preferred, there is a zipped file containing version 2.95 GNU
compiler in the GNU FORTRAN and C folder on the IP CD. Once this folder has been unzipped
and the files installed on the users C: drive then the users Environmental Variables path has to be
modified so that IP can locate the compiler.
To modify the users environmental variables go to Control Panel System Advanced
Environmental Variables, scroll down and locate 'Path' within the 'System variables' window. Click
on 'Edit' and then add the following ;C:\gcc-2.95.2\bin in front of the ;C\Program Files. NOTE: on
some users computers it maybe necessary to remove the '-' and '.' from the gcc-2.95.2 directory
so that it reads as gcc2952 and use this in the Path.
NOTE: it appears the GNU compiler does not like single Letter code names like 'A', 'B', 'C'.
Output curve names need to be renamed to at least a 2 character mnemonic e.g. 'AA', 'BB', 'CC'.
The PASCAL compiler needed is Borland's DELPHI version 4 or higher (older versions of
DELPHI may also work).
NOTE:
1. any existing user programs will need to be updated to take account of the new 'Trend
curve' functionality. Old programs prior to 3.1, coded in Pascal, will fail to run and will
need to be updated. Old Fortran programs should work, but it is in the users interest to
update code as described in the main 'Help' document.
Section 25. User Programs :

Senergy User Programs 1545
2. If the User re-writes a user program and adds / re-orders parameters, the old program
'Zone Set' is no longer valid and the user should delete and recreate the Zone Set.
Section 25. User Programs :

25.1 Options
The 'User Program' - 'Options' window allows the user to select the defaults for the 'Compiler', '
Editor' (the program used to edit the program code) and the 'User Program Directory' into which
the programs are stored. It also allows the user to select a program for editing User Program
icons in the 'Icon Editor'.
On network systems, it is possible for users to share user programs by having the same 'User
Program Directory' set for each user. NOTE: a user cannot edit or delete user programs that
exist on a Network folder, they can only be run. This is a safety feature. Also with User Programs
the programs must be stored on a network drive in a sub-folder called "UserPrograms" in order
for IP to detect them. See 'Corporate Search Folders' for more information on sharing IP files.
Compiler
A VB.Net and a C#.Net compiler have been added to the User Programs for v3.5 and beyond.
Icon Editor
The 'Icon Editor' is only accessed from the 'Edit Program' menu item. Select a programme to
edit and the 'User Programming' module opens. 'Click' on the 'Edit Icon' button and the current
icon (UPImage.bmp) is opened in whatever editor the user had selected in the 'Icon Editor' box in
the 'User Program Options' window.
Section 25.1 User Programs : Options

In this case the 'Icon Editor' is mspaint.exe so the UPImage.bmp is available for editing in
Microsoft PaintTM.

After changes have been made to the icon, the icon file must be saved as UPImage.bmp. This
will enable the IP program to pick up the icon image and display it correctly. NOTE: all User
Programs are contained within their own folders within the IntPetro35\UserPrograms folder, which
means that files can have the same name.
Help Editor
The 'Help Editor' is accessed through the 'New Program' and 'Edit Program' modules when the
'Create Help' button is 'clicked'. This functionality allows the user to write a help document for the
user program with a word-processing program of choice.
The 'Default Help File Ext.' should be used to determine the type of file to be used for the help
document. For example, if the default type extension is set to "doc" then the Help button for a user
program will be enabled if there is a valid UserProgram.doc file in the user program folder.

25.2 New User Program

The 'New User Program' option provides the user with the functionality to design and execute
custom-built programs in IP. The module is arranged on a set of 'tabbed' input / output screens.
These are:
'Input Curves'
'Output Curves'
'Input Parameters'
'Input Text Parameters'
'Input Logic Flags'
'Tabs set up'
'Plot Setup (Optional)'
The 'tabs' are described fully, below.
The 'Module Name' is the name of the user program that is inserted into the 'User programs'
menus. It is also the name of the subdirectory created to store all the information for the program.
The subdirectory is created in the 'Userprograms' folder, which is a subdirectory of the main IP
program directory, or is set in the User Programs 'Options' window.
The programming language is selected by 'checking' the appropriate box at the top of the main
window. The default programming language can be set in the User Program 'Options' window.
The 'Use Zones' box, if 'checked', allows the created user program to have zonable parameters.
Section 25.2 User Programs : New User Program

'Input Curves' Tab

This 'tab' is used to define the 'Input Curves' to be used.
'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the input curve.
'Window Label' - this is the label which will appear in the runtime module, alongside the
box where the input curve is selected.
'Default Type' - is the input curve default type. This can be used to try to auto-select the
correct input curve ( it is an 'optional' parameter).
NOTE: a maximum number of 70 input curves is allowed in each user program.
'Output Curves' Tab

This tab is used to define the 'Output Curves'. These are curves that will be created if they do not
already exist in a well.
NOTE: the difference between input curves and output curves is that the input curves must exist
in order to run the user program. However, it is allowed and possible for the user program to write
to the input curve.
'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the 'Output Curve'.
'Window Label' - is the label which will appear in the runtime module, alongside the box
where the output curve is selected.
'Default Name' - is the default name for the output curve (optional parameter).
'Curve Units' - are the units for the output curve, only used if the curve is being created
by the user program (optional parameter).

'Curve Type' - is the curve type for the output curve, only used if the curve is being
created by the user program (optional parameter).
'Plot Lft Scale' - is the plot default left scale for the curve, only used if the curve is being
'Plot Rht Scale' - is the plot default right scale for the curve, only used if the curve is
being created by the user program (optional parameter).
'Plot Log/Lin' - is the plot default logarithmic or linear scale option for the curve, only
used if the curve is being created by the program (optional parameter).
'Plot Color' - is the plot default colour for the curve, only used if the curve is being
'Use Array' - check this value if the output curve is to be an array curve.
'# X Array' - if the output curve is an array enter the number of samples in the X
dimension in the array.
'# Z Array' - if the output curve is an array enter the number of samples in the Z or depth
dimension in the array.
NOTE: Don't leave empty lines between lines of code as it can cause problems with the indexing
of the code instructions.
'Input Parameters' Tab

This 'tab' is used to define the 'Input Parameters' to be used.
'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the various input
parameters.
'Window Label' - is the title label which will appear in the runtime module in the column
header, above where the input parameter is selected. On the user Runtime screen, the
column heading label will populate the two title cells, depending upon how the text string
is written in the program screen.
For example, the strings 'a'_value and 'm' value are translated to :

The syntax applied is such that :

words separated by an underscore '_' symbol will appear on the same line
words separated by a space in the text string will appear in separate title
cells.
NOTE:
1. There is a maximum text string length of 15 characters allowed for the '
Window Label'.
2. To make changes to the existing titles, the user must first delete the '
Parameter Set' for the user program. See the 'Delete Parameter Set' module
accessed from the 'Well' 'Delete Parameter Set' 'Other Sets' 'UPxxx'
where 'UPxxx' is the User Program Parameter Set name.
'Default Value' - is the default value which will appear in the parameter box in the
runtime program (optional parameter).
'Min Value' - when the runtime module is run, the program checks that the input
parameter is greater than or equal to this parameter. An error message will appear if the
input parameter is less than this value (optional parameter).
'Max Value' - when the runtime module is run, the program checks that the input
parameter is less than or equal to this parameter. An error message will appear if the
input parameter is greater than this value (optional parameter).
'Display Tab Name' - this is a drop-down list of all the User Program 'Tabs' defined on
the 'Tabs Set up' tab.
'Tab Disp Order' - is the order in which the defined parameters will appear on their
respective tabs.The user needs to do some planning beforehand in order to decide how
the user program is to look in terms of; how many tabs? which parameters on which tab
? etc...
NOTE : A maximum of 70 parameters are allowed in total per user program. A maximum of
20 parameters are permitted per 'tab'.

'Input Text Parameters' Tab

Text parameters allow the user to select logic flow by choosing a text string from a drop down
menu. An example of this usage is in the PhiSw module where the type of Sw equation can be
selected from a drop down menu list.

'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the various input
parameters.
header, above where the 'Parameter' is selected. On the user Runtime screen, the
'Text Value' - contains sets of strings which will be used to make up the drop-down
menu in the runtime module.
'Default Value' - this is the default string to display when the user program is initialised.
'Display Tab Name' - is a drop-down list of all the User Program 'Tabs' defined on the '
Tabs Set up' tab.
respective tabs. The user needs to do some planning beforehand in order to decide how
? etc...
'Input Logic Flags' Tab

This tab is used to define 'Logic Flags'. Logic Flags can be used to change how the program
works without having to rebuild the user program.
'Code Name' - is the name that is used in the code to access the 'Logic Flag'.
header, above where the 'Logic Flag' is selected. On the user Runtime screen, the

For example, the text string "m_? Shell" is translated to :
The syntax applied is such that :

words separated by an underscore '_' symbol will appear on the same line
words separated by a space in the text string will appear in separate title
cells.
NOTE:
1. There is a maximum text string length of 15 characters allowed for the
Window Label.
2. To make changes to the existing titles, the user must first delete the '
Parameter Set' for the user program. See the 'Delete Parameter Set' module
accessed from the 'Well' 'Delete Parameter Set' 'Other Sets' 'UPxxx'
where 'UPxxx' is the User Program Parameter Set name.
'Default Value' - is the default value for the Logic Flag (this is an optional parameter).
'Display Tab Name' - is a drop-down list of all the User Program 'Tabs' defined on the '
Tabs Set up' tab.
respective tabs. The user needs to do some planning beforehand in order to decide how
? etc...

'Tabs set up' Tab

The 'Tabs set up' tab allows the user to define the Tab 'titles' and the number of tabs that the
user program will occupy. The Tab names are then available to the user when setting up the '
Input Parameters' tab. A maximum of 14 Parameter tabs can be set up.
There is an option for placing parameters into a tab that can't be seen by the user of the User
Program. The tab is called 'Hide' and any parameters placed into this tab will be hidden from view.
This tab can be used to hold parameters that the user wants to keep as constants.

'Plot Setup' Tab

Plots can only be set up for user programs that use zoning ('Use Zones' check box).
The 'Plot Setup' tab only needs to be completed if a Log Plot is required with the user program.
The three sub-tabs 'Grid', 'Curves' and 'Shading' are very similar to the normal Log Plot Format
set-up. However, only 'Input' or 'Output Curves' that have been set up in the user program can
be added to the plot. If additional curves are required for the log plot display but are not actually
used in the user program, then they must be added to the 'Input Curves' tab listing.
If a cross plot is required with the user program then the 'Crossplot' tab is the place for doing
this.
The 'Grid' sub-tab is illustrated below:

The 'Curves' sub-tab, illustrated below, has the option to add interactive lines. This is done by
selecting the Parameter which is to be 'made interactive' in the 'Parameter1' and/or 'Parameter2
' columns. The colour for the interactive lines in the plot is then set up in the 'colour1' and/or '
colour2' columns. The scaling for the Parameter will be the same as the scaling for the curve
set-up in the same line. All Parameters must have an associated Curve in order to scale them.
If an appropriate curve is not available, it is possible to generate one by adding another curve into
the 'Output curves' list. For example, if we had a Parameter 'm' and an interactive line was
needed for it, then create a curve called 'm' in the 'Output Curves' and add it to the plot. The plot
will be displayed with the curve 'm' but it will have no values. You can assign this curve the value
of the Parameter by adding a line of code into the user program to set the 'Output Curve' to the '
Parameter Value'.

The 'Shading' sub-tab, shown below, allows the user to define shading that will be used in the
Default Plot format.
The 'Crossplot' sub-tab allows the user to create interactive crossplots from the user program
default plot. Upto three interactive lines can be set-up per crossplot.

'Trk' - specifies which track in the log plot the crossplot pop-up menu will appear in.
'X Curve' - this is the X axis curve name. By 'clicking' in this cell a drop-down of all the
input and output curves used in the user program will appear.
'Y Curve' - this is the Y axis curve name.
'Line 1 X Param Start' - this defines the X axis parameter used for the start position of
the line. The parameter is picked from a drop-down list. The parameters need to be
entered in the 'Input Parameters' tab for them to appear in the drop-down list.
'Line 1 Y Param Start' - this defines the Y axis parameter used for the start position of
the line.
'Line 1 X Param Stop' - this defines the X axis parameter used for the end position of
the line. If left blank then rather than plotting a line, a point is plotted.
'Line 1 Y Param Stop' - this defines the Y axis parameter used for the end position of
the line.
Lines 2 and 3 have the same functionality as Line 1. If their positions are left blank then no line is
drawn. Multiple crossplots can be defined per track. Interactive lines can use the same start and
end parameters so it is possible too define an interactive triangle.
The 'Create Default Plot' button will create a plot with one curve per track for all Input and Output
curves. This is a good way to start creating a default plot, since it sets up all the zoning
information.
'Create Help'
The 'Create Help' button, if clicked, will open up a file called 'UserHelp.xxx' (the file is created in
the user program's directory). The user help extension is defined in the 'User Program Options'.
Documentation about the created user program can then be written, which will be available to
anyone who runs the user program. The word processor program used to write the help
documentation can be defined in 'User Program Options'.
When the user runs the user program, the 'Help' button on the form will open up this file.

Methodology
To create a new user program the following steps should be followed :
1) Enter the Program Name. NOTE that user program names cannot end with a
numeric character.
2) Enter the input and output curves, parameters and logic flags.
3) Choose the appropriate programming language.
4) Click the 'Edit Code' button and enter the code using the code editor (Notepad).
5) Save the code back to disk from the editor, using the 'Save' button in the editor. Do not
rename the file for the code - it must be called 'UsersCode.pas' for Pascal or '
UsersCode.f' for Fortran.
6) Click the 'Compile' button on the 'User Programming' window. The program will be
automatically compiled and linked to an executable DLL module. Any errors in the code
that are found by the compiler will be displayed in a 'DOS' window. The following is an
example of a successfully compiled program using Fortran:
The 'Warning' message given by the compiler can be ignored. However, all 'Error'
messages must be fixed. The following is a compilation failure due to an error in the users
code:

7) Once the file is compiled and linked correctly, it is then ready to test. The program is
accessible from the 'Users programs' menu.

25.3 User Program Code

Curve / Parameter Values in code
Curve and parameters are handled exactly the same inside the code. Input and output curves are
also treated the same. It is possible for a program to update an input curve from code (but not
recommended). Output curves are checked that they all belong to the same compatible curve Set
(same top, bottom, step) however input curves can belong to different Sets. Therefore, writing
back into an input curve may not give the results expected if the input curve is not compatible with
the output curves.
Curve / Parameter values can be read from code and also updated from code. A reason for
changing a parameter from code could be to calculate an average value for a curve in a zone
(see user program example 1).
Input parameters for zoned user programs can be either curves or fixed values. For this reason all
access to parameters must include the current depth index to get the parameter. This is true
either for reading or writing a parameter.
Reading Curves / Parameters
If the Code Name of a curve / parameter is Rw then to read the curve / parameter value into the
variable Xrw use the following :
Xrw = Rw(index) (FORTRAN, C, VB, Pascal and C#)
Writing Curves / Parmeters
If writing a variable XphiA to a curve / parameter called PhiAvthen use the following :
Call Save_PhiAv(index, XphiA) (FORTRAN)
Save_ PhiAv(index, XphiA); (Pascal, C#, C and VB)
Where index is the depth index to write the curve / parameter.

For a parameter if a index is not intended to be used (i.e. always a fixed parameter) then index
can be set to any fixed number (eg -1). The index number for a parameter is ignored if a fixed
value parameter is used.
Processing Depth Indexes

The user program code is called once per zone being processed (or once for non-zoned
programs). In order to know the interval over which to process the data the Top and Bottom depth
indexes are available in the program to allow looping through the data. The user sets up a loop to
transverse the data level by level.
It is possible to loop through the data more than once and to work with data at more than one
depth level at a time (see user program example 2). However, the user should access the data
only between the Top index and Bottom Index.
The following is an example of the loop statement to access all the data over the zone being
processed :
DO index = Index_Topdepth() , Index_BottomDepth() (FORTRAN)

FOR index:= Topdepth to BottomDepth do BEGIN (Pascal)
for ( index = TopDepth() ; index < BottomDepth() ; index++ ) { (C)
For index = TopDepth To BottomDepth (VB)
for ( index = TopDepth ; index < BottomDepth ; index++ ) { (C#)
Section 25.3 User Programs : User Program Code

NOTE: FORTRAN uses a different name for the Top and Bottom index.
Depth Curve
The Depth curve is always available to obtain values at an index. The following example shows
how the top and bottom depths of the interval being processed can be obtained and output.
write(55,*) 'Top = ',Depth(Index_Topdepth()), Bottom = ',Depth(Index_Bottomdepth())

(FORTRAN)
WriteLn(OutFile,'Top = ',Depth(Topdepth):8:3,' Bottom = ',Depth(Bottomdepth):8:3);
(Pascal)
writer.WriteLine(String.Format("Top = {0:00.0000}", Depth(TopDepth)))
(VB)
writer.WriteLine("Top = " + Depth(TopDepth) + " Bottom = " + Depth(BottomDepth));
(C#)
fprintf(Outfile, " Top = %f Bottom = %f\n", Depth(TopDepth()), Depth(BottomDepth()));
(C)
Never write back to the Depth curve. This could completely mess up the well if bad values were
posted back.
Zones
The user code is run once per zone to process. However, it is possible to control the zone being
processed from within the user program code. This can be used for example to write parameter
reports to a file which include the parameters from all zones. The demo user program '
Interp_Demo' does this.
Setting the Zone within the user code affects the results of calls to the zone depth indexes plus
all calls to get and set parameters.
To find the current zone being processed, use the ZoneNumber function which returns the
current zone number as an integer:
ZoneNumber() (FORTRAN, C)
ZoneNumber (Pascal, VB, C#)
To get the total number of zones in the parameter set use the TotalZones function which returns
the total number of zones as an integer:
TotalZones () (FORTRAN, C)
TotalZones (Pascal, VB, C#)
To change the current zone being processed use the SetZone procedure:
Call SetZone(iZone) (FORTRAN)
SetZone(iZone); (Pascal, C, C#)
SetZone(iZone) (VB)
Where iZone is the new zone number and must be of integer variable type.
To find out whether the zone being processed is the last zone the following code could be used :
IF (ZoneNumber() .EQ. TotalZones()) THEN (FORTRAN)

if ( ZoneNumber() == TotalZones() ) { (C)
IF ZoneNumber = TotalZones THEN BEGIN (Pascal)
If (ZoneNumber = TotalZones) Then (VB)

if (ZoneNumber == TotalZones) { (C#)
Text Parameters in Code

This allows the user to select parameters from a user defined text selection list. (see user
program example 1).
Inside the code, the name of 'Code Label' is used to access what was selected. I.e. if the 'Code
Name' was called 'SwEq', then in code a function called 'SwEq' will be created that returns the
current value of the list when called i.e. it returns a string. Inside the code this can be used like
this;
IF (SwEq() .EQ. 'Dual Water') THEN (FORTRAN)

if (strcmp(SwEq (), "Dual Water) == 0) { (C)
If SwEq() = Dual Water Then (Pascal)
If (SwEq = 'Dual Water') Then (VB)
If (SwEq == Dual Water) { (C#)
Logic Parameters in Code

Allows the user to select logic parameters (True / False) to direct the code flow. (see user
program example 1).
Inside the code, the name of 'Code Label' is used to access what was selected. I.e. if the 'Code
Name' was called 'ShellM', then in code a logic function can be used like this;
IF (ShellM()) Then (FORTRAN)

If (ShellM()) { (C)
If ShellM() Then (Pascal)
If (ShellM) Then (VB)
If (ShellM) { (C#)
Curve Attributes in code

The following curve attributes are available from code : (see user program example 1).
For Each Curve

Curve Name XXX_Name()
Curve Units XXX_Units()
Curve Comments XXX_Comments()
Where XXX is the curve code name.
The following is an example of how the curve Rt name and units can be accessed from code :
write(55,*) 'Rt = ', Rt_Name(), '(', Rt_Units(), ')' (FORTRAN)

WriteLn(OutFile, 'Rt = ', Rt_Name(), '(', Rt_Units(), ')'); (Pascal)
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat("Rt = ", Rt_Name, " (", Rt_Units, ")")) (VB)
writer.WriteLine("Rt = " + Rt_Name + " (" + Rt_Units + ")"); (C#)
In the C code an extra parameter is passed (character pointer) which is the returned value. The
user must create the space for the string.
char *aString, *aUnits;
aString = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 );
aUnits = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 );

Rt_Name( aString ); (C)

Rt_Units( aUnits); (C)
fprintf(Outfile, "\nRt = %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );
It is also possible to change the comments for a curve in the Curve Header. This is done by using
the following procedure/subroutine call.
Save_XXX_Comments( Text )
Where XXX is the curve code name and Text is a string value for the comment.
The following is an example of how the curve Sw comment field can be changed from code :
call Save_Sw_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program') (FORTRAN)

Save_Sw_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program'); (Pascal)
Save_Sw_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program") (VB)
Save_Sw_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program"); (C#)
In the C code the comment must be converted into a Character pointer before passing it to the
routine.
char *aString, *aUnits;
sprintf(aString, "Curve written by Archie user program");
Save_Sw_Comments(aString); (C)
Well Attributes in code

The following Well attributes are available directly : (see user program example 1).
For The Well Code Function

Well Name Well_Name()
Field Well_Field()
Company name Well_Company()
The following examples shows how they can be accessed from code :
write(55,*) ' Well : ', Well_Name() (FORTRAN)

WriteLn(OutFile,' Well : ', Well_Name); (Pascal)
writer.WriteLine(" Well : " & Well_Name) (VB)
writer.WriteLine(" Well : " + Well_Name); (C#)
In the C code an extra parameter is passed (character pointer) which is the returned value. The
user must create the space for the string.
char *aString;
Well_Name( aString ); (C)
fprintf(Outfile, " Well : %s\n" , aString );
For other Well attributes the following function can be used.
Read_Well_Attribute( AttributeName )

Where AttributeName will be the 'Name' in the IP configuration tables.
The following examples shows how the KB Elevation (name KBElev) could be accessed from
code :
write(55,*) ' KB Elevation: ', Read_Well_Attribute(KBElev) (FORTRAN)

WriteLn(OutFile, ' KB Elevation: ', Read_Well_Attribute(' KBElev ')); (Pascal)
writer.WriteLine("KB Elevation: " & Read_Well_Attribute("KBElev ")) (VB)
writer.WriteLine("KB Elevation: " + Read_Well_Attribute("KBElev ")); (C#)
In the C code the procedure has two variables, both character pointers.
char *aString, * attribute;
attribute = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 );
sprintf(attribute, "KBElev");
Read_Well_Attribute(attribute, aString);
fprintf(Outfile, " KB Elev : %s\n", aString );

To write an attribute in to the well the following procedure is used :
Write_Well_Attribute( AttributeName, AttributeValue)
The AttributeName will be the 'Name' in the IP configuration tables. The AttributeValue will be
the new value of the attribute.
The following examples shows how the Location could be updated from code :
Call Write_Well_Attribute('Location', North Sea Black 14/12) (FORTRAN)

Write_Well_Attribute('Location', North Sea Black 14/12); (Pascal)
Write_Well_Attribute("Location", " North Sea Black 14/12") (VB)
Write_Well_Attribute("Location", " North Sea Black 14/12"); (C#)
Write_Well_Attribute("Location", " North Sea Black 14/12"); (C)
Log Run Attributes in code

To read Log Run attributes from the well the following function is used :
Read_Log_Attribute( AttributeName, LogRunNumber)
The AttributeName will be the 'Name' in the IP Log configuration tables. The LogRunNumber
will be the log number to look up the log attribute from. If a -1 is entered as the log number then
the program will return the first log attribute not blank in a run number. I.e. if looking for log
attribute Rmf and there is no value in Run 1 but there is a value in Run 2 then the program will
return the Run 2 value.
The following examples shows how the Rw log parameter for run 1 could be read from code :
RwString = Read_Log_Attribute('Rw', 1) (FORTRAN)

RwString := Read_Log_Attribute('Rw', 1); (Pascal)
RwString = Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", 1) (VB)
string RwString = Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", 1); (C#)
In the C code the procedure has one extra variables which is the passed back attribute value, this
needs to be a character pointer.
char *aString, * attribute;
Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", aString, 1); (C)
NOTE: the results of this call always returns a character string. Hence if a numeric value is
needed this will have to be read from the string.
To write Log attributes to the well the following function is used :
Write_Log_Attribute( AttributeName, AttributeValue, LogRunNumber)
The AttributeName will be the 'Name' in the IP Log configuration tables. The AttributeValue will
be the new value of the attribute (string). The LogRunNumber will be the log number to write the
attribute to, if a -1 is entered then the value will be populated in the first blank value in the log
runs.

The following examples shows how the Rw log parameter for run 2 could be written from code :
Call Write_Log_Attribute('Rw', RwString, 2) (FORTRAN)

Write_Log_Attribute('Rw', RwString , 2); (Pascal)
Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2) (VB)
Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2); (C#)
Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2); (C)
Where RwString is the new the Rw log parameter character value.
Curve Array Data

Array data curves can be accessed from within a user program and new array data curves
created. For array data curves, each database sample level can have multiple samples in both the
'X' dimension and also the 'Z' or 'Y' depth dimension. In the user program code the depth
dimension is referred to as the 'Y' dimension.
Accessing array data from within a user program is similar to normal data except there are three
parameters to pass; 'sample index', 'X index' and 'Y index'.
To read an array curve the function is:

Array_XXX(Index, Xindex, Yindex)
Where
XXX is the curve code name
Index is the well depth sample index
XIndex is the index into the array in the X dimension
YIndex is the index into the array in the Y or depth dimension
To save data into an array curve the procedure or subroutine is:

Save_Array_XXX(Index, Xindex, Yindex,Value)
Where
XXX is the curve code name
Index is the well depth sample index
Xindex is the index into the array in the X dimension
Yindex is the index into the array in the Y or depth dimension
Value is the value to save at the index
To find out the dimensions of an array curve the following functions can be used:
Array_XXX_MaxX() X dimension
Array_XXX_MaxY() Y or depth dimension
The user program example 3 shows how these functions can be used.

25.4 Example User Program 1

The following example shows a user program created to perform a complete petrophysical
analysis from the determination of clay volume through to pay and reservoir summations.
The program uses all of the new User program functionality including creating crossplots with
interactive lines from log plots and parameter drop-down boxes for example.
'Input Curves' define the code names for the deep resistivity, gamma ray, density and sonic
curves.
'Input Parameter' tab defines all of the input parameters. Default values and limits are set so that
the user cannot enter non-sensible values.
Section 25.4 User Programs : Example User Program 1

In the 'Input Text Parameters' tab there are two text parameters; a porosity equation with two
choices and a water saturation equation, again with two choices. More choices could be added to
the 'Text Value' box if required.

The 'Input Logic Flag' is set so that the user can switch on/off the use of the Shell formula for 'm
'.

The 'Output Curves' will be called the 'Window Label' name in the code but the default database
curve name is the 'Default Name'. This output curve name can be changed by the user at
runtime. NOTE: the output Set has been defined with the 'Default Name'. The Set will have to be
created in the well in which this user program is run if it does not already exist.
The plot was created using the 'Create Default Plot' button and then edited to put the 'Rwapp'

curve in the same track as the 'Rt' curve and the 'Rwapp' interactive line was added.


The code is written for the different languages and is shown below
'GNU Fortran'
'Delphi Pascal'
'GNU C/C++'
'Microsoft VB .NET'
'Microsoft C# .NET'

The code for the program in GNU Fortran is as follows.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
c
c User Code for Fortran 77
c
SUBROUTINE UserCode()
IMPLICIT INTEGER (I-N)
INCLUDE 'InOutDef.INC'
CHARACTER*(40) RwString
c
c All user defined input parameters and logic flags are treated as
functions.
c As such they must be used with a () at the end of their name.
c For example: Input parameter RW is used in an equation as RW(); AA = RW()
+ 2.
c To use trend curves as input parameters the depth INDEX must also be
passed into the function.
c RW(INDEX), AA = RW(INDEX) + 2.
c
c Input curves are used in equations as functions.
c Vclay = (GR(INDEX) - GRclean(INDEX)) / (GRclay(INDEX) - GRclean(INDEX))
c INDEX is the integer index into the curve array. GRclay and GRclean are
defined
c as input parameters. GR is the input curve. If GRclean is enterd by the
use as a fixed value
c then the INDEX parameter in GRclean(INDEX) is ignored.
c Input curve DEPTH is always available and does not have to be defined as
an input curve.
c
c Data is saved by using the SAVE_***(INDEX, VALUE) procedure. Where *** is
the
c output curve name. VALUE is the value to store at INDEX.
c CALL SAVE_VCL(INDEX, 0.5) saves value 0.5 into the output curve VCL.
c
c
c calculate the Pickett plot end point parameters
Call CalculatePickett
c
c Intitalize zonal averages
PayNet = 0.0
ResNet = 0.0
PhiPay = 0.0
PhiRes = 0.0
SwPay = 0.0
SwRes = 0.0
VclPay = 0.0
VclRes = 0.0
BVWPay = 0.0
BVWRes = 0.0
PayCount = 0.0
ResCount = 0.0
c
c Loop through the data one level at a time
c Index_Topdepth and Index_BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered
on the run window.
C
DO 100 INDEX = Index_Topdepth() , Index_BottomDepth()
c

c
c Calculate porosity depending om method
IF (PorEq() .EQ. 'Sonic') THEN
S = Son(INDEX)
IF (S .GT. 0.0) THEN
Por = (S - SonMat(INDEX)) * SonCp(INDEX) /
> (SonFluid(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX))
ELSE
Por = -999.0
endif
c Calculate clay porosity
PorClay = (SonClay(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX)) * SonCp(INDEX) /
> (SonFluid(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX))
ELSE
D = Den(INDEX)
IF (D .GT. 0.0) THEN
Por = (D - DenMat(INDEX)) /
> (DenFluid(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX))
ELSE
Por = -999.0
ENDIF
c Calculate clay porosity
PorClay = (DenClay(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX)) /
> (DenFluid(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX))
ENDIF
c Calculate Clay volume

G = GR(INDEX)
IF (G .NE. -999.0) THEN
VClay = (G - GRCLEAN(INDEX)) /
> (GRCLAY(INDEX) - GRCLEAN(INDEX))
IF (Vclay .GT. 1.0) THEN

Vclay = 1.0
ELSEIF (Vclay .LT. 0.0) THEN
Vclay = 0.0
ENDIF
c Correct Porosity for clay
Por = Por - Vclay * PorClay
IF (Por .LT. 0.0001) THEN
Por = 0.0001
ENDIF
ELSE
VClay = -999.0
Por = -999.0
ENDIF
c Calculate Water Saturation

Res = Rt(Index)
IF ((Por .LE. 0.0) .OR. (Res .LE. 0.0)) THEN
WatSat = -999.0
Rwa = -999.0
BVW = -999.0
ELSE
c Check for Shell m
IF (Shellm()) THEN
XX = 1.87 + 0.019 / Por
ELSE
c set m to input parameter

XX = XM(INDEX)
ENDIF
c Check for Archie equation
IF (SwEq() .EQ. 'Archie') THEN
c calculate F
F = XA(INDEX) / Por**XX
c calculate Sw
WatSat = (F * Rw(INDEX) / Res)**(1.0/XN(INDEX))
ELSE
c calculate Sw Indonesian
WatSat = (Res**0.5 *
> ( VClay**(1.0-VClay/2.0) / Rclay(INDEX)**0.5 +
> Por**(XX/2.0) / (XA(INDEX)*Rw(INDEX))**0.5 )
> ) ** (-2.0/XN(INDEX))
ENDIF
c Limit Sw
IF (WatSat .GT. 1.2) THEN
WatSat = 1.2
ENDIF
C calculate Rw apparent
Rwa = Res * Por**XX / XA(INDEX)
c calculate BVW
IF (WatSat .LT. 1.0) THEN
BVW = WatSat * Por
ELSE
BVW = Por
ENDIF
ENDIF
c calculate the Net pay and net reservoir

c Limit Sw to 1.0
IF (WatSat .GT. 1.0) THEN
WS = 1.0
ELSE
WS = WatSat
ENDIF
IF ((Por .GE. PhiCut(INDEX)) .AND.
> (VClay .LE. VclCut(INDEX))) THEN
ResFlg = 1.0
IF (WS .LE. SwCut(INDEX)) THEN
PayFlg = 1.0
ELSE
PayFlg = 0.0
ENDIF
ELSE
ResFlg = 0.0
PayFlg = 0.0
ENDIF
c add results to zone averages

IF (ResFlg .EQ. 1.0) THEN
ResCount = ResCount + 1.0
PhiRes = PhiRes + Por
BVWRes = BVWRes + Por * WS
VclRes = VclRes + VClay
ENDIF
IF (PayFlg .EQ. 1.0) THEN
PayCount = PayCount + 1.0
PhiPay = PhiPay + Por
BVWPay = BVWPay + Por * WS

VclPay = VclPay + VClay

ENDIF
c output the curve results

Call SAVE_Phi(INDEX,Por)
Call SAVE_Vcl(INDEX,VClay)
Call SAVE_Sw(INDEX,WatSat)
Call SAVE_Rwapp(INDEX,Rwa)
Call SAVE_BVW(INDEX,BVW)
Call SAVE_NetResFlg(INDEX,ResFlg)
Call SAVE_NetPayFlg(INDEX,PayFlg)
100 CONTINUE
c
c
c Calculate Well Step from first 2 depths
Step = Depth(Index_Topdepth()+1) - Depth(Index_Topdepth())
c Calculate the zonal averages
ResNet = ResCount * Step
IF (ResCount .EQ. 0.0) THEN
PhiRes = 0.0
VclRes = 0.0
BVWRes = 0.0
SwRes = 0.0
ELSE
PhiRes = PhiRes / ResCount
VclRes = VclRes / ResCount
BVWRes = BVWRes / ResCount
SwRes = BVWRes / PhiRes
ENDIF
PayNet = PayCount * Step

IF (PayCount .EQ. 0.0) THEN
PhiPay = 0.0
VclPay = 0.0
BVWPay = 0.0
SwPay = 0.0
ELSE
PhiPay = PhiPay / PayCount
VclPay = VclPay / PayCount
BVWPay = BVWPay / PayCount
SwPay = BVWPay / PhiRes
ENDIF
c
c Output results back to parameters
c We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result
parameters are set as curves !
DO INDEX = Index_Topdepth() , Index_BottomDepth()
Call SAVE_NetRes(INDEX,ResNet)
Call SAVE_AvPhiRes(INDEX,PhiRes)
Call SAVE_AvVclRes(INDEX,VclRes)
Call SAVE_AvSwRes(INDEX,SwRes)
Call SAVE_NetPay(INDEX,PayNet)
Call SAVE_AvPhiPay(INDEX,PhiPay)
Call SAVE_AvVclPay(INDEX,VclPay)
Call SAVE_AvSwPay(INDEX,SwPay)
ENDDO
c
c

C Create a report to a file if this zone is the last zone

IF (ZoneNumber() .EQ. TotalZones()) THEN
OPEN (UNIT=55,FILE='Interp Demo FORTRAN Report.TXT',
> STATUS='UNKNOWN')
write(55,*) ' USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS'
write(55,*) ''
write(55,*) ' Well : ', Well_Name()
c Write well attributes using attribute name
write(55,*) ' Company : ', Read_Well_Attribute('Company')
write(55,*) ' Field : ', Read_Well_Attribute('Field')
write(55,*) ' KB Elev : ', Read_Well_Attribute('KBElev')
write(55,*) ' Input Curves '
write(55,*) ' Rt = ', Rt_Name(), '(', Rt_Units(), ')'
write(55,*) ' Gr = ', Gr_Name(), '(', Gr_Units(), ')'
write(55,*) ' Den = ', Den_Name(), '(', Den_Units(), ')'
write(55,*) ' Son = ', Son_Name(), '(', Son_Units(), ')'
write(55,*) ' Output Curve '
write(55,*) ' Phi = ', Phi_Name(), '(', Phi_Units(), ')'
write(55,*) ' Vcl = ', Vcl_Name(), '(', Vcl_Units(),')'
write(55,*) ' Sw = ', Sw_Name(), '(', Sw_Units(),')'
write(55,*) ' Rwapp = ', RwApp_Name(), '(', RwApp_Units(),
> ')'
write(55,*) ' BVW = ', BVW_Name(), '(', BVW_Units(),')'
write(55,*) ' NetPay = ', NetPayFlg_Name()
write(55,*) ' NetRes = ', NetResFlg_Name()
c Write the parameters by zone
DO I = 1, TotalZones()
c Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each zone
Call SetZone(I)
write(55,*) ''
write(55,*) ' Zone ', I, ' Input Parameters '
write(55,*) ' a = ', Xa(1)
write(55,*) ' m = ', XM(1)
write(55,*) ' n = ', XN(1)
write(55,*) ' Rw = ', Rw(1)
write(55,*) ' Sw Eq = ', SwEq()
write(55,*) ' Son Matrix = ', SonMat(1)
write(55,*) ' Son Fluid = ', SonFluid(1)
write(55,*) ' Son CP = ', SonCp(1)
write(55,*) ' Son Clay = ', SonClay(1)
write(55,*) ' Den Matrix = ', DenMat(1)
write(55,*) ' Den Fluid = ', DenFluid(1)
write(55,*) ' Por Eq = ', PorEq()
write(55,*) ' Den Clay = ', DenClay(1)
write(55,*) ' Gr Clean = ', GrClean(1)
write(55,*) ' Gr Clay = ', GrClay(1)
write(55,*) ' Depth Interval'
write(55,*) ' Top = ',Depth(Index_Topdepth()),
> ' Bottom = ',Depth(Index_Bottomdepth())
ENDDO
CLOSE (UNIT=55,STATUS='KEEP')
ENDIF
c
c Write to database who created these curves
call Save_Sw_Comments(
> 'Curve written by Interp Demo user program')
call Save_Rwapp_Comments(
call Save_Phi_Comments(

call Save_Vcl_Comments(
call Save_BVW_Comments(
call Save_NetResFlg_Comments(
call Save_NetPayFlg_Comments(
c
c
c
RETURN
c
END
c
c
c Calculate the Pickett plot line end points
c
SUBROUTINE CalculatePickett()
c
c
c Calculate m amd Rw from end point lines
Phi1 = PPphi1(-1)
Phi2 = PPphi2(-1)
Ro1 = PPres1(-1)
Ro2 = PPres2(-1)
IF (Phi1 .NE. Phi2) THEN
xmc = ( Log10(Max(Ro1,0.01)) - Log10(Max(Ro2,0.01)) ) /
> ( Log10(Max(Phi2,0.001)) - Log10(Max(Phi1,0.001)) )
ELSE
xmc = xm(-1)
ENDIF
Rwc = Ro1 * Phi1**xmc / XA(-1)
Rwc = Max(0.0001,Min(Rwc,100.0))
c
c Check to see if the values calculated are the default values
c If they are then assume that the pickett plot is not open and in use
c and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input
normal parameters
c
IF ( ( ABS(Rwc-RwPick(-1)) .LT. 0.001) .AND.
> ( ABS(xmc-MPick(-1)) .LT. 0.01) ) THEN
Rwc = Rw(-1)
Call SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc)
xmc = xm(-1)
Call SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc)
c Recalculate the line using the parameter values of m and Rw and save
Ro1 = XA(-1) * Rwc * Phi1**(-xmc)
Ro2 = XA(-1) * Rwc * Phi2**(-xmc)
Call SAVE_PPres1(-1,Ro1)
Call SAVE_PPres2(-1,Ro2)
ELSE
c New values of m and Rw save these and also the pickett defaults
Call SAVE_Rw(-1,Rwc)
Call SAVE_XM(-1,xmc)
Call SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc)
Call SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc)
ENDIF

c
END
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The code for the program in Delphi Pascal is as follows.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
unit UsersCode;
interface
uses Functions, Math;
Procedure UserCode; stdcall;

// declare other procedures and function in this Unit
Procedure CalculatePickett;
implementation
{User Code}
// declare all variables
Var
index, I : Integer;
PayNet, ResNet, PhiPay, PhiRes, SwPay, SwRes, VclPay, VclRes, BVWPay, BVWRes,
PayCount, ResCount : Single;
D, S, G, Por, VClay, PorClay, Res, XX, WatSat, BVW, WS, Step, Rwa, F, ResFlg,
PayFlg : Single;
OutFile : TextFile;
RwString : String;
begin
// calculate the Pickett plot end point parameters
CalculatePickett;
// Intitalize zonal averages
PayNet := 0.0;
ResNet := 0.0;
PhiPay := 0.0;
PhiRes := 0.0;
SwPay := 0.0;
SwRes := 0.0;
VclPay := 0.0;
VclRes := 0.0;
BVWPay := 0.0;
BVWRes := 0.0;
PayCount := 0.0;
ResCount := 0.0;
//
// Loop through the data one level at a time
// Topdepth and BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the run
window.
//
FOR index := Topdepth TO BottomDepth DO BEGIN
//
//
// Calculate porosity depending om method
IF PorEq() = 'Sonic' THEN BEGIN
S := Son(INDEX);

IF (S > 0.0) THEN

Por := (S - SonMat(INDEX)) * SonCp(INDEX) / (SonFluid(INDEX) -
SonMat(INDEX))
ELSE
Por := -999.0;
// Calculate clay porosity
PorClay := (SonClay(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX)) * SonCp(INDEX) /
(SonFluid(INDEX) - SonMat(INDEX));
END
ELSE BEGIN
D := Den(INDEX);
IF (D > 0.0) THEN
Por := (D - DenMat(INDEX)) / (DenFluid(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX))
ELSE
Por := -999.0;
PorClay := (DenClay(INDEX) - DenMat(INDEX)) / (DenFluid(INDEX) -
DenMat(INDEX));
END;
// Calculate Clay volume

G := GR(INDEX);
IF G <> -999.0 THEN BEGIN
VClay := (G - GRCLEAN(INDEX)) / (GRCLAY(INDEX) - GRCLEAN(INDEX));
IF (Vclay > 1.0) THEN
Vclay := 1.0
ELSE IF (Vclay < 0.0) THEN
Vclay := 0.0;
// Correct Porosity for clay
Por := Por - Vclay * PorClay;
IF Por < 0.0001 THEN
Por := 0.0001;
END
ELSE BEGIN
VClay := -999.0;
Por := -999.0;
END;
// Calculate Water Saturation

Res := Rt(Index);
IF (Por <= 0.0) OR (Res <= 0.0) THEN BEGIN
WatSat := -999.0;
Rwa := -999.0;
BVW := -999.0;
END
ELSE BEGIN
// Check for Shell m
IF Shellm() THEN
XX := 1.87 + 0.019 / Por
ELSE
// set m to input parameter
XX := XM(INDEX);
// Check for Archie equation
IF SwEq() = 'Archie' THEN BEGIN
// calculate F
F := XA(INDEX) / Power(Por,XX);
// calculate Sw
WatSat := Power(F * Rw(INDEX) / Res, 1.0/XN(INDEX));
END
ELSE

// calculate Sw Indonesian
WatSat := Power( Sqrt(Res) * ( Power(VClay, (1.0-VClay/2.0)) /
Sqrt(Rclay(INDEX)) +
Power(Por, (XX/2.0)) / Sqrt(XA(INDEX)*Rw(INDEX)) ),
-2.0/XN(INDEX));
// Limit Sw
IF WatSat > 1.2 THEN
WatSat := 1.2;
// calculate Rw apparent
Rwa := Res * Power(Por, XX) / XA(INDEX);
// calculate BVW
IF WatSat < 1.0 THEN
BVW := WatSat * Por
ELSE
BVW := Por;
END;
// calculate the Net pay and net reservoir

// Limit Sw to 1.0
IF WatSat > 1.0 THEN
WS := 1.0
ELSE
WS := WatSat;
IF (Por >= PhiCut(INDEX)) AND (VClay <= VclCut(INDEX)) THEN BEGIN
ResFlg := 1.0;
IF WS <= SwCut(INDEX) THEN
PayFlg := 1.0
ELSE
PayFlg := 0.0;
END
ELSE BEGIN
ResFlg := 0.0;
PayFlg := 0.0;
END;
// add results to zone averages

IF ResFlg = 1.0 THEN BEGIN
ResCount := ResCount + 1.0;
PhiRes := PhiRes + Por;
BVWRes := BVWRes + Por * WS;
VclRes := VclRes + VClay;
END;
IF PayFlg = 1.0 THEN BEGIN
PayCount := PayCount + 1.0;
PhiPay := PhiPay + Por;
BVWPay := BVWPay + Por * WS;
VclPay := VclPay + VClay;
END;
// output the curve results

SAVE_Phi(INDEX,Por);
SAVE_Vcl(INDEX,VClay);
SAVE_Sw(INDEX,WatSat);
SAVE_Rwapp(INDEX,Rwa);
SAVE_BVW(INDEX,BVW);
SAVE_NetResFlg(INDEX,ResFlg);
SAVE_NetPayFlg(INDEX,PayFlg);
END; // for index := Topdepth .....

//

//
// Calculate Well Step from first 2 depths
Step := Depth(Topdepth+1) - Depth(Topdepth);
// Calculate the zonal averages
ResNet := ResCount * Step;
IF ResCount = 0.0 THEN BEGIN
PhiRes := 0.0;
VclRes := 0.0;
BVWRes := 0.0;
SwRes := 0.0;
END
ELSE BEGIN
PhiRes := PhiRes / ResCount;
VclRes := VclRes / ResCount;
BVWRes := BVWRes / ResCount;
SwRes := BVWRes / PhiRes;
END;
PayNet := PayCount * Step;

IF PayCount = 0.0 THEN BEGIN
PhiPay := 0.0;
VclPay := 0.0;
BVWPay := 0.0;
SwPay := 0.0;
END
ELSE BEGIN
PhiPay := PhiPay / PayCount;
VclPay := VclPay / PayCount;
BVWPay := BVWPay / PayCount;
SwPay := BVWPay / PhiRes;
END;
//
// Output results back to parameters
// We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result parameters
are set as curves !
FOR INDEX := Topdepth to BottomDepth do BEGIN
SAVE_NetRes(INDEX,ResNet);
SAVE_AvPhiRes(INDEX,PhiRes);
SAVE_AvVclRes(INDEX,VclRes);
SAVE_AvSwRes(INDEX,SwRes);
SAVE_NetPay(INDEX,PayNet);
SAVE_AvPhiPay(INDEX,PhiPay);
SAVE_AvVclPay(INDEX,VclPay);
SAVE_AvSwPay(INDEX,SwPay);
END;
//
//
// Create a report to a file if this is the last zone
IF ZoneNumber = TotalZones THEN BEGIN
AssignFile(OutFile,'Interp Demo Pascal Report.TXT');
Rewrite(OutFile);
WriteLn(OutFile,' USER PROGRAM INTERP DEMO PARAMETERS');
WriteLn(OutFile);
WriteLn(OutFile,' Well : ', Well_Name);
// Write well attributes using attribute name
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Company : ', Read_Well_Attribute('Company'));
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Field : ', Read_Well_Attribute('Field'));
WriteLn(OutFile, ' KB Elev : ', Read_Well_Attribute('KBElev'));
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Input Curves ');

WriteLn(OutFile, ' Rt = ', Rt_Name(), '(', Rt_Units(), ')');

WriteLn(OutFile, ' Gr = ', Gr_Name(), '(', Gr_Units(), ')');
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Den = ', Den_Name(), '(', Den_Units(), ')');
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Son = ', Son_Name(), '(', Son_Units(), ')');
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Output Curve ');
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Phi = ', Phi_Name(), '(', Phi_Units(), ')');
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Vcl = ', Vcl_Name(), '(', Vcl_Units(),')');
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Sw = ', Sw_Name(), '(', Sw_Units(),')');
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Rwapp = ', RwApp_Name(), '(', RwApp_Units(),')');
WriteLn(OutFile, ' BVW = ', BVW_Name(), '(', BVW_Units(),')');
WriteLn(OutFile, ' NetPay = ', NetPayFlg_Name() );
WriteLn(OutFile, ' NetRes = ', NetResFlg_Name() );
// Write the parameters by zone

FOR I := 1 TO TotalZones DO BEGIN
// Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each zone
SetZone(I);
WriteLn(OutFile);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Zone ', I, ' Input Parameters ');
WriteLn(OutFile, ' a = ', Xa(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' m = ', XM(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' n = ', XN(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Rw = ', Rw(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Sw Eq = ', SwEq());
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Son Matrix = ', SonMat(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Son Fluid = ', SonFluid(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Son CP = ', SonCp(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Son Clay = ', SonClay(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Den Matrix = ', DenMat(1):8:3 );
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Den Fluid = ', DenFluid(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Por Eq = ', PorEq() );
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Den Clay = ', DenClay(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Gr Clean = ', GrClean(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Gr Clay = ', GrClay(1):8:3);
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Depth Interval');
WriteLn(OutFile, ' Top = ',Depth(Topdepth):8:3,' Bottom =
',Depth(Bottomdepth):8:3);
END;
CloseFile(OutFile);
END;
//
// Write to database who created these curves
Save_Sw_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
Save_Rwapp_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
Save_Phi_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
Save_Vcl_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
Save_BVW_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
Save_NetResFlg_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
Save_NetPayFlg_Comments('Curve written by Interp Demo user program');
EXIT;
//
END;
//
//
//
// Calculate the Pickett plot line end points
//
Procedure CalculatePickett;
Var

Phi1, Phi2, Ro1, Ro2, xmc, Rwc : Single;

BEGIN
//
//
// Calculate m amd Rw from end point lines
Phi1 := PPphi1(-1);
Phi2 := PPphi2(-1);
Ro1 := PPres1(-1);
Ro2 := PPres2(-1);
IF Phi1 <> Phi2 THEN
xmc := ( Log10(Max(Ro1,0.01)) - Log10(Max(Ro2,0.01)) ) /
( Log10(Max(Phi2,0.001)) - Log10(Max(Phi1,0.001)) )
ELSE
xmc := xm(-1);
Rwc := Ro1 * Power(Phi1, xmc) / XA(-1);
Rwc := Max(0.0001,Min(Rwc,100.0));
//
// Check to see if the values calculated are the default values
// If they are then assume that the pickett plot is not open and in use
// and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input normal
parameters
//
IF ( ABS(Rwc-RwPick(-1)) < 0.001) AND ( ABS(xmc-MPick(-1)) < 0.01) THEN BEGIN
Rwc := Rw(-1);
SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc);
xmc := xm(-1);
SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc);
// Recalculate the line using the parameter values of m and Rw and save
Ro1 := xa(-1) * Rwc * Power(Phi1, -xmc);
Ro2 := xa(-1) * Rwc * Power(Phi2, -xmc);
SAVE_PPres1(-1,Ro1);
SAVE_PPres2(-1,Ro2);
END
ELSE BEGIN
// New values of m and Rw save these and also the pickett defaults
SAVE_Rw(-1,Rwc);
SAVE_xm(-1,xmc);
SAVE_Rwpick(-1,Rwc);
SAVE_Mpick(-1,xmc);
END;
//
END;
end.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The same routine in C++ follows.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
#include <windows.h>
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include "Functions.h"
#include <math.h>
#include <string.h>

void CalculatePickett() ;
extern __declspec (dllexport) void usercode_()

{
int index, i;
char *aString;
char *attribute;
char *aUnits;
FILE *Outfile;
float PayNet, ResNet, PhiPay, PhiRes, SwPay, SwRes, VclPay, VclRes, BVWPay,
BVWRes, PayCount, ResCount;
float D, S, G, Por, VClay, PorClay, Res, XX, WatSat, BVW, WS, Step, Rwa, F,
ResFlg, PayFlg;

attribute = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 );
aUnits = InitString( MAX_STRING_1 );

CalculatePickett();
//
PayNet = 0.0;
ResNet = 0.0;
PhiPay = 0.0;
PhiRes = 0.0;
SwPay = 0.0;
SwRes = 0.0;
VclPay = 0.0;
VclRes = 0.0;
BVWPay = 0.0;
BVWRes = 0.0;
PayCount = 0.0;
ResCount = 0.0;
//
// TopDepth and BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the run
window.
//
for ( index = TopDepth() ; index < BottomDepth() ; index++ ) {
//
//
if (strcmp(PorEq(), "Sonic") == 0) {
S = Son(index);
if (S > 0.0) {
Por = (S - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) / (SonFluid(index) -
SonMat(index));
}
else {
Por = -999.0;
}
PorClay = (SonClay(index) - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) /
(SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index));
}
else {
D = Den(index);

if (D > 0.0) {
Por = (D - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) - DenMat(index));
}
else {
Por = -999.0;
}
PorClay = (DenClay(index) - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) -
DenMat(index));
}

G = Gr(index);
if (G != -999.0) {
VClay = (G - GrClean(index)) / (GrClay(index) - GrClean(index));
if (VClay > 1.0) {
VClay = 1.0;
}
else if (VClay < 0.0) {
VClay = 0.0;
}
Por = Por - VClay * PorClay;
if (Por < 0.0001) {
Por = 0.0001 ;
}
}
else {
VClay = -999.0;
Por = -999.0;
}

Res = Rt(index);
if ((Por < 0.0) | (Res <= 0.0)) {
WatSat = -999.0;
Rwa = -999.0;
BVW = -999.0;
}
else {
if (Shellm()) {
XX = 1.87 + 0.019 / Por;
}
else {
XX = xm(index);
}

if (strcmp(SwEq(), "Archie") == 0) {
// calculate F
F = xa(index) / pow(Por,XX);
// calculate Sw
WatSat = pow(F * Rw(index) / Res, 1.0/xn(index));
}
else {
WatSat = pow( pow(Res,0.5) * ( pow(VClay, (1.0-VClay/2.0)) /
pow(Rclay(index),0.5) +

pow(Por, (XX/2.0)) / pow(xa(index)*Rw(index),0.5) ),

-2.0/xn(index));
}
// Limit Sw
if (WatSat > 1.2) {
WatSat = 1.2;
}
Rwa = Res * pow(Por,XX) / xa(index);
// calculate BVW
if (WatSat < 1.0) {
BVW = WatSat * Por;
}
else {
BVW = Por;
}
}

// Limit Sw to 1.0
if (WatSat > 1.0) {
WS = 1.0;
}
else {
WS = WatSat;
}
if ((Por >= PhiCut(index)) && (VClay <= VclCut(index))) {
ResFlg = 1.0;
if (WS <= SwCut(index)) {
PayFlg = 1.0;
}
else {
PayFlg = 0.0;
}
}
else {
ResFlg = 0.0;
PayFlg = 0.0;
}

if (ResFlg == 1.0) {
ResCount = ResCount + 1.0;
PhiRes = PhiRes + Por;
BVWRes = BVWRes + Por * WS;
VclRes = VclRes + VClay;
}
if (PayFlg == 1.0) {
PayCount = PayCount + 1.0;
PhiPay = PhiPay + Por;
BVWPay = BVWPay + Por * WS;
VclPay = VclPay + VClay;
}

Save_Phi(index,Por);
Save_Vcl(index,VClay);
Save_Sw(index,WatSat);
Save_Rwapp(index,Rwa);
Save_BVW(index,BVW);

Save_NetResFlg(index,ResFlg);
Save_NetPayFlg(index,PayFlg);
}
//
//
Step = Depth(TopDepth()+1) - Depth(TopDepth());
ResNet = ResCount * Step;
if (ResCount == 0.0) {
PhiRes = 0.0;
VclRes = 0.0;
BVWRes = 0.0;
SwRes = 0.0;
}
else {
PhiRes = PhiRes / ResCount;
VclRes = VclRes / ResCount;
BVWRes = BVWRes / ResCount;
SwRes = BVWRes / PhiRes;
}
PayNet = PayCount * Step;

if (PayCount == 0.0) {
PhiPay = 0.0;
VclPay = 0.0;
BVWPay = 0.0;
SwPay = 0.0;
}
else {
PhiPay = PhiPay / PayCount;
VclPay = VclPay / PayCount;
BVWPay = BVWPay / PayCount;
SwPay = BVWPay / PhiRes;
}
//
// We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result
for ( index = TopDepth() ; index < BottomDepth() ; index++ ) {
Save_NetRes(index,ResNet);
Save_AvPhiRes(index,PhiRes);
Save_AvVclRes(index,VclRes);
Save_AvSwRes(index,SwRes);
Save_NetPay(index,PayNet);
Save_AvPhiPay(index,PhiPay);
Save_AvVclPay(index,VclPay);
Save_AvSwPay(index,SwPay);
}
//
//
if ( ZoneNumber() == TotalZones() ) {
Outfile = fopen("Interp Demo C Report.txt", "w+");
if(Outfile==NULL) {
}
else {
fprintf(Outfile, " USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS \n");

fprintf(Outfile, "\n");
Well_Name( aString );
fprintf(Outfile, " Well : %s\n" , aString );
sprintf(attribute, "Company");
fprintf(Outfile, " Company : %s\n", aString );
sprintf(attribute, "Field");
fprintf(Outfile, " Field : %s\n", aString );
sprintf(attribute, "KBElev");
fprintf(Outfile, " KB Elev : %s\n", aString );
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Input Curves\n" );
Rt_Name( aString );
Rt_Units( aUnits);
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Rt = %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );
Gr_Name( aString );
Gr_Units( aUnits);
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Gr = %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );
Den_Name( aString );
Den_Units( aUnits);
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Den = %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );
Son_Name( aString );
Son_Units( aUnits);
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Son = %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Output Curves\n" );
Phi_Name( aString );
Phi_Units( aUnits);
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Phi = %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );
Vcl_Name( aString );
Vcl_Units( aUnits);
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Vcl = %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );
Sw_Name( aString );
Sw_Units( aUnits);
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Sw = %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );
Rwapp_Name( aString );
Rwapp_Units( aUnits);
fprintf(Outfile, "\n Rwapp = %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );
BVW_Name( aString );
BVW_Units( aUnits);
fprintf(Outfile, "\n BVW = %s (%s)", aString, aUnits );
fprintf(Outfile, "\n NetPay = %s ", aString );
fprintf(Outfile, "\n NetRes = %s ", aString );
// Write the parameters by zone

for ( i = 1 ; i <= TotalZones() ; i++ ) {
// Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each
zone
SetZone(i);
fprintf(Outfile, "\n");

fprintf(Outfile, "\n Zone %i Input Parameters\n", i );
fprintf(Outfile, " a = %f \n", xa(1));

fprintf(Outfile, " m = %f \n", xm(1));
fprintf(Outfile, " n = %f \n", xn(1));
fprintf(Outfile, " Rw = %f \n", Rw(1));
// strcpy(aString, SwEq());
fprintf(Outfile, " Sw Eq = %s \n", SwEq());
fprintf(Outfile, " Son Matrix = %f \n", SonMat(1));
fprintf(Outfile, " Son Fluid = %f \n", SonFluid(1));
fprintf(Outfile, " Son CP = %f \n", SonCp(1));
fprintf(Outfile, " Son Clay = %f \n", SonClay(1));
fprintf(Outfile, " Den Matrix = %f \n", DenMat(1));
fprintf(Outfile, " Den Fluid = %f \n", DenFluid(1));
// strcpy(aString, PorEq());
fprintf(Outfile, " Por Eq = %s \n", PorEq());
fprintf(Outfile, " Den Clay = %f \n", DenClay(1));
fprintf(Outfile, " Gr Clean = %f \n", GrClean(1));
fprintf(Outfile, " Gr Clay = %f \n", GrClay(1));
//Show Depth Interval

fprintf(Outfile, " Depth Interval\n");
fprintf(Outfile, " Top = %f Bottom = %f\n",
Depth(TopDepth()), Depth(BottomDepth()));
}
fclose(Outfile);
}
}
//
sprintf(aString, "Curve written by Archie user program1");
Save_Sw_Comments(aString);
Save_Rwapp_Comments(aString);
Save_Phi_Comments(aString);
Save_Vcl_Comments(aString);
Save_BVW_Comments(aString);
Save_NetResFlg_Comments(aString);
Save_NetPayFlg_Comments(aString);
//
//Write_Well_Attribute("Location", "IP Test Location");
//Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", aString, 1);
//Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", aString, 2);
free( aString );
free( attribute );
free( aUnits );
}
//
//
//
void CalculatePickett()
{
//
float Phi1, Phi2, Ro1, Ro2, xmc, Rwc;
//

Phi1 = PPphi1(-1);
Phi2 = PPphi2(-1);
Ro1 = PPres1(-1);
Ro2 = PPres2(-1);
if (Phi1 != Phi2) {
xmc = ( log10(max(Ro1,0.01)) - log10(max(Ro2,0.01)) ) /
( log10(max(Phi2,0.001)) - log10(max(Phi1,0.001)) );
}
else {
xmc = xm(-1);
}
Rwc = Ro1 * pow(Phi1,xmc) / xa(-1);
Rwc = max(0.0001,min(Rwc,100.0));
//
// and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input
normal parameters
//
if ( ( fabs(Rwc-Rwpick(-1)) < 0.001) && ( fabs(xmc-Mpick(-1)) < 0.01) ) {
Rwc = Rw(-1);
Save_Rwpick(-1,Rwc);
xmc = xm(-1);
Save_Mpick(-1,xmc);
// Recalculate the line using the parameter values of m and Rw and save
Ro1 = xa(-1) * Rwc * pow(Phi1,-xmc);
Ro2 = xa(-1) * Rwc * pow(Phi2,-xmc);
Save_PPres1(-1,Ro1);
}
else {
// New values of m and Rw save these and also the pickett defaults
Save_Rw(-1,Rwc);
Save_xm(-1,xmc);
Save_Mpick(-1,xmc);
}
//
}
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The code for the program in VB .NET is as follows.
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Imports System.IO
Imports System.Windows.Forms
Partial Public Class IPLink
Public Sub UserCode()
Dim index, i as Integer

Dim writer As TextWriter = Nothing
Dim PayNet, ResNet, PhiPay, PhiRes, SwPay, SwRes, VclPay, VclRes,
BVWPay, BVWRes, PayCount, ResCount as Single
Dim D, S, G, Por, VClay, PorClay, Res, XX, WatSat, BVW, WS, IStep, Rwa,
F, ResFlg, PayFlg as Single

Dim RwString as String

'
Try
' calculate the Pickett plot end point parameters
CalculatePickett()
'
' Intitalize zonal averages
PayNet = 0.0
ResNet = 0.0
PhiPay = 0.0
PhiRes = 0.0
SwPay = 0.0
SwRes = 0.0
VclPay = 0.0
VclRes = 0.0
BVWPay = 0.0
BVWRes = 0.0
PayCount = 0.0
ResCount = 0.0
'
' Loop through the data one level at a time
' TopDepth and BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered on the
run window.
'
For index = TopDepth To BottomDepth
'
'
' Calculate porosity depending om method
If (PorEq = "Sonic") Then
S = Son(index)
IF (S > 0.0) Then
Por = (S - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) / _
(SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index))
Else
Por = -999.0
End If
' Calculate clay porosity
PorClay = (SonClay(index) - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) / _
(SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index))
Else
D = Den(index)
IF (D > 0.0) Then
Por = (D - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) - DenMat(index))
Else
Por = -999.0
End If
' Calculate clay porosity
PorClay = (DenClay(index) - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) -
DenMat(index))
End If
' Calculate Clay volume

G = GR(index)
If (G <> -999.0) Then
VClay = (G - GrClean(index)) / (GrClay(index) - GrClean(index))
If (Vclay > 1.0) Then
Vclay = 1.0
Else IF (Vclay < 0.0) Then
Vclay = 0.0

End If
' Correct Porosity for clay
Por = Por - Vclay * PorClay
IF (Por < 0.0001) Then
Por = 0.0001
End If
Else
VClay = -999.0
Por = -999.0
End If
' Calculate Water Saturation

Res = Rt(Index)
If ((Por <= 0.0) OrElse (Res <= 0.0)) Then
WatSat = -999.0
Rwa = -999.0
BVW = -999.0
Else
' Check for Shell m
If (Shellm) Then
XX = 1.87 + 0.019 / Por
Else
' set m to input parameter
XX = XM(index)
End If
' Check for Archie equation
If (SwEq = "Archie") Then
' calculate F
F = XA(index) / Math.Pow(Por,XX)
' calculate Sw
WatSat = Math.Pow(F * Rw(index) / Res,(1.0/XN(index)))
Else
' calculate Sw Indonesian
WatSat = Math.Pow( Math.Pow(Res,0.5) * ( Math.Pow(VClay,
(1.0-VClay/2.0)) / Math.Pow(Rclay(index),0.5) + _
Math.Pow(Por, (XX/2.0)) /
Math.Pow(xa(index)*Rw(index),0.5) ), -2.0/xn(index))
End If
' Limit Sw
If (WatSat > 1.2) Then
WatSat = 1.2
End If
' calculate Rw apparent
Rwa = Res * Math.Pow(Por,XX) / XA(index)
' calculate BVW
If (WatSat < 1.0) Then
BVW = WatSat * Por
Else
BVW = Por
End If
End If
' calculate the Net pay and net reservoir

' Limit Sw to 1.0
If (WatSat > 1.0) Then
WS = 1.0
Else
WS = WatSat
End If

If ((Por >= PhiCut(index)) and (VClay <= VclCut(index))) Then

ResFlg = 1.0
If (WS <= SwCut(index)) Then
PayFlg = 1.0
Else
PayFlg = 0.0
End If
Else
ResFlg = 0.0
PayFlg = 0.0
End If
' add results to zone averages

IF (ResFlg = 1.0) Then
ResCount = ResCount + 1.0
PhiRes = PhiRes + Por
BVWRes = BVWRes + Por * WS
VclRes = VclRes + VClay
End If
If (PayFlg = 1.0) Then
PayCount = PayCount + 1.0
PhiPay = PhiPay + Por
BVWPay = BVWPay + Por * WS
VclPay = VclPay + VClay
End If
' output the curve results

SAVE_Phi(index,Por)
SAVE_Vcl(index,VClay)
SAVE_Sw(index,WatSat)
SAVE_Rwapp(index,Rwa)
SAVE_BVW(index,BVW)
SAVE_NetResFlg(index,ResFlg)
SAVE_NetPayFlg(index,PayFlg)
Next
'
'
' Calculate Well Step from first 2 depths
IStep = Depth(TopDepth()+1) - Depth(TopDepth())
' Calculate the zonal averages
ResNet = ResCount * IStep
If (ResCount = 0.0) Then
PhiRes = 0.0
VclRes = 0.0
BVWRes = 0.0
SwRes = 0.0
Else
PhiRes = PhiRes / ResCount
VclRes = VclRes / ResCount
BVWRes = BVWRes / ResCount
SwRes = BVWRes / PhiRes
End If
PayNet = PayCount * IStep

If (PayCount = 0.0) Then
PhiPay = 0.0
VclPay = 0.0
BVWPay = 0.0
SwPay = 0.0

Else
PhiPay = PhiPay / PayCount
VclPay = VclPay / PayCount
BVWPay = BVWPay / PayCount
SwPay = BVWPay / PhiRes
End If
'
' Output results back to parameters
' We loop through all the data because it is possible that the result
For index = TopDepth To BottomDepth
SAVE_NetRes(index,ResNet)
SAVE_AvPhiRes(index,PhiRes)
SAVE_AvVclRes(index,VclRes)
SAVE_AvSwRes(index,SwRes)
SAVE_NetPay(index,PayNet)
SAVE_AvPhiPay(index,PhiPay)
SAVE_AvVclPay(index,VclPay)
SAVE_AvSwPay(index,SwPay)
Next
'
'
' Create a report to a file if this is the last zone
If (ZoneNumber = TotalZones) Then
writer = New StreamWriter("Interp Demo VB Report.TXT")
writer.WriteLine(" USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS")
writer.WriteLine()
writer.WriteLine(" Well : " & Well_Name)
' Write well attributes using attribute name
writer.WriteLine(" Company : " & Read_Well_Attribute("Company"))
writer.WriteLine(" Field : " & Read_Well_Attribute("Field"))
writer.WriteLine(" KB Elev : " & Read_Well_Attribute("KBElev"))
writer.WriteLine()
writer.WriteLine(" Input Curves ")
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Rt = ", Rt_Name, " (",
Rt_Units, ")"))
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Gr = ", Gr_Name, " (",
Gr_Units, ")"))
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Den = ", Den_Name, " (",
Den_Units, ")"))
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Son = ", Son_Name, " (",
Son_Units, ")"))
writer.WriteLine(" Output Curves ")
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Phi = ", Phi_Name, " (",
Phi_Units, ")"))
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Vcl = ", Vcl_Name, " (",
Vcl_Units, ")"))
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Sw = ", Sw_Name, " (",
Sw_Units, ")"))
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" BVW = ", BVW_Name, " (",
BVW_Units, ")"))
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Rwapp = ", Rwapp_Name, "
(", Rwapp_Units, ")"))
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" NetPay Flg = ",
NetPayFlg_Name))
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" NetRes Flg = ",
NetResFlg_Name))
For i = 1 To TotalZones
' Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for each

zone
SetZone(i)
writer.WriteLine()
writer.WriteLine(String.Concat(" Zone ", i, " Input Parameters
"))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" a = {0:00.0000}",
XA(1)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" m = {0:00.0000}",
XM(1)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" n = {0:00.0000}",
XN(1)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Rw = {0:00.0000}",
Rw(1)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Sw Eq = {0:00.0000}",
SwEq))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Son Matrix = {0:00.0000}",
SonMat(1)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Son Fluid = {0:00.0000}",
SonFluid(1)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Son CP = {0:00.0000}",
SonCp(1)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Son Clay = {0:00.0000}",
SonClay(1)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Den Matrix = {0:00.0000}",
DenMat(1)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Den Fluid = {0:00.0000}",
DenFluid(1)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Por Eq = {0:00.0000}",
PorEq))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Den Clay = {0:00.0000}",
DenClay(1)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Gr Clean = {0:00.0000}",
GrClean(1)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Gr Clay = {0:00.0000}",
GrClay(1)))
writer.WriteLine(" Depth Interval")
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Top = {0:00.0000}",
Depth(TopDepth)))
writer.WriteLine(String.Format(" Bottom = {0:00.0000}",
Depth(BottomDepth)))
Next
End If
'
' Write to database who created these curves
Save_Sw_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
Save_Rwapp_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
Save_Phi_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
Save_Vcl_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
Save_BVW_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
Save_NetResFlg_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
Save_NetPayFlg_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program")
' Write_Well_Attribute("Location", "IP Test Location")

' RwString = Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", 1)
' Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2)
'
Catch exception As Exception
MessageBox.Show(("Error occurred: " & exception.ToString))
Finally

If (Not writer Is Nothing) Then

writer.Flush()
writer.Close()
End If
End Try
End Sub
'
'
' Calculate the Pickett plot line end points
'
Public Sub CalculatePickett()
'
Dim Phi1, Phi2, Ro1, Ro2, xmc, Rwc as Single
'
'
' Calculate m amd Rw from end point lines
Phi1 = PPphi1(-1)
Phi2 = PPphi2(-1)
Ro1 = PPres1(-1)
Ro2 = PPres2(-1)
If (Phi1 <> Phi2) Then
xmc = ( Math.Log10(Math.Max(Ro1,0.01)) -
Math.Log10(Math.Max(Ro2,0.01)) ) / _
( Math.Log10(Math.Max(Phi2,0.001)) -
Math.Log10(Math.Max(Phi1,0.001)) )
Else
xmc = xm(-1)
End If
Rwc = Ro1 * Math.Pow(Phi1, xmc) / XA(-1)
Rwc = Math.Max(0.0001,Math.Min(Rwc,100.0))
'
' Check to see if the values calculated are the default values
' If they are then assume that the pickett plot is not open and in use
' and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the input
normal parameters
'
If ( ( Math.Abs(Rwc-RwPick(-1)) < 0.001) and ( Math.Abs(xmc-MPick(-1)) <
0.01) ) Then
Rwc = Rw(-1)
SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc)
xmc = xm(-1)
SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc)
' Recalculate the line using the parameter values of m and Rw and save
Ro1 = XA(-1) * Rwc * Math.Pow(Phi1, -xmc)
Ro2 = XA(-1) * Rwc * Math.Pow(Phi2, -xmc)
SAVE_PPres1(-1,Ro1)
SAVE_PPres2(-1,Ro2)
Else
' New values of m and Rw save these and also the pickett defaults
SAVE_Rw(-1,Rwc)
SAVE_XM(-1,xmc)
SAVE_RwPick(-1,Rwc)
SAVE_MPick(-1,xmc)
End If
'
End Sub
End Class

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The code for the program in C# .NET is as follows.
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
using System;
using System.IO;
using System.Windows.Forms;
public partial class IPLink

{
public void UserCode()
{
int index, i;
Single PayNet, ResNet, PhiPay, PhiRes, SwPay, SwRes, VclPay, VclRes,
BVWPay, BVWRes, PayCount, ResCount;
Single D, S, G, Por, VClay, PorClay, Res, XX, WatSat, BVW, WS, Step, Rwa,
F, ResFlg, PayFlg;
TextWriter writer = null;
try
{
CalculatePickett();
//
PayNet = 0.0f;
ResNet = 0.0f;
PhiPay = 0.0f;
PhiRes = 0.0f;
SwPay = 0.0f;
SwRes = 0.0f;
VclPay = 0.0f;
VclRes = 0.0f;
BVWPay = 0.0f;
BVWRes = 0.0f;
PayCount = 0.0f;
ResCount = 0.0f;
//
// TopDepth and BottomDepth are the index equivalent depths entered
on the run window.
//
for (index = TopDepth; index <= BottomDepth; index++)
{
//
//
if (PorEq == "Sonic")
{
S = Son(index);
if (S > 0.0f)
{
Por = (S - SonMat(index)) * SonCp(index) /
(SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index));
}
else
{

Por = -999.0f;
}
PorClay = (SonClay(index) - SonMat(index)) *
SonCp(index) / (SonFluid(index) - SonMat(index));
}
else
{
D = Den(index);
if (D > 0.0f)
{
Por = (D - DenMat(index)) / (DenFluid(index) -
DenMat(index));
}
else
{
Por = -999.0f;
}
PorClay = (DenClay(index) - DenMat(index)) /
(DenFluid(index) - DenMat(index));
}

G = Gr(index);
if (G != -999.0f)
{
VClay = (G - GrClean(index)) / (GrClay(index) -
GrClean(index));
if (VClay > 1.0f)
{
VClay = 1.0f;
}
else if (VClay < 0.0f)
{
VClay = 0.0f;
}
Por = Por - VClay * PorClay;
if (Por < 0.0001f)
{
Por = 0.0001f ;
}
}
else
{
VClay = -999.0f;
Por = -999.0f;
}
Res = Rt(index);
if ((Por < 0.0) | (Res <= 0.0))
{
WatSat = -999.0f;
Rwa = -999.0f;
BVW = -999.0f;
}
else
{

if (Shellm)
{
XX = 1.87f + 0.019f / Por;
}
else
{
XX = xm(index);
}
if (SwEq == "Archie")
{
// calculate F
F = xa(index) / (Single)Math.Pow(Por,XX);
// calculate Sw
WatSat = (Single)Math.Pow(F * Rw(index) / Res,
1.0f/xn(index));
}
else
{
WatSat = (Single)Math.Pow(
(Single)Math.Pow(Res,0.5f) * ( (Single)Math.Pow(VClay, (1.0f-VClay/2.0f)) /
(Single)Math.Pow(Rclay(index),0.5f) +
(Single)Math.Pow(Por, (XX/2.0f)) /
(Single)Math.Pow(xa(index)*Rw(index),0.5) ), -2.0f/xn(index));
}
// Limit Sw
if (WatSat > 1.2f)
{
WatSat = 1.2f;
}
Rwa = Res * (Single)Math.Pow(Por,XX) / xa(index);
// calculate BVW
if (WatSat < 1.0f)
{
BVW = WatSat * Por;
}
else
{
BVW = Por;
}
}

// Limit Sw to 1.0
if (WatSat > 1.0f)
{
WS = 1.0f;
}
else
{
WS = WatSat;
}
if ((Por >= PhiCut(index)) && (VClay <= VclCut(index)))
{
ResFlg = 1.0f;
if (WS <= SwCut(index))
{

PayFlg = 1.0f;
}
else
{
PayFlg = 0.0f;
}
}
else
{
ResFlg = 0.0f;
PayFlg = 0.0f;
}

if (ResFlg == 1.0f)
{
ResCount = ResCount + 1.0f;
PhiRes = PhiRes + Por;
BVWRes = BVWRes + Por * WS;
VclRes = VclRes + VClay;
}
if (PayFlg == 1.0)
{
PayCount = PayCount + 1.0f;
PhiPay = PhiPay + Por;
BVWPay = BVWPay + Por * WS;
VclPay = VclPay + VClay;
}

Save_Phi(index,Por);
Save_Vcl(index,VClay);
Save_Sw(index,WatSat);
Save_Rwapp(index,Rwa);
Save_BVW(index,BVW);
Save_NetResFlg(index,ResFlg);
Save_NetPayFlg(index,PayFlg);
}
//
//
Step = Depth(TopDepth+1) - Depth(TopDepth);
ResNet = ResCount * Step;
if (ResCount == 0.0f)
{
PhiRes = 0.0f;
VclRes = 0.0f;
BVWRes = 0.0f;
SwRes = 0.0f;
}
else
{
PhiRes = PhiRes / ResCount;
VclRes = VclRes / ResCount;
BVWRes = BVWRes / ResCount;
SwRes = BVWRes / PhiRes;
}

PayNet = PayCount * Step;

if (PayCount == 0.0f)
{
PhiPay = 0.0f;
VclPay = 0.0f;
BVWPay = 0.0f;
SwPay = 0.0f;
}
else
{
PhiPay = PhiPay / PayCount;
VclPay = VclPay / PayCount;
BVWPay = BVWPay / PayCount;
SwPay = BVWPay / PhiRes;
}
//
// We loop through all the data because it is possible that the
result parameters are set as curves !
for ( index = TopDepth ; index < BottomDepth ; index++ )
{
Save_NetRes(index,ResNet);
Save_AvPhiRes(index,PhiRes);
Save_AvVclRes(index,VclRes);
Save_AvSwRes(index,SwRes);
Save_NetPay(index,PayNet);
Save_AvPhiPay(index,PhiPay);
Save_AvVclPay(index,VclPay);
Save_AvSwPay(index,SwPay);
}
//
//
if (ZoneNumber == TotalZones)
{
writer = new StreamWriter("Interp Demo c# Report.TXT");
writer.WriteLine(" USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS");
writer.WriteLine();
writer.WriteLine(" Well : " + Well_Name);
writer.WriteLine(" Company : " +
Read_Well_Attribute("Company"));
writer.WriteLine(" Field : " + Read_Well_Attribute("Field"));
writer.WriteLine(" KB Elev : " +
Read_Well_Attribute("KBElev"));
writer.WriteLine();
writer.WriteLine(" Input Curves ");
writer.WriteLine(" Rt = " + Rt_Name + " (" + Rt_Units +
")");
writer.WriteLine(" Gr = " + Gr_Name + " (" + Gr_Units +
")");
writer.WriteLine(" Den = " + Den_Name + " (" + Den_Units
+ ")");
writer.WriteLine(" Son = " + Son_Name + " (" + Son_Units
+ ")");
writer.WriteLine(" Output Curve ");
writer.WriteLine(" Phi = " + Phi_Name + " (" + Phi_Units
+ ")");
writer.WriteLine(" Vcl = " + Vcl_Name + " (" + Vcl_Units

+ ")");
writer.WriteLine(" Sw = " + Sw_Name + " (" + Sw_Units +
")");
writer.WriteLine(" Rwapp = " + Rwapp_Name + " (" +
Rwapp_Units + ")");
writer.WriteLine(" BVW = " + BVW_Name + " (" + BVW_Units
+ ")");
writer.WriteLine(" NetPay = " + NetPayFlg_Name);
writer.WriteLine(" NetRes = " + NetResFlg_Name);
for ( i = 1 ; i <= TotalZones ; i++ )
{
// Set the zone number so we can get the parameters for
each zone
SetZone(i);
writer.WriteLine();
writer.WriteLine(" Input Parameters ");
writer.WriteLine(" a = " + xa(1));
writer.WriteLine(" m = " + xm(1));
writer.WriteLine(" n = " + xn(1));
writer.WriteLine(" Rw = " + Rw(1));
writer.WriteLine(" Sw Eq = " + SwEq);
writer.WriteLine(" Son Matrix = " + SonMat(1));
writer.WriteLine(" Son Fluid = " + SonFluid(1));
writer.WriteLine(" Son CP = " + SonCp(1));
writer.WriteLine(" Son Clay = " + SonClay(1));
writer.WriteLine(" Den Matrix = " + DenMat(1));
writer.WriteLine(" Den Fluid = " + DenFluid(1));
writer.WriteLine(" Por Eq = " + PorEq);
writer.WriteLine(" Den Clay = " + DenClay(1));
writer.WriteLine(" Gr Clean = " + GrClean(1));
writer.WriteLine(" Gr Clay = " + GrClay(1));
writer.WriteLine(" Depth Interval");
writer.WriteLine(" Top = " + Depth(TopDepth) + "
Bottom = " + Depth(BottomDepth));
}
}
//
Save_Sw_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program");
Save_Rwapp_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program");
Save_Phi_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program");
Save_Vcl_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program");
Save_BVW_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user program");
Save_NetResFlg_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user
program");
Save_NetPayFlg_Comments("Curve written by Interp Demo user
program");
//Write_Well_Attribute("Location", "IP Test Location");

//string RwString = Read_Log_Attribute("Rw", 1);
//Write_Log_Attribute("Rw", RwString, 2);
}
// show any errors
catch (Exception e)
{
MessageBox.Show("Error occurred: " + e.ToString());
}
finally

{
// close the report file
if (writer != null)
{
writer.Flush();
writer.Close();
}
}
}
//
//
//
void CalculatePickett()
{
//
float Phi1, Phi2, Ro1, Ro2, xmc, Rwc;
//
Phi1 = PPphi1(-1);
Phi2 = PPphi2(-1);
Ro1 = PPres1(-1);
Ro2 = PPres2(-1);
if (Phi1 != Phi2)
{
xmc = ( (Single)Math.Log10(Math.Max(Ro1,0.01f)) -
(Single)Math.Log10(Math.Max(Ro2,0.01f)) ) /
( (Single)Math.Log10(Math.Max(Phi2,0.001f)) -
(Single)Math.Log10(Math.Max(Phi1,0.001f)) );
}
else
{
xmc = xm(-1);
}
Rwc = Ro1 * (Single)Math.Pow(Phi1,xmc) / xa(-1);
Rwc = Math.Max(0.0001f,Math.Min(Rwc,100.0f));
//
// and therefore assume that the values to use for m and Rw are the
input normal parameters
//
if ( ( Math.Abs(Rwc-Rwpick(-1)) < 0.001f) && ( Math.Abs(xmc-Mpick(-1)) <
0.01f) )
{
Rwc = Rw(-1);
xmc = xm(-1);
Save_Mpick(-1,xmc);
// Recalculate the line using the parameter values of m and Rw
and save
Ro1 = xa(-1) * Rwc * (Single)Math.Pow(Phi1,-xmc);
Ro2 = xa(-1) * Rwc * (Single)Math.Pow(Phi2,-xmc);
}
else
{
// New values of m and Rw save these and also the pickett
defaults

Save_Rw(-1,Rwc);
Save_xm(-1,xmc);
Save_Mpick(-1,xmc);
}
//
}
//
//
}
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The user 'Runtime Window' looks like the following:
The 'Load / Save Parameter Sets' button allows the user to manage the Parameter Sets. See
Parameter Set Management. The working Parameter Set for this user module will be : '
UsrProgInterp_Demo' and type 'UPInterp_Demo'. This can be seen in the Manage Zones /
Tops module.

on the interactive plot.
Clicking the 'New zone' button will display the following window.
copy the parameters from for the new zone to be created.

The 'Delete Zone' button allows the deletion of one or more zones. Select the zones to delete,
and click OK.
possible by clicking in a column header. The header will turn green and then any changes to any
Clicking on the 'Print' button will display the following pop-up menu where the parameter listing
can be set to a text file or direct to a printer. If set to a text file the file name used will be the '
Parameter set name' with an extension of '.txt'.
An example of a listing is displayed below:
USER PROGRAM INTERP_DEMO PARAMETERS
Well : B1
Date : 10/17/2008 11:35:02
Input Curves
Rt : RDEEP Gamma Ray : GR
Density : RHOB Sonic : DT

Output Curves
Porosity : UPTest:Phi Vclay : UPTest:Vcl
Sw : UPTest:Sw Rw App : UPTest:RwApp
BVW : UPTest:BVW Net Pay Flag : UPTest:NetPay
Net Res Flag : UPTest:NetRes

Zones Parameters
Clay Volume Parameters
GR Clean : 10. GR Clay : 100.
Water Saturation Parameters

Sw Eq : Archie 'a' : 1.
'm' : 1.28386 'n' : 2.
Rw : 0.2294 Res Clay : 1.
m_? Shell : Off

Porosity Parameters
Phi Eq : Density Son Matrix : 55.7
Son Fluid : 189. Son CP : 1.
Son Clay : 100. Den Fluid : 1.
Den Clay : 2.7 Den Mat : 2.65
Cutoffs Parameters
Phi Cutoff : 0.1 Sw Cutoff : 0.5
Vcl Cuttoff : 0.4

Summation Parameters
Net Pay : 83. Av_Phi Pay : 0.1887
Av_Sw Pay : 0.47377 Av_Vcl Pay : 0.12999
Net Res : 448. Av_Phi Res : 0.14777
Av_Sw Res : 0.78591 Av_Vcl Res : 0.1652
Hide Parameters
PickPlt Phi1 : 0.01 PickPlt Phi2 : 0.4
PickPlt Res1 : 84.78302 PickPlt Res2 : 0.74385
PickPlt m : 1.28386 PickPlt Rw : 0.2294
'Clicking' on the 'Make Plot' button will bring up the plot that has been set up with any interactive
lines. Right-mouse button 'clicking' in the tracks will display a sub-menu listing the options
available for the specific track such as displaying crossplots or histograms of curves.


Every time the routine is run the text file created in the code will be output. The default directory
will be the actual user program directory. In this case the 'C:\Documents and
Settings\<username>\Local Settings\Application
Data\IntPetro35\UserPrograms\Interp_Demo' directory. The following is the result of this file:
From FORTRAN program
USER PROGRAM INTERP PARAMETERS
Well : MinSolve Test

Company : PGL
Field : Somewhere
KB Elev : 60ft
Input Curves
Rt = ILDC (OHMM )
Gr = SGR (GAPI )
Den = RHOB (G/C3 )
Son = DTLN (US/F )
Output Curve
Phi = UPTest:Phi(dec )
Vcl = UPTest:Vcl(dec )
Sw = UPTest:Sw (dec )
Rwapp = UPTest:RwA(ohmm )
BVW = UPTest:BVW(dec )
NetPay = UPTest:Net
NetRes = UPTest:Net
Input Parameters

a = 1.
m = 2.
n = 2.
Rw = 0.0885000005
Sw Eq = Archie
Son Matrix = 55.7000008
Son Fluid = 189.
Son CP = 1.
Son Clay = 100.
Den Matrix = 2.6500001
Den Fluid = 1.
Por Eq = Density
Den Clay = 2.70000005
Gr Clean = 10.
Gr Clay = 100.
Depth Interval
Top = 7614. Bottom = 8738.
From Pascal program
USER PROGRAM INTERP DEMO PARAMETERS

Company : PGL
Field : Somewhere
KB Elev : 60ft
Input Curves
Rt = ILDC(OHMM)
Gr = SGR(GAPI)
Den = RHOB(G/C3)
Son = DTLN(US/F)
Output Curve
Phi = UPTest:Phi(dec)
Vcl = UPTest:Vcl(dec)
Sw = UPTest:Sw(dec)
Rwapp = UPTest:RwApp(ohmm)
BVW = UPTest:BVW(dec)
NetPay = UPTest:NetPay
NetRes = UPTest:NetRes
Input Parameters
a = 1.000
m = 1.284
n = 2.000
Rw = 0.229
Sw Eq = Archie
Son Matrix = 55.700
Son Fluid = 189.000
Son CP = 1.000
Son Clay = 100.000
Den Matrix = 2.650
Den Fluid = 1.000
Por Eq = Density
Den Clay = 2.700
Gr Clean = 10.000
Gr Clay = 100.000
Depth Interval
Top = 7614.000 Bottom = 8738.000
From C++ program


Company : PGL
Field : Somewhere
KB Elev : 60ft
Input Curves
Rt = ILDC (OHMM)
Gr = SGR (GAPI)
Den = RHOB (G/C3)
Son = DTLN (US/F)
Output Curves
Phi = UPTest:Phi (dec)

Vcl = UPTest:Vcl (dec)
Sw = UPTest:Sw (dec)
Rwapp = UPTest:RwApp (ohmm)
BVW = UPTest:BVW (dec)
NetPay = UPTest:Phi
NetRes = UPTest:Phi
Input Parameters
a = 1.000000
m = 1.283862
n = 2.000000
Rw = 0.229396
Sw Eq = Indonesian
Son Matrix = 55.700001
Son Fluid = 189.000000
Son CP = 1.000000
Son Clay = 100.000000
Den Fluid = 1.000000
Por Eq = Density
Den Clay = 2.700000
Gr Clean = 10.000000
Gr Clay = 100.000000
Depth Interval
Top = 7773.500000 Bottom = 8738.000000
From VB .NET program

Company : PGL
Field : Somewhere
KB Elev : 60ft
Input Curves
Rt = ILDC (OHMM)
Gr = SGR (GAPI)
Den = RHOB (G/C3)
Son = DTLN (US/F)
Output Curves
NetPay Flg = UPTest:NetPay
NetRes Flg = UPTest:NetRes

Input Parameters
a = 01.0000
m = 01.2839
n = 02.0000
Rw = 00.2294
Sw Eq = Indonesian
Son Matrix = 55.7000
Son Fluid = 189.0000
Son CP = 01.0000
Son Clay = 100.0000
Den Fluid = 01.0000
Por Eq = Sonic
Den Clay = 02.7000
Gr Clean = 10.0000
Gr Clay = 100.0000
Depth Interval
Top = 7614.0000
Bottom = 8738.0000
From C# .NET program

Company : PGL
Field : Somewhere
KB Elev : 60ft
Input Curves
Rt = ILDC (OHMM)
Gr = SGR (GAPI)
Den = RHOB (G/C3)
Son = DTLN (US/F)
Output Curve
NetPay = UPTest:NetPay
NetRes = UPTest:NetRes
Input Parameters
a = 1
m = 2
n = 2
Rw = 0.0885
Sw Eq = Archie
Son Matrix = 55.7
Son Fluid = 189
Son CP = 1
Son Clay = 100
Den Matrix = 2.65
Den Fluid = 1
Por Eq = Density
Den Clay = 2.7
Gr Clean = 10
Gr Clay = 100
Depth Interval
Top = 7780 Bottom = 8738

The differences between the listing is associated with how the languages handle strings.


The following example shows a user program created to find the 'first-derivative' of a curve. This
example shows how a curve can be accessed at multiple levels at the same time. The
non-zonable option is being used ('Use Zones' box not 'checked').
The input curve to differentiate is called 'Curve' in the code.
No 'Input Parameters' or 'Logic Flags' are used, so these tabs are left blank.

The 'Output Curve' is called 'Diff' in the code and no display defaults have been set for it.
The code for the program in Fortran is as follows. The code the user has to write is highlighted in
bold, blue colour.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
c
c
c
functions.
+ 2.
c
c Vclay = (GR(INDEX) - GRclean()) / (GRclay() - GRclean())
c defined
c as input parameters. GR is the input curve.
an
c input curve.
c
the


c
on
c the run window.
C
DO 100 INDEX = Index_Topdepth()+1 , Index_BottomDepth()
c
c write user code here
c
c Check for curve equal to zero
if (Curve(index-1) .eq. 0.0) then
Call Save_Diff(index,-999.0)
else
c Calculate the first derivative
Der = Curve(index) / Curve(index-1)
Call Save_Diff(index,Der);
endif
100 CONTINUE
c
RETURN
c
END
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
The same code in Pascal.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
unit UsersCode;
interface
implementation
{User Code}
Var
index : Integer;
begin
for index := Topdepth+1 to BottomDepth do begin
{enter user code here}
{check for curve equal to zero}
if Curve(index-1) = 0.0 then
Save_Diff(index,-999)
else
{Calculate the first derivative}
Save_Diff(index,Curve(index)/Curve(index-1));
end;

end;
end.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
The same code in C++
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>

{
int index;
char *aString;
char *aUnits;
char aName[150];
FILE *Outfile;
for ( index = TopDepth() ; index < BottomDepth()-5 ; index++ ) {

//ENTER USER CODE HERE
//check for curve equal to zero
if ( Curve(index-1) == 0 ) {
Save_Diff(index,-999); }
else {
//Calculate the first derivative
Save_Diff(index,Curve(index)/Curve(index-1)); }
//END OF USER CODE

}
//Write to database who created these curves

sprintf(aString, "Curve written by User Program");
Save_Curve_Comments( aString );
Save_Diff_Comments( aString );
free( aString );
}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
The same code in VB
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------


Dim index As Integer
For index = Topdepth + 1 To BottomDepth

' Enter user code here
' Check for curve equal to zero
If Curve(index - 1) = 0.0 Then
Save_Diff(index, -999)
Else
' Calculate the first derivative
Save_Diff(index, Curve(index) / Curve(index - 1))
End If
Next
Save_Diff_Comments("Curve Written by User Program")

End Sub
End Class
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
The same code for C#
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------
using System;

{

{
for (int index = Topdepth + 1; index <= BottomDepth; index++)

{
// Enter user code here
// Check for curve equal to zero
if (Curve(index - 1) = 0.0)
{
Save_Diff(index, -999);
}
else
{
// Calculate the first derivative
Save_Diff(index, Curve(index) / Curve(index - 1));
}
}
Save_Diff_Comments("Curve Written by User Program");

}
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
---------

The user runtime window looks like the following:
The 'Save Parameters' and 'Load Parameters' buttons allow the parameters and curve names to
be stored and reloaded at a later time.


This user program example takes an array input curve and normalizes the values in it to lie
between 0 and 1 and output the results to a new array curve. The non-zonable option is being
used. One input curve is created.
One 'Output Curve' is created and is set as an array curve of size 12 x 60 elements for each
normal depth sample. This output array is the same size as the input array that will be normalized.

bold, blue colour.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
c
c
c
functions.
+ 2.
c
c Vclay = (GR(INDEX) - GRclean()) / (GRclay() - GRclean())
defined
c as input parameters. GR is the input curve.
an input curve.
c
the
c
on the run window.
C
c
c find max and min values in array data
ValMax = -0.0000001
ValMin = 9999999999999.9


Do IX = 1, Array_InCrv_MaxX()
Do IY = 1, Array_InCrv_MaxY()
R = Array_InCrv(Index,Ix,Iy)
if (R .lt. ValMin .and. R .ne. -999.0)
c ValMin = R
if (R .gt. ValMax .and. R .ne. -999.0)
c ValMax = R
enddo
enddo
enddo
c calculate the gain and shift to normalize
gain = 1.0 / (Valmax - Valmin)
shift = - gain * Valmin
c output new array with normalized values
Do IX = 1, Array_InCrv_MaxX()
Do IY = 1, Array_InCrv_MaxY()
R = Array_InCrv(Index,Ix,Iy) * Gain + shift
call Save_array_OutCrv(Index,Ix,Iy,R)
enddo
enddo
enddo
c
Call Save_OutCrv_Comments('Updated by Fortran User Program Array');
RETURN
c
END
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The same routine, written in Pascal follows. Again, the bold, blue script is what the user enters.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
nit UsersCode;
interface
implementation
{User Code}
Var
index, Ix, IY : Integer;
gain, shift, R, valmin, valmax : Single;
begin
{enter user code here}
{find max and min values in array data}
ValMax := -0.0000001;
ValMin := 9999999999999.9;
for index := Topdepth to BottomDepth do begin
for IX := 1 to Array_InCrv_MaxX do begin
for IY := 1 to Array_InCrv_MaxY do begin
R := Array_InCrv(Index,Ix,Iy);
if (R < ValMin) and (R <> -999.0) then
ValMin := R;

if (R > ValMax) and (R <> -999.0) then

ValMax := R;
end;
end;
end;
{calculate the gain and shift to normalize}
gain := 1.0 / (Valmax - Valmin);
shift := - gain * Valmin;
{output new array with normalized values}
for index := Topdepth to BottomDepth do begin
for IX := 1 to Array_InCrv_MaxX do begin
for IY := 1 to Array_InCrv_MaxY do begin
R := Array_InCrv(Index,Ix,Iy) * Gain + shift;
Save_array_OutCrv(Index,Ix,Iy,R);
end;
end;
end;
Save_OutCrv_Comments('Updated by Normalize Array User Prog');
end;
end.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The same routine, written in C follows. Again the bold, blue code is what the user enters.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>
#include <math.h>

{
int index, IX, IY;

float gain, shift, R, ValMin, ValMax;
char *aString;
char *aUnits;
//ENTER USER CODE HERE
//find max and min values in array data

ValMax = -0.0000001;
ValMin = 9999999999999.9;
for (index = TopDepth(); index < BottomDepth(); index++) {
for (IX = 1; IX < Array_InCrv_MaxX(); IX++) {
for (IY = 1; IX < Array_InCrv_MaxY(); IX++) {
R = Array_InCrv(index,IX,IY);
if ((R < ValMin) && (R != -999.0))
ValMin = R;
if ((R > ValMax) && (R != -999.0))
ValMax = R;
}
}
}

//Calculate the gain and shift to normalize

gain = 1.0 / (ValMax - ValMin);
shift = - gain * ValMin;
//output new array with normalized values
for (index = TopDepth(); index < BottomDepth(); index++) {
for (IX = 1; IX < Array_InCrv_MaxX(); IX++) {
for (IY = 1; IY < Array_InCrv_MaxY(); IY++) {
R = Array_InCrv(index,IX,IY) * gain + shift;
Save_Array_OutCrv(index,IX,IY,R);
}
}
}
//END OF USER CODE
//Write to database who created these curves

sprintf(aString, "Updated by Normalize Array User Prog C++");
Save_OutCrv_Comments( aString );
free( aString );
}
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The same routine, written in VB follows.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Dim index, Ix, IY As Integer

Dim gain, shift, R, valMin, valMax As Single
' Enter user code here

' Find max and min values in array data
valMax = -0.0000001
valMin = 9999999999999.9
For index = Topdepth To BottomDepth
For IX = 1 To Array_InCrv_MaxX
For IY = 1 To Array_InCrv_MaxY
R = Array_InCrv(Index, Ix, Iy)
If (R < ValMin) And (R <> -999.0) Then
ValMin = R
End If
If (R > ValMax) And (R <> -999.0) Then

ValMax = R
End If
Next
Next
Next
' Calculate the gain and shift to normalize

gain = 1.0 / (Valmax - Valmin)
shift = -gain * Valmin

' Output new array with normalized values

For index = Topdepth To BottomDepth
For IX = 1 To Array_InCrv_MaxX
For IY = 1 To Array_InCrv_MaxY
R = Array_InCrv(Index, Ix, Iy) * Gain + shift
Save_array_OutCrv(Index, Ix, Iy, R)
Next
Next
Next
Save_OutCrv_Comments("Updated by Normalize Array User Prog")
End Sub
End Class
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The same routine, written in C# follows.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
using System;

{

{
int index, ix, iy;
Single gain, shift, R, valMin, valMax;
// Enter user code here

// Find max and min values in array data
valMax = -0.0000001f;
valMin = 9999999999999.9f;

{
for (ix = 1; ix <= Array_InCrv_MaxX; ix++)
{
for (iy = 1; iy <= Array_InCrv_MaxY; iy++)
{
R = Array_InCrv(index, ix, iy);
if ((R < valMin) && (R != -999.0))
{
valMin = R;
}
if ((R > valMax) && (R != -999.0))

{
valMax = R;
}
}
}
}

// Calculate the gain and shift to normalize

gain = (Single)1.0 / (valMax - valMin);
shift = -gain * valMin;
// Output new array with normalized values

{
for (ix = 1; ix <= Array_InCrv_MaxX; ix++)
{
for (iy = 1; iy <= Array_InCrv_MaxY; iy++)
{
R = Array_InCrv(index, ix, iy) * gain + shift;
Save_Array_OutCrv(index, ix, iy, R);
}
}
}
Save_OutCrv_Comments("Updated by Normalize Array User Prog");

}
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
The user runtime window looks like the following:

A curve listing of the input and output data shows that the input array has values between '-600'
and '1200'. The output 'normalized array' has values between '0' and '1'.


This example shows how to write a user program that can fill in the 'Manage Well Header Info'
fields.
Create a new user program - in this case it is called 'Testing'.
bold, blue colour.
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
c
c
c
functions.
+ 2.
c To use trend curves as input parameters the depth INDEX must also be
passed into the function.
c RW(INDEX), AA = RW(INDEX) + 2.
c
c Vclay = (GR(INDEX) - GRclean(INDEX)) / (GRclay(INDEX) - GRclean(INDEX))
defined
c as input parameters. GR is the input curve. If GRclean is enterd by the
use as a fixed value
c then the INDEX parameter in GRclean(INDEX) is ignored.
an input curve.
c
the
c
on the run window.
C
c
CHARACTER*(120) CountryAttName
CHARACTER*(120) StateAttName
CHARACTER*(120) DrillDepAttName
CHARACTER*(120) LogDepAttName
CHARACTER*(120) BitSizeAttName
CHARACTER*(120) Value

CountryAttName = 'Country' // CHAR(0)
StateAttName = 'State' // CHAR(0)
DrillDepAttName = 'DrillDep' // CHAR(0)
LogDepAttName = 'LogDep' // CHAR(0)
BitSizeAttName = 'BitSize' // CHAR(0)
Value = 'USA' // CHAR(0)
CALL Write_Well_Attribute(CountryAttName , Value)
Value = 'TX' // CHAR(0)
CALL Write_Well_Attribute(StateAttName, Value)
Value = '5640' // CHAR(0)
CALL Write_Log_Attribute(DrillDepAttName, Value, 3);
Value = '4500' // CHAR(0)
CALL Write_Log_Attribute(LogDepAttName, Value, FIRST_AVAILABLE_LOG_RUN);
Value = '6.7' // CHAR(0)
CALL Write_Log_Attribute(BitSizeAttName, Value, LAST_AVAILABLE_LOG_RUN);
100 CONTINUE
c
RETURN
c
END
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Once the program has been compiled run the 'Testing' user program and then open the 'Manage
Well Header Info' to check that the correct fields have been filled in. NOTE: the 'Bit Size' field has
been filled in for Run 25 as this is the last available log run. It hasn't been shown on the
screenshot below due to space constraints.


25.8 FORTRAN Guide

The following is a brief summary of the most common expressions and statements used in
Fortran.
In Fortran Code layout on the page is important. The following basic rules apply:
Comment lines start with the letter 'C' in column 1.

Line label numbers must be placed in columns 1-5.
Code Statements must be placed in columns 7-72
Any letter or number placed in column 6 indicates that this line is a continuation of the
previous lines. Multiple continuation lines are possible.
In the following examples "a" and "b" are real variables "I" and "j" are integer variables.
Mathematical expressions
Symbol Definition Example
= Equals (a = b)
+ Plus (a = b + 2.3)
- Minus (a = b 4.2)
* Multiply (a = b * 3.2)
/ Divide (a = b / 3.4)
** Exponent (a = b ** 2) (a = b2)
INT(b) Take the integer of "b" (I = INT(b))
ABS(b) Take the absolute value of "b" (a = ABS(b))
SQRT(b) Take the square root of "b" (a = SQRT(b))
EXP(b) Take the exponential of "b" (a = EXP(b)) (a = eb)
LOG(b) Take the natural log of "b" (a = LOG(b))
LOG10(b) Take the Common log of "b" (a = LOG10(b))
SIN(B) Take the Sine of "b", "b" is in radians (a = SIN(b))
COS(B) Take the Cosine of "b", "b" is in radians (a = COS(b))
TAN(B) Take the Tangent of "b", "b" is in radians (a = TAN(b))
ASIN(B) Take the Arcsine of "b", "b" is in radians (a = ASIN(b))
ACOS(B) Take the Arccosine of "b", "b" is in radians (a = ACOS(b))
ATAN(B) Take the Arctangent of "b", "b" is in radians (a = ATAN(b))
Logical expressions
Symbol Definition Example
.EQ. Equal IF (A .EQ. B)
.NE. Not Equal IF (A .NE. B)
.LT. Less than IF (A .LT. B)
.LE. Less than or equal to IF (A .LE. B)
.GT. Greater than IF (A .GT. B)
.GE. Greater than or equal to IF (A .GE. B)
.AND. Logical and IF (A .EQ. B .AND. I .EQ. J)
.OR. Logical or IF (A .EQ. B .or. I .EQ. J)
STATEMENTS
DO [Label] Index = Start, Stop [Step]
Where :
Section 25.8 User Programs : FORTRAN Guide

'Label' is the line reference number to end the 'DO' loop. This can be omitted and
an ENDDO statement used to end the DO loop.
'Index' is the variable that controls the loop.
'Start' is the initial value of the index.
'Stop' is the last value of the index.
'Step' is the step between each loop of the index. If left out the step defaults to 1.
Examples:
DO I = 1,3 or DO 100 I = 1,3
a=I+b a=I+b
ENDDO 100 CONTINUE
GOTO (Label)
Where :
'Label' is the line reference number that the program jumps to.
IF (Exp) Statement
Where :
'Exp' is a logical expression.
'Statement' is any executable statement.
Examples
IF (a .GT. b) res = 15.5
If a is greater than b, then set res to 15.5
IF (a .LT. b) GOTO 100

If a is less than b goto to line 100.
IF (a .EQ. b) THEN
Res = 15.5
ENDIF
If a equals b then execute the following lines until ENDIF is reached.
IF (Exp) THEN
Statements
ELSE
Statements
ENDIF
Where :
'Exp' is a logical expression.
'Statement' is any executable statement.
Example
IF (a .GT. b) THEN
res = 15.5
ELSE
Res = 20
ENDIF
If a is greater than b then res = 15.5 else res = 20


Section
26
Useful Links
26 Useful Links
The following internet links are provided to enable the user to access the main Wireline and LWD
Logging service company websites. The list also includes links to other web resources and
additional petrophysics technical websites.
Interactive Petrophysics :
Senergy Ltd. : http://www.senergyltd.com

Schlumberger Information Solutions (SIS) http://www.sis.slb.com
OpenSpirit : http://www.openspirit.com
Logging Service Companies:
Schlumberger : http://www.slb.com
Halliburton : http://www.halliburton.com
Baker Atlas : http://www.bakerhughes.com
Baker Hughes INTEQ : http://www.bakerhughes.com/inteq/
Pathfinder : http://www.pathfinderlwd.com/
Weatherford : http://www.weatherford.com
Sperry Sun : http://www.halliburton.com
Log Interpretation Charts:
Schlumberger : http://content.slb.com/Docs/connect/reference/Chartbook/
Baker Atlas : http://www.bakerhughesdirect.com (user login required)
Baker Hughes Inteq : http://www.bakerhughesdirect.com (user login required)
Halliburton : http://www.halliburton.com (user login required)
Pathfinder : http:///www.pathfinderlwd.com/downloads/dnsc_Enviornmental.pdf.com
Weatherford:
http://www.weatherford.com/weatherford/groups/public/documents/general/wft037399.pdf
Sperry Sun : http://www.halliburton.com (available 4Q 2004)
Petrophysics Technical Reference Sites:
Aberdeen Formation Evaluation Society (AFES) http://www.afes.org.uk

London Petrophysical Society (LPS) http://www.lps.org.uk
Society of Petrophysicists and Wireline Log Analysts (SPWLA) http://www.spwla.org
Society of Core Analysts http://www.scaweb.org/
Core Analysis Companies :
Core Laboratories : http://www.corelab.com/

Corex : http://www.corex.co.uk/
GIS Type Map data ('SHAPE' files and .DAT files):
Coastline Extractor : http://www.ngdc.noaa.gov/mgg_coastline/

Digital Energy Atlas and Library (DEAL) (UKCS Blocks / Licences / infrastructure) :
http://www.ukdeal.co.uk
CGM Viewer Software :
Section 26. Useful Links :

Senergy Useful Links 1641
Larson CGM Software : www.cgmlarson.com
Section 26. Useful Links :

1642 Interactive Petrophysics V3.5
Basic Log Analysis 806
Index Basic Log Analysis Functions 739

Batch LAS Load 223
Block Shift Curves 372
Build a Montage 699
-3- BVW Function of Height 1374
3D Crossplots 628 -C-

3D Parameter Viewer - 3D Parameter Display 664
3D Parameter Viewer - 3D View Definition 662 Calculate Permeabilities 739
3D Parameter Viewer - Parameter Selection 661 Calculation - Basic Log Functions 739
3D Parameter Viewer - Well Selection 659 Calculation - Curve from Zones / Parameters 766
3D Parameter Viewer Module 658 Calculation - Curve Integration 768
Calculation - Eastern European Resistivity
-A- Corrections 1384
Calculation - Environmental Corrections 771
Acoustic Image 428 Calculation - Multi-Line Formula 728
Acoustic Image Plotting 512 Calculation - Multi-Well Batch Operations 1427
Alphanumeric Crossplot Display 629 Calculation - Multi-Well Change Parameters 1436
Annotations - Adding To A Log Plot 523 Calculation - Multi-Well Parameter Distribution
Apache Server Installation 285 1414
Array Curve Data 40, 44 Calculation - RW From SP 751
Array Image Data - Array Data to Curves 426 Calculation - Temperature Gradient 750
Array Image Data - Convert Curves to Array Data Calculation - True Vertical / True Stratigraphic
424 Thickness 762
Array image Data - Create Acoustic Image 428 Calculation - True Vertical Depth 752
Array image Data - Create Electrical Image 430 Calculation - User Formula 722
Array image Data - Merge Images 439 Calculation and Correction 721
Array Image Data Processing 424 Capillary Pressure - Contact Angle 1314
Array Image Plotting 512 Capillary Pressure - Correction Parameters 1314
ASCII File Input 184 Capillary Pressure - Corrections to Pc Curves 1314
ASCII File Load 184 Capillary Pressure - Curves Set-Up 1314
ASCII Load - Creating Array Curves 190 Capillary Pressure - Data View / Edit 1314
ASCII Load Module 188 Capillary Pressure - Interfacial Tension 1314
ASCII Write 263 Capillary Pressure - Reservoir and Laboratory Fluid
Properties 1314
ASCII Write Module 263
Capillary Pressure - Reservoir and Laboratory Rock
Auto Save Module 59 Properties 1314
Auto Update of Analysis Modules 963 Capillary Pressure - Reservoir Property Defaults
Automatic Depth Shift 383 1314
Automatically Check For Updates 18 Capillary Pressure Data Loader 237
Capillary Pressure Functions 1313, 1337
-B- Capillary Pressure Model 1337
Capillary Pressure Model Type 1337
Baker Atlas Environmental Corrections 781 Capillary Pressure QC 1313
Baker Hughes Inteq Environmental Corrections Capillary Pressure Set-Up and Correction Module
788 1314
Barker and Wood Fracture Gradient Model 1272, Cased Hole - TDT Stand Alone 1004
1308
Cased Hole - TDT Time Lapse 1013
Baseline Shift 363
Index
Index 1643
Cased Hole Log Interpretation 1004 Create Integrated Sonic Curve 768
Change Interpretation Parameters in Multiple Wells Create Integrated Sonic Pip Curve 768
1436 Create New Curve 451
Change Plot Depth Range 109 Create New Well 79
Changing Font in DataBase Browser 459 Create Point Curve 413
Checking for IP Updates 18 Create Text Curves 230
Clay Volume 798, 816 Creating TVD Sets 141
Clay Volume - Clavier Method 834 Creating Well Lists 77
Clay Volume Equations and Methodology 834 Crossplot - 3D Crossplots 628
Clay Volume - Larionov Method 834 Crossplot - Color-Filled Cells 629
Clay Volume - Parameters 823 Crossplot - Creating Crossplot Areas 616
Clay Volume - Stieber Method 834 Crossplot - Creating Crossplot Overlay Lines 645
Clay Volume Interactive Plot 818 Crossplot - Creating Regression Lines 619
Clay Volume Module 816 Crossplot - Crossplot Options Tab 601
Clay Volume Parameters - Bad Hole Logic 823 Crossplot - Default Crossplot Formats 597
Clay Volume Parameters - Double Clay Indicators Crossplot - Expand Array Curves Option 595
823
Crossplot - Frequency Crossplot 595
Clay Volume Parameters - Link Clay Parameters
823 Crossplot - Frequency Crossplot Module 629
Clay Volume Parameters - Single Clay Indicators Crossplot - MultiWell Crossplot 595
823 Crossplot - Plotting Pressures 631
Close Well 85 Crossplot - Pressure Gradient Plots 631
Cluster Analysis 1163 Crossplot - User-Defined Line 626
Common Database Connection Tasks 297 Crossplot - Viewing Regression Line Equations
Connecting to External Databases 285 619
Convert Array Data to Curves 424 Crossplot Module 591
Convert Arrays to Curves 426 Crossplot Overlay Set Up 1444
Convert Curves to Array Data 424 Crossplot Overlay Set Up File 1450
Convert Curves to Arrays 425 Cumulative Curve Style 492
Convert surface oil and gas to downhole conditions Curve Alias Defaults 1448
739, 746 Curve Aliasing 1469
Copy Curves Between Wells 165 Curve and Set Names 718
Copy Curves From Well Module 165 Curve Average Module 417
Copy Curves Within a Well 165 Curve Edit 359
Copying any Set Type 136 Curve Filter Module 415
Copying Top Sets 150 Curve from Zones / Parameters Module 766
Core Depth Shift 372 Curve Headers 128
Create / Edit Lithology Curve Module 408 Curve Integration Module 768
Create / Edit Point Curve Module 413 Curve List Filtering 718
Create Acoustic Image 424 Curve Listing / Curve Edit Module 465, 703
Create Acoustic Image Module 428 Curve Management 119
Create Average Curve 417 Curve Management - Copy Curves From Well 165
Create Curve / Array Curve Module 404 Curve Management - Delete Curves 164
Create Curves From Parameters 766 Curve Management - Edit / List Multi-Well Sets 171
Create Curves From Zones 766 Curve Management - Manage Curve Headers 128
Create Electrical Image 424 Curve Management - Manage Curve Sets 121
Create Electrical Image Module 430 Curve Management - Manage Zones / Tops 136
Create Global Sets 1455 Curve Name Selection Using Curve Type 33
Create Integrated Hole Volume Curve 768 Curve Normalization in Histogram Module 581
Curve Rescale Module 419 Data Loading - LAS Batch Load 223
Curve Selection 32 Data Loading - LIS Load 206
Curve Selection by Type 135 Data Loading - Load Well Attributes 244
Curve Set Filtering 35 Data Loading - Load Zone Tops 228
Curve Sets - Database Interface 44 Data Loading - Picture Curves 229
Curve Sets - Manage Curve Sets 121 Data Loading - Real Time Data Loader 251
Curve Statistics 709, 714 Data Loading - Schlumberger Datalink2 Connector
Curve System Defaults 1444, 1446 251
Curve Type 130 Data Loading - Text Curves 230
Curve Type Defaults 1444, 1447 Data Loading - WITSML Data Loader 251
Curves Splice 398 Data Saving 262
Curves to Array Data Module 425 Data Saving - ASCII Write 263
Cutoff and Summation 798 Data Saving - DBase4 Write 279
Cutoff and Summation Module 918 Data Saving - LAS Write 267
Cutoff and Summation Reports 921 Data Saving - LIS Write 271
Cutoff and Summations Equations and Methodology Data Saving - Save Zone Tops 281
932 Data Viewing 458
Cutoff and Summations Interactive Plot 924 Database Browser 459
Cutoff and Summations Parameters 936 Database Interface 40
Cutoffs and Summation Multi-well 950 Database Security 62
DataLink2 Adapters 251
-D- DBase4 Load Module 221
DBase4 Write Module 279
Daines Fracture Gradient model 1282 Default Curve Units 1482
Data Editing 357 Default Log and Screen Units 1482
Data Editing - Create / Edit Lithology Curve 408 Default Units 1482
Data Editing - Create / Edit Point Curve 413 Delete Curves Module 164
Data Editing - Create Curve / Array Curve 404 Delete Parameter Sets 108
Data Editing - Curve Average 417 Delete Parameter Sets Module 354
Data Editing - Curve Filter 415 Delete Well from Database 87
Data Editing - Curve Rescale 419 Deleting Areas on a crossplot 616
Data Editing - Fill Data Gaps 421 Deleting Zone Sets 155
Data Editing - Interactive Baseline Shift 363 Density Corrections 773
Data Editing - Interactive Block Depth Shift 390 Density Estimation 1197
Data Editing - Interactive Curve Edit 359 Density Estimation Module 1202
Data Editing - Interactive Curve Splice 394 Depth Entry Boxes 34
Data Editing - Interactive Depth Shift 372 Depth Index 498
Data Editing - Interactive Trend / Square Curve Depth Sets 705
367 Depth Shift Curves 372
Data Editing - Splice Curves 398 Depth Shift Wizard 378
Data Gaps 421 Depth Ticks 498
Data Listing 465, 703 Derivatives 745
Data Loading 182 Dip Symbols 1460
Data Loading - ASCII Load Module 184 DirectX 21
Data Loading - DBase4 Load 221 DLIS File Input 219
Data Loading - DLIS Load 212 DLIS File Load 212
Data Loading - Interval Loader 231 DLIS Load Masks 212
Data Loading - LAS / LBS Load 194 Download IP Update Website 19
Index
Index 1645
Duplicate a Curve 165 Environmental Corrections 771, 772, 773, 775, 777
Environmental Corrections - Anadrill 786
-E- Environmental Corrections - Baker Atlas 781
Environmental Corrections - Baker Hughes Inteq
Eastern European Resisitivity Corrections 1385 788
Eastern European Resisitivity Corrections - Multiple Environmental Corrections - Halliburton 784
Lateral Curve Corrections 1389 Environmental Corrections - Schlumberger 778
Eastern European Resisitivity Corrections - Normal Environmental Corrections - Sperry Sun 790
Curve Corrections 1386 Environmental Corrections - Weatherford 792
Eastern European Resistivity Corrections Module Explore Database Folder 51
1384
Exponential Curve Fitting Function 1337
Eastern European Resistivity Log Correction - Theory
1393 External Database Connections 297
Eaton Fracture Gradient Model 1304 External Database Links 285
Eaton Pore Pressure Model 1275
Edit / Load Picture Curve Data Module 444
-F-
Edit / Load Text Curve Data Module 451
Edit Crossplot Overlay Set Up File 1450 Fading Parameter Screens 1528
Edit Curve 359 File - Auto Save 59
Edit Curve Alias Defaults 1448 File - Database Browser 459
Edit Curve Headers 128 File - Delete Well from Database 87
Edit Curve Sets 121 File - Explore Database Folder 51
Edit Default Lithology Module 1464 File - Load Wells from Database 76
Edit Dip Symbols Module 1460 File - New Database 46
Edit Global Sets Module 1455 File - Open Database 47
Edit Lithology Curve 408 File - Printer Setup 60
Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults 1449 File - Reset Current Well 88
Edit Monte Carlo Defaults 1450 File - Save All Wells to Database 57
Edit Multi-Well Curve Headers 176 File - Save Current Well to Database As 53, 84
Edit Multi-Well Sets 171 File - Set Default File Location 49
Edit Multi-Well Well Header Information 168 File - Well Map 691
Edit Neutron Tool Types Set Up File 1451 File Location 49
Edit Palettes Module 1461 Fill Data Gaps Module 421
Edit Picture Curve Data 444 Filter Curve 415
Edit Picture Curve Headers Module 443 Final Curves 131
Edit Point Curve 413 Finding IP Version Number 16
Edit Shading Types 1452 Fitting An External Log Sw Versus Height Function
1382
Edit Square Curve 367
Fluid Properties 1203
Edit Text Curve Headers Module 450
Fluid Substitution 1197
Edit Trend Curve 367
Fluid Substitution Equations and Methodology
Edit Well Header Info 89 1216
Edit Zone Colors Module 1458 Fluid Substitution Module 1203
Editing a Parameter Set 153 FORTRAN Guide 1636
Editing Curve Properties 128 Fracture Gradient 1272
Editing Tops in the Multi-Well Correlation Viewer Fracture Gradient Models 1303
675
Frequency Crossplot Menu 629
Editing Well Properties 90
Fuzzy Logic Equations and Methodology 1139
Electrical Image 430
Fuzzy Logic Module 1126
Electrical Image Plotting 512
Interval Loader - Creating Array Curves 231

-G- Interval Loader - Loading into Array Curves 231
Interval Loader Module 231
Gamma Ray Corrections 772 IP Database Compatibility 15
Gassmann Fluid and Matrix Properties 1207 IP Proprietary Security - Citrix Installations 1498
Generate Pip Curve 768 IP Proprietary Security - Database Links 1498
GEOLOG Database Interface 308 IP Proprietary Security - Install and Activate
Protection 1488
-H- IP Proprietary Security - Security Locked 1498
IP Proprietary Security - SysAdmin.ini 1498
Halliburton Environmental Corrections 784 IP Proprietary Security - Terminal Services 1498
Help Documentation 13 IP Proprietary Security - Transfer Protection 1492
Histogram - Cumulative Curve Set 563 IP Proprietary Security - Uninstall Protection 1492
Histogram Discriminator Sets 565 IP Proprietary Security - Update Protection Options
Histogram Module 558 1491
Histogram Options 566 IP Proprietary Security - View Protection Options
1495
Histogram Scales 559
IP Proprietary Security System 1486
Horizontal Log Plot 553
IP User Forum 15
How to save wells from one project to another project
55 Irregular Sets 121
HTTP Connection 285
Hyperbola Curve Fitting Function 1342
-L-
-I- Lambda Curve Fitting Function 1342
LAS / LBS Load Module 194
IDEAL Data Link 251 LAS Batch Load Module 223
Image Logs 400, 512 LAS Load - Mask Files 225
Import from GEOLOG Database 308 LAS Write Module 267
Importing Zones / Tops from External Spreadsheet LAS3 Load 201
139 Lateral Resistivity Log Corrections 1386
Increasing Point Size in Crossplots 595 LBS File Load 194
Integrate Curve Values 769 Leverett J Function Porosity Modifier 1341
Integrate Hole Volume 768 LIS Load Module 206
Integrate Sonic Curve 769 LIS Write Module 271
Interactive Baseline Shift Module 363 List Curve Headers 128
Interactive Block Depth Shift Module 390 List Curve Sets 121
Interactive Crossplots 609 List Multi-Well Sets 171
Interactive Curve Edit Module 359 Listing Core Analysis Array Data 708
Interactive Curve Splice Module 394 Lithology Curve 408
Interactive Depth Shift Module 372 Lithology Legend File 411
Interactive Dip Picking 400 Load Core Analysis Data as Arrays 404
Interactive Petrophysics - Automatically Check For Load Image Curves 229
Updates 19 Load Picture Curve Data 444
Interactive Trend / Square Curve Module 367 Load Well Attributes 244
Interpretation - Clay Volume 816 Load Well Cultural Data to IP 244
Interpretation - Cutoff and Summation 918 Load Wells from Database 76
Interpretation - Porosity and Water Saturation 838 Load Zone Tops 228
Interval Loader 231 Loading ASCII Data to Array Curves 190
Index
Index 1647
Loading ASCII files 184 Log Plot - Show Track Headers 489
Loading Curves from External Database Well 297 Log Plot - Track Border Width 489
Loading Multiple LAS Files 223 Log Plot - Track Names 485
Loading survey data into TVD calculator module Log Plot - Track Numbers 485
755 Log Plot - Variable Shading Options 503
Loading Tops From An External Database Well Log Plot - Waveform Plotting 509
299
Log Plot - Zones 496
Locking Zones 828
Log Plot Output - CGM File Output 535, 540
Log Environmental Corrections 771
Log Plot Output - Customising Log Plot Header
Log Environmental Corrections - Baker Atlas 781 545
Log Environmental Corrections - Baker Hughes Log Plot Output - Hide Track Scales 538
INTEQ 788
Log Plot Output - Plot Calibration 540
Log Environmental Corrections - Halliburton 784
Log Plot Output - Plot Comment With Well Name
Log Environmental Corrections - Schlumberger 539
778
Log Plot Output - Plot Footer 551
Log Environmental Corrections - Sperry Sun 790
Log Plot Output - Plot Header - Full 543
Log Environmental Corrections -
Weatherford/Reeves 792 Log Plot Output - Plot Header - Minimum 543
Log Plot - Annotations 523 Log Plot Output - Plot Header - None 542
Log Plot - Change Track Header Colour 489 Log Plot Output - Plot Header - Standard 543
Log Plot - Copy Depth Value to Clipboard 482 Log Plot Output - Plot Header Options 542
Log Plot - Copy Track 481 Log Plot Output - Plot Output to File 534
Log Plot - Cumulative Curve Style 492 Log Plot Output - Plot Output to Printer 533
Log Plot - Default Plot Depths 495 Log Plot Output - Plot Scales at Bottom of Log 538
Log Plot - Delete Track 481 Log Plot Output - Plot Shading Description in Header
538
Log Plot - Depth Grid Datum Curve 489
Log Plot Output - Plot Size 536
Log Plot - Depth Grid Line and Number Spacing
489 Log Plot Output - Plot Track Header Titles 538
Log Plot - Depth labels 474, 498, 501 Log Plot Output - Plotting Advanced Options 540
Log Plot - Depth Number Spacing 489, 501 Log Plot Output - Setting Multiple Depth Ranges for
Plotting 537
Log Plot - Depth Ticks 474, 498
Log Plot Output - Setting Plot Depth Range 537
Log Plot - Dip Image Plotting 522
Log Saturation Versus Height Relationships 1313
Log Plot - Duplicate Track 479
Log Sw As A Function of Height 1374
Log Plot - Edit Plot Depths 495
Log Sw Height Functions 1374
Log Plot - Edit Track Header 489
Log Sw Height Input Curves 1374
Log Plot - Expand Track 479
Log Plot - Fit to Plot Window 474
Log Plot - Generic Plot Format 475
-M-
Log Plot - Hide Track 479
Manage Curve Headers Module 128
Log Plot - Lock Plot 474
Manage Curve Sets Module 121
Log Plot - New Track 479
Manage Multi-Well Curve Headers Module 176
Log Plot - Numeric Curve Style 501
Manage Well Header Information 89
Log Plot - Paste Track 479
Manage Zone / Tops - Creating TVD Sets 141
Log Plot - Pictures 511
Manage Zone / Tops - Copying any Set type 147
Log Plot - Plot Formats 475
Manage Zone / Tops - Copying Top Sets 150
Log Plot - Plot Output 532
Manage Zone / Tops - Creating a New Zone 137
Log Plot - Plotting Images 512
Manage Zone / Tops - Deleting Zone / Tops 155
Log Plot - Plotting NMR Waveforms 509
Manage Zone / Tops - Edit Zones / Tops 151
Log Plot - Show / Hide Curves 485
Manage Zone / Tops - Multi-Well Zone / Tops 156
Manage Zones / Tops - Editing a Parameter Set Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Mineral Solver Tab
153 1104
Manage Zones / Tops - Setting Zone Colors 146 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Models Tab 1102
Manage Zones / Tops Module 136 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Output Tab 1110
Managing Block Depth Shifts 386 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Porosity Sw Tab 1104
Managing Interactive Depth Shifts 378 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Tornado Plot Tab 1119
Matthews and Kelly Fracture Gradient Model 1277 Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Xplot's Tab 1117
Max Version 1485 Monte Carlo Error Analysis 1020
Merge Images Module 439 Monte Carlo Error Analysis Module 1097
Merging IP databases 53, 84 Multi-Line Formula Comment Lines 728
Mineral Solver 1020 Multi-Line Formula Module 728
Mineral Solver - Equations and Methodology 1069 Multiple Linear Regression Module 1143
Mineral Solver - Interactive Crossplots 1057 Multi-Well Manage Well Headers 168
Mineral Solver - Invasion Factor 1069 Multi-Well Batch Operations 1427
Mineral Solver - Limit Equations 1069 Multi-Well Change Parameters Module 1436
Mineral Solver - Output Equations 1069 Multi-Well Correlation View 670
Mineral Solver Calibration 1061 Multi-Well Correlation Viewer Module 670
Mineral Solver Combined Model Results 1065 Multi-Well Curve Sets Module 171
Mineral Solver Conductivity from Resistivity Curve Multi-Well Curve Statistics Module 714
Conversion 1024 Multi-Well Cutoffs and Summation 950
Mineral Solver Dry Weight to Volume Percent Multi-Well Manage Curve Headers 176
Conversion 1024
Multi-Well Manage Multi-Well Headers 168
Mineral Solver Equations 1069
Multi-Well Options Menu 167
Mineral Solver Interactive Plot 1050
Multi-Well Parameter Distribution 1414
Mineral Solver Methodology 1069
Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults 1449
Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults 1449
-N-
Mineral Solver Mixings 1048
Neural Networks 1150
Mineral Solver Models 1024, 1060
Neutron Corrections 775
Mineral Solver Module 1022
Neutron Tool Type Set Up 1451
Mineral Solver Overview 1022
Neutron Tool Types Set Up / System Defaults
Mineral Solver Parameters 1028 1444
Mineral Solver Pre-Precessor 1024 New Database 46
Mineral Solver 'U' From Density and Pe Conversion New User Program 1549
1024
New User Program - Input Curves Tab 1550
Mineral Solver User Interface 1024
New User Program - Input Logic Flags Tab 1554
MinSolve Mineral Equation Defaults 1444
New User Program - Input Parameters Tab 1551
MinSolve Mineral System Defaults 1444
New User Program - Output Curves Tab 1550
Modifying Image Log Palettes 400, 515
New User Program - Plot Setup Tab 1557
Montage Builder Application 699
New User Program - Tabs Set Up Tab 1556
Monte Carlo Batch Module 1097, 1120
NMR Interpretation 1020
Monte Carlo Defaults 1444, 1450
NMR Interpretation - NMR Equations 995
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Clay Volume Tab 1104
NMR Interpretation - NMR Interactive Plot 991
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Cutoff Tab 1104
NMR Interpretation Module 968
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Dependencies Tab
Normal and Lateral Log Corrections 1386
1108
Normal Resisitvity Log Corrections 1389
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Histo's Tab 1116
Normalization 581
Monte Carlo Eror Analysis - Input Curves Tab 1108
Numeric Curve Display Options 501
Index
Index 1649
Plot Output to Printer 533

-O- Plot Range Editor 109
Plot Size 536
ODM Database Interface 326 Plotting a Lithology Legend 408
Open Database 47 Plotting Waveforms 509
Open Database Folder 51 Plotting Zone Tracks 496
OpenSpirit Interface 335 Point Curve 413
OpenWorks Database Interface 318 Pore and Fracture Gradient Calculations Module
Options - Irregular Set Depth Tolerances 1528 1272
Options - Log Attribute Mappings 1519 Pore Pressure - Density Estimation Module 1267
Options - Log Attributes 1516 Pore Pressure - Editing Normal Compaction Trend
(NCT) Lines 1293
Options - Tabbed Workareas 1528
Pore Pressure - Editing Shale Intervals 1295
Options - Well Attributes 1513
Pore Pressure - Overburden Gradient Calculation
Options - Well Attributes Mappings 1517
Module 1268
Output Device 60
Pore Pressure Calculations 1020, 1264
Overburden Gradient Calculation Module 1268
Pore Pressure Model Interactive Plot 1291
Overburden Gradient Curves - Creating 1311
Pore Pressure Module - Fracture Gradient Models
Overlays 645 1303
Pore Pressure Module - Fracture Gradient
-P- References 1311
Pore Pressure Module - Overburden Gradient Curves
Palettes Editing 1461 1311
Parameter Set - Saving to External File 346, 801 Pore Pressure Module - Pore Pressure References
1311
Parameter Set - Saving to IP Database 346, 801
Pore Pressure Module - Viewing Results 1297
Parameter Set Distribution 1414
Porosity & Height Function 1 1337, 1374
Parameter Set Management 344, 799
Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot 851
Parameter Set Types 344, 799
Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Lithology Track
Parameter Sets 343 858
PathFinder Environmental Corrections 794 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Matrix Track 857
PC Configuration for External Database Links 285 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Porosity Input
PC System Requirements 21 Track 854
PETCOM database 302 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Porosity Track
PGLWDLink Package 285 858
Pickett Plot 642 Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Salininty Track
855
Picking Dips 400
Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Water Saturation
Picture Curve 444
Track 858
Picture Curve Headers 443
Porosity and Sw Interactive Plot - Zone Track 852
Picture Curves 229, 442
Porosity and Sw Parameters 866
Picture Curves Module 229
Porosity and Water Saturation - Coal and Salt Logic
Picture Viewer 514 897
Plot Footer 551 Porosity and Water Saturation - Density Porosity
Plot Header - Full 543 Model 894
Plot Header - Minimum 543 Porosity and Water Saturation - Equations and
Plot Header - None 542 Methodology 894
Plot Header - Standard 543 Porosity and Water Saturation - Flushed Zone Sxo
Calculations 911
Plot Header Options 545
Porosity and Water Saturation - Hydrocarbon
Plot Header Remarks 548 Apparent Density 898
Plot Output to File 534
Porosity and Water Saturation - Hydrocarbon Read from / Write to GEOLOG DB 308
Hydrogen Index 898 Read from ODM Database 326
Porosity and Water Saturation - Neutron Density Read From OpenWorks Database 318
Porosity Model 898
Read/ Write to PETCOM Database Module 302
Porosity and Water Saturation - Neutron Porosity
Model 898 Real Time Data Link 251
Porosity and Water Saturation - Neutron Sonic Regression Equations - Saturation Height Module
Porosity Model 904 1378
Porosity and Water Saturation - Neutron Tool Lookup Regression Lines - Log Plots 619
Tables 900 Renaming Curves 128, 469
Porosity and Water Saturation - Pass Through Rescale Curves 419
Porosity Model 904 Reset Current Well 88
Porosity and Water Saturation - PHIFLAG Logic Resistivity Corrections 777
915
Resistivity Temperature Conversion 746
Porosity and Water Saturation - Porosity Limit Shaly
Result Set Name 36
Zones and Bad Hole 905
Rock Physics 1020, 1197
Porosity and Water Saturation - Porosity Limits / Bad
Hole Logic 905 Rock Physics - Density Estimation 1202
Porosity and Water Saturation - Sonic Porosity Model Rock Physics - Fluid Substitution 1203
902 Rock Physics - Shear Sonic QC / Create 1197
Porosity and Water Saturation - Total Porosity and Rock Quality Index Method - Saturation Height
Bound Water Saturation 906 Functions 1377
Porosity and Water Saturation - TPL Water Running Interpretation Modules in Batch Mode
Calculation 897 1427
Porosity and Water Saturation - U - Multi-Mineral Running User Formulae in Batch Mode 1427
Analysis 906 Running User Programs in Batch Mode 1427
Porosity and Water Saturation - Variable Clay Volume Russian Resistivity Log Corrections 1384
Logic 904
RW From SP Module 751
Porosity and Water Saturation - Variable
Hydrocarbon Density Logic 903
Porosity and Water Saturation - Variable 'm' 913
-S-
Porosity and Water Saturation - Variable Matrix
Density logic 903 Saturation Modelling Tools 1313
Porosity and Water Saturation - Water Saturation Saturation Versus Height Curves 1363
Equations 908 Save All Wells to Database 57
Porosity and Water Saturation Interpretation 798 Save ASCII data 263
Porosity and Water Saturation Module 838 Save Current Well to Database As 53, 84
Pressure Gradients 631 Save DBase4 Data 279
Principle Component Analysis 1189 Save LAS data 267
Print Parameter Set Module 353 Save LIS data 271
Printer Setup 60 Save Parameter Set to File Module 351
Printing Cutoff Results 928 Save Parameter Sets to External Disk Files 351
Printing Summation Results 928 Save Zone Tops Module 281
Probabilistic Log Analysis 1022 Saving Old Databases to New Versions IP 58
Program Update 18 Schlumberger Environmental Corrections 778
Pulsed Neutron Interpretation 1004 Schlumberger Support Portal 16
PuTTY Server Installation 285 Schlumberger Tool Box 219
Secure Shell Protocol 285
-R- Select Current Well 80
Select Text Curve 451
Random Functions 722, 728 Select Zone Depths 34
Read / Write Via OpenSpirit Module 335
Index
Index 1651
Selecting Areas in Crossplots 616

Selecting Curve List 32 -T-
Server Licences 1498
Set Default File Location 49 Tabbed Workareas 24, 1528
Set Default Units 1482 Tadpole Symbols on Log Plots 507
Set Dictionary 122 Take Notes 116
Set Manager Button 35 TDT Stand Alone Module 1004
Set Selection 34 TDT Time Lapse Module 1013
Setting Zone Colours 146 Temperature Gradient Module 750
Shading Types Module 1452 Text Curves 449
Shear Sonic QC 1197 Text Curves Module 230
Shear Sonic QC / Create Module 1197 Text Editor 116
Shift Baseline Operation 363 Time Lapse 1013
Sigma Calculation 748, 1004 Tool Bars 28
Simple Log Interpretation 806 Toolbars 719
Software Protection 1485 Tools 1443
Special Interpretation 1020 Tools - Curve Type Defaults 1447
Special Interpretation - Density Estimation 1197, Tools - Edit Crossplot Overlay Set Up File 1450
1202 Tools - Edit Curve Alias Defaults 1448
Special Interpretation - Fluid Substitution 1197, Tools - Edit Curve System Defaults 1446
1203
Tools - Edit Default Lithology 1464
Special Interpretation - Fuzzy Logic 1126
Tools - Edit Dip Symbols 1460
Special Interpretation - Fuzzy Logic Equations and
Tools - Edit Global Sets 1455
Methodology 1139
Tools - Edit Monte Carlo Defaults 1450
Special Interpretation - Mineral Solver 1022
Tools - Edit Neutron Tool Types Set Up File 1451
Special Interpretation - Monte Carlo Batch 1120
Tools - Edit Palettes 1461
Special Interpretation - Monte Carlo Error Analysis
1097 Tools - Edit Unit Conversions Defaults 1450
Special Interpretation - Multiple Linear Regression Tools - Edit Zone Colors 1458
1143 Tools - Mineral Solver Mineral Equation Defaults
Special Interpretation - NMR Interpretation 968 1449
Special Interpretation - Overburden Gradient Tools - Set Default Units 1482
Calculation 1267, 1268 Tools - Shading Types 1452
Special Interpretation - Pore and Fracture Gradient Tools - System Defaults 1444
Calculations 1272 Tools- Edit Mineral Solver Mineral System Defaults
Special Interpretation - Pore Pressure Calculations 1449
1264 Tops Sets 136
Special Interpretation - Rock Physics 1197 Trend Curves and Parameter Selection 36
Special Interpretation - Shear Sonic QC 1197 True Stratigraphic Thickness Calculation 762
Sperry Sun Environmental Corrections 790 True Vertical / True Stratigraphic Thickness Module
Splice Curves Module 398 762
SSH Connection 285 True Vertical Depth Module 752
Statistical Curve Prediction 1020, 1126 True Vertical Thickness Calculation 762
Summation 918 TVD Calculations 752
System Defaults 1444
System Requirements 21 -U-
Undo / Redo 568, 609, 822, 853, 927, 1050
Unit Conversion Defaults 1444
Unit Conversions Defaults 1450 Well Management - Plot Range Editor 109
Unix System Configuration 285 Well Management - Select Well to Display 80
Update History PDF file 18 Well Management - Take Notes 116
Upgrading Licences 1485 Well Map 691, 752
Useful Links - Internet Links 1640 Well Security 63
Useful links - References 1640 What's New in IP 7
User Define Log Plot Header 545, 699 Window Menu Items 37
User Formula Module 722 WITSML Data Link 251
User Forum 15 Working Set 35
User Program Code 1563 Write to GEOLOG Database 308
User Program Module - New User Program 1549 Write to ODM Database 326
User Programs Module 1544 Write to PETCOM Database 302
User Programs Module - FORTRAN Guide 1636 Write Via OpenSpirit 335
User Programs Options 1546
User-Defined Formula 722 -Z-
User-Defined Line in Crossplot Module 626
Zone Colors 1458
-V- Zone Track Display Options 496
Zones Sets 136
Variable Density Log Plotting 505
VDL Shading 505
View - 3D Parameter Viewer 658
View - Crossplots 591
View - Curve and Set Names 718
View - Curve Listing / Curve Edit 703
View - Curve Statistics 709
View - Histogram 558
View - Log Plot 474
View - Multi-Well Correlation Viewer 670
View - Multi-Well Curve Statistics 714
View - Toolbars 719
View Core Photographs 442
View Graphics Files 442
-W-
Warranty 5
Weatherford Environmental Corrections 792
Web Client Connection 285
Well Depths Editor 126
Well Header Information 89
Well Lists 77
Well Management 74
Well Management - Close Well 85
Well Management - Create New Well 79
Well Management - Delete Parameter Sets 108
Well Management - Manage Well Header Information
89
Index

IP Help Manual V35

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

IP Help Manual V35

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

Interactive Petrophysics

Interactive Petrophysics V3.5

DISCLAIMER REGARDING THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE INTERACTIVE

YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IS AT

ANY LIABILITY OF THE SELLER OR ITS AGENTS OR RESELLERS WILL BE LIMITED

Section 2 Disclaimer of Warranty 5

Section 3 What's New in IP Version 3.5 7

Section 4 Getting Help and Program

Section 5 PC System Requirements 21

Section 6 User Interface and Data Entry 24

Section 7 Database Interface 40

Section 8 Database Security 62

Section 9 Well Management 74

Section 10 Curve Management 119

Section 11 Data Loading 182

Section 12 Data Saving 262

Section 13 Connecting to External Databases 285

Section 14 Parameter Sets 343

Section 15 Data Editing 357

Section 16 Array Image Data 424

Section 17 Picture / Core Photo Data 442

Section 18 Text Curves 449

Section 19 Data Viewing 458

Section 20 Calculation and Correction 721

Section 21 Interpretation 798

Section 22 Advanced Interpretation 1020

Section 23 Multi-Well 1413

Section 24 Tools 1443

Section 25 User Programs 1544

Section 26 Useful Links 1640

YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF THIS SOFTWARE IS AT

ANY LIABILITY OF THE SELLER OR ITS AGENTS OR RESELLERS WILL BE LIMITED

Section 2. Disclaimer of Warranty :

3 What's New in IP Version 3.5

New Modules / Functionality

Principal Component Analysis

Corporate Search Paths

Section 3. What's New in IP Version 3.5 :

Manage Log Curve Header

Manage Multi-Well Header Info.

Section 3. What's New in IP Version 3.5 :

WindowsTM based GEOLOG is now supported.

Porosity and Water Saturation

Cutoff and Summation

Section 3. What's New in IP Version 3.5 :

Parameter zone locking.

Multi-Well Parameter Set Distribution

Multi-Well Batch Operation

Multi-Well Change Parameters

Capillary Pressure Saturation Height

Interactive Block Depth Shift

Section 3. What's New in IP Version 3.5 :

TDT Standalone Sw Analysis

Basic Log Analysis

Real-Time Data Loader

Section 3. What's New in IP Version 3.5 :

4 Getting Help and Program Updates

Section 4. Getting Help and Program Updates :

The 'Install Toolbox' button will install the Schlumberger Toolbox.

Section 4. Getting Help and Program Updates :

Section 4. Getting Help and Program Updates :

Section 4. Getting Help and Program Updates :

Section 4. Getting Help and Program Updates :

1. An automated routine which runs an executable, GetIPUpdate.exe, can run to see if an